Today's Hours: 8:00am - 6:00pm

Books

all 911 "N" titles
  • Print
    taʾlīf Jūrj Būst.
    Summary: Lists and classifies the plants of Syria, Palestine, and Egypt.

    Contents:
    al-Mujallad
    1. Wa-huwa yataḍammanu tisʻan wa-arbaʻīn rutbah min al-Shaqīqīyah ilā al-Kūrnīyah.
    Print
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
  • Digital
    Romero-Gomez, Manuel.
    Summary: This book provides a comprehensive overview of the diagnosis and management of Non-alcoholic Fatty Liver Disease (NAFLD) and Non-Alcoholic Steatohepatis (NASH). Basic principles of disease progression, the genetic and nutritional basis of NAFLD and NASH are explained along with the proteomic principles underlying biomarker development. Chapters cover both biochemical and imaging biomarkers used in elastrography and ultrasound and discuss how these are applicable to early diagnosis and monitoring of NASH and NAFLD. This is a useful resource for hepatologists, primary care providers with an interest in metabolic disease, diabetologists and endocrinologists in their daily clinical practice.
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    Bianca Maria Piraccini.
    Summary: "This book is designed to meet the need for a concise, easy-to-read text on how to approach and manage patients with nail diseases. The book opens with a description of nail anatomy and physiology, followed by a review of nail symptoms, divided according to the part of the nail apparatus involved. Non-invasive and invasive tools for the diagnosis of nail disorders are then described and insights provided into their appropriate use. Subsequent chapters review the various nail diseases, covering inflammatory, infective, environmentally and auto- induced, drug-induced and neoplastic conditions as well as disorders due to systemic diseases. An additional chapter addresses nail conditions commonly seen in toenails. Informative high-quality illustrations are included for each disorder and boxes helpfully summarize the most important features, clues to diagnosis, necessary examinations, and treatments. Nail Disorders: A Practical Guide to Diagnosis and Management will be an invaluable, ready source of information for students in dermatology, clinical practitioners and podiatrists."--Publisher's website.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    Dimitris Rigopoulos, Antonella Tosti, editors.
    Summary: Nail psoriasis is very common and causes considerable morbidity to patients. With the aid of informative illustrations, this book presents the clinical signs suggestive of nail psoriasis and describes the differential diagnosis of nail abnormalities. Newer methods of diagnosis are considered, and advice is provided on the use of severity evaluation indexes. The available treatments are extensively discussed, with information on the latest options. Selection of the appropriate treatment may be a challenge, so guidance is provided on all factors that should be taken into consideration and on choice of treatment for special categories of patient, such as children and pregnant women. Contributors have been selected from across the world, offering an international perspective on the condition. Nail Psoriasis will be an invaluable up-to-date source of information for dermatologists and will also be of interest to rheumatologists and general practitioners, given that recognition of nail signs can lead to earlier diagnosis of arthropathic disease.

    Contents:
    Epidemiology of Nail Psoriasis
    Genetics
    Pathology
    Comorbidities of Nail Psoriasis: From A to Z
    Arthritis
    The Clinical Features of Nail Psoriasis
    Ultrasound Imaging of Psoriatic Nails
    Dermoscopy of Nail Psoriasis
    Severity Evaluation Indexes
    Quality of Life
    Differential Diagnosis for Nail Psoriasis
    Onychomycosis and Psoriasis
    Treatment of Nail Psoriasis
    Nail Psoriasis in Special Populations: Children, Pregnant, Elderly
    How to Choose My Treatment
    What Is the Future?
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    Zhypargul Abdullaeva.
    Summary: A comprehensive introduction to nano- and biomaterials shining light on the different research disciplines from various perspectives. The straightforward and well-structured concept is designed to cater for entrants as well as experienced researchers in the field of nanotechnology. The initial chapters introduce nanomaterials, their classification and synthesis techniques, while subsequent chapters discuss the various characterization tools as well as mechanical properties and their applications in biotechnological and biomedical fields. Further understanding of the topic is supported by case studies used for practical purposes. The book concludes with a look at future technology advances. With its explanation of a wide variety of materials, this is an essential reference for chemists, physicists, materials scientists and biomedical engineers.

    Contents:
    Introduction into Nano- and Biomaterials
    Classification of Nanomaterials
    Nanocomposite Materials and Their Physical Property Features
    Mechanical Characteristics of Dispersive Systems
    Physical Properties of Nanomaterials: Graphene
    Chemical Properties and Mechanical Characteristics of Nanomaterial Characterization Tools in Nanotechnology
    Introduction to Biomaterials
    Properties of Biomaterials
    Implants and Artificial Organs
    Tissue Engineering, Scaffolds, and 3D Bioprinting.
    Digital Access Wiley 2017
  • Print
    edited by Lajos P. Balogh.
    Summary: This book is the second in a series presenting articles that received the most citations in recent years in nanomedicine. The series is edited by, a prominent nanotechnology researcher and editor-in-chief of Precision Nanomedicine. The theme of the second volume is about nano-enabled medical applications. The 19 articles collected here have already acquired more than 12,500 citations highlighting the importance and professional recognition of the work of these scientists in nanomedicine. The content includes the general overview of the field and a wide variety of applications that have been impossible without nanoscience and nanotechnology.
    Digital Access TandFonline 2020
  • Digital
    Sumera Javad, editor.
    Summary: In this age of population explosion and depleting natural resources, this book offers new techniques to produce more from agricultural crops at a lower cost. The field of agronomy addresses this issue and interacts with the fields of agriculture, botany, and economics. Nanotechnology and nanoparticles play a role in agronomy. This book joins techniques from both fields into once comprehensive volume. Students of agriculture, physics, nanotechnology, and plant sciences will benefit equally from this work.

    Contents:
    Intro
    Preface
    Contents
    About the Editor
    Chapter 1: Nanotechnology: A Breakthrough in Agronomy
    1.1 Introduction
    1.2 What Is Nanotechnology?
    1.3 Classification of Nanomaterials
    1.3.1 One-Dimensional Nanoparticles
    1.3.2 Two-Dimension Nanoparticles
    1.3.3 Three-Dimension Nanoparticles
    1.4 Synthesis of Nanomaterials
    1.4.1 Top to Bottom Approach
    1.4.2 Bottom to Up Approach
    1.4.2.1 Chemical Synthesis
    1.4.2.2 Biological Synthesis
    Nanoparticle Synthesis Using Microorganisms
    Green Synthesis 1.5 Overview of Nano-technological Applications in Agriculture
    1.5.1 Crop Production and Growth
    1.5.1.1 Seed Production
    1.5.1.2 Seed Germination
    1.5.1.3 Nanofertilizer
    1.5.2 Crop Disease Management
    1.5.2.1 Nanopestiside
    1.5.2.2 Nanofungicide
    1.5.2.3 Nanoherbicide
    1.5.2.4 Nanofibers
    1.5.3 Nanoparticles in Post-harvest Disease Management
    1.5.4 Nanoscale Carriers
    1.5.5 Nanosensors
    1.5.6 Sustainable Water Use
    1.5.7 Removal of Heavy Metals
    1.5.8 Hydroponics
    1.5.9 Nanoparticles in Plant Tissue Culture
    1.6 Conclusion
    References 4.2.3 Take-All of Wheat
    4.2.4 Downy Mildews
    4.2.5 Leaf Spot and Blight Diseases
    4.2.6 Grey Mold Disease
    4.2.7 Rusts
    4.2.8 Smuts
    4.2.9 Anthracnose
    4.3 Role of Fungi in Nanoparticles Synthesis
    4.3.1 Mechanisms Behind Myconanoparticles Synthesis
    4.3.2 Fungi a Renewable Source for Nanoparticles Synthesis
    4.4 Myconanoparticles Application in Management of Fungal Diseases
    4.4.1 Nanoparticles as a Suppresser for Pests (Nanopesticides)
    4.4.2 Myconanoparticles Mechanism of Action Against Fungal Pathogens
    4.5 Future Prospective
    References Chapter 2: Nanotechnology and Plant Tissue Culture
    2.1 Introduction
    2.2 Plant Tissue Culture
    2.2.1 Nanoparticles in Tissue Culture
    2.2.2 Nanomaterials and Surface Sterilization of Explants
    2.2.3 Role of Nanoparticles in Callogenesis, Organ Induction, Shoot and Root Growth
    2.2.4 Effect of Nanomaterials on Genetic Transformation
    2.2.5 In Vitro Conservation
    2.2.6 Nanomaterials May Lead to Somaclonal Differences
    2.2.7 Nanomaterials Cause Enhancement of Secondary Metabolites
    2.3 Are Nanoparticles Toxic in Plant Tissue Culture?
    2.4 Future Projections
    2.5 Conclusion
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    edited by Challa Vijaya Kumar.
    Contents:
    Encapsulating proteins in nanoparticles: batch by batch or one by one
    Enzyme adsorption on nanoparticle surface probed by highly sensitive second harmonic light scattering
    Armoring enzymes by metal-organic frameworks by the coprecipitation method
    Enzyme armoring by an organosilica layer: synthesis and characterization of hybrid organic/inorganic nanobiocatalysts
    Strategies for biophysical characterization of protein-polymer conjugates
    Guide to the preparation of molecularly imprinted polymer nanoparticles for protein recognition by solid-phase synthesis
    Armored urease: enzyme-bioconjugated poly(acrylamide) hydrogel as a storage and sensing platform
    Armored enzyme-nanohybrids and their catalytic function under challenging conditions
    Approaches for conjugating tailor-made polymers to proteins
    Nanoarmoring of enzymes by polymer-functionalized iron oxide nanoparticles
    Expression of cellulytic enzyme as a fusion protein that reacts specifically with a polymeric scaffold
    Nanoarmoring of proteins by conjugation to block copolymer micelles
    Semisynthetic enzymes by protein-peptide site-directed covalent conjugation: methods and applications
    Transgultaminase-mediated nanoarmoring of enzymes by PEGylation
    Polymer-based protein engineering: synthesis and characterization of armored, high graft density polymer-protein conjugates
    Nano-armoring of enzymes: rational design of polymer-wrapped enzymes
    Nanoarmored enzymes for organic enzymology: synthesis and characterization of poly(2-alkyloxazoline)-enzyme conjugates
    Preparation and applications of dendronized polymer-enzyme conjugates
    Nanoarmoring of enzymes by interlocking in cellulose fibers with poly(acrylic acid)
    Author index
    Subject Index.
    Digital Access ScienceDirect 2017
  • Digital
    edited by Challa V. Kumar.
    Contents:
    Magneto-controlled enzyme reactions / Paolo Bollella and Evgeny Katz
    Functionalization of multiwalled carbon nanotubes for enzyme immobilization / Ram Sarup Singh and Kanika Chauhan
    Immobilization of enzymes on iron oxide magnetic nanoparticles : synthesis, characterization, kinetics and thermodynamics / Abhijeet B. Muley, Ketan H. Mulchandani, and Rekha S. Singhal
    Strategies to rationalize enzyme immobilization procedures / Diego E. Sastre, Eduardo A. Reis, and Caterina G.C. Marques Netto
    Fibrous polymer functionalized magnetic biocatalysts for improved performance / Veli C. Ozalp, Gulay Bayramoglu, and M. Yakup Arica
    Improvement in biochemical characteristics of cross-linked enzyme aggregates (CLEAs) with magnetic nanoparticles as support matrix / Nithyakalyani Doraiswamy, Mahalakshmi Sarathi, and Gautam Pennathur
    Magnetic bead-based semi-automated phage display panning strategy for the directed evolution of antibodies / Angela Chiew Wen Ch'ng, Zoltán Konthur, and Theam Soon Lim
    On-bead enzyme-catalyzed signal amplification for the high-sensitive detection of disease biomarkers / Wenjiao Fan, Wei Ren, Liping Zhu, and Chenghui Liu
    Organophosphonate functionalized Au/Si@Fe₃O₄ : versatile carrier for enzyme immobilization / Sunaina Kaul, Vishal Singh, Rajat Sandhir, and Nitin Kumar Singhal
    Bioelectrocatalysis at carbon nanotubes / Paolo Bollella and Evgeny Katz
    Molecular wiring of glucose oxidase enzyme with Mn polypyridine complex on MWCNT modified electrode surface and its bio-electrocatalytic oxidation and glucose sensing / Natarajan Saravanan and Annamalai Senthil Kumar
    Use of functionalized carbon nanotubes for the development of robust nanobiocatalysts / Michaela Patila, Nikolaos Chalmpes, Evangelia Dounousi, Haralambos Stamatis, and Dimitrios Gournis
    Biocatalytic hydrogenations on carbon supports / Lisa A. Thompson, Jack S. Rowbotham, Holly A. Reeve, Ceren Zor, Nicole Grobert, and Kylie A. Vincent
    Nano-immobilized cellulases for biomass processing with application in biofuel production / Reinu E. Abraham and Munish Puri
    Few biomedical applications of carbon nanotubes / Neelam Yadav, Manshi Tyagi, Shikha Wadhwa, Ashish Mathur, and Jagriti Narang
    Multiwalled carbon nanotubes bound beta-galactosidase : it's activity, stability and reusability / Maryam Khan and Qayyum Husain
    Exfoliated and water dispersible biocarbon nanotubes for enzymology applications / Ankarao Kalluri, Megan K. Puglia, Mansi Malhotra, and Challa V. Kumar
    Stabilization of phytase on multi-walled carbon nanotubes via covalent immobilization / Mohammad Pooya Naghshbandi and Hamid Moghimi
    A simple magnetic nanoparticle-poly-enzyme nanobead sandwich assay for direct, ultrasensitive DNA detection / Lorico D.S. Lapitan, Jr. and Dejian Zhou
    Enzymes immobilization onto magnetic nanoparticles to improve industrial and environmental applications / Osama M. Darwesh, Sameh S. Ali, Ibrahim A. Matter, Tamer Elsamahy, and Yehia A. Mahmoud.
    Digital Access ScienceDirect 2020
  • Digital
    edited by Pranjal Chandra, Rajiv Prakash.
    Summary: This book comprehensively documents the application of Nanobiomaterials in the field of bio-medicine and diagnostics technologies by involving classical concepts/examples. Nanobiotechnology is an emerging area which encompasses all the facets of research of nano and biomaterials with their interaction with biological systems. The book summarises design and development of various nanobiomaterials and their composites for diagnostics and therapeutic applications. It skilfully reviews the utilization of the nanomaterials alone or in combination with other bio-molecules as a contrast enhancer in in-vivo imaging, Nano-Theranostics, drug delivery, and sensing transducer matrix. It also discusses the current research on designing of the new Nanobiomaterials and their implementation in numerous fields including bio-medicine and diagnostics. Finally, it summarizes the future prospects and the commercial viability of Nanobiomaterials in the human health care.

    Contents:
    Chapter 1. Nanomaterials, classifications, and properties
    Chapter 2. Engineering nanomaterials for bio-interfacing
    Chapter 3. Biomaterials and surface modification strategies
    Chapter 4. Nano materials as a nanotheronostic agent
    Chapter 5. Nanobiomaterials in biomedicine: Designing strategies and critical concepts
    Chapter 6. Phytofabricated nanodelivery systems: Engineering principles and applications
    Chapter 7. Nanobiosensors based diagnostics system: Transducers and surface materials
    Chapter 8. Nanobiomaterials and nanocomposites in clinical diagnostics
    Chapter 9. Tissue Engineering and Regenerative Medicines based on nanobiomaterials
    Chapter 10. Prospects and advantages of microfluidics utilizing various nanobiomaterials
    Chapter 11. Electrochemical nanoengineered sensors in infectious disease diagnosis
    Chapter 12. Multiplexing utilizing various nanobiomaterials
    Chapter 13. Future perspects of nanobiomaterials in human health care
    Chapter 14. Commercial aspects of nanobiomaterials: Short-coming and future aspects.
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    edited by XiuMei Wang, Murugan Ramalingam, Xiangdong Kong, and Lingyun Zhao.
    Summary: Written by an international team of editors and contributors from renowned universities and institutes, this book addresses the latest research in the field of nanobiomaterials, covering nanotechnologies for their fabrication, developments in biomedical applications, and the challenges of biosafety in clinic uses. Clearly structured, the volume defines the scope and classification of the field, resulting in a broad overview from fundamental principles to current technological advances, and from materials synthesis to biomedical applications along with future trends.

    Contents:
    Introduction. Nanobiomaterials: State of the Art / Jing Wang, Huihua Li, Lingling Tian, Seeram Ramakrishna
    Classification of Nanobiomaterials. Metallic Nanobiomaterials / Magesh Sankar, Vasanth Gopal, Revathi Alexander, Geetha Manivasagam, Murugan Ramalingam
    Polymeric Nanobiomaterials / Deepti Rana, Keerthana Ramasamy, Samad Ahadian, Geetha Manivasagam, Xiumei Wang, Murugan Ramalingam
    Carbon-Based Nanobiomaterials / Samad Ahadian, Farhad Batmanghelich, Raquel Obregón, Deepti Rana, Javier Ramón-Azcón, Ramin Banan Sadeghian, Murugan Ramalingam
    Nanotechnology-Based Approaches in Biomaterials Fabrications. Molecular Self-Assembly for Nanobiomaterial Fabrication / Ling Zhu, Yanlian Yang, Chen Wang
    Electrospraying and Electrospinning for Nanobiomaterial Fabrication / Liumin He, Yuyuan Zhao, Lingling Tian, Seeram Ramakrishna
    Layer-by-Layer Technique: From Capsule Assembly to Application in Biological Domains / Xi Chen
    Nanopatterning Techniques / Lakshmi Priya Manickam, Akshay Bhatt, Deepti Rana, Serge Ostrovidov, Renu Pasricha, Xiumei Wang, Murugan Ramalingam
    Surface Modification of Metallic Implants with Nanotubular Arrays via Electrochemical Anodization / Ming Jin, Shenglian Yao, Luning Wang
    Nanobiomaterials in Biomedical Applications: Diagnosis, Imaging, and Therapy. Nonconventional Biosensors Based on Nanomembrane Materials / Lan Yin, Xing Sheng
    Nanobiomaterials for Molecular Imaging / Prashant Chandrasekharan, Chang-Tong Yang
    Engineering Nanobiomaterials for Improved Tissue Regeneration / Liping Xie, Wei Qian, Jianjun Sun, Bo Zou
    Nanobiomaterials for Cancer Therapy / Wei Tao, Lin Mei
    Chemical Synthesis and Biomedical Applications of Iron Oxide Nanoparticles / Jing Yu, Yanmin Ju, Fan Chen, Shenglei Che, Lingyun Zhao, Fugeng Sheng, Yanglong Hou
    Gold Nanoparticles and Their Bioapplications / Heyun Shen, Li Cheng, Linlin Li, Huiyu Liu
    Silicon-Based Nanoparticles for Drug Delivery / Yixuan Yu, Xi Liu
    Dendritic-Polymer-Based Nanomaterials for Cancer Diagnosis and Therapy / Na Zhu, Qiyong Gong, Zhongwei Gu, Kui Luo
    Biosafety and Clinical Translation of Nanobiomaterials. Biosafety of Carbon-Based Nanoparticles and Nanocomposites / Yong Cheol Shin, Jong Ho Lee, In-Seop Lee, Dong-Wook Han
    Clinical Translation and Safety Regulation of Nanobiomaterials / Ruibo Zhao, Lawrence Keen, Xiangdong Kong.
    Digital Access Wiley 2018
  • Digital
    Shailendra K. Saxena, S.M. Paul Khurana, editors.
    Summary: This book provides a comprehensive overview of the recent trends in various Nanotechnology-based therapeutics and challenges associated with its development. Nanobiotechnology is an interdisciplinary research that has wide applications in the various fields of biomedical research. The book discusses the various facets of the application of Nanotechnology in drug delivery, clinical diagnostics, Nanomedicine and treatment of infectious and chronic diseases. The book also highlights the recent advancements on important devices and applications that are based on Nanotechnology in medicine and brief the regulatory and ethical issues related to nanomedical devices. It also reviews the toxicological profile of various nanomaterials and emphasizes the need for safe nanomaterials for clinical use. Finally, the book discusses the recent developments of potential commercial applications of Nanotechnology.

    Contents:
    Chapter 1. Current Advances in Nanotechnology and Medicine
    Chapter 2. Least Explored Small Wonders: Nano-biotechnology
    Chapter 3. Modern Approaches in Nanomedicine for neuroAIDS and CNS drug delivery
    Chapter 4. Nanobiotechnology: Paving the way to personalized medicine
    Chapter 5. Nanomedicine in cancer stem cell therapy
    Chapter 6. Nanobiosensor: Current Trends and Applications
    Chapter 7. Transition Metal Oxide Nanoparticles: A New Horizon in Cancer Treatment
    Chapter 8. Nanomedicine meets microRNA expression and function in prostate cancer
    Chapter 9. Biomedical applications of Viral Nanoparticles in vaccine therapy
    Chapter 10. HIV: Biology to Nanomedicine
    Chapter 11. Current Advances in Phage Inspired Nanocarriers Based Therapy
    Chapter 12. Nanophytotherapeutic potential of Essential Oils against Candida infections
    Chapter 13. Molecular tests for the Diagnosis of Tuberculosis: Nanodiagnostics Approaches
    Chapter 14. Molecular Mechanisms of drug resistance in Mycobacterium tuberculosis: Role of nanoparticles against Multi-Drug Resistant tuberculosis (MDR-TB)
    Chapter 15. Nano-Mass spectrometry (nano-MS) based lipidomics
    Chapter 16. Techniques to understand Mycobacterial Lipids and use of Lipid Based Nanoformulations for Tuberculosis Management
    Chapter 17. Recent trends and challenges in Patches for cardiac tissue reengineering: role of Nanomaterials
    Chapter 18. Cyclic dinucleotides: Big roles of small molecules and its role in nanotechnology and medicine
    Chapter 19. Antibodies: Biology to Therapeutics and its role in nanomedicine
    Chapter 20. Nanotoxicology in Medicine
    Chapter 21. Antibody-targeted nanoparticles for cancer treatment
    Chapter 22. Nanoparticle mediated combined photothermal and photodynamic therapy
    Chapter 23. Nanotechnology based devices and its applications in medicine- Chapter 24. Opportunities in clinical translation and commercialization of nanomedicine.
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    Manashjit Gogoi, Sanjukta Patra, Debasree Kundu, editors.
    Summary: This book examines the role of nanobiosensors in point-of-care applications for personalized healthcare and management. It begins by discussing various biomaterials that are used for the development of biosensors in medical diagnostics, and reviews advances in their fabrication and the miniaturization of biosensor devices for lab-on-chip analysis. In turn, it explores the rapidly evolving applications of nanomaterials in the context of biomaterial diagnostics. The book also explores the immense potential of biosensors in medical diagnostics, where they are increasingly being used to detect a wide range of biomolecules and biomarkers. In closing, it discusses the current challenges and outlines the future role of nanobiosensors in the development of next-generation point-of-care applications.

    Contents:
    Chapter 1. Point of Care biosensors for healthcare applications
    Chapter 2. An overview of biomolecules used in the development of point of care sensor
    Chapter 3. Nanomaterials for POC biosensors
    Chapter 4. New generation molecular techniques in POC biosensors for detection of infectious diseases
    Chapter 5. Point-of-Care Biosensors for Glucose Sensing
    Chapter 6. Overview of Affordable Upfront Point-of-Care Testing for Cancer Detection
    Chapter 7. Point-of-care Diagnostic Testing in Urgent Cardiac Care
    Chapter 8. Point-of-Care Nanobiosensors for Determining Vitamin Deficiency
    Chapter 9. Utility of Nanobiosensors as a Point of Care Diagnostics for Neurological Disorders: From Bench to Bedside
    Chapter 10. Point-of-Care Testing and Diagnostics for Sexually Transmitted Disease
    Chapter 11. Nano-Biosensor Based Microfluidic Point-Of-Care Platforms: Fabrication, Characterization, And Applications
    Chapter 12. Nanobiosensor: Advancement in Disease Diagnostic.
    Digital Access Springer 2022
  • Digital
    edited by Christof M. Niemeyer and Chad A. Mirkin.
    Contents:
    [v. 1]. Concepts, applications, and perspectives
    1 . Biocompatible inorganic devices / Thomas Sawitowski
    2. Microfluidics meets nano : lab-on-a-chip devices and their potential for nanobiotechnology / Holger Bartos, Friedrich Götz, and Ralf-Peter Peters
    3. Microcontact printing of proteins / Emmanuel Delamarche
    4. Cell-nanostructure interactions / Joachim P. Spatz
    5. Defined networks of neuronal cells in vitro / Andreas Offenhäusser and Angela K. Vogt
    6. S-Layers / Uwe B. Sleytr ... [et al.]
    7. Engineered nanopores / Hagan Bayley ... [et al.]
    8. Genetic approaches to programmed assembly / Stanley Brown
    9. Microbial nanoparticle production / Murali Sastry ... [et al.]
    10. Magnetosomes : nanoscale magnetic iron minerals in bacteria / Richard B. Frankel and Dennis A. Bazylinski
    11. Bacteriorhodopsin and its potential in technical applications / Norbert Hampp and Dieter Oesterhelt
    12. Polymer Nanocontainers / Alexandra Graff ... [et al.]
    13. Biomolecular motors operating in engineered environments / Stefan Diez, Jonne H. Helenius, and Jonathon Howard
    14. Nanoparticle-biomaterial hybrid systems for bioelectronic devices and circuitry / Eugenii Katz and Itamar Willner
    15. DNA-protein nanostructures / Christof M. Neimeyer
    16. DNA-templated electronics / Erez Braun and Uri Sivan
    17. Biomimetic fabrication of DNA-based metallic nanowires and networks / Michael Mertig and Wolfgang Pompe
    18. Mineralization in nanostructured biocompartments : biomimetic ferritins for high-density data storage / Eric L. Mayes and Stephen Mann
    19. DNA-gold nanoparticle conjugates / C. Shad Thaxton and Chad A. Mirkin
    20. DNA nanostructures for mechanics and computing : nonlinear thinking with life's central molecule / Nadrian C. Seeman
    21. Nanoparticles as non-viral transfection agents / M.N.V. Ravi Kumar, Udo Bakowsky, and Claus-Michael Lehr
    22. Luminescent quantum dots for biological labeling / Xiaohu Gao and Shuming Nie
    23. Nanoparticle molecular labels / James F. Hainfeld, Richard D. Powell, and Gerhard W. Hacker
    24. Surface biology : analysis of biomolecular structure by atomic force microscopy and molecular pulling / Emin Oroudjev, Signe Danielsen and Helen G. Hansma
    25. Force spectroscopy / Markus Seitz
    26. Biofunctionalized nanoparticles for surface-enhanced raman scattering and surface plasmon resonance / Mahnaz El-Kouedi and Christine D. Keating
    27. Bioconjugated silica nanoparticles for bioanalytical applications / Timothy J. Drake, Xiaojun Julia Zhao, and Weihong Tan.
    v. 2. More concepts and applications
    Part I. Self-Assembly and Nanoparticles: Novel Principles
    ch. 1. Self-Assembled Artificial Transmembrane Ion Channels / Mary S. Gin, Emily G. Schmidt and Pinaki Talukdar, p. 1-15
    ch. 2. Self-Assembling Nanostructures from Coiled-Coil Peptides / Maxim G. Ryadnov and Derek N. Woolfson, p. 17-38
    ch. 3. Synthesis and Assembly of Nanoparticles and Nanostructures Using Bio-Derived Templates / Erik Dujardin and Stephen Mann, p. 39-63
    ch. 4. Proteins and Nanoparticles: Covalent and Noncovalent Conjugates / Rochelle R. Arvizo, Mrinmoy De and Vincent M. Rotello, p. 65-78
    ch. 5. Self-Assembling DNA Nanostructures for Patterned Molecular Assembly / Thomas H. LaBean, Kurt V. Gothelf and John H. Reif, p. 79-97
    ch. 6. Biocatalytic Growth of Nanoparticles for Sensors and Circuitry / Ronan Baron, Bilha Willner and Itamar Willner, p. 99-121
    Part II. Nanostructures for Analytics
    ch. 7. Nanoparticles for Electrochemical Bioassays / Joseph Wang, p. 123-140
    ch. 8. Luminescent Semiconductor Quantum Dots in Biology / Thomas Pons, Aaron R. Clapp, Igor L. Medintz and Hedi Mattoussi, p. 141-157
    ch. 9. Nanoscale Localized Surface Plasmon Resonance Biosensors / Katherine A. Willets, W. Paige Hall, Leif J. Sherry, Xiaoyu Zhang, Jing Zhao and Richard P. Van Duyne, p. 159-173
    ch. 10. Cantilever Array Sensors for Bioanalysis and Diagnostics / Hans Peter Lang, Martin Hegner and Christoph Gerber, p. 175-195
    ch. 11. Shear-Force-Controlled Scanning Ion Conductance Microscopy / Tilman E. Schäffer, Boris Anczykowski, Matthias Böcker and Harald Fuchs, p. 197-212
    ch. 12. Label-Free Nanowire and Nanotube Biomolecular Sensors for In-Vitro Diagnosis of Cancer and other Diseases / James R. Heath, p. 213-232
    ch. 13. Bionanoarrays / Rafael A. Vega, Khalid Salaita, Joseph J. Kakkassery and Chad A. Mirkin, p. 233-259
    Part III. Nanostructures for Medicinal Applications --. ch. 14. Biological Barriers to Nanocarrier-Mediated Delivery of Therapeutic and Imaging Agents, p. 261-284 / Rudy Juliano
    ch. 15. Organic Nanoparticles: Adapting Emerging Techniques from the Electronics Industry for the Generation of Shape-Specific, Functionalized Carriers for Applications in Nanomedicine / Larken E. Euliss, Julie A. DuPont and Joseph M. DeSimone, p. 285-303
    ch. 16. Poly(amidoamine Dendrimer-Based Multifunctional Nanoparticles / Thommey P. Thomas, Rameshwer Shukla, Istvan J. Majoros, Andrzej Myc and James R. Baker, p. 305-319
    ch. 17. Nanoparticle Contrast Agents for Molecular Magnetic Resonance Imaging / Young-Wook Jun, Jae-Hyun Lee and Jinwoo Cheon, p. 321-346
    ch. 18. Micro- and Nanoscale Control of Cellular Environment for Tissue Engineering / Ali Khademhosseini, Yibo Ling, Jeffrey M. Karp and Robert Langer, p. 347-364
    ch. 19. Diagnostic and Therapeutic Targeted Perfluorocarbon Nanoparticles / Patrick M. Winter, Shelton D. Caruthers, Gregory M. Lanza and Samuel A. Wickline, p. 365-380
    Part IV. Nanomotors
    ch. 20. Biological Nanomotors / Manfred Schliwa, p. 381-399
    ch. 21. Biologically Inspired Hybrid Nanodevices / David Wendell, Eric Dy, Jordan Patti and Carlo D. Montemagno, p. 401-418.
    Digital Access
    Provider
    Version
  • Digital
    Kamel A. Abd-Elsalam, Ram Prasad, editors.
    Summary: Nanobiotechnology Applications in Plant Protection: Volume 2 continues the important and timely discussion of nanotechnology applications in plant protection and pathology, filling a gap in the literature for nano applications in crop protection. Nanobiopesticides and nanobioformulations are examined in detail and presented as powerful alternatives for eco-friendly management of plant pathogens and nematodes. Leading scholars discuss the applications of nanobiomaterials as antimicrobials, plant growth enhancers and plant nutrition management, as well as nanodiagnostic tools in phytopathology and magnetic and supramagnetic nanostructure applications for plant protection. This second volume includes exciting new content on the roles of biologically synthesized nanoparticles in seed germination and zinc-based nanostructures in protecting against toxigenic fungi. Also included is new research in phytotoxicity, nano-scale fertilizers and nanomaterial applications in nematology and discussions on Botyris grey mold and nanobiocontrol. This book also explores the potential effects on the environment, ecosystems and consumers and addresses the implications of intellectual property for nanobiopesticides. Further discussed are nanotoxicity effects on the plant ecosystem and nano-applications for the detection, degradation and removal of pesticides.

    Contents:
    Intro; Preface; Contents; Contributors; About the Editors;
    Chapter 1: Intellectual Property Rights in Nano-biopesticides; 1.1 Nano-biopesticides-An Overview; 1.2 Intellectual Property Rights-Where Does IPR Meet Nano-biopesticides; 1.3 Introduction to IPR Tools (WIPO and WTO); 1.4 Patenting Trends in Nano-biopesticides; 1.5 Mitigating Potential Risks; 1.6 Conclusion; References;
    Chapter 2: Application of Nanomaterials in Plant Disease Diagnosis and Management; 2.1 Introduction; 2.2 Application of Nanomaterials in the Detection and Diagnosis of Plant Diseases 2.3 Application of Nanoparticles and Nanomaterials in Plant Disease Management2.3.1 Effect of Nanoparticles on Plant Pathogenic Fungi; 2.3.1.1 Silver Nanoparticles; 2.3.1.2 Zinc Nanoparticles; 2.3.1.3 Sulfur Nanoparticles; 2.3.1.4 Copper Nanoparticles; 2.3.2 Effect of Nanoparticles on Bacteria; 2.3.2.1 Silver Nanoparticles; 2.3.2.2 Zinc Nanoparticles; 2.3.2.3 Copper Nanoparticles; 2.3.2.4 Other Nanoparticles; 2.4 Conclusion; References;
    Chapter 3: Bio-Engineered Nanomaterials for Plant Growth Promotion and Protection; 3.1 Introduction; 3.1.1 Nano-Biotechnology; 3.1.2 Nano-Nutrition 3.2 Green Nanoparticles for Plant Growth Promotion and Protection3.2.1 Effect of Nano-carbon on Plant Growth Promotion and Protection; 3.2.1.1 Effect of Fullerene; 3.2.1.2 Effects of Single-Walled Carbon Nanotubes (SWCNTs) and Multiwalled Carbon Nanotubes (MWCNTS); 3.3 Metal Nanoparticles; 3.3.1 Cu and CuO Nanoparticles; 3.3.2 ZnO Nanoparticles; 3.3.3 TiO2 Nanoparticles; 3.3.4 Silver Nanoparticles; 3.3.5 CeO2 Nanoparticles; 3.3.6 SiO2 Nanoparticles; 3.3.7 Gold Nanoparticles; 3.3.8 Iron Oxide Nanoparticles; 3.4 Conclusions; References
    Chapter 4: Zinc-Based Nanostructures in Plant Protection Applications4.1 Introduction; 4.2 Applications; 4.2.1 Pesticides; 4.2.2 Insecticides; 4.2.3 Postharvest Applications; 4.2.4 Zinc-Based Nanomaterials Against Plant Pathogens; 4.2.5 Positive Effects of Zn NPs on Plant Growth; 4.2.6 Negative Effects of Zn NPs on Plant Growth; 4.2.7 Fertilizers; 4.2.8 Pesticide Nanosensing and Photocatalytic Degradation; 4.2.9 Effect of ZnO NPs on Soil Microbial Activity; 4.3 Microbial Mechanism; 4.4 Phytotoxicity; 4.5 Conclusion; References
    Chapter 5: Botrytis Gray Mold Nano- or Biocontrol: Present Status and Future Prospects5.1 Introduction; 5.2 Synthetic Fungicides; 5.2.1 Prospects Concerning Synthetic Fungicide Application; 5.2.2 Fungicide Resistance; 5.3 Nanofungicides; 5.3.1 Potential Implications of Nanofungicides; 5.4 Biofungicides; 5.4.1 Application of Biopolymers as Biofungicides; 5.4.2 Essential Oils as Potential Biofungicides; 5.4.3 Plant Extracts; 5.4.4 Biocontrol Agents; 5.4.4.1 Trichoderma Species; 5.4.4.2 Bacillus Species; 5.4.4.3 Yeasts as Potential Antagonists; 5.4.4.4 Phytochemicals and Antioxidants
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    Khalid Rehman Hakeem, Tanveer Bilal Pirzadah, editors.
    Summary: Agriculture is considered as a backbone of developing nations as it caters the needs of the people, directly or indirectly. The global agriculture currently faces enormous challenges like land degradation and reduced soil fertility, shrinking of land, low production yield, water accessibility and a dearth of labor due to evacuation of individuals from farming. Besides, the global population increases at an exponential rate and it is predicted that the global population will be 9 billion by 2050 that in turn leads to food crisis in near future. Although, green revolution revolutionizes the agriculture sector by enhancing the yield but it was not considered as a sustainable approach. Exorbitant use of chemical fertilizers and pesticides to boost the crop yield is definitely not a convenient approach for agriculture sustainability in the light of the fact that these chemical fertilizers are considered as double-edged sword, which on one hand enhance the crop yield but at the same time possess deleterious effect on the soil microflora and thus declines its fertility. Besides, it cause irreversible damage to the soil texture and disrupts the equilibrium in the food chain across ecosystem, which might in turn lead to genetic mutations in future generations of consumers. Thus, the increased dependence on fabricated agricultural additives during and post green revolution has generated serious issues pertaining to sustainability, environmental impact and health hazards. Therefore, nano-biotechnology has emerged as a promising tool to tackle the above problems especially in the agriculture sector. Nano-agribusiness is an emerged field to enhance crop yield, rejuvenate soil health, provide precision farming and stimulate plant growth. Nano-biotechnology is an essential tool in modern agriculture and is considered as a primary economic driver in near future. It is evaluated that joining of cutting edge nanotechnology in agribusiness would push the worldwide monetary development to approximately US$ 3.4 trillion by 2020 which clearly indicates that how agri-nanobiotechnology plays a pivotal role in the agricultural sector, without any negative impact on the environment and other regulatory issues of biosafety. Agri-nanobiotechnology is an innovative green technology, which provides the solution to global food security, sustainability and climate change. The current book is presenting the role of nano-biotechnology in modern agriculture and how it plays a pivotal role to boost the agri-business.

    Contents:
    Intro
    Foreword
    Preface
    Contents
    About the Editors
    Nanotechnology: An Overview
    1 Introduction
    2 Categorization of Nano-agrochemicals
    2.1 Nano-fertilizers
    Nano-composite Polymers
    2.2 Nano-biosensors
    2.3 Nano-clays
    2.4 Nano-pesticides
    Formulations Aiming to Increase the Solubility of Poorly Water-Soluble Compounds
    3 Formulations Aimed for Controlled/Targeted Release and/or Protect Active Ingredients Against Premature Degradation
    3.1 Polymer-Based Formulations
    3.2 Porous Hollow Silica Nanoparticles
    3.3 Nano-metals 13 Conclusions
    References
    Nano-enabled Agriculture Can Sustain "Farm to Fork" Chain
    1 Introduction
    2 Disease Management Through Nanotechnology
    2.1 Nanobarcodes
    2.2 Nanosensors
    3 Enhanced Food Safety Through Sensors for the Detection of Pathogens or Freshness
    3.1 Freshness and Spoilage Indicators
    4 Nanotechnology in Enhancing Soil Security
    5 Important Nanoparticles in the Agro-Industry
    5.1 Chitosan Nanoparticles (CNP)
    5.2 TiO2 Nanoparticles
    5.3 Multi-Walled Carbon Nanotubes (MWCNTs) Nanoparticles
    5.4 Silicon Nanoparticles
    5.5 Zinc Oxide Nanoparticles 4 Nano-agrochemicals Versus Conventional Agrochemicals
    4.1 Solubility and Dispersion of Mineral Micro-nutrients
    4.2 Nutrient Uptake Efficiency
    4.3 Controlled Release Modes
    4.4 Effective Duration of Nutrient Release
    4.5 Loss Rate of Fertilizer Nutrients
    5 Conclusion and Future Perspective
    References
    Nanotechnology: A Boost for the Urgently Needed Second Green Revolution in Indian Agriculture
    1 Introduction
    2 Applications of Nanotechnology and Nanomaterials in Agriculture and Food Sector
    3 Nanotechnology and Agriculture Sector 4 Smart Delivery Systems for Pests, Nutrients, and Plant Hormones
    5 Nano-formulations for the Control of Plant Diseases
    5.1 Nanotechnology for Detecting Plant Diseases
    6 Plant Pathogens in Biosynthesis of Nanoparticles
    6.1 Fungi
    6.2 Bacteria
    6.3 Plant Virus
    7 Amalgamation of Nanotechnology and Crop Biotechnology
    8 Nanoparticles and Recycling Agricultural Waste
    9 Nanotechnology in Food Sector
    10 Risk Assessment of Nanomaterials in Agriculture and Food Sector
    11 Socio-Economic Issues of Agricultural Nanotechnology
    12 Current and Future Developments 6 Plant Induced Resistance Through Nanoparticles
    7 Engineered Water Nanostructures to Treat Food Surfaces to Reduce Pathogen Presence
    8 Therapeutic Nanoparticles Deliver Nutrients to Agricultural Crops Against Various Deficiencies
    9 Genetic Material Delivery via Nanoparticle-Mediated Chloroplast Transgene Delivery
    10 Conclusion and Perspective
    References
    Role of Nanotechnology in Crop Improvement
    1 Introduction
    2 Agro-Nanotechnology and Crop Improvement
    3 Role of Nanotechnology for Enhancement of Plant Biomass and Yield Production
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    Ram Prasad, Vivek Kumar, Manoj Kumar, Devendra Choudhary, editors.
    Summary: With the recent shift of chemical fertilizers and pesticides to organic agriculture, the employment of microbes that perform significant beneficial functions for plants has been highlighted. This book presents timely discussion and coverage on the use of microbial formulations, which range from powdered or charcoal-based to solution and secondary metabolite-based bioformulations. Bioformulation development of biofertilizers and biopesticides coupled with the advantages of nanobiotechnology propose significant applications in the agricultural section including nanobiosensors, nanoherbicides, and smart transport systems for the regulated release of agrochemical. Moreover, the formulation of secondary metabolites against individual phytopathogens could be used irrespective of geographical positions with higher disease incidences. The prospective advantages and uses of nanobiotechnology generate tremendous interest, as it could augment production of agricultural produce while being cost-effective both energetically and economically. This bioformulation approach is incomparable to existing technology, as the bioformulation would explicitly target the particular pathogen without harming the natural microbiome of the ecosystem. Nanobiotechnology in Bioformulations covers the constraints associated with large-scale development and commercialization of bioinoculant formations. Furthermore, exclusive emphasis is be placed on next-generation efficient bioinoculants having secondary metabolite formulations with longer shelf life and advanced competence against several phytopathogens. Valuable chapters deal with bioformulation strategies that use divergent groups of the microbiome and include detailed diagrammatic and pictorial representation. This book will be highly beneficial for both experts and novices in the fields of microbial bioformulation, nanotechnology, and nano-microbiotechnology. It discusses the prevailing status and applications available for microbial researchers and scientists, agronomists, students, environmentalists, agriculturists, and agribusiness professionals, as well as to anyone devoted to sustaining the ecosystem.

    Contents:
    Preface
    1. Application of novel bio-formulation of microbes for biocontrol agent
    2. Nano analysis of drugs and agrochemicals in environmental samples
    3. Stimuli responsive nanoparticles for drug delivery applications
    4. Green synthesis approaches of nanoagroparticles
    5. Herbonanoceutical: Novel beginning in drug discovery and therapeutics
    6. Functionalization of nanoparticles as microbial control
    7. Recent developments on antimicrobial nanocomposites for improving indoor air quality
    8. An insight into nano-biofertilizers for sustainable agriculture
    9. Nanotechnology: A successful approach to improve nutraceutical bioavailability
    10. Nano-based pesticides: challenges for pest Management
    11. Application of Nanotechnology in Plant Protection by Phytopathogens: Present and future prospects
    12. Nanotechnology in Nutraceuticals Delivery and Bioavailability
    13. Metallic nanoparticles and nanoformulations: as nanofungicides for sustainable disease management in plants
    14. Interaction of microorganisms with nanomaterials as a basis for creating high-efficiency biotechnological preparations
    15. Bio-based Nanoemulsion Formulations Applicable in Agriculture, Medicine, and Food Protection
    Index.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    Mahendra Rai, Alka Yadav, editors.
    Summary: This book focuses on neurodegenerative diseases which have become a major threat to human health. Neurodegenerative diseases are age related disorders and have become increasingly prevalent in the elderly population in recent years. Hence, there is an urgent need to study and develop new strategies and alternative methods for the treatment of neurodegenerative diseases. This book showcases the promises that nanobiotechnology brings in research, diagnosis, and treatment of neurodegenerative diseases. It is very beneficial for varied group of readers including nanotechnologists, biotechnologists, pharmacists, medical professionals, bioengineers, biochemists and researchers working in this field. Nanobiotechnology in Neurodegenerative Diseases include various chapters including neurodegeneration and neurodegenerative diseases, nanotechnology for the rescue of neurodegenerative diseases, promising potential of nanomaterials for diagnosis and therapy of neurodegenerative diseases, nanotechnology mediated nose-to-brain drug delivery, and formulation and characterization of intranasal nanoparticles of antiretroviral drugs.

    Contents:
    Neurodegenerative Diseases: The Real Problem and Nanobiotechnological Solutions
    Nanotechnology at the Rescue of Neurodegenerative Diseases: Tools for Early Diagnostic
    The Role of Nanomedicine in treatment for Neurodegenerative disorders
    Nanobiotechnology in Neurodegenerative Diseases
    Application of Mycogenic Nanoparticles against Neurodegenerative diseases
    Nanotechnology-mediated nose to brain drug delivery for neurodegenerative disorders
    Nanobiotechnology in Parkinson's disease
    Selenium nanoparticles as therapeutic agents in Neurodegenerative diseases
    Role of Supermagnetic nanoparticles in Alzheimer, s disease
    Nanomedicines for improved antiretroviral therapy in Neuro-AIDS
    Nanocarrier mediated drug delivery systems for neurodegenerative diseases
    Gold nanoparticles in diagnosis and treatment of Alzheimer's disease
    Nano-Lipidic Carriers as Potential Drug Delivery Vehicles in Alzheimer's Disease
    Curcumin and its nanoformulations as therapeutic for Alzheimer's disease
    Nanopharmaceuticals for the Improved Treatment of Cerebral Stroke.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    Sumera Javad, Ayesha Butt, editors.
    Summary: This work synthesizes research and practical work, including various techniques and applications of botany and nanoparticles, including enzymology, pharmaceuticals, phenolics, antioxidants, metal particles, synthesis of nanoparticles by plants and microbes, and more. The text discusses the latest research as well as key sources of information condensed from other scholars across the globe, providing a comprehensive resource for scholars working in nanobotany, as well as chemists and researchers in the pharmaceutical industry.

    Contents:
    Intro; Dedication; Preface; Contents; List of Figures; List of Plates; List of Tables;
    Chapter 1: Plants and Nanoworld: an Introduction; 1.1 Introduction; 1.2 Plant Metabolites; 1.3 Classes and Number of Secondary Metabolites; 1.4 Terpenoids; 1.4.1 Mono and Sesqui-terpenoids, and Phenylpropanoids; 1.4.2 Diterpenoids; 1.4.3 Functions; 1.4.4 Plant Families Rich in Terpenoids; 1.5 Alkaloids; 1.5.1 Families Rich in Alkaloids; 1.6 Phenolic Compounds; 1.6.1 Flavonoids; 1.6.2 Flavones; 1.6.2.1 Flavan-3-ols; 1.6.2.2 Isoflavones; 1.6.2.3 Plant Families Rich in Phenolic Compounds; 1.7 Tannins. 1.7.1 Plant Families Rich in Tannins1.8 Glycosides; 1.8.1 Categories of Glycosides; 1.8.2 Families Rich in Glycosides; 1.9 Conclusion; References;
    Chapter 2: Advanced Concept of Green Synthesis of Metallic Nanoparticles by Reducing Phytochemicals; 2.1 Introduction; 2.2 Role of Phytochemicals in Nanoparticles Synthesis; 2.3 Nanoparticles Synthesis from Plant Parts and Whole Plant; 2.4 Reproducibility of Nanoparticles; 2.5 Nanoparticles Synthesis from Phytochemicals/Plant Metabolites; 2.5.1 Nanoparticles Synthesis from Terpenoids; 2.5.2 Nanoparticles Synthesis from Flavonoids. 2.5.3 Nanoparticles Synthesis from Sugars2.5.4 Nanoparticles Synthesis from Proteins; 2.6 Mechanism of Metallic Nanoparticles Synthesis; 2.7 Potential Plants (Phytochemicals) for Synthesis of Nanoparticles; 2.8 Conclusion; 2.9 Future Prospects; References;
    Chapter 3: Classification of Green Nanoparticles; 3.1 Introduction; 3.2 Green Nanotechnology; 3.3 Plants and Green Nanotechnology; 3.4 Green Nanoparticles; 3.5 Nanoparticles Composition; 3.6 Basic Approaches for Nanoparticles Synthesis; 3.7 Methods for the Green Synthesis of Nanoparticles; 3.7.1 Chemical Synthesis of Nanoparticles. 3.8 Types of Nanoparticles3.9 Benefits of Green Synthesis Over the Chemical Synthesis; 3.10 Gold Nanoparticles; 3.11 Silver Nanoparticles; 3.12 Copper Nanoparticles; 3.13 Iron Nanoparticles; 3.14 Palladium Nanoparticles; 3.15 Platinum Nanoparticles; 3.16 Selenium Nanoparticles; 3.17 Titanium Nanoparticles; 3.18 Zinc Oxide Nanoparticles; 3.19 Applications of Green Nanoparticles; 3.20 Conclusion; References;
    Chapter 4: Nanofibers and Nanowires; 4.1 Fundamentals of Nanomaterials; 4.2 Introduction to Nano Fibers and Nanowires; 4.3 One-Dimensional Nanomaterials; 4.4 Types of Nanowires. 4.5 Properties of Nanofibers and Nanowires4.5.1 Mechanical Properties; 4.5.2 Optical Properties; 4.5.3 Electrical Properties; 4.6 Nano Fibers and Nanowires Synthesis Techniques; 4.6.1 Template Based Growth; 4.6.2 Phase Separation; 4.6.3 Self-Assembly; 4.6.4 Electrospinning; 4.6.5 Template-Free (Interfacial Polymerization); 4.6.6 Vapor-Liquid-Solid (VLS) Growth; 4.6.7 Hydrothermal Synthesis; 4.6.8 Sol-Gel Synthesis; 4.7 Applications of Nanofibers; 4.7.1 Carbon Nanotubes; 4.7.2 Difference in Carbon Nanotubes and Nanofibers; 4.7.3 Biological and Chemical Application of Nanofibers/Wires.
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Digital
    edited by Sabine Szunerits, Rabah Boukherroub, Alison Downard, Jun-Jie Zhu.
    Contents:
    1. Electroanalysis with carbon film-based electrodes
    2. Carbon nanofibers for electroanalysis
    3. Carbon nanomaterials for neuroanalytical chemistry
    4. Carbon and graphene dots for electrochemical sensing
    5. Electroanalytical applications of graphene
    6. Graphene/gold nanoparticles for electrochemical sensing
    7. Recent advances in electrochemical biosensors based on Fullerene-C60 nano-structured platforms
    8. Micro- and nano-structured diamond in electrochemistry: fabrication and application
    9. Electroanalysis with C₃N₄ and SiC nanostructures.
    Digital Access Wiley 2017
  • Digital
    edited by Mohamad Jawaid and Faruq Mohammad.
    Summary: This first book on nanocellulose and nanohydrogels for biomedical applications is unique in discussing recent advancements in the field, resulting in a comprehensive, well-structured overview of nanocellulose and nanohydrogel materials based nanocomposites. The book covers different types of nanocellulose materials and their recent developments in the drug delivery and nanomedicine sector, along with synthesis, characterization, as well as applications in the biotechnological and biomedical fields. The book also covers the current status and future perspectives of bacterial cellulose and polyester hydrogel matrices, their preparation, characterization, and tissue engineering applications of water soluble hydrogel matrices obtained from biodegradable sources. In addition, the chitosan-based hydrogel and nanogel matrices, their involvement in the current biofabrication technologies, and influencing factors towards the biomedical sector of biosensors, biopharmaceuticals, tissue engineering appliances, implant materials, diagnostic probes and surgical aids are very well documented. Further, the history of cellulose-based and conducting polymer-based nanohydrogels, their classification, synthesis methods and applicability to different sectors, the challenges associated with their use, recent advances on the inhibitors of apoptosis proteins are also included. The recent developments and applications in the drug delivery sector gives an overview of facts about the nanofibrillated cellulose and copoly(amino acid) hydrogel matrices in the biotechnology and biomedicine field. This book serves as an essential reference for researchers and academics in chemistry, pharmacy, microbiology, materials science and biomedical engineering.

    Contents:
    Application of Nanocellulose for Controlled Drug Delivery / Lalduhsanga Pachuau
    Bacterial Cellulose and Polyester Hydrogel Matrices in Biotechnology and Biomedicine: Current Status and Future Prospects / Rajnikant Borkar, Sanghratna S Waghmare, Tanvir Arfin
    Bacterial Nanocellulose Applications for Tissue Engineering / Muhammed Lamin Sanyang, Naheed Saba, Mohammad Jawaid, Faruq Mohammad, Mohd Sapuan Salit
    Cellulose-Based Nanohydrogels for Tissue Engineering Applications / Kalyani Prusty, Sarat K Swain
    Chitosan-Mediated Layer-by-Layer Assembling Approach for the Fabrication of Biomedical Probes and Advancement of Nanomedicine / Faruq Mohammad, Hamad A Al-Lohedan
    Hydrogels Based on Nanocellulose and Chitosan: Preparation, Characterization, and Properties / Meriem Fardioui, Abou Qaiss, Rachid Bouhfid
    Cellulose Nanocrystals and PEO/PET Hydrogel Material in Biotechnology and Biomedicine: Current Status and Future Prospects / Shoeb Athar, Rani Bushra, Tanvir Arfin
    Conducting Polymer Hydrogels: Synthesis, Properties, and Applications for Biosensors / Yu Zhao
    Nanocellulose and Nanogels as Modern Drug Delivery Systems / Misu Moscovici1, Cristina Hlevca2, Angela Casarica1, Ramona-Daniela Pavaloiu2
    Recent Advances on Inhibitors of Apoptosis Proteins (IAP) Particularly with Reference to Patents / Riyaz Syed, Prema L Mallipeddi, Syed Mohammed Ali Hussaini, Rahul V Patel, A Prasanth Saraswati, Ahmed Kamal
    Nanohydrogels: History, Development, and Applications in Drug Delivery / Muhammad Akram, Rafaqat Hussain
    Nanofibrillated Cellulose and Copoly(amino acid) Hydrogel Matrices in Biotechnology and Biomedicine / Azhar U Khan, Nazia Malik, Tanvir Arfin.
    Digital Access Wiley 2017
  • Digital
    edited by Robert Puers, Livio Baldi, Marcel Van de Voorde, and Sebastiaan E. van Nooten.
    Contents:
    Fundamentals on Nanoelectronics. A Brief History of the Semiconductor Industry / Paolo A Gargini
    More-than-Moore Technologies and Applications / Joachim Pelka, Livio Baldi
    Logic Devices Challenges and Opportunities in the Nano Era / Frédéric Boeuf
    Memory Technologies / Barbara De Salvo, Livio Baldi
    Devices in the Nano Era. Beyond-CMOS Low-Power Devices: Steep-Slope Switches for Computation and Sensing / Adrian M Ionescu
    RF CMOS / Patrick Reynaert, Wouter Steyaert, Marco Vigilante
    Smart Power Devices Nanotechnology / Gaudenzio Meneghesso, Peter Moens, Mikael Östling, Jan Sonsky, Steve Stoffels
    Integrated Sensors and Actuators: Their Nano-Enabled Evolution into the Twenty-First Century / Frederik Ceyssens, Robert Puers
    Advanced Materials and Materials Combinations. Silicon Wafers as a Foundation for Growth / Peter Stallhofer
    Nanoanalysis / Narciso Gambacorti
    Semiconductor Smart Manufacturing. Front-End Processes / Marcello Mariani, Nicolas Possémé
    Lithography for Nanoelectronics / Kurt Ronse
    Reliability of Nanoelectronic Devices / Anthony S Oates, KP Cheung
    Circuit Design in Emerging Nanotechnologies. Logic Synthesis of CMOS Circuits and Beyond / Enrico Macii, Andrea Calimera, Alberto Macii, Massimo Poncino
    System Design in the Cyber-Physical Era / Pierluigi Nuzzo, Alberto Sangiovanni-Vincentelli
    Heterogeneous Systems / Daniel Lapadatu
    Nanotechnologies Testing / Ernesto Sanchez, Matteo Sonza Reorda
    Nanoelectronics-Enabled Sectors and Societal Challenges. Industrial Applications / L Baldi, M Van de Voorde
    Health / Walter De Raedt, Chris Van Hoof
    Smart Energy / Moritz Loske
    Validation of Highly Automated Safe and Secure Vehicles / Michael Paulweber
    Nanotechnology for Consumer Electronics / Hannah M Gramling, Michail E Kiziroglou, Eric M Yeatman
    From Device to Systems. Nanoelectronics for Smart Cities / Joachim Pelka
    Industrialization: Economics/Markets
    Business Values
    European Visions
    Technology Renewal and Extended Functionality. Europe Positioning in Nanoelectronics / Andreas Wild
    Thirty Years of Cooperative Research and Innovation in Europe: The Case for Micro- and Nanoelectronics and Smart Systems Integration / Dirk Beernaert, Eric Fribourg-Blanc
    The Education Challenge in Nanoelectronics / Susanna M Thon, Sean L Evans, Annastasiah Mudiwa Mhaka
    Conclusions / Robert Puers, Livio Baldi, Marcel Van de Voorde.
    Digital Access Wiley 2017
  • Digital
    Mirjana Maksimović, Enisa Omanović-Mikličanin, Almir Badnjević.
    Summary: This book assesses the current challenges and opportunities for the next generation of agriculture and food science. Examining the role of nanotechnology and the application of related tools and techniques to transform the future of food, it also discusses in detail nanotechnology in food production, processing and packaging, as well as the benefits of and concerns regarding nanofoods (nanotoxicity and food forensics). Considering the potential of IoT to revolutionize agriculture and the food industry by radically reducing costs and improving productivity and profits, the book highlights the necessity of integrating IoT and nanotechnology into the next generation of agriculture and food science. Further, it presents a detailed analysis of IoNT implementation, together with the goals that have to be met in order to achieve significant improvements in the agri-food sector. In addition it explores a range of challenges, risks, and concerns that have a direct or indirect impact on nanotechnology and IoNT implementation in agriculture and the food industry. In closing, it discusses the use of green nanotechnology and green IoNT in order to create smart, safe, and sustainable agriculture and healthy food.

    Contents:
    Intro; Preface; Contents; Abbreviations; 1 What Food Do We Want to Eat? Is Nanofood Food of Our Future?; References; 2 How Technology Can Help?; 2.1 Wireless Sensor Network (WSN); 2.2 Internet of Things (IoT); 2.3 Nanotechnology; 2.3.1 Internet of Nano Things (IoNT); 2.4 The Role of Nanotechnology and IoNT in Agriculture and Food Sector; 2.4.1 Nanofood; 2.4.2 Plant Production and Protection; 2.4.3 Animal Production; 2.4.4 Food Processing; 2.4.5 Food Packaging; 2.4.6 Food Transportation; 2.4.7 Food Traceability; References; 3 Is Nanofood Safe?; 3.1 Food Forensic 3.1.1 Historical Development of Food Adulteration3.1.2 Food Fraud; 3.1.3 Methods Used in Food Forensics; 3.2 Nanotoxicology; 3.2.1 Environmental Related Nano-Hazards; 3.2.2 Human Health-Related Nano-Hazards; 3.2.3 Risk Assessment and Risk Management; 3.3 Regulatory Issues of Nanotechnology Use in the Agri-Food Industry; 3.3.1 Challenges for Regulating Nanotechnology Utilization in Agriculture and Food Sector; 3.4 Risks and Challenges of IoNT Applications in Agriculture and Food Industry; References; 4 Solution?; 4.1 Green Nanotechnology; 4.1.1 Green Synthesis of Nanomaterials 4.1.2 The Applications of Green Synthesized Nanomaterials4.1.3 Risk Assessment and Risk Management; 4.1.4 Regulatory Issues; 4.2 Green IoNT; 4.3 Solutions for IoNT Risks; References; 5 Conclusion
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital/Print
    David G. Capco, Yongsheng Chen, editors.
    Contents:
    Presence in, and release of, nanomaterials from consumer products / Yu Yang and Paul Westerhoff
    Nanoparticle aggregation: principles and modeling / Wen Zhang
    Influences of nanomaterials on the barrier function of epithelial cells / Shariq Ali and Erik Rytting
    Engineered nanoparticles induced brush border disruption in a human model of the intestinal epithelium / James J. Faust, Benjamin M. Masserano, Adam H. Mielke, Anup Abraham, and David G. Capco
    Nanoparticles: cellular uptake and cytotoxicity / Isaac M. Adjei, Blanka Sharma and Vinod Labhasetwar
    Atomic force microscopy study of the interaction of DNA and nanoparticles / Kungang LI, Songyan Du, Steven Van Ginkel, and Yongsheng Chen
    Intracellular signal modulation by nanomaterials / Salik Hussain, Stavros Garantziotis, Fernando Rodrigues-Lima, Jean-Marie Dupret, Armelle Baeza-Squiban, Sonja Boland
    Nanomaterials: impacts on cells and cell organelles / Željka Krpetić, Sergio Anguissola, David Garry, Philip Kelly and Kenneth A. Dawson
    Design, synthesis, and functionalization of nanoparticles for therapeutic drug delivery / Taraka Sai Pavan Grandhi and Kaushal Rege
    Preparation of nanoscale pulmonary drug delivery formulations by spray drying / Adam Bohr, Christian A. Ruge, and Moritz Beck-Broichsitter
    Nanomedicine: the promise and challenges in cancer chemotherapy / Youssef W. Naguib and Zhengrong Cui
    Transgenerational effects of NMs / Anna Poma, Sabrina Colafarina, Gabriella Fontecchio, and Giuseppe Chichiricco
    Stem cells and nanomaterials / Maria-Claude Hofmann.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    Amitabha Acharya, editors.
    Summary: This book comprehensively reviews the recent advances in nanomaterial-based molecular imaging, diagnostics, and personalized therapy. It discusses the novel biocompatible fluorescent nanomaterials, their synthesis, and modern state of art characterization, as well as the various strategies for immobilization of biomacromolecules on the nanomaterial surface and approaches for increasing their stability. In addition, the book describes the synthesis of lectin nanoconjugates using different types of biocompatible raw materials and their systematic characterization. Lastly, it presents our current understanding of the biomolecular carona, which affects nanoparticle-based targeted drug delivery, and examines the conceptual approaches to improve the in-vivo efficacy of targeted drug delivery.

    Contents:
    Chapter 1. Nanomaterials: From research to personalized medicine
    Chapter 2. Introduction to molecular imaging, diagnostics and therapy
    Chapter 3. Biocompatible fluorescent nanomaterials for molecular imaging applications
    Chapter 4. Nanomaterials for Point of Care Disease Detection
    Chapter 5. Biomolecules immobilized nanomaterials and their biological applications
    Chapter 6. Lectin nanoconjugates for targeted therapeutic applications
    Chapter 7. Plant Based Polymeric Nanomaterials for Biomedical Applications
    Chapter 8. Nanomaterials at the biological interphase: Protein corona formation and infusion
    Chapter 9. Critical overview of the subject: Current scenario and future prospects.
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    Nilesh Sharma, Shivendra Sahi, editors.
    Summary: The range of nanomaterial applications has expanded recently from catalysis, electronics, and filtration to therapeutics, diagnostics, agriculture, and food because of the unique properties and potentials of different nanoparticles and nanomaterials. Research shows that these exquisite particles can interact with an organism at the cellular, physiological, biochemical, and molecular levels. Our knowledge, however, of how they affect these changes, selectively or generally, in diverse organisms or ecosystems is very limited and far from satisfactory. Data indicate that the biological function largely depends on the shape, size, and surface characteristics of the nanoparticles used along with life cycle stages of an organism. This book focuses on the body of work carried out by distinguished investigators using diverse nanomaterials in both plant and animal species. It includes specific case studies as well as general reviews highlighting aspects of multilayered interactions. This volume provides a comprehensive resource for academic scholars, as well as for researchers in the concerned industries and policy makers.

    Contents:
    Application of Titanium Dioxide Nanoparticles in Consumer Products Raises Human Health Concerns: Lessons from Murine Models of Toxicity
    Zebrafish Models of Nanotoxicity: A Comprehensive Account
    Caenorhabditis elegans: A Unique Animal Model to Study Soil-Nanoparticles-Organism Interactions
    Response to Engineered Nanomaterials in Arabidopsis thaliana, a Model Plant
    Metal Oxide Nanoparticle Toxicity in Aquatic Organisms: An Overview of Methods and Mechanisms
    Responses of Terrestrial Plants to Metallic Nanomaterial Exposure: Mechanistic Insights, Emerging Technologies, and New Research Avenues
    Cerium and Titanium Oxide Nanoparticles Increase Algal Growth and Nutrient Accumulation in Rice Paddy Environments
    Application of Metal Oxide Nanomaterials in Agriculture: Benefit or Bane?
    The Role of Zinc Oxide Nanoparticles in Plants: A Critical Appraisal
    Fate and Effects of Engineered Nanomaterials in Agricultural Systems
    Interaction of Food-Grade Nanotitania with Human and Mammalian Cell Lines Derived from GI Tract, Liver, Kidney, Lung, Brain, and Heart
    Green Engineering of Silver Nanoparticles Using Leucas aspera Extract: Cytotoxic Efficacy in HeLa Cell Line
    Nanoparticles-Mediated Interventions to Prevent Herpes Simplex Virus (HSV) Entry into Susceptible Hosts
    Nanoparticle Biosynthesis and Interaction with the Microbial Cell, Antimicrobial and Antibiofilm Effects, and Environmental Impact
    The Chemistry behind Nanotoxicological Processes in Living Systems
    Nanomaterial Interaction and Cellular Damage: Involvement of Various Signalling Pathways.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    editors, Mahendra Rai and Jayanta Kumar Biswas.
    Summary: The environment is prone to suffer pollution and toxic insult from generations of nanomaterials as well from accidental releases during production, transportation, and disposal operations. The NMs could interact with and cause adverse biological effects at cellular, subcellular, and molecular levels. Assessing potential environmental/ecological risks requires quality information on transport and fate of nanoparticles in the environment, exposures and vulnerabilities of organisms to the nanomaterials and standard methods for assessing toxicity for aquatic or terrestrial organisms and human health. The systematic risk characterization and evaluation of the safety of nanomaterials require a multidisciplinary approach and convergence of knowledge and efforts from researchers and experts from toxicology, biotechnology, materials science, chemistry, physics, engineering, and other branches of life sciences. Although studies are beginning to appear in the literature addressing the toxicity of various nanomaterials and their potential for exposure, at this stage definitive statements regarding the impacts of nanomaterials on human health and the environment remain sketchy requiring an increased level of precautions with regard to nanomaterials, as has happened with other emerging contaminants and technologies (e.g., biotechnology). The need for an increased level of understanding the perception of risk and of benefits will vary and is likely to influence public, regulatory, and non-governmental activities regarding risk and benefit evaluations. Systematic identification and assessment of the risks posed by any new technology are essential. A prudent, integrated, and holistic approach is required to develop best practices based on the scientific understanding about what we know and what we don?t know but need to know. Nanomaterials addresses key issues of ecotoxicological actions and effects of nanomaterials on life and environment, their threats, vulnerability, risks, and public perception. The readers learn to read bad news objectively and think about and search for ecological green solutions to current environmental and ecological problems with blue, grey, brown, and red shades for building a sustainable ecosystem. It shows how this molecular terrain is a common ground for interdisciplinary research and education that will be an essential component of science, engineering and technology in the future. The book is divided into three sections. Section I includes general topics related to ecotoxicity of nanomaterials to microbes, plants, human and environment. Section 2 incorporates risks generated by the use of nanomaterials. Section 3 discusss safety issues and the public.

    Contents:
    PART 1-GENERAL Ecotoxicology Issues with Nanomaterials
    Nanomaterials: What are they, why they cause ecotoxicity, and how this can be dealt with?
    Nano-bio interactions and ecotoxicity: Plenty of room at the bottom but tyranny at the top
    Chemical Structure and toxicity of Nanomaterials used in Food and Food Products
    Toxicity and Safety Evaluation of Nanoclays
    Toxicity of nanoparticles on soil mycoflora
    Ecotoxicity of nanometals: The problems and solutions
    Electrochemical assessment of the interaction and toxicity of carbon nanomaterials on microbial living cells
    Nanotoxicity in Plant Systems
    Nanotoxicity of lipid based nanomedicines
    Toxicity of Silver and zinc Nanoparticles in an aquatic environment
    PART 2-RISKS
    Carbon nanomaterials
    Potential risks to human health and the environment
    Nanoparticles emitted by biomass burning: Characterization and monitoring of risk
    Unintentionally produced nanomaterials and different aspects related to their risks
    PART 3 SAFETY ISSUES AND PUBLIC PERCEPTION
    Nanotechnological regulations in Brazil
    Nanohazards and safety challenges
    Regulatory Framework for Nano-materials in Agri-Food Systems.
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Digital
    Indu Bhushan, Vivek Kumar Singh, Durgesh Kumar Tripathi, editors.
    Summary: Nanotechnology is considered as one of the emerging fields of science. It has applications in different biological and technological fields which deal with the science of materials at nanoscale (10-9). On the other hand, biotechnology is another field that deals with contemporary challenges. Nanobiotechnology fills the gap between these two fields. It merges physical, chemical, and biological principles in a single realm. This combination opens up new possibilities. At nanoscale dimensions, it creates precise nanocrystals and nanoshells. Integrated nanomaterials are used with modified surface layers for compatibility with living systems, improved dissolution in water, or biorecognition leading to enhanced end results in biotechnological systems. These nanoparticles can also be hybridized with additional biocompatible substances in order to amend their qualities to inculcate novel utilities. Nanobiotechnology is used in bioconjugate chemistry by coalescing up the functionality of non-organically obtained molecular components and biological molecules in order to veil the immunogenic moieties for targeted drug delivery, bioimaging and biosensing. This book blends the science of biology, medicine, bioinorganic chemistry, bioorganic chemistry, material and physical sciences, biomedical engineering, electrical, mechanical, and chemical science to present a comprehensive range of advancements. The development of nano-based materials has made for a greater understanding of their characterization, using techniques such as transmission electron microscope, FTIR, X-ray diffraction, scanning electron microscope EDX, and so on. This volume also highlights uses in environmental remediation, environmental biosensors and environmental protection. It also emphasizes the significance of nanobiotechnology to a series of medical applications viz., diagnostics, and therapeutics stem cell technology, tissue engineering enzyme engineering, drug development and delivery. In addition this book also offers a distinctive understanding of nanobiotechnology from researchers and educators and gives a comprehensive facility for future developments and current applications of nanobiotechnology.

    Contents:
    Preface
    Nanoparticles and Plant Interaction with Respect to Stress Response
    Nanoencapsulation technology: Boon to food packaging industries
    Ecotoxicity of Metallic Nanoparticles and Possible Strategies for Risk Assessment
    Tripartite Interaction among Nanoparticles, Symbiotic Microbes and Plants; Current Scenario and Future Perspectives
    Effect of nanoparticles on plant growth and physiology and soil microbes
    Recent Trends and Advancement towards Phyto-Mediated Fabrication of Noble Metallic Nanomaterials: Focus on Silver, Gold, Platinum and Palladium
    Development of environmental biosensors for detection, monitoring and assessment
    Nano-based materials and their synthesis
    Nano based composites and their synthesis
    Appraisal of chitosan-based nanomaterials in enzyme immobilization and probiotics encapsulation
    Nano based drug delivery tools for personalized nanomedicine
    Nano-technology as Potential and Innovative Platform towards Waste Water Treatment: An Overview
    Solid lipid nanoparticles
    Nanotechnology Applications and Synthesis of Graphene as nanomaterial for nanoelectronics
    Efficiency enhancement of renewable energy systems using nanotechnology
    Waste Water and Industrial Effluent Treatment by using Nanotechnology
    Biomolecular and cellular manipulation and detection (Nanofluidics, Micro- and Nanotechnologies in Integrative Biology)
    Bio-based Nano-lubricants for Sustainable Manufacturing
    Nano materials used for delivery of bioactive
    Efficacy of nano-phytochemicals over pure phytochemicals against various cancers: Current trends and future prospects
    Index.
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    Azamal Husen, Muhammad Iqbal, editors.
    Summary: This book discusses the latest developments in plant-mediated fabrication of metal and metal-oxide nanoparticles, and their characterization by using a variety of modern techniques. It explores in detail the application of nanoparticles in drug delivery, cancer treatment, catalysis, and as antimicrobial agent, antioxidant and the promoter of plant production and protection. Application of these nanoparticles in plant systems has started only recently and information is still scanty about their possible effects on plant growth and development. Accumulation and translocation of nanoparticles in plants, and the consequent growth response and stress modulation are not well understood. Plants exposed to these particles exhibit both positive and negative effects, depending on the concentration, size, and shape of the nanoparticles. The impact on plant growth and yield is often positive at lower concentrations and negative at higher ones. Exposure to some nanoparticles may improve the free-radical scavenging potential and antioxidant enzymatic activities in plants and alter the micro-RNAs expression that regulate the different morphological, physiological and metabolic processes in plant system, leading to improved plant growth and yields. The nanoparticles also carry out genetic reforms by efficient transfer of DNA or complete plastid genome into the respective plant genome due to their miniscule size and improved site-specific penetration. Moreover, controlled application of nanomaterials in the form of nanofertilizer offers a more synchronized nutrient fluidity with the uptake by the plant exposed, ensuring an increased nutrient availability. This book addresses these issues and many more. It covers fabrication of different/specific nanomaterials and their wide-range application in agriculture sector, encompassing the controlled release of nutrients, nutrient-use efficiency, genetic exchange, production of secondary metabolites, defence mechanisms, and the growth and productivity of plants exposed to different manufactured nanomaterials. The role of nanofertilizers and nano-biosensors for improving plant production and protection and the possible toxicities caused by certain nanomaterials, the aspects that are little explored by now, have also been generously elucidated.

    Contents:
    Intro; Preface; Contents; Part I: Plant-Mediated Synthesis and Applications of Nanomaterials;
    Chapter 1: Nanomaterials and Plant Potential: An Overview; 1.1 Introduction; 1.2 Type of Engineered NMs; 1.3 Characterization Techniques; 1.4 Physical and Chemical Characters of NMs; 1.5 Application and Impact of NMs; 1.6 Conclusion; References;
    Chapter 2: Basic Chemistry and Biomedical Significance of Nanomaterials; 2.1 Introduction; 2.2 Importance of Nanoscale; 2.3 Nanochemistry; 2.3.1 Quantum Confinement; 2.3.2 Surface Plasmon Resonance (SPR); 2.3.3 Nanoparticle Size Effects 2.3.4 Size Distribution of Nanostructures2.3.5 Shape of Nanoparticles; 2.3.6 Agglomeration of Nanoparticles; 2.3.7 Effect of pH, Ionic Strength, and Temperature on Agglomeration; 2.3.8 Solubility and Phase Transition of Nanoparticles; 2.4 Nanomaterials in Bio-systems; 2.4.1 Micelles and Liposomes; 2.4.2 Microemulsions; 2.4.3 Other Relevant Materials; 2.5 Preparation of Nanostructures for Use in Medicine; 2.5.1 Emulsion-Solvent Evaporation Method; 2.5.2 Double Emulsion and Evaporation Method; 2.5.3 Salting-Out Method; 2.5.4 Emulsion-Diffusion Method 2.5.5 Solvent Displacement/Precipitation Method2.6 Nanoencapsulation and Nanoencapsulated Materials; 2.7 Medical Significance of Nanostructures; 2.8 Conclusion; References;
    Chapter 3: Plant-Mediated Fabrication of Gold Nanoparticles and Their Applications; 3.1 Introduction; 3.2 Fabrication and Characterization of Gold Nanoparticles; 3.2.1 Fabrication of Gold Nanoparticles; 3.2.2 Characterization of Gold Nanoparticles; 3.2.2.1 Ultraviolet-Visible (UV-Vis) Spectroscopy; 3.2.2.2 Microscopy; 3.2.2.3 X-Ray Diffraction (XRD); 3.2.2.4 Dynamic Light Scattering (DLS) and Zeta Potential Analysis 3.2.2.5 Fourier Transform Infrared Spectroscopy (FTIR)3.3 Factors Affecting the Fabrication; 3.3.1 Temperature; 3.3.2 pH; 3.3.3 Incubation Time; 3.3.4 Plant Biomass Concentration; 3.4 Applications of Gold Nanoparticles; 3.4.1 Antimicrobial Agents; 3.4.2 Catalytic Activity and Water Purification; 3.4.3 Antioxidant Potential; 3.4.4 Photochemical Agents; 3.4.5 Plant Response to Gold Nanoparticles; 3.4.6 Biomedical Application; 3.5 Conclusion; References;
    Chapter 4: Green Synthesis of Gold Nanoparticles by Using Natural Gums; 4.1 Introduction; 4.2 Description of Various Gums 4.3 Synthesis of AuNPs4.3.1 Reaction Mechanism; 4.4 Characterization of AuNPs; 4.4.1 EDX Analysis; 4.4.2 Dynamic Light Scattering (DLS); 4.4.3 XRD Analysis; 4.5 Applications; 4.6 Conclusion; References;
    Chapter 5: Plant-Based Fabrication of Silver Nanoparticles and Their Application; 5.1 Introduction; 5.2 Fabrication and Characterization of Ag NPs; 5.3 Factors Affecting Fabrication of Ag NPs; 5.3.1 Temperature; 5.3.2 pH; 5.3.3 Incubation Time; 5.3.4 Plant Biomass Concentration; 5.4 Applications of Ag NPs; 5.4.1 Antimicrobial; 5.4.2 Biomedical Application
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    Manish Srivastava, Neha Srivastava, P.K. Mishra, Vijai Kumar Gupta, editors.
    Summary: As renewable energy sources, biofuels have tremendous potential to replace fossil fuels in future energy scenarios, offering green alternative energy sources. However, though such fuels could mean a significant reduction in environmental pollution, they are still far from practical implementation due to their high production costs and technical issues. Consequently, efforts are being made around the globe to achieve the cost-effective production of biofuels. In this context, the use of nanomaterials to improve biofuels production efficiency is a vital, emerging area. Nanomaterials are attracting attention due to their versatile physicochemical properties and may improve the production process for various biofuels by acting as catalysts. However, this area is still in its infancy. To improve the practical viability of the biofuels production process, it is essential to focus on the specific type of nanomaterial used, its synthesis, and its specific effects on the process parameters. This book explores the potential advantages and feasibility of various aspects of nanomaterials with regard to improving the current biofuels production process, making it a valuable resource for a broad readership.

    Contents:
    Chapter 1. Biofuel; types and process overview
    Chapter 2. Applications of plant based natural products to synthesize nanomaterial-Part-i
    Chapter 3. Application of plant based natural product to synthesize nanomaterial-Part-2
    Chapter 4. Green synthesis approach to fabricate nanomaterials
    Chapter 5. Nanomaterials; types, synthesis and characterization
    Chapter 6. Nanotechnology: an application in biofuel production nanomaterial synthesis and mechanism for enzyme immobilization-part-i
    Chapter 7. Nanomaterial synthesis and mechanism for enzyme immobilization-part-ii
    Chapter 8. Nanomaterial synthesis and mechanism for enzyme immobilization-part-ii
    Chapter 9. Nanomaterials immobilized biocatalysts for biofuel production from lignocellulose biomass
    Chapter 10. Carbon nanotubes synthesized by green/ecofriendly technique potential for bioenergy applications
    Chapter 11. Synthesis of iron oxide nanomaterials for biofuels applications.
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Print
    Robert A. Freitas.
    Contents:

    v. 1. Basic capabilities
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Books: General Collection (Downstairs)
    R856 .F74
    1
  • Digital
    Mahfoozur Rahman, Sarwar Beg, Vikas Kumar, Farhan Jalees Ahmad, editors.
    Summary: Nanotechnology is opening up new avenues in all scientific and technological fields. Among the novel applications, bioactives and nutraceuticals are fast-growing areas of nano research for better healthcare solutions. A variety of nanoformulations, such as polymeric nanoparticles, nanocapsules, nanoemulsions, transferosomes and ethosomes, liposomes, lipospheres, and lipid polymer hybrid nanoparticles have proved valuable in bioactive delivery and food materials. Further, new herbal drugs and nutraceuticals are reported to have remarkable advantages over conventional formulations of plant actives and extracts, including enhanced solubility, bioavailability, multiple drug delivery, greater stability, sustained delivery, improved tissue macrophage distribution, protection from toxicity, enhancement of pharmacological activity and protection from physical and chemical degradation. This book focuses on the advanced nanomaterials that are utilized for the encapsulation of nutrients/vitamin/phytoconstituents, as well as their other healthcare benefits.

    Contents:
    1) Ganoderic acid for anticancer applications: Scope of nanomedicine in its effective delivery
    2) Vitamin E based nanomedicines for anticancer drug delivery
    3) Rutin based phytomedicines for cancer benefit
    4) Nanoformulated Drug Delivery of Potential Betulinic Acid Derivatives: A Promising Approach toward Cancer Therapy
    5) Quercetin Loaded Nanomedicine as Oncotherapy
    6) Polyunsaturated fatty acids loaded nanomedicine for solid tumor
    7) Rutin based phytomedicines for cancer benefit
    8) Quercetin Loaded Nanomedicine as Oncotherapy
    9) Quercetin Loaded Nanomedicine as Nutritional Applications
    10) Polyphenols loaded nanomedicines against skin aging
    11) Polyphenols loaded nanomedicines against skin aging
    12) LIPID NANOCARRIERS FOR DERMAL DELIVERY OF LUTEIN
    13) Bioactive flavonoid apigenin and its nanoformulations: a promising hope for diabetes and cancer
    14) Therapeutic potential of 'Aegeline an important phytochemical of Aegle marmelos: Current Health perspectives for the treatment of disease
    15) EPIGALOCATECHIN-3-GALLATE LOADED NANOCARRIERS FOR HEALTH BENEFITS
    16) Clove oil / Eugenol as the nanotechnological perspective for healthcare applications
    17) Clove oil / Eugenol as the nanotechnological perspective for healthcare applications.
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    edited by Lara Scheherazade Milane, Mansoor M. Amiji.
    Contents:
    Fundamentals of immunology and inflammation / Michael E. Woods
    Principles of nanomedicine / Wilson S. Meng and Jelena M. Janjic
    Nanotoxicity / Angie S. Morris and Aliasger K. Salem
    Translational nanomedicine / Lara Milane
    Inflammatory bowel disease
    Multiple sclerosis
    Asthma
    Neurodegenerative disease / Neha N. Parayath, Grishma Pawar, Charul Avachat, Marcel Menon Miyake, Benjamin Bleier, and Mansoor Amiji
    Cancer / Lara Milane
    Diabetes / Antonio J Ribeiro, Marlene Lopes, Raquel Monteiro, Gaia Cilloni, Francisco Veiga, Pharm.D; P. Arnaud.
    Digital Access TandFonline 2017
  • Digital
    Xue Xue, editor.
    Summary: This book provides an overview of the current applications of nanomaterials in brain diseases, and introduces several novel nanomaterials that have excellent potential in this field. During the last two decades, nanotechnology had matured significantly as it has transitioned from a bench-top science to an applied technology. However, the application of nanomaterials in basic and clinical neuroscience is still at an early stage, and understanding how the intrinsic properties of nanomaterials translate to complex biological responses is an area of intensive research. Part 1 of the book focuses on the principles and strategies of nanomedicine in the brain diseases, while part 2 examines the applications of promising nanomaterials for therapy and diagnosis in the brain. Together they offer a comprehensive picture of advances in nanotechnology and their successful use in treating brain diseases in the past 20 years.

    Contents:
    Introduction: Nanomedicine in the Brain
    The Strategies of Nanomaterials for Traversing Blood-Brain Barrier
    The Strategies of Nanomaterials for Drug Delivery and Release
    The Strategies of Nanomaterials for Therapy
    The Strategies of Nanomaterials for Diagnostic and Imaging
    Nanoenzyme
    Biomacromolecule-Based Nanomedicine
    Carbon-Based Nanomedicine
    Polymeric Nanomedicine
    Magnetic Nanomedicine
    Boron Neutron Capture Nanomedicines.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    Lajos P. Balogh.
    Summary: "This book is the first in a series compiling highly cited articles in nanomedicine recently. The series is edited by Lajos P. Balogh, a prominent nanotechnology researcher and journal editor. The first book content is about nanotechnology in cancer research. It also includes a wide variety of must-know topics that will appeal to any researcher involved in nanomedicine, macromolecular science, cancer therapy, and drug delivery research. These 31 articles collected here have already acquired more than 3500 citations (i.e., over a hundred on average), highlighting the importance and recognized professional interest of the scientists working in this field. "--Provided by publisher.
    Digital Access TandFonline 2017
  • Digital
    edited by Aruna Sharma, Hari Shanker Sharma.
    Summary: 'Nanoneuroprotection and Nanoneurotoxicology,' Volume 245 of the Progress in Brain Research series, deals with recent developments in the field of neurotoxicity and neuroprotection using nanobiotechnology for the first time. Chapters in this updated release include Sleep deprivation induced brain pathology and concussive head trauma-Neuroprotective effects of nanowired delivery of drugs and hormones, Nanomedicine in Alzheimer’s Disease: amyloid beta targeting strategy, How traumatic brain injury alters amino acids balance in the central nervous system-Neuroprotection by TiO2 nanowired delivery of drugs and antibodies, Nanowired delivery of DL-3-n-butylphthalide and neuroprotection in concussive head injury, Nanodelivery of drugs and antibodies for superior neuroprotection in Alzheimer’s disease, and more. Key Features: Highlights recent development in nanopharmacetical research with reference to brain disease; Provides new insights on the possible role of nanomaterials and their pronounced effects on CNS injury or repair. Readership: Researchers and students of neuroscience, psychology, and the biological sciences interested in nanoneuroprotection and nanoneurotoxicology. -- Provided by publisher.
    Digital Access ScienceDirect 2019
  • Digital
    Diana Boraschi and Albert Duschl.
    Summary: Nanoparticles and the Immune System provides a reference text for toxicologists, materials scientists and regulators and covers the key issues of interaction of nanomaterials with the immune system. The book discusses several issues that toxicologists and regulators need to know: identification of endpoints that are relevant for assessing hazard, evaluating impact on immunologically frail populations, and how to evaluate chronic/cumulative effects. In addition, the book addresses the possibility of turning the immunomodulating properties of certain nanomaterials to our advantage.

    Contents:
    How innate and adaptive immunity work
    Nanoparticles and innate immunity
    Nanoparticles and adaptive immunity
    Nanoparticles and allergy
    Nanoparticles and immunological frailty
    Nanoparticles in medicine: nanoparticle engineering for macrophage targeting and nanoparticles that avoid macrophage recognition
    Summary and outlook.
    Digital Access ScienceDirect 2014
  • Digital
    Ashutosh Kumar Shukla, editor.
    Summary: Nanotechnology is expected to bring revolutionary changes in a variety of fields. This volume describes nanoparticles and their biomedical applications, and covers metal nanoparticles, metal oxide nanoparticles, rare earth based nanoparticles and graphene oxide nanoparticles. It elaborates on a number of biomedical applications, including therapeutic applications. It addresses the topic of green synthesis, in view of increasing health and environmental concerns.

    Contents:
    Chapter 1. Rare Earth Based Nanoparticles: Biomedical Applications, Pharmacological and Toxicological Significance
    Chapter 2. Nanomedicine for Hepatic Fibrosis
    Chapter 3. Biomedical Applications of Zinc oxide nanoparticles synthesized using Eco-friendly method
    Chapter 4. Potential Applications of Greener synthesized Silver and Gold Nanoparticles in Medicine
    Chapter 5. Nanofinished Medical Textiles and Their Potential Impact to Health and Environment
    Chapter 6. Therapeutic Applications of Graphene Oxides in Angiogenesis and Cancers
    Chapter 7. Use of nanoparticles to manage Candida biofilms
    Chapter 8. Biomedical applications of lignin-based nanoparticles
    Chapter 9. Green nanoparticles for biomedical and bioengineering applications
    Chapter 10. Nanoparticles: A boon to target mitochondrial diseases.
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    editors, Joshua D. Ramsey, M. Laird Forrest.
    Digital Access
    Provider
    Version
    Future Med
    Future Med
  • Digital/Print
    Harvinder Singh Gill, Richard W. Compans, editors.
    Summary: "This book introduces nanoparticles as a powerful platform for vaccine design. Current challenges in vaccine development are discussed and the unique advantages nanoparticles provide in overcoming these challenges are explored. The authors offer fascinating insights into the immunological assets of using nanoparticles as delivery vehicles or adjuvants and present different materials that are being used in nanoparticle-based vaccine development, covering peptides, proteins, polymers, virus-like particles, and liposomes. Its contemporary research insights and practical examples for applications make this volume an inspiring read for researchers and clinicians in vaccinology and immunology. Chapter "Liposome Formulations as Adjuvants for Vaccines" is available open access under a Creative Commons Attribution 4.0 International License via link.springer.com."--Publisher's description.

    Contents:
    Liposome formulations as adjuvants for vaccines / Mangala Rao, Kristina K. Peachman, and Carl R. Alving
    Polymeric nanoparticle-based vaccine adjuvants and delivery vehicles / Elizabeth A. Grego, Alaric C. Siddoway, Metin Uz, Luman Liu, John C. Christiansen, Kathleen A. Ross, Sean M. Kelly, Surya K. Mallapragada, Michael J. Wannemuehler, and Balaji Narasimhan
    Virus-like particle vaccines against respiratory viruses and protozoan parasites / Ki-Back Chu and Fu-Shi Quan
    Protein and peptide nanocluster vaccines / Timothy Z. Chang and Julie A. Champion.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    Ashutosh Kumar Shukla, editor.
    Summary: This book describes the medical applications of inorganic nanoparticles. Nanomedicine is a relatively advanced field, which enhances the treatment of various diseases, offering new options for overcoming the problems associated with the use of conventional medicines. Discussing the toxicological and safety aspects associated with medical applications of nanoparticles, the book presents the latest research on topics such as emerging nanomaterials for cancer therapy, applications of nanoparticles in dentistry, and fluoride nanoparticles for biomedical applications, and also includes chapters on the use of nanoparticles such as silver and gold. .

    Contents:
    Biomedical applications of characterized zinc oxide nanoparticles synthesized using eco-friendly methods
    Semiconductor and metal oxide nanoparticles for nanomedical applications
    Fungal mediated nanoparticles: Characterization and biomedical advances
    Applications of green synthesized silver and gold nanoparticles in medicine
    Nanoparticle applications in dentistry: Current trends
    Nanoparticles in dentistry: Current trends
    Nanoparticle applications in dermatology: Current trends
    Nanoparticles in medicine: Therapeutic toxicity issues.
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    Xiangwei Zhao, Meng Lu, editors.
    Summary: This book summarizes the latest advances in nanophotonics for biomedical applications, including biomolecular sensing and imaging, additive fabrications, and biophotonics. The engineering of nanophotonics will have significant impacts on the life sciences and medicine alike. Given its scope, the book offers a valuable asset for researchers, scientists, engineers, and graduate students in the fields of biomedical engineering, electrical engineering, materials sciences, optics, biology, and medicine.

    Contents:
    Photonic crystals for biomolecule sensing applications
    Recent advances in Surface Plasmon Resonance for biosensing applications and future prospects
    Surface-enhanced Raman Scattering for biology and medicine
    Nanophotonic techniques for single cell analysis
    Biointerface Characterization by Nonlinear Optical Spectroscopy
    Chemiluminescence and its biomedical applications
    Luminescent Conjugated Polymer Dots for Biomedical Applications
    Dark-Field Hyperspectral Imaging (DF-HSI) Modalities for Characterization of Single Molecule and Cellular Processes
    Additive Manufacturing Technologies based on Photopolymerization.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    edited by Alexan Mihai Grumezescu.
    Summary: Nanoscale Fabrication, Optimization, Scale-up and Biological Aspects of Pharmaceutical Nanotechnology focuses on the fabrication, optimization, scale-up and biological aspects of pharmaceutical nanotechnology. In particular, the following aspects of nanoparticle preparation methods are discussed: the need for less toxic reagents, simplification of the procedure to allow economic scale-up, and optimization to improve yield and entrapment efficiency. Written by a diverse range of international researchers, the chapters examine characterization and manufacturing of nanomaterials for pharmaceutical applications. Regulatory and policy aspects are also discussed. This book is a valuable reference resource for researchers in both academia and the pharmaceutical industry who want to learn more about how nanomaterials can best be utilized.

    Contents:
    1. Fabrication of polymeric core-shell nanostructures
    2. Emulsification-diffusion method to obtain polymeric nanoparticles: two decades of research
    3. Tools and Techniques for the optimized synthesis, reproducibility and scale up of desired nanostructures from plant derived material and their role in pharmaceutical properties
    4. Scale up of biopharmaceuticals production
    5. Physicochemical and morphological characterization of pharmaceutical nanocarriers and mathematical modelling of drug encapsulation/release mass transfer processes
    6. Biopharmaceutics and pharmacokinetics of multifunctional nanoparticles
    7. Technological delivery systems to improve biopharmaceutical properties
    8. From physicochemically stable nanocarriers to targeted drug delivery: in-vivo pharmacokinetic, pharmacodynamic and biodistribution studies
    9. Sterile dosage forms loaded nanosystems for parenteral, nasal, pulmonary and ocular administration
    10. Quantitative Characterization of Targeted Nanoparticulate Formulations for Prediction of Clinical Efficacy
    11. Analytical tools for reliable in vitro and in vivo performance testing of drug nanocrystals
    12. Application of one-step affinity purification of drug-binding proteins with practical magnetic nanoparticles to drug discovery
    13. Molecularly Imprinted Polymers as Separation Tools
    14. Detection of DNA damage induced by nanomaterials
    15. Pharmacological usage of an enzyme inhibitor - a selective inhibitor of 3-mercaptopyruvate sulfurtransferase reaction intermediate to control generation of polysulfide
    16. Regulatory Consideration in Nanotechnology Based Drug Products.
    Digital Access ScienceDirect 2018
  • Digital
    edited by U. Valentin Nägerl, Interdisciplinary Insitute for Neuroscience, CNRS/University of Bordeaux, Bordeaux, France, Antoine Triller, Insitute of Biology, Ecole Normal Supérieure/INSERM/CNRS, Paris, France.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    edited by Carla Bittencourt, Chris Ewels and Eduard Llobet.
    Summary: This book presents a blueprint for researchers in the area of nanotechnology for chemical defense, especially with regard to future research on detection and protection. It addresses the synthesis of complex nanomaterials with potential applications in a broad range of sensing systems. Above all, it discusses novel experimental and theoretical tools for characterizing and modeling nanostructures and their integration in complex systems. The book also includes electronic structure calculations exploring the atomic and quantum mechanical mechanisms behind molecular binding and identification, so as to provide readers with an in-depth understanding of the capabilities and limitations of various nanomaterial approaches. Gathering contributions by scientists with diverse backgrounds, the book offers a wealth of insightful information for all scientists whose work involves material science and its applications in sensing.

    Contents:
    The feasibility of graphene-based defense applications: an industry perspective
    Carbon nanomaterials integrated in rugged and inexpensive sensing platforms for the in-field detection of chemical warfare agents;
    Sensing volatile organic compounds by phthalocyanines with metal centers: exploring the mechanism with measurements and modelling
    Chemical sensors for VOC detection in indoor air: focus on formaldehyde
    Gas sensing using monolayer MoS2; R. Canton-Vitoria et al
    Progress of Sensors based on hollow metal sulfides nanoparticles
    Synthesis of 3D-ensembles of carbon nanotubes
    Challenges on the production and characterization of B-doped single-walled carbon nanotubes
    Graphene-based metal-free catalysis: a spectroscopic point-of-view
    Graphene for Photodynamic Therapy.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    edited by Bert M?uller and Marcel Van de Voorde.
    Summary: Unique in combining the expertise of practitioners from university hospitals and that of academic researchers, this timely monograph presents selected topics catering specifically to the needs and interests of natural scientists and engineers as well as physicians who are concerned with developing nanotechnology-based treatments to improve human health. To this end, the book cover the materials aspects of nanomedicine, such as the hierarchical structure of biological materials, the imaging of hard and soft tissues and, in particular, concrete examples of nanotechnology-based approaches in modern medical treatments. The whole is rounded off by a discussion of the opportunities and risks of using nanotechnology and nanomaterials in medicine, backed by case studies taken from real life.

    Contents:
    Part I. Introduction to nanoscience in medicine of the twenty-first century
    Chapter 1. Challenges and opportunities of nanotechnology for human health
    Chapter 2. Nanoscience and nanotechnology and the armory for the twenty-first centrury health care
    Chapter 3. Nanomedicine activities in the United States and worldwide
    Part II. Leading cause of death: cardiovascular diseases
    Chapter 4. Challenges in cardiovascular treatments using nanotechnology-based approaches
    Chapter 5. Smart container for targeting drug delivery
    Chapter 6. Human nano-vesicles in physiology and pathology
    Chapter 7. Challenges and risks of nanotechnology in medicine: an immunologist's point of view
    Part III. Second most common cause of death: cancer
    Chapter 8.Challenges of applying targeted nanostructures with multifunctional properties in cancer treatments
    Chapter 9. Highly conformal radiotherapy using protons
    Chapter 10. Self-organization on a chip: from nanoscale actin assemblies to tumor spheroids
    Chapter 11. The nanomechnaical signature of tissues in health and disease
    Part IV. Most common diseases: caries, musculoskeletal diseases, incontinence, allergies
    Chapter 12. Revealing the nano-architecture of human hard and soft tissues by spatially resolved hard X-Ray scattering
    Chapter 13. Regenerative dentistry using stem cells and nanotechnology
    Chapter 14. Nanostructured polymers for medical applications
    Chapter 15. Nanotechnology in the treatment of incontinence
    Chapter 16. Nanomedicine in dermatiology: nanotechnology in prevention, diagnosis, and therapy
    Part V. Benefiting patients
    Chapter 17. Therapeutic development and the evolution of precision medicine
    Chapter 18. Benefit from nanoscience and nanotechnology: benefitting patients
    Index.
    Digital Access Wiley 2017
  • Digital
    Ramesh Namdeo Pudake, Nidhi Chauhan, Chittaranjan Kole, editors.
    Summary: This book discusses the ability of nanomaterials to protect crop-plant and animal health, increase production, and enhance the quality of food and other agricultural products. It explores the use of targeted delivery and slow- release agrochemicals to reduce the damage to non-target organisms and the quantity released into the soil and water, as well as nanotechnology-derived tools in the field of plant and animal genetic improvement. It also addresses future applications of nanotechnology in sustainable agriculture and the legislative regulation and safety evaluation of nanomaterials. The book highlights the recent advances made in nanotechnology and its contribution towards an eco-friendly approach in agriculture.

    Contents:
    Intro; Preface; Contents; Contributors; Nanomaterials in Crop Science; 1 Application of Nanotechnology in Genetic Improvement in Crops; Abstract; 1.1 Introduction; 1.2 Conventional Plant Biotransformation Techniques; 1.3 Why Nanotechnology?; 1.4 Nanocarriers for Plant Biotransformation; 1.4.1 Silica Nanoparticles; 1.4.2 Calcium-Based Nanoparticles; 1.4.3 Magnetic Nanoparticles; 1.4.4 Dendrimers; 1.4.5 Liposomes; 1.4.6 Gold Nanoparticles; 1.4.7 Carbon Nanotubes; 1.4.8 Other Nanoparticles; 1.5 Patented Technologies; 1.6 Concluding Remarks and Future Perspectives; References 2 Engineered Nanoparticles for Increasing Micronutrient Use EfficiencyAbstract; 2.1 Introduction; 2.2 Nanoparticles as Micronutrients; 2.2.1 Iron (Fe) NPs; 2.2.2 Manganese (Mn) NPs; 2.2.3 Zinc (Zn) NPs; 2.2.4 Copper (Cu) NPs; 2.2.5 Molybdenum (Mo) NPs; 2.3 Uptake of Nanomaterials in Plants; 2.4 Toxicity Aspects of Nanoparticles; 2.5 Conclusion and Future Aspects; References; 3 Nano-biofertilizers: Harnessing Dual Benefits of Nano-nutrient and Bio-fertilizers for Enhanced Nutrient Use Efficiency and Sustainable Productivity; Abstract; 3.1 Introduction 3.1.1 Fertilizers and Their Role for Crop Productivity3.1.1.1 Fertilizer Application Techniques; 3.1.1.2 Tackling the 'Over-Fertilization' Peril; 3.1.2 Organic Fertilization: Aiming for Eco-Friendly Green Revolution; 3.2 Bio-fertilizers: Pursuit for Sustainable Agricultural Productivity; 3.3 Nano-fertilizers; 3.3.1 Conventional Fertilizers Versus Nano-fertilizers; 3.3.2 What Are Nano-fertilizers?; 3.3.3 Nano-fertilizers in Precision Agriculture; 3.3.3.1 Nano-'smart'-fertilizers for Slow/Controlled Release of Nutrients 3.4 Nano-biofertilizers: Augmenting the Benefits of Nano- and Bio-fertilizers3.4.1 Contributions of the Nano- and Bio-components of the Nano-biofertilizer; 3.4.2 Why Will It Impart Added Benefits?; 3.4.3 Studies Involving Combinatorial Use of Nano- and Bio-fertilizers; 3.4.3.1 Cereal Crops; 3.4.3.2 Legume Crops; 3.4.3.3 Horticultural Crops; 3.4.3.4 Forage Crops; 3.5 Environmental Safety Issues; 3.6 Future Prospects; Acknowledgements; References; 4 Role of Metal-Organic Framework (MOF) for Pesticide Sensing; Abstract; 4.1 Introduction; 4.2 Synthesis of MOF; 4.2.1 Traditional Synthesis Methods 4.2.2 Microwave Synthesis4.2.3 Electrochemical Synthesis; 4.2.4 Mechanochemical Synthesis; 4.2.5 Sonochemical Synthesis; 4.3 Applications of MOF for Pesticide Sensing; 4.3.1 Magnetic Solid-Phase Extraction (MSPE) Extracted Magnetic MOF Composites for Pesticide Detection; 4.3.2 Gas Chromatography Coupled with MOF for Pesticide Detection; 4.3.3 MOF Coupled Adsorption for Pesticide Detection; 4.3.4 Detection of Pesticide by Optical Method; 4.3.5 Electrochemical Method of Pesticide Detection; 4.3.6 SERS Active Metal-Organic Framework with Embedded Gold Nanoparticles
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    Ram Prasad, Busi Siddhardha, Madhu Dyavaiah, editors.
    Summary: In the pursuit of technological advancement in the field of biotechnology and pharmaceutical industries to counteract health issues, bacterial infections remain a major cause of morbidity and mortality. The ability of bacterial pathogens to form biofilms further agglomerates the situation by showing resistance to conventional antibiotics. To overcome this serious issue, bioactive metabolites and other natural products were exploited to combat bacterial infections and biofilm-related health consequences. Natural products exhibited promising results in vitro, however; their efficacy in in vivo conditions remain obscured due to their low-solubility, bioavailability, and biocompatibility issues. In this scenario, nanotechnological interventions provide a multifaceted platform for targeted delivery of bioactive compounds by slow and sustained release of drug-like compounds. The unique physico-chemical properties, biocompatibility and eco-friendly nature of bioinspired nanostructures has revolutionized the field of biology to eradicate microbial infections and biofilm-related complications. The green-nanotechnology based metal and metal oxide nanoparticles and polymeric nanoparticles have been regularly employed for antimicrobial and antibiofilm applications without causing damage to host tissues. The implications of these nanoparticles toward achieving sustainability in agriculture by providing systemic resistance against a variety of phytopathogens therefore plays crucial role in growth and crop productivity. Also the advent of smart and hybrid nanomaterials such as metal-based polymer nanocomposites, lipid-based nanomaterials and liposomes have the inherent potential to eradicate bacterial biofilm-related infections in an efficient manner. The recent development of carbon-based nanomaterials such as carbon nanotubes (CNTs) and silica based nanomaterials such as mesoporous silica nanoparticles (MSNs) also exploit a target of dreadful healthcare conditions such as cancer , immunomodulatory diseases, and microbial infections, as well as biofilm-related issues owing to their stability profile, biocompatibility, and unique physio-chemical properties. Recently novel physical approaches such as photothermal therapy (PTT) and antimicrobial photodynamic therapy (aPDT) also revolutionized conventional strategies and are engaged in eradicating microbial biofilm-related infections and related health consequences. These promising advancements in the development of novel strategies to treat microbial infections and biofilm-related multidrug resistance (MDR) phenomenon may provide new avenues and aid to conventional antimicrobial therapeutics.

    Contents:
    Intro
    Preface
    Contents
    Contributors
    About the Editors
    Chapter 1: Nanomaterials: Therapeutic Agent for Antimicrobial Therapy
    1.1 Introduction
    1.1.1 Basic Discussion About Bacterial Cells
    1.1.2 How Nanomaterials or Antibacterial Agent Interact with Bacteria: Probable Mechanism
    1.1.2.1 Interaction of Nanomaterials with Bacterial Cell Membrane
    1.1.2.2 Release of Compounds/Metal Toxic to the Bacterial Cell
    1.1.2.3 Role of Reactive Oxygen Species (ROS) in Cell Damage
    1.1.2.4 Obstacle in Electron Transport and Protein Oxidation 1.2 Essay for Measuring the Antimicrobial Activity of Nanomaterials
    1.2.1 Susceptibility of Nanomaterials Toward Microorganisms
    1.2.1.1 Dilution Method
    1.2.1.2 Disc-Diffusion Method
    1.2.2 Methods for Quantification of Antibacterial Activity
    1.2.2.1 Optical Density (OD) Measurement
    1.2.2.2 Cell Counting Method
    1.2.2.3 Spread-Plate Colony Counts
    1.2.2.4 Crystal Violet Staining
    1.2.2.5 Live/Dead Cell Staining and Imaging
    1.2.2.6 Tetrazolium Salt Reduction
    1.3 Role of Nanomaterials as Antimicrobial Agent
    1.3.1 The Ancient Era 1.3.2 Why Nanomaterials Have Replaced the Ancient Antimicrobial Agents?
    1.4 Different Class of Nanomaterials Used as an Antimicrobial Agent
    1.4.1 Antimicrobial Properties of Silver-Based Nanomaterials
    1.4.2 Antimicrobial Activity of Zinc Oxide Nanomaterials (ZnO)
    1.4.3 Antimicrobial Activity of Titanium Oxide (TiO2) Nanomaterials
    1.4.4 Copper Nanomaterials as an Antimicrobial Agent
    1.4.5 Carbon-Based Nanomaterials as an Antimicrobial Agent
    1.4.5.1 Fullerene
    1.4.5.2 Carbon Nanotubes (CNTs)
    1.4.5.3 Graphene Oxide (GO) 1.4.5.4 Activated Carbon-Based Nanomaterials (ACNMs)
    1.5 Challenges of Nanomaterials in Antibacterial Treatments
    References
    Chapter 2: A Review on Next-Generation Nano-Antimicrobials in Orthopedics: Prospects and Concerns
    2.1 Introduction
    2.2 Orthopedic Implants and Infections
    2.2.1 Planktonic
    2.2.2 Biofilm
    2.2.3 Invasive and Intracellular
    2.3 Bacterial Growth and Related Clinical Complications
    2.3.1 Cell Adhesion
    2.3.2 Cellular Aggregation
    2.3.3 Biofilm Maturation
    2.3.4 Cellular Detachment
    2.4 Conventional Techniques for Treating Infections 2.5 Nanomaterials in Eradicating Infections
    2.6 Mechanism of Action for Nanobiotics
    2.7 Future Perspectives and Concerns
    References
    Chapter 3: Antibacterial Activity by Functionalized Carbon Nanotubes
    3.1 Introduction
    3.2 Synthesis of Functionalized Carbon Nanotubes
    3.3 Characterization of Functionalized Carbon Nanotubes
    3.4 Antimicrobial Activity of Functionalized Carbon Nanotubes
    3.4.1 Single-Walled Carbon Nanotubes
    3.4.2 Multiwalled Carbon Nanotubes
    3.5 Mechanisms of Action by Functionalized Carbon Nanotubes
    3.6 Conclusion
    References
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    edited by Alexandru Mihai Grumezescu.
    Contents:
    1. Cell and organ drug targeting: types of drug delivery systems and advanced targeting strategies
    2. Cell-penetrating peptides in nanodelivery of nucleic acids and drugs
    3. The current perspectives of nanoparticles in clellular and organ-specific drug targeting in biological system
    4. Precision medicine and drug targeting: the promise versus reality of target-specific drug delivery
    5. Brain targeting of payload using mild magnetic field: site specific delivery
    6. Nanoparticles influence in skin penetration of drugs: in vitro and in vivo characterization
    7. DNA aptamer-based molecular nanoconstructions and nanodevices for diagnostics and therapy
    8. Nanobiodevices for electrochemical biosensing of pharmaceuticals
    9. Imprinted polymeric nanoparticles as nanodevices, biosnesors and biolabels
    10. Poly(lactic-co-glycolic acid) (PLGA) matrix implants
    11. Hydrogels for biomedical applications
    12. Silk-based matrices for bone tissue engineering applications
    13. Implantable drug delivery systems: an overview
    14. Nanobionics and nanoengineered prosthetics
    Index.
    Digital Access ScienceDirect 2018
  • Digital
    edited by Volker Gurtler, Andrew S. Ball and Sarvesh Soni.
    Digital Access ScienceDirect 2019
  • Digital
    H.N. Cheng, U.S. Department of Agriculture, Agricultural Research Service, New Orleans, Louisiana [and three others], editor.
    Summary: Uses of nanotechnology in various fields, and cautions or safety measures regarding some of those applications.

    Contents:
    Nanotechnology Overview: Opportunities and Challenges / Cheng, H. N., USDA Agricultural Research Service, Southern Regional Research Center, 1100 Robert E. Lee Boulevard, New Orleans, Louisiana 70124, United States; Doemeny, Laurence J., 4922 Armin Way, San Diego, California 92115, United States; Geraci, Charles L., National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health (NIOSH), 1090 Tusculum Avenue, C-14, Cincinnati, Ohio 45226, United States; Grob Schmidt, Diane, Department of Chemistry, University of Cincinnati, 301 Clifton Court, Cincinnati, Ohio 45221, United States / http://dx.doi.org/10.1021/bk-2016-1220.ch001
    Nanotechnology at Northwestern University: Delivering on the Promise / Mirkin, Chad A. / http://dx.doi.org/10.1021/bk-2016-1220.ch002
    The Role of Chemical Sciences in the National Nanotechnology Initiative: Accomplishments and Future Direction / Fadel, Tarek R., The International Technology Research Institute, 518 S. Camp Meade Road, Suite 6, Linthicum, Maryland 21090, United States; Meador, Michael A., The National Nanotechnology Coordination Office, 4201 Wilson Boulevard, Suite 405, Arlington, Virginia 22230, United States / http://dx.doi.org/10.1021/bk-2016-1220.ch003
    Building Foundational Knowledge and Infrastructure for Nanotechnology: 2000-2030 / Roco, Mihail C. / http://dx.doi.org/10.1021/bk-2016-1220.ch004
    Nanomaterials and Nanomanufacturing with an Emphasis on National Security / Sloter, Lewis E. / http://dx.doi.org/10.1021/bk-2016-1220.ch005
    National Institutes of Health: An Introduction to Nanotechnology Funded Research in Biology and Medicine / Henderson, Lori A. / http://dx.doi.org/10.1021/bk-2016-1220.ch006
    University Roles in Economic Development / Liehr, Michael / http://dx.doi.org/10.1021/bk-2016-1220.ch007
    Regulations: Facilitating Advancement or Serving as a Barrier
    A Shared Responsibility / Medley, Terry L. / http://dx.doi.org/10.1021/bk-2016-1220.ch008
    Sustainability and Life-Cycle Issues / Morris, Jeffrey / http://dx.doi.org/10.1021/bk-2016-1220.ch009
    Nanomaterials: Promise in Balance with Safety / Philbert, Martin A. / http://dx.doi.org/10.1021/bk-2016-1220.ch010
    Opportunities and Challenges for Health, Safety, and the Environment: The Regulatory Void? / Bergeson, Lynn L. / http://dx.doi.org/10.1021/bk-2016-1220.ch011
    Adaptive Governance for the Nanotechnology Workplace / Murashov, Vladimir; Howard, John / http://dx.doi.org/10.1021/bk-2016-1220.ch012
    What Is Responsible Development of Nanotechnology? / Lin, Albert / http://dx.doi.org/10.1021/bk-2016-1220.ch013
    Editorsʼ Biographies / http://dx.doi.org/10.1021/bk-2016-1220.ot001
    Digital Access
    Provider
    Version
    Am Chem Soc
    Am Chem Soc
  • Digital/Print
    Chad A. Mirkin, Thomas J. Meade, Sarah Hurst Petrosko, Alexander H. Stegh, editors.
    Contents:
    Nanoflares as Probes for Cancer Diagnostics
    Therapeutic Applications of Spherical Nucleic Acids
    Theranostic Magnetic Nanostructures (MNS) for Cancer
    Nanodiamond-Based Chemotherapy and Imaging
    Theranostic Lipid Nanoparticles for Cancer Medicine
    Synthetic High-Density Lipoprotein-Like Nanoparticles as Cancer Therapy
    Radiosensitization and Nanoparticles
    Hybrid Nanoparticles for Cancer Imaging and Therapy
    Exploring Tumor Microenvironment with Nanoparticles
    How nanoparticles interact with cancer cells
    Engineering the Nanoparticle-Protein Interface for Cancer Therapeutics
    Calibration-Quality Cancer Nano-Therapeutics
    Cancer Nano-Therapeutics in Clinical Trials.
    Digital Access Springer 2015
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Books: General Collection (Downstairs)
    RC262 .N366 2015
    1
  • Digital
    edited by Prashant Kesharwani and Umesh Gupta.
    Summary: Nanotechnology-Based Targeted Drug Delivery Systems for Brain Tumors addresses brain anatomy and tumors and the progress and challenges in delivering drugs across the blood brain barrier. Several chapters are devoted to the latest technologies and advances in nanotechnology, along with practical solutions on how to design more effective nanocarriers for drug and gene delivery. This valuable resource prepares readers to develop novel drug delivery systems for the treatment of brain tumors that further promote the latest nanomedical technologies.

    Contents:
    1. Tumors of the central nervous system: anatomy and interventional considerations
    2. Angiogenesis in brain tumors
    3. Physiology of the blood-brain barrier and mechanisms of transport across the BBB
    4. Active trageted nanoscale delivery systems for brain tumor therapeutics
    5. Nanotechnology in brain tumor targeting: efficacy and safety of nanoenabled carriers undergoing clinical testing
    6. Targeting of lipid/polymeric (hybrid) nanoparticles to the brain for the treatment of degernative diseases
    7. Biopolymeric nanoparticles for targeted drug delivery to brain tumors
    8. Solid lipid nanoparticles for targeted drug delivery
    9. Liposome-based drug delivery for brain tumor theranostics
    10. Dendrimers as effective carriers for the treatment of brain tumor - 11. Micelle-based drug delivery for brain tumors
    12. Nanemulsions-based drug delivery for brain tumors
    13. Immune infiltration in malignant gliomas
    14. Carbon nanotubes (CNTs): a novel drug delivery tool in brain tumor treatment
    15. Beyond the blood-brain barrier: facing new challenges and prospects of nanotechnology-mediated targeted delivery to the brain
    Index.
    Digital Access ScienceDirect 2018
  • Digital
    Deepak G Panpatte, Yogeshvari K Jhala, editors.
    Summary: The emergence of nanotechnology and the development of new nano-devices and nanomaterials open up opportunities for novel applications in agriculture and biotechnology. Nanotechnology has the potential to modernize the agricultural research and practice. Nanotechnology has gained momentum in agriculture sector during last decade, but still there are knowledge gap between scientific communities. This book comprise of holistic coverage about current developments in nanotechnology based sustainable agriculture. It contains sections focusing on each aspect of the implications of nanotechnology in different sectors of agriculture from crop production, soil fertility management, crop improvement etc. It also provides insight into the current trends and future prospects of nanotechnology along with the benefits and risks and their impact on agricultural ecosystems. This book emphasize on use of nanotechnology to reduce agrochemical usage via smart delivery system, increase nutrient use efficiency, improved water and nutrient management, nano-biosensors for management of plant diseases etc. The book provides thorough knowledge for dealing with current challenges of agricultural sector using nanotechnology based agricultural interventions. It will serve as reference literature for scientists, policymakers, students and researchers who are engaged in development of strategies to cope up with challenges of current agricultural systems and society.

    Contents:
    1) Nanotechnology in agriculture
    2) Bio production of silver nanoparticles and its potential applications in Agriculture
    3) Biological Synthesis of Nanoparticles using bacteria
    4) Biofabrication of Nanoparticles using fungi
    5) Nanoformulations Based on Bacillus subtilis Lipopeptides: The Future of Agriculture: Fruits
    6)Use of bio-based nanoparticles in Agriculture
    7) Uptake, Accumulation and toxicity of metal nanoparticles in autotroph
    8) Carbon Nanotubes in Agriculture: Production, Potential and Prospects
    9) Impact and current perspectives of zinc oxide nanoparticles on soil
    10) Soil ecological pros and cons of nanomaterials: Impact on micro-organisms and soil health
    11) Beneficial effects of metal- and metalloid-based nanoparticles on crop production
    12) Environmental impact and Eco-toxicological influence of biofrabricated nanoparticle on soil activity
    13) Nanobiosensors: A novel approach in precision agriculture
    14) Nanoparticle mediated plant gene transfer for precision farming and sustainable agriculture
    15) Nanotechnology for polluted soil remediation.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    Deepak G. Panpatte, Yogeshvari K. Jhala, editors.
    Summary: The emergence of nanotechnology and the development of new nanodevices and nanomaterials have opened up exciting opportunities for novel applications in agriculture and biotechnology. Nanotechnology has the potential to modernize agricultural research and practice, but although it has gained momentum in the agriculture sector over last decade, there are still knowledge gaps between scientific communities. This book presents a comprehensive overview of current developments in nanotechnology-based sustainable agriculture. Focusing on various aspects of nanotechnology in different sectors of agriculture, such as crop production, soil fertility management and crop improvement, it offers insights into the current trends and future prospects of nanotechnology, along with the benefits and risks and their impact on agricultural ecosystems. It also highlights the use of nanotechnology to reduce agrochemical usage, to increase nutrient uptake efficiency and to improve water and nutrient management, and the use of nano-biosensors to manage plant diseases. The book is a valuable reference resource for scientists, policymakers, students and researchers who are engaged in developing strategies to cope with current agricultural challenges.

    Contents:
    Intro; Preface; Contents; About the Editors;
    1: Nanobiotechnology for Agricultural Productivity, Food Security and Environmental Sustainability; 1.1 Introduction; 1.2 Nanotechnology for Agricultural Productivity; 1.2.1 Nanofertilizers; 1.2.2 Nanopesticides; 1.2.3 Nanoparticle-Based Plant Gene Transfer; 1.3 Nanotechnology for Food Security; 1.3.1 Nutrients and Dietary Supplements; 1.3.2 Nanoparticles in Food Processing; 1.3.3 Nanotechnology in Food Packaging and Storage; 1.4 Nanotechnology for Environmental Sustainability; 1.5 Ecological and Health Risks of Nanoparticles 1.6 Conclusion and Future PerspectivesReferences;
    2: Nanofertilizers: A Recent Approach in Crop Production; 2.1 Introduction; 2.2 Challenges of Existing Agricultural Practices; 2.3 Nanofertilizer and Its Role in Agriculture; 2.4 Properties of Nanofertilizer; 2.5 Nanofertilizer a Better Option than Conventional Fertilizers; 2.6 Synthesis of Nanofertilizers; 2.7 Types of Nanofertilizers; 2.7.1 Nitrogen-Based Nanofertilizers; 2.7.2 Phosphate-Based Nanofertilizers; 2.7.3 Iron-Based Nanofertilizers; 2.7.4 Zinc-Based Nanoparticles as Fertilizers; 2.7.5 Titanium-Based Nanofertilizers 2.14 Biosafety Issues Related to the Use of Nanofertilizers2.15 Future Prospects; 2.16 Conclusion; References;
    3: Nanofertilizers: Smart Delivery of Plant Nutrients; 3.1 Introduction; 3.2 Nanotechnology in Agriculture; 3.2.1 Plant Nutrients; 3.2.2 Fertilizers for Nutrients; 3.2.3 Nanomaterials for Slow and Controlled Release of Nutrients; 3.2.4 Smart Delivery of Nutrients; 3.2.5 Nanoformulations for Smart Delivery of Nutrients; 3.2.5.1 Nanoformulations of Macronutrients; 3.2.5.2 Nanoformulations of Micronutrients; 3.2.5.3 Nanoformulations of Biofertilizers; 3.3 Future Prospects 2.7.6 Aluminum-Based Nanoparticles as Fertilizers2.7.7 Copper-Based Nanofertilizers; 2.7.8 Silver-Based Nanofertilizers; 2.8 Nanofertilizer Formulation and Their Delivery System; 2.9 Uptake, Translocation, and Fate of Nanofertilizers in Plants; 2.9.1 Movement of Nanoparticles Inside Plants; 2.10 Fate of Nanofertilizers in Ecosystems; 2.10.1 Different Effects of Nanofertilizers; 2.10.1.1 Plant Toxicity; 2.10.1.2 Effects on Biodiversity and Abundance; 2.11 Nanofertilizers Products; 2.12 Economic Analysis of Nanofertilizers; 2.13 Applications of Nanofertilizers 3.4 Safety and Ethical Issues3.5 Conclusions; References;
    4: Nanoelements: An Agricultural Paradigm for Targeted Plant Nutrition Therapeutic Approach; 4.1 Introduction; 4.2 Nano-fertilizers; 4.2.1 Types of Plant Nutrients; 4.2.2 Micronutrient Fertilizer; 4.3 Why Are Nano-nutrients Required?; 4.4 Need of Nanoagri-nutrient Technology; 4.5 Application of Nanotechnology in Agriculture; 4.6 Nanoparticles as Target Delivery Vehicles; 4.7 Conclusions; References;
    5: Nanoparticles for the Improved Crop Production; 5.1 Introduction
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    Bong-Hyun Jun, editor.
    Summary: This book documents the tremendous progress in the use of nanotechnology for a range of bioapplications with the aim of providing students, researchers, technicians, and other professionals with an up-to-date overview of the field. After a general introduction to the surface modifications of nanoparticles required for different biological applications, and to the properties of the modified nanoparticles, a series of chapters describe the state of the art in respect of different types of nanoparticle, including silica nanoparticles, fluorescent nanomaterials, metal nanoparticles, magnetic nanoparticles, carbon-based nanostructures, and other novel nanomaterials. Detailed information is supplied on methods of preparation, chemical and physical properties, and current and potential applications. The closing chapters discuss lithography methods for the top-down approach to nanoparticle synthesis and the use of spectroscopic studies as a tool for the characterization of each nanoparticle. Future prospects and challenges for the development of further nanomaterials with bioapplications are also covered.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    edited by Baldev Raj, Marcel Van de Voorde, and Yashwant Mahajan.
    Summary: In three handy volumes, this ready reference provides a detailed overview of nanotechnology as it is applied to energy sustainability. Clearly structured, following an introduction, the first part of the book is dedicated to energy production, renewable energy, energy storage, energy distribution, and energy conversion and harvesting. The second part then goes on to discuss nano-enabled materials, energy conservation and management, technological and intellectual property-related issues and markets and environmental remediation. The text concludes with a look at and recommendations for future technology advances. An essential handbook for all experts in the field - from academic researchers and engineers to developers in industry.

    Contents:
    Energy Production. Fossil Fuels: The Effect of Zeolite Catalyst Particle Morphology on Catalyst Performance in the Conversion of Methanol to Hydrocarbons / Katarzyna Anna Łukaszuk, Pablo del Campo Huertas, Andrea Molino, Malte Nielsen, Daniel Rojo-Gama, Juan Salvador Martinez-Espin, Karl Petter Lillerud, Unni Olsbye, Silvia Bordiga, Pablo Beato, Stian Svelle
    Fossil Fuels: Nanotechnologies for Petroleum Reservoir Engineering / Igor N Evdokimov
    Fossil Fuels: Coke-Resistant Nanomaterials for Gas-to-Liquid (GTL) Fuels / Brian A Rosen, Sarika Singh
    Photovoltaics: Light Energy Harvesting with Plasmonic Nanoparticle Networks / Jean-Paul Hugonin, Mondher Besbes, Philippe Ben-Abdallah
    Photovoltaics: Role of Nanotechnology in Dye-Sensitized Solar Cells / Murugesan Janani, Shantikumar V Nair, A Sreekumaran Nair
    Photovoltaics: Nanomaterials for Photovoltaic Conversion / Abdelilah Slaoui, Daniel Lincot, Jean François Guillemoles, Ludovic Escoubas
    Photovoltaics: Light-Trapping in Crystalline Silicon and Thin-Film Solar Cells by Nanostructured Optical Coatings / Pierpaolo Spinelli, Bonna K Newman, Albert Polman
    Photovoltaics: Nanoengineered Materials and Their Functionality in Solar Cells / Kaining Ding, Thomas Kirchartz, Karsten Bittkau, Andreas Lambertz, Vladimir Smirnov, Jürgen Hüpkes, Uwe Rau
    Nonselective Coatings for Solar Thermal Applications in CSP / Raj Kumar Bera, Daniel Mandler, Shlomo Magdassi
    Selective Surfaces for Solar Thermal Energy Conversion in CSP: From Multilayers to Nanocomposites / Audrey Soum-Glaude, Laurie Di Giacomo, Sébastien Quoizola, Thomas Laurent, Gilles Flamant
    Nanobiotechnology Augmenting Biological Gaseous Energy Recovery / Shantonu Roy, Debabrata Das
    Nanotechnologies in Sodium-Cooled Fast Spectrum Reactor and Closed Fuel Cycle Sustainable Nuclear Energy System / Baldev Raj, U Kamachi Mudali
    Nanotechnology and Applications for Electric Power: The Perspective of a Major Player in Electricity / Didier Noël
    Lightweight Nanostructured Materials and Their Certification for Wind Energy Applications / Bikramjit Basu, Sherine Alex, N Eswara Prasad
    Energy Storage and Distribution. Nanostructured Materials for Next-Generation Lithium-Ion Batteries / T Sri Devi Kumari, T Prem Kumar, AK Shukla
    Carbon Nanotube Materials to Realize High-Performance Supercapacitors / Anthony Childress, Jingyi Zhu, Mehmet Karakaya, Deepika Saini, Ramakrishna Podila, Apparao Rao
    Recent Developments and Prospects of Nanostructured Supercapacitors / Katherine L Van Aken, Yury Gogotsi
    Nanostructured and Complex Hydrides for Hydrogen Storage / Lars H Jepsen, Mark Paskevicius, Torben R Jensen
    Nanotechnology for the Storage of Hydrogen / Marek Nowak, Mieczyslaw Jurczyk
    Phase Change Nanomaterials for Thermal Energy Storage / Kinga Pielichowska, Krzysztof Pielichowski
    Carbon Nanotube Wires and Cables: Near-Term Applications and Future Perspectives / Jeremy Lee, Seeram Ramakrishna
    Energy Conversion and Harvesting. Nanostructured Thermoelectric Materials: Current Research and Future Challenges / Hilaal Alam, Seeram Ramakrishna
    Nanostructured Cost-Effective and Energy-Efficient Thermoelectric Materials / Zhi-Gang Chen, Jin Zou
    Nanomaterials for Fuel Cell Technology / KS Dhathathreyan, N Rajalakshmi, R Balaji
    Contributions of Nanotechnology to Hydrogen Production / Sambandam Anandan, Femi Thomas Cheruvathoor, Muthupandian Ashokkumar
    Nanoenhanced Materials for Photolytic Hydrogen Production / Xiuquan Gu, Shuai Yuan, Mingguo Ma, Jiefang Zhu
    Human Vibration Energy Harvester with PZT / Tamil Selvan Ramadoss, Seeram Ramakrishna
    Energy Consumption in Information and Communication Technology: Role of Semiconductor Nanotechnology / Victor V Zhirnov, Kota VRM Murali
    Nanoenabled Materials and Coatings for Energy Applications. Nanocrystalline Bainitic Steels for Industrial Applications / C Garcia-Mateo, FG Caballero
    Graphene and Graphene Oxide for Energy Storage / Edward P Randviir, Craig E Banks
    Inorganic Nanotubes and Fullerene-Like Nanoparticles at the Crossroad between Materials Science and Nanotechnology and Their Applications with Regard to Sustainability / Leela S Panchakarla, Reshef Tenne
    Nanotechnology, Energy, and Fractals Nature / Vojislav V Mitić, Ljubiša M Kocić, Steven Tidrow, Hans-Jörg Fecht
    Magnesium Based Nanocomposites for Cleaner Transport / Manoj Gupta, Sankaranarayanan Seetharaman
    Nanocomposites: A Gaze through Their Applications in Transport Industry / Kottan Renganayagalu Ravi, Jayakrishnan Nampoothiri, Baldev Raj
    Semiconducting Nanowires in Photovoltaic and Thermoelectric Energy Generation / Guglielmo Vastola, Gang Zhang
    Nanoliquid Metal Technology Toward High-Performance Energy Management, Conversion, and Storage / Jing Liu
    IoNanofluids: Innovative Agents for Sustainable Development / Carlos Nieto de Castro, Xavier Paredes, Salomé Vieira, Sohel Murshed, Maria José Lourenço, Fernando Santos
    Energy Conservation and Management. Silica Aerogels for Energy Conservation and Saving / Yamini Ananthan, Keerthi Sanghamitra K, Neha Hebalkar
    Nanotechnology in Architecture / George Elvin
    Nanofluids for Efficient Heat Transfer Applications / Baldev Raj, SA Angayarkanni, John Philip
    Technologies, Intellectual Property, and Markets. Nanomaterials for Li-Ion Batteries: Patents Landscape and Product Scenario / Md Shakeel Iqbal, Nisha C Kalarickal, Vivek Patel, Ratnesh Kumar Gaur
    Nanotechnology in Fuel Cells: A Bibliometric Analysis / Manish Sinha, Ratnesh Kumar Gaur, Harshad Karmarkar
    Techno-Commercial Opportunities of Nanotechnology in Wind Energy / Vivek Patel, YR Mahajan
    Environmental Remediation. Nanomaterials for the Conversion of Carbon Dioxide into Renewable Fuels and Value-Added Products / Ibram Ganesh
    Nanomaterial-Based Methods for Cleaning Contaminated Water in Oil Spill Sites / Boris I Kharisov, HV Rasika Dias, Oxana V Kharissova, Yolanda Peña Méndez
    Nanomaterials and Direct Air Capture of CO2 / Dirk Fransaer.
    Digital Access Wiley 2017
  • Digital
    Devarajan Thangadurai, Jeyabalan Sangeetha, Ram Prasad, editors.
    Summary: Nanotechnology progresses its concerts and suitability by improving its effectiveness, security and also reducing the impact and risk. Various chapters in this book are written by eminent scientists and prominent researchers in the field of nanotechnology across the world. This book is focused to put emerging techniques forward using nanoparticles for safe and nutritional food production, protecting crops from pests, increasing nutritional value and providing solutions for various environmental issues. The outcome of this book creates a path for wide usage of nanoparticles in food, agriculture and the environment fields. This book has clear and simple illustrations, tables and case studies to understand the content even by non-experts. This book especially deals with the nanotechnology for controlling plant pathogens, food packaging and preservation, agricultural productivity, waste water treatment and bioenergy production. Hence, this book can be adopted and used by many researchers and academicians in the fields of food, agriculture, environment and nanotechnology for catering the needs of sustainable future. The salient features of this book are • Describes nanotechnology as an interdisciplinary and emerging field in life sciences • Useful for researchers in the cutting edge life science related fields of nanoscience, nanobiology and nanotechnology • Deal with various problems in food, agriculture and environmental sector for sustainable solutions through the application of nanotechnology • Supported with illustrations in color, tables and case studies (wherever applicable), and • Contributed and well written by nanotechnology experts from across various disciplines.

    Contents:
    Intro
    Preface
    Contents
    About the Editors
    Contributors
    Chapter 1: Nanoparticles from Fungal Resources: Importance and Applications
    1.1 Fungi
    1.2 Nanoparticles and Nanotechnology
    1.3 Properties of Nanoparticles
    1.3.1 Physical Properties
    1.3.2 Biological Properties
    1.3.3 Medical Properties
    1.3.4 Mechanical Properties
    1.3.5 Optical Properties
    1.3.6 Electrical Properties
    1.4 Classification of Nanoparticles
    1.5 Nanoparticles Synthesis
    1.6 Nanoparticle Synthesis by Fungal Resources
    1.6.1 Silver Nanoparticles (Ag-NPs) 1.6.2 Gold Nanoparticles (Au-NPs)
    1.6.3 Other Nanoparticles
    1.7 Applications of Nanoparticles
    1.7.1 Catalysis
    1.7.2 Wound Healing
    1.7.3 Textile Fabrics
    1.7.4 Vegetables and Food Preservation
    1.7.5 Molecular Detection
    1.8 Conclusion
    References
    Chapter 2: Nanoparticle-Incorporated Soy Protein Isolate Films
    2.1 Introduction
    2.2 Soy Protein
    2.3 Nanoparticles
    2.3.1 Non-functionalized/Absence of Reactive Moiety Nanoparticles
    2.3.2 Functionalized/Reactive Moiety Nanoparticles
    2.4 SPI as a Film 2.5 Structural and Reinforcement Effect of Nanoparticle in SPI Film
    2.5.1 FTIR
    2.5.2 Transmittance
    2.5.3 Water Uptake
    2.5.4 Mechanical Properties
    2.5.5 XRD
    2.5.6 SEM and TEM
    2.6 Mode of Interactions Between Nanoparticles and Soy Protein
    2.7 Antimicrobial Effects of Nanoparticles in Soy Protein Film
    2.8 Conclusion and Future Prospects
    References
    Chapter 3: Formulation, Characterization, and Potential Application of Nanoemulsions in Food and Medicine
    3.1 Introduction
    3.2 Types of Nanoemulsions
    3.3 Constituents of Nanoemulsions 3.4 Methodology for the Preparation of Nanoemulsions
    3.4.1 High-Energy Methods
    3.4.1.1 High-Pressure Homogenizer
    3.4.1.2 High Shear Stirring
    3.4.1.3 Ultrasonication Method
    3.4.1.4 Microfluidization
    3.4.2 Low-Energy Methods
    3.4.2.1 Spontaneous Nanoemulsions
    3.4.2.2 Phase Inversion Method
    3.4.2.3 Phase Inversion Temperature (PIT)
    3.4.2.4 Phase Inversion Composition (PIC)
    3.4.3 Bubble Bursting Method
    3.5 Firmness of Nanoemulsions
    3.6 Characterization of Nanoemulsions
    3.6.1 Morphology
    3.6.2 Size
    3.6.3 Zeta Potential (Surface Charge) 3.6.4 Polydispersity Index (PDI)
    3.6.5 Viscosity
    3.6.6 Refractive Index
    3.6.7 Dye Test
    3.6.8 Thermodynamic Stability
    3.6.8.1 Heating and Cooling Cycles
    3.6.8.2 Centrifugation
    3.6.8.3 Freeze and Thaw Cycles
    3.7 Application of Nanoemulsions
    3.7.1 Antimicrobial Nanoemulsions
    3.7.2 Preventive Agents Against Bioterrorism
    3.7.3 Disinfectant Cleaners
    3.7.4 Nanoemulsions in Delivery of Vaccine
    3.7.5 Nanoemulsions for Oral Delivery
    3.7.6 Nanoemulsions in Cell Culture
    3.7.7 Nanoemulsions as Ocular Drug Delivery
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    Vishnu Kirthi Arivarasan, Karthik Loganathan, Pushpamalar Janarthanan, editors.
    Summary: Nanomedicine is the field of science that deals with organic applications of medicine at the nanoscale level. It primarily addresses finding, anticipating, and treating sickness, as well as using nanotechnology to assist in controlling human frameworks at the cellular level. The nature of nanotechnology allows it to address numerous medical issues in humans. This book offers comprehensive information to better comprehend and apply multifunctional nanoparticles in nanomedicine, and thus open avenues in the field. Medicating at the nanolevel is an exceptional therapeutic avenue, as it avoids symptoms associated with conventional medicines. This book investigates recent insights into structuring novel drug delivery frameworks. It concentrates on the physical characteristics of drug delivery transporters, and the preliminary procedures involved in their use. The book offers in-depth detail that benefits academics and researchers alike, containing broad research from experts in the field, and serves as a guide for students and researchers in the field of nanomedicine, drug delivery, and nanotechnology.

    Contents:
    Preface
    Nanomedicine: General Introduction from A to Z
    Immunology and Nanotechnology: Effects and Affects
    Role of Nanotechnology in Sensor Development
    Nanotechnology in the Characterization of Cancer
    Nano Vaccine
    Nanotechnology in Theranostics and In Vivo Imaging
    The Implication of Physical and Chemical Characterization of Therapeutic and Imaging Applications
    Polymers in Nanomedicine
    Delivery of Drug Payloads to Organs and Organ-Systems of Human Beings
    Drug Delivery Towards Cancer
    Drug Delivery Towards Malaria
    Nanotechnology in Tissue Engineering and Implant Development
    Interactions Between Nano-Delivery Agents and Immune Systems
    The Fate of Drug Delivery Agents after Delivery of Payload
    Index.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    Sanjay Singh, Pawan Kumar Maurya, editors.
    Summary: The book introduces the basic concepts of nanotechnology and the various technologies to characterize nanomaterials. It also covers the nanostructural features of mammalian cells/tissues and related nanomechanical properties. In addition, the book comprehensively describes the current state-of-the-art and future perspectives of nanotechnology in biosensors. It also discusses the potential of nanotechnology for delivering the diverse cancer therapeutics and illustrates its limitation due to the potential toxicity associated with oxidative stress. It also highlights the ethical issues and translational aspects related to nanotechnology. Finally, it summarizes the applications of nanotechnology in animal biotechnology, the recent perspectives and future challenges of nanomedicines. The content of the book are beneficial for the undergraduate, postgraduate and doctoral students as well the professionals working in the area of nanotechnology and nanomedicines.

    Contents:
    Intro; Preface; Acknowledgements; Contents; About the Editors; Novel Therapeutics and Diagnostics Strategies Based on Engineered Nanobiomaterials; 1 Introduction; 2 Salient Features of Nanomaterials; 3 Biomedical Applications of Nanomaterials; 3.1 Bone Tissue Engineering; 3.2 Stem Cell Therapy; 3.3 Potential Therapeutics for Neurodegeneration; 3.4 Cancer Therapy; 3.5 Wound Healing Applications; 4 Drug Delivery; 4.1 Nano-emulsions; 4.2 Inorganic Nanoparticles; 4.2.1 Gold Nanoparticles (AuNPs); 4.2.2 Iron Oxide Nanoparticles (IONPs); 4.2.3 Silver Nanoparticles (AgNPs); 4.2.4 Quantum Dots (QDs) 1 Introduction1.1 Mechanism of siRNA Interference; 2 Advantages of siRNA; 2.1 Potency; 2.2 Selectivity; 2.3 Safe and Cheap Alternative; 3 Routes of Administration of siRNA; 3.1 Localized Delivery; 3.1.1 Topical Administration; 3.1.2 Ocular Administration; 3.1.3 Pulmonary Administration; 3.1.4 Gastrointestinal Administration; 3.1.5 Central Nervous System Administration; 3.1.6 Vaginal Administration; 3.2 Systemic Delivery; 3.2.1 Oral Administration; 3.2.2 Intravenous Administration; 3.2.3 Intraperitoneal Administration; 4 Major Hurdles to the Therapeutic Delivery of siRNA; 4.1 Transient Effect 3.2.2 Necrosis3.2.3 Secondary or Apoptotic Necrosis; 3.2.4 Factors Affecting Plasmonic Photothermal Therapy (PPTT); 3.2.5 Mechanism of Plasmonic Photothermal Therapy (PPTT); 4 Plasmonic Photothermal Therapy by Different Gold Nanostructures; 4.1 Gold Nanospheres; 4.2 Gold Nanorods (GNRs); 4.3 Gold Nanoshells (GNSs); 4.4 Gold Nanocages (GNCs) and Gold Nanorattles (GNRTs); 4.5 Gold Nanostars (GNSTs) and Gold Nanopopcorns (GNPs); 4.6 Gold Nanoaggregates; 5 Summary and Outlook; References; Nanomaterials-Based siRNA Delivery: Routes of Administration, Hurdles and Role of Nanocarriers 4.2 Stability4.3 Physiological Barriers; 4.4 Cellular Uptake and Endosomal Engulfing; 4.5 Off-Target Effect; 4.6 Saturation of RNAi Machinery; 4.7 Stimulation of Immune System by siRNAs; 5 Overcoming the Hurdles to siRNA Delivery Using Nanocarriers; 6 The Aid of Nanocarriers for siRNA Delivery; 6.1 Enhanced Blood Retention Time; 6.2 Enhanced Stability and Cell Penetration Property; 6.3 Site-Specific Delivery; 6.4 pH-Sensitive Trigger Release; 6.5 Avoid Intracellular Endosomal Engulfing; 7 Classification of Nanocarriers Used for Systemic Delivery of siRNA; 7.1 Organic Nanocarriers 5 Nanomaterials in Diagnostics5.1 Nanocomposites; 5.2 Nanoparticles; 5.3 Quantum Dots; 6 Conclusions and Future Prospective; References; Gold Nanostructures for Photothermal Therapy; 1 Introduction; 2 Types of Gold Nanostructures and Their Optical Properties; 2.1 Gold Nanospheres; 2.2 Gold Nanorods; 2.3 Gold Nanoshells; 2.4 Gold Nanocages and Nanorattles; 2.5 Gold Nanostars (GNSTs) and Gold Nanopopcorns (GNPs); 3 Mechanism of Heat Generation and Cell Death Induced by Plasmonic Photothermal Therapy (PTT); 3.1 Mechanism of Heat Generation; 3.2 Mechanism of Cell Death; 3.2.1 Apoptosis
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    Mahendra Rai, editor.
    Summary: The main goal of the present book is to deal with the role of nanobiotechnology in skin, soft tissue and bone infections since it is difficult to treat the infections due to the development of resistance in them against existing antibiotics. The present interdisciplinary book is very useful for a diverse group of readers including nanotechnologists, medical microbiologists, dermatologists, osteologists, biotechnologists, bioengineers. Nanotechnology in Skin, Soft Tissue, and Bone Infections is divided into four sections: Section I- includes role of nanotechnology in skin infections such as atopic dermatitis, and nanomaterials for combating infections caused by bacteria and fungi. Section II- incorporates how nanotechnology can be used for soft-tissue infections such as diabetic foot ulcer and other wound infections; Section III- discusses about the nanomaterials in artificial scaffolds bone engineering and bone infections caused by bacteria and fungi; and also about the toxicity issues generated by the nanomaterials in general and nanoparticles in particular. The readers will be immensely enriched by the knowledge of new and emerging nanobiotechnologies in a variety of platforms.

    Contents:
    Intro
    Preface
    Contents
    Contributors
    Part I: Skin Infections
    Chapter 1: Nitric Oxide-Releasing Nanomaterials and Skin Infections
    1.1 Introduction
    1.2 NO and Human Skin
    1.3 Delivering NO to Human Skin
    1.4 Nanoparticles for Dermatological Applications
    1.4.1 Liposomes
    1.4.2 Polymeric Nanoparticles
    1.4.3 Metallic Nanoparticles
    1.5 NO-Releasing Nanomaterials for Biomedical Purposes
    1.5.1 NO-Releasing Nanoparticles in the Management of Skin Infection
    1.5.1.1 Bacterial Infections
    1.5.1.2 Fungal Infections
    1.5.1.3 Parasitic Infections 1.6 Conclusions
    References
    Chapter 2: Metal Nanoparticle Based Antibacterial Nanocomposites for Skin Infections
    2.1 Introduction
    2.2 Anatomy and Physicochemical Properties of Skin
    2.3 Type of Bacterial Infections in Skin
    2.4 Emergence of Various Types of Metal Nanoparticles (MNPs) and Its Composites
    2.5 Essences of New Class of Nanoscale Materials Suitable Against Skin Infections
    2.6 Nanoscale Materials as Antibacterial Skincare Agents
    2.6.1 Metal Nanoparticles
    2.6.1.1 Silver Nanoparticles (Ag NPs)
    2.6.1.2 Gold Nanoparticles (Au NPs)
    2.6.2 Metal Oxide NPs 2.6.2.1 Titanium Dioxide Nanoparticles
    2.6.2.2 Zinc Oxide Nanoparticles
    2.6.2.3 Copper Oxide Nanoparticles
    2.6.2.4 Other Metal Oxide Nanoparticles
    2.6.3 Nanocomposites
    2.7 Proposed Mathematical Models of Penetration of NPs Through Skin
    2.8 Diffusion of NPs Through Skin
    2.8.1 Mathematical Model for Diffusion Through Skin
    2.8.2 Metal and Metal Oxide NPs Diffusion Through Skin
    2.9 Conclusion
    References
    Chapter 3: Combination Therapy Using Metal Nanoparticles for Skin Infections
    3.1 Introduction
    3.2 Skin Infections
    3.3 Types of Skin Infections 3.3.1 Bacterial Skin Infections
    3.3.2 Fungal Skin Infections
    3.3.2.1 Athlete's Foot or Tinea pedis
    3.3.2.2 Jock Itch or Tinea cruris
    3.3.2.3 Ringworm or Tinea corporis
    3.3.2.4 Yeast Infections
    3.3.3 Viral Skin Infections
    3.3.3.1 Herpes Simplex Virus (HSV)
    3.3.3.2 Chickenpox (Varicella zoster)
    3.3.3.3 Shingle (Herpes zoster)
    3.3.3.4 Molluscum Contagiosum
    3.3.3.5 Measles and Rubella
    3.3.3.6 Hand-Foot-and-Mouth Disease
    3.3.3.7 Roseola
    3.3.3.8 Warts
    3.3.4 Parasitic Infections
    3.4 Metal and Metal Oxide Nanoparticles on Skin Infections 3.4.1 Silver Nanoparticles (AgNPs)
    3.4.2 Gold Nanoparticles (AuNPs)
    3.4.3 Copper Nanoparticles (CuNPs)
    3.4.4 Copper Oxide Nanoparticles (CuO NPs)
    3.4.5 Titanium Oxide Nanoparticles (TiO2 NPs) and Zinc Oxide Nanoparticles (ZnO NPs)
    3.5 Human Skin Penetration of Metallic Nanoparticles
    3.6 Combined Therapy of Metallic Nanoparticles in Bacterial Skin Infections
    3.7 Combined Therapy of Metallic Nanoparticles in Fungal Skin Infections
    3.8 Combined Therapy of Metallic Nanoparticles in Viral Skin Infections
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    Mahendra Rai, Bushra Jamil, editors.
    Summary: This book is specifically designed to provide information about various nanocarriers currently developed under the emerging field of nanotheranostics for a sustained, controlled, and targeted co-delivery of diagnostic and therapeutic agents. Diverse theranostic applications of nanotechnology and their limitations are also addressed. It integrates nanobiotechnology with theranostic applications. The combined term nanotheranostics has diverse application particularly in chemotherapy and other infectious diseases. Among other topics addressed are antimicrobial resistance, targeting intra-cellular pathogens, viruses and bacteria, chemotherapy, cancer therapeutics, and inflammatory disorders. This interdisciplinary volume, Nanotheranostics, Applications and Limitations, is essential for a diverse group of readers including nanotechnologists, microbiologists, biotechnologists, bioengineering and bioprocess industry.

    Contents:
    Nanotheranostics: An emerging nanoscience
    Green bionanomaterials: current status and future prospects in theranostics
    Current status and prospects of Chitosan-metal Nanoparticles and their applications as theranostic agents
    Aptamersnano complexes and aptamer based biosensors' role in ultrasensitive sensing
    Nanotheranostics Approaches In Antimicrobial Resistance
    Nanomaterials for selective targeting of intracellular pathogens
    Impact of nanoformulations on viruses and bacteria
    Theranostic potential of aptamers in antimicrobial chemotherapy
    Current and future aspects of nanotheranostics in cancer therapeutics
    Superparamagnetic Iron Oxide Nanoparticles (SPIONs) for Cancer Theranostic applications
    Theranostic applications of Nanobiotechnology in Cancer
    Aminolevulinic acid associated with nanotechnology for theranostic applications
    Non-viral targeted gene delivery for inflammatory disorder: applications and limitation.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    Vineet Kumar, Praveen Guleria, Shivendu Ranjan, Nandita Dasgupta, Eric Lichtfouse, editors.
    Summary: This book discusses the basics of nanotoxicity and gives a detailed account of methods used for toxicity evaluation of nanomaterials. It also gives indepth coverage of the effect of different types of nanomaterials, including organic and inorganic, on various aquatic animals, microorganisms and plants, and outlines recent challenges, regulatory frameworks and advances in nanotoxicity testing.

    Contents:
    Preface
    Chapter 1. Introduction, Principles, and Concepts
    Chapter 2. Nanomaterials and Health
    Chapter 3. Safety and Utility of Nanomaterials on Reproduction and Development: an Update of Alternative Methods
    Chapter 4. Nano-Toxicity to Microbes: Potential Implications of Nanomaterials on Microbial Activity
    Chapter 5. Nanomaterials Causing Cellular Toxicity and Genotoxicity
    Chapter 6. Exploring Microbial Nanotoxicity Against Drug Resistance in Bacteria
    Chapter 7. Toxicity of Engineered Nanostructures in Aquatic Environments
    Chapter 8. In Vitro Methodologies For Toxicological Assessment Of Drug Delivery Nanocarriers
    Chapter 9. Impact Of Nanomaterials On The Food Chain
    Chapter 10. Phytoresponse to Nanoparticles Exposure
    Chapter 11. Environmental Impact and Econanotoxicity of Engineered Nanomaterials.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    Dayong Wang.
    Summary: This book focuses on the toxicity of engineered nanomaterials (ENMs) and their underlying physicochemical, cellular, physiological, and molecular mechanisms. Further, it covers ENMs' translocation and their targeted organ toxicology, and discusses chemical and pharmacological strategies used to combat nanotoxicity. Engineered nanomaterials (ENMs) are defined as materials with one or more dimensions of less than 100 nm, and have shown considerable promise in several areas of development. At the same time, the potential toxicity of ENMs for human health and environmental organisms is increasingly attracting attention. In addition to the typical properties of model animals, Caenorhabditis elegans is extremely sensitive to environmental toxicants, which makes it the ideal in vivo assay system for toxicological studies. C. elegans has been widely used in toxicity assessment and toxicological studies of environmental toxicants and stresses. This book provides a comprehensive summary of nanotoxicology research on C. elegans.

    Contents:
    Intro; Preface; Contents;
    Chapter 1: Values of C. elegans in Toxicological Study; 1.1 Introduction; 1.2 Raise of a Series of Useful Sublethal Endpoints for Toxicity Assessment of Environmental Toxicants; 1.3 High-Throughput Screen and Identification of Chemicals; 1.4 Toxicity Assessment of Environmental Toxicants Under Susceptible Genetic Backgrounds; 1.5 Toxicity Assessment of Environmental Toxicants at Environmentally Relevant Concentrations; 1.6 Understanding the In Vivo Physicochemical, Cellular, and Physiological Mechanisms of Toxicity Induced by Environmental Toxicants. 1.7 Elucidation of Toxicological Mechanisms of Environmental Toxicants in Certain Targeted Organs1.8 Elucidation of Underlying Molecular Mechanisms of Toxicity Induced by Environmental Toxicants; 1.9 Distribution and Translocation of Environmental Toxicants; 1.10 Confirmation of Chemical with Low-Toxicity or Non-Ưtoxicity Property; 1.11 Limitations of C. elegans in the Toxicological Study; References;
    Chapter 2: Endpoints for Toxicity Assessment of Nanomaterials; 2.1 Introduction; 2.2 Lethality; 2.3 Morphology and Development; 2.4 Reproduction. 2.4.1 Endpoints Assessing the Development of Reproductive Organs2.4.1.1 Germline Apoptosis; 2.4.1.2 Number of Apoptotic Cells per Gonad Arm Using CED-1::GFP Transgenic Strain; 2.4.1.3 Assay of DNA Damage Using HUS-1::GFP Transgenic Strain; 2.4.1.4 Assay of 40,6-Diamidino-2-Phenylindole (DAPI) Staining; 2.4.2 Endpoints Assessing the Function of Reproductive Organs; 2.4.2.1 Brood Size; 2.4.2.2 The Number of Oocytes; 2.4.2.3 Egg Ejection; 2.4.2.4 Embryonic Lethality; 2.4.3 Reproduction of Male Nematodes; 2.4.3.1 Male Formation Assay; 2.4.3.2 Abnormal Male-Specific Structures. 2.5 Neuronal Development and Function2.5.1 Neuronal Development; 2.5.1.1 Analysis of Axonal Degeneration and Neuronal Loss of D-Type GABAergic Motor Neurons; 2.5.1.2 Fluorescent Images of Certain Neurons; 2.5.2 Neuronal Function; 2.5.2.1 Movement Speed; 2.5.2.2 Locomotion Behavior; 2.5.2.3 Thermotaxis Perception and Thermotaxis Learning Assays; 2.5.2.4 Foraging Behavior Assay; 2.5.2.5 Shrinking Behavior Assay; 2.5.2.6 Neurotransmission; 2.6 Intestinal Development and Function; 2.6.1 Intestinal Development. 2.6.1.1 Analysis of Intestinal Development Based on Transmission Electron Microscopy (TEM) Assay2.6.1.2 Analysis of Expression Patterns of Genes Required for the Control of Intestinal Development; 2.6.2 Intestinal Function; 2.6.2.1 Intestinal Reactive Oxygen Species (ROS) Production; 2.6.2.2 Intestinal Permeability; 2.6.3 Defecation Behavior; 2.6.3.1 Defecation Behavior; 2.6.3.2 Analysis and Fluorescent Images of Neurons Controlling the Defecation Behavior; 2.6.3.3 Analysis of Expression Patterns of Genes Required for the Control of Defecation Behavior; 2.7 Epidermal Development.
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Digital
    Henriqueta Louro, Maria João Silva, editors.
    Summary: Since its advent, nanotechnologies are considered key enabling technologies that take advantage of a wide array of nanomaterials (NMs) for biomedical and industrial applications generating significant societal and economic benefits. However, such innovation increases human exposure to these substances through inhalation, ingestion or dermal contact raising public health concerns. Furthermore, the NMs specific physicochemical properties, that confer them unique beneficial characteristics, can also elicit nano-bio interactions leading to toxicity and concerns for public health. In addition, such properties can be affected by the surrounding matrix, particularly when incorporated in complex matrices such as food products, leading to secondary features potentially more relevant than primary characteristics for determining their toxicological outcome. These nano specific issues raise the question of whether the NMs may produce adverse outcomes that are not accounted for when using conventional toxicological approaches to assess their safety. Such uncertainties about the safety of NMs for human health and the environment may hamper a faster and more widespread exploration of their potentials. In response, the NMs definition has evolved, and nanotoxicology has developed towards new and more integrative approach methods to support regulatory and policy actions. This book provides a perspective on recent developments in the synthesis, application, and characterization of NMs and the related nanotechnologies, focusing on nanotoxicology for their accurate safety assessment early in the product development stage. The use of complex in vitro models, including multicellular systems and organoids, and "omics-based" approaches, such as transcriptomics or epigenomics, have greatly contributed to an in-depth understanding of the cellular and molecular mechanisms behind some NMs toxicity. Such mechanistic knowledge is equally addressed in this book and has set the basis for a predictive nanotoxicology approach building on adverse outcome pathways. In addition, considering the knowledge provided by the above-mentioned approaches, insights into risk assessment, standardization, and regulation of NMs are also included. Incorporating adequate nanosafety assessment early in the life-cycle of NMs will allow the implementation of the safe and sustainable-by-design paradigm enabling safety to keep pace with innovation. Chapters 10 and 15 are available open access under a Creative Commons Attribution 4.0 International License via link.springer.com.

    Contents:
    Part I: Nanotechnologies: Synthesis, application and characterization of nanomaterials
    Chapter 1. Challenges in Nanomaterial Characterization From Definition to Analysis (Jose Catita)
    Chapter 2.Trends in the design and evaluation of polymeric nanocarriers: the in vitro nano-bio interactions (Ana Bettencourt, Lidia Goncalves)
    Chapter 3. LipNanoCar technology - A versatile and scalable technology for the production of lipid nanoparticles (Vera L.R. Esgueira, Clara P.A. Lopes, Ana Catarina A. dos Santos, Fatima C.R.V. Pinto, Silvia A. Sousa, Dragana P.C. de Barros, Jorge H. Leitao, Luis P. Fonseca)
    Chapter 4. Dermal delivery of lipid nanoparticles: Effects on skin and assessment of absorption and safety (Fatima Pinto, Luis P. Fonseca, Dragana P.C. de Barros)
    Chapter 5. Targeting cancer by using nanoparticles to modulate Rho GTPase signalling (Paulo Matos, Joana F. S. Pereira and Peter Jordan)
    Chapter 6. Nanocelluloses: production, characterization and market (Paulo J. T. Ferreira, Ana F. Lourenco)
    Part II: Nanotoxicology: concepts and methodologies for toxicity evaluation of the nanomaterials
    Chapter 7. Nanotoxicology assessment and safety aspects of nanocelluloses for 3D bioprinting applications (Gary Chinga-Carrasco, Jennifer Rosendahl, and Julia Catalan)
    Chapter 8. New "omics" approaches as a tool to explore mechanistic nanotoxicology (Celia Ventura, Vukosava Torres, Luis Vieira, Bruno Gomes, Antonio Sebastiao Rodrigues, Jose Rueff, Deborah Penque, Maria Joao Silva)
    Chapter 9. Epigenetic mechanisms in understanding nanomaterial-induced toxicity (Manosij Ghosh, Lode Godderis, Peter Hoet)
    Chapter 10. Cellular and molecular mechanisms of toxicity of ingested nanomaterials (Adriana Vieira, Ana Gramacho, Dora Rolo, Nadia Vital, Maria Joao Silva, Henriqueta Louro)
    Chapter 11. Nanomaterial-induced extra-pulmonary health effects - the importance of next generation physiologically relevant in vitro test systems for the future of nanotoxicology (Ali Kermanizadeh, Gwyndaf Roberts)
    Chapter 12. Drosophila as a suitable in vivo model in the safety assessment of nanomaterials (Esref Demir, Fatma Turna Demir, and Ricard Marcos)
    Chapter 13. Toxicological aspects of iron oxide nanoparticles (Natalia Fernandez-Bertolez,b, Carla Costa, Fatima Brandao, Joao Paulo Teixeira, Eduardo Pasaro, Vanessa Valdiglesias, Blanca Laffon)
    Chapter 14. Hazard assessment of benchmark metallic nanomaterials through a set of in vitro genotoxicity assays (Nadia Vital, Mariana Pinhao, Naouale El Yamani, Elise Ruden-Pran, Henriqueta Louro, Maria Dusinska, Maria Joao Silva)
    Part III: Towards the risk assessment and regulation of nanomaterials
    Chapter 15. Nanomaterials, a new challenge in the workplace (Ana Rita Alberto, Cristina Matos, Gabriel Carmona-Aparicio, Muriel Iten)
    Chapter 16. Nanomaterials in foods and human digestion: an important layer in the assessment of potential toxic effects (Carla Martins, Paula Alvito, Ricardo Assuncao)
    Chapter 17. Adverse Outcome Pathways (AOPs) development, a tool for predictive nanotoxicology (Dora Rolo, Ana Tavares, Nadia Vital, Maria Joao Silva and Henriqueta Louro).
    Digital Access Springer 2022
  • Digital
    Meeta Goswami, S.R. Pandi-Perumal, Michael J. Thorpy, editors.
    Contents:
    Section I
    Etiology
    1. The Genetics of Narcolepsy
    2. Orexin (Hypocretin) and Narcolepsy
    3. Precipitants of Narcolepsy: Vaccines and Infections
    Section II
    Clinical Considerations
    4. Epidemiology of Narcolepsy
    5. Diagnostic Criteria and Delay in Diagnosis of Narcolepsy
    6. Narcolepsy in Childhood
    7. Narcolepsy in the Older Adult
    8. Hypnagogic Hallucinations and Sleep Paralysis
    9. Symptomatic Narcolepsy or Hypersomnia, with and without Hypocretin (Orexin) Deficiency
    10. Hypersomnias Other than Narcolepsy: Differential Diagnosis
    11. Narcolepsy and Other Comorbid Medical Illnesses
    12. Sleep Disorders Comorbidities in Narcolepsy and their Management
    13. Neuroimaging of Narcolepsy
    Section III
    Psychosocial Considerations
    14. Quality of Life and Psychosocial Issues in Narcolepsy: Implications for Management
    15. Narcolepsy, Intimacy and Sexuality
    16. Memory and Cognition in Narcolepsy
    17. Psychoanalysis and Narcolepsy
    18. Dreaming in Narcolepsy
    19. Narcolepsy and Mental Illness
    20. Narcolepsy, Driving and Traffic Safety
    Section IV
    Management
    21. Overview of Management of Narcolepsy
    22. Modes of Action of Drugs Related to Narcolepsy: Pharmacology of Wake-Promoting Compounds and Anticataplectics
    23. Modafinil/Armodafinil in the Treatment of Narcolepsy
    24. Sodium Oxybate in the Treatment of Narcolepsy
    25. Pregnancy and Anaesthesia in Narcolepsy
    26. Emerging Treatments for Narcolepsy
    27. Behavioral and Non-Pharmacological Management of Narcolepsy
    Section V
    Health Care Delivery and Medico-Legal Considerations
    28. Narcolepsy and Developmental Disability
    29. Succeeding in School and in the Workplace with Narcolepsy
    30. Medico-Legal Aspects of Disability in Narcolepsy
    31. The Affordable Care Act and the Future of Sleep Medicine.
    Digital Access Springer 2016
  • Digital
    edited by Peter M. Kellett.
    Contents:
    Introduction
    Narrating patienthood: voicing, empowering, advocating
    Narratives of patient experience
    From stories to discoveries
    Cultural communication competency as a two-way street
    If I die, who will tell their stories?
    Narrating patienthood: differences that matter
    African Americans and hospice care
    "Can you please direct me to a doctor that has a heart?"
    Exploring the effects of patient-provider communication on the lives of women with vulvodynia
    Queer patienthood
    An autoethnographic account of navigating patienthood as a person with hearing impairment
    Narrating patienthood: intersections of communication and the personal, relational, professional, and cultural
    From consumer to community-based researcher
    The gendered nature of generosity in post-hysterectomy "dear honey" letters
    The narrative journey and decision-making process of plastic surgery patienthood
    Narrative sense-making in systemic lupus erthematosus
    Healthy mother, healthy baby
    Ableist Biases
    Index
    About the contributors.
  • Print
    edited by Jessica Bylander ; foreword by Abraham Verghese, MD.
    Summary: "This second edition features a new collection of thirty-two essays previously published in the Narrative Matters section of the journal Health Affairs in recent years. As in the first edition, the essays are divided into topical areas such as the doctor-patient relationship, health care delivery and reform, care for aging patients, and the opioid crisis. The book could be adopted for courses on medical humanities or narrative medicine. The essays are written by some of the leading popular writers in health care today"-- Provided by publisher.

    Contents:
    The practice of medicine
    Medical innovation and research
    Patient-centered care
    The doctor-patient relationship
    Disparities and discrimination
    Aging and end-of-life care
    Maternity and childbirth
    Opioids and substance abuse.
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    New Books Shelf (Duck Room)
    RA393 .N37 2020
    1
  • Digital
    Maria Giulia Marini.
    Contents:
    Evidence-based medicine and narrative medicine: a harmonic couple
    Bridging from mythology to contemporary care: the art of listening
    Bridging from oral tradition to writing: the art of empathy
    The Tower of Babel: the language of physicians, patients, and providers of care
    Patient's narrative as a probe for successful coping
    The muted desire for well-being and the abuse of the word "normality" in medicine
    Bridging the gap between personalization of care and research
    The place of illness-centred movies in medical humanities
    Designing health care based on patient's needs and rights
    Building a bridge between economic investment and medical humanities: the fears to overcome
    A selection of narratives
    Glossary: a tool to bridge the gap between medical humanities, medical science, health-care organization, and health-care economics.
    Digital Access Springer 2016
  • Digital
    Jun Ma, Nancy Y. Lee, Jiade J. Lu, editors.
    Summary: This book provides up-to-date guidance that will assist radiation oncologists during the day-to-day management of nasopharyngeal cancer. After discussion of diagnosis and staging, target delineation techniques and treatment planning are described for both intensity-modulated and particle radiation therapy. Detailed information is then presented on the application of radiation therapy in different disease settings, from early stage disease to metastatic disease. Due attention is paid to the role of multimodality treatment and new and advanced technologies in particular circumstances, such as local recurrence. In addition, follow-up and the management of late toxicities are explained and management strategies are documented for special situations and groups, including pediatric patients. The book is published within the Springer series Practical Guides in Radiation Oncology. Like other volumes in the series, it is designed for hands-on use by both radiation oncology residents and practicing radiation oncologists. It will also be of value for head and neck physicians.

    Contents:
    1.Diagnosis Staging of Nasopharyngeal Cancer
    2.Contouring Methods and Atlas of Organs at Risk
    3.Management of neck disease in early stage disease
    4.Multimodality Management for Locally Advanced Nasopharyngeal Cancer
    5.Intesity-modulated radiation therapy for Nasopharyngeal Cancer
    6.Particle beam radiation therapy for Nasopharyngeal Cancer
    7.Treatment of Metastatic Nasopharyngeal Cancer
    8.Salvage radiation therapy for locally recurrent Nasopharyngeal Cancer
    9.The Use of the EBV Blood Test in Clinical Management Decision
    10.Management of Radiotherapy Induced Acute Toxicities
    11.Management of Radiation-induced Late Complications and Evidence-based Surveillance for Nasopharyngeal Carcinoma
    12.Special Consideration in Pediatric Nasopharyngeal Cancer.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    editors, Sue S. Yom, Joseph Wee.
    Contents:
    Nasopharyngeal carcinoma : management strategies / Sue S. Yom & Joseph Wee
    Epidemiology of nasopharyngeal carcinoma / Yoke Lim Soong & Ivan Weng Keong Tham
    Nasopharyngeal carcinoma : imaging / Eric Y.S. Ting, Chih Ching Choong & Vincent F.H. Chong
    Nasopharyngeal cancer staging / John Kim
    Early-stage nasopharyngeal carcinoma / Henry CK Sze, Ka On Lam & Anne W.M. Lee
    Management of locally and regionally advanced nasopharyngeal carcinoma with chemoradiotherapy / Benjamin H. Lok & Nancy Y. Lee
    Management of the node negative neck in early-stage nasopharyngeal carcinoma / Francis C.H. Ho & Jiade J. Lu
    Nasopharyngeal carcinoma : staging work-up and surveillance / Azita S. Khorsandi & Kenneth Hu
    Oligometastatic disease / Amy T.Y. Chang, Oscar S.H. Chan, Simon S. Lo & Wai Tong Ng
    Salvage treatment for local recurrence / Dora L.W. Kwong & Jimmy Y.W. Chan
    Nasopharyngeal carcinoma : distant metastasis / Wu-Meng Tan & Darren Wan-Teck Lim
    Epstein-Barr virus diagnostic and therapeutic opportunities in nasopharyngeal carcinoma / Radha Raghupathy, Edwin Pun Hui & Anthony T.C. Chan
    Emerging molecular targets in the treatment of nasopharyngeal carcinoma / Herbert H. Loong & Lillian L. Siu
    Survivorship and quality of life after treatment for nasopharyngeal cancer / Minh Tam Truong
    Ask the experts : maximizing the therapeutic ratio in the treatment of nasopharyngeal carcinoma / Sue S. Yom & Joseph Wee
    Multiple choice questions : answers.
    Digital Access Future Med 2014
  • Digital
    [edited by] Isam Alobid, Paolo Castelnuovo.
    Contents:
    Nasal anatomy / Alfonso García-Piñero, Eugenio Cárdenas, Ariel Kaen, Juan Antonio Simal-Julian
    Nasal physiology / Jonathan Frankel, Emily Hrisomalos, Steven M. Houser
    Nasal septum and nasal wall vascularization / Juan R. Gras-Cabrerizo, Juan Ramón Gras Albert, Elena Garcia-Garrigós, Humbert Massegur-Solench
    Nasal perforation etiology / Mauricio López-Chacón, Arturo Cordero Castillo, Cristobal Langdon, Francesca Jaume, Isam Alobid
    Systemic diseases associated with septal perforation / Mauricio López-Chacón, Arturo Cordero Castillo, Cristobal Langdon, Alfonso Santamaría, Isam Alobid
    Preoperative clinical evaluation of patient / Fabio Ferreli, Paolo Castelnuovo
    Conservative treatment / Arturo Cordero Castillo, Mauricio López-Chacón, Cristobal Langdon, Isam Alobid
    Nasal perforation and septal prosthesis / Meritxell Valls, Alfonso Santamaría, Isam Alobid
    Free grafts / Hesham A.K.A. Mansour
    Repair of nasal septal perforation by using middle turbinate flap / Deniz Hanci, Huseyin Altun
    Inferior turbinate flap / Cristobal Langdon, Isam Alobid
    Lateral nasal wall flap / Cristobal Langdon, Mauricio López-Chacón, Arturo Cordero Castillo, Alfonso Santamaría, Paula Mackers, Isam Alobid
    Anterior ethmoidal artery septal flap / Paolo Castelnuovo, Fabio Ferreli, Pietro Palma
    Unilateral mucosal advancement flap / Jung Soo Kim, Sung Jae Heo
    Bilateral cross-over flap technique / Shirley Shizue Nagata Pignatari, Aldo Cassol Stamm, Leonardo Balsalobre
    Bilateral septal mucosal flaps in septal perforations / José J. Letort
    Unilateral nasal floor and inferior meatus flap / Meritxell Valls Mateus, Cristobal Langdon, Isam Alobid
    Facial artery musculomucosal flap / Tareck Ayad, Philippe Lavigne, Ilyes Berania
    'Slide and patch' technique / Michele Cassano
    Backward extraction-reposition technique of quadrangular cartilage / Ignazio Tasca, Giacomo Ceroni Compadretti
    Pericranial flap and endoscopic septal repair / Alfonso Santamaría, Cristobal Langdon, Mauricio López-Chacón, Arturo Cordero Castillo, Isam Alobid
    Quality of life / Fabio Ferreli, Paolo Castelnuovo
    Endoscopic repair for septal perforation : algorithm / Fabio Ferreli, Paolo Castelnuovo.
  • Digital
    [edited by] Stuart H. Orkin, David E. Fisher, David Ginsburg, A. Thomas Look, Samuel E. Lux, David G. Nathan.
    Contents:
    Anatomy and physiology of hematopoiesis
    The neonatal erythrocyte and its disorders
    Immune hemolytic disease
    Neonatal jaundice and disorders of bilirubin metabolism
    Hemostasis in the newborn and infant
    Acquired aplastic anemia and pure red cell aplasia
    Inherited bone marrow failure syndromes
    Principles of bone marrow and stem cell transplantation
    Diagnostic approach to the anemic patient
    Megaloblastic anemia
    Disorders of iron and copper metabolism, the sideroblastic anemias, and lead toxicity
    Porphyrias
    Autoimmune hemolytic anemia
    Paroxysmal nocturnal hemoglobinuria
    Red cell membrane
    Disorders of the red cell membrane
    Pyruvate kinase deficiency and disorders of glycolysis
    Glucose-6-phosphate dehydrogenase deficiency
    Normal and abnormal hemoglobins
    Sickle cell disease
    Thalassemias
    Phagocyte system and disorders of granulopoiesis and granulocyte function
    Immune response
    Primary immunodeficiency diseases
    Lysosomal storage diseases
    Platelets and the vessel wall
    Blood coagulation
    Molecular basis of fibrinolysis
    Approach to the child with a suspected bleeding disorder
    Inherited platelet disorders
    Hemophilia and von Willebrand disease
    Rare hereditary coagulation factor abnormalities
    Inherited disorders of thrombosis and fibrinolysis
    Acquired platelet defects
    Acquired disorders of hemostasis
    Transfusion medicine
    Hematologic manifestations of systemic diseases
    Hematologic manifestations of systemic diseases in children of the developing world
    Origins and evolution of pediatric cancers
    Epidemiology of leukemia in childhood
    Informatics
    Genetic predisposition to cancer
    Genetics and epigenetics of childhood cancers
    Targeted therapies in oncology
    Cytogenetic and molecular pathology of pediatric cancer
    Cancer chemotherapy for pediatric patients
    Immunotherapy of cancer
    Pediatric radiation oncology
    Pediatric surgical oncology
    Acute lymphoblastic leukemia
    Pediatric myeloid leukemia, myelodysplasia, and myeloproliferative disease
    Infant leukemias
    Pediatric lymphoma
    Neuroblastoma
    Pediatric renal tumors
    Retinoblastoma
    Tumors of the brain and spinal cord
    Hepatoblastoma and other liver tumors in children
    Rhabdomyosarcoma
    Nonrhabdomyosarcoma soft tissue sarcomas and other soft tissue tumors
    Ewing sarcoma
    Osteosarcoma
    Pediatric germ cell tumors
    Histiocytoses
    Rare tumors of childhood
    Imaging in the evaluation and management of childhood cancer
    Infectious disease in the pediatric cancer patient
    Oncologic emergencies
    Nursing care of patients with childhood cancer
    Palliative care in pediatric oncology
    Symptom management in children with cancer
    Childhood cancer survivorship
    Psychosocial care of the child and family
    Ethical considerations in pediatric oncology clinical trials
    Reference values in infancy and childhood.
    Digital Access ClinicalKey 2015
  • Print
    Print
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Click on Series link(s) for access options
  • Digital/Print
    World Health Organization.
    Summary: "This manual serves as a step-by-step practical reference to support countries in building capacity for integrating health inequality monitoring into their health information systems. It presents a range of World Health Organization tools and resources developed for measuring and reporting health inequality"--Publisher's description.

    Contents:
    Determine scope of the monitoring
    Obtain data
    Analyse data
    Report results
    Implement changes.
    Digital Access WHO 2017
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Books: General Collection (Downstairs)
    RA8.A4 N38 2017
    1
  • Digital
    [edited by] Scott J. Gilbert, Daniel E. Weiner ; associate editors, Debbie S. Gipson, Mark A. Perazella, Marcello Tonelli.
    Contents:
    Overview of kidney function and structure
    Kidney development
    Assessment of glomerular filtration rate in acute and chronic settings
    Urinalysis and urine microscopy
    Hematuria and proteinuria
    Kidney imaging
    Hyponatremia and hypoosmolar disorders
    Hypernatremia
    Edema and the clinical use of diuretics
    Disorders of potassium metabolism
    Disorders of mineral matabolism: calcium, phosphorus, and magnesium
    Approach to acid-base disorders
    Metabolic acidosis
    Metabolis alkalosis
    Respiratory acidosis and alkalosis
    Glomerular clinicopathologic syndromes
    Minimal change disease
    Focal segmental glomerulosclerosis
    Membranous nephropathy
    Immunoglobulin A nephropathy and related disorders
    Goodpasture syndrome and other antiglomerular basement membrane diseases
    Postinfectious glomerulonephritis
    Kidney involvement in systemic vasculitis
    Kidney manifestations of systemic lupus erythematosus
    Pathogenesis, pathophysiology, and treatment of diabetic nephropathy
    Dysproteinemias and amyloidosis
    Thrombotic microangiopathies
    Viral nephropathies: human immunodeficiency virus, hepatitis C virus and hepatitis B virus
    Acute cardiorenal syndrome
    Hepatorenal syndrome and other liver-related kidney deseases
    Kidney incancers
    Pathophysiology of acute kidney injury
    Clinical approach to the diagnosis of acute kidney injury
    Acute tubular injury and tubular necrosis
    Acute interstitial nephritis
    Management of acute kidney injury
    Kidney disease causes by therapeutic agents
    Principles of drug therapy in patients with reduced kidney function
    Genetically based renal transport disorders
    Sickle cell nephropathy
    Polycystic and other cystic kidney diseases
    Nephronophthisis and medullary cystic kidney disease
    Alport syndrome and related disorders
    Fabry diseases
    Chronic tubulointerstitial disease
    Obstructive uropathy
    Nephrolithiasis
    Urinary tract infection and pylenonephritis
    Kidney in infants and children
    Kidney in pregnancy
    Kidney disease in the elderly
    Pathophysiology of chronic kidney diseases
    Staging and management of chronic kidney disease
    Nutrition and kidney diseases
    Bone disorders in chronic kidney disease
    Cardiac function and cardiovascular disease in chronic kidney disease
    Anemia and other hematologic complications of chronic kidney disease
    Hemodialysis
    Peritoneal dialysis
    Outcomes of kidney replacement therapies
    Selection of prospective kidney transplant recipients and donors
    Posttransplantation monitoring and oucomes
    Immunosuppression in transplantation
    Infectious complications of kidney transplantation
    Pathogenesis of hypertension
    Evaluation and management of hypertension
    Secondary hypertension.
    Digital Access ScienceDirect 2013
  • Digital
    [edited by] Scott J. Gilbert, Daniel E. Weiner ; associate editors, Andrew Bomback, Mark A. Perazella, Marcello Tonelli.
    Summary: "Ideal for residency, fellowship, clinical practice, and board review, the National Kidney Foundation's Primer on Kidney Diseases, 7th Edition, by Drs. Scott J. Gilbert and Daniel E. Weiner, offers comprehensive coverage of adult and pediatric kidney diseases in an authoritative, practical resource. Well organized and highly readable, it covers every relevant topic in the field, from anatomy, physiology, and pathophysiology, to diagnosis and management of kidney disease, to fluid and electrolyte disorders, hypertension, dialysis, and renal transplantation"--Publisher's description.

    Contents:
    Structure and function of the kidney. Overview of kidney structure and function
    Kidney development
    Assessment of kidney function in acute and chronic settings
    Urinalysis and urine microscopy
    Hematuria and proteinuria
    Imaging the kidneys
    Acid/base and electrolytes. Hyponatremia and hypoosmolar disorders
    Hypernatremia
    Volume, edema and the clinical use of diuretics
    Disorders of potassium metabolism
    Disorders of calcium, phosphorus, & magnesium homeostasis
    Approach to acid-base disorders
    Metabolic acidosis
    Metabolic alkalosis
    Respiratory acidosis and alkalosis
    Glomerular diseases. Glomerular clinicopathologic syndromes
    Minimal change nephrotic syndrome
    Focal segmental glomerulosclerosis
    Membranous nephropathy
    Immunoglobulin a nephropathy and related disorders
    Kidney in systemic diseases. Complement-mediated glomerulonephritis and thrombotic microangiopathy
    Infection-related glomerulonephritis
    Viral nephropathies: human immunodeficiency virus, hepatitis c virus, and hepatitis B virus
    Kidney involvement in systemic vasculitis
    Systemic lupus erythematosus and the kidney
    Pathogenesis, pathophysiology, and treatment of diabetic nephropathy
    The kidney in malignancy
    Myeloma, amyloid and other dysproteinemias
    Acute cardiorenal syndrome
    Hepatorenal syndrome and other liver-related kidney diseases
    Acute kidney injury. Clinical approach to the diagnosis of acute kidney injury
    Acute tubular injury and acute tubular necrosis
    Acute interstitial nephritis
    Management of acute kidney injury
    Drugs and the kidney. Kidney disease caused by therapeutic agents
    Principles of drug therapy in patients with reduced kidney function
    Hereditary kidney disease. Genetics and kidney disease (APOL1)
    Genetically based renal transport disorders
    Sickle cell nephropathy
    Polycystic and other cystic kidney diseases
    Nephronophthisis and medullary cystic kidney disease
    Alport's syndrome and thin basement membrane Dz
    Fabry disease
    Tubulointerstitial diseases. Chronic tubulointerstitial disease
    Obstructive uropathy
    Nephrolithiasis
    Urinary tract infection and pyelonephritis
    Special circumstances. Kidney diseases in infants and children
    The kidney in pregnancy
    Kidney disease in the elderly
    Global kidney disease
    Chronic kidney disease. Development and progression of chronic kidney disease
    Staging and management of chronic kidney disease
    Nutrition and kidney disease
    Bone disorders in chronic kidney disease
    Cardiac function and cardiovascular disease in chronic kidney disease
    Anemia and other hematologic complications of chronic kidney disease
    Dialysis and transplantation. Hemodialysis and hemofiltration
    Peritoneal dialysis
    Outcome of end-stage renal disease therapies
    Selection of prospective kidney transplant recipients and donors
    Post-transplantation monitoring and outcomes
    Immunosuppression
    Transplant infectious disease
    Hypertension. Pathogenesis of hypertension
    Evaluation and management of hypertension
    Secondary hypertension.
    Digital Access
    Provider
    Version
    ScienceDirect
    ClinicalKey
  • Digital
    Scott J. Gilbert, MD; Daniel E. Weiner, MD, MS; Andrew S. Bomback, MD, MPH; Mark A. Perazella, MD, MS; Dena E. Rifkin, MD, MS.
    Digital Access ClinicalKey 2023
  • Digital
    Annie Burke-Doe, PT, MPT, PhD, Professor, West Coast University, Los Angeles, California, Mark Dutton, PT.:
    Summary: "A fresh, new student-friendly physical therapy board review text National Physical Therapy Exam Review provides students with an outstanding review of entry level physical therapy concepts and principles. Following the human movement system and component elements such as anatomic structure and physiological function , the text is enhanced by innovative pedagogy and 1,000 questions (in print and online) that simulate the Physical Therapy Blueprint Practice Exam. Throughout the book, there is an emphasis on clinical application necessary to ensure safe and effective patient care. Follows the APTA's new vision which optimizes movement to improve the human experience. 1,000 exam review questions (in print and online). Numerous figures and tables. Pedagogy includes key terms, skill keeper questions (which prompt students to review previous material), clinical, scenarios, and chapter-ending questions"-- Provided by publisher. "This manual is your guide to prepare you for the National Physical Therapy Examination (NPTE) and earning your licensure. This guide includes insight from professional Physical Therapists on each component of the exam encompassing a review of NPTE content to best prepare you for successful exam results. This exam covers a broad range of topics from special populations to the body's main organ systems and how they interact to non-system components outlining professional responsibilities and ethics"-- Provided by publisher.

    Contents:
    Chapter 1: Cardiac, Vascular, and Pulmonary Systems
    Chapter 2: Musculoskeletal Physical Therapy
    Chapter 3: Neuromuscular Physical Therapy
    Chapter 4: Integumentary System
    Chapter 5: Metabolic and Endocrine Systems
    Chapter 6: Gastrointestinal System
    Chapter 7: Genitourinary System
    Chapter 8: Non-Systems
    Chapter 9: Special Topics: Geriatrics
    Chapter 10: Special Topics: Pediatrics.
    Digital Access
    Provider
    Version
    AccessPhysiotherapy
    AccessPhysiotherapy
  • Print
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Retired Reference (Downstairs)
    HD9665 .N277
    3
  • Digital/Print
    Division of Health Resources Utilization Statistics.
    Digital Access
    Provider
    Version
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Stored offsite. Please request print.
    RA407.3 .N27
    2
  • Digital/Print
    Digital Access Google Books 2002-
    Print Access
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Reference (Upstairs)
    HV4999.2 N38
    1
    Stored offsite. Please request print.
    HV4999.2 N38
    1
  • Digital/Print
    Bachman, Jerald G.; Johnston, Lloyd D.; O'Malley, Patrick M.
    Contents:
    Vol. 1. Secondary school students
    v. 2. College students and young adults.
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Stored offsite. Please request print.
    HV5825 .N388
    9
  • Digital
    Philippe E. Zimmern, Elise J.B. De, editors.
    Digital Access Springer 2017
  • Digital
    Uri Galili, PhD.
    Contents:
    Anti-gal in humans and its antigen the ?-gal epitope
    Why do we produce anti-gal
    Anti-gal comprises most of anti-blood group b antibodies
    Anti-gal interaction with Trypansoma, Leishmania, and Plasmodium parasites
    Anti-gal b cells are tolerized by a ?-gal epitopes in the absence of t cell help
    Anti-gal and other immune barriers in xenotransplantation
    Anti-gal IgE mediates allergies to red meat
    Anti-gal and autoimmunity
    Anti-gal-mediated amplification of viral vaccine efficacy
    Cancer immunotherapy by anti-gal-mediated in situ conversion of tumors into autologous vaccines
    Anti-gal as cancer cell destroying antibody and as antibiotics targeted by ?-gal bifunctional molecules
    Acceleration of wound and burn healing by anti-gal/?-gal nanoparticles interaction
    Anti-gal and anti-non gal antibodies in regeneration of extracellular matrix bio-implants
    Post infarction regeneration of ischemic myocardium by intramyocardial injection of ?-gal nanoparticles
    Regeneration of injured spinal cord and peripheral nerves by ?-gal nanoparticles
    Inhalation of ?-gal/sialic acid liposomes for decreasing influenza virus infection.
    Digital Access ScienceDirect 2018
  • Digital
    Mohd Sayeed Akhtar, Mallappa Kumara Swamy, Uma Rani Sinniah, editors.
    Summary: Bioactive compounds produced by natural sources, such as plants, microbes, endophytic fungi, etc., can potentially be applied in various fields, including agriculture, biotechnology and biomedicine. Several bioactive compounds have proved to be invaluable in mediating plant-microbe interactions, and promoting plant growth and development. Due to their numerous health-promoting properties, these compounds have been widely used as a source of medication since ancient times. However, there is an unprecedented need to meet the growing demand for natural bioactive compounds in the flavor and fragrance, food, and pharmaceutical industries. Moreover, discovering new lead molecules from natural sources is essential to overcoming the rising number of new diseases. In this regard, natural bioactive compounds hold tremendous potential for new drug discovery. Therefore, this field of research has become a vital area for researchers interested in understanding the chemistry, biosynthetic mechanisms, and pharmacological activities of these bioactive metabolites. This book describes the basics of bioactive plant compounds, their chemical properties, and their pharmacological biotechnological properties with regard to various human diseases and applications in the drug, cosmetics and herbal industries. It offers a valuable asset for all students, educators, researchers, and healthcare experts involved in agronomy, ecology, crop science, molecular biology, stress physiology, and natural products.

    Contents:
    Chapter 1. Production and Application of Novel of Bio-active Compounds by Endophytic Microbes
    Chapter 2. Endophytes
    The Unmapped Repository For Natural Products
    Chapter 3. Microbial Hosts as a Promising Platform for Polyphenols Production
    Chapter 4. Endolichenic fungi From Common Lichens as New Sources for Valuable Bio-active Compounds
    Chapter 5. Strategic Approaches for the Purification of Glycosides from Natural Sources
    Chapter 6. Natural Products-Based Pancreatic Lipase Inhibitors for Obesity Treatment
    Chapter 7. Natural compounds extracted from medicinal plants and their applications
    Chapter 8. Seed Oils as a Source of Natural Bioactive Compounds
    Chapter 9. Essential Oils Extracted from Medicinal Plants and their Applications
    Chapter 10. Cellulose-based hydrogels: Present and Future
    Chapter 11. Influence of Elicitors and Eustressors on the Production of Plant Secondary Metabolites
    Chapter 12. KRAS as potential target in colorectal cancer therapy
    Chapter 13. Recent insights on the anticancer properties of flavonoids: Prospective candidates for cancer chemoprevention and therapy
    Chapter 14. Natural Compounds Extracted from Moringa oleifera and their Agricultural Applications
    Chapter 15. Natural compound from genus Brassica and their therapeutical activities
    Chapter 16. Antibacterial and Antifungal Agents of Higher Plants
    Chapter 17. Bio-active Compounds Isolated from Neem tree and their Applications
    Chapter 18. Role of Plant Secondary Metabolites as Antidiabetic Agents
    Chapter 19. Plant metabolites and Pharmacological activities of Leptadenia pyrotechnica (Forssk.) Decne
    Chapter 20. Functioning of Organosulfur Compounds from Garlic (Allium sativum Linn) in targeting risk factors mediated Atherosclerosis: A Crosstalk between Alternative and Modern Medicine
    Chapter 21. Biological activities and nutritional value of Physalis peruviana L
    Chapter 22. Yield, Chemical Composition and Biological Evaluation of the Essential Oil of Baccharis Milleflora in the Atlantic Rain Forest of the Paraná State in Brazil.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    Mallappa Kumara Swamy, Mohd Sayeed Akhtar, editors.
    Summary: Nature has consistently provided human beings with bioactive compounds that can be used directly as drugs or indirectly as drug leads. Some of the major classes of natural bioactive compounds include phenolics, alkaloids, tannins, saponins, lignin, glycosides, terpenoids, and many more. They possess a broad range of biological activities and are primarily useful in the treatment of various health issues. At the same time, the search for new and novel drugs is never-ending and, despite major advances in synthetic chemistry, nature remains an essential resource for drug discovery. Therefore, more and more researchers are interested in understanding the chemistry, clinical pharmacology, and beneficial effects of bioactive compounds in connection with solving human health problems. This book presents a wealth of information on natural metabolites that have been or are currently being used as drugs or leads for the discovery of new drugs. In addition, it highlights the importance of natural products against various human diseases, and their applications in the drug, nutraceuticals, cosmetics and herbal industries. Accordingly, the book offers a valuable resource for all students, educators, and healthcare experts involved in natural product research, phytochemistry, and pharmacological research.

    Contents:
    Chapter 1. Secondary Metabolites from Rosemary (Rosmarinus officinalis L.): Structure, Biochemistry and Therapeutic Implications against Neurodegenerative Diseases
    Chapter 2. The role of plant metabolites in drug discovery: Current challenges and future perspectives
    Chapter 3. Current insights on the role of terpenoids as anticancer agents: a perspective on cancer prevention and treatment
    Chapter 4. Myristica fragrans Houtt.: Botanical, Pharmacological and Toxicological Aspects
    Chapter 5. Coscinium fenestratum: A Review on Phytochemicals and Pharmacological Properties
    Chapter 6. Computationally Designed Recombinant-DNA-Based Compounds Production Driven in Plants during Secondary Metabolism and Their Implication in Anti-Malaria Therapies
    Chapter 7. Curcumin-Loaded Nanoparticles and Their Potential as Anticancer Agents in Breast Cancer
    Chapter 8. Techniques for Extraction, Isolation and Standardization of Bioactive Compounds from Medicinal Plants
    Chapter 9. Phytotherapeutics: The Substitutes for Glioblastoma multiforme
    Chapter 10. Cosmetic Potential of Natural Products: Industrial Applications
    Chapter 11. Natural Compounds Extracted from Medicinal Plants and Their Applications in the Treatment of Diabetes and Hypertension
    Chapter 12. Plant Metabolites as New Leads to Drug Discovery
    Chapter 13. Natural Compounds Extracted from Medicinal Plants and their Applications in Cardiovascular and Kidney Diseases
    Chapter 14. Therapeutic Potential of Plant Polyphenolics and Their Mechanistic Action against Various Diseases
    Chapter 15. Phytochemical Aspects of Medicinal Plants of North-East India to Improve the Gynecological Disorders: An Update
    Chapter 16. Bio-active compounds from Unani medicinal plants and their application in Urolithiasis
    Chapter 17. Therapeutic Potential of Rhizomatous Plants used in Unani Medicare System
    Chapter 18. Extraction Techniques for Plant based Bioactive Compounds.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    edited by Mohd Sayeed Akhtar, Mallappa Kumara Swamy.
    Summary: Natural bioactive compounds have become an integral part of plant-microbe interactions geared toward adaptation to environmental changes. They regulate symbiosis, induce seed germination, and manifest allelopathic effects, i.e., they inhibit the growth of competing plant species in their vicinity. In addition, the use of natural bioactive compounds and their products is considered to be suitable and safe in e.g. alternative medicine. Thus, there is an unprecedented need to meet the increasing demand for plant secondary metabolites in the flavor and fragrance, food, and pharmaceutical industries. However, it is difficult to obtain a constant quantity of compounds from the cultivated plants, as their yield fluctuates due to several factors including genotypic variations, the geography, edaphic conditions, harvesting and processing methods. Yet familiarity with these substances and the exploration of various approaches could open new avenues in their production. This book describes the basis of bioactive plant compounds, their mechanisms and molecular actions with regard to various human diseases, and their applications in the drug, cosmetic and herbal industries. Accordingly, it offers a valuable resource for students, educators, researchers, and healthcare experts involved in agronomy, ecology, crop science, molecular biology, stress physiology, and natural products.

    Contents:
    Chapter 1. Bioactive Peptides: Role in Plant Growth and Defense
    Chapter 2. Linking Omics Approaches to Medicinal Plants and Human Health
    Chapter 3. Application of Biotechnology in Producing Plant Bio-active Compounds
    Chapter 4. Transgenic plant cell cultures: A promising approach for secondary metabolites production
    Chapter 5. An Insight into Biotechnological Approaches Used for Improvement and Secondary Metabolites for Medicinal Aquatic Plant Water hyssop (Bacopa monnieri L.)
    Chapter 6. Prospects for the Use of Plant cell culture as alternatives to produce secondary metabolites
    Chapter 7. Biotechnological exercises in the production of secondary metabolites and its significance in health care practices
    Chapter 8. Salient biotechnological interventions in saffron (Crocus sativus L.), a major source of bioactive apocarotenoids
    Chapter 9. Recent advances in extraction, characterization and potential use of Citral
    Chapter 10. Hairy root cultures as an alternative source for the production of high-value secondary metabolites
    Chapter 11. Plant Cell Culture as Alternatives to Produce Secondary Metabolites
    Chapter 12. Metabolic Engineering Strategies for Enhancing the Production of Bioactive Compounds from Medicinal Plants
    Chapter 13. Enhancement of Rosmarinic Acid Content by Biotechnological Approaches and Metabolic Engineering.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    Joginder Singh, Ajar Nath Yadav, editors.
    Summary: This book discusses various aspects of bioactive natural products employed in the agrochemical and agriculture sectors. It covers the use of plants, microorganisms, and microbial metabolites as eco-friendly, cost-effective, and sustainable alternatives to chemicals in the field of agriculture. Written by active researchers and academics, the book highlights state-of-art products in the field, as well as the gaps, challenges, and obstacles associated with the use of plants, microbes and their products. Given its scope, it is a valuable resource for the scientific community and professionals in enterprises wanting insights into the latest developments and advances in the context of biological products, including their applications, traditional uses, modern practices, and strategies to harness their full potential.

    Contents:
    Intro
    Preface
    Contents
    Editors and Contributors
    About the Editors
    Contributors
    1: Natural Metabolites: An Eco-friendly Approach to Manage Plant Diseases and for Better Agriculture Farming
    1.1 Introduction
    1.2 Role of Natural Plant Products in Disease Management
    1.2.1 Coumarins
    1.2.2 Tannins or Gallotannin
    1.2.3 Alkaloids
    1.2.4 Terpenoids
    1.3 Plant Growth-Promoting Rhizobacteria (PGPR)
    1.4 Fungi as Biocontrol Agents
    1.5 Role of Mycorrhizae in Disease Management
    1.6 Management of Plant Diseases Caused by Plant Parasitic Nematodes 1.6.1 Paecilomyces lilacinus
    1.6.2 Trichoderma spp.
    1.6.3 Pochonia chlamydosporia
    1.6.4 Mycorrhizal Fungi
    1.6.5 Pasteuria penetrans
    1.6.6 Pseudomonas fluorescens
    1.6.7 Endophytic Bacteria
    1.6.8 Entomopathogenic Nematodes
    1.7 Future Prospects
    1.8 Conclusion
    References
    2: Plant Disease Management by Bioactive Natural Products
    2.1 Introduction
    2.2 Types of Bioactive Natural Products
    2.2.1 Microbial-Derived Natural Products
    2.2.2 Plant-Derived Natural Products
    2.2.3 Algal-Derived Natural Products
    2.2.4 Marine-Derived Natural Products 2.3 Conclusion and Future Prospects
    References
    3: Biological Control Agents: Diversity, Ecological Significances, and Biotechnological Applications
    3.1 Introduction
    3.2 Types of Interactions Contributing to Biological Control
    3.3 Types of Biological Control Agents (BCA)
    3.4 Mechanisms Involved for Biological Control
    3.5 Ecological Significances of Biological Control Agents
    3.6 Recent Advances and Genetic Engineering in the Biological Control Applications
    3.6.1 Genetic Modification for Developing Resistance Against Fungicides 3.6.2 Genetic Modification for Developing Hypovirulence
    3.6.3 Enhancement in Bacteriocins Synthesis
    3.6.4 Enhancement in Siderophore Synthesis
    3.6.5 Enhancement in Antibiotic Synthesis
    3.6.6 Enhancement in Lytic Enzyme Synthesis
    3.6.7 Enhanced Root Colonization Ability
    3.7 Conclusion and Future Prospects
    References
    4: Role of the Potent Microbial Based Bioagents and Their Emerging Strategies for the Ecofriendly Management of Agricultural Phytopathogens
    4.1 Introduction
    4.2 Merits and Demerits of Biological Control Agents (BCA) 4.3 Mechanisms Adopted by Biological Control Agents
    4.3.1 Microbial Antagonisms
    4.3.2 Parasitism
    4.3.3 Competition
    4.3.4 Production of Antimicrobial Compounds
    4.3.4.1 Antibiotics
    4.3.4.2 Iron-Chelating Siderophores
    4.3.4.3 Biocidal Volatiles
    4.3.4.4 Lytic Enzymes (Chitinases and Glucanases)
    4.3.4.5 Detoxification of Virulence Factors
    4.4 Priming and Induced Systemic Resistance
    4.5 Emerging Biocontrol Strategies
    4.5.1 Usage of Plant Exudates to Attract Beneficial Biocontrol Microbes
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital/Print
    Neville Vassallo, editor.
    Summary: This edited volume concerns a group of devastating neurological disorders that share a common pathological mechanism, namely the aggregation and deposition of insoluble, proteinaceous lesions, termed 'amyloid'. Examples of cerebral amyloid disorders include common neurodegenerative diseases like Alzheimer's disease-related dementia and Parkinson's disease, as well as other less prevalent conditions like Huntington's disease, cerebral amyloid angiopathy and the transmissible prion disorders. A disease-modifying therapeutic agent is still lacking for all these diseases, and there are no approved therapies that target amyloid formation directly. Nevertheless, a large and complex group of natural aromatic compounds known as polyphenols are rapidly emerging as potentially potent anti-amyloidogenic agents. This book collectively presents a considerable body of experimental and epidemiological evidence from peer-reviewed scientific publications that support a role for natural compounds and herbal extracts in the chemoprevention and therapy of amyloidogenic disorders. Each contribution is written by scientific experts in the relevant field; chapters are devoted to Mediterranean diet and olive oil phenols, traditional Chinese medicine, herbal extracts, polyphenols (with a particular emphasis on epigallocatechin-3-gallate) and bi-flavonoids, amongst others. The topic of this book is relevant to a wide audience, from academia and university students in the biological and chemical sciences, to physicians and allied health professionals, as well as people working in the nutraceutical industry.

    Contents:
    Olive Oil Phenols as Promising Multi-targeting Agents against Alzheimer's disease
    Alzheimer's disease, Drosophila melanogaster and Polyphenols
    Biflavonoids as Potential Small Molecule Therapeutics for Alzheimer's disease
    Natural Phenolic Compounds as Therapeutic and Preventive Agents for Cerebral Amyloidosis.- Brain Food for Alzheimer-free Ageing: Focus on Herbal Medicines
    Tea Polyphenols in Parkinson's disease
    The Effect of (-)-Epigallo-catechin-(3)-gallate on Amyloidogenic Proteins Suggests a Common Mechanism.
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Digital
    Michael von Wolff, editor.
    Summary: This practical book focuses on the most recent advances in natural cycle and minimal stimulation in vitro fertilization (IVF). The volume presents the steps that need to be followed to successfully perform these techniques and covers all aspects and competences involved. The book provides information on physiology of folliculogenesis, ovulation, oocytes and luteal phase and based on this information on clinical practice of stimulation, ovulation induction and inhibition, follicle aspiration and luteal phase support in natural cycle and minimal stimulation IVF. In addition costs, risks, success rates and several treatment protocols are provided. An overview of large European, Japanese and American programs and the discussion of clinical cases will complete the coverage of the topic. This practical and easy-to-use guide is a valuable resource for all clinicians performing any kind of IVF techniques.

    Contents:
    Basics
    Physiology
    Technical Aspects
    Costs, Risks, Success Rates
    Miscellaneous
    Worldwide Programs
    Case Discussions.
    Digital Access Springer 2022
  • Digital
    Brígida Souza, Luis L. Vázquez, Rosangela C. Marucci, editors.
    Summary: This book aims to address the importance of natural enemies and functional diversity for biological control in Neotropical agroecosystems. Several aspects related to the conservation of natural enemies, such as vegetation design and climate change, are discussed in Part 1 and the bioecology of several insects groups used in biological control in Latin America is presented in Part 2. Part 3 is devoted to mass production of natural enemies while Part 4 describes how these insects have been used to control of pests in major crops, forests, pasture, weeds and plant diseases. Lastly, Part 5 reports Latin-American experiences of integration of biological in pest management programs.

    Contents:
    Part 1. Conservation of natural enemies and functional biodiversity in Neotropical agroecosystems
    1. Vegetational design to enhance biological control of insect pests in agroecosystems
    2. Interactions of natural enemies with non-cultivated plants
    3. Quality of agroecosystems as habitats to natural enemies and biological control agents
    4. Plants as food for adult natural enemies
    5. Dispersion and increase of natural enemies in agroecosystems
    6. Climate change and biological control of pests in agriculture
    Part 2. Bioecology of natural enemies used in biological control in the Neotropical region
    7. Predator insects
    8. Predator mites
    9. Parasitoid insects
    10. Entomopathogenic nematodes
    11. Entomopathogenic fungi
    12. Entomopathogenic virus
    13. Bacillus thuringiensis
    14. Interactions of entomopathogenic fungus with entomophagous insects in agroecosystems
    Part 3. Mass production of biocontrol agents in Latin America: rearing techniques and releasing strategies
    15. Predators insects
    16. Predatory mites for the biological control of phytophagous mites
    17. Parasitoid insects
    18. Entomopathogenic nematodes
    19. Entomopathogenic fungi
    20. Entomopathogenic virus
    21. Bacillus thuringiensis
    Part 4. Biological control in major crops, forests, pasture, weeds and plant diseases in the Neotropical region
    22. Bean
    23. Coffee
    24. Cotton
    25. Forests
    26. Fruit crops
    27. Maize
    28. Oleraceous
    29. Ornamental plants
    30. Pasture
    31. Rice
    32. Soybean
    33. Sugarcane
    34. Microbial control of sugarcane pests
    35. Weeds
    36. Plant diseases
    37. Physiological and ecological selectivity of pesticides for natural enemies of insects
    38. Use of natural chemical products for pest control
    39. Effects of transgenic plants over natural enemies
    40. Use of silicon as resistance factor for plants against insect pests. Use of semiochemical-based strategies to enhance biological control
    41. Use of semiochemical-based strategies to enhance biological control
    42. Aphid-tending ants and their effects on natural enemies used in the biological control
    Index.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    edited by Aftab A. Ansari, Guido Silvestri.
    Digital Access ScienceDirect 2014
  • Digital/Print
    Eric Vivier, James Di Santo, Alessandro Moretta, editors.
    Contents:
    Transcriptional control of NK cells
    Development, homeostasis, and heterogeneity of NK cells
    Diversification and functional specialization of human NK cell subsets
    Dynamic regulation of NK cell responsiveness
    NK cells and cancer immunoediting
    Sweet is the memory of past troubles: NK cells remember
    Lessons from NK cell definiencies in the mouse
    Probing human NK cell biology using human immune system (HIS) mice
    Haploidentical haematopoietic stem cell transplantation: role of NK cells and effect of cytomegalovirus infections
    The past, present, and future of NK cells in hematopoietic cell transplantation and adoptive transfer
    Index.
    Digital Access Springer 2016
  • Digital
    Michelle Aristizabal, MD, FACOG.
    Summary: "The ONLY evidence-based resource covering natural childbirth practices offering a logical middle-of-road approach to the natural birth movement. Natural Labor and Birth: An Evidence-Based Guide to the Natural Birth Plan is written to provide a reliable source of information for healthcare professionals caring for patients seeking a natural birth. Up until now, doctors and nurses who would like to work with women seeking a natural birth have been frustrated by the lack of easily accessible, trustworthy resources on this topic, and most have not been trained on how to utilize methods outside of the traditional framework. Evidence-based natural childbirth is not discussed in any unified fashion in any of the existing obstetrical texts. Natural Labor and Birth: An Evidence-Based Guide to the Natural Birth Plan seeks to end the friction between natural and traditional obstetrics care. It is unique in that it does not attempt to make a case for natural childbirth, it only seeks to demonstrate how natural birth can exist within the framework of typical antepartum care and hospital deliveries and respond to patient preferences. It teaches the skills necessary to assist a woman through an unmedicated childbirth that are not taught in most obstetrical residencies and nursing programs and provides a compilation of the medical evidence supporting alternative practices."-- Provided by publisher "The only evidence-based resource covering natural birth practices that will serve as a go-to resource on labor and delivery units for obstetricians, midwives, labor and delivery nurses, and doulas."-- Provided by publisher
    Digital Access AccessObGyn 2019
  • Digital
    Dhiraj Kumar, Mohammad Shahid, editors.
    Summary: This book reviews the latest research on bioproducts from various economically important insects, such as silkworms, honey bees, lac and drosophila, and termites, and discusses their general, biomedical and industrial applications in detail. It includes chapters focusing on insects as a food source, probiotics, silk-based biomaterials, insect pheromones, insects as biomedicine source, pupa oil chemistry, non-protein compounds from Lepidopteran insects, insect chitin and chitosan, polyphenols and flavonoids. Model insects like Bombyx mori or bees were domesticated in Asian countries thousands of years ago. Over time, natural products from these animals became industrialized and today they attracting increasing attention thanks to their sustainability and their manifold applications in agriculture and biomedicine. The book is intended for entomologists, material scientists, natural product researchers and biotechnologists. .

    Contents:
    1. Polyphenols and flavonoids from honey: Biological applications
    2. Chemistry and application of lac and its by-products
    3. Silk: an amazing biomaterial for future medication
    4. Insect Chitin and Chitosan: Structure, Properties, Production and Implementation Prospective
    5. Recent advances in the arthropod natural product chemistry
    6. Silkworm: A Unique Creature for Natural Products
    7. Present and future prospects on nutritious feeding using insects
    8. Insect Pheromones and its applications in management of pest population
    9. Non-Protein chemical compounds from Lepidopteran insect cocoons. .
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    Xishan Wang, editor.
    Summary: This introduces the theoretical and practical guide of NOSES. The book introduced 10 different techniques of NOSES for colorectal neoplasms based on extensive high-quality surgical images. The first part mainly describes the development process of NOSES and the current achievements of these techniques which will provide readers a general understanding of NOSES. The second part elaborates on ten different surgical procedures specific to position of tumor location of NOSES in detail. All key technical points and operational skills regarding to NOSES are displayed by both high-quality images. The indications and contraindications are also strictly determined in this book. In addition to the elaboration of NOSES, each chapter of this book also conduct a detailed and comprehensive analysis the hot spots, technical difficulties and key issues with regard to laparoscopic surgery for colorectal cancer. This book is suitable for the colorectal cancer surgeons and doctors of general surgery.
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Digital
    Xishan Wang, editor.
    Summary: This book introduces readers to nine techniques for natural orifice specimen extraction surgery (NOSES) in gastric cancer and fifteen different techniques for NOSES in colorectal cancer, respectively, based on extensive high-quality surgical images. The first part mainly describes the development process of NOSES and preoperative preparation,offering readers a general understanding of NOSES. In turn, the second and third parts elaborate on the surgical procedures for gastrointestinal cancer. All key technical points and operational skills regarding NOSES are covered, and the indications and contraindications are clearly defined. In addition, the book provides a detailed and comprehensive analysis of the hot spots, technical difficulties and key issues with regard to laparoscopic surgery for gastrointestinal cancer. Accordingly, it offers an essential guide for gastrointestinal cancer surgeons and general surgeons.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    editors, Subhash C. Mandal, Vivekananda Mandal, Tetsuya Konishi.
    Summary: Natural Products and Drug Discovery: An Integrated Approach provides an applied overview of the field, from traditional medicinal targets, to cutting-edge molecular techniques. Natural products have always been of key importance to drug discovery, but as modern techniques and technologies have allowed researchers to identify, isolate, extract and synthesize their active compounds in new ways, they are once again coming to the forefront of drug discovery. Combining the potential of traditional medicine with the refinement of modern chemical technology, the use of natural products as the basis for drugs can help in the development of more environmentally sound, economical, and effective drug discovery processes. Natural Products & Drug Discovery: An Integrated Approach reflects on the current changes in this field, giving context to the current shift and using supportive case studies to highlight the challenges and successes faced by researchers in integrating traditional medicinal sources with modern chemical technologies. It therefore acts as a useful reference to medicinal chemists, phytochemists, biochemists, pharma R&D professionals, and drug discovery students and researchers.
    Digital Access ScienceDirect 2018
  • Digital
    Amirhossein Sahebkar, Thozhukat Sathyapalan, editors.
    Summary: Natural products have a long history of use as folk medicines in several systems of traditional medicine. Extensive evidence from modern pharmacological studies has confirmed traditional applications, and unveiled the vast potential of naturally occurring compounds, particularly plant-derived phytochemicals, in the management of chronic human diseases. The past decade has witnessed a surge of findings from randomized controlled trials testifying the safety and efficacy of natural products as adjuncts or alternatives to standard-of-care medications for several illnesses. Biomolecular studies have unveiled hundreds of cellular and molecular targets for phytochemicals including key transcription factors, receptors, enzymes, hormones, neurotransmitters, cytokines, lipids, and non-coding RNAs. Extensive research on the preventative and therapeutic effects of natural products necessitates regular updating of the literature as to the developing potential roles of these compounds in different human diseases. This new book provides an overview of the current pharmacological and clinical features of natural products, and the role of phytopharmaceutical compounds in health and diseases. Chapters cover a wide scope, from cancers, to chronic and age-related disorders, and are written by leading international subject experts. Collectively, chapters will provide useful insights on the regulatory effects of phytochemicals and nutraceuticals on pathogenic molecular signatures associated with pathologies, disease biomarkers, and aging-related pathways.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    John M. Pezzuto, Ole Vang, editors.
    Summary: This book discusses the efficacy of various naturally occurring chemopreventive agents in preventing or delaying cancer. It focuses on the holistic chemopreventive concept, demonstrating the relevant response is the combined effect of a series of compounds that alone have been shown to have some effect in different experimental models. Written by leading experts in the field, the contributions provide details of research on various chemopreventive agents. Offering insights into the unique molecular targets and mechanisms, safety issues, molecular efficacy, and occurrence in nature of these compounds, the book is a valuable resource for all scientists working in biomedicine, and specifically in cancer research. .

    Contents:
    1. Chemoprevention of Cancer: Past, Present, and Future
    2. Resveratrol for Cancer Prevention: Current Gaps and Opportunities
    3. Pterostilbene as a Potent Chemopreventive Agent in Cancer
    4. Pharmacokinetics and Bioavailability Enhancement of Natural Products
    5. Vitamin D Compounds and Cancer Stem Cells in Cancer Prevention
    6. Anti-cancer Effects of Silibinin: The Current Status in Cancer Chemoprevention
    7. Adjuvant Value of Turmeric Extract (Containing Curcumin) in Colorectal Cancer Management
    8. Cancer Prevention by Tea Polyphenols
    9. The Chemopreventive Power of Isothiocyanates
    10. Xanthohumol and Structurally Related Prenylflavonoids for Cancer Chemoprevention and Control
    11. Anthocyanins and Cancer Prevention 12. Grape Chemopreventive Agents Against Angiogenesis and Metastasis
    13. Punica granatum L. Constituents for Cancer Prevention, Chemosensitisation and Therapeutic Treatment
    14. Cancer Chemopreventive Potential of Epidermal Growth Factor Receptor Inhibitors from Natural Products
    15. Anti-cancer Dynamics of Natural Phytochemical Inhibitors of Cyclin-Dependent Kinases
    16. Pro-apoptotic Properties of Chemopreventive Agents
    17. The Use of Anti-Inflammatory Agents for Cancer Chemoprevention
    18. Combination Cancer Chemoprevention by Targeting the Epigenome
    19. Perspective: A Positive Cocktail Effect of the Bioactive Components in the Diet.
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    edited by Dagmar B. Stengel, Solène Connan.
    Contents:
    Marine algae: A source of biomass for biotechnological applications
    Structure and function of macroalgal natural products
    Spectrophotometric assays of major compounds extracted from algae
    Extraction and enrichment of protein from red and green macroalgae
    Extraction and purification of r-phycoerythrin from marine red algae
    Extraction and analysis of mycosporine-like amino acids in marine algae
    Extraction and purification of phlorotannins from brown algae
    Enzyme-enhanced extraction of antioxidant ingredients from algae
    Microwave-assisted extraction of fucoidan from marine algae
    Extraction and analysis of oxylipins from macroalgae illustrated on the example gracilaria vermiculophylla
    Lipids and fatty acids in algae: Extraction, fractionation into lipid classes, and analysis by gas chromatography coupled with flame ionization detector (GC-FD)
    HRMAS NMR analysis of algae and identification of molecules of interest via conventional 1d and 2d nmr: Sample preparation and optimization of experimental conditions
    Extraction, purification, and NMR analysis of terpenes from brown algae
    Extraction, isolation, and identification of sesquiterpenes from laurencia species
    The use of HPLC for the characterization of phytoplankton pigments
    Characterization of phlorotannins from brown algae by lc-hrms
    Analysis of betaines from marine algae using lc-ms-ms
    Analysis of marine biotoxins using lc-ms/ms
    Fucoidan analysis by tandem maldi-tof and esi mass spectrometry
    Determination of substitution patterns of galactans from green seaweeds of the bryopsidales
    Structural characterization of a hybrid carrageenan-like sulfated galactan from a marine red alga furcellaria lumbricalis
    Characterization of alginates by nuclear magnetic resonance (NMR) and vibrational spectroscopy (IR, NIR, RAMAN) in combination with chemometrics
    Imaging and identification of marine algal bioactive compounds by surface enhanced raman spectroscopy (SERS)
    In vitro protocols for measuring the antioxidant capacity of algal extracts
    Disk diffusion assay to assess the antimicrobial activity of marine algal extracts
    Screening of a marine algal extract for antifungal activities
    Protocol for assessing antifouling activities of macroalgal extracts.
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Digital
    edited by Paula B. Andrade, Patrícia Valentão, David M. Pereira.
    Summary: The past decade has seen the reappearance of natural products as a valuable source of potent therapeutics. Here, experts on bioactive natural products cover the full spectrum of clinically relevant enzymes that are known to be targeted by natural products. Key enzymes include acetylcholine esterase, angiotensin-I-converting enzyme, cyclooxygenase, dihydrofolate reductase, phospholipase A2, respiratory complexes, and many more. By connecting the diversity of medicinal natural product sources with their potential clinical applications, this volume serves as a companion for the medicinal chemist looking for innovative small molecule compounds as well as for pharmacologist interested in the clinical effects and mode of action of herbal and traditional medicines.

    Contents:
    Natural products as enzyme inhibitors
    Molecular targets of clinically relevant natural products from filamentous marine cyanobacteria
    Natural angiotensin converting enzyme (ACE) inhibitors with antihypertensive properties
    Phospholipase A2 inhibitors of marine origin
    Beta-secretase (BACE1) inhibitors from natural products
    Hypoglycaemic effects of plants food constituents via inhibition of carbohydrate-hydrolysing enzymes: from chemistry to future applications
    Natural products targeting clinically relevant enzymes of eicosanoid biosynthesis implicated in inflammation and cancer
    Anti-HIV natural products
    Natural inhibitors of mitochondrial respiratory chain: therapeutic and toxicological implications
    Targeting enzymatic pathways with marine-derived clinical agents
    Anti-malarial drug discovery: new enzyme inhibitors
    Natural plant-derived acetylcholinesterase inhibitors: relevance for Alzheimer's disease.
    Digital Access Wiley 2017
  • Digital
    Rajinder Peshin, Ashok K. Dhawan, editors.
    Summary: This book is an outcome of the keynote/lead papers presented by the experts from different disciplines in the Indian Ecological Society International Conference 2016 on "Natural Resource Management: Ecological Perspectives", organized at the Sher-e-Kashmir University of Agricultural Sciences and Technology of Jammu, India. The book captures the essence of natural resource management from the intra and interdisciplinary perspectives of agricultural sciences (entomology, plant pathology, plant breeding and genetics, agronomy and soil sciences), social sciences (resource economics, agricultural extension education), medical sciences, and environmental sciences to stimulate discussion on the ecological perspectives of natural resource management. Wide-ranging topics on land and water resources, biodiversity, integrated farming system, role of microbes in agriculture, climate change and its impact on human health and crop pests, exploiting chemical ecology for pest management, human disease-causing pesticides, beneficial insects like lac insects, integrated pest management, resistance management in insect pests and Bt cotton, and diffusion and adoption of ecologically sustainable technologies at individual and organizational level are covered in the book. The book will serve the professionals, researchers, academia, government, industry and students.

    Contents:
    1. Managing Wetland Ecosystems: A Polycentric Perspective
    Dinesh K. Marothia 2. Water Harvesting Techniques in Cold Deserts
    Chewang Norphel 3. Sustainability of Groundwater Use in Punjab Agriculture: Issues and Options
    Kamal Vatta 4. Sustainability of Himalayan Environment: Issues and Policies
    Masud. H. Wani 5. Crop Genetic Biodiversity with Special Reference to Oilseed Brassica and Wild allies: Conservation and their Utilisation
    Surinder K. Gupta 6. Integrated Farming System for Economic Upliftment of Marginal and Small Farmers
    Sohan S. Walia 7. Health Effects of Changing Environment
    Randeep Guleria 8. An Approach to Cancer Risk Assessment and Carcinogenic Potential for Three Classes of Agricultural Pesticide
    Chanda Siddoo Atwal 9. Integrated Pest Management and Climate Change: Need for Paradigm Shift
    C. Chattopadhyay 10. Role of Microbes for Plant and Soil Health Improvement
    Ambalal. N. Sabalpara 11. Exploiting Chemical Ecology for Developing Novel IPM Strategies
    Zeyaur R. Khan 12. Insect resistance to insecticides and Bt-cotton in India
    Sandhya Kranthi 13. Ecological Pest Management in 21st Century: An analysis of Challenges and future Strategies
    Dharam P. Abrol 14. Understanding the diversity in lac insects of Kerria spp. in India and the nature of insect-host plant interaction
    Kewal K. Sharma 15. Diffusion and Adoption: Factors Impacting Adoption of Sustainable Agricultural Practices
    Rajinder Peshin.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    edited by Robert G. Woodmansee, John C. Moore, Dennis S. Ojima, Laurie Richards.
    Summary: The Systems Ecology Paradigm (SEP) incorporates humans as integral parts of ecosystems and emphasizes issues that have significant societal relevance such as grazing land, forestland, and agricultural ecosystem management, biodiversity and global change impacts. Accomplishing this societally relevant research requires cutting-edge basic and applied research. This book focuses on environmental and natural resource challenges confronting local to global societies for which the SEP methodology must be utilized for resolution. Key elements of SEP are a holistic perspective of ecological/social systems, systems thinking, and the ecosystem approach applied to real world, complex environmental and natural resource problems. The SEP and ecosystem approaches force scientific emphasis to be placed on collaborations with social scientists and behavioral, learning, and marketing professionals. The SEP has given environmental scientists, decision makers, citizen stakeholders, and land and water managers a powerful set of tools to analyse, integrate knowledge, and propose adoption of solutions to important local to global problems.
    Digital Access Cambridge 2021
  • Digital
    Richard G. Delisle, editor.
    Summary: This book contests the general view that natural selection constitutes the explanatory core of evolutionary biology. It invites the reader to consider an alternative view which favors a more complete and multidimensional interpretation. It is common to present the 1930-1960 period as characterized by the rise of the Modern Synthesis, an event structured around two main explanatory commitments: (1) Gradual evolution is explained by small genetic changes (variations) oriented by natural selection, a process leading to adaptation; (2) Evolutionary trends and speciational events are macroevolutionary phenomena that can be accounted for solely in terms of the extension of processes and mechanisms occurring at the previous microevolutionary level.^On this view, natural selection holds a central explanatory role in evolutionary theory - one that presumably reaches back to Charles Darwin's Origin of Species - a view also accompanied by the belief that the field of evolutionary biology is organized around a profound divide: theories relying on strong selective factors and those appealing only to weak ones. If one reads the new analyses presented in this volume by biologists, historians and philosophers, this divide seems to be collapsing at a rapid pace, opening an era dedicated to the search for a new paradigm for the development of evolutionary biology. Contrary to popular belief, scholars' position on natural selection is not in itself a significant discriminatory factor between most evolutionists.^In fact, the intellectual space is quite limited, if not non-existent, between, on the one hand, "Darwinists", who play down the central role of natural selection in evolutionary explanations, and, on the other hand, "non-Darwinists", who use it in a list of other evolutionary mechanisms. The "mechanism-centered" approach to evolutionary biology is too incomplete to fully make sense of its development. In this book the labels created under the traditional historiography - "Darwinian Revolution", "Eclipse of Darwinism", "Modern Synthesis", "Post-Synthetic Developments"--Are thus re-evaluated. This book will not only appeal to researchers working in evolutionary biology, but also to historians and philosophers."

    Contents:
    Chapter 1: Introduction: In Search of a New Paradigm for the Development of Evolutionary Biology
    Part I: Crossing Perspectives about Evolution: Historians versus Biologists
    Chapter 2: Cathedrals, Corals and Mycelia: Three Analogies for the History of Evolutionary Biology
    Part II: Different Views of Charles Darwin
    Chapter 3: Guiding a Train of Discoveries: Charles Darwin, Charles Daubeny, and the Reception of Natural Selection, 1859-1865
    Chapter 4: Natural Selection as a Mere Auxiliary Hypothesis (sensu stricto I. Lakatos) in Charles Darwin's Origin of Species
    Chapter 5: Natural Selection in Ernst Haeckel's Legacy
    Part III: Rethinking a So-Called Intermediary Period
    Chapter 6: The Origins of Theoretical Developmental Genetics: Reinterpreting William Bateson's Role in the History of Evolutionary Thought
    Chapter 7: Recasting Natural Selection: Osborn and the Pluralistic View of Life
    Part IV: Other Evolutionary Syntheses
    ^Chapter 8: Little Evolution, BIG Evolution: Rethinking the History of Darwinism, Population Genetics, and the "Synthesis"
    Chapter 9: When Panpsychism Met Monism: Why Did the Philosopher Theodor Ziehen (1862-1950) Become a Crucial Figure for the Evolutionary Biologist Bernhard Rensch?
    Chapter 10: Inertia, Trend, and Momentum Reconsidered: G.G. Simpson, an Orthogeneticist?
    Chapter 11: The Concept of Natural Selection in Theodosius Dobzhansky. Its Development and Interpretation
    Part V: New Lights on Recent Developments
    Chapter 12: What's Natural About Natural Selection?
    Chapter 13: Natural Selection, Morphoprocess and a Logical Field of Evolutionary Concepts
    Chapter 14: Natural Selection as Agent of Evolutionary Change: A View from Paleoanthropology
    Chapter 15: Darwinism Without Selection? A Lesson from Cultural Evolutionary Theory
    Part VI: Teaching Evolution
    ^Chapter 16: Beyond Survival of the Fittest
    A Look at Students' Misconceptions about Natural Selection and Evolutionary Theory.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    Guan-Hua Du.
    Summary: This book discusses 120 types of natural, small-molecule drugs derived from plants. They are grouped into 7 parts according their clinical uses, such as drugs for cardiovascular diseases, for metabolic diseases, for neuropsychiatric diseases, for immune-mediated inflammatory diseases, anti-tumor drugs, and drugs for parasites and bacterial infection. Each chapter systematically summarizes one drug, including its physicochemical properties, sources, pharmacological effects and clinical applications. To help readers understand the drug better, the research and pharmacological activity for each drug is also described, which serves as a salutary lesson for future drug development. Written by frontline researchers, teachers and clinicians working in field of pharmacy and pharmacology it provides an overview of natural, small-molecule drugs derived from plants for researchers in the field.

    Contents:
    Intro; Preface; Natural Medicines Are a Kind of Important Substances for Prevention and Treatment of Human Diseases; Natural Medicine Is the Foundation of Modern Pharmacy; Natural Small-Molecule Drugs Derived from Minerals; Natural Small-Molecule Drugs Derived from Microorganisms; Natural Small-Molecule Drugs Derived from Animals; Natural Small-Molecule Drugs Derived from Plants; The Research and Development of Natural Small-Molecule Drugs Embraces the Wisdom of Humans; Small-Molecule Drugs Derived from Plants Are the Representatives of Natural Medicines; Features and Instructions of the Book Part I: Natural Small-Molecule Drugs for the Prevention and Treatment of Cardiovascular Diseases; Overview; Ajmaline; Properties; Dosage Form and Indications; Literature; History of R Pharmacology; Clinical Application; Discussion; References; Anisodamine; Properties; Derivatives; Dosage Forms; Indications; Literature; History of R Pharmacology; Clinical Application; Discussion; References; Caffeic Acid; Properties; Dosage Forms; Indications; Literature; History of R Pharmacology; Clinical Application; Discussion; References; Cyclovirobuxine; Properties; Derivatives Dosage FormsIndications; Literature; History of R Pharmacology; Clinical Application; Discussion; References; Daidzein; Properties; Dosage Forms; Indications; Literature; History of R Pharmacology; Clinical Application; Discussion; References; Daphnetin; Properties; Dosage Forms; Indications; Literature; History of R Pharmacology; Clinical Application; Discussion; References; Dicoumarin; Properties; Dosage Forms; Indications; Literature; History of R Pharmacology; Clinical Application; Discussion; References; Digoxin; Properties; Derivatives; Dosage Forms; Indications; Digitoxin PropertiesDosage Forms; Indications; Lanatoside C; Properties; Dosage Forms; Indications; Literature; History of R Pharmacology; Clinical Application; Discussion; References; Dioscin; Properties; Dosage Forms and Indications; Literature; History of R Pharmacology; Discussion; References; Diosmin; Properties; Dosage Forms; Indications; Literature; History of R Pharmacology [4-6]; Clinical Application; Discussion; References; Divasidum; Properties; Dosage Forms and Indications; Literature; History of R Pharmacology; Clinical Application; Discussion; References; Ferulic Acid PropertiesDosage Forms; Indications; Literature; History of R Pharmacology; Clinical Application; Discussion; References; Hesperidin; Properties; Dosage Forms; Indications; Literature; History of R Pharmacology; Clinical Application; Discussion; References; Ligustrazine; Properties; Dosage Forms; Indication; Literature; History of R Pharmacology; Clinical Application; Discussion; References; Lovastatin; Properties; Derivatives; Dosage Forms; Indications; Literature; History of R Pharmacology; Clinical Application; Discussion; References; Metformin; Properties
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Digital
    Michael C. Newman, Virginia Institute of Marine Science, Gloucester Point, VA, United States, College of William & Mary's Virginia Institute of Marine Science, Gloucester Point, VA, United States.
    Summary: The Nature and Use of Ecotoxicological Evidence: Natural Science, Statistics, Psychology, and Sociology examines how toxicologists and environmental professionals come to understand and make decisions about possible harm from pollutants. Drawing on concepts and techniques from the natural, social and mathematical sciences, the book emphasizes how pollutant-related evidence is gathered, assessed, communicated and applied in decision-making. Each chapter begins with a real-world example before exploring fundamental cognitive, social, statistical or natural science concepts to explain the opening example. Methods from other disciplines for recognizing, reducing or removing the influence of impediments in wise decision-making are highlighted in each chapter. Misreading evidence by the scientific community, and miscommunication to regulators and the public, remain major impediments to wise action in pollution issues. Which evidence comes to dominate the dialogue among scientists, regulators and decision makers depends on social and scientific dynamics. Yet psychological and sociological factors that influence the movement of evidence through scientific communities to regulators receive cursory discussion by professionals unfamiliar with the sociology literature. Toxicologists, environmental scientists, psychologists and professionals and students across the sciences will find the book useful for understanding how evidence is generated, assessed and communicated in their own fields.

    Contents:
    Section 1. Introduction
    The emerging importance of pollution
    Section 2: How individuals gather and judge evidence
    Human reasoning: everyday heuristics and foibles
    Human reasoning: within scientific traditions and rules
    Pathological reasoning within sciences
    Individual scientist: reasoning by the numbers
    Section 3: How groups weigh and apply evidence
    Social processing of evidence: commonplace dynamics and foibles
    How innovations enter and move within groups
    Evidence in social networks
    Section 4: Conclusion
    Conclusion.
    Digital Access ScienceDirect 2018
  • Digital
    Laserina O’Connor.
    Summary: This book, endorsed by the International Council of Nurses, explores a new conversation around scholarly talents for advanced candidate /nurse practitioners that comprise a variety of forms such as teaching, synthesis, discovery, engagement and application. It offers an expansive view of Boyer’s scholarship, with a call to action for advanced candidate /nurse practitioners to thoughtfully plan and map their personal goals and capabilities, that will mark them as professionals and future scholars needed in today’s challenging and changing professional workplace. Knowing how to apply the various forms of scholarship to problems of practice within one’s field of expertise and the implications of Boyer’s pillars of scholarship for advanced candidate / nurse practitioners are interweaved throughout this book. The volume discusses the science of career cartography, alongside legacy planning and career mapping. The toolkit illustrates a guide for advanced candidate /nurse practitioners to create their individual career legacy map and reflect on how they wish to contribute to the discipline of nursing, while working to improve the lives of others. This book serves as a catalyst for robust conversations among scholar practitioners on the very nature of clinical scholarship
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Print
    ... by Anthony Edward Langdon.
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Stored offsite. Please request print.
    S61 .L27
    1
  • Digital
    Fraser Smith.
    Summary: This book offers comprehensive coverage of naturopathic medicine. The principles and values of this profession are already clearly stated (i.e., Find and Treat the Cause; Treat the Whole Person, etc.), but few are the textbooks that directly compare it to conventional or allopathic medicine. To paraphrase the historian of medicine Harris Coulter in this approach the body reacts creatively to stressors and the Empirical school or natural medicine approach is more focused on supporting adaptive responses than suppressing symptoms. This is not an attempt to argue that all health issues can get better on their own or that conventional medical interventions arent capable of producing stellar outcomes, but there remains a concurrent need for a naturopathic approach that helps rebuild the body. This book presents an approach in medicine that works to support adaptive responses of the body, reduce maladaptive responses, address determining factors of health, and sometimes create temporary homeostasis with agents such as drugs (or certain natural medicines). In terms of the basis of disease states, the book teaches about how the lack of coordination in the bodys bioregulatory systems can lead to disease, as well as the impact of irreversible degeneration, genetic damage, chronic stress, etc. The book takes the reader to some of the more common and well described reasons for these states of dysfunction, how to assess a patient, and how various natural therapies impact root causes of disease, the long term consequences, and the various clinical manifestations. The book then takes a systems approach cardiovascular, pulmonary, etc. This is where most books on the subject start, but instead of breaking out a number of conditions and giving protocols of diet, supplements, herbs etc., the author examines how to restore stability and function to that system. Special topics are then covered, ranging from lifespan/primary care considerations to the role of research, the rise of advanced data analytics as decision assistance, to the environmental, cultural, and global determinants of health. Each chapter will additionally include tables that summarize key diagnosis or treatment points, arrayed in an order that reflects the model presented in the book. This is an ideal guide for students in naturopathic medicine, as well as physicians and medical professionals looking to learn more about this field aimed towards maximizing patient resilience.

    Contents:
    The nature of health, homeostasis, adaptation, biological plasticity, repair
    Disease (Theory of)
    Where does a naturopathic approach apply?
    Causes of ill health
    Assessment of the patient
    Therapeutics
    States of ill health assessment and overall mitigation
    Systems Approach to Therapy
    Life-span considerations
    Naturopathic medicine in context
    The role of research and scientific inquiry in naturopathic medicine
    The role of informatics and artificial intelligence in naturopathic medicine
    Societal, global, environmental impact that naturopathic physicians can have
    Appendix A: Recommended resources for clinical/scientific information
    Appendix B: Professional associations and public interest groups related to whole health, complementary and integrative medicine, naturopathic medicine, etc.
    Digital Access Springer 2022
  • Digital
    Kenneth L. Koch, William L. Hasler, editors.
    Digital Access Springer 2017
  • Print
    edited by Gideon Koren, Raafat Bishai.
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Books: General Collection (Downstairs)
    RG579 .N38
    1
  • Digital
    Sandro M. Krieg, editor.
    Summary: This book is the first comprehensive work summarizing the advances that have been made in the neurosurgical use of navigated transcranial magnetic stimulation (nTMS) over the past ten years. Having increasingly gained acceptance as a presurgical mapping modality in neurosurgery, today it is widely used for preoperative mapping of cortical motor and language function, risk stratification and improving the accuracy of subcortical fiber bundle visualization. This unique work will provide neurosurgeons and neuroscientists who are starting their nTMS program essential and detailed information on the technique and protocols, as well as the current clinical evidence on and limitations of the various applications of nTMS. At the same time, more experienced nTMS users looking for deeper insights into nTMS mapping and treatment in neurosurgery will find clearly structured, accessible information. The book was prepared by an international mix of authors, each of which was chosen for their status as a respected expert on the respective subtopic, as evinced by their landmark publications on nTMS.

    Contents:
    Basic principles of nTMS
    nTMS motor mapping
    Basic principles and clinical use
    Fiber tracking
    Risk stratification
    nTMS language mapping
    Basic principles and clinical use
    Fiber tracking
    Risk stratification
    Other brain functions
    Therapeutic applications in neurosurgery
    Pain
    Paresis
    Special aspects on nTMS in children
    Outlook on the potential of nTMS
    Integration of functional data in the clinical workflow
    Methodological advantages and disadvantages of nTMS compared to MEG and fMRI.
    Digital Access Springer 2017
  • Digital
    Stephen Y. Nakada, Sutchin R. Patel, editors.
    Summary: This book discusses the management of various aspects of the professional life of newly qualified urologists as well as more experienced urologists. It features clear, easy-to-read chapters covering various topics, including clinical and surgical patient care, administrative duties, and research despite the increasing constraints on time and resources in today's hectic practice environment. Navigating Organized Urology: A Practical Guide systematically presents a range of practical strategies for a successful transition from trainee to practising urologist, while also offering more experienced urologists a fresh perspective on efficient management and successful adaptation of their practices for the modern age. -- Provided by publisher.

    Contents:
    Knowing Yourself
    Finding the Right Job
    The Role of the Educator
    The Urologist as an Effective Administrative Leader
    The Urologist as Researcher
    Academic Roles: Inventor
    Academic Research Collaboration
    Patient Satisfaction
    Managing the Operating Room: A Urologist's Guide to Enhancing Efficiency and Quality
    Enhancing and Promoting Your Office Urology Practice
    The Importance of Coding and Billing
    Time Management
    Media and Social Media
    Burnout, Happiness and Work-Life Harmony
    The Power of History and Leveraging Past Institutional Success
    Re-Evaluating yourself.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    Stephen Y. Nakada, Sutchin R. Patel, editors.
    Summary: This extensively revised second edition of the text discusses the management of various aspects of the professional life of newly qualified urologists as well as more experienced urologists. It features clear, easy-to-read chapters covering various topics, including clinical and surgical patient care, administrative duties, and research in today's hectic practice environment. New topics covered include how to manage an operating theater, telemedicine and how to manage crisis situations. Lessons acquired from the authors experiences of the COVID-19 Pandemic are also detailed. Navigating Organized Urology: A Practical Guide systematically presents a range of practical strategies for a successful transition from trainee to practicing urologist, while also offering more experienced urologists a fresh perspective on efficient management and successful adaptation of their practices for the modern age.
    Digital Access Springer 2022
  • Digital
    [edited by] Alexander R. Vaccaro, Jaykar R. Panchmatia, I. David Kaye, Srinivas K. Prasad.
    Summary: "The past decade has seen major advances in image-guided spine surgery techniques, with robotically assisted approaches emerging in the last five years. While early adopters of this technology paved the way for more widespread use of navigated and robotic systems, barriers still exist. Navigation and Robotics in Spine Surgery by master spine surgeon Alexander Vaccaro and esteemed co-editors Jaykar Panchmatia, David Kaye, and Srinivas Prasad addresses existing issues such as the perception of increased upfront costs, intrusion on current workflow, and a lack of understanding about the potential ways these technologies can enhance the surgical experience and improve patient outcomes. Organized into six sections, the book starts with evidence-based fundamentals of navigated spine surgery and robotics including discussion of instrumentation and mechanics. Sections 2-5 serve as a surgical handbook for spine surgeons who wish to introduce these technologies into practice or augment their current repertoire with more complex techniques. Topics range from more routine procedures such as navigated and robotic minimally invasive TLIF to complex approaches like intraoperative ultrasound guided intradural spinal tumor resection. The final section looks at future directions and potential new applications for these technologies. Key Highlights An impressive group of international spine surgeons who pioneered navigation and robotic surgery techniques share invaluable tricks of the trade Discussion of fluoroscopy- and intraoperative CT-based platforms, applications for intraoperative sonography, and radiation exposure and minimization strategies Special topics include OR set-up and workflow, surmounting the learning curve, artificial intelligence, and lessons learned from other industries"-- Provided by publisher.
    Digital Access
    Provider
    Version
    Thieme-Connect
    Thieme MedOne Neurosurgery
  • Digital
    edited by Wei Tian.
    Summary: The book introduces the using of navigation assisted robotic system in orthopedic surgery. The system is based on real-time 3D navigation. In the first part, it covers spine surgery, which includes pedicle screw fixation on cervical, thoracic, lumbar spine, dens screw fixation, Margerl screw fixation, PVP, PKP, and MED. The second part is about trauma surgery, which covers screw fixation in pelvis fracture and acetabulum fracture. This book is mainly written for spine surgeons, neurosurgeons, and traumatic orthopedic surgeons.

    Contents:
    History and Development of Robotic Assisted Orthopedic Surgery
    Basic Principle of Robot-Assisted Orthopedic Surgery
    Use of Artificial Potential Field Theory to Determine the Spatial Position of a Navigation-Guided Orthopedic Surgical Robot
    Future Trends and Perspectives
    Magerl method of C1-C2 transarticular screw fixation
    Robot-Assisted posterior C1 and C2 Screw Fixation
    Robot-Assisted Odontoid Fracture Anterior Screw Fixation
    Robot-assisted C2 Pedicle Screw Placement for the Treatment of Hangman Fracture
    Robot Assisted Cervical Pedicle Screw Fixation
    Robot assisted thoracic pedicle screw fixation technique
    Robot-assisted Spine Surgery in Spinal Deformities
    Robot-assisted Lumbar Pedicle Screw Fixation
    Vertebroplasty in Osteoporotic Spine
    Robot-assisted Translaminar Lag Screw Fixation of Spondylolysis
    Robot assisted Percutaneous Transforaminal Endoscopy Discectomy
    Cortical Bone Trajectory for Lumbar Pedicle Screw Placement
    The Complications of Robot-assisted Spine surgery
    Robot-Assisted Free Vascularised Fibular Grafting for the Treatment of Osteonecrosis of the Femoral Head
    An Overview of Robotic Applications in Traumatic Orthopedics
    Research Study of Robotic-assisted Pelvic Fracture Reduction
    Application of Navigation Assisted Robot in Internal Fixation of Fracture.
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    Seyed Alireza Parhiz, Jeffrey N. James, Shohreh Ghasemi, Mohammad Hosein Amirzade-Iranaq, editors.
    Summary: This book offers a comprehensive overview of the fundamentals of navigation surgery in the head and neck region. Navigation is particularly important in difficult and limited exposure areas, such as the orbit and deep spaces of the head and neck. With the aid of navigation systems, an expert can palpably and accurately measure the amount of bone removed during fracture reductions or resections of bony masses procedures. In addition to reducing surgery time for soft tissue lesions, navigation technique also allows for minimally invasive access to lesions without extensive dissection that is often required for traditional open approaches. Navigation can also be extremely helpful in locating and retrieving foreign bodies. Chapters cover navigation in a variety of different surgical specialties including, but not limited to, trauma surgery, implant surgery, and orthogenetic surgery. Chapters also discuss surgical pathology as well as guided surgeries. The book features detailed case presentations for each surgery sub-topic and discusses future advances in the field that are currently in development. Navigation in Oral & Maxillofacial Surgery is a must-have resource for clinicians, professionals, and practitioners in the fields of oral & maxillofacial surgery, otorhinolaryngology-head & neck surgery, trauma surgery, and plastic surgery, as well as researchers and postgraduate students in related fields.

    Contents:
    Fundamentals of Navigation surgery
    Navigation in Orthgnatic surgery
    Navigation in Trauma surgery
    Navigation in surgical pathology
    Navigation in Implant surgery
    Navigation & guided surgery.
    Digital Access Springer 2022
  • Print
    Andreas Carl.
    Summary: Material is arranged in the form of charts to allow the maximum amount of information with the minimum amount of words for a fast review. This book is best used side-by-side with your other texts and review books.

    Contents:
    General nursing practices
    Nutrition & calculations
    Fluids & electrolytes
    Cardiovascular diseases
    Respiratory diseases
    Gastrointestinal diseases
    Urogenital diseases
    Sexually transmitted diseases
    Infectious diseases
    Diseases of the blood
    Endocrine diseases
    Musculoskeletal diseases
    Diseases of the nervous system
    Diseases of the eyes & ears
    Diseases of the skin
    Injury & poisoning
    Female reproductive system
    Maternity
    Growth & development
    The neonate
    Infants & toddlers
    Psychiatry
    Nursing pharmacology
    Conversions.
    Digital Access R2Library 2016
  • Digital
    Barbara A. Vitale, RN, MA.
    Digital Access R2Library 2017
    Limited to 1 simultaneous user
  • Digital
    clinical editor, Susan Lisko, DNP, RN, CNE, Associate Professor of Nursing, Youngstown State University, Youngstown, Ohio.
    Contents:
    Surviving the NCLEX
    Care of the Adult
    Care of the Psychiatric Client
    Maternal-Neonatal Care
    Care of the Child
    Issues in Nursing
    Appendices.
    Digital Access R2Library 2017
    Limited to 1 simultaneous user
  • Digital
    Thoralf M. Sundt, Duke E. Cameron, Myles E. Lee, editors.
    Summary: This heavily revised book features a variety of cases detailing potential complications in cardiac surgery. Clinical scenarios associated with conundrums and unforeseen circumstances are presented, including minimally invasive and hybrid procedures as well as temporary mechanical circulatory support. Discussions emphasize critical details in preoperative assessment and intraoperative sensemaking, decision making and error recovery. Chapters are structured as unknowns, presenting findings as one would experience the events clinically and challenging the reader to develop their own rescue strategies. Relevant references for further reading are included, enabling the reader to further develop their knowledge base. Near Misses in Cardiac Surgery is a concise case-based resource featuring instructions on how to deal with potential complications associated with cardiac surgery. The work's multi-disciplinary authorship ensures it is a valuable resource for all medical professionals involved in the care of cardiac surgical patients.

    Contents:
    Chapter 1. Aortic Cannulation (Jordan P. Bloom)
    Chapter 2. Return to the Operating Room (Myles E. Lee)
    Chapter 3. Cannulation for ECMO (John M. Trahanas)
    Chapter 4. Transcatheter Aortic Valve Replacement (TAVR) (Asishana Osho)
    Chapter 5. Accidental Arterial Decannulation (Antonia Kreso)
    Chapter 6. CABG after MI (Asishana Osho)
    Chapter 7. Air in the Circuit (Antonia Kreso)
    Chapter 8. EKG Changes after Mitral Repair (Antonia Kreso)
    Chapter 9. ECMO as a Bridge (Asishana Osho)
    Chapter 10. Complications of Transcatheter Aortic Valve Replacement (TAVR) (Asishana Osho)
    Chapter 11. Catastrophic Bleeding from Right Atrium (Andrew C. W. Baldwin)
    Chapter 12. Hypoxia on Bypass (Antonia Kreso)
    Chapter 13. Challenges in Myocardial Protection (Brittany Potz)
    Chapter 14. Empty Venous Reservoir (Myles E. Lee)
    Chapter 15. Arrest on Induction (Sameer Lakha)
    Chapter 16. xtracorporeal Cardiopulmonary Resuscitation (Jerome C. Cowley)
    Chapter 17. Postoperative Hypotension in the ICU (Myles E. Lee)
    Chapter 18. Hemodynamic instability after Pulmonary Thrombo-Endarterectomy (Asishana Osho)
    Chapter 19. Inadequate Venous Drainage (Antonia Kreso)
    Chapter 20. Trapped Mitral Leaflet (Antonia Kreso)
    Chapter 21. Even More Complications of TAVR (Asishana Osho)
    Chapter 22. Conduit for Redo CABG (Brittany Potz)
    Chapter 23. Intraoperative Coagulopathy (Monica Miller)
    Chapter 24. Hypoxia after Atrial Septal Defect (ASD) Closure (Jordan P. Bloom)
    Chapter 25. Intraoperative Pulmonary Hemorrhage (Lynze R. Franko)
    Chapter 26. Femoral Arterial Cannulation (Thoralf M. Sundt)
    Chapter 27. Hypoxia on ECMO (Jerome C. Crowley)
    Chapter 28. Laser Lead Extraction (Travis Hull)
    Chapter 29. Tube Thoracostomy for hemothorax (Lynze R. Franko)
    Chapter 30. Pulmonary Hypertension (Corey Spiro)
    Chapter 31. Malfunction of an Intra-aortic Balloon (Thoralf M. Sundt)
    Chapter 32. Symptomatic Aortic Stenosis (Thoralf M. Sundt)
    Chapter 33. Pulmonary Embolism (Thoralf M. Sundt)
    Chapter 34. Post-Operative Bleeding (Greg A. Leya)
    Chapter 35. Intraoperative Extracorporeal Cardiopulmonary Resuscitation (Travis Hull)
    Chapter 36. Mitral Annular Calcification (Antonia Kreso)
    Chapter 37. Options for a Patient with History of HITT (Jenna Cottral)
    Chapter 38. Ventricular Dysrhythmia after AVR (Andrew C. W. Baldwin)
    Chapter 39. Postoperative Hypoxemia (Rachel Steinhorn)
    Chapter 40. Orthotopic Heart Transplant (OHT) after LVAD (S. Alireza Rabi)
    Chapter 41. Postoperative Infection (Myles E. Lee)
    Chapter 42. Veno-venous ECMO (Travis Hull)
    Chapter 43. Reoperative Sternotomy (Brittany Potz)
    Chapter 44. Sternal Closure: Immediate or Delayed (Greg A. Leya)
    Chapter 45. Suction Event after LVAD Placement (S. Alireza Rabi)
    Chapter 46. Thrombosed Mechanical Valve (Antonia Kreso)
    Chapter 47. Valve-sparing Aortic Root Repair (Andrew A. C. Baldwin)
    Chapter 48. Acute Aortic Dissection (Rizwan Q. Attia)
    Chapter 49. Hypotension on Bypass (Checklist) (Myles E. Lee)
    Chapter 50. Debriding Candle Wax Calcification (Jordan Bloom).
    Digital Access Springer 2022
  • Digital
    edited by Alonzo L. Plough.
    Summary: "From racial hierarchies to authentic storytelling, the narrative of Mississippi is one of contrasts that parallel and amplify larger national trends in many ways. To study Mississippi, where RWJF held its fifth annual Sharing Knowledge conference in March 2020, is to learn how structural racism was built, venerated, and fiercely defended in the United States to maintain the status quo of non-White disenfranchisement. Yet the story of the state is also one of strength, rooted in a people who have worked collectively and in community to fight a system designed to punch back"-- Provided by publisher.
    Digital Access Oxford [2022]
  • Digital
    [edited by] Brendan C. Stack, Jr., MD, CACS, FACE, Professor, Department of Otolaryngology - Head and Neck Surgery, University of Arkansas for Medical Sciences, Little Rock, Arkansas, Mauricio A. Moreno, MD, Associate Professor, Director Head & Neck Division, Department of Otolaryngology - Head and Neck Surgery, Little Rock, Arkansas.
    Summary: "Neck dissection is a surgical procedure to remove cancerous lymph nodes, on patients diagnosed with cancer of the mouth, tongue, thyroid gland, or other areas of the throat or neck. There are three main types of neck dissection: Radical - all tissue on the side of the neck from the jawbone to the collarbone is removed. The muscle, nerve, salivary gland, and major blood vessel in this area are removed. Modified - all lymph nodes are removed. More neck tissue is spared. Selective - fewer lymph nodes have to be removed. The muscle, nerve, and blood vessel in the neck may also be saved. Neck Dissection will be an authoritative text edited by two distinguished surgeons, covering fundamentals of the various dissection types and which approach to use depending on patient clinical findings. The print text will be supplemented with surgical videos"-- Provided by publisher.
    Digital Access
    Provider
    Version
    Thieme-Connect
    Thieme MedOne Otolaryngology
  • Digital
    edited by Sean P. McDonough, DVM, PhD, Diplomate ACVP, Cornell University, Ithaca, NY, Teresa L. Southard, DVM, PhD, Diplomate ACVP, Cornell University, Ithaca, NY.
    Contents:
    Introduction to the necropsy
    Necropsy basics
    The necropsy procedure
    The integumentary system
    The musculoskeletal system
    The cardiovascular system
    The respiratory system
    The alimentary system
    The liver and pancreas
    The genitourinary system
    The nervous system
    The eye and ear
    The endocrine system
    The lymphoreticular system
    Necropsy of other small mammals
    Necropsy of fetuses and newborns
    Cytology
    Histopathology
    Infectious disease testing
    Toxicology testing
    Packaging and shipping samples.
    Digital Access Wiley 2017
  • Digital
    Anna Norrby-Teglund, Mattias Svensson, Steinar Skrede editors.
    Summary: This volume aims to enhance the current understanding of clinical features, treatment and pathogenic aspects in necrotizing soft tissue infections. Various representative case studies are discussed to enhance the readers' understanding of these complex diseases. Necrotizing soft tissue infections are rapidly spreading infections that may cause extensive soft tissue or limb loss, multiorgan failure and are associated with a considerable fatality rate. It is undisputed that rapid diagnosis and prompt intervention is directly related to survival. The initial presentation may be limited to unspecific symptoms such as tenderness, swelling, erythema and pain. Thus, diagnosis and management are challenging due to heterogeneity in clinical presentation, in co-morbidities, in microbiological aetiology, as well as in the pathogenic mechanisms. An international and multidisciplinary consortium, INFECT, has for the last 6 years been pursuing research aimed to advance the understanding of the clinical and pathogenic aspects of these infections. A central part has been to create a comprehensive clinical registry and associated biobank which have also formed the basis for the experimental studies. Using the INFECT patient cohort, as well as an integrated systems biology approach in patients and clinically relevant experimental models, an advanced insight of diagnostic features, causative microbial agents, treatment strategies, and pathogenic mechanisms (host and bacterial disease traits and their underlying interaction network) has been obtained.

    Contents:
    Chapter 1: The INFECT-project: An international multidisciplinary project on necrotizing soft tissue infections
    Chapter 2: Necrotizing Soft Tissue Infections: case reports from the patients prospective
    Chapter 3: Necrotizing soft tissue infections: Case-reports, from the clinician's perspectives
    Chapter 4: Necrotizing soft tissue infections: clinical features and diagnostic aspects
    Chapter 5: Microbiological etiology of necrotizing soft tissue infections
    Chapter 6: Beta-hemolytic streptococci and necrotizing soft tissue infections
    Chapter 7: Treatment of necrotizing soft tissue infections: Antibiotics
    Chapter 8: Treatment of necrotizing soft tissue infections: IVIG
    Chapter 9: Pathogenic mechanisms of streptococcal necrotizing soft tissue infections
    Chapter 10: Systems genetics approaches in mouse models of Group A Streptococcal necrotizing soft tissue infections
    Chapter 11: Systems biology and biomarkers in necrotizing soft tissue infections
    Chapter 12: Systems and precision medicine in necrotizing soft tissue infections.
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Print
    Rijnberk, Gérard van.
    Contents:
    Contents
    1. deel. Inleiding, organismale en algemeene physiologie
    2. deel. Bloed en lymphe, ademhaling en spijsvertering
    3. deel. Hart, bloedsomloop, voortplanting
    5. deel. Centraal Zenuwstelsel.
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Stored offsite. Please request print.
    F34 .R57
    7
  • Digital
    Malali Gowda, Ambardar Sheetal, Chittaranjan Kole, editors.
    Summary: This book describes the sequencing efforts for Neem (Azadirachta indica A. Juss), one of the most versatile tropical evergreen tree species. The neem tree is a source of various natural products, including the potent biopesticide azadirachtin and limonoids, which have a broad spectrum of activity against insect pests and microbial pathogens. To identify genes and pathways in neem, three neem genomes and several transcriptomes are studied using next-generation sequencing technologies. Neem has been extensively used in Ayurveda, Unani and homoeopathic medicine and is often referred to as the 'village pharmacy by natives due to its wealth of medicinal properties. Besides the description of the genome, this book discusses the neem microbiome and its role in the production of neem metabolites like salanin, nimbin and exopy-azadirachtin under in vitro conditions. It also highlights cell and tissue culture using various neem explants including the leaf, root, shoot, cambium, etc.

    Contents:
    Economic/Academic importance
    Botanical descriptions and distribution
    Traditional practices and knowledge of neem
    Biochemistry, medicinal properties and molecular biology of neem bioactives
    Quantification of secondary metabolites of neem
    Utilization of neem and neem products in agriculture
    Requirement of whole-genome sequencing
    Strategies & tools for sequencing
    Genome Assembly
    Repetitive sequences
    Gene annotation
    Synteny with allied & model genomes
    Comparison of gene families
    Impact on neem tree improvement breeding
    Neem tissue culture
    Neem microbiome
    Future prospects.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    editors Jürg Utzinger, Peiling Yap, Martin Bratschi and Peter Steinmann.
    Summary: Neglected tropical diseases (NTDs) are a group of diseases frequently found in impoverished communities in tropical and sub-tropical countries. The risk for many of the NTDs is high in both deprived urban and rural areas of East Asia. Adapted to the endemic settings and characteristics of the diseases, a range of tools and strategies are currently being rolled out for the large-scale control of many NTDs. Both vector control measures and community sensitization programmes have for example been used to control dengue in urbanized settings. Challenges posed by yaws and lymphatic filariasis are being addressed by mass drug administration, while rabies requires the involvement of the veterinary public health sector for disease control. For leprosy, an elimination target has been defined; however, achieving this goal remains a considerable challenge. Food-borne trematodiases, on the other hand, are emerging and require a deeper understanding of its burden in East Asia and how these diseases can be tackled in a cost-effective manner. Finally, factors, such as an increase of non-communicable diseases due to changing lifestyles which accompany economic growth, the spreading HIV epidemic as well as climate change and the occurrence of natural disasters can potentially affect the epidemiology and control of NTDs. This volume discusses the mentioned topics in detail with contributions by experts in the respective research areas from different working environments.

    Contents:
    1. Introduction
    2. Foodborne trematodiases in East Asia: epidemiology and burden
    3. Leprosy in East Asia
    4. Dengue, an expanding neglected tropical disease
    5. Yaws in South-East Asia: towards global eradication
    6. Rabies in East and Southeast Asia
    a mirror of the global situation
    7. Coinfection with helminths and HIV-1 in East Asia
    8. Links between the Epidemiology and Control of Non-Communicable Diseases and Neglected Tropical Diseases in Asia.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    Jill E. Weatherhead, editor.
    Summary: This volume of the Neglected Tropical Diseases (NTD) series covers the most prevalent NTDs in North America. This book discusses in detail pathology, diagnostics and control approaches of selected NTDs in the sub-tropical regions of the United States of America. There are disproportionate numbers of children and adults living in poverty within the United States that are at risk of infections caused by helminths, protozoa, viruses and bacteria which commonly lead to chronic, debilitating and stigmatizing diseases. Each chapter focuses on one specific disease or series of related diseases, and provides in-depth insights into the topic.

    Contents:
    Soil Transmitted Helminthiasis
    Toxocariasis
    Strongyloidiasis
    Taeniasis and Cysticercosis
    Toxoplasmosis
    Chagas Disease
    Leishmaniasis
    Trichomoniasis
    Chikungunya, Dengue, Zika, and Other Emerging Mosquito-Borne Viruses
    West Nile Virus
    Hansens Disease
    Murine Typhus.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Print
    editor-in-chief, Debra K. Katzman ; senior associate editor, Catherine M. Gordon ; associate editors, S. Todd Callahan, Alain Joffe, Susan L. Rosenthal, Maria Trent, Richard J. Chung.
    Summary: "We are pleased to present the 7th edition of Neinstein's Adolescent and Young Adult Health Care. This edition is an extraordinary accomplishment for us as it is the first edition without the guiding hand of the founding editor-in-chief, Dr. Lawrence S. Neinstein"-- Provided by publisher.
    Digital Access
    Provider
    Version
    LWW Health Library (Pediatrics)
    LWW Health Library (Internal Medicine)
  • Digital
    editor-in-chief, Lawrence S. Neinstein, MD, FACP, Professor of Pediatrics and Medicine, Executive Director, USC Engemann Student Health Center, Chief, Division of College Health, Department of Pediatrics, USC Keck School of Medicine, Assistent Provost of Student Health and Wellness, University of Southern California, Los Angeles, California ; senior associate editor, Debra K. Katzman, MD, FRCPC, Professor of Pediatrics, Division of Adolescent Medicine, Department of Pediatrics, The Hospital for Sick Children and University of Toronto, Senior Associate Scientist, Research Institute, Director, Health Science Research, Undergraduate Medical Education, University of Toronto School of Medicine, Toronto, Ontario, Canada ; associate editors, Todd Callahan, MD, [and three others].
    Digital Access
    Provider
    Version
    Ovid
    LWW Health Library (Pediatrics)
    LWW Health Library (Internal Medicine)
  • Print
    [edited by] Karen J. Marcdante, Robert M. Kliegman.
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Books: General Collection (Downstairs)
    RJ45 .N4321 2014
    1
  • Digital
    [edited by] Karen Marcdante, Robert M. Kliegman, Abigail M. Schuh.
    Summary: "Concise, readable, and up to date, Nelson Essentials of Pediatrics, 9th Edition, provides the must-know information you need in pediatrics from the name you trust. A readable, full-color format; high-yield, targeted chapters; and thorough content updates ensure strong coverage of core knowledge as well as recent advances in the field. This focused resource is ideal for medical students, pediatric residents, PAs, and nurse practitioners in various educational and practice settings, including pediatric residencies, clerkships, and exams"--Publisher's description.
    Digital Access ClinicalKey 2023
  • Digital
    [edited by] Robert M. Kliegman, Patricia S. Lye, Brett J. Bordini, Heather Toth, Donald Basel.
    Contents:
    Sore throat
    Cough
    Respiratory distress
    Earache
    Apparent life threatening event--brief resolved unexplained event
    Syncope and dizziness
    Chest pain
    Murmurs
    Failure to thrive
    Abdominal pain
    Diarrhea
    Vomiting and regurgitation
    Gastrointestinal bleeding
    Hepatomegaly
    Jaundice
    Constipation
    Abdominal masses
    Dysuria
    Proteinuria
    Hematuria
    Acute and chronic scrotal swelling
    Menstrual problems and vaginal bleeding
    Disorders of sex development
    Intellectual and developmental disability
    Dysmorphology
    Irritable infant
    Unusual behaviors
    Headaches
    Hypotonia, weakness, and stroke
    Paroxysmal disorders
    Altered mental status
    Eye disorders
    Arthritis
    Gait disturbances
    Back pain in children and adolescents
    Lymphadenopathy and neck masses
    Pallor and anemia
    Bleeding and thrombosis
    Fever
    Fever and rash
    Recurrent fever, infections, immune disorders, and autoinflammatory diseases
    Disorders of puberty
    Short stature
    Hypoglycemia
    Urinary incontinence and polyuria
    Acid--base and electrolyte disturbances
    Congenital cutaneous lesions and infantile rashes
    Acquired rashes in the older child.
    Digital Access ScienceDirect 2018
  • Digital
    [edited by] Robert M. Kliegman, Heather Toth, Brett J. Bordini and Donald Basel.
    Summary: "Nelson Pediatric Symptom-Based Diagnosis, by Drs. Robert M. Kliegman, Brett Bordini, Heather Toth, and Donald Basel is intended to help the reader begin with a specific chief complaint that may be seen in many different disease entities. It is arranged in chapters that cover specific symptoms mirroring clinical practice. For example, patients do not usually present with a chief complaint of cystic fibrosis; rather, they may present with a cough, respiratory distress, or chronic diarrhea. With a user-friendly, well-tabulated, illustrated approach, this text will help the reader differentiate between the many disease states causing a common symptom."-Publisher's description.
    Digital Access ClinicalKey 2023
  • Digital
    Joseph B. Cantey, MD, Jason Sauberan, PharmD, editors in chief ; John D. Nelson, MD, emeritus ; Elizabeth D. Barnett, MD [and five others], contributing editors.
    Summary: Nelson's Neonatal Antimicrobial Therapy is your go-to reference for treating neonates with infectious diseases. This handy reference provides evidence-based recommendations from leading experts in antimicrobial therapy for the treatment of infectious diseases in neonates.
    Digital Access AAP ebooks 2019
  • Digital
    [edited by] Robert M. Kliegman, Joseph W. St Geme, Nathan J. Blum, Samir S. Shah, Robert C. Tasker, Karen M. Wilson ; editor emeritus Richard E. Behrman.
    Digital Access ClinicalKey 2020
  • Digital
    Andrea Necchi, Philippe E. Spiess, editors.
    Summary: This book aims to provide readers with a current overview of enrolling trials with immune-checkpoint inhibitors in the preoperative setting of localized bladder cancer, renal cell carcinoma, and prostate cancer. The advent of immunotherapy has revolutionized treatments of genitourinary malignancy and evolved strategies for multidisciplinary management. This book explains neoadjuvant checkpoint inhibitors in localized genitourinary cancers, providing insights into the mechanisms of response and development of resistance of cancer cells to immunotherapy. It debates optimal trial design of preoperative checkpoint inhibitors in GU tumors, including optimal endpoints and the role of pathologic response as a surrogate endpoint of survival. It also illuminates clinical management of patients with organ-confined GU tumors, such as side effect management and perioperative safety, before providing an overview of biomarker use for patient selection across the early-stage GU malignancies. Lastly, the book provides the reader with the most up-to-date data emerging from clinical trials involving immunotherapy in early-stage GU malignancies. Neoadjuvant Immunotherapy Treatment of Localized Genitourinary Cancers: Multidisciplinary Management provides a comprehensive review of the field, serving as a valuable resource for urologists, medical oncologists, pathologists, fellows in urologic oncology, upper-level residents training in urology and medical oncology, as well as pharmacists interested in RCC clinicians.

    Contents:
    Introduction
    State-of-the art and ongoing developments
    Clinical cases debate: neoadjuvant checkpoint inhibition vs standard chemotherapy
    Slideshow of tumor samples before and after checkpoint inhibition
    Ongoing trials and clinical trials endpoints debate: the role of pathological response as a surrogate of survival endpoints
    State-of-the-art and future role of molecular biomarkers for patient selection
    Background of immunotherapy trials in prostate cancer
    Clinical case debate: immunotherapy vs alternative therapies in the neoadjuvant and adjuvant setting of localized, high-risk prostate cancer
    Cytoreductive nephrectomy in the era of targeted therapy and immunotherapy
    Clinical cases debate: Neoadjuvant vs adjuvant immunotherapy in localized RCC
    Benchmark of surgical safety results
    What the scientific data tell us about predictive biomarkers of immunotherapy efficacy across the GU malignancies
    Clinical cases debate: biomarker-driven patient selection vs unselective perioperative strategies.
    Digital Access Springer 22
  • Digital
    editors, Mario Campone, Jean-Sébastien Frenel.
    Contents:
    Neoadjuvant therapy in breast cancer / Mario Campone & Jean-Sébastien Frenel
    Ask the experts : neoadjuvant therapy : current options / Mark Beresford
    Evaluation of complete pathologic response / Audrey Mailliez, Géraldine Lauridant-Philippin & Jacques M Bonneterre
    Recommendation and predictors of pathologic response / Vladimir F. Semiglazov & Vladislav V. Semiglazov
    Combination chemotherapy and targeted agents / Victoria Brown & Stephen Chan
    Role of radiation after neoadjuvant chemotherapy / Michelle A. Kraay & Janice A. Lyons
    Monoclonal antibody therapy / Jean-Sébastien Frenel & Mario Campone
    Multiple choice questions : answers.
    Digital Access Future Med 2014
  • Digital
    Robert G. Wallace, Rodrick Wallace, editors.
    Contents:
    1. Did ebola emerge in West Africa by a policy-driven phase change in agroecology?
    2. Ebola in the hog sector: modeling pandemic emergence in commodity livestock
    3. Did neoliberalizing West Africa's forests produce a vaccine-resistant ebola?
    4. Introducing pandemic control theory
    5. The social amplification of pandemics and other disasters
    Index.
    Digital Access Springer 2016
  • Digital
    edited by Lawrence F. Eichenfield, Ilona J. Frieden, Erin F. Mathes, Andrea L. Zaenglein,
    Contents:
    Fetal Skin Development
    Structure and Function of Newborn Skin
    Lesional Morphology and Assessment
    Skin of the Premature Infant
    Neonatal Skin Care and Toxicology
    Diagnostic and Therapeutic Procedures
    Transient Benign Cutaneous Lesions in the Newborn
    Iatrogenic and Traumatic Injuries
    Developmental Abnormalities
    Vesicles, Pustules, Bullae, Erosions, and Ulcerations
    Inherited and Acquired Blistering Diseases
    Bacterial Infections
    Viral Infections
    Fungal Infections, Infestations, and Parasitic Infections in Neonates and Infants
    Eczematous Disorders
    Papulosquamous and Lichenoid Disorders
    Diaper Area Eruptions
    Erythrodermas, Immunodeficiency, and Metabolic Disorders
    Disorders of Cornification (Ichthyosis)
    Immunologic, Reactive, and Purpuric Disorders
    Infantile Hemangiomas and Other Vascular Tumors
    Vascular Malformations
    Hypopigmentation Disorders
    Disorders of Hyperpigmentation and Melanocytes
    Acneiform and Sweat Gland Disorders
    Lumps, Bumps, and Hamartomas
    Disorders of the Subcutaneous Tissue
    Neoplastic and Infiltrative Diseases
    Selected Hereditary Diseases
    Neonatal Mucous Membrane Disorders
    Hair Disorders
    Nail Disorders.
    Digital Access ClinicalKey 2015
  • Digital
    Manoj K. Ghoda.
    Summary: This book is written to simplify complex topics of neonatal and pediatric liver and metabolic diseases which are encountered by clinicians on a day to day basis. Neonatal and early pediatric liver diseases are very much different from adult liver diseases. Most of them are either structural diseases or genetically modulated metabolic disorders affecting liver. They all look same; however the underlying etiology could be quite different. This book thoroughly covers various neonatal and pediatric liver and metabolic diseases through a unique clinical case based approach via a vast clinical experience of the author. The book presents more than 50 unique cases and presents real life learning scenario with various examples facilitating better understanding of the disease and the ways to analyze it. The book uses a simple language and presents line diagrams and algorithms facilitating learning. This book shall be a valuable resource for practicing general pediatricians, pediatric residents and gastroenterologists with involvement in pediatric liver and liver related metabolic diseases. .

    Contents:
    Neonatal and Pediatric liver Diseases
    Case 1: 20 month old child with recurrent convulsions
    Case 2: A 9 year old boy presenting with hepatitis, epistaxis and bleeding from gums
    Case 3: Lightening strikes at one place thrice
    Case 4: A worried couple with a child having jaundice
    Case 5: A 2 year old child who had recurrent hematemesis and bleeding per rectum
    Case 5: A 2 year old child who had recurrent hematemesis and bleeding per rectum
    Case 6: A child who had lost appetite and interest .-Case 7: A year old child with chronic diarrhea and failure to thrive
    Case 8: A 3 year old male with recurrent diarrhea and chest infection
    Case 9: 11 months old twins with Inborn errors of metabolism
    Case 10: A child with recurrent diarrhea
    Case 11: A 3 month old child with recurrent fever, diarrhea, failure to thrive and electrolyte disturbances
    Case 12: A 13-Year-Old girl with chronic abdominal Pain and Vomiting
    Case 13: A 6 month old child with neonatal cholestasis and generalized edema
    Case: 14. A 6 weeks old child who had progressive jaundice and creamy white stools
    Case: 15. Milk branding
    Case 16: An 8 year old son of a lady executive who was a keen "net" searcher
    Case 17: Neo rich parents who wanted best for their child
    Case 18: A case of "Criggler-Najjar syndrome"
    Case: 19. A pleasant child who developed prolonged jaundice
    Case 20: Prolonged neonatal jaundice and cardiac defects
    Case 21: Neonatal jaundice in a child with ocular problem
    Case 22: A 3 year old girl with unexplained vomiting and failure to thrive
    Case 23: A 3 year old boy with failure to thrive and progressively stiffening muscles
    Case 24: A 2 month old child with neonatal ascites
    Case 25: A patient with sickle cell anemia with sudden onset of jaundice
    Case 26: A 7 year old boy with recurrence of jaundice
    Case 28: An eight year old boy with recurrent jaundice
    Case 29: A 3 yr. old with huge liver and abnormal liver functions
    Case-30: A fifteen year old boy with prolonged jaundice
    Case-31: A young girl with recurrent jaundice and vague RUQ mass
    Case-32: A young boy with ascites
    Case 33: Two cases of recurrence of jaundice
    Case 34: A 12 years old boy with "obstructive jaundice
    Case 35: 11 years old boy with jaundice and bleeding PR
    Case 36: A young boy with failed renal transplant and sudden onset of ascites
    Case 37: A 2-Year-Old Boy with Diarrhea, Failure to thrive, and Hepatomegaly
    Case 38: A child with "recurrent attacks of asthma
    Case 39: A 3 years old boy with recurrent jaundice and severe iron deficiency anemia
    Case 40: 3 years old boy with huge liver
    Case 41: A case of neonatal liver failure
    Case 42: A case of acute hepatitis and ......something more
    Case 43: A case of neonatal hepatitis and failure to thrive
    Case 44: An infant with sudden onset of unilateral ptosis and jaundice
    Case 45: A neonate with rapidly deteriorating liver functions
    Case 46: A 6 month old child with hematemesis
    Case 47: A young child with persistent elevation of SGOT/ SGPT
    Case 48: An infant with persistent vomiting
    Case 49: A case of Fever and jaundice
    Case 50: A neonate with jaundice and enlarged liver
    Case 51: A case of huge hepatomegaly but no hypoglycemia
    Case 52: Pregnant lady with HBsAg positivity: A paediatrician's perspective.
    Digital Access Springer [2021]
  • Digital
    [edited by] Brian K. Walsh.
    Summary: Learn to improve the respiratory care of neonates, infants, and children. Neonatal and Pediatric Respiratory Care, 5th Edition gives you a solid foundation in the assessment and treatment of respiratory disorders. Clear, full-color coverage simplifies the principles of respiratory care while emphasizing clinical application. A critical piece in respiratory care's total curriculum solution, this new edition includes all the changes in current clinical practice and in the education environment. Learning objectives at the beginning of each chapter break down key content into measurable behaviors, criteria, and conditions, and self-assessment questions provide an excellent review for the NBRC Neonatal/Pediatric Specialty exam.

    Contents:
    I. Fetal development assessment, and delivery
    Fetal lung development
    Fetal gas exchange and circulation
    Antenatal assessment and high-risk delivery
    II. Assessment and monitoring of the neonatal and pediatric patient
    Examination and assessment of the neonatal and pediatric patient
    Pulmonary function testing and bedside pulmonary mechanics
    Radiographic assessment
    Pediatric flexible bronchoscopy
    Invasive blood gas analysis and cardiovascular monitoring
    Noninvasive monitoring in neonatal and pediatric care
    III. Therapeutic procedures for treatment of neonatal and pediatric disorders
    Oxygen administration
    Aerosols and administration of inhaled medications
    Airway clearance techniques and hyperinflation therapy
    Airway management
    Surfactant replacement therapy
    Noninvasive mechanical ventilation and continuous positive pressure of the neonate
    Noninvasive mechanical ventilation of the infant and child
    Invasive mechanical ventilation of the neonate and pediatric patient
    Administration of gas mixtures
    Extracorporeal membrane oxygenation
    Pharmacology
    Thoracic organ transplantation
    IV. Neonatal and pediatric disorders: presentation, diagnosis, and treatment
    Neonatal pulmonary disorders
    Surgical disorders in childhood that affect respiratory care
    Congenital cardiac defects
    Pediatric sleep-disordered breathing
    Pediatric airway disorders and parenchymal lung diseases
    Asthma
    Cystic fibrosis
    Acute respiratory distress syndrome
    Shock
    Pediatric trauma
    Disorders of the pleura
    Neurological and neuromuscular disorders
    V. Neonatal and pediatric transient and ambulatory care
    Transport of infants and children
    Home care
    Quality and safety.
    Digital Access ClinicalKey Nursing 2019
  • Digital
    Jerrold Lerman, editor.
    Summary: This is the first comprehensive book in more than a decade in the very specialized field of neonatal anesthesia. Edited and written by a team of recognized experts in neonatal anesthesia, surgery, and intensive care, this volume is the quintessential clinical reference for perioperative care of these small patients. The considerations of developmental physiology and pharmacology, which influence anesthesia care and pain management, are clearly explained. Care for surgical and medical procedures, including sedation and monitoring in and out of the operating room, is detailed. Congenital disorders of all organ systems are described together with their current management. The special considerations for neonatal intensive care ? current recommendations for fluid, nutrition, and metabolic requirements, mechanical ventilation, and management of the airway ? are detailed. This topical volume concludes with a summary of complications and ethical considerations in the neonate.

    Contents:
    1. The History of Neonatal Anesthesia
    2. Physiology and Development of the term and preterm neonate
    3. Anesthesia and ancillary drugs & the neonate
    4. Selection of anesthesia techniques for the neonate
    5. Neonatal airway management
    6. Monitoring the Neonate: basic science
    7. Monitoring the neonate: practical considerations
    8. Perioperative metabolic care of the term and preterm infant
    9. Neonatal ventilation
    10. Thoracoabdominal & general surgery
    11. Anesthesia for the neonate: Neurosurgery & Ophthalmology
    12. Anesthesia for cardiac surgery in neonates
    13. Anesthesia outside the operating room
    14. Pain assessment and management
    15. Regional anesthesia
    16. Anesthetic complications in the neonate
    17. Ethical and medico-legal considerations.
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Digital
    Micahel Artman, Lynn Mahony, David F. Teitel.
    Summary: "Neonatal Cardiology is the trusted go-to guide for pediatricians and neonatologists needing concise, practical guidance on the evaluation and management of newborns with heart disease and other cardiac functional abnormalities. Focusing on physiology, mechanics, and presentation of congenital heart disease, this full-color resource provides a succinct, yet complete overview of neonatal cardiology. Neonatal Cardiology opens with discussions of basic aspects of embryology of the heart and a review of normal and abnormal muscle function. From there, you are led through the clinical assessment of patients with an array of cardiac abnormalities. Management and treatment follow, beginning with a basic chapter on the principles of medical management, followed by drug therapy and post-operative care. The book concludes with a chapter on Epidemiology, Etiology, and Genetics of Congenital Heart Disease"--P. 4 of cover.

    Contents:
    Cardiac morphogenesis : implications for congenital cardiovascular diseases
    Myocyte contraction and relaxation
    Perinatal cardiovascular physiology
    Prenatal evaluation and management
    Initial evaluation of the newborn with suspected cardiovascular disease
    Approach to the cyanotic infant
    Approach to the infant with excessive pulmonary blood flow
    Approach to the infant with inadequate systemic perfusion
    Cardiomyopathies
    Arrhythmias
    Principles of medical management
    Cardiovascular drug therapy
    Care of the postoperative patient
    Neurology of congenital cardiovascular disease : brain development, acquired injury and neurodevelopmental outcome
    Epidemiology, etiology, and genetics of congenital cardiovascular disease.
    Digital Access
    Provider
    Version
    AccessCardiology
    AccessPediatrics
  • Digital
    Gerda Meijler, Sylke J. Steggerda.
    Summary: Here is a compact, easy-to-use guide to neonatal cranial ultrasonography for both the novice and experienced practitioner. It provides essential information on the procedure as well as on  normal ultrasound anatomy. Includes high-quality ultrasound images.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    Andrea Poretti, Thierry A.G.M. Huisman, editors.
    Summary: This book discusses the key features of normal, age-dependent neonatal head and spine ultrasonography and the application of this modality to common and rare neonatal neurologic disorders. Ultrasonography is an incredibly versatile bedside imaging tool in detecting brain and spine abnormalities in neonates, monitoring the course of these lesions, and evaluating the maturation of the neonatal brain and spine. Organized to correspond to daily bedside practice, it presents a symptom-based approach and classifies neonatal neurologic disorders at presentation. For each disorder, clinical cases are presented that explore the differential diagnoses and are accompanied by high-quality ultrasound images that depict the abnormal findings. Topics include seizures, encephalopathy, hemiparesis, apnea, microcephaly, and neonatal spine abnormalities. Neonatal Head and Spine Ultrasonography is a succinct guide to this imaging modality and is a valuable resource for pediatric radiologists, neuroradiologists, neonatologists, and pediatricians.

    Contents:
    Introduction
    Technique
    Normal Head Ultrasound in the Preterm and Term Newborn
    Seizures Encephalopathy
    Muscular Hypotonia
    Hemiplegia
    Apnea
    Microcephaly
    Macrocephaly
    Dysmorphic Facial Features
    Facial Skin Abnormalities.
    Digital Access Springer 2016
  • Digital
    edited by Pedro A. de Alarcón, Eric J. Werner, Robert D. Christensen, Martha C. Sola-Visner.
    Summary: Neonatal hematology is a fast-growing field, and the majority of sick neonates will develop hematological problems. This is an essential guide to the pathogenesis, diagnosis and management of hematologic problems in the neonate. Guidance is practical, including blood test interpretation, advice on transfusions and reference ranges for hematological values. Chapters have been thoroughly revised according to the latest advances in the field for this updated third edition. Topics discussed include erythrocyte disorders, platelet disorders, leukocyte disorders, immunologic disorders and hemostatic disorders. Coverage of oncological issues has been expanded to two separate chapters on leukemia and solid tumors, making information more easily accessible. Approaches to identifying the cause of anemia in a neonate are explained, with detailed algorithms provided to aid clinicians in practice. Covering an important hematologic niche with an ever increasing amount of specialized knowledge, this book is a valuable resource for hematologists, neonatologists and pediatricians.
    Digital Access Cambridge 2021
  • Digital
    Joseph B. Cantey, editor.
    Summary: This book is designed to succinctly cover the pathophysiology, epidemiology, clinical presentation, diagnosis and treatment, and important aspects of preventative care for the most frequently encountered neonatal and congenital infections. The first section discusses common neonatal infections acquired during or after delivery, including sepsis, meningitis, necrotizing enterocolitis, and other focal infections. The second section covers a wide range of congenital infections including cytomegalovirus, hepatitis, syphilis, and HIV. The final section discusses the basics of infection prevention, outbreak management, antibiotic stewardship, and immunizations in the nursery setting. Written by an expert in infectious diseases and neonatal/perinatal medicine, this book is the only resource focused exclusively on newborns that is both current and easily accessible. Handbook of Neonatal Infections is an excellent resource for infectious disease specialists, neonatologists, pediatricians, family practitioners, medical students, hospitalists, nurses, and all clinicians caring for infants in the nursery or neonatal intensive care unit.
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Print
    Summary: "This Exam Prep Study Guide was designed to be a high-speed review-a last-minute gut check before your exam day. We created this review to supplement to your certification preparation studies. We encourage you to use it in conjunction with other study aids to ensure you are as prepared as possible for the exam. This book follows National Certification Corporation's most recent exam content outlines and uses a succinct, bulleted format to highlight what you need to know. The aim of this book is to help you solidify your retention of information in the month or so leading up to your exam. It is written by certified inpatient obstetric nurses who are familiar with the exam and the content you need to know"-- Provided by publisher.

    Contents:
    General Examination Information
    Antepartum and Intrapartum
    Adaptation to Extrauterine Life
    Neonatal Pharmacology
    Respiratory System
    Cardiovascular System and Circulation
    Gastrointestinal System
    Renal/Genitourinary System
    Nervous System
    Musculoskeletal System
    Integumentary System
    Head, Eyes, Ears, Nose, and Throat
    Endocrine/Metabolic System
    Hematologic System
    Immune System and Infectious Diseases
    Genetic Disorders
    Neonatal Foundations
    Professional Practice
    Practice Exam: Questions
    Practice Exam: Answers
    Pop Quiz Answers.
    Digital Access R2Library [2024]
  • Digital
    editors, Jing Liu, Erich Soratin and Hai-Ying Cao.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    volume editor, Linda S. de Vries, Hannah C. Glass.
    Digital Access ScienceDirect 2019
  • Digital
    Amy R. Koehn, editor.
    Summary: "Written by leading APRN neonatal educators and clinicians, this authoritative study guide delivers all the tools neonatal nurse practitioners need to pass the National Certification Corporation (NCC) certification exam and the Continuing Competency Assessment (CCA). User friendly and concise, this review's content mirrors that of the actual exam and is structured in accordance with the most updated test plan blueprint. This resource's numerous exam-style questions and answers with rationales included in each chapter help readers uncover gaps in their knowledge. This review synthesizes the knowledge required to pass the exam, saving the reader time and effort by omitting extraneous material. In addition to spotlighting essential content throughout the text, recommended references provide the reader with the option to seek out additional information as needed. Additional benefits include important information about the exam along with savvy study and test-taking tips"--Publisher's description.

    Contents:
    Maternal history in the antepartum
    Maternal history in the intrapartum
    The neonatal physical exam
    Clinical laboratory test and diagnostic procedures, techniques, and equipment use for the neonate
    Communication and parent/infant interaction
    Family integration: the grieving process
    Discharge planning and follow-up
    Thermoregulation
    Resuscitation and delivery room stabilization
    Neonatal nutrition
    Fluids and electrolytes
    Principles of neonatal pharmacology
    Pharmacology: common drug therapies
    Genetics
    The neurologic system
    The cardiac system
    The pulmonary system
    The gastrointestinal system
    The renal system
    The endocrine/metabolic system
    The hematopoietic system
    Neonatal infectious diseases
    The musculoskeletal system
    Integumentary system
    Eyes, ears, nose, mouth, and throat
    Intrauterine drug exposure
    Evidence-based practice
    Legal, ethical, and communication issues
    Patient safety
    Nursing research
    Final practice exam
    Digital Access R2Library 2020
    Limited to 1 simultaneous user
  • Digital
    Julia Petty, Tracey Jones, Agnes van den Hoogen, Karen Walker, Carole Kenner, editors.
    Summary: This textbook is written in line with the Council of International Neonatal Nurses, Inc. (COINN) vision for global unity for neonatal nursing. The core values and goals of COINN are based on excellence and advocacy for high quality newborn care, as well as respecting diversity by integrating cultural norms and values among the care of newborns and their families. The book promotes neonatal nursing as a global speciality through evidence, research, and education of neonatal nurses; and offers key examples of the millennium goals and global outcomes, as well as variations in outcomes for babies. The first part focuses on global perspectives of neonatal nursing from different continents aligning with the World Health Organizations' global regions: (The Americas -USA, Canada and South America-, Western Pacific region -Australia and New Zealand-, European region -UK and Europe-, African region, South-East Asia and Eastern Mediterranean region. For each region, education and competencies, challenges and opportunities, research and evidence-based practice (EBP) as well as practice regulations are described. The second part elaborates on key topics for neonatal nursing across the globe, such as the continuity of neonatal care in the community, patient and family centered care in neonatal settings, sleep and brain development, the fundamental care needs of the neonate and family and global perspectives on hypothermia, hypoglycaemia and hypoxia. Written in a formal academic but reader style, using key literature and evidence, this textbook enables an understanding from a large audience with academic levels and experience, both staff and students, bedside nurses, advanced practice nurses, midwifes and allied professionals. In addition, first person story based reflective narrative are interspersed throughout the book to capture the perspectives of nurses, staff and parents, in the form of vignettes. This textbook is aimed at neonatal nurses across the world as well as current and aspiring students in this field.

    Contents:
    PART 1 Introduction
    Chapter 1. Introduction
    PART 2 Global regions
    Chapter 2. USA
    Chapter 3. Canada
    Chapter 4. South America
    Chapter 5. Australia
    Chapter 6. New Zealand
    Chapter 7. UK
    Chapter 8. Western Europe
    Chapter 9. Eastern Europe
    Chapter 10. South Africa
    Chapter 11. Eastern Africa (Rwanda)
    Chapter 12. Asia
    Chapter 13. Middle East
    PART 3- Key topics for neonatal nursing across the globe
    Chapter 14. Continuity of Neonatal Care in the Community: post-discharge care for preterm, small and sick babies
    Chapter 15. Patient and Family Centered Care in Neonatal Settings
    Chapter 16. Sleep and brain development: Developmental care strategies
    Chapter 17. The three Hs: Hypothermia, hypoglycaemia, hypoxia- Global perspectives on early care of the newborn
    Chapter 18. Psychological and emotional care for the neonate and family
    Chapter 19. Global research in neonatal nursing
    PART 4: Conclusion
    Chapter 20. Key messages: The way forward, next steps.
    Digital Access Springer 2022
  • Digital
    prepared by the AWHONN Task Force to Revise the Fourth Edition of the AWHONN Education Guide, Basic, High-Risk, and Critical-Care Intrapartum Nursing: Clinical Competencies and Education Guide ; task force members Sandra Hoffman, Barbara O'Brien, Julie Zimmerman.
    Summary: "This education guide provides a framework for educational content and skills verification for nurses who provide evidence-based care for newborns and infants."--Publisher's description.
    Digital Access R2Library 2019
    Limited to 1 simultaneous user
  • Digital
    Summary: "The Neonatal Nursing: Scope and Standards of Practice, 3rd Edition, is an essential document for every neonatal nurse practicing in the United States. The scope of practice statement answers the who, what, when, where, how, and why questions of neonatal nursing. The standards provide authoritative statements of the actions and behaviors that all registered neonatal nurses are expected to competently perform, regardless of role, population, specialty, and setting. The product of extensive thought work by many registered nurses, this new edition provides 17 national standards of practice and professional performance. Each standard is accompanied by detailed competencies for the three practice levels. This premier professional resource informs and guides neonatal nurses in their vital work providing safe, quality, and competent care. It is a must-have for every registered neonatal nurse"-- Provided by publisher.

    Contents:
    Cover
    Title Page
    Copyright Page
    Contents
    Acknowledgments
    Scope of Neonatal Nursing Practice
    DEFINITION AND OVERVIEW OF PROFESSIONAL NEONATAL NURSING
    HISTORY OF NEONATAL NURSING
    UNDERLYING ASSUMPTIONS OF NEONATAL NURSING
    PRACTICE CHARACTERISTICS OF NEONATAL NURSING
    CONTINUOUS ASSESSMENT
    DEVELOPMENTAL CARE
    HEALTH PROMOTION
    ENVIRONMENT
    FAMILY-CENTERED CARE
    CULTURALLY SENSITIVE CARE
    SPIRITUAL CARE
    THE CODE OF ETHICS FOR NURSES
    DISCHARGE PLANNING
    ADVOCACY
    QUALITY ASSURANCE AND EVIDENCE-BASED PRACTICE
    PATIENT SAFETY
    RESEARCH PRACTICE ENVIRONMENTS AND LEVELS OF CARE IN NEONATAL NURSING
    EDUCATION, CERTIFICATION, AND ROLES IN NEONATAL NURSING
    FUTURE CONSIDERATIONS
    Standards of Practice for Neonatal Nursing
    Standard 1. Assessment
    Competencies
    Additional Competencies for the Graduate-Level Prepared Registered Nurse
    Additional Competencies for the Advanced Practice Registered Nurse
    Standard 2. Diagnosis
    Competencies
    Additional Competencies for the Graduate-Level Prepared Registered Nurse
    Additional Competencies for the Advanced Practice Registered Nurse Standard 3. Outcome Identification
    Competencies
    Additional Competencies for the Graduate-Level Prepared Registered Nurse and Advanced Practice Registered Nurse
    Standard 4. Planning
    Competencies
    Additional Competencies for the Graduate-Level Prepared Registered Nurse
    Additional Competencies for the Advanced Practice Registered Nurse
    Standard 5. Implementation
    Competencies
    Additional Competencies for the Graduate-Level Prepared Registered Nurse
    Additional Competencies for the Advanced Practice Registered Nurse
    Standard 5A. Coordination of Care
    Competencies Additional Competencies for the Graduate-Level Prepared Registered Nurse
    Additional Competencies for the Advanced Practice Registered Nurse
    Standard 5B. Health Teaching and Health Promotion
    Competencies
    Additional Competencies for the Graduate-Level Prepared Registered Nurse and Advanced Practice Registered Nurse
    Standard 6. Evaluation
    Competencies
    Additional Competencies for the Graduate-Level Prepared Registered Nurse and Advanced Practice Registered Nurse
    Standards of Professional Performance for Neonatal Nursing
    Standard 7. Ethics
    Competencies Additional Competencies for the Graduate-Level Prepared Registered Nurse and Advanced Practice Registered Nurse
    Standard 8. Culturally Congruent Practice
    Competencies
    Additional Competencies for the Graduate-Level Prepared Registered Nurse
    Additional Competencies for the Advanced Practice Registered Nurse
    Standard 9. Communication
    Competencies
    Additional Competencies for the Graduate-Level Prepared Registered Nurse and Advanced Practice Registered Nurse
    Standard 10. Collaboration
    Competencies
    Digital Access R2Library 2021
  • Digital
    [edited by] Carole Kenner, PhD, NNP, RN, FAAN, Judy Wright Lott, PhD, NNP-BC, RN, FAAN.
    Summary: Neonatal nurses face an ever-changing practice landscape that requires swift decisions and actions. This is an up-to-date, comprehensive, quick reference resource written specifically for neonatal nurses throughout the globe. Designed for speedy information retrieval, it encompasses vital information about commonly encountered conditions and procedures on the neonatal unit. The handbook is written by outstanding neonatal practitioners in accessible language and consistently formatted for ease of use. Illustrations, diagrams and flow charts enhance information, which is divided into sections covering Systems Assessment and Management of Disorders, Special Care Considerations, and Procedures and Diagnostic Tests. Appendices deliver such valuable tools for clinical practice as a list of common abbreviations and pertinent web resources. Also included are downloadable, digital, patient management tools, reusable templates, and quick-reference calculation tools. -- Provided by publisher.

    Contents:
    Respiratory system / Katherine Newman
    Cardiovascular system / Samual Mooneyham
    Neurologic system / Georgia Ditzenberger, Susan T. Blackburn, Beth Brown, and Leslie Altimier
    Gastrointestinal system / Ann Phalen and Michele Savin
    Renal system / Leslie Parker
    Hematologic and immune systems / Carole Kenner
    Nutrition / Ruth Lucas, Carrie-Ellen Briere, and Ksenia Zukowsky
    Surgical care section / Michele DeGrazia
    Skin care / Carolyn Lund
    Developmental care / Xiaomei Cong
    The neonatal intensive care unit (NICU) environment / Leslie B. Altimier
    Palliative care / Anita Catlin, & Charlotte Wool
    Transition to home and primary care / Marina Boykova, & Carole Kenner
    Procedures / section editor, Patricia Johnson
    Diagnostic tests / section editor, Samual Mooneyham
    Common lab values / Samual Mooneyham
    Common drugs : medication guide / Beth Shields.
    Digital Access R2Library 2016
    Limited to 1 simultaneous user
  • Digital
    [edited by] Carole Kenner, Marina V. Boykova.
    Summary: "This handbook is a quick reference for nurses who care for the small and sick newborn. It addresses the most common conditions and procedures. The material is offered in an easy to use format and is meant to be a quick reference not a comprehensive one. It can be used by anyone providing care to this population. A systems approach is used in section I. Section II highlights special care considerations, and the final Section, III presents the common procedures, diagnostic tests, and lab values. The appendices house additional material on weights and temperatures, common abbreviations, and web resources. In this third edition, all chapters have been updated to reflect new evidence for neonatal nursing care. Additions include oral/nasogastric tube feedings, bottle feedings, high frequency ventilation and new ventilation techniques. There is a new section on Neonatal Abstinence Syndrome and Neonatal Opioid Withdrawal. This book can be used internationally to provide evidence based practice for consistent high-quality care in order to improve neonatal outcomes"-- Provided by publisher.
    Digital Access R2Library 2021
    Limited to 1 simultaneous user
  • Digital
    Giuseppe Buonocore, Carlo Valerio Bellieni, editors.
    Contents:
    PART I Delivery and Pain
    Gonadal Hormones and Pain Modulation
    Stress and Pregnancy: CRF as Biochemical Marker
    Pain Control During Labour
    PART II Fetal Pain
    Ultrasound and Fetal Stress: Study of the Fetal Blink-Startle Reflex Evoked by Acoustic Stimuli
    Prenatal Affective Exchanges and Their Subsequent Effects in Postnatal Life
    Pain in the Fetus
    New Insights into Prenatal Stress: Immediate and Long-Term Effects on the Fetus and Their Timing
    PART III Neonatal Pain
    Pain Assessment and Spectral Analysis of Neonatal Crying
    Analgesic Procedures in Newborns
    Nonpharmacological Treatment of Neonatal Pain
    Sensory Saturation: An Analgesic Method
    Pharmacologic Analgesia in the Newborn
    Physical Stress Risk Agents in Incubators
    Fetal surgery analgesia
    PART IV Pain: a Risk Factor for Brain Damage
    Neonatal Stressors
    New Insights into Neonatal Hypersensitivity
    From the Gate-Control Theory to Brain Programs for Neonatal Pain
    PART V Pain and Communication
    Disclosure of Pathology to the Newborn's Family
    Communication of Diagnosis: Pain and Grief in the Experience of Parents of Children with a Congenital Malformation
    Invest in Prenatal Life: A High-Yield Stock.
    Digital Access Springer 2017
  • Digital
    Alexandra Mancini, Jayne Price, Tara Kerr-Elliott, editors.
    Summary: This textbook details the nursing care of babies with life limiting conditions and sets the context within the philosophy of internationally collaborative neonatal palliative care emphasising emotional and practical support for their families. Currently, increasing interest from nursing and medical fields regarding palliative care for babies in the antenatal and neonatal period is evident. This innovative and unique text provides experienced nurses and student nurses alike with realistic guidance in caring for babies with palliative care needs, alongside the crucial support for their families and identifies important strategies for professional self care. Nursing experts in this field collaborated to develop a reference book which supports holistic and integrated clinical practice. Parents experiences of what they consider helpful or not so helpful are interwoven throughout the chapter. There is currently no other textbook which offers the above information and guidance specifically for nurses and allied health professionals. As such this book will appeal to all nurses and health professionals working within the neonatal palliative care specialty in a global context.

    Contents:
    Foreword
    Part I. Achieving Quality Nursing Practice in Neonatal Palliative Care
    Chapter 1. Introduction to Neonatal Palliative Care
    Chapter 2. Exploring the Concept on Neonatal Palliative Care
    Chapter 3. Support for Staff: Building Resilience in Nurses
    Chapter 4. The Importance of Effective Communication on the Neonatal Unit
    Chapter 5. Spiritual, Cultural and Religious Care for the Baby and Family
    Chapter 6. Ethical Concepts in Neonatal Palliative Care
    Chapter 7. Legal Issues in Neonatal Palliative Care
    Chapter 8. The Principles of Genetics within Neonatal Palliative Care
    Chapter 9. Antenatal
    Chapter 10. Care of Twins and Multiple Births and Support for the Family: a Detailed Background
    Chapter 11. Care of Twins and Multiple Births and Support for the Family: the Butterfly Project
    Chapter 12. The Decision-Making Process and the Role of the Neonatal Nurse
    Chapter 13. Advance Care Planning
    Chapter 14. Organ and Tissue Donation within Neonatal Palliative and End of Life Care
    Chapter 15. Continuing Emotional and Practical Support for the Whole Family
    Chapter 16. Fundamental Principles of Effective Symptom Management in Neonatal Palliative Care
    Chapter 17. Collaboration between Neonatal Units and Childrens Hospices
    Exploring Opportunities for Potentially Improving Care and Offering Choices
    Chapter 18. Interdisciplinary Working in Neonatal Palliative Care
    Chapter 19. Developing Knowledge and Competence in Neonatal Palliative Care Practice
    Chapter 20. Care of the Baby after Death and Family, and Focus on Post Mortem Examination
    Part II. Achieving Quality in Neonatal Palliative Care Internationally
    Chapter 21. Introduction
    Chapter 22. Australia
    Chapter 23. Kuwait
    Chapter 24. India
    Chapter 25. Malaysia
    Chapter 26. South Africa
    Chapter 27. Ireland
    Chapter 28. The Netherlands
    Chapter 29. Germany
    Chapter 30. Singapore
    Chapter 31. Ukraine
    Chapter 32. Argentina
    Chapter 33. Italy
    Chapter 34. Scotland
    Chapter 35. France
    Support Organisation
    Index.
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    [edited by] James Moore, David P. Carlton, Ira Adams-Chapman.
    Contents:
    Maternal-fetal medicine
    Normal newborn care
    Asphyxia and resuscitation
    Cardiovascular function
    Respiratory function
    Genetics and dysmophism
    Nutrition
    Renal function
    Endocrinology
    Immunology
    Infectious diseases
    Gastroenterology
    Dermatology
    Hematology and oncology
    Neurology
    Development and behavior
    Pediatric surgery
    Basic principles of pharmacology
    Ethics and health services delivery
    Core knowledge in scholarly activities.
    Digital Access AccessPediatrics 2016
  • Digital
    volume editors, Francis B. Mimouni, John N. van den Anker.
    Contents:
    Influence of maturation and growth on drug metabolism from fetal to neonatal to adult life / Lindemalm, S.; van den Anker, J.N.
    How to translate pharmacokinetic data into dosing recommendations / Krekels, E.H.J.; Knibbe, C.A.J.; Pokorna, P.; Tibboel, D.
    Pharmacovigilance in neonatal intensive care / Turner, M.A.; Hill, H.
    Neonatal formulations and additives / Allegaert, K.; Turner, M.A.; van den Anker, J.N.
    Modelling and simulation to support neonatal clinical trials / Khalil, F.M.N.; Loër, S.
    A systematic review of paracetamol and closure of patent ductus arteriosus : are we ready for prime time? / Hammerman, C.; Mimouni, F.B.; Bin-Nun, A.
    Formulation of preterm formula : what's in it, and why? / Mimouni, F.B. Aviv; Mandel, D.; Lubetzky, R.
    Neonatal pharmacotherapy : legal and regulatory issues / Bax, R.; Tomasi, P.
    Digital Access Karger 2015
  • Digital
    Steven M. Donn, Mark C. Mammel.
    Summary: This pocket atlas explains how to use pulmonary graphics as a valuable adjunct for patient management. Actual patterns commonly encountered in neonatal practice are presented side-by-side with schematic illustrations that take apart the graphic and identify its key features, accompanied by brief explanatory text. The book addresses the principles of real-time pulmonary graphics, discusses waveforms and loops, and examines how both are affected by mechanical ventilation and disease states. A series of clinical cases brings key points to life.

    Contents:
    1. Principles of Pulmonary Graphics
    2. Intro to Waveforms
    3. Flow Waveform
    4. Pressure Waveform Description Normal Abnormal Overshoot Plateau
    5. Volume Waveform
    6. Changes in Ventilator Settings and Alterations in Scalar Tracings
    7. Pressure-Volume Loop
    8. Flow-Volume Loop
    9. Trend screens
    10. Clinical scenarios
    11. Quiz.
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Digital
    edited by Lamia Soghier and Beverley Robin.
    Summary: Developed by the leading experts in neonatal simulation, this innovative new resource delivers neonatology health care providers and educators essential guidance on designing, developing, and implementing simulation-based neonatal education programs.
    Digital Access AAP ebooks 2021
  • Digital
    Mario Lima, Olivier Reinberg, editors.
    Summary: This comprehensive, up-to-date reference on surgery in the neonate presents and explains the latest developments in the diagnosis and treatment of neonatal malformations and surgical pathologies. The coverage includes conditions involving the head and neck and the chest, disorders of the liver and biliary tract, gastrointestinal disorders, genitourinary conditions and malformations, anterior abdominal wall defects, tumors, and various other pathologies. For each condition, the pathogenesis and the most current and innovative surgical, and also medical, approaches are described with the aid of numerous illustrations. Minimally invasive strategies receive particular attention, and tips and tricks that will be of value in clinical practice are highlighted. The book includes a general part covering topics such as embryology, anatomy, prenatal diagnosis, and anesthesia and also provides detailed advice on pre- and postoperative care, with special consideration of nutritional problems. Neonatal Surgery will serve as an excellent guide for all pediatric and neonatal surgeons, whether in training or experienced.

    Contents:
    What is a neontal surgeon
    General: Perinatal physiology and general clinical characteristics of newborns. Perinatal management and care of surgical neonates (include nutritional support). Anesthesiological considerations: stabilization of the neonate, fluid administration, electrolyte balance, vascular access, ECMO, bronchoscopy, pain in neonates. Imaging in neonates. Training in neonatal surgery and simulation models. Minimal invasive surgery in the neonate
    Head and Neck: Choanal atresia. Facial clefts and Pierre Robin Sequence. Macroglossia. Congenital cysts and sinuses of the neck
    Chest: Congenital thoracic deformities. Mediastinal masses. Pneumothorax and chylothorax. Congenital malformations of the lung. Congenital diaphragmatic hernia. Esophageal atresia and congenital stenosis
    Gastrointestinal: Gastro-esophageal reflux. Hypertrophic pyloric stenosis and other pyloric affections. Gastric volvulus. Intestinal atresias and stenosis. Meconium ileus and peritonitis. Duplications of the alimentary tract. Mesenteric and omental cysts. Necrotizing enterocolitis. Hirschsprung's disease. Anorectal malformations. Congenital pouch colon. Inguinal hernia, cysts, hydroceles. Malrotations and volvulus
    Liver and Biliary Tract: Biliary atresia. Hepatic cysts. Choledocal cyst and congenital biliary dilatation. Anterior Abdominal Wall Defects: Omphalocele and gastroschisis. Omphalomesenteric duct remnants. Bladder exstrophy. Cloacal exstrophy. Prune belly syndrome
    Tumors: General considerations. Teratoma: cervical and sacrococcygeal. Neuroblastoma. Hepatic tumors. Wilms' tumor. Neonatal ovarian tumors
    Genitourinary: Hydronephrosis. Multicystic dysplastic kidney. Vesico-ureteral reflux. Ureteroceles. Posterior urethral valves. Hydrometrocolpos. DSD. Male genital anomalies. Nervous System: Surgical treatment of central nervous system malformations. Congenital CNS tumors
    Miscellaneous: Angioma and vascular tumors. Use of the Vacuum Assisted Closure.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    Deborah A. Sesok-Pizzini, editor.
    Summary: This book provides a concise yet comprehensive review of neonatal transfusion medicine. The text covers major areas of the field, including chapters dedicated to pre transfusion testing, manufacturing, standards and storage; blood product administration; special congenital and acquired disorders in the neonate; hemolytic disease of the newborn; intrauterine transfusions; adverse reactions; and ECMO. The volume features contributions from a diverse group of experts in the field and include pathologists, anesthesiologists, neonatologists, a pediatric hematologist and oncologist, and a high-risk obstetrician. These authors contribute their unique expertise and perspectives to the practice of neonatal transfusion medicine and allow the reader to experience an in depth introduction to each of the chapter topics. Neonatal Transfusion Practices is a valuable, go-to reference that addresses some of the more frequent questions asked by clinicians and professionals who have limited exposure to neonatal transfusion practices. .

    Contents:
    Neonatal Transfusion Testing, Manufacturing, Standards and Storage
    Blood Product Administration
    Special Disease Considerations in the Neonate
    Hemolytic Disease of the Fetus and Newborn
    Intrauterine Transfusions
    Adverse Reactions
    Transfusion Considerations for Neonatal Extracoporeal Membrane Oxygenation (ECMO).
    Digital Access Springer 2017
  • Digital
    Giuseppe Buonocore, Rodolfo Bracci, Michael Weindling, editors.
    Summary: This landmark book, a reference work now in its second edition, provides healthcare practitioners in neonatology with an up-to-date, comprehensive source of readily accessible practical advice that will assist in the expert management of patients and their diverse illnesses. Leading experts in their fields discuss the underlying causes and mechanisms and all aspects of the treatment of the full range of neonatal diseases and abnormalities, citing the evidence base whenever appropriate. In addition, detailed information is provided on epidemiology and fetal medicine; therapeutic issues such as the organization of care, transport services, and home care after discharge; legal issues; nutrition; and the consequences of medication use during pregnancy, maternal drug abuse and smoking, and maternal diabetes. The inclusion of summaries, tables, and carefully selected guidelines and recommendations will supply practitioners with quick references and instant solutions during daily practice. The book will be a superb resource for all involved in the care of newborn babies, including neonatologists, pediatricians, pediatric surgeons, anesthesiologists, midwives, and nursing staff. It is published within the SpringerReference program, which delivers access to living editions constantly updated through a dynamic peer-review publishing process.

    Contents:
    Acute and Chronic Renal Failure in the Newborn Infant
    Anemia in the Neonatal Period
    Apnea of Prematurity and Sudden Infant Death Syndrome
    Bilirubin Metabolism, Unconjugated Hyperbilirubinemia, and Physiologic Neonatal Jaundice
    Biochemical Basis of Hypoxic-Ischemic Encephalopathy
    Blood Pressure Disorders in the Neonate: Hypotension and Hypertension
    Brain Development and Perinatal Vulnerability to Cerebral Damage
    Bronchopulmonary Dysplasia/Chronic Lung Disease of the Newborn
    Calcium and Phosphorus Homeostasis of Newborns: Pathophysiology
    Cardiac Emergencies in the Newborn
    Cardiovascular Physiology, Pathology, and Clinical Investigation in Neonatal Medicine
    Care of Extremely Low Birth Weight Infants and Timing of Discharge. Information and Psychosocial Intervention in Neonatology.
    Cerebral Hemorrhage in Newborns
    Cerebral Plasticity and Functional Reorganization in Children with Congenital Brain Lesions
    Clinical Aspects and Treatment of the Hypoxic-Ischemic Syndrome
    Coagulation Disorders in Newborns: Clinical Aspects of Platelet Disorders
    Congenital Immunodeficiencies in Newborns
    Congenital Malformations and Syndromes: Early Diagnosis and Prognosis in Neonatal Medicine
    Congenital Malformations of the Brain: Prenatal Diagnosis, Spectrum and Causes
    Continuous Positive Airways Pressure and other Non-Invasive Ventilation Techniques in Newborns
    Control of Breathing in Newborns
    Creactive Protein and Procalcitonin: Reference Intervals in Term and Preterm Newborns
    Development and General Characteristics of Preterm and Term Newborn
    Developmental Pharmacology and Therapeutics in Neonatal Medicine
    Diagnosis and Treatment of Renal and Urinary Tract Malformations in Newborns
    Diagnosis of Fetal Distress
    Disorders of Sexual Development in Newborns
    Early Detection of Neonatal Depression and Asphyxia
    Early Diagnosis of Congenital Heart Disease: When and How to Treat
    Early Markers of Poor Outcome in Neonatal Medicine
    Endocrine Diseases and Disorders of Thyroid Function in Newborns
    Enteral Feeding of the Very Low Birth Weight Infant
    Environment and Early Developmental Care for Newborns
    Epidemiology of Adverse Cerebral Outcome of Newborns
    Epidemiology: Mortality, Morbidity and Follow Up of High Risk Newborns
    Epigenetic Mechanisms
    Esophageal Atresia of Newborns
    Ethical Problems in Neonatal Medicine
    Extracorporeal Membrane Oxygenation for Neonates
    Feeding the Term Infant: Human Milk and Formulas
    Fetal and Neonatal Hydrops
    Fetal Infections: Congenital Syphilis and Tuberculosis
    Fetal Infections: Cytomegalovirus, Herpes Simplex, and Varicella
    Fetal infections: Rubella, HIV, HCV, HBV, and Human Parovirus B19
    Follow-up Outcomes of High Risk Infants
    Fundamentals of Feto-Neonatal Immunology and Its Clinical Relevance
    Gastroenteritis and Intractable Diarrhea in Newborns
    Gastrointestinal Malformations of Newborns
    Guidelines and Protocols for Newborns
    Hematology and Immunology of Newborns: Overview
    Hirschsprung's Disease in Newborns
    Hormones and Gastrointestinal Function of Newborns
    Human Milk and Formulas for Neonatal Nutrition
    In Vitro Fertilization and Multiple Pregnancies
    Inborn Errors of Metabolism and Newborns
    Infants of Diabetic Mothers
    Infants of Smoking Mothers
    Inflammation and Perinatal Brain Injury
    Inflammatory Mediators in Neonatal Asphyxia and Infection
    Intrauterine Growth Restriction: Obstetric and Neonatal Aspects. Intervention Strategies.
    Kernicterus, Bilirubin-Induced Neurological Dysfunction, and New Treatments for Unconjugated Hyperbilirubinemia in Neonates
    Laboratory Medicine: Reference Intervals for Laboratory Tests and Procedures
    Laboratory Medicine: Reference Values and Evidence Based Medicine
    Late Preterm Infants at Risk for Short-Term and Long Term Morbidity and Mortality
    Lung Diseases: Problems of Steroid Treatment of Fetus and Newborn
    Lung Diseases: Surfactant Replacement Therapy in Newborns
    Lung Ultrasounds in Neonatal Diagnostic
    Malformations of Cortical Development in Newborns: Genetic Aspects
    Meconium Aspiration Syndrome
    Meconium Plug Syndrome
    Micronutrients and Vitamins of Newborns
    Molecular Structure of Surfactant: Biochemical Aspects in Newborns
    Necrotizing Enterocolitis of Newborns
    Neonatal Anesthesia
    Neonatal Bacterial and Fungal Infections
    Neonatal Care in the Delivery Room: Initial Management and Approach To Low Risk Newborns
    Neonatal Cholestasis-Conjugated Hyperbilirubinemia
    Neonatal Electroencephalography
    Neonatal Hereditary Neutropenia
    Neonatal Lung Development and Pulmonary Malformations
    Neonatal Malignancies
    Neonatal Orthopedic Surgery
    Neonatal Pain: Neurophysiology, Recognition, Prevention and Management with Non-Pharmacological Interventions
    Neonatal Pulmonary Physiology of Term and Preterm Newborns
    Neonatal Seizures 
    Neonatal Septic Shock
    Neonatal Skin Disorders
    Neonatal Stroke: Clinical Presentation, Imaging, Treatment, and Prognosis
    Neonatal Stroke: Mechanisms
    Neonatal Transport Services
    Neonatal Viral Infections: Enteroviruses and Respiratory Syncytial Virus
    Neonatology and the Law
    Neuroimaging Studies of Newborns
    Neurological Examination of the Newborn Infant 
    Neuromuscular Disorders in Newborns
    Neuroprotective Strategies for Newborns
    Normal and Abnormal Neurodevelopmental and Behavioral Outcomes of Very Low-Birth Weight (VLBW) Infants
    Nutritional Recommendations for the Very Low Birth Weight Newborn
    Ocular Malformations in Newborns
    Organization of Perinatal Care. Training of Doctors and Nurses
    Orofacial Malformations
    Oxygen Saturation Monitoring in Neonatal Period
    Oxygen Toxicity in Newborns
    Parenteral Nutrition of Newborns
    Patent Ductus Arteriosus in Newborns
    Pathologic Unconjugated Hyperbilirubinemia, Isoimmunization, Abnormalities of Red Blood Cells, and Infections
    Pathology and Treatment of Liver Diseases in Newborns
    Pathophysiology of Coagulation and Deficiencies of Coagulation Factors in Newborns
    Pathophysiology of Fetal and Neonatal Kidneys
    Persistent Pulmonary Hypertension of the Newborn and Congenital Diaphragmatic Hernia: Nitric Oxide Therapy in Neonatology
    Physical Environment for Newborns: the Thermal Environment
    Physical Examination of the Newborn
    Physiology and Abnormalities of Leukocytes in Newborns
    Physiology of the Gastrointestinal Tract in Newborns
    Polycythemia and Hyperviscosity in Neonates
    Post-Discharge Nutrition in Preterm Infants
    Prenatal and Postnatal Inflammatory Mechanisms
    Primary Investigations in the Term and Preterm Newborn
    Problems of Discharge and Home Care of Newborns
    Pulmonary Air Leakage in Newborns
    Pulmonary Hemorrhage, Transient Tachypnea and Neonatal Pneumonia
    Quality of Neonatal Intensive Care and Outcome for High Risk Newborn Infants
    Rare Lung Diseases of Newborns
    Rare Surgical Emergencies of Newborns
    Recombinant G-CSF Treatment of Severe Chronic Neutropenia in Neonates and Infants
    Rehydration after Diarrhea in Newborns
    Respiratory Distress Syndrome: Predisposing Factors, Pathophysiology, and Diagnosis
    Resuscitation of the Newborn
    Retinopathy of Prematurity
    Risk Factors for Gestational Diseases
    Risk Management of Newborns
    Safety of Medications During Pregnancy and Breastfeeding: Infants of Drug-Addicted Mothers
    Surfactant Metabolism in Neonatal Lung Diseases
    Surgical Treatment in Newborns of Necrotizing Enterocolitis
    Surgical Treatment of Biliary Tract Malformations in Newborns
    The Fetus at Risk: Chorioamnionitis
    The Process of Decision-Making in Neonatology
    The Thrombotic Risk of the Newborn
    The Timing of Neonatal Brain Damage
    Toxoplasmosis in the Fetus and in the Newborn
    Treatment of Hyperbilirubinemia in Newborns
    Treatment of Respiratory Failure in Newborn: Mechanical Ventilation
    Vaccinations and Neonatal Immunity.- .
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Digital
    [edited by] David K. Stevenson, MD, Professor of Pediatrics, Stanford University School of Medicine, Stanford, California, Ronald S. Cohen, MD, Clincal Professor of Pediatrics, Stanford University School of Medicine, Stanford, California, Philip Sunshine, MD, Professor Emeritus of Pediatrics, Stanford University School of Medicine, Stanford, California.
    Summary: "Understand the fundamental principles of neonatology and learn evidence-based care strategies. With coverage that strikes the perfect balance between proven management approaches and fundamental principles, this unique resource combines the benefits of a comprehensive neonatology textbook with a practical procedural guide. You will get a detailed step-by-step instruction on diagnosis, management, and treatment of acute problems of the newborn as organized by organ system, based on the highest level of evidence available, along with a thorough review of topics such as epidemiology, ethics, legal issues in the NICU, monitoring devices, fluid requirements, and enteral nutrition."--Publisher's website.
    Digital Access AccessPediatrics 2015
  • Digital
    Jae Hoon Lim, Kee-Taek Jang, Jung Hoon Kim.
    Summary: This book provides a thorough overview of the radiologic and pathologic findings of neoplastic diseases of the biliary tract, a sound knowledge of which is essential for appropriate patient management. A key feature is the correlation of imaging findings with both gross pathologic and histopathologic findings for each disease. This is of the utmost importance in understanding true pathologic abnormalities, bearing in mind, for example, the difficulty in ascertaining disease spread and extent on the basis of pathology alone. Since the first edition of the book, conceptual understanding of neoplastic disease of the bile ducts and cholangiocarcinogenesis has evolved significantly, and in the new edition the classification of diseases is based on the most recent edition of the WHO Classification of Tumors of the Digestive System. In addition, some newly recognized pathologies are covered. The book will enhance understanding of the pathology of neoplastic diseases of the biliary tract and aid imaging interpretation. It will be a great asset for pathologists, radiologists, biliary surgeons, and gastroenterologists.

    Contents:
    1. Anatomy of the Biliary Tract
    2. Bile Duct Cysts
    3. Cystic Neoplasms
    4. Benign Neoplasms of the Bile Ducts
    5. Precursors of Cholangiocarcinoma
    6. Intraductal Papillary Neoplasm of the Bile Ducts
    7. Cholangiocarcinoma
    8. Tumors of the Gallbladder
    9. Tumors of the Ampulla Vater and Duodenal Papilla.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    Peter H. Wiernik, Janice P. Dutcher, Morie A. Gertz, editors.
    Summary: The new edition of this textbook integrates the history, epidemiology, pathology, pathophysiology, therapeutics, and supportive care of modern neoplastic hematopathology. Now in its sixth edition, this classic and invaluable text brings together a team of internationally renowned experts and offers in-depth coverage of the complex interface between diagnosis and therapy. The textbook is divided into five major sections, with the first four covering the spectrum of hematologic neoplasia, including chronic leukemias and related disorders, acute leukemias, myeloma and related disorders, and lymphomas, and the fifth section covering a variety of topics in supportive care. Chapters are presented in an accessible and easy-to-read layout, providing updates on the tremendous progress made in the last decade in the understanding of the nature of hematologic malignancies and their treatment. Neoplastic Diseases of the Blood, Sixth Edition is an authoritative and indispensable resource for students, trainees, and clinicians, sure to distinguish itself as the definitive reference on this subject.

    Contents:
    A History of the Chronic Leukemias
    Epidemiology and Etiology of Chronic Myeloid Leukemia
    Pathology of the Chronic Myeloid Leukemias
    Molecular Biology and Cytogenetics of Chronic Myeloid Leukemia
    Diagnosis and Treatment of Chronic Myeloid Leukemia
    Etiology and Epidemiology of CLL
    Morphology and Immunophenotype of CLL
    The Genomic and Epigenomic Landscape of Chronic Lymphocytic Leukemia
    Treatment of Chronic Lymphocytic Leukemia and Related Disorders
    Hairy Cell Leukemia
    History of Acute Leukemia
    The Etiology of Acute Leukemia
    Epidemiology and Hereditary Aspects of Acute Leukemia
    Classification of the Acute Leukemias: Cytochemical and Morphologic Considerations
    Immunobiology of Acute Leukemia
    Cytogenetics of Acute Leukemia
    Diagnosis and Treatment of Childhood Acute Lymphoblastic Leukemia
    Diagnosis and Treatment of Adult Acute Lymphocytic Leukemia
    Diagnosis and Treatment of Acute Myeloid Leukemia in Children
    Diagnosis and Treatment of Adult Acute Myeloid Leukemia Other than Acute Promyelocytic Leukemia
    Acute Promyelocytic Leukemia
    Therapy-Related Acute Myelogenous Leukemia
    The Myelodysplastic Syndromes
    History of Multiple Myeloma
    Monoclonal Gammopathy of Undetermined Significance
    Smoldering Multiple Myeloma
    Newly Diagnosed Multiple Myeloma in Frail Patients
    Newly Diagnosed Multiple Myeloma in Transplant Eligible Patients
    Role of Hematopoietic Cell Transplantation for Myeloma
    Solitary Plasmacytomas and Soft-Tissue Involvement in Multiple Myeloma
    Supportive Care in Multiple Myeloma
    POEMS Syndrome
    Waldenstrom's Macroglobulinemia
    Plasma Cell Leukemia
    Prognosis of Myeloma/Genetics of Myeloma
    Immunoglobulin Light Chain Amyloidosis (AL)
    Historical Landmarks in an Understanding of the Lymphomas
    Genetics in Lymphomagenesis
    Epidemiology and Hereditary Aspects of Hodgkin and Non-Hodgkin Lymphomas
    Pathology of Non-Hodgkin and Hodgkin Lymphomas
    Immunology of the Lymphomas
    Cytogenetics of Lymphomas
    Diagnosis and Treatment of Hodgkin Lymphoma
    Radiotherapeutic Management of Lymphomas
    Diagnosis and Treatment of Non-Hodgkin's Lymphoma of Adults
    Non-Hodgkin Lymphoma of Childhood
    Lymphoma in Other Diseases
    Supportive Care for Patients with Leukemia: A Historical Perspective
    Prevention of Infections in Patients with Hematological Malignancies
    Evaluation and Management of Bacterial and Fungal Infections in Patients with a Hematological Malignancy: A 2016 Update
    Viral Infections in Patients with Hematological Malignancies
    Therapeutic Cytapheresis, Plasmapheresis, and Plasma Exchange in Neoplastic Diseases of the Blood
    Red Cell Transfusions in Patients with Hematologic Malignancies
    Platelet and Granulocyte Transition
    Alternative Sources of Hematopoietic Stem Cells and Their Clinical Applications
    HLA Typing in Support of Hematopoietic Cell Transplantation from Unrelated Donors
    Special Care of Blood and Marrow Hematopoietic Cell Transplant Recipient
    Hematopoietic Growth Factors in the Supportive Care and Treatment of Patients with Hematologic Neoplasms
    Bleeding and Thrombosis in Hematologic Neoplasia
    Psychological Aspects of Hematological Neoplasms.
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Digital
    Valentí Rull, Ana Carolina Carnaval, editors.
    Summary: This book provides a comprehensive overview of the patterns of biodiversity in various neotropical ecosystems, as well as a discussion on their historical biogeographies and underlying diversification processes. All chapters were written by prominent researchers in the fields of tropical biology, molecular ecology, climatology, paleoecology, and geography, producing an outstanding collection of essays, synthetic analyses, and novel investigations that describe and improve our understanding of the biodiversity of this unique region. With chapters on the Amazon and Caribbean forests, the Atlantic rainforests, the Andes, the Cerrado savannahs, the Caatinga drylands, the Chaco, and Mesoamerica - along with broad taxonomic coverage - this book summarizes a wide range of hypotheses, views, and methods concerning the processes and mechanisms of neotropical diversification. The range of perspectives presented makes the book a truly comprehensive, state-of-the-art publication on the topic, which will fascinate both scientists and general readers alike.

    Contents:
    Chapter 1. Introduction
    Part 1. Neotropical diversity and diversification
    Chapter 2. Neotropical diversification: historical overview and conceptual insights
    Chapter 3. Beyond refugia: New insights on Quaternary climate variation and the evolution of biotic diversity in tropical South America
    Chapter 4. Tropical and subtropical in South America: a study of community turnover across environmental gradients
    Chapter 5. Evolutionary macroecology and the geographical patterns of Neotropical diversification
    Chapter 6. Evolutionary imprints on species distribution patterns across the Neotropics
    Chapter 7. Avian diversity in humid tropical and subtropical south American forests, with a discussion about their related climatic and geological underpinnings
    Chapter 8. Contrasting patterns of temporal diversification in Neotropical butterflies: An overview
    Chapter 9. Diatom diversity and biogeography across tropical South America
    Part 2. Regional biodiversity patterns and diversification processes
    Chapter 10. The origin and evolution of Amazonian species diversity
    Chapter 11. Patterns and processes of diversification in Amazonian white sand ecosystems: insights from birds and plants
    Chapter 12. Human contribution to Amazonian plant diversity: legacy of pre-Columbian land use in modern plant communities
    Chapter 13. On the young savannas in the land of ancient forests
    Chapter 14. The diversification of extant Angiosperms in the South America dry diagonal
    Chapter 15. Diversity, endemism, and evolutionary history of montane biotas outside the Andean region
    Chapter 16. Patterns of species and lineage diversity in the Atlantic rainforest of Brazil
    Chapter 17. Diversification in ancient and nutrient-poor Neotropical ecosystems: how geological and climatic buffering have shaped plant diversity in some of the worlds neglected hotspots
    Chapter 18. Bioregions of Eastern Brazil, based on vascular plant occurrence data
    Chapter 1 9. Forests diversity in the Mexican neotropics: A paleocological view
    Chapter 20. Historical biogeography of Caribbean plants revises regional paleogeography
    Part 3. Taxon-based local and regional studies
    Chapter 21. Amphibians and reptiles of Venezuelan Guayana: diversity, biogeography and conservation
    Chapter 22. Origin of elevational replacements in a clade of nearly flightless birds
    most diversity in tropical mountains accumulates via secondary contact following allopatric speciation
    Chapter 23. Clade-specific biogeographic history and climatic niche shifts of the southern Andean-southern Brazilian disjunction in plants
    Chapter 24. Biotic and landscape evolution in an Amazonian contact zone: insights from the herpetofauna of the Tapajós River basin
    Chapter 25. Diversification processes in lizards and snakes from the middle São Francisco River dune region
    Chapter 26. Unexpected beta-diversity radiations in highland clades of Andean Terraranae frogs
    Chapter 27. Disparate patterns of diversification within Liolaemini lizards
    Chapter 28. Diversification history of Neotropical Lecythidaceae, an ecologically dominant tree family of Amazon rain forest
    Part 4. IV. Epilogue
    Chapter 29. Conservation in the Neotropics
    a final reflection.
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    Luiz Henrique Rosa, editor.
    Summary: This pioneering book focuses on Neotropical endophytic fungi, providing a comprehensive overview of their diversity, ecology, and biotechnological applications in medicine, agriculture, and industry. Despite their rich diversity, the endophytic fungi associated with plants of Central and South American biomes remain largely unknown. The book addresses that knowledge gap by offering insights into Neotropic endophytic fungal community.

    Contents:
    Neotropical endophytic fungi: isolation, diversity, and biogeography of Neotropical endophytic fungi
    Ecology of Neotropical endophytic fungi
    Diversity, ecology and applications of Epichloë fungal endophytes of grasses in South America
    Endophytes from unique ecosystems in Chile: challenge and opportunities for biodiversity and biotechnological applications
    Endophytic fungal community associated with Colombian plants
    Fungal endophytes and bioactive compounds from tropical forests of Costa Rica
    Diversity of endophytic fungi in Brazilian biomes Rupestrian Grasslands, Caatinga, Pampa, and Pantanal
    Endophytic fungi of the Cerrado: Diversity and its role in ecological interactions and environmental conservation
    Endophytic fungi associated with medicinal plants of Amazonian forest
    Endophytic fungi associated with ancient Neotropical plants
    Bioprospecting of Neotropical endophytic fungi in South America applied to medicine
    Bioprospecting of Neotropical endophytic fungi applied to agriculture
    Endophytic fungi associated with Neotropical plants: a source of promising macromolecules for use in biotechnology
    Potential use of Neotropical endophytic fungi in green synthesis of nanoparticles using endophytes
    Bioprospecting of secondary bioactive metabolites produced by endophytic fungi of the medicinal Piper sp. in the Brazilian Tropical Rain Forest
    Diversity of endophytic fungi of Empetrum rubrum Vahl ex Willd (Ericaceae), a medicinal plant from austral South America.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    Bernardo Urbani, Manuel Lizarralde, editors.
    Summary: Ethnoprimatology is situated at the intersection between the biological and cultural subfields of anthropology. Research on the interface between human and nonhuman primates has been steadily increasing since 1997, when the term ethnoprimatology was first coined. Although there have been studies on human-nonhuman primate interactions in the tropical Americas, no single comprehensive volume has been published that integrates this information to fully understand it in this region. Eighteen novel chapters written by outstanding scholars with various backgrounds are included in this edited volume. They refer to the complex interconnections between different indigenous peoples with New World monkeys that sympatrically share their ancestral territories. Geographically, the range covers all of the Neotropics, from southern Mexico through northern Argentina. This work includes topics such as primates as prey and food, ethnozoology/ethnoecology, cosmology, narratives about monkeys, uses of primates, monkeys as pets, and ethnoclassification. Multiple views as well as diverse theoretical and methodological approaches are found within the pages. In sum, this is a compendium of ethnoprimatological research that will be prized by anthropologists, ethnobiologists, primatologists, conservationists, and zoologists alike. "This book ... provides a historical benchmark for all subsequent research in ethnoprimatology in the Neotropics and beyond."--Leslie E. Sponsel, University of Hawaii at Mānoa.

    Contents:
    Intro
    Foreword
    References
    Neotropical Ethnoprimatology: An Introduction
    References
    Acknowledgments
    Contents
    Contributors
    About the Editors
    Part I: Mesoamerica
    Chapter 1: Perception and Uses of Primates Among Popoluca Indigenous People in Los Tuxtlas, Mexico
    1.1 Introduction
    1.2 Methods
    1.3 Results
    1.3.1 Cultural and Traditional Aspects About Primates
    1.3.2 Emotive Perceptions About Primates
    1.3.3 Medicinal Use of Primates
    1.3.4 Use of Primates as Pets
    1.3.5 Use of Primates as Food
    1.3.6 Economic Uses and Perceptions About Primates 1.3.7 Perceived Ecological Importance of Primates
    1.3.8 Perceived Abundance and Distribution of Primates
    1.3.9 Perceived Threats to the Conservation of Primates
    1.3.10 Interest in Primate Conservation
    1.4 Discussion
    References
    Chapter 2: Mental State Attribution to Nonhuman Primates and Other Animals by Rural Inhabitants of the Community of Conhuas Near the Calakmul Biosphere Reserve in the Yucatan Peninsula, Mexico
    2.1 Introduction
    2.2 The Present Study
    2.3 Results
    2.3.1 The Folk Psychology of Basic Emotions
    2.3.1.1 Anger
    2.3.1.2 Fear
    2.3.1.3 Pain 2.3.1.4 Joy
    2.3.2 The Folk Psychology of Complex Mental States
    2.3.2.1 Thinking, Intelligence, and Deceit
    2.3.2.2 Deceit
    2.4 Discussion
    2.5 Acknowledgments
    Appendix 1: Sociodemographic Information of Participants
    Appendix 2: List of Animal Cards Shown to Participants
    References
    Chapter 3: Local Knowledge and Cultural Significance of Primates (Ateles geoffroyi and Alouatta pigra) Among Lacandon Maya from Chiapas, Mexico
    3.1 Introduction
    3.2 The Lacandon Maya from Naha and Metzabok and Their Environment
    3.2.1 The Lacandon
    3.2.2 The Lacandon Environment 3.3 Monkeys in the Ancient Maya
    3.3.1 The Origin of Monkeys
    3.3.2 The Monkey: Lord of Writing
    3.3.3 Monkeys as Wahyis (Powerful Supernatural Spirits)
    3.3.4 Monkey-Cacao (Chocolate) Associations
    3.3.5 Primate Representations in the Archaeological Record
    3.4 Current Local Knowledge and Cultural Significance of Non-human Primates
    3.5 Conclusions
    References
    Chapter 4: Representation and Signification of Primates in Maya-Q'eqchi' Cosmovision and Implications for Their Conservation in Northwestern Guatemala
    4.1 Introduction
    4.2 Study Area 4.3 Primates and Our Participatory Conservation Work
    4.4 Representation and Signification of Primates in Maya-Q'eqchi' Culture and Cosmovision
    4.4.1 Origin of Primates
    4.4.2 Family Lineages, Surnames, and Proper Names
    4.4.3 Sacred Mayan Calendar and the Nahual B'atz'
    4.4.4 Art
    4.4.5 Language
    4.4.6 Uses and Attitudes
    4.5 Implications for Primate and Habitat Conservation
    4.6 Final Considerations
    References
    Part II: South America
    Chapter 5: Ethnoprimatology of the Tikuna in the Southern Colombian Amazon
    5.1 Introduction
    5.2 The Tikuna
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    Fabio Prezoto, Fabio Santos Nascimento, Bruno Corrêa Barbosa, Alexandre Somavilla, editors.
    Summary: This book provides updated information on this intriguing and exciting group of insects: Neotropical Social Wasps. These insects have a particular biology and their colonies are formed by a few cooperative females living in either small or massive, structured nests where stinging individuals organize their activities and defend their offspring. Topics include evolutionary aspects, biogeography, post-embryonic development, community behavior and ecology, economic importance, and research methods.

    Contents:
    A Brief Review Of Studies On Social Wasps In Brazil
    The Evolution of Swarm Founding in the Wasps: Possible Scenarios
    The foraging behaviour of neotropical social wasps
    The choice of sexual partner in social wasps
    Nesting Habits of Neotropical Social Wasps
    Castes and polymorphisms in neotropical social wasps
    The biology of swarm-founding epiponine wasp, Polybia paulsita
    Causes and consequences of reproductive conflicts in wasp societies
    Post-embryonic Development in Brazilian Social Wasps
    Evolution and adaptation of the wings and mandibles of neotropical social wasps
    Cuticular hydrocarbon studies in Neotropical Social Wasps
    Biogeographic hypotheses for the Neotropical Social Wasps
    Chromosome diversity and evolution in Neotropical social wasps
    Phylogeny and classification of the Neotropical social wasps
    List of species of social wasps from Brazil
    The Old-World versus New-World social wasps: Similarities, differences and threats
    Key to the genera of social wasps (Polistinae) occurring in Brazil
    Research techniques used in the study of social wasps
    Community ecology of social wasps in Brazil: Forty years of studies
    lnteractions between wasps and other animals: associations and natural enemies
    Interactions of social wasps with microorganisms
    Artificial Environments for Studying Eusocial Wasps
    Economic importance of Neotropical Social Wasps.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    Mary Qiu, editor.
    Summary: This book offers a comprehensive overview of neovascular glaucoma (NVG), which is an extraordinarily aggressive type of secondary glaucoma that has often been discussed as an afterthought rather than the focal subject in glaucoma reference books. NVG is considered an end stage complication in patients with certain underlying retinal diseases, most commonly diabetic retinopathy and retinal vein occlusions. Historically, NVG has been one of the most difficult types of glaucoma to manage, with a high failure rate for traditional glaucoma surgery, and often progression of the underlying retinal disease despite "standard of care" treatment. Chapters cover advancements made in recent years in the management of the underlying ischemic retinal conditions that lead to NVG, including the use of anti-vascular endothelial growth factor (anti-VEGF) medications. Additionally, chapters discuss glaucoma surgeries, which have become less invasive in recent years with the advent of microinvasive glaucoma surgery (MIGS). This book offers an up-to-date reference regarding current concepts in the diagnosis, as well as medical, laser, and surgical treatment of NVG in the anti-VEGF era, with attention to the close collaboration between glaucoma specialists and retina specialists. Neovascular Glaucoma - Current Concepts in Diagnosis and Treatment will change the way ophthalmologists manage NVG, ensuring patients better outcomes. It is a must-have resource for ophthalmologists worldwide.
    Digital Access Springer 2022
  • Digital
    [edited by] William Oh, Michel Baum ; consulting editor, Richard A. Polin.
    Contents:
    Section 1. Foreword. Water flux and amniotic fluid volume: understanding fetal water flow
    Body composition of fetus and newborn
    Potassium metabolism
    Section B. Renal aspects of sodium metabolism in the fetus and neonate
    Perinatal calcium and phosphorus metabolism
    Acid-base homeostasis in the fetus
    Section C. Glomerular filtration rate in neonates
    Section D. Renal development and molecular pathogenesis of renal dysplasia
    The developing kidney and the fetal origins of adult cardiovascular disease
    Fluid and electrolyte management of high risk infants
    Renal modulation: the renin-angiotensin-aldosterone system
    Renal modulation: arginine vasopressin and atrial natriuretic peptide
    Acute problems of prematurity: balancing fluid volume and electrolyte replacements in very low birth weight and extremely low birth weight neonates
    Lung fluid balance in developing lungs and its role in neonatal transition - Use of diuretics in the newborn
    Neonatal hypertension: diagnosis and management
    Edema
    Kidney injury in the neonate
    Hereditary tubulopathies
    Inherited disorders of calcium, phosphate and magnesium.
    Digital Access ClinicalKey 2019
  • Digital
    Claudio Ronco.
    Summary: "Kidney disease is frequently described as a public health problem. This book will unpack what we mean by "public health" and by "taking a public health approach." We will consider the global burden of kidney diseases and their determinants, with a focus on chronic kidney disease"-- Provided by publisher.
    Digital Access Karger 2021
  • Digital
    [edited by] Edgar V. Lerma, Matthew A. Sparks, Joel Michels Topf.
    Contents:
    Part I. Patient assessment. History and physical diagnosis
    Urinalysis
    Measurement of GFR
    Imaging techniques
    Renal biopsy
    Part II. Acute kidney injury. Epidemiology, etiology, pathophysiology and diagnosis
    Management options: CRRT
    Hepatorenal syndrome
    Cardiorenal syndrome
    Medications
    Sepsis
    Rhabdomyolysis
    Tumor lysis syndrome
    Contrast-induced nephropathy
    Acute glomerulonephritis and RPGN
    Nephrotic syndrome
    Obstructive uropathy
    Nephrolithiasis
    Part III. Chronic kidney disease. Epidemiology, etiology, pathophysiology and staging
    Anemia in chronic kidney disease
    Renal osteodystrophy
    Cardiovascular disease
    Hyperlipidemia
    Nutrition
    Management of the patient with progressive renal failure
    Drug dosing in patients with CKD
    Part IV. Primary glomerular disorders. Minimal change disease
    Focal segmental glomerulosclerosis
    Membranous nephropathy
    IgA nephropathy and Henoch Schonlein disease
    Membranoproliferative glomerulonephritis
    Part V. Secondary glomerular disorders. Diabetic nephropathy
    Lupus nephritis
    Dysproteinemias or light chain diseases
    Vascultides
    Thrombotic microangiopathies
    Part VI. Infection associated glomeruleonephritides. Post-infectious glomereulonephritis
    Viral hepatitis-associated glomerulonephritis
    HIV-associated renal disorders
    Part VII. Other renal parenchymal diseases. Fabry disease
    Cystic diseases of the kidneys
    Other hereditary renal disorders
    Tubulointerstitial diseases
    Urinary tract infections
    Renal neoplasias
    Part VIII. Renal diseases in special populations. Renal disease and hypertension in pregnancy
    Sickle cell nephropathy
    Renal disease in the elderly
    Part IX. Treatment options. Hemodialysis
    Home dialysis
    Peritoneal dialysis
    Therapeutic plasma exchange (plasmapheresis)
    Part X. Transplantation. Epidemiology and outcomes
    Donor and recipient evaluation
    Immunosuppression
    Rejection of the renal transplant
    Post-transplant malignancies
    Post-transplant infections
    Primary care of the renal transplant patient
    Part XI. Hypertension. Primary hypertension
    Renal parenchymal hypertension
    Renovascular disease
    Endocrine hypertension
    Other forms of secondary hypertension
    Renal diseases in African-Americans
    Resistant hypertension
    Hypertensive emergencies
    Pharmacologic treatment of hypertension
    Non-pharmacologic treatment of hypertension
    Part XII. Acid-base and electrolyte disorders. Volume disorders
    Genetic disorders of Na transport
    Hyponatremia and hypernatremia
    Hypokalemia and hyperkalemia
    Hypocalcemia and hypercalcemia
    Disorders of phosphorus metabolism
    Disorders of magnesium metabolism
    Metabolic acidosis
    Metabolic alkalosis
    Part XIII. Onconephrology.
    Part XIV. Palliative care nephrology.
    Part XV. Nephrology beginnings.
    Part XVI. Nephrology trivia.
    Digital Access ClinicalKey 2019
  • Digital
    José A. Moura-Neto, José Carolino Divino-Filho, Claudio Ronco, editors.
    Summary: This book presents contributions from leading international experts in the field of nephrology. Each chapter is independent and discusses nephrology in the authors country, including the history of nephrology development, kidney disease epidemiology, clinical nephrology, dialysis practice in acute and chronic renal failure settings (hemodialysis, hemodiafiltration, peritoneal dialysis), pediatric nephrology, and kidney transplantation. In addition, the book covers topics such as the job market for nephrologists, reimbursement, nephrology education, and the number of professionals in the private and public sectors. With 53 chapters and more than 300 authors from all continents offering a unique perspective on nephrology practice, it provides a much-needed information source for nephrologists around the globe. The reader will be able to travel through Nephrology Worldwide, a pleasant reading experience with not only relevant information and updated data, but also a comprehensive look at the history, countries peculiarities, and a critical analysis of the scenario of nephrology and renal replacement therapy. A valuable resource for healthcare professionals and other stakeholders interested in learning about the status quo of Nephrology Worldwide. Both the failings and the successes are outlined in a way that should make this book a compelling read, not just for the well-informed renal physician, but also for planners and policy makers whose thinking and actions are integral to the way we practice medicine. Sir Peter J. Ratcliffe, Nephrologist and 2019 Nobel Prize Winner.

    Contents:
    Nephrology Worldwide: the Vision, the Project, and the Mission
    Nephrology Worldwide: a Perspective from the International Society of Nephrology
    Nephrology in the Democratic Republic of the Congo
    Nephrology in Ethiopia
    Nephrology in Nigeria
    Nephrology in South Africa
    Nephrology in Uganda
    Nephrology in Canada
    Nephrology in Mexico
    Nephrology in the United States of America
    Nephrology in Cuba
    Nephrology in Argentina
    Nephrology in Bolivia
    Nephrology in Brazil
    Nephrology in Chile
    Nephrology in Uruguay
    Nephrology in Venezuela
    Nephrology in Bangladesh
    Nephrology in India
    Nephrology in Pakistan
    Nephrology in China
    Nephrology in Japan
    Nephrology in Cambodia
    Nephrology in Indonesia
    Nephrology in Malaysia
    Nephrology in Singapore
    Nephrology in Thailand
    Nephrology in Iran
    Nephrology in Israel
    Nephrology in the Sultanate of Oman
    Nephrology in Saudi Arabia
    Nephrology in Turkey
    Nephrology in United Arab Emirates
    Nephrology in Albania
    Nephrology in Bulgaria
    Nephrology in Croatia
    Nephrology in the Czech Republic
    Nephrology in Poland
    Nephrology in Russia
    Nephrology in Ukraine
    Nephrology in Denmark
    Nephrology in France
    Nephrology in Greece
    Nephrology in Italy
    Nephrology in Ireland
    Nephrology in the Netherlands
    Nephrology in Portugal
    Nephrology in the United Kingdom
    Nephrology in Spain
    Nephrology in Sweden
    Nephrology in Switzerland
    Nephrology in Australia
    Nephrology in New Zealand.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    editors Kiyoshige Ohseto, Hiroyuki Uchino, Hiroki Iida.
    Summary: This book provides physicians practicing at pain management clinics with comprehensive explanations of interventional therapeutic procedures including nerve blockade, as well as pharmacotherapy. Interventional therapeutic procedures including nerve blockade are categorized by devices into landmark ("blind"), X-ray-guided, ultrasound-guided, CT-guided, MR-guided, and endoscopic techniques. In this book, each chapter introduces one type of nerve blockade procedure that involves several different devices. The authors describe the pros and cons of each technique and make recommendations for the best devices to use. This book will also help anesthesiologists and other physicians to improve their treatment techniques.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    Amgad S. Hanna.
    Summary: This book addresses the severe knowledge deficit in peripheral nerve amongst neurosurgeons, however this topic represents an integral part of the oral board examination. The book employs a case based approach with the highest-yield scenarios for oral boards, primarily focusing on nerve entrapments, trauma and tumors. Thanks to its question and answer format, the reader is encouraged to think about the cases and questions as if taking the real exam before they check the answers. The work also includes common pitfalls, a section on nerve examinations including video recordings, and a section on important clinical findings that should be diagnosed from the picture. The book not only serves neurosurgeons, but also plastic surgeons, orthopedists, and neurologists.

    Contents:
    Front Matter
    Nerve Cases
    Front Matter
    Case I: Hand Weakness 1
    Case II: Shoulder Weakness 1
    Case III: Foot Drop 1
    Case IV: Foot Drop 2
    Case V: Tumor 1
    Case VI: Shoulder Pain
    Case VII: Tumor 2
    Case VIII: Trauma 1
    Case IX: Trauma 2
    Case X: Hand Pain
    Case XI: Shoulder Weakness 2
    Case XII: Tumor 3
    Case XIII: Thigh Pain 1
    Case XIV: Hand Weakness 2
    Case XV: Hand Weakness 3
    Case XVI: Arm Pain
    Case XVII: Hand Weakness 4
    Case XVIII: Thigh Pain 2
    Case IX: Trauma 3
    Case XX: Foot Pain
    Case XXI: Forearm Pain
    Case XXII: Thigh Weakness
    Examination
    Front Matter
    Examination of the Upper Limb
    Examination of the Lower Limb
    Instant Pattern Recognition
    Front Matter
    Sight Diagnosis
    Back Matter.
    Digital Access Springer 2017
  • Digital
    [edited by] Susan E. Mackinnon ; contributing editor, Andrew Yee.
    Summary: Representing the treatment and management philosophy of Dr. Susan Mackinnon, Nerve Surgery provides extensive coverage of innovative surgical options as well as guidance on the management of complicated compression neuropathies. In addition to detailed information on tried-and-true as well as cutting-edge surgical techniques, it contains chapters on the basic principles of nerve surgery, such as Anatomy and Physiology for the Peripheral Nerve Surgeon and Evaluation of the Patient with Nerve Injury or Nerve Compression. Key Features: More than 850 compelling full-color figures and photographs demonstrate key concepts, Videos narrated by Dr. Mackinnon are available online, Coverage of important conditions that can be treated non-operatively, such as neurogenic thoracic outlet syndrome and multilevel compression neuropathy, Strategies and secondary procedures for failed nerve surgeries, Dr. Mackinnon provides tips on how she manages complicated pain problems. This book is a core reference for all plastic surgeons, neurosurgeons, orthopedic surgeons, hand surgeons, residents, and allied health specialists treating patients with nerve injuries.

    Contents:
    Chapter 1: Anatomy and Physiology for the Peripheral Nerve Surgeon
    Chapter 2: Evaluation of the Patient with Nerve Injury or Nerve Compression
    Chapter 3: The Electrodiagnostic Examination with Peripheral Nerve Injuries
    Chapter 4: Nerve Repair and Grafting
    Chapter 5: Nerve Transfer for the Forearm and Hand
    Chapter 6: Nerve Transfer Procedures for Tetraplegia
    Chapter 7: Nerve Autograft Substitutes: Conduits and Processed Allografts
    Chapter 8: Peripheral Nerve Allotransplantation
    Chapter 9: Median Nerve Entrapment and Injury
    Chapter 10: Ulnar Nerve Entrapment and Injury
    Chapter 11: Radial Nerve Entrapment and Injury
    Chapter 12: Thoracic Outlet Syndrome
    Chapter 13: Injury and Compression Neuropathy in the Lower Extremity
    Chapter 14: Brachial Plexus Injuries
    Chapter 15: Obstetrical Brachial Plexus Palsy
    Chapter 16: Facial Nerve Injury
    Chapter 17: Tendon Transfers for Functional Reconstruction
    Chapter 18: Tumors of the Peripheral Nervous System
    Chapter 19: Surgical Management of Chronic Headaches, Migraines, and Neuralgias
    Chapter 20: Painful Sequelae of Peripheral Nerve Injuries.
    Digital Access
    Provider
    Version
    Thieme MedOne Plastic Surgery
    Thieme MedOne Neurosurgery
  • Digital
    Summary: Site is designed to teach human anatomy to students of the health professions, and to serve to review anatomy for clinical rotations and USMLE preparation.
    Digital Access Sch Educ Syst Website
  • Digital
    Summary: Site is designed to teach human anatomy to students of the health professions, and to serve to review anatomy for clinical rotations and USMLE preparation.
    Digital Access Sch Educ Syst Website
  • Digital
    Frank H. Netter ; contributing illustrator and art lead editor, Carlos A.G. Machado ; terminology content lead editors, Paul E. Neumann, R. Shane Tubbs ; electronic content lead editors, Brion Benninger, Todd M. Hoagland ; educational content editors, Jennifer K. Brueckner-Collins, Martha Johnson Gdowski, Virginia T. Lyons, Peter J. Ward ; emeritus editor, John T. Hansen.
    Contents:
    Introduction
    Head and neck
    Back
    Thorax
    Abdomen
    Pelvis
    Upper limb
    Lower limb
    Plate pearls
    Study guides.
    Digital Access ClinicalKey 2023
  • Digital
    C. Richard Conti.
    Summary: View the cardiovascular system as only Netter images can depict it. This spectacularly illustrated volume, part of the masterwork known as the Netter (CIBA) "Green Books," provides a highly visual guide to the heart, from basic science, anatomy, and physiology to pathology and injury. This classic Netter reference has been updated to mirror the many exciting advances in cardiovascular medicine and imaging - offering unparalleled insights into anatomy, physiology, and clinical conditions. Gain a rich clinical view of all aspects of the cardiovascular system in one comprehensive volume, conveyed through beautiful illustrations and radiologic images. Clearly see the connection between basic science and clinical practice with an integrated overview of normal structure and function as it relates to pathologic conditions. Grasp current clinical concepts regarding development, pediatrics, and adult medicine captured in classic Netter illustrations, as well as new illustrations created by artist-physician Carlos Machado, MD, and others working in the Netter style. Quickly understand complex topics thanks to a concise text-atlas format that provides a context bridge between primary and specialized medicine. Benefit from matchless Netter illustrations that offer precision, clarity, detail and realism as they provide a visual approach to the clinical presentation and care of the patient.

    Contents:
    Section 1: Anatomy
    Section 2: Physiology
    Section 3: Imaging
    Section 4: Embryology
    Section 5: Congenital Heart Disease
    Section 6: Acquired Heart Disease.
    Digital Access ClinicalKey 2014
  • Digital
    David L. Felten, M. Kerry O'Banion, Mary Summo Maida; illustrations by Frank H. Netter ; contributing illustrators, James A. Perkins, Carlos A.G. Machado, John A. Craig.
    Digital Access ClinicalKey 2022
  • Digital
    edited by George A. Stouffer, Marschall S. Runge, Cam Patterson, Joseph S. Rossi ; illustrations by Frank H. Netter ; contributing illustrations, Carlos A.G. Machado [and 6 others].
    Summary: "Perfect for residents, generalists, anesthesiologists, emergency department physicians, medical students, nurses, and other healthcare professionals who need a practical, working knowledge of cardiology, Netter's Cardiology, 3rd Edition, provides a concise overview of cardiovascular disease highlighted by unique, memorable Netter illustrations. This superb visual resource showcases the well-known work of Frank H. Netter, MD, and his successor, Carlos Machado, MD, a cardiologist who has created clear, full-color illustrations in the Netter tradition. New features and all-new chapters keep you up to date with the latest information in the field"--Publisher's description.

    Contents:
    Section I: Introduction. Basic anatomy and embryology of the heart
    The history and physical examination
    Genetics in cardiovascular disease
    Effects of exercise on cardiovascular health
    Cardiovascular epidemiology and risk prediction models
    Stem cell therapies for cardiovascular disease
    Section II: Diagnostic testing. Electrocardiography
    Chest radiography
    Echocardiography
    Stress testing and nuclear imaging
    Cardiac computed tomography and magnetic resonance imaging
    Diagnostic coronary angiography
    Left and right heart catheterization
    Section III: Vascular biology and risk factors for coronary artery disease. Atherosclerosis and angiogenesis
    Hypertension
    Lipid abnormalities
    Diabetes and cardiovascular events
    Cardiovascular effects of air pollutants
    Section IV: Coronary heart disease. Stable coronary artery disease
    Non-ST-elevation myocardial infarction
    ST-elevation myocardial infarction
    Percutaneous coronary intervention
    Coronary artery bypass surgery
    Cardiogenic shock after myocardial infarction and percutaneous support devices
    Congenital coronary anomalies
    Coronary hemodynamics and FFR
    Section V: Myocardial diseases and cardiomyopathy. epidemiology of congestive heart failure- HFpEF and HFrEF. Management of acute heart failure
    Management of chronic heart failure
    Hypertrophic cardiomyopathy
    Restrictive cardiomyopathy
    Hereditary cardiomyopathies
    Myocarditis
    Cardiac transplantation and mechanical circulatory support devices
    Stress-induced cardiomyopathy
    Section VI: Cardiac rhythm abnormalities. Bradyarrhythmias
    Supraventricular tachycardia
    Atrial fibrillation- rate vs. Rhythm
    Atrial fibrillation- stroke prevention
    Atrial fibrillation- ablation techniques
    Ventricular tachycardia
    Sudden cardiac death
    Syncope
    Cardiac pacemakers and defibrillators
    Section VII: Valvular heart disease. Aortic valve disease
    Mitral valve disease
    Cardiovascular manifestations of rheumatic fever
    Tricuspid and pulmonic valve disease
    Infective endocarditis
    Surgical treatment of valvular heart disease
    Section VIII: Structural heart disease. Clinical presentation of adults with congenital heart disease
    Catheter-based therapies for adult congenital heart disease
    Surgical interventions for congenital heart disease
    Transcatheter aortic valve replacement
    Transcatheter mitral valve repair
    Section IX: Pericardial diseases. Pericardial disease: clinical features and treatment
    Pericardial disease: diagnosis and hemodynamics
    Section X: Peripheral vascular disease. Renovascular hypertension and renal denervation
    Interventional approaches for peripheral arterial disease
    Surgery for peripheral vascular diseases
    Carotid artery revascularization
    Diseases of the aorta
    Deep vein thrombosis and pulmonary embolism
    Section XI: Cardiac considerations in specific populations and systemic diseases. Cardiovascular disease in pregnancy
    Neuromuscular diseases and the heart
    Cardiovascular manifestations of endocrine diseases
    Connective tissue diseases and the heart
    Cardiac tumors and cardio-oncology
    Pulmonary hypertension
    HIV and the heart
    Sleep disorders and the cardiovascular system
    Cardiovascular disease in women
    Cardiovascular disease in the elderly.
    Digital Access ClinicalKey 2019
  • Digital
    [edited by] John T. Hansen ; illustrations by Frank H. Netter ; contributing illustrators, Carlos A.G. Machado, John A. Craig, James A. Perkins, Kristen Wienandt Marzejon, Tiffany S. DaVanzo.
    Digital Access ClinicalKey 2022
  • Digital
    Edward C. Weber, Joel A. Vilensky, Stephen W. Carmichael, Kenneth S. Lee ; illustrations by Frank H. Netter ; contributing illustrator, Carlos A.G. Machado.
    Summary: "Designed to make learning more interesting and clinically meaningful, Netter's Concise Radiologic Anatomy matches radiologic images--from MR and ultrasound to CT and advanced imaging reconstructions--to the exquisite artwork of master medical illustrator Frank H. Netter, MD. As a companion to the bestselling Netter's Atlas of Human Anatomy, this updated medical textbook begins with the anatomy and matches radiologic images to the anatomic images; the result is a concise, visual guide that shows how advanced diagnostic imaging is an amazing "dissection tool" for viewing human anatomy in the living patient"--Publisher's description.

    Contents:
    Head and neck
    Back and spinal cord
    Thorax
    Abdomen
    Pelvis and perineum
    Upper limb
    Lower limb.
    Digital Access ClinicalKey 2019
  • Digital
    volume editors, Thomas C. Lee, Srinivasan Mukundan, Jr. ; illustrations by Frank H. Netter, contributing illustrators, Tiffany Slaybaugh DaVanzo, Carlos Machado.
    Contents:
    Overview of brain
    Brain
    Thalamus and basal ganglia
    Limbic system
    Brainstem and cranial nerves
    Ventricles and cerebrospinal fluid cisterns
    Sella turcica
    Overview of head and neck
    Paranasal sinuses
    Orbits
    Mandible, muscles of mastication
    Temporal bone (middle ear, cochlea, vestibular system)
    Oral cavity, pharynx, and suprahyoid neck
    Hypopharynx, larynx, and infrahyoid neck
    Overview of spine
    Spine.
    Digital Access ClinicalKey 2015
  • Digital
    William K. Ovalle and Patrick C. Nahirney ; illustrations by Frank H. Netter, contributing illustrators, Joe Chovan [and three others].
    Contents:
    The cell
    Epithelium and exocrine glands
    Connective tissue
    Muscle tissue
    Nervous tissue
    Cartilage and bone
    Blood and bone marrow
    Cardiovascular system
    Lymphoid system
    Endocrine system
    Integumentary system
    Upper digestive system
    Lower digestive system
    Liver, gallbladder, and exocrine pancreas
    Respiratory system
    Urinary system
    Male reproductive system
    Female reproductive system
    Eye and adnexa
    Special senses.
    Digital Access ClinicalKey 2021
  • Digital
    Susan E. Mulroney and Adam K. Myers ; illustrations by Frank H. Netter; contributing illustrators, Carlos A. G. Machado, John A. Craig, James A. Perkins.
    Digital Access ClinicalKey 2015
  • Digital
    [edited by] Martin H. Floch, C. S. Pitchumoni, Neil R. Floch, James S. Scolapio, Joseph K. Lim ; illustrations by Frank H. Netter ; contributing illustrators, Carlos A.G. Machado [and six others].
    Contents:
    Section I: Esophagus
    GERD
    Section II: Stomach and duodenum
    Section III: Abdominal wall
    Section IV: Small intestine
    Section V: Colon, rectum, and anus
    Section VI: Infectious and parasitic diseases of the alimentary tract
    Section VII: Pancreas
    Section VIII: Gallbladder and bile ducts
    Section IX: Liver
    Section X: Nutrition and gastrointestinal disease.
    Digital Access ClinicalKey 2020
  • Digital
    Neil S. Norton ; Illustrations by Frank H. Netter ; contributing illustrators, Carlos A.G. Machado, MD [and six others].
    Contents:
    Development of the head and neck
    Osteology
    Basic neuroanatomy and cranial nerves
    The neck
    Scalp and muscles of facial expression
    Parotid bed and gland
    Temporal and infratemporal fossae
    Muscles of mastication
    Temporomandibular joint
    Pterygopalatine fossa
    Nose and nasal cavity
    Paranasal sinuses
    Oral cavity
    Tongue
    Pharynx
    Larynx
    Cervical fascia
    Ear
    Eye and orbit
    Autonomics of the head and neck
    Intraoral injections
    Introduction to the upper limb, back, thorax, and abdomen.
    Digital Access ClinicalKey 2017
  • Digital
    [edited by] Elaine C. Jong, Dennis L. Stevens; illustrations by Frank H. Netter; contributing illustrators, Carlos A.G. Machado [and five others].
    Digital Access ClinicalKey 2022
  • Digital/Print
    editors, Jayashri Srinivasan, Claudia J. Chaves, Brian J. Scott, Juan E. Small ; illustrations by Frank H. Netter ; contributing illustrators, Carlos A.G. Machado, John A. Craig, Tiffany Slaybaugh Davanzo, James A. Perkins, Anita Impagliazzo.
    Digital Access ClinicalKey 2020
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Books: General Collection (Downstairs)
    RC358.8 .N477 2020
    1
  • Digital
    Roger P. Smith ; illustrations by Frank H. Netter ; contributing illustrators, Carlos A.G. Machado, John A. Craig, Kristen Wienandt Marzejon, Joe Chovan, James A. Perkins, Tiffany S. DaVanzo.
    Digital Access ClinicalKey 2017
  • Digital
    Joshua A. Cleland, PT, DPT, PhD, Shane Koppenhaver, PT.PhD, Jonathan Su, PT, DPT, LMT ; illustrations by Frank H. Netter ; contributing illustrators, Carlos A.G. Machado, MD, John A. Craig, MD.
    Digital Access ClinicalKey 2021
  • Digital
    editors, Christopher C. Madden, Margot Putukian, Eric C. McCarty, Craig Young ; illustrations by Frank H. Netter ; contributing illustrators, Carlos A. G. Machado, John A. Craig, Kristen Wienandt Marzejon, Tiffany S. DaVanzo, James A. Perkins.
    Contents:
    The team physician
    The certified athletic trainer and the athletic training room
    The preparticipation physical evaluation
    Sideline preparedness and emergencies
    Sports nutrition
    Sports supplements
    Sports pharmacology of pain and inflammation control in athletes
    Sports pharmacology of chronic disease
    Sports pharmacology of psychiatry and behavioral medicine
    The pediatric athlete
    The high school athlete : setting up a high school sports medicine program
    The female athlete
    The senior athlete
    The athlete with physical disability
    Care of athletes at different levels : from pee-wee to professional
    The wilderness athlete and adventurer
    Exercise prescription and physiology
    Aerobic training
    Resistance training
    Flexibility
    Exercise in the heat and heat illness
    Exercise in the cold and cold injuries
    Altitude training and competition
    Travel considerations for the athlete and sports medical team
    The role of sport psychology and sports psychiatry
    Drugs and doping in athletes
    Eating disorders in athletes
    Overtraining
    Infections in athletes
    Gastrointestinal problems
    Hematologic problems in the athlete
    Renal and genitourinary problems
    The athlete with diabetes
    ECG interpretation in athletes
    Cardiac disease in athletes
    The hypertensive athlete
    Exercise-induced bronchoconstriction, urticaria, and anaphylaxis
    Neurologic problems in the athlete
    Headache in the athlete
    Skin problems in the athlete
    Connective tissue diseases and rheumatologic problems in athletes
    Musculoskeletal injuries in sports
    Comprehensive rehabilitation of the athlete
    Physical modalities in sports medicine
    Head injuries
    Neck injuries
    Eye injuries
    Maxillofacial injuries
    Shoulder injuries
    Elbow injuries
    Hand and wrist injuries
    Thorax and abdominal injuries
    Thoracic and lumbosacral spine injuries
    Pelvis, hip, and thigh injuries
    Knee injuries
    Ankle and leg injuries
    Cartilage problems in sports
    Acute fractures and dislocations in athletes
    Stress fractures
    Foot problems
    Taping and bracing
    Injections in the athlete
    Diagnostic imaging in sports medicine
    Sports ultrasound
    Injury prevention protocols
    Football
    Soccer
    Rugby
    Lacrosse
    Field hockey
    Ultimate frisbee
    Basketball
    Volleyball
    Baseball
    Softball
    Tennis
    Alpine skiing
    Cross-country skiing
    Snowboarding
    Ice hockey
    Ice skating (figure skating and speed skating)
    Swimming and diving
    Scuba diving
    Sailing
    Rowing
    Martial arts
    Boxing
    Wrestling
    Mixed martial arts
    Gymnastics
    Cheerleading
    Dance
    Track and field
    Road biking
    Mountain biking
    Inline skating, skateboarding, and bicycle motocross
    Mass participation endurance events
    Ultraendurance and adventure racing and events
    Rock climbing
    Rodeo and equestrian sports
    The extreme athlete
    Esports.
    Digital Access ClinicalKey 2023
  • Digital
    [edited by] Conor P Delaney ; illustrations by Frank H. Netter ; contributing illustrators, Carlos A.G. Machado, Kristen Wienandt Marzejon, James A. Perkins, John A. Craig, Paul Kim, Sara M. Jarret.
    Summary: "Netter's Surgical Anatomy and Approaches, 2nd Edition, provides a clear overview of the exposures, incision sites, surgically relevant landmarks, structures, fascial planes, and common anatomical variants relevant to general surgical operative procedures. Whether used in class, in the lab while learning anatomy, or in the operating room as a trusted reference, this highly visual resource presents unmatched surgical anatomy illustrations by world-renowned surgeon-artist, Frank H. Netter, MD, and new illustrations created in the Netter tradition, as well as surgical exposures, intraoperative photographs, and radiologic imaging"--Publisher's description.

    Contents:
    Selective (supraomohyoid) neck dissection, levels I-III
    Tracheostomy
    Thyroidectomy and parathyroidectomy
    Laparoscopic adrenalectomy
    Esophagectomy
    Minimally invasive antireflux surgery
    Truncal and selective vagotomy
    Gastrectomy
    Gastric emptying procedures
    Roux-en-y gastric bypass and sleeve gastrectomy
    Surgical management of achalasia
    Cholecystectomy
    Common bile duct surgery and choledochoduodenostomy
    Hepatectomy
    Distal pancreatectomy
    Pancreatoduodenectomy
    Splenectomy
    Liver transplantation
    Living donor liver transplantation
    Intestinal and multivisceral transplantation
    Kidney transplantation
    Pancreas and kidney transplantation
    Laparoscopic donor nephrectomy
    Deceased donor organ recovery
    Appendectomy
    Abdominal wall marking and stoma site selection
    Right colectomy
    Left and sigmoid colectomy
    Transverse colectomy
    Low anterior resection with total mesorectal excision and anastomosis
    Abdominoperineal resection
    Hemorrhoids and hemorrhoidectomy
    Perianal abscess and fistula in ano
    Suture rectopexy and ventral mesh rectopexy
    Ileal pouch anal anastomosis
    Sphincter repair and sacral neuromodulation
    Laparoscopic inguinal hernia repair
    Surgical approach to chronic groin pain following inguinal hernia repairs
    Open flank and lumbar hernia repair
    Open retromuscular hernia repair
    Carotid endarterectomy
    Carotid subclavian bypass/transposition and vertebral transposition
    Aortic aneurysm repair and thoracoabdominal aneurysm repair
    Visceral bypass
    Radiocephalic, brachiocephalic, and brachiobasilic fistula
    Femoral endarterectomy and femoral popliteal bypass
    Femoral tibial bypass
    Above-knee and below-knee amputation
    Tracheal intubation and endoscopic anatomy
    Chest tube placement
    Emergency thoracotomy for trauma
    Central line anatomy
    Arterial line anatomy
    Upper and lower extremity fasciotomy
    Mastectomy : partial and total
    Breast reconstruction
    Central duct excision and nipple discharge
    Sentinel lymph node biopsy
    Axillary lymphadenectomy and lymphaticovenous bypass
    Inguinal and pelvic lymphadenectomy
    Retroperitoneal sarcoma
    Hysterectomy for benign and malignant conditions
    Oophorectomy for benign and malignant conditions
    Reconstructive surgery for pelvic floor disorders
    Laparoscopic transperitoneal radical nephrectomy
    Radical prostatectomy
    Radical cystectomy
    Retroperitoneal lymph node dissection.
    Digital Access ClinicalKey 2021
  • Digital
    edited by Jian Jing.
    Summary: Network Functions and Plasticity: Perspectives from Studying Neuronal Electrical Coupling in Microcircuits focuses on the specific roles of electrical coupling in tractable, well-defined circuits, highlighting current research that offers novel insights for electrical coupling's roles in sensory and motor functions, neural computations, decision-making, regulation of network activity, circuit development, and learning and memory. Bringing together a diverse group of international experts and their contributions using a variety of approaches to study different invertebrate and vertebrate model systems with a focus on the role of electrical coupling/gap junctions in microcircuits, this book presents a timely contribution for students and researchers alike.

    Contents:
    Electrical coupling in Caenorhabditis elegans mechanosensory circuits / I. Rabinowitch, W.R. Schafer
    Neural circuits underlying escape behavior in Drosophila : focus on electrical signaling / P. Phelan, J.P. Bacon, J.M. Blagburn
    Gap junctions underlying labile memory / M.-F.M. Shih, C.-L. Wu
    The role of electrical coupling in rhythm generation in small networks / F. Nadim, X. Li, M. Gray, J. Golowasch
    Network functions of electrical coupling present in multiple and specific sites in behavior-generating circuits / J. Jing, E.C. Cropper, K.R. Weiss
    Electrical synapses and learning : induced plasticity in motor rhythmogenesis / R. Nargeot, A. Bédécarrats
    Electrical synapses and neuroendocrine cell function / N.S. Magoski
    Electrical synapses in fishes : their relevance to synaptic transmission / A.E. Pereda, M.V.L. Bennett
    Dynamic properties of electrically coupled retinal networks / S. Trenholm, G.B. Awatramani
    Circadian and light-adaptive control of electrical synaptic plasticity in the vertebrate retina / C.P. Ribelayga, J. O'Brien
    Electrical coupling in the generation of vertebrate motor rhythms / W.-C. Li, J.C. Rekling
    Implications of electrical synapse plasticity in the inferior olive / J.P. Welsh, J. Turecek
    Gap junctions between pyramidal cells account for a variety of very fast network oscillations (>80 Hz) in cortical structures / R.D. Traub, M.A. Whittington, A. Draguhn
    Lineage-dependent electrical synapse formation in the mammalian neocortex / S. He, S.-H. Shi.
    Digital Access ScienceDirect 2017
  • Digital
    by Sofia Dias, A.E. Ades, Nicky J. Welton, Jeroen P. Jansen, Alexander J. Sutton.
    Contents:
    1. Introduction to evidence synthesis
    2. The core model
    3. Model fit, model comparison and outlier detection
    4. Generalised linear models
    5. Network meta-analysis within cost-effectiveness analysis
    6. Adverse events and other sparse outcome data
    7. Checking for inconsistency
    8. Meta-regression for relative treatment effects
    9. Bias adjustment methods
    10. Network meta-analysis of survival outcomes
    11. Multiple outcomes
    12. Validity of network meta-analysis
    Solutions to exercises
    Appendices
    References
    Index.
    Digital Access Wiley 2018
  • Digital
    edited by Narsis A. Kiani, David Gomez-Cabrero, Ginestra Bianconi.
    Summary: Biological systems are extremely complex and have emergent properties that cannot be explained or even predicted by studying their individual parts in isolation. The reductionist approach, although successful in the early days of molecular biology, underestimates this complexity. As the amount of available data grows, so it will become increasingly important to be able to analyse and integrate these large data sets. This book introduces novel approaches and solutions to the Big Data problem in biomedicine, and presents new techniques in the field of graph theory for handling and processing multi-type large data sets. By discussing cutting-edge problems and techniques, researchers from a wide range of fields will be able to gain insights for exploiting big heterogonous data in the life sciences through the concept of 'network of networks'.
    Digital Access Cambridge 2021
  • Digital
    Hao Wang, editor.
    Summary: This book summarizes the latest research findings in the neurocircuitry of innate behaviors, covering major topics such as innate fear, aggression, feeding, reward, social interaction, parental care, spatial navigation, and sleep-wake regulation. For decades, humans have been fascinated by wild animals instincts, like the annual two-thousand-mile migration of the monarch butterfly in North American, and the "imprint" behavior of newborn birds. Since these instincts are always displayed in stereotypical patterns in most individuals of a given species, the neural circuits processing such behaviors must be genetically hard-wired in the brain. Recently, with the development of modern techniques, including optogenetics, retrograde and anterograde virus tracing, and in vivo calcium imaging, researchers have been able to determine and dissect the specific neural circuits for many innate behaviors by selectively manipulating well-defined cell types in the brain. This book discusses recent advances in the investigation of the neural-circuit mechanisms underlying innate behaviors.

    Contents:
    Intro
    Contents
    Contributors
    Chapter 1: Neural Circuits Underlying Innate Fear
    1.1 Introduction
    1.2 Animal Studies
    1.2.1 Retinal Ganglion Cells That Detect Looming Signals
    1.2.2 Brain Circuits That Mediate Looming-Evoked Fear Responses in Mice
    1.3 Human Studies
    References
    Chapter 2: Neurobiology and Neural Circuits of Aggression
    2.1 Introduction
    2.2 Experimental Paradigms to Explore Aggression in Rodents
    2.3 Neuroendocrinology of Aggression
    2.4 Neurotransmitter Systems in Aggression
    2.5 Neurocircuitry of Aggressive Behavior
    2.5.1 Amygdala 2.5.2 Hypothalamus
    2.5.3 Prefrontal Cortex
    2.5.4 Lateral Septum
    2.5.5 Other Brain Areas
    2.5.6 Synthesis
    2.6 Translational Implications
    References
    Chapter 3: Neural Regulation of Feeding Behavior
    3.1 Introduction
    3.2 Homeostatic Feeding
    3.2.1 Sensing Metabolic State
    3.2.2 Foraging and Hunting for Food
    3.2.3 Consuming Food
    3.2.4 Termination of Feeding
    3.3 Hedonic Feeding
    3.4 Conclusion
    References
    4: Neural Circuits for Reward
    4.1 Introduction
    4.2 Dopamine and Innate Behavior
    4.3 Medium Spiny Neurons in Striatum and Innate Behavior 4.4 Ventral Tegmental Area (VTA) Neurons and Innate Behavior
    4.5 Prefrontal Cortex and Innate Behavior
    4.6 Conclusion
    References
    Chapter 5: Neuronal Response and Behavioral Modulation in Social Interactions
    5.1 Neuronal Response in Social Behavior
    5.1.1 Neuronal Response in Social Interaction
    5.1.1.1 Medial Prefrontal Cortex
    5.1.1.2 Amygdala
    5.1.1.3 Ventral Tegmental Area
    5.1.2 Neuronal Response in Aggression
    5.1.2.1 Hypothalamus
    5.1.3 Neuronal Response in Dominance
    5.1.3.1 mPFC
    5.1.4 Neuronal Response in Social Defeat 5.1.5 Neuronal Response in Social Memory
    5.1.5.1 Hippocampus
    5.2 Neural Circuit Manipulation and Social Behavior
    5.2.1 Social Interaction
    5.2.1.1 mPFC
    5.2.1.2 VTA
    5.2.1.3 Amygdala
    5.2.2 Social Memory
    5.2.2.1 Hippocampus
    5.2.3 Dominance Behavior
    5.2.3.1 mPFC
    5.2.4 Aggression
    5.2.4.1 Hypothalamus
    References
    Chapter 6: Neural Circuit Mechanisms That Underlie Parental Care
    6.1 Introduction
    6.2 Factors That Influence the Display of Parental Behaviors
    6.2.1 Olfactory and Auditory Cues Emitted by Pups
    6.2.2 Environmental Stressors 6.2.3 Reproductive Status
    6.3 Brain Areas Involved in Parental Care
    6.3.1 Main Olfactory Epithelium and Vomeronasal Organ (MOE and VNO)
    6.3.2 Auditory Cortex
    6.3.3 Medial Amygdala (MeA)
    6.3.4 Medial Preoptic Area (mPOA)
    6.3.4.1 mPOA Galanin+ Neurons
    6.3.4.2 mPOA Esr1+ Neurons
    6.3.4.3 mPOA Vgat+ Neurons
    6.3.5 Ventral Tegmental Area (VTA)
    6.3.6 Periaqueductal Gray (PAG)
    6.3.7 Paraventricular Nucleus of the Hypothalamus (PVN)
    6.3.8 Medial Prefrontal Cortex (mPFC)
    6.3.9 Ventrolateral Division of the Ventromedial Hypothalamus (VMHvl)
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    edited by Paul A. Trainor.
    Summary: This book summarizes discoveries of historical significance and provides in-depth, current analyses of the evolution of neural crest cells, their contribution to embryo development, and their roles in disease. In addition, prospects for tissue engineering, repair and regeneration are covered, offering a timely synthesis of the current knowledge in neural crest cell research.

    Contents:
    I. Neural crest cell evolution and development
    II. Neural crest cell differentiation and disease
    III. Tissue engineering and repair.
    Digital Access ScienceDirect 2014
  • Digital
    Erik Lee Nylen, Parsec Media, New York, NY, United States, Pascal Wallisch, New York University, New York, NY United States.
    Summary: A Primer with MATLAB® and Python"!present important information on the emergence of the use of Python, a more general purpose option to MATLAB, the preferred computation language for scientific computing and analysis in neuroscience. This book addresses the snake in the room by providing a beginner's introduction to the principles of computation and data analysis in neuroscience, using both Python and MATLAB, giving readers the ability to transcend platform tribalism and enable coding versatility. Includes discussions of both MATLAB and Python in parallelIntroduces the canonical data analysis cascade, standardizing the data analysis flowPresents tactics that strategically, tactically, and algorithmically help improve the organization of code.

    Contents:
    Chapter 1. Philosophy
    Chapter 2. From 0 to 0.01
    Chapter 3. Wrangling spike trains
    Chapter 4. Correlating spike trains
    Chapter 5. Analog signals
    Chapter 6. Biophysical modeling
    Chapter 7. Regression
    Chapter 8. Dimensionality reduction
    Chapter 9. Classification and clustering
    Chapter 10. Web scraping
    Appendix A. MATLAB to Python (table of equivalences)
    Appendix B. Frequently made mistakes
    Appendix C. Practical considerations, technical issues, tips and tricks
    Glossary (including additional Python and MATLAB packages and examples).
    Digital Access ScienceDirect 2017
  • Digital
    Christopher A. Shaw.
    Contents:
    The dynamics of neurological disease : current views and key issues
    Clinical and economic features of age-related neurological diseases
    Spectrum of neurological disease, clusters, and ubiquity
    Complexity, cascading failures, and neurological diseases
    Genetic determinants of neurological disease
    Environmental determinants of neurological disease and gene-toxin interactions
    The mystery and lessons of ALS-PDC
    Neurological disease models and their discontents : validity, replicability, and the decline effect
    The progression and the time line of neurological disease
    Development, aging, and neurological disease
    CNS-immune system interactions and autoimmunity
    The impact of synergy of factors in neurological disease
    The current status of neurological disease treatments
    The future of translational research in neurological disease
    Defining the limits for neurological disease treatments
    The politics and economics of neurological disease.
    Digital Access Wiley 2017
  • Digital
    Xiaoxiang Zheng, editor.
    Summary: This book focuses on the frontiers of neural interface technology, including hardware, software, neural decoding and encoding, control systems, and system integration. It also discusses applications for neuroprosthetics, neural diseases and neurorobotics, and the toolkits for basic neuroscience. A neural interface establishes a direct communication channel with the central or peripheral nervous system (CNS or PNS), and enables the nervous system to interact directly with the external devices. Recent advances in neuroscience and engineering are speeding up neural interface technology, paving the way for assisting, augmenting, repairing or restoring sensorimotor and other cognitive functions impaired due to neurological disease or trauma, and so improving the quality of life of those affected. Neural interfaces are now being explored in applications as diverse as rehabilitation, accessibility, gaming, education, recreation, robotics and human enhancement. Neural interfaces also represent a powerful tool to address fundamental questions in neuroscience. Recent decades have witnessed tremendous advances in the field, with a huge impact not only in the development of neuroprosthetics, but also in our basic understanding of brain function. Neural interface technology can be seen as a bridge across the traditional engineering and basic neuroscience. This book provides researchers, graduate and upper undergraduate students from a wide range of disciplines with a cutting-edge and comprehensive summary of neural interface engineering research.

    Contents:
    Advances in Penetrating Multichannel Microelectrodes Based on the Utah Array Platform
    EEG-based Brain Computer Interface
    Invasive Brain Machine Interface System
    Peripheral Neural Interface
    Brain-Machine Interface Based Rat-robot Behavior Control
    EMG-based Prosthetic Control
    Cochlear Implants
    Neuromodulation for Pain Management
    Future of Neural Interfaces.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    Bernd J. Kröger, Trevor Bekolay.
    Summary: This book explores the processes of spoken language production and perception from a neurobiological perspective. After presenting the basics of speech processing and speech acquisition, a neurobiologically-inspired and computer-implemented neural model is described, which simulates the neural processes of speech processing and speech acquisition. This book is an introduction to the field and aimed at students and scientists in neuroscience, computer science, medicine, psychology and linguistics.

    Contents:
    Basics of linguistics and phonetics: Speech Production
    Speech Perception
    Speech Acquisition
    Stages of Speech Acquisition
    Basics of neurobiology and its computer simulation: Anatomical and Functional Structure of the Nervous System
    Neural Modeling: The STAA-approach
    Neural Modeling: the NEF-approach
    Models of speech processing and speech acquisition: A Selection of Models
    The LS-Model (Lexicon-Syllabary-Model).
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    Qi Wu, Ruimao Zheng, editors.
    Summary: "This book systemically describes the mechanisms underlying the neural regulation of metabolism. Metabolic diseases, including obesity and its associated conditions, currently affect more than 500 million people worldwide. Recent research has shown that the neural regulation of metabolism is a central mechanism that controls metabolic status physiologically and pathophysiologically. The book first introduces the latest studies on the neural and cellular mechanisms of hypothalamic neurons, hypothalamic glial cells, neural circuitries, cellular signaling pathways, and synaptic plasticity in the control of appetite, body weight, feeding-related behaviors and metabolic disorders. It then summarizes the humoral mechanisms by which critical adipocyte-derived hormones and lipoprotein lipase regulate lipid and glucose metabolism, and examines the role of the hypothalamus-sympathetic nerve, a critical nerve pathway from CNS to peripheral nervous system (PNS), in the regulation of metabolism in multiple tissues/organs. Furthermore, the book discusses the functions of adipose tissue in energy metabolism. Lastly, it explores dietary interventions to treat neural diseases and some of the emerging technologies used to study the neural regulation of metabolism. Presenting cutting-edge developments in the neural regulation of metabolism, the book is a valuable reference resource for graduate students and researchers in the field of neuroscience and metabolism"--Publisher's description.

    Contents:
    Functional interrogation of the AgRP neural circuits in control of appetite, body weight, and behaviors / Yong Han, Guobin Xia, Qi Wu
    POMC Neurons: Feeding, Energy Metabolism, and Beyond / Cheng Zhan
    Neuronal cAMP/PKA signaling and energy homeostasis / Linghai Yang
    Synaptic regulation of metabolism / Jie Xu, Christopher L. Bartolome, Dong Kong
    Central circadian clock regulates energy metabolism / Guolian Ding, Yingyun Gong, Kristin L. Eckel-Mahan, Zheng Sun
    Glial regulation of energy metabolism / Yu-Dong Zhou
    The leptin signaling / Jiarui Liu, Xiaoning Yang, Siwang Yu, Ruimao Zheng
    The leptin resistance / Jiarui Liu, Xiaoning Yang, Siwang Yu, Ruimao Zheng
    Ghrelin signaling in immunometabolism and inflamm-aging / Chuo Fang, Hang Xu, Shaodong Guo, Susanne U. Mertens-Talcott, Yuxiang Sun
    Electrophysiological mechanism of peripheral hormones and nutrients regulating energy homeostasis / Zhuo Huang, Kuo Xiao
    Regulation of lipolysis in adipose tissue and clinical significance / Xin Li, Kai Sun
    Current genetic techniques in neural circuit control of feeding and energy metabolism / Qi Wu, Yong Han, Qingchun Tong.
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Digital
    Erdem Tüzün, Murat Kürtüncü, editors.
    Summary: This contributed volume provides a complete overview of Neuro-Behcets disease (NBD), one of the most serious manifestations of Behcets disease. It serves as a comprehensive and critical review of the current scientific literature regarding NBD, covering the epidemiology, pathology, prognosis, and treatment of the disease. This book is an essential resource for both researchers and physicians working on neurology, rheumatology, and internal medicine fields.

    Contents:
    Intro
    Preface
    Contents
    Neuro-Behçet's Disease: Epidemiology and Genetics
    Introduction
    Epidemiology
    Prevalence of Neuro-Behçet's Disease
    Age
    Gender
    Genetic Factors
    Familial Aggregation
    HLA-B51
    Other MHC Class I Genes
    Non-MHC Complex Genes
    Genome-Wide Association Studies
    Il-10
    IL23R-IL12RB2
    IL12A
    ERAP1
    STAT4
    TNFAIP3
    CCR1-CCR3
    KLR
    GIMAP
    FUT2
    CPLX-1
    Other Polymorphism Studies
    Rare Non-synonymous Variants
    Epigenetic Studies
    Conclusion
    References
    Immunology of Neuro-Behcet's Disease (NBD) Cerebral Venous Sinus Thrombosis (CVST)
    Arterial Occlusion and Aneurysm Formation
    Primary Neurological Conditions Other than p-NBS and Neurovascular Involvement
    Regarding Clinical Features, When Should We Suspect NBS?
    References
    The Cerebrospinal Fluid Presentations of Neuro-Behçet Disease
    CSF Cells
    CSF Protein
    CSF Glucose
    Oligoclonal Bands
    Interleukin-6
    Other CSF Studies
    References
    Imaging of Neuro-Behçet's Disease
    Introduction
    Neuroimaging Tools in NBD Immune Response in the CSF
    Cellularity of CSF
    Immune Mediators as Indications of Activity in CSF
    Oligoclonal Bands (OCB)
    Other Markers in the CSF
    Cytokines
    Candidate Antigens of Possible Autoimmune Response in NBD
    Heat Shock Protein (HSP) and Related Responses
    Neuronal and Other Proteins
    Cellular Immune Response in NBD
    Other Mechanisms in BD
    Inflammation, Coagulation, and Fibrinolytic Pathway Abnormalities
    Severity and Gender
    Conclusions
    References
    Autoantibodies in Neuro-Behçet Disease
    References
    Animal Models of Behçet's Disease
    Introduction Infection-Induced Models
    Herpes Simplex Virus-Induced Model
    Streptococcal Infection Model
    Genetic Models
    Immunological Models
    Heat Shock Protein Model
    Anti-neuronal Antibody Model
    Tropomyosin Model
    Retinal S-Antigen Model
    Environmental Models
    Therapeutic Studies of BD Animal Models
    Conclusion
    References
    Pathology
    Parenchymal NBD
    Histological Findings
    Non-parenchymal NBD
    Peripheral Nervous System Involvement
    References
    Behçet's Disease: Clinical Features
    Introduction
    Clinical Features
    Mucocutaneous Involvement Recurrent Aphthous Ulcers
    Genital Ulcers
    Cutaneous Lesions
    Pathergy Reaction
    Eye Involvement
    Musculoskeletal Disease
    Vascular Involvement
    Gastrointestinal Involvement
    Other Clinical Findings
    References
    Neuro-Behçet Syndrome: Differential Diagnosis
    Differentiation of p-NBS from Other Mimickers by MRI Patterns
    Differentiation of p-NBS from Other Mimickers by Laboratory Findings
    Differentiation of p-NBS from Other Mimickers by Pathological Findings
    References
    Neuro-Behçet Syndrome: Clinical Features
    Parenchymal NBS
    Neurovascular Involvement
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    Babak Tousi, Jeffrey Cummings, editors.
    Digital Access Springer 2017
  • Digital
    Jack I. Jallo, David F. Slottje.
    Summary: Atlas provides insightful guidance on how to perform core procedures in the neuro ICU Neuro ICU Procedure Atlasby distinguished neurosurgeons Jack I. Jallo and David F. Slottje is a visually rich, step-by-step atlas describing technical aspects of common bedside procedures performed in patients with grave neurological conditions. With contributions from an impressive group of contributors, the book features 13 chapters encompassing fundamental techniques, such as shunt externalization/shunt tap, lumbar puncture, lumbar drain, ICP monitor, PbtO2and JvO2 monitors, central and arterial line, cerv
    Digital Access
    Provider
    Version
    Thieme MedOne Neurosurgery
    Thieme-Connect
  • Digital
    Cris Constantinescu, Razvan Arsenescu, Violeta Arsenescu, editors.
    Contents:
    The immunology of the gastrointestinal system
    The enteric nervous system
    Microbial regulation of gastrointestinal immunity in health and disease
    Roles of substance P in gastrointestinal functions and neuroimmune interactions
    Immunomodulation by vasoactive intestinal polypeptide (VIP)
    Helicobacter pylori, experimental autoimmune encephalomyelitis, and multiple sclerosis
    Stress and the gastrointestinal system
    Nutrition, macrobiotics and the brain neuroinflammatory response
    Guillain-Barré syndrome and Campylobacter jejuni enteritis
    Gut microbiota: a possible role in the pathogenesis of multiple sclerosis
    Intestinal parasites and immunomodulation in neuroinflammatory disease
    Neurological complications of anti-TNF treatments and other neurological aspects of inflammatory bowel disease
    Intestinal bacterial antigens, toxin-induced pathogenesis and immune cross-reactivity in neuromyelitis optica and multiple sclerosis
    Targeting immunomodulatory agents to the gut-associated lymphoid tissue
    The neuroimmunology of gluten intolerance
    The neurology of autoimmune pernicious anaemia (subacute combined degeneration)
    The impact of multiple sclerosis on gastrointestinal system function
    The neurology of Whipple's disease.
    Digital Access Springer 2016
  • Digital
    [edited by] Roy E. Strowd
    Summary: "In the growing field of neuro-oncology, the past few years have witnessed rapid advances in tumor classification, treatment modalities, and the role of neurologists and neuro-oncologists. Neuro-Oncology for the Clinical Neurologist is a first-of-its-kind resource that focuses on patient-clinical scenarios relevant to the practicing neurologist--bringing you up to date with everything from basic principles and neuro-oncology imaging consults to neurologic complications of radiation, systemic, and immune-based therapies, and much more"--Publisher's description.

    Contents:
    Fundamentals of neuropathology : Introduction to neuropathology and molecular diagnostics
    Surgical considerations for brain and spine tumors
    Introduction to radiation therapy
    Evidence-based approaches to chemotherapy for gliomas
    Evaluation of a dural-based lesion
    Evaluation of a supratentorial parenchymal lesion
    Evaluation of an infratentorial lesion
    Imaging of spinal lesions
    Evaluation of peripheral nerve lesions
    Approach to the meningioma patient
    Approach to the low-grade glioma patient
    Approach to the high-grade glioma patient
    Approach to the patient with CNS lymphoma
    Approach to a patient with brain metastasis
    Approach to the patient with leptomeningeal metastases
    Approach to patients with the neoplasms associated with neurofibromatosis type 1, neurofibromatosis type 2, and schwannomatosis
    Approach to the patient with tuberous sclerosis
    Approach to von Hippel Lindau, Cowden disease, and other inherited conditions
    Neurologic complications of cancer
    Paraneoplastic neurological disorder syndromes
    Perineural spread of cancer
    Cancer-associated plexopathy
    Cancer complications in patients with hematologic malignancies
    Approach to the patient with radiation necrosis
    Neurological complications of radiation
    Uncommon radiation-induced neurological syndromes
    Approach to the patient with a delayed posttreatment CNS neurotoxicity
    Approach to chemotherapy-induced peripheral neuropathy
    Neurologic complications of immune checkpoint inhibitors
    Neurologic complications associated with CAR T-cell therapy
    Summary of clinical pearls
    Reference list of clinical cases covered in this book.
    Digital Access ClinicalKey 2021
  • Digital
    volume editors, Wolfgang Grisold and Riccardo Soffietti.
    Digital Access
    Provider
    Version
    ScienceDirect
    ScienceDirect
  • Digital
    Preeti Patil Chhablani, editor.
    Summary: This book discusses in detail the major advances in the field of neuro-ophthalmology. Based on the latest research from across the globe, it highlights recent developments in all areas of neuro-ophthalmology, including optic neuritis and the associated demyelinating diseases - especially the changing paradigms in the diagnosis and management of multiple sclerosis and neuromyelitis optica. It also covers the various types of hereditary optic neuropathies as well as nystagmus and its management. In order to provide comprehensive information in a single volume, it addresses topics of interest in pediatric neuro-ophthalmology, such as pediatric optic neuritis and cortical visual impairment, innovations in the management of ocular motility disorders and other disorders of the optic nerve and central nervous system, including ischemic neuropathies and idiopathic intracranial hypertension. This book provides a one-stop source of information on all key topics of neuro-ophthalmology, enabling trainee fellows and practitioners to keep abreast of the current thoughts in this field. As part of the series "Current Practices in Ophthalmology" this volume is intended for residents and fellows-in-training, as well as generalist and specialist ophthalmologists alike.

    Contents:
    Chapter 1: Emerging Trends in Optic Neuritis and Associated Demyelinating Diseases.- Chapter 2: Recent Advances in the Management of Idiopathic Intracranial Hypertension (IIH).- Chapter 3: Ischemic Optic Neuropathies
    Update.- Chapter 4: Hereditary Optic Neuropathies.- Chapter 5: Cranial Nerve Palsies
    What's New?.- Chapter 6: Nystagmus.- Chapter 7: Pediatric Neuro-ophthalmology.
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    Judit Somlai, Tibor Kovács, editors.
    Contents:
    Part I. The importance and role of neuro-ophthalmology
    Part II. Objectives and results in the neuro-ophthalmological clinical practice
    Part III. Convenient, novel and complementary examinations in ophthalmology
    Part IV. Diseases of retina and the optic nerve (visual and sensory system)
    Part V. Neuro-ophthalmologic aspects of the ocular motor system
    Part VI. Diseases of the orbit
    Part VII. Neuro-ophthalmological considerations
    Part VIII. The neuro-ophthalmological aspects of headaches
    Part IX. Rehabilitation
    Appendix. Colour scheme of the book content
    Index.
    Digital Access Springer 2016
  • Digital
    editors, Peter J. Savino, Clinical Professor of Ophthalmology, University of California San Diego, Shiley Eye Institute, La Jolla, California, Helen V. Danesh-Meyer, MD, PhD, FRANZCO, Sir William and Lady Stevenson Professor of Ophthalmology, Department of Ophthalmology, University of Auckland, New Zealand.
    Digital Access
    Provider
    Version
    Ovid
    LWW Health Library
  • Digital
    Guohong Tian, Xinghuai Sun, editors.
    Summary: This book provides a practical guide in neuro-ophthalmology. It contains more than 80 carefully selected neuro-ophthalmic cases. It covers visual afferent (Part 1) and efferent disorders (Part 2): the various optic neuropathies, diplopia from ocular and neurologic pathogen, pupil and lid abnormality. Each case presents with neuro-ophthalmology examination format, followed by ancillary test, finial diagnose, treatment and prognosis. A short review or comment highlights the important points of these disorders, up to date progress and literature are addressed in part of them. The novel optical coherence tomography imaging technique is also introduced to interpretation some visual pathway disorders and for follow-up. The massive photographs and neuro-imaging will help the reader for easy following. As a case-based practical manual, this book is a clinical reference for general ophthalmologist, neurologist, senior ophthalmology resident, specialist and fellow, and physician who are interested in neuro-ophthalmology field.

    Contents:
    Intro
    Preface
    Contents
    Part I: Afferent Disorders
    1: Optic Neuritis
    1.1 Case 1: Optic Neuritis with Idiopathic Demyelination
    1.1.1 Case Presentation
    1.1.2 Neuro-Ophthalmologic Examination
    1.1.3 Ancillary Test
    1.1.4 Formulation
    1.1.5 Diagnosis
    1.1.6 Differential Diagnosis
    1.1.7 Management
    1.1.8 Prognosis
    1.1.9 Comments
    1.2 Case 2: Optic Neuritis with Myelin Oligodendrocyte Glycoprotein Antibody Seropositive
    1.2.1 Case Presentation
    1.2.2 Neuro-Ophthalmologic Examination
    1.2.3 Ancillary Test
    1.2.4 Formulation
    1.2.5 Diagnosis
    1.2.6 Differential Diagnosis
    1.2.7 Management
    1.2.8 Prognosis
    1.2.9 Comments
    1.3 Case 3: Optic Neuritis Associated with Multiple Sclerosis
    1.3.1 Case Presentation
    1.3.2 Neuro-Ophthalmologic Examination
    1.3.3 Ancillary Test
    1.3.4 Formulation
    1.3.5 Management
    1.3.6 Prognosis
    1.3.7 Diagnosis
    1.3.8 Differential Diagnosis
    1.3.9 Comments
    1.4 Case 4: Pediatric Optic Neuritis
    1.4.1 Case Presentation
    1.4.2 Neuro-Ophthalmologic Examination
    1.4.3 Ancillary Test
    1.4.4 Formulation
    1.4.5 Diagnosis
    1.4.6 Differential Diagnosis
    1.4.7 Management
    1.4.8 Prognosis
    1.4.9 Comments
    1.5 Case 5: Acute Disseminated Encephalomyelitis
    1.5.1 Case Presentation
    1.5.2 Neuro-Ophthalmologic Examination
    1.5.3 Ancillary Test
    1.5.4 Formulation
    1.5.5 Diagnosis
    1.5.6 Differential Diagnosis
    1.5.7 Management
    1.5.8 Prognosis
    1.5.9 Comments
    References
    Case 1: Optic Neuritis with Idiopathic Demyelination
    Case 2: Optic Neuritis with Myelin Oligodendrocyte Glycoprotein Antibody Seropositive
    Case 3: Optic Neuritis Associated with Multiple Sclerosis
    Case 4: Pediatric Optic Neuritis
    Case 5: Acute Disseminated Encephalomyelitis. 2: Neuromyelitis Optica
    2.1 Case 1: Neuromyelitis Optica
    2.1.1 Case Presentation
    2.1.2 Neuro-Ophthalmologic Examination
    2.1.3 Ancillary Test
    2.1.4 Formulation
    2.1.5 Diagnosis
    2.1.6 Differential Diagnosis
    2.1.7 Management
    2.1.8 Prognosis
    2.1.9 Comments
    2.2 Case 2: Sjögren's Syndrome
    2.2.1 Case Presentation
    2.2.2 Neuro-Ophthalmologic Examination
    2.2.3 Ancillary Test
    2.2.4 Formulation
    2.2.5 Diagnosis
    2.2.6 Differential Diagnosis
    2.2.7 Management
    2.2.8 Prognosis
    2.2.9 Comments
    2.3 Case 3: Behcet's Disease
    2.3.1 Case Presentation
    2.3.2 Neuro-Ophthalmologic Examination
    2.3.3 Ancillary Test
    2.3.4 Formulation
    2.3.5 Diagnosis
    2.3.6 Differential Diagnosis
    2.3.7 Management
    2.3.8 Prognosis
    2.3.9 Comments
    References
    Case 1: Neuromyelitis Optica
    Case 2: Sjögren's Syndrome
    Case 3: Behcet's Disease
    3: Optic Neuropathy of Inflammation and Infiltration
    3.1 Case 1: Granulomatosis Polyangiitis
    3.1.1 Case Presentation
    3.1.2 Neuro-Ophthalmologic Examination
    3.1.3 Ancillary Test
    3.1.4 Formulation
    3.1.5 Diagnosis
    3.1.6 Differential Diagnosis
    3.1.7 Management
    3.1.8 Prognosis
    3.1.9 Comments
    3.2 Case 2: Sarcoidosis
    3.2.1 Case Presentation
    3.2.2 Neuro-Ophthalmologic Examination
    3.2.3 Ancillary Test
    3.2.4 Formulation
    3.2.5 Diagnosis
    3.2.6 Differential Diagnosis
    3.2.7 Management
    3.2.8 Prognosis
    3.2.9 Comments
    3.3 Case 3: Rosai-Dorfman Disease
    3.3.1 Case Presentation
    3.3.2 Neuro-ophthalmologic Examination
    3.3.3 Ancillary Test
    3.3.4 Formulation
    3.3.5 Diagnosis
    3.3.6 Differential Diagnosis
    3.3.7 Management
    3.3.8 Prognosis
    3.3.9 Comments
    3.4 Case 4: Lung Carcinoma
    3.4.1 Case Presentation. 3.4.2 Neuro-Ophthalmologic Examination
    3.4.3 Ancillary Test
    3.4.4 Formulation
    3.4.5 Diagnosis
    3.4.6 Differential Diagnosis
    3.4.7 Management
    3.4.8 Prognosis
    3.4.9 Comments
    3.5 Case 5: Breast Carcinoma
    3.5.1 Case Presentation
    3.5.2 Neuro-Ophthalmologic Examination
    3.5.3 Ancillary Test
    3.5.4 Formulation
    3.5.5 Diagnosis
    3.5.6 Differential Diagnosis
    3.5.7 Management
    3.5.8 Prognosis
    3.5.9 Comments
    3.6 Case 6: Lymphocytic Leukemia (Acute)
    3.6.1 Case Presentation
    3.6.2 Neuro-Ophthalmologic Examination
    3.6.3 Ancillary Test
    3.6.4 Formulation
    3.6.5 Diagnosis
    3.6.6 Differential Diagnosis
    3.6.7 Management
    3.6.8 Prognosis
    3.6.9 Comments
    3.7 Case 7: Lymphocytic Leukemia (Chronic)
    3.7.1 Case Presentation
    3.7.2 Neuro-ophthalmologic Examination
    3.7.3 Ancillary Test
    3.7.4 Formulation
    3.7.5 Diagnosis
    3.7.6 Differential Diagnosis
    3.7.7 Management
    3.7.8 Prognosis
    3.7.9 Comments
    3.8 Case 8: Non-Hodgkin Lymphoma
    3.8.1 Case Presentation
    3.8.2 Neuro-Ophthalmologic Examination
    3.8.3 Ancillary Test
    3.8.4 Formulation
    3.8.5 Diagnosis
    3.8.6 Differential Diagnosis
    3.8.7 Management
    3.8.8 Prognosis
    3.8.9 Comments
    References
    Case 1: Granulomatosis Polyangiitis
    Case 2: Sarcoidosis
    Case 3: Rosai-Dorfman Disease
    Case 4: Lung Carcinoma
    Case 5: Breast Carcinoma
    Case 6: Lymphocytic Leukemia (Acute)
    Case 7: Lymphocytic Leukemia (Chronic)
    Case 8: Non-Hodgkin Lymphoma
    4: Optic Neuropathy of Infectious
    4.1 Case 1: Optic Neuropathy in Nontuberculosis Mycobacteria Infection
    4.1.1 Case Presentation
    4.1.2 Neuro-Ophthalmologic Examination
    4.1.3 Ancillary Test
    4.1.4 Formulation
    4.1.5 Diagnosis
    4.1.6 Differential Diagnosis
    4.1.7 Management. 4.1.8 Prognosis
    4.1.9 Comments
    4.2 Case 2: Optic Neuropathy in Fungus Infection
    4.2.1 Case Presentation
    4.2.2 Neuro-Ophthalmologic Examination
    4.2.3 Ancillary Test
    4.2.4 Formulation
    4.2.5 Diagnosis
    4.2.6 Differential Diagnosis
    4.2.7 Management
    4.2.8 Prognosis
    4.2.9 Comments
    4.3 Case 3: Optic Neuropathy in Syphilis Infection
    4.3.1 Case Presentation
    4.3.2 Neuro-Ophthalmologic Examination
    4.3.3 Ancillary Test
    4.3.4 Formulation
    4.3.5 Diagnosis
    4.3.6 Differential Diagnosis
    4.3.7 Management
    4.3.8 Prognosis
    4.3.9 Comments
    References
    Case 1: Optic Neuropathy in Nontuberculosis Mycobacteria Infection
    Case 2: Optic Neuropathy in Fungus Infection
    Case 3: Optic Neuropathy in Syphilis Infection
    5: Neuroretinitis
    5.1 Case 1: Syphilis Infection
    5.1.1 Case Presentation
    5.1.2 Neuro-Ophthalmologic Examination
    5.1.3 Ancillary Test
    5.1.4 Formulation
    5.1.5 Diagnosis
    5.1.6 Differential Diagnosis
    5.1.7 Management
    5.1.8 Prognosis
    5.1.9 Comments
    5.2 Case 2: Cat Scratch Disease
    5.2.1 Case Presentation
    5.2.2 Neuro-Ophthalmologic Examination
    5.2.3 Ancillary Test
    5.2.4 Formulation
    5.2.5 Diagnosis
    5.2.6 Differential Diagnosis
    5.2.7 Management
    5.2.8 Prognosis
    5.2.9 Comments
    References
    Case 1: Syphilis Infection
    Case 2: Cat Scratch Disease
    6: Nonarteritic Anterior Ischemic Optic Neuropathy
    6.1 Case 1: Drug Induced
    6.1.1 Case Presentation
    6.1.2 Neuro-Ophthalmologic Examination
    6.1.3 Ancillary Test
    6.1.4 Formulation
    6.1.5 Diagnosis
    6.1.6 Differential Diagnosis
    6.1.7 Management
    6.1.8 Prognosis
    6.1.9 Comments
    6.2 Case 2: Nonarteritic Anterior Ischemic Optic Neuropathy (High Altitude)
    6.2.1 Case Presentation
    6.2.2 Neuro-Ophthalmologic Examination. 6.2.3 Ancillary Test
    6.2.4 Formulation
    6.2.5 Diagnosis
    6.2.6 Differential Diagnosis
    6.2.7 Management
    6.2.8 Prognosis
    6.2.9 Comments
    6.3 Case 3: Nonarteritic Anterior Ischemic Optic Neuropathy (After Surgery)
    6.3.1 Case Presentation
    6.3.2 Neuro-Ophthalmologic Examination
    6.3.3 Ancillary Test
    6.3.4 Formulation
    6.3.5 Diagnosis
    6.3.6 Differential Diagnosis
    6.3.7 Management
    6.3.8 Prognosis
    6.3.9 Comments
    6.4 Case 4: Nonarteritic Anterior Ischemic Optic Neuropathy (Drusen)
    6.4.1 Case Presentation
    6.4.2 Neuro-Ophthalmologic Examination
    6.4.3 Ancillary Test
    6.4.4 Formulation
    6.4.5 Diagnosis
    6.4.6 Differential Diagnosis
    6.4.7 Management
    6.4.8 Prognosis
    6.4.9 Comments
    6.5 Case 5: Nonarteritic Anterior Ischemic Optic Neuropathy (Iatrogenic)
    6.5.1 Case Presentation
    6.5.2 Neuro-Ophthalmologic Examination
    6.5.3 Ancillary Test
    6.5.4 Formulation
    6.5.5 Diagnosis
    6.5.6 Differential Diagnosis
    6.5.7 Management
    6.5.8 Prognosis
    6.5.9 Comments
    References
    Case 1: Drug Induced
    Case 2: Nonarteritic Anterior Ischemic Optic Neuropathy (High Altitude)
    Case 3: Nonarteritic Anterior Ischemic Optic Neuropathy (After Surgery)
    Case 4: Nonarteritic Anterior Ischemic Optic Neuropathy (Drusen)
    Case 5: Nonarteritic Anterior Ischemic Optic Neuropathy (Iatrogenic)
    7: Arteritic Anterior Ischemic Optic Neuropathy
    7.1 Case 1: Giant Cell Arteritis
    7.1.1 Case Presentation
    7.1.2 Neuro-Ophthalmologic Examination
    7.1.3 Ancillary Test
    7.1.4 Formulation
    7.1.5 Diagnosis
    7.1.6 Differential Diagnosis
    7.1.7 Management
    7.1.8 Prognosis
    7.1.9 Comments
    7.2 Case 2: Giant Cell Arteritis (Bilateral)
    7.2.1 Case Presentation
    7.2.2 Neuro-Ophthalmologic Examination
    7.2.3 Ancillary Test.
    Digital Access Springer 2022
  • Digital
    Andrew G. Lee, Alexandra J. Sinclair, Ama Sadaka, Shauna Berry, Susan P. Mollan, editors.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    Desmond P. Kidd.
    Summary: This book presents fifty clinical cases in neuro-ophthalmology, some of which are common and some of which are rare. Each case is presented as a diagnostic and management challenge as found in clinical practice. High quality clinical photographs and images bring the cases to life alongside the diagnostic process and management decisions of an experienced specialist. A short summary of important aspects of the pathogenesis and treatment of each disease finishes each case. Neuro-Ophthalmology: Illustrated Case Studies entertains and instructs the reader and is ideal reading for doctors in training in this area, as well as general consultant neurologists and ophthalmologists.

    Contents:
    Section 1: The orbit and muscles (cases 1
    7)
    Section 2: The nerve (cases 8
    20)
    Section 3: The apex to the saddle (cases 21
    33)
    Section 4: The brain stem (cases 34
    42)
    Section 5: The cortex (cases 43
    50).
    Digital Access Springer 2017
  • Digital
    Daniel Gold.
    Summary: This book combines the complexities of neuro-ophthalmologic and neuro-otologic disorders into one concise guidebook. It focuses on the basics of these two challenging subspecialties, encountered by the neurologist, ophthalmologist, otolaryngologist, neurosurgeon, emergency medicine provider, and others. Comprehensive and succinct, the book contains chapters examining representative case vignettes that highlight typical historical elements and exam findings that aid in diagnosing a specific disease, disorder, or syndrome. Before each heading, chapters offer a brief review of relevant anatomy, physiology, and examination techniques. Additionally, symptom-based tables guide the practitioner to a focused history and examination for rapid real-time triage and diagnosis. Practical and case-based, Neuro-Ophthalmology and Neuro-Otology is an invaluable resource for practitioners, trainees, and residents in various fields.

    Contents:
    1. Preparing for the exam
    2. Disorders of the pupils, eyelids, & orbits
    3. Loss of vision & other visual symptoms
    4. Motility & ocular motor disorders
    5. Oscillopsia, nystagmus, and other abnormal movements
    6. Vestibular disorders
    7. Pediatric clinical pearls.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    Valérie Biousse, Nancy J. Newman.
    Contents:
    The neuro-ophthalmic examination
    Funduscopic examination
    Visual fields
    Ancillary testing commonly used in neuro-ophthalmology
    Visual loss: overview
    Transient visual loss
    Retinal vascular diseases
    Optic neuropathies
    The swollen disc
    Disorders of higher cortical function
    Visual perception abnormalities: hallucinations and illusions
    Pupil
    Diplopia
    Orbital syndrome
    Orbital and cavernous sinus vascular disorders
    Nystagmus and other ocular oscillations
    Disorders of the eyelid
    Non-organic neuro-ophthalmic symptoms and signs
    Diagnosis of headache and facial pain
    Disorders commonly encountered in neuro-ophthalmology
    The visually impaired patient.
    Digital Access
    Provider
    Version
    Thieme MedOne Ophthalmology
    Thieme MedOne Education
  • Digital
    Valérie Biousse, Nancy J. Newman.
    Summary: "Neuro-ophthalmology is an "overlap" specialty, encompassing all disorders that affect the parts of the central nervous system related to vision. Neuro-Ophthalmology Illustrated, Third Edition by world-renowned neuro-ophthalmologists and professors Valérie Biousse and Nancy J. Newman expands on the widely acclaimed prior editions, lauded with awards by the Association of American Publishers and the British Medical Association. The updated text reflects diagnostic advances such as optical coherence tomography and features new high-quality images and videos. The text starts with neuro-ophthalmic and funduscopic examinations, visual fields, commonly used ancillary testing methods, and an overview of visual loss. Subsequent chapters detail a wide array of conditions including retinal vascular diseases, optic neuropathies, disc edema, disorders of higher cortical function, abnormal visual perceptions, diplopia, orbital syndromes, cavernous sinus and orbital vascular disorders, nystagmus/other ocular oscillations, and disorders of the eyelid. Final chapters are dedicated to nonorganic neuro-ophthalmic symptoms and signs, diagnosis of headache and facial pain, neurologic and systemic disorders that commonly have neuro-ophthalmologic manifestations, and an approach to management of the visually impaired patient. Key Highlights Concise text coupled with more than 600high-quality images enhances understanding of complex concepts Easily accessible within pertinent sections, 69 video clips cover a wide spectrum of topics such as examination techniques, normal eye movements, eye movement disorders, and pupil findings Clinical pearls, flow charts, boxes, tables, and a highly detailed index at the end of the text improve retention and assimilation of knowledge This book is essential reading for students, ophthalmology, neurology, and neurosurgery residents, as well as seasoned clinicians in these specialties. At once authoritative and easy to read, this resource provides readers with all the tools they need to diagnose and manage neuro-ophthalmologic disorders"-- Provided by publisher.

    Contents:
    The Neuro-Ophthalmic Examination
    Funduscopic Examination
    Visual Fields
    Ancillary Testing Commonly Used in Neuro-Ophthalmology
    Visual Loss : An Overview
    Transient Visual Loss
    Retinal Vascular Diseases
    Optic Neuropathies
    Disc Edema
    Disorders of Higher Cortical Function
    Abnormal Visual Perceptions : Hallucinations and Illusions
    The Pupil
    Diplopia
    Orbital Syndrome
    Cavernous Sinus and Orbital Vascular Disorders
    Nystagmus and Other Ocular Oscillations
    Disorders of the Eyelid
    Nonorganic Neuro-Ophthalmic Symptoms and Signs
    Diagnosis of Headache and Facial Pain
    Disorders Commonly Encountered in Neuro-Ophthalmology
    The Visually Impaired Patient.
    Digital Access
    Provider
    Version
    Thieme-Connect
    Thieme MedOne Education
    Thieme MedOne Ophthalmology
  • Digital
    Anthony Pane, Neil R Miller, Michael Burdon.
    Summary: "This book is a practical, symptom-based, 'how-to' guide to neuro-ophthalmology and acquired strabismus for all trainee and practising ophthalmologists. Each chapter focusses on a specific clinical symptom and includes an introduction to the clinical assessment of a symptom; an examination checklist; a management flowchart to be followed; clinical diagnostic criteria checklists; and further information on the diseases that can cause the symptom with a brief discussion of appropriate management" -- From publisher website.

    Contents:
    1. Staying out of trouble
    2. Blurred vision or field loss
    3. Swollen disc/s, normal vision
    4. Transient visual loss
    5. Double vision
    6. 'Seeing things'
    7. Abnormal movement or orientation of the visual world
    8. Abnormal eye movements without visual symptoms
    9. Unequal pupils
    10. Ptosis
    11. Facial weakness or spasm
    12. Unexplained eye pain, orbital pain or headache
    13. Neuro-ophthalmic history and examination.
    Digital Access ClinicalKey 2018
  • Digital
    edited by Joseph M. Furman and Thomas Lempert.
    Contents:
    Anatomy, physiology, and physics of the peripheral vestibular system / H. Kingma, R. van de Berg
    Physiology of central pathways / K.E. Cullen
    Neurotransmitters in the vestibular system / C.D. Balaban
    Multisensory integration in balance control / A.M. Bronstein
    The epidemiology of dizziness and vertigo / H.K. Neuhauser
    Vestibular symptoms and history taking / A. Bisdorff
    Bedside examination / D. Straumann
    Eye movements in vestibular disorders / A. Kheradmand, A.I. Colpak, D.S. Zee
    The caloric irrigation test / N.T. Shepard, G.P. Jacobson
    Vestibular-evoked myogenic potentials / J.G. Colebatch, S.M. Rosengren, M.S. Welgampola
    Audiometry and other hearing tests / R.A. Davies
    Rotational testing / J.M. Furman
    An overview of vestibular rehabilitation / S.L. Whitney, A.A. Alghwiri, A. Alghadir
    Principles of vestibular pharmacotherapy / C. Chabbert
    Acute unilateral loss of vestibular function / M. Fetter
    Chronic unilateral vestibular loss / K.A. Kerber
    Bilateral vestibulopathy / M. Strupp, K. Feil, M. Dieterich, T. Brandt
    Benign paroxysmal positional vertigo and its variants / D. Nuti, M. Masini, M. Mandalà
    Menière's disease / J.M. Espinosa-Sanchez, J.A. Lopez-Escamez
    Otologic disorders causing dizziness, including surgery for vestibular disorders / P. Bertholon, A. Karkas
    Posttraumatic dizziness and vertigo / M. Szczupak, M.E. Hoffer, S. Murphy, C.D. Balaban
    Vestibular migraine / M. von Brevern, T. Lempert
    Ischemic syndromes causing dizziness and vertigo / K.-D. Choi, H. Lee, J.-S. Kim
    Functional and psychiatric vestibular disorders / J.P. Staab
    Vertigo and dizziness in children / K. Jahn
    The conundrum of cervicogenic dizziness / M. Magnusson, E.-M. Malmström
    Motion sickness / J.F. Golding
    Mal de débarquement syndrome / T.C. Hain, M. Cherchi.
    Digital Access ScienceDirect 2016
  • Digital
    Dmochowski, Roger; Heesakkers, John.
    Summary: This volume is a useful handbook for medical doctors involved in the diagnosis and treatment of neuro-urological problems. The first section reviews the relevant neuro-anatomy and neuro-physiology and provides a practical overview of specific neuro-urological pathologic conditions. The second section discusses the various clinical entities that can be encountered and focuses on the clinical entities neuro-urological consquences. The third section is devoted to the different diagnostic possibilities. Internationally accepted algorithms are presented and put into perspective. Section 4 deals with the triad of major clinical problems in this area: urinary (incontinence, retention and voiding dysfunction as well as upper urinary tract problems), anorectal (faecal incontinence and constipation) and sexual (erectile dysfunction and ejaculatory failure) dysfunctions. The final section covers the specific management of patients with neuro-urological problems and describes conservative and surgical treatments, providing the most recent information. Throughout, the text is accompanied by numerous illustrated case reports and discussions as well as tips and tricks based on the personal experience of the different authors.
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Digital
    Alan R. Crossman, David Neary; illustrated by Ben Crossman.
    Contents:
    Introduction and overview
    Cells of the nervous system
    Peripheral nervous system
    Autonomic nervous system
    Coverings of the central nervous system
    Ventricular system
    Vasculature of the central nervous system
    Spinal cord
    Brainstem
    Cranial nerves and cranial nerve nuclei
    Cerebellum
    Thalamus
    Cerebral hemisphere and cerebral cortex
    Basal ganglia
    Visual system
    Hypothalamus, limbic system and olfactory system.
    Digital Access ClinicalKey 2020
  • Digital
    John H. Martin ; medical photography by Howard J. Radzyner ; illustrated by Michael E. Leonard.
    Summary: "Neuroanatomy plays a crucial role in the health science curriculum by preparing students to understand the anatomical basis of neurology and psychiatry. Imaging the human brain, in both the clinical and research setting, helps us to identify its basic structure and connections. And when the brain becomes damaged by disease or trauma, imaging localizes the extent of the injury. Functional imaging helps to identify the parts of the brain that become active during our thoughts and actions, and reveals brain regions where drugs act to produce their neurological and psychiatric effects. Complementary experimental approaches in animals-such as mapping neural connections, localizing particular neuroactive chemicals within different brain regions, and determining the effects of lesioning or inactivating a brain region-provide the neuroscientist with the tools to study the biological substrates of normal and disordered behavior. To interpret this wealth of clinical and basic science information requires a high level of neuroanatomical competence. Knowledge of human neuroanatomy is becoming increasing more important for procedures to treat central nervous system diseases. Therapeutic electrophysiological interventions target specific brain regions, such as deep brain stimulation (DBS) of the basal ganglia for Parkinson disease. Interventional neuroradiology is a chosen approach for treating many vascular abnormalities, such as repair of arterial aneurysms. Surgery to resect a portion of the temporal lobe is the treatment of choice to reduce the incidence of seizures for many patients with epilepsy. Neurosurgeons routinely use high-resolution imaging tools to characterize the functions and even the connections of regions surrounding tumors, to resect the tumor safely and minimize risk of loss of speech or motor function. Mathematical modeling of brain tissue characteristics based on high-resolution MRI is used to guide placement of surface electrodes for transcranial magnetic and direct current electric stimulation. Each of these innovative approaches clearly requires that the clinical team have a sufficient knowledge of functional neuroanatomy-that is, to have knowledge of brain functions and in which structures these functions are localized-to design and carry out these tasks. And this demand for knowledge of brain structure, function, and connectivity will only be more important in the future as higher-resolution imaging and more effective interventional approaches are developed to repair the damaged brain. Neuroanatomy helps to provide key insights into disease by providing a bridge between molecular and clinical neural science. We are learning the genetic and molecular bases for many neurological and psychiatric diseases, such as amyotrophic lateral sclerosis, Huntington disease, and schizophrenia. Localizing defective genes to particular brain regions, neural circuits, and even neuron classes helps to further our understanding of how pathological changes in brain structure alter brain function. And this knowledge, in turn, will hopefully lead to breakthroughs in treatments and even cures. An important goal of Neuroanatomy: Text and Atlas is to prepare the reader for interpreting the new wealth of human brain images-structural, functional, and connectivity-by developing an understanding of the anatomical localization of brain functions. To provide a workable focus, this book is largely restricted to the central nervous system. It takes a traditional approach to gaining neuroanatomical competence: Because the basic imaging picture is a two-dimensional slice through the brain (e.g., CT or MRI scan), the locations of structures and consideration of their functions are examined on two-dimensional myelin-stained sections through the human central nervous system. All chapters have been revised for the fifth edition of Neuroanatomy: Text and Atlas to reflect advances in neural science since the last edition, with many new full color illustrations. Designed as a self-study guide and resource for information on the structure and function of the human central nervous system, this book can serve as both text and atlas for an introductory laboratory course in human neuroanatomy"-- Provided by publisher.

    Contents:
    Organization of the central nervous system
    Structural and functional organization of the central nervous system
    Vasculature of the central nervous system and the cerebrospinal fluid
    Somatic sensation : spinal mechanosensory systems
    Somatic sensation : spinal systems for pain, temperature, and itch
    Somatic sensation : trigeminal and viscerosensory systems
    The visual system
    The auditory system
    Chemical senses : taste and smell
    Descending motor pathways and the motor function of the spinal cord
    Cranial nerve motor nuclei and brain stem motor functions
    The vestibular system and eye movements
    The cerebellum
    The basal ganglia
    The hypothalamus and regulation of bodily functions
    The limbic system and cerebral circuits for reward, emotions, and memory.
    Digital Access
    Provider
    Version
    AccessNeurology
    AccessMedicine
  • Digital
    Yasuo Hisa, editor.
    Summary: This book is a concise but detailed treatise on the laryngeal nervous system. It is ideal for researchers starting work in this field in that it provides a quick update on present-day basic neurolaryngology. A brief introduction to the methodology that made recent progress possible is followed by a review of classical basic neuroanatomy and neurophysiology. Additionally, the book provides some of the most recent findings in neurolaryngology. The many illustrative figures and microscopic photographs help readers to achieve a clearer understanding of the text and ample references provide links to further reading in specific areas of the field. The book contains much general material that will be instructive even for researchers not specializing in basic neurolaryngology and will provide an essential grounding for clinicians in laryngology.
    Digital Access Springer 2016
  • Digital
    Heiko Braak, Kelly Del Tredici authors
    Summary: As indicated by its title, this monograph deals chiefly with morphologically recognizable deviations from the normal anatomical condition of the human CNS. The AD-associated pathology is illustrated from its beginnings (sometimes even in childhood) to its final form, which is reached late in life. The AD process commences much earlier than the clinically recognizable phase of the disorder, and its timeline includes an extended preclinical phase. The further the pendulum swings away from the symptomatic final stages towards the early pathology, the more obvious the lesions become, although from a standpoint of severity they are more unremarkable and thus frequently overlooked during routine neuropathological assessment. For this reason, the authors deal with the hallmark lesions in the early phases of the AD process in considerable detail.

    Contents:
    Prologue
    General Morphology of Alzheimer-associated intraneuronal pathology
    Consistent and systematic changes in the distribution pattern of intraneuronal inclusions render staging possible
    Basic organization of involved structures
    Presymptomatic stages
    General morphology of Alzheimer-associated extracellular pathology
    Symptomatic stages
    The progression of cortical lesions mimics the pattern of myelination in reverse order
    Tauopathies
    CSF biomarkers and imaging techniques
    The staging hypothesis: assumptions, challenges, potential
    Technical considerations. .
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Digital
    Duane E. Haines ; special contributions by Mary Alissa Willis, H. Wayne Lambert ; illustrators, W.K. Cunningham and M.P. Schenk ; computer graphics, C.P. Runyan ; photographers, G.W. Armstrong, R.W. Gray.
    Summary: Neuroanatomy Atlas in Clinical Context is unique in integrating clinical information, correlations, and terminology with neuroanatomical concepts. It provides everything students need to not only master the anatomy of the central nervous system, but also understand its clinical relevance - ensuring preparedness for exams and clinical rotations. This authoritative approach, combined with salutary features such as full-color stained sections, extensive cranial nerve cross-referencing, and systems neurobiology coverage, sustains the legacy of this legendary teaching and learning tool.

    Contents:
    Introduction and user's guide
    External morphology of the central nervous system
    Cranial nerves
    Meninges, cisterns, ventricles, and related hemorrhages
    Internal morphology of the brain in unstained slices and in MRI
    Internal morphology of the spinal cord and brain: functional components, MRI, stained sections
    Internal morphology of the brain in stained sections: axial-sagittal correlations with MRI
    Tracts, pathways, and systems in anatomical and clinical orientation
    Clinical syndromes of the CNS
    Anatomical-clinical correlations: cerebral angiogram, MRA, and MRV
    Q&As: A sampling of study and review questions, many in the USMLE style, all with explained answers.
  • Digital
    Stanley Jacobson, Elliott M. Marcus, Stanley Pugsley.
    Summary: "This updated edition provides clinicians from various backgrounds and levels of training the information needed to optimally diagnose and manage neurologic complications of the nervous system. Organized into seven sections, this comprehensive volume begins with an overview of diagnostic studies for neurologic complications involving the nervous system. That is followed by sections on metastatic and non-metastatic complications of cancer involving the nervous system, and the interpretation, diagnosis, and management of common neuro-oncologic symptoms. The next section reviews the neurologic complications of cancer therapy, including corticosteroids, radiation therapy, chemotherapy, targeted molecular therapies, immunotherapies, hematopoietic stem cell transplantation, and infections involving the nervous system. The final section focuses on the most important neurologic complications in cancers arising from specific organs. In addition to capturing the latest advancements in the rapidly evolving fields of oncology and cancer neurology, the goal of this resource is to lead clinicians toward prompt diagnosis and intervention in order to improve patient quality of life"--Publisher's description.

    Contents:
    Introduction to the central nervous system
    Neurocytology: cells of the CNS
    Nueroembryology and congenital malformations
    Spinal cord
    Brain stem: gross anatomy
    Brain stem functional localization
    The cranial nerves
    Diencephalon
    Hypothalamus, neuroendrocrine system, and autonomic nervous system
    Cerebral cortex functional localization
    Motor system, movement, and motor pathways
    Motor system II: basal ganglia
    Motor systems III: the cerebellum movement and major fiber pathways of the cerebellum
    Somatosensory functions and the parietal lobe
    Visual system and occipital lobe
    The limbic system, temporal lobe, and prefrontal cortex
    Higher cortical functions
    Cerebral vascular disease
    Neuropathology, nonvascular: trauma, neoplasms, and communicable diseases
    Non-nervous elements in the CNS
    Case history problem solving
    Movies on the brain
    Descriptive atlas
    Myelin-stained.
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Digital
    Duane E. Haines.
    Contents:
    Introduction and user's guide
    External morphology of the central nervous system
    Cranial nerves
    Meninges, cisterns, ventricles, and related hemorrhages
    Internal morphology of the brain in unstained slices and MRI
    Internal morphology of the spinal cord and brain: functional components, MRI, stained sections
    Internal morphology of the brain in stained sections: axial-sagittal correlations with MRI
    Tracts, pathways, and systems in anatomical and clinical orientation
    Herniation syndromes: brain and spinal discs
    Anatomical-clinical correlations: cerebral angiogram, MRA, and MRV
    Q & As: a sampling of study and review questions, many in the USMLE style, all with explained answers.
  • Digital
    Michael Petrides.
    Summary: Neuroanatomy of Language Regions of the Human Brain is a richly illustrated, practical reference for any scientist interested in the study of brain and language, providing insight into the pathways for certain aspects of language processing and covering both classic work and modern discoveries. Anatomical research now shows neural pathways linking language comprehension regions to speech regions, and others pathways linking parietal areas involved in writing and reading with those essential for motor control and language production.

    Contents:
    Historical background
    Morphological features of the core language regions : the Sulci and Gyri
    Abbreviations
    MRI sections
    Cytoarchitecture
    Connectivity of the core language areas.
    Digital Access ScienceDirect 2014
  • Digital
    Hannsjörg Schröder, Natasha Moser, Stefan Huggenberger.
    Summary: This textbook describes the basic neuroanatomy of the laboratory mouse. The reader will be guided through the anatomy of the mouse nervous system with the help of abundant microphotographs and schemata. Learning objectives and summaries of key facts at the beginning of each chapter provide the reader with an overview on the most important information. As transgenic mice are one of the most widely used paradigms when it comes to modeling human diseases, a basic understanding of the neuroanatomy of the mouse is of considerable value for all students and researchers in the neurosciences and pharmacy, but also in human and veterinary medicine. Accordingly, the authors have included, whenever possible, comparisons of the murine and the human nervous system. The book is intended as a guide for all those who are about to embark on the structural, histochemical and functional phenotyping of the mouse's central nervous system. It can serve as a practical handbook for students and early researchers, and as a reference book for neuroscience lectures and laboratories. -- Provided by publisher.

    Contents:
    Rodent taxonomic and biological data
    Basic neurohistology
    Rodent basic neuroanatomy/coverings of the CNS/cerebrospinal fluid system
    Macroscopic anatomy of the mouse brain
    The mouse spinal cord (Medulla spinalis)
    The mouse brainstem (Truncus encephali)
    The mouse cerebellum
    The mouse thalamus
    The mouse hypothalamus
    The mouse cerebral cortex
    The mouse hippocampus
    The mouse amygdaloid body
    The mouse caudate putamen, motor system, and nucleus accumbens
    The mouse olfactory system
    The mouse circle of Willis.
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Print
    Hal Blumenfeld.
    Summary: "The third edition of Neuroanatomy through Clinical Cases is written for first- or second-year medical students enrolled in a basic neuroanatomy, neurobiology, or neuroscience course. It is also a valuable resource for advanced medical students and residents, as well as students of other health professions ranging from physical therapy to dentistry. This book brings a pioneering interactive approach to the teaching of neuroanatomy and comprises 19 chapters that explain the major neuroanatomical systems. Each chapter first presents background material-including an overview of relevant neuroanatomical structures and pathways-and a brief discussion of related clinical disorders. The second half of each chapter is devoted to clinical cases. The cases begin with a narrative of how the patient developed symptoms and what deficits were found on neurological examination. A series of questions challenges the reader to deduce the neuroanatomical location of the patient's lesion and the diagnosis. Discussion and answers follow, revealing the actual outcome. This third edition is fully updated with the latest advances in the field and includes several new cases and enhanced online and digital components"-- Provided by publisher.

    Contents:
    Introduction to Clinical Case Presentations
    Neuroanatomy Overview and Basic Definitions
    The Neurologic Exam as a Lesson in Neuroanatomy
    Introduction to Clinical Neuroradiology
    Brain and Environs: Cranium, Ventricles, and Meninges
    Corticospinal Tract and Other Motor Pathways
    Somatosensory Pathways
    Spinal Nerve Roots
    Major Plexuses and Peripheral Nerves
    Cerebral Hemispheres and Vascular Supply
    Visual System
    Brainstem I : Surface Anatomy and Cranial Nerves
    Brainstem II : Eye Movements and Pupillary Control
    Brainstem III : Internal Structures and Vascular Supply
    Cerebellum
    Basal Ganglia
    Pituitary and Hypothalamus
    Limbic System: Homeostasis, Olfaction, Memory, and Emotion
    Higher-Order Cerebral Function.
    Print
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
  • Digital
    Hiroyuki Uchino, Kazuo Ushijima, Yukio Ikeda, editors ; with contributed by Jeremy Williams and Edward F. Barroga.
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Digital
    Paolo Dell'Aversana.
    Contents:
    I. Two (apparently) different worlds. The exploratory brain
    Cognitive geosciences
    II. Bridging the gap. Exploration
    Imaging
    Recognition
    Integration
    III. Brain-based-technologies and brain empowerment. Brain-based technologies
    Applications to education in geosciences
    From information to significance
    Neuroplasticity and brain empowerment in exploration geosciences
    Epilogue.
    Digital Access ScienceDirect 2017
  • Digital
    edited by Turgay Dalkara, Michael A. Moskowitz.
    Contents:
    Functional anatomy of trigeminaovascular pain / Karl Messlinger and Mária Dux
    Physiology of the meningeal sensory pathway / Andrew Strassman and Agustin Melo-Carrillo
    Meningeal afferent ion channels and their role in migraine / Gregory Dussor
    Functional architecture of central pain pathways : focus on the trigeminovascular system / Rodrigo Noseda and Luis Villanueva
    Visceral pain / Michael S. Gold and G.F. Gebhart
    Meningeal neurogenic inflammation and dural mast cells in migraine pain / Dan Levy
    Sensitization and photophobia in migraine / Aaron Schain and Rami Burstein
    Central circuits promoting chronification of migraine / Christopher W. Atcherley, Kelsey Nation, Milena De Felice, Jennifer Y. Xie, Michael H. Ossipov, David W. Dodick and Frank Porreca
    Triptans to calcitonin gene-related peptide modulators : small molecules to antibodies
    the evolution of a new migraine drug class / Richard J Hargreaves
    Lessons learned from CGRP mutant mice / Levi P. Sowers, Annie E. Tye and Andrew F. Russo
    The clinical characteristics of migraine / F. Michael Cutrer, Ryan Smith and David W. Dodick
    The premonitory phase of migraine / Michele Viana and Peter J Goadsby
    The genetic borderland of migraine and epilepsy / Isamu Aiba and Jeffrey Noebels
    Genetics of monogenic and complex migraine / Else A. Tolner, Else Eising, Gisela M. Terwindt, Michel D. Ferrari, Arn M.J.M. van den Maagdenberg
    Lessons from familial hemiplegic migraine and cortical spreading depression / Daniella Pietrobon
    From cortical spreading depression to trigeminovascular activation in migraine / Turgay Dalkara and Michael A. Moskowitz
    Mathematical modeling of human cortical spreading depression / Markus A. Dahlem
    Tools for high resolution in vivo imaging of cellular and molecular mechanisms in cortical spreading depression and spreading depolarization / Kivilcim Kilic, Hana Uhlirova, Peifang Tian, Payam A. Saisan, Mohammad Abbas Yaseen, Jonghwan Lee, Sergei A. Vinogradov, David A. Boas, Sava Sakadzic, Anna Devor
    Animal models of migraine aura / Shih-Pin Chen, Jeremy Theriot, Cenk Ayata and KC Brennan
    Human models of migraine / Jakob Moller Hansen and Messoud Ashina
    Imaging pain and headache / Duncan J. Hodkinson, Sophie L. Wilcox, and David Borsook.
    Digital Access Wiley 2018
  • Digital
    David J. K. Balfour, Marcus R. Munafò, editors.
    Summary: The primary purpose of this book and its companion volume The Neuropharmacology of Nicotine Dependence is to explore the ways in which recent studies on nicotine and its role in tobacco addiction have opened our eyes to the psychopharmacological properties of this unique and fascinating drug. While the present volume considers the molecular and genetic factors which influence behavioral responses to nicotine and how these may impact on the role of nicotine in tobacco dependence, the book The Neuropharmacology of Nicotine Dependence focuses on the complex neural and psychological mechanisms that mediate nicotine dependence in experimental animal models and their relationship to tobacco addiction in humans. These volumes will provide readers with a contemporary overview of current research on nicotine psychopharmacology and its role in tobacco dependence from leaders in this field of research and will hopefully prove valuable to those who are developing their own research programmes in this important topic. CTBN Vol 23 The Behavioral Genetics of Nicotine and Tobacco The primary purpose of this book and its companion volume The Neuropharmacology of Nicotine Dependence is to explore the ways in which recent studies on nicotine and its role in tobacco addiction have opened our eyes to the psychopharmacological properties of this unique and fascinating drug. While the present volume considers the molecular and genetic factors which influence behavioral responses to nicotine and how these may impact on the role of nicotine in tobacco dependence, the book The Neuropharmacology of Nicotine Dependence focuses on the complex neural and psychological mechanisms that mediate nicotine dependence in experimental animal models and their relationship to tobacco addiction in humans. These volumes will provide readers with a contemporary overview of current research on nicotine psychopharmacology and its role in tobacco dependence from leaders in this field of research and will hopefully prove valuable to those who are developing their own research programmes in this important topic.
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Print
    editor, Robert Kerwin ; advisory editors, David Dawbarn, James McCulloch, Carol Tamminga ... [et al.].
    Contents:
    v. 1. Neurobiology and psychiatry
    v. 2. Neurobiology and psychiatry
    v. 3. Neuroimaging.
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Books: General Collection (Downstairs)
    RC343 .N494
    3
  • Digital
    edited by Susan Sangha and Dan Foti.
    Contents:
    Section I. Emotion-related impulsivity across disorders and species
    Section II. Impulsivity and stress in eating disorders
    Section III. Interaction of stress and drug-seeking
    Section IV. Learning to inhibit the fear response
    Section V. Abnormal emotional reactivity versus regulation across disorders.
    Digital Access ScienceDirect 2018
  • Digital
    edited by Alan C. Swann, F. Gerard Moeller, Marijn Lijffijt.
    Contents:
    Beyond drugs : addictions in the context of recurrent/progressive psychiatric illness / Alan C. Swann
    Behavioral mechanisms in addiction / Margaret C. Wardle, Jin H. Yoon, Anka A. Vujanovic, Michael F. Weaver, Scott D. Lane, and Joy M. Schmitz
    The biology of nicotine addiction and factors that differentiate youth who smoke from those who do not / Felicia R. Carey and Anna V. Wilkinson
    Resilience and opiate misuse / Sameer Hassamal, Divya Ramesh, and F. Gerard Moeller
    Alcohol-related disorders : adaptations and progression to disordered drinking / Therese A. Kosten, Colin Haile, Marijn Lijffijt, and Alan C. Swann
    The neurobiology of behavioral sensitization / Jeffery D. Steketee
    Stress and addiction / Marijn Lijffijt
    The neurobiology of behavioral addictions : sexual addiction / Donald L. Hilton Jr., Stefanie Carnes, and Todd L. Love
    Norepinephrine as a therapeutic target for cocaine-use disorder / Colin N. Haile, Thomas F. Newton, and Thomas R. Kosten
    Cannnabis, endocannabinoids, and mechanisms of addiction / Christopher Rodgman and Christopher D. Verrico
    Cocaine addiction therapy pharmacogenetics / David A. Nielsen
    Increasing the information yield from clinical trials in addictions : Bayesian statistics, adaptive designs, and biomarker evaluation / Charles Green, Robert Suchting, Nuvan Rathnayaka, Margaret Wardle, and Joy M. Schmitz
    Mechanisms of sensitization to stress, affective episodes, and abused substances : implications for treatment and prevention / Robert M. Post.
    Digital Access Oxford 2016
  • Digital
    edited by Robbin Gibb, Bryan Kolb.
    Summary: The Neurobiology of Brain and Behavioral Development provides an overview of the process of brain development, including recent discoveries on how the brain develops. This book collates and integrates these findings, weaving the latest information with core information on the neurobiology of brain development. It focuses on cortical development, but also features discussions on how the other parts of the brain wire into the developing cerebral cortex. A systems approach is used to describe the anatomical underpinnings of behavioral development, connecting anatomical and molecular features of brain development with behavioral development. The disruptors of typical brain development are discussed in appropriate sections, as is the science of epigenetics that presents a novel and instructive approach on how experiences, both individual and intergenerational, can alter features of brain development. What distinguishes this book from others in the field is its focus on both molecular mechanisms and behavioral outcomes. This body of knowledge contributes to our understanding of the fundamentals of brain plasticity and metaplasticity, both of which are also showcased in this book.

    Contents:
    Part I. General perspectives in brain development
    Brain development / Robbin Gibb and Anna Kovalchuk
    Perspectives on behavioral development / Serena Jenkins
    Overview of factors influencing brain development / Bryan Kolb
    The role of animal models in developmental brain research / Celeste Halliwell
    Part II. Molecular perspectives in brain development
    Stem cells to function / Maryam Faiz and Ciindi M. Morshead
    Critical periods in cortical development / Takao K. Hensch
    Epigenetics and genetics of development / Alexandre A. Lussier, Sumaiya A. Islam and Michael S. Kobor
    Part III. Behavior
    Visual systems / Daphne Maurer and Terri L. Lewis
    The development of the motor system / Claudia L.R. Gonzalez and Lori-Ann R. Sacrey
    Neural foundations of cognition and language / Lindsay C. Bowman, Lara J. Pierce, Charles A. Nelson III and Janet F. Werker
    Toward an understanding of the neural basis of executive function development / Sammy Perone, Brandy Almy and Philip D. Zelazo
    Rough-and-tumble play and the development of the social brain: what do we know, how do we know it, and what do we need to know? / Sergio M. Pellis, Brett T. Himmler, Stephanie M. Himmler and Viven C. Pellis
    Part IV. Factors influencing development
    Brain plasticity and experience / Bryan Kolb
    Hormones and development / Rachel Stark and Robbin Gibb
    Injury / Mardee Greenham, Nicholas P. Ryan and Vicki Anderson
    Social dysfunction: The effects of early trauma and adversity on socialization and brain development / Allonna Harker.
    Digital Access ScienceDirect 2018
  • Print
    edited by James H. Wood.
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Books: General Collection (Downstairs)
    RB55 .N48
    2
  • Digital
    Susan L. Andersen, Daniel S. Pine, editors.
    Summary: "Brain development, whether typical or atypical, provides the foundation for all behavior and possible psychopathology. This volume takes a comprehensive and translational approach in describing how basic neuronal patterning occurs, organizes into systems, and forms functional and inter-connected networks. The role that hormones and genes play in influencing brain development is also described. The resultant emotional, cognitive, reward, and social systems show how typical development proceeds. The second part of the book describes when the process of development goes awry. Here, a number of childhood disorders are covered. Autism, ADHD, emotional syndromes of bipolar disorder and depression, oppositional defiant disorder and conduct disorder, and sleep and schizophrenia are included in this volume. Written by leading experts in their respective fields, this volume will be a valuable resource to mental health professionals as well as preclinical investigators hoping to gain additional understanding about the neurobiology of the developing brain."--Publisher's website.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    edited by Elsa Rossignol, Lionel Carmant and Jean-Claude Lacaille.
    Contents:
    Multimodal investigation of epileptic networks: The case of insular cortex epilepsy / Y. Zerouali, J. Ghaziri, D.K. Nguyen
    Genetic investigations of the epileptic encephalopathies: Recent advances / C.T. Myers, H.C. Mefford
    mTOR signaling pathway genes in focal epilepsies / S. Baulac
    Involvement of cortical fast-spiking parvalbumin-positive basket cells in epilepsy / X. Jiang, M. Lachance, E. Rossignol
    Organization and control of epileptic circuits in temporal lobe epilepsy / A. Alexander, M. Maroso, I. Soltesz
    Normal and epilepsy-associated pathologic function of the dentate gyrus / C.G. Dengler, D.A. Coulter
    Antiepileptic drug treatment strategies in neonatal epilepsy / A.E. Hernan, G.L. Holmes
    Advancing epilepsy treatment through personalized genetic zebrafish models / A. Griffin, C. Krasniak, S.C. Baraban
    Antiepileptogenic repair of excitatory and inhibitory synaptic connectivity after neocortical trauma / D.A. Prince, F. Gu, I. Parada.
    Digital Access ScienceDirect 2016
  • Digital/Print
    Hugo Merchant, Victor de Lafuente, editors.
    Summary: "The study of how the brain processes temporal information is becoming one of the most important topics in systems, cellular, computational, and cognitive neuroscience, as well as in the physiological bases of music and language. During the last and current decade, interval timing has been intensively studied in humans and animals using increasingly sophisticated methodological approaches. The present book will bring together the latest information gathered from this exciting area of research, putting special emphasis on the neural underpinnings of time processing in behaving human and non-human primates. Thus, Neurobiology of Interval Timing will integrate for the first time the current knowledge of both animal behavior and human cognition of the passage of time in different behavioral context, including the perception and production of time intervals, as well as rhythmic activities, using different experimental and theoretical frameworks."--Publisher's description (excerpt).

    Contents:
    Introduction to the neurobiology of interval timing
    About the (non)scalar property for time perception
    Elucidating the internal structure of psychophysical timing performance in the sub-second and second range by utilizing confirmatory factor analysis
    Neurocomputational models of time perception
    Dedicated clock/timing-circuit theories of time perception and timed performance
    Neural dynamics based timing in the subsecond to seconds range
    Signs of timing in motor cortex during movement preparation and cue anticipation
    Neurophysiology of timing in the hundreds of milliseconds: multiple layers of neuronal clocks in the medial premotor areas
    The olivo-cerebellar system as a neural clock
    From duration and distance comparisons to goal encoding in prefrontal cortex
    Probing interval timing with scalp-recorded electroencephalography (EEG)
    Searching for the holy grail: temporally informative firing patterns in the rat
    Getting the timing right: experimental protocols for investigating time with functional neuroimaging and psychopharmacology
    Motor and perceptual timing in Parkinson's disease
    Music perception: information flow within the human auditory cortices
    Perceiving temporal regularity in music: the role of auditory event-related potentials (ERPs) in probing beat perception
    Neural mechanisms of rhythm perception: present findings and future directions
    Neural underpinnings of music: the polyrhythmic brain.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    [edited by] Scott L. Hooper, Ansgar Büschges.
    Contents:
    Introduction / Ansgar Büschges and Scott L. Hooper
    Electrophysiological recording techniques / Scott L. Hooper and Joachim Schmidt
    Multi-unit recording / Arthur Leblois and Christophe Pouzat
    The "new math" of neuroscience : genetic tools for accessing and electively manipulating neurons / Andreas Schoofs, Michael J. Pankratz, and Martyn Goulding
    Computer simulation-power and peril / Astrid A. Prinz and Scott L. Hooper
    Evolution of motor systems / Paul S. Katz and Melina E. Hale
    Introduction to motor pattern selection in vertebrates and invertebrates / Hans-Joachim Pflüger and Sten Grillner
    Selection of action-vertebrate perspective / Sten Grillner and Brita Robertson
    Motor pattern selection and initiation in invertebrates with an emphasis on insects / Hans-Joachim Pflüger
    Neural networks for the generation of rhythmic motor behaviors / Ronald M. Harris-Warrick and Jan-Marino Ramirez
    Sensory feedback in the control of posture and locomotion / Donald H. Edwards and Boris I. Prilutsky
    Coordination of rhythmic movements / Jean-Patrick Le Gal, Réjean Dubuc, and Carmen Smarandache-Wellmann
    Prehensile movements / Till Bockemhl
    Muscle, biomechanics, and implications for neural control / Lena H. Ting and Hillel J. Chiel
    Plasticity and learning in motor control networks / John Simmers and Keith T. Sillar
    Bio-inspired robot locomotion / Thomas Buschmann and Barry Trimmer.
    Digital Access Wiley 2017
  • Digital
    edited by Israel Liberzon, MD, Professor of Psychiatry, Psychology, and Neuroscience, University of Michigan and Ann arbor VAMC, Ann Arbor, MI, USA, Kerry J. Ressler, MD, Chief Scientific Officer and Poitras Professor of Psychiatry, McLean Hospital, Harvard Medical School, Belmont, MA, USA.
    Contents:
    Behavioral neuroscience of circuits involved in fear processing / Elizabeth P. Bauer, Dennis Pare
    Cellular physiology of the basolateral complex of the amygdala and its modulation by stress Brendan O'Flaherty, Chia Chun Hsu, Anzar Abbas, D.G. Rainnie
    Generalizations of learned fear / Joseph E. Dunsmoor, Rony Paz
    Neural circuits for context processing in aversive learning and memory / Stephen Maren
    Adult hippocampal neurogenesis, generalization, and PTSD / Kristen C. Klemenhagen, Abby J. Fyer, H. Blair Simpson, René Hen
    Behavioral neuroscience of circuits involved in arousal regulation / Arash Javanbakht, Gina R. Poe
    Limbic pathways to stress control : regulation of the HPA axis / James P. Herman
    Prefrontal regulation of emotion / Annmarie MacNamara, K. Luan Phan
    Genetics of PTSD / Jennifer A. Sumner, Angela C. Bustamante, Karestan C. Koenen, Monica Uddin
    Neurobiological pathways involved in fear, stress, and PTSD / Christine Heim, Charles B. Nemeroff
    Inflammation and immune function in PTSD / Jennifer C. Felger, Ebrahim Haroon, Andrew H. Miller
    Secondary messenger systems and other molecular pathways implicated in PTSD / Ulrike Schmidt
    Human psychophysiology and PTSD / Tanja Jovanovic, Seth Davin Norrholm
    Human fMRI in PTSD / Marie-France Mari, Mohammed R. Milad
    Translational research from animal models to humans / Shigeru Morinobu, Shigeto Yamamoto, Manabu Fuchikami
    Mechanisms of action of psychotherapy / Sheila Rauch, Israel Liberzon
    Mechanisms of action of medication treatment / Thomas D. Geracioti, Jeffrey R. Strawn, Matthew D. Wortman
    Novel prevention, intervention, and treatment approaches / Jonathon R. Howlett, Murray B. Stein.
    Digital Access Oxford 2016
  • Print
    edited by Ivor E. Dreosti and Richard M. Smith ; foreword by Sir F. Macfarlane Burnet.
    Contents:

    v. 2. Neurotoxicology and neuropharmacology.
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Stored offsite. Please request print.
    QP352 .N48
    1
  • Digital
    edited by Robert K. Shepherd.
    Contents:
    The historical foundation of bionics / Nick Donaldson and Giles S. Brindley
    Development of stable long-term electrode tissue interfaces for recording and stimulation / Jens Schouenborg
    Electrochemical principles of safe charge injection / Stuart F. Cogan, David J. Garrett and Rylie A. Green
    Principles of recording from an electrical stimulation of neural tissue / James B. Fallon and Paul M. Carter
    Wireless neurotechnology for neural prostheses / Arto Nurmikko, David Borton and Ming Yin
    Preclinical testing of neural prostheses / Douglas McCreery
    Auditory and visual neural prostheses / Robert K. Shepherd, Peter M. Seligman, Mohit N. Shivdasani
    Neurobionics : treatments for disorders of the central nervous system / Hugh McDermott
    Brain computer interfaces / David M. Brandman and Leigh R. Hochberg.
    Digital Access Wiley 2016
  • Digital
    edited by Sabine Sarnacki, Luca Pio.
    Summary: This book addresses neuroblastoma, a type of embryonic tumor derived from neural crest cells and one of the most frequent extra-cranial solid tumors in children. However, the term also describes a heterogeneous group of tumors, the prognosis of which can differ greatly according to age, stage and biology. Some forms undergo spontaneous regression, and some are cured by surgery alone or after chemo-reduction, while others exhibit extremely aggressive behavior. Their successful treatment is one of the best examples of tailored medicine, which involves close collaboration between pediatric surgeons, pediatric oncologists, radiologists, nuclear medicine specialists, biologists, oncogeneticists and radiotherapists. The book pursues a unique approach, as it combines most essential insights from all of these fields, together with key information regarding epidemiology, physiopathology and palliative care. The respective chapters were written by the leading international experts on neuroblastoma, and present the latest advances in terms of research, surgical approaches and medical treatments. The book offers an invaluable resource to all pediatric surgeons, pediatricians, oncologists, students, researchers and all others involved in neuroblastoma management who want to benefit from their colleagues' expertise.

    Contents:
    Chapter 1. Epidemiology
    Chapter 2. Biology of neuroblastoma
    Chapter 3. Neuroblastoma pathogenesis
    Chapter 4. Neuroblastoma Pathology
    Chapter 5. Radiology
    Chapter 6. Image Defined Risk Factors
    Chapter 7. Nuclear Medicine procedures in Neuroblastoma
    Chapter 8. Radiotherapy for neuroblastoma
    Chapter 9. Spinal canal involvement in peripheral neuroblastic tumors
    Chapter 10. Neonatal Neuroblastoma
    Chapter 11. Low and intermediate risk Neuroblastoma
    Chapter 12. High risk Neuroblastoma and current Protocols
    Chapter 13. Immunotherapy
    Chapter 14. Prognostic Factors and Risk Stratification
    Chapter 15. BIOPSY OF NEUROBLASTOMA
    Chapter 16. Surgical Techniques
    Chapter 17. Surgical strategies for high risk neuroblastoma
    Chapter 18. Surgical strategies for Neuroblastoma with spinal canal involvement
    Chapter 19. Neuroblastoma
    Minimally invasive surgery
    Chapter 20. Robotic Surgery for Neuroblastoma
    Chapter 21. Complications of the surgical management of children with neuroblastoma
    Chapter 22. Palliative Care.
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    edited by Swapan K. Ray.
    Summary: "Neuroblastoma: Molecular Mechanisms and Therapeutic Interventions comprehensively reviews current concepts in molecular and histopathological mechanisms that influence the growth of human malignant neuroblastoma, along with exciting therapeutic interventions. This book features a broad collection of contributions from leading investigators in histopathology, molecular mechanisms, genetics, epigenetics, microRNAs, proteomics, and metabolism in controlling growth and death in neuroblastoma. Recent developments in therapeutic interventions for neuroblastoma are also covered extensively, including chapters on surgery, chemotherapy, targeted therapy and immunotherapy. This book is ideal for advanced undergraduate students, graduate students, medical students, postdoctoral fellows, and investigators with an interest in current molecular concepts and therapeutic interventions"--Publisher's description.

    Contents:
    Neuroblastoma pathology and classification
    Role of genetic and epigenetic alterations in pathogenesis of neuroblastoma
    Neuroblastoma molecular biology and promising therapeutic targets
    The GD2-targeted immunotherapy of neuroblastoma
    Targeting angiogenesis in neuroblastoma
    Autophagy and novel therapeutic strategies in neuroblastoma
    Energy metabolism and new therapeutic opportunities in neuroblastoma
    Multimodality imaging for diagnosis of neuroblastoma
    Immunotherapy for neuroblastoma
    Advances in surgical treatment of neuroblastoma
    Role of stemness factors in neuroblastoma: Neuroblastoma stem cells, tumor microenvironment, and chemoresistance
    Current pharmacotherapy for neuroblastoma
    Current challenges in the management of neuroblastoma
    Novel therapeutic targets in neuroblastoma
    Current and future strategies for treatment of relapsed neuroblastoma
    Current evidence in favor of a tumor suppressor role of Krüppel-like factor 4 in malignant neuroblastoma
    Modulation of expression of microRNA as a therapeutic strategy in malignant neuroblastoma.
    Digital Access ClinicalKey 2019
  • Digital
    Mehmet Turgut, Fuad Sami Haddad, Oreste de Divitiis, editors.
    Contents:
    Introduction: Historical preview
    Human brucellosis and its complications. Cranial and intracranial brucellosis: Scalp and cranium
    Epi- and sub-dural brucellar empyema
    Brucella meningitis
    Brucella encephalitis
    Brucella abscess and granuloma of the brain
    Cerebro-vascular involvement in neurobrucellossis and mycotic aneurysms
    Brucella psychosis
    Radiological appearance of brucellosis of the brain and its coverings. Spinal brucellosis: Brucellar spondylitis as a complication of brucellosis
    Clinical presentation of vertebral brucellosis
    Imaging of vertebral brucellosis
    Epi- and sub-dural spinal brucellosis
    Intra medullary brucellosis. Peripheral and Cranial nerves: Brucella Polyradiculoneuritis
    Cranial nerve involvement in Brucellosis
    Laboratory studies in neuro-brucellosis
    Standard and new procedures. Therapy of neuro-brucellosis: Medical therapy
    Surgical therapy
    Conclusions.
    Digital Access Springer 2016
  • Digital
    Akhlaq A. Farooqui.
    Summary: Neurochemical Aspects of Alzheimer's Disease provides a comprehensive overview of molecular aspects of risk factors, pathogenesis, biomarkers, and therapeutic strategies. The book focuses on molecular mechanisms and signal transduction processes associated with the pathogenesis, biomarkers, and therapeutic strategies of AD. The comprehensive and cutting edge information in this monograph may not only help in early detection of AD, but also promote discovery of new drugs to treat this chronic disease. Chapters discuss involvement of neural membrane phospholipids, sphingolipids, and cholesterol-derived lipid mediators, abnormal APP processing, and nucleic acid damage, risk factors, biomarker, and therapeutic strategies of Alzheimer's disease. This book is written for neurologists, neuroscientists, neurochemists, neuropharmacologists, and clinicianswho are interested in molecular mechanisms associated with the pathogenesis of age-related neurological disorders.
    Digital Access ScienceDirect 2017
  • Digital
    Pradeep C. Bollu, editor.
    Summary: This book offers a comprehensive overview of the most important neurochemicals and approaches everything from the neurochemicals perspective. It attempts to integrate the biochemical pathways of synthesis and metabolism of these neurochemicals with the disease states and point out the avenues of diagnostic testing and therapeutic intervention. Each chapter focuses on a specific neurochemical and provides a brief history, the biochemical profile, metabolism, physiological functions, and the clinical aspects. The clinical part of each chapter includes a discussion on disease states with either increased or reduced activity of the neurochemical and either activation or inhibition of the relevant receptors. This book is targeted toward practitioners and students of neuroscience and is written to emphasize the importance of these neurochemicals in the brain. With this emphasis on background neurochemical processes, the readers will be pointed towards logical diagnostic studies, laboratory investigations, and therapies based on the neurochemical dysfunction that underlies various disease states.

    Contents:
    Intro
    Preface
    Acknowledgments
    Contents
    Contributors
    Chapter 1: Dopamine
    Introduction
    Physiology and Functions
    Metabolism: Synthesis and Degradation
    Dopamine Receptors
    Dopaminergic Pathways
    Dopamine, Parkinsonism, and DAT Scan
    Dopamine and Psychiatric Disease
    Tardive Dyskinesia
    Dopamine and Punding
    Dopamine and Restless Leg Syndrome
    Dopamine, Sleep, and Wakefulness
    Dopamine and Hypothalamus
    Drugs Associated with Dopamine
    Dopamine Precursor
    Levodopa
    Dopamine Agonists
    Vesicular Monoamine Transporter (VMAT) Depletors
    References Chapter 2: Serotonin
    History of Serotonin
    Neurochemical Profile
    Serotonin in the Brain
    Serotonin in the Periphery
    Raphe Nuclear System
    Serotonin Receptors --Serotonin Metabolism
    Chemical Structure and Biosynthesis
    Serotonin Metabolism
    Medications Acting on Serotonin System
    Other Clinical Aspects
    Serotonin in Migraine
    Serotonin Effects on Heart
    Serotonin in Psychosis
    Serotonin Modulation in Obesity (Lorcaserin)
    Serotonin in Nausea/Vomiting
    Serotonin in Gut Motility
    Serotonin Syndrome
    Serotonin in RLS
    References
    Chapter 3: Adenosine Introduction
    Metabolism
    Receptors
    Alzheimer's Disease and Autism
    Sleep and Restless Leg Syndrome
    Psychiatric Conditions
    Epilepsy
    Ischemia
    Parkinson's Disease
    Huntington's Disease
    Multiple Sclerosis
    Adenosine Agonists
    Adenosine Antagonist: Caffeine
    References
    Chapter 4: GABA
    History of GABA
    Neurochemical Profile of GABA
    GABA in Sleep
    GABA in Neuronal Inhibition
    GABA Receptors
    GABAA Receptor
    GABAB Receptor
    GABA Metabolism
    Medications Acting on the GABAergic System
    Benzodiazepines
    Barbiturates
    Sodium Oxybate
    Baclofen Other Clinical Aspects
    Antibody-Mediated Attack on GABA
    GABA Antagonism and Improvement in Alertness: Role of Flumazenil in Hypersomnia
    GABA in Restless Leg Syndrome (RLS)
    References
    Chapter 5: Glutamate
    History
    Neurochemical Profile
    Glutamate and Neural Plasticity
    Glutamate in Neurotoxicity
    Receptors
    Ionotropic Glutamate Receptors
    NMDA Receptors
    Non-NMDA Receptors
    Metabotropic Glutamate Receptors
    Metabolism
    Glutamate Transporters
    The Glutamate-Glutamine Cycle
    GABA
    Medications
    Ketamine
    Memantine
    Riluzole
    Topiramate
    Felbamate Pregabalin
    Lamotrigine
    Perampanel
    Clinical Aspects
    Role of Glutamate in Epilepsy
    Role of Glutamate in Autoimmune Encephalitis
    Role of Glutamate in Stroke
    Role of Glutamate as a Dietary Toxin
    Role of Glutamate in Neurodegeneration
    References
    Chapter 6: Glycine
    Introduction
    History
    Receptors
    The Glycine Receptor
    The N-Methyl-D-Aspartic Acid Glutamate Receptor
    The Glycine Transporters Type 1 and 2 Receptors
    Neurochemical Profile
    Neurotransmitter
    Potentiating Action at the NMDA Receptors
    The Role of Glycine Transporters
    Metabolism
    Digital Access Springer 2022
  • Digital
    editors: Maureen Nash and Sarah Foidel.
    Summary: Dementia, now known as major neurocognitive disorder, is not one monolithic disease. Nor is behavior disturbance driven by one particular neurocognitive dysfunction. In fact if we are able to understand it, behavior is an excellent form of nonverbal communication. There are many different causes of dementia. A major challenge with both researching and implementing interventions is viewing dementia and related behaviors as single entities. This approach leaves room for critical errors in the treatment of dementia patients, beginning with misdiagnosis. This book approaches dementia by reviewing cognitive and functional assessments to provide a more accurate diagnosis, which then allows physicians to design specific interventions that are tailored to the person and their challenges. Because person centered care is vital to quality of life and longevity to an aging patient, this understanding of individual needs is vital. Written by experts in the field, this book incorporates the latest evidence-based behavioral interventions matched to specific deficits. Behavioral management focuses not on controlling behavior, but using it to teach staff and caregivers how to interpret common actions and maximize function for people with major neurocognitive disorders. Quality of life and individualized care planning will be the theme and the book will provide practical case examples. The book begins by introducing dementia and other neurocognitive illnesses, contextualizing them both historically and contemporarily.  Next, the text focuses on the comprehensive assessment of a person with neurocognitive challenges in order to identify strengths and understand what the person is trying to communicate with their behavior.  This process allows individualized care planning and behavioral (non-pharmacologic) management to meet the cognitive challenges and maximize individual strengths and thereby improve outcomes, making this a cutting edge resource.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    edited by Anne Gallagher, Christine Bulteau, David Cohen, Jacques L. Michaud.
    Contents:
    Section I. Specific Neurodevelopmental Disorders : 1. Developmental coordination disorder
    2. Language disorders
    3. Attention deficit hyperactivity disorder
    4. Developmental dyslexia: a new look at clinical features and brain mechanisms
    5. Learning disabilities: developmental dyscalculia
    6. Borderline intellectual functioning
    7. Nonverbal dysfunction syndrome
    8. Memory dysfunctions ; Section II. Complex Neurodevelopmental Disorders : 9. Intellectual disability
    10. Autism spectrum disorder
    11. Epilepsy
    12. Multidimensional impairments ; Section III. Assessment of Neurodevelopment: Methods and Tools : 13. Interdisciplinary assessment
    14. Sensory assessment: neurophysiology in neonates and neurodevelopmental outcome
    15. Neurologic assessment
    16. Psychiatric assessment
    17. Neuropsychological assessment
    18. Structural neuroimaging
    19. Functional magnetic resonance imaging
    20. Clinical neurophysiology: research methods and event-related potential components as assessment tools
    21. New technologies and future trends ; Section IV. Patient Care, Rehabilitation and Long-Term Outcomes : 22. Multidisciplinary treatment plan for challenging behaviors in neurodevelopmental disorders
    23. The therapeutic alliance between the child, parents and health professionals
    24. Principles of early intervention
    25. Cross-modal plasticity and central deficiencies: the case of deafness and the use of cochlear implants
    26. Cognitive remediation for neurodevelopmental disabilities
    27. Education for students with neurodevelopmental disabilities
    resources and educational adjustments
    28. Quality of life of children and families.
    Digital Access ScienceDirect 2020
  • Digital
    edited by Anne Gallagher, Christine Bulteau, David Cohen, Jacques L. Michaud.
    Contents:
    Section I: Introduction to neurodevelopmental disabilities
    Section II: Biological basis of typical neurodevelopment
    Section III: Plasticity, vulnerability and evolutionary constraints of the developing brain
    Section IV: Neuroscientific basis of typical functional neurodevelopment.
    Digital Access ScienceDirect 2020
  • Digital
    edited by Thomas A. Field, Laura K. Jones, Lori A. Russell-Chapin.
    Contents:
    Preface
    About the editors
    About the contributors
    Foundations of case conceptualization
    Anatomy and brain development / Laura K. Jones
    Neurophysiological development across the life span / Laura K. Jones
    The biology of marginality : a neurophysiological exploration of the social and cultural foundations of psychological health / Kathryn Z. Douthit and Justin Russotti
    The neurophysiology of traumatic stress / Laura K. Jones, Christopher Rybak, and Lori A. Russell-Chapin
    Counseling relationships and assessments
    The neuroscience of attention : empathy and counseling skills / Allen E. Ivey, Thomas Daniels, Carlos P. Zalaquett, and Mary Bradford Ivey
    Neuroscience-informed counseling theory / SeriaShia Chatters, Carlos P. Zalaquett, and Allen Ivey
    Neurocounseling assessment / Lori A. Russell-Chapin
    Wellness and optimal performance / Theodore J. Chapin
    Neuroadaptation and addiction
    Clinical neuroscience of substance use disorders / Sean B. Hall and Kiera D. Walker
    Psychopharmacology basics / Nancy Sherman
    Emerging neuroscience-informed modalities
    Neuro-informed group work / Chad Luke and Joel F. Diambra
    Neuro-informed career-focused counseling / Chad Luke and Thomas A. Field
    Summary
    Conducting brain-based research and program evaluation / Eric T. Beeson and Thomas A. Field
    Ten practical guidelines for neurocounseling / Lori A. Russell-Chapin, Thomas A. Field, and Laura K. Jones
    Appendix: explanation of quiz answers
    Glossary.
    Digital Access Wiley 2017
  • Digital
    edited by Michel T. Torbey.
    Summary: A significant number of critically ill neurological and neurosurgical patients are still managed in the medical or surgical ICU by non-neurointensivists, who have a hard time appreciating the delicate needs of these patients. This dynamic guide reviews current topics facing neurocritical care providers in a straight-forward, structured, and practical way. Providing clear summaries in the management of neuro critical care conditions, this text allows for accessible, highly structured, and focused protocols for the assessment, day-to-day management, and treatment of critically ill patients in various ICU settings. This comprehensive, thorough guide to the management and treatment of neurologic and neurosurgical patients, is an excellent companion for trainees preparing for the Neurovascular Boards, Neurologists, Neurosurgeons and critical care physicians, alike. Designed by leaders in their field, this thorough guide presents practical, state-of-the-art suggestions for physicians, worldwide.
    Digital Access Cambridge 2019
  • Digital
    Eberval Gadelha Figueiredo, Leonardo C. Welling, Nícollas Nunes Rabelo, editors.
    Springer Nature eBook.
    Summary: This unique book discusses the management of neurocritical care patients, including basic concepts, pathophysiologic principles, monitoring, treatment indications, and factors that affect outcomes in patients requiring neurocritical care assistance. It addresses the need to improve continuing education in this area, highlighting patient care in the perioperative period. This is the first book to provide a simplified overview for neurosurgeons and neurologists to understand the neurocritical patient journey. It is divided into three parts: the first covers the basics concepts, from monitoring to the interpretation of exams; the second explores general management of specific situations encountered in intensive care and the last part includes prognostic and rehabilitation models, as well as new perspectives. Thanks to the accessible, neurosurgical specific language, the book is well suited for all professionals involved in neurocritical care, including students, but is also a valuable resource for residents and researches, as well as experienced neurosurgeons or neurologists looking for updated information and guidelines.

    Contents:
    Intro
    Foreword
    Acknowledgments
    Contents
    About the Editors
    Contributors
    Chapter 1: Neurocritical Care: An Overview
    1.1 History and Evolution of Intensive Care Units
    1.2 Neurocritical Care Specialty
    1.3 ICU Organizational Structure and Staffing
    1.4 Quality Improvement and Neurocritical Care
    1.5 Patient/Family Satisfaction
    1.6 Effective Communication and Handoffs
    1.7 Neurocritical Care and Emergency Neurology as an Emerging Subspecialty
    1.8 Conclusion
    References
    Part I: The Basics and Monitoring
    Chapter 2: Metabolism and Cerebral Blood Flow 2.1 Cerebral Autoregulation
    2.2 Blood-Brain Barrier
    2.3 Summary
    References
    Chapter 3: Brain Edema: Pathophysiology, Diagnosis, and Treatment
    3.1 History
    3.1.1 1700s: Formation of the Monro-Kellie Doctrine
    3.1.2 1800s: Discovery of CSF Dynamics and the Blood-Brain Barrier
    3.1.3 1900s: Basic Pathophysiology and Treatments Are Discovered
    3.1.4 2000s: Molecular Mechanisms Are Investigated
    3.2 Clinical Condition
    3.2.1 Basic Principles
    3.2.2 Peritumoral Edema
    3.2.3 Perihematomal Edema
    3.2.4 Cerebral Edema and Swelling
    3.3 Physical Examination/Imaging 3.3.1 Ocular Findings
    3.3.2 Herniation Syndromes
    3.3.3 ICP Monitoring
    3.3.4 Imaging
    3.4 Differential Diagnosis
    3.5 Treatment Options
    3.5.1 Medical Optimization and Patient Positioning
    3.5.2 Hyperventilation and Hyperosmolar Therapy
    3.5.3 Decompressive Craniectomy
    3.5.4 Experimental Therapies
    3.6 Complications
    References
    Chapter 4: Intracranial Pressure: Invasive Methods of Monitoring
    4.1 Historical Overview and Basic Concepts
    4.1.1 Lundberg's Waves
    4.1.2 The Monro-Kellie Doctrine
    4.2 Eligibility Criteria for Invasive Monitoring 4.3 Definitions in Intracranial Dynamics and Monitoring Methods
    4.3.1 Definitions
    4.3.1.1 Intracranial Pressure (ICP)
    4.3.1.2 Cerebral Perfusion Pressure (CPP)
    4.3.1.3 Cerebral Blood Flow (CBF)
    4.3.2 ICP Monitoring Methods
    4.4 Interpretation of ICP Monitoring
    4.5 Complications
    References
    Chapter 5: Noninvasive Intracranial Pressure Monitoring
    5.1 Introduction
    5.2 Imaging Methods for Estimating Intracranial Hypertension
    5.2.1 Computed Tomography
    5.2.2 Magnetic Resonance Images
    5.2.3 Optic Nerve Sheath Diameter (with US) 5.2.4 Optic Nerve Sheath Diameter (with CT Scan)
    5.2.5 Optic Nerve Sheath Diameter (with MRI)
    5.3 Indirect Pressure Transmission
    5.3.1 Fundoscopy
    5.3.2 Tympanometry
    5.3.3 Skull Deformity
    5.4 Cerebral Blood Flow Methods for Estimating Intracranial Hypertension
    5.4.1 Transcranial Doppler
    5.5 Metabolic Alterations
    5.5.1 Near-Infrared Spectroscopy-NIRS
    5.6 Conclusion
    References
    Chapter 6: Brain Tissue Oxygen Monitoring
    6.1 Introduction
    6.2 Secondary Brain Injury Classification
    6.3 Neurological Monitoring
    6.4 Regional Brain Oximetry-PtiO2
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    Michael DeGeorgia, Kenneth Loparo, editors.
    Summary: Health care in the twenty-first century requires intensive use of technology in order to acquire and analyze data and manage and disseminate information. No area is more data intensive than the neurointensive care unit. Despite the massive amount of data, however, providers often lack interpretable and actionable information. This book reviews the concepts underlying the emerging field of neurocritical care informatics, with a focus on integrated data acquisition, linear and nonlinear processing, and innovative visualization in the ICU. Subjects addressed in individual chapters are thus wide ranging, encompassing, for example, multimodal and continuous EEG monitoring and data integration, display of data in the ICU, patient-centered clinical decision support, optimization of collaboration and workflow, and progress towards an "integrated medical environment". All of the thirteen chapters have been written by international thought leaders in the field.

    Contents:
    Computers in the ICU
    Data Standards, Device Interfaces, and Interoperability
    The Electronic Medical Record
    Physiologic Data
    Multi-Modal Monitoring
    Continuous EEG Monitoring
    Data Analysis and Processing
    The "Patient State" in Critical Care
    Data Visualization
    Clinical Decision Support
    Collaboration and Workflow
    The Integrated Medical Environment
    Final Thoughts.
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    Monisha Kumar, Joshua Levine, James Schuster, W. Andrew Kofke.
    Digital Access ScienceDirect 2017
  • Digital
    Christos P. Panteliadis, Ramsis Benjamin, Christian Hagel, editors.
    Summary: This book provides extensive data on the more common and many of the more rare congenital and hereditary syndromes that manifest in the nervous system and skin. Though often complex and multi-systemic, these disorders can frequently be diagnosed using a combination of simple visual inspection and sound clinical expertise. Drawing on fully referenced information from thousands of articles, the international editorial team has prepared a comprehensive overview that includes historical perspectives, clinical features, the pathogenesis, and diagnostic and therapeutic strategies. In addition, it addresses the biochemical, molecular, and genetic basis of the disorders. The book is divided into four main sections. Starting with general aspects of aetiology, diagnostics and therapy, the first part then covers the genetics, neuro-imaging, neuropathology, ocular manifestations and surgical management. The second part discusses developmental malformations, such as Sturge-Weber syndrome, Ataxia-Telangiectasia, Hypomelanosis of Ito and other rare syndromes, including haemangiomas. The focus of the third part is on tumour suppressor/DNA repair disorders, the most common of which is Neurofibromatosis 1. It also describes Neurofibromatosis 2, Schwannomatosis, Tuberous sclerosis, von Hippel-Lindau disease, Naevoid basal cell carcinoma and others. The books fourth and final section covers defects in enzymes and structural proteins, which manifest as Cerebrotendinous xanthromatosis, Ehlers-Danlos syndrome, Menkes syndrome, Refsum disease.

    Contents:
    Preface
    Introduction
    Part I: Aetiology and diagnostics of neurocutaneous disorders
    1. Genetics of neurocutaneous syndromes
    2. Superimposed mosaicism in neurocutaneous disorders
    3. Neuro-Imaging in Neurocutaneous Disorders
    4. Neuropathology of neurocutaneous disorders
    Part II: Developmental malformations
    5. Sturge-Weber syndrome
    6. Ataxia-Telangiectasia (Louis-Bar syndrome)
    7. Hypomelanosis of Ito (Incontinentia pigmenti achromians)
    8. Incontinentia pigmenti (Bloch-Sulzberger syndrome)
    9. Klippel-Trenaunay syndrome (Klippel-Trenaunay-Weber syndrome)
    10. Epidermal naevus syndrome and Linear naevus sebaceous syndrome
    11. Neurocutaneous melanosis
    12. Hereditary haemorrhagic telangiectasia (Osler-Weber-Rendu syndrome
    13. Cowden disease and Lhermitte-Duclos disease
    14. Cutaneomeningospinal angiomatosis (Cobb syndrome)
    15. Cutis marmorata telangiectatica congenita (Van Lohuizen's syndrome)
    16. Encephalocraniocutaneous lipomatosis (Haberland syndrome)
    17. LEOPARD syndrome (multiple lentigines; Lentiginosis profusa)
    18. MIDAS syndrome (Microphthalmia with linear skin defects)
    19. Oculocerebrocutaneous syndrome (Delleman syndrome)
    20. Oro-facio-digital syndrome
    21. PHACE syndrome
    22. Proteus syndrome
    23. Wyburn-Manson syndrome
    24. Cerebello-trigemino-dermal (Gomez-Lopez-Hernandez syndrome)
    25. Vascular tumours (haemangiomas)
    Part III: Tumour suppressor/DNA-repair disorders
    26
    Neurofibromatosis 1 and 2
    27. Tuberous sclerosis (Bourneville disease)
    28. Angiomatosis of the Retina and the Cerebellum (von Hippel-Lindau disease)
    29. Naevoid basal cell carcinoma (GORLIN-GOLTZ syndrome)
    30. Cockayne syndrome
    31. Xeroderma pigmentosum (Kaposi dermatosis)
    Part IV: Defects of enzymes and structural proteins
    32. Cerebrotendinous xanthromatosis
    33. Chediak-Higashi syndrome
    34. CHILD syndrome
    35. Dorfman Chanarin syndrome
    36. Ehlers-Danlos syndrome
    37. Ichthyoses Trichothiodystrophy TAY syndrome
    38. Rud syndrome
    39. HID/KID syndrome
    40. Hutchinson-Gilford progeria syndrome
    41. Lipoid Proteinosis (Urbach-Wiethe syndrome)
    42. McCune-Albright disease
    43. Menkes syndrome (Kinky hair disease; Tricholiodystrophy
    44. Refsum disease (Heredopathis atactica polyneuritiformis
    45. Sjogren-Larsson syndrome
    46. Fabry disease
    Part V: Specific aspects in the management of neurocutaneous disorders
    47. Ocular manifestations of neurocutaneous syndromes
    48. Neurosurgical management of neurocutaneous disorders
    49. Neurosurgery in infant's with TBC
    50. Managing Epilepsy in Neurocutaneous Disorders
    51. Orthopedic problems and therapy in neurocutaneous disorders
    52. Improving quality of life in neurocutaneous disorders.
    Digital Access Springer 2022
  • Digital
    edited by Monica P. Islam and E. Steve Roach.
    Contents:
    Chapter 1. Genetics of neurocutaneous disorders, basic principles of inheritance as they apply to neurocutaneous syndromes
    Chapter 2. Phenotype/genotype correlations in epidermal nervous syndrome as a neurocristopathy
    Chapter 3. Acquired neurocutaneous disorders
    Chapter 4. Neurofibromatosis type 1
    Chapter 5. Neurofibromatosis type 2
    Chapter 6. Tuberous sclerosis complex
    Chapter 7. Neurocutaneous melanosis
    Chapter 8. Basal cell nevus syndrome or Gorlin syndrome
    Chapter 9. PTEN hamartoma tumor syndrome
    Chapter 10. Von Hippel-Lindau disease
    Chapter 11. Sturge-Weber syndrome
    Chapter 12. PHACE(S) syndrome
    Chapter 13. Hereditary hemorrhagic telangiectasia
    Chapter 14. Ataxia telangiectasia
    Chapter 15. Pseudoxanthoma elasticum
    Chapter 16. Blue bleb rubber nevus syndrome
    Chapter 17. Fabry disease
    Chapter 18. Hutchinson-Gilford progeria syndrome
    Chapter 19. Encephalocraniocutaneous lipomatosis
    Chapter 20. Incontinentia pigmenti (Bloch-Sulzberger syndrome)
    Chapter 21. Hypomelanosis of Ito
    Chapter 22. Epidermal nevus syndromes
    Chapter 23. Lipid proteinosis
    Index.
    Digital Access ScienceDirect 2015
  • Digital
    edited by Anthony Schapira, Zbigniew Wszolek, Ted Dawson, Nicholas Wood.
    Summary: This book unites the diverse range of complex neurodegenerative diseases into a textbook designed for clinical practice, edited by globally leading authorities on the subject.-Presents a clinically oriented guide to the diseases caused by neurodegeneration -Templated chapters combine clinical and research information on neurodegenerative diseases beginning with the common elements before treating each disease individually -Diseases are grouped by anatomical regions of degeneration and include common disorders such as Parkinson's Disease, Alzheimer's Disease, Amyotrophic Lateral Sclerosis/Motor Neuron Disease, and Multiple Sclerosis as well as less common diseases -Edited by globally leading authorities on the subject, and written by expert contributing authors.

    Contents:
    Pathology of brain aging / Janna H. Neltner and Peter T. Nelson
    Protein aggregation and neurodegeneration : tauopathies and synucleinopathies / Michel Goedert
    Prion degeneration / James A. Mastrianni
    Excitotoxicity / Mark P. Mattson
    Aetiology and pathogenesis of Parkinson disease / Ruth-Mary deSouza and Anthony H.V. Schapira
    Parkinson's disease: treatment options? surgical therapy / Travis S. Tierney and Andres M. Lozano
    Multiple system atrophy (MSA): clinical, genetics and neuropathology / Lucia V. Schottlaender [and 5 others]
    Progressive supranuclear palsy / Huw R. Morris
    Dementia with lewy bodies / Rodolfo Savica and David S. Knopman
    Corticobasal degeneration / Keith A. Josephs
    Alzheimer's disease / Qurat ul Ain Khan and Neill R. Graff-Radford
    Frontotemporal dementia / Christian Wider, Barbara Jasinska-Myga and Zbigniew K. Wszolek
    Prion diseases and other rapidly progressive dementias / Eric Eggenberger and Daniel L. Murman
    ALS and PLS / Kevin B. Boylan, Mark A. Ross and Eric J. Sorenson
    Hereditary spastic paraplegia / Pawel P. Liberski and Craig Blackstone
    Spinal muscular atrophy / Joseph R. Wooley, Melissa E. Crowder, Noah J. Pyles and Charlotte J. Sumner
    Spinal and bulbar muscular atrophy (Kennedy disease) / Erich Peter Bosch
    Optic neuropathies / Desmond Kidd
    Peripheral nerve neuropathies including CMT disease / Amelie Pandraud and Henry Houlden
    Axonal loss and neurodegeneration in multiple sclerosis / Ranjan Dutta, Jacqueline Chen, Nobuhiko Ohno, Daniel Ontaneda and Bruce D. Trapp
    Neurodegeneration : Huntington's disease and other choreas / Salman Haider, Edward Wild and Sarah J. Tabrizi
    Spinocerebellar ataxias / H. Brent Clark and Harry T. Orr
    Ataxia telangiectasia / Malcolm Taylor
    Niemann-Pick disease / Marc C. Patterson
    X-linked adrenoleukodystrophy / Deborah L. Renaud
    Neurodegeneration with brain iron accumulation, Wilson disease, manganism / Alisdair McNeill.
    Digital Access Wiley 2017
  • Digital
    Daniela Galimberti, Elio Scarpini, editors.
    Summary: This book gives an overview of the current knowledge on the most common neurodegenerative diseases, including Alzheimer's disease, frontotemporal lobar degeneration, amyotrophic lateral sclerosis, and additional neurodegenerative diseases. Different aspects of each disease are reviewed, including clinical issues, treatments, basic discoveries (genetics and molecular biology), and translation of basic research into biomarkers for early diagnosis. In addition, emerging data indicate that neurodegeneration seems to also be present in classically non-degenerative disorders. Therefore, a chapter about overlapping mechanisms between dementias and psychiatric disorders is included, as well as a description of the role of neurodegeneration in multiple sclerosis. Neurodegenerative Diseases is aimed at clinicians, particularly those working in academic hospitals. This multidisciplinary book will also be of interest to basic researchers in medical fields.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    Daniela Galimberti, Elio Scarpini, editors.
    Summary: This book gives an overview of the current knowledge on the most common neurodegenerative diseases, including Alzheimer's disease, frontotemporal lobar degeneration, Lewy body dementia, Parkinson's disease, amyotrophic lateral sclerosis, and additional less common neurodegenerative diseases. Both clinical and basic aspects of each disease are treated, including novel diagnostic criteria, old and new treatments, basic discoveries (genetics, epigenetics and molecular biology), and translation of basic research into biomarkers for early diagnosis, particularly to identify peripheral biomarkers. In addition, emerging data indicate that neurodegeneration seems to also be present in classically non-degenerative disorders. Therefore, a chapter about overlapping mechanisms between dementias and psychiatric disorders is included, as well as a description of the role of neurodegeneration in multiple sclerosis. Neurodegenerative Diseases is aimed at clinicians, particularly those working in academic hospitals. This multidisciplinary book will also be of interest to basic researchers in medical fields.

    Contents:
    Chapter 1. Genetics and epigenetics in the neurodegenerative disorders of the central nervous system
    Chapter 2. Diagnosis of Alzheimer's disease typical and atypical forms
    Chapter 3. Genetic complexity of early-onset Alzheimer's disease
    Chapter 4. Genetic risk factors for complex forms of Alzheimer's disease
    Chapter 5. Role of cerebrovascular disease in cognition
    Chapter 6. Risk factors and prevention in Alzheimer's disease and dementia
    Chapter 7. Diagnosis of frontotemporal dementia
    Chapter 8. Autosomal dominant frontotemporal lobar degeneration: from genotype to phenotype
    Chapter 9. Genetic risk factors for sporadic frontotemporal dementia
    Chapter 10. Alzheimer's disease and frontotemporal lobar degeneration: mouse models
    Chapter 11. Fluid biomarkers in Alzheimer's disease and frontotemporal dementia
    Chapter 12. Biomarkers for Alzheimer's disease and frontotemporal lobar degeneration: imaging
    Chapter 13. Genotypic and phenotypic heterogeneity in Amyotrophic lateral sclerosis
    Chapter 14. Lewy body dementia
    Chapter 15. Rare dementias
    Chapter 16. Neurodevelopmental and neurodegenerative alterations in the pathophysiology of schizophrenia: focus on neuro-immuno-inflammation
    Chapter 17. Parkinson's disease: contemporary concepts and clinical management
    Chapter 18. Neurodegeneration and multiple sclerosis.
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Digital
    edited by Jeffrey L. Cummings, Jagan Pillai.
    Contents:
    Neurodegenerative diseases : evolving unifying principles / Jeffrey Cummings and Jagan Pillai
    Neurodegenerative diseases as protein misfolding disorders / Tomohiro Nakamura and Stuart A. Lipton
    Calcium hypothesis on neurodegeneration : the case of AD and HD / Daniel A. Ryskamp, Elena Popugaeva, and Ilya Bezprozvanny
    Inflammation in neurodegenerative diseases / Bruce Lamb
    Prion paradigm of human neurodegenerative diseases caused by protein misfolding / Jiri Safar
    Neuropsychiatric features across neurodegenerative diseases / Claudia R. Padilla, Mario F. Mendez
    Brain circuits : pathway for NDD / William Seeley
    Fluid biomarkers indicative of neurodegenerative diseases / Henrik Zetterberg and Jonathan M. Schott
    Predementia disorders : neurodegenerative diseases predecessor states as unifying clinical features / Jagan Pillai
    Genetics of neurodegenerative diseases : sporadic and autosomal dominant forms / Lars Bertram and Max Planck
    An epigenetics perspective on diseases of the central nervous system / Diego Mastroeni
    Mitochondrial changes and bioenergetics in neurodegenerative diseases / Andrew B. Knot and Ella Bossy-Wetzel
    Systems biology in neurodegenerative diseases / Lawrence Rajendran
    Cell culture and iPS cells and neurodegenerative diseases / Roxana Nat
    Animal models of neurodegenerative diseases / David Baglietto-Vargas, Ager RR, Medeiros R, and Frank M. LaFerla
    Metal-protein attenuating compounds in neurodegenerative diseases / Peng Lei, Scott Ayton, and Ashley I. Bush
    Disease modifying therapies in neurodegenerative disorders / Janelle Drouin-Ouellet and Roger A. Barker
    Immunotherapy for neurodegenerative disorders / David Morgan
    Clinical trials and drug development in neurodegenerative diseases : unifying principles / Jeffrey Cummings and Kate Zhong
    Conclusions on neurodegenerative disorders : unifying principles / Jagan Pillai and Jeffrey Cummings.
    Digital Access Oxford 2017
  • Digital
    Orla Hardiman, Colin P. Doherty (editors) ; Marwa Elamin, Peter Bede, associate editors.
    Contents:
    Common Themes in the Pathogenesis of Neurodegeneration
    Imaging Biomarkers in Neurodegenerative Conditions
    The Role of Neuropsychology Assessment in Neurodegeneration
    Alzheimer's Disease
    Dementia and Cerebrovascular Disease
    Parkinson's Disease
    Fronto-Temporal Dementia (FTD)
    Amyotrophic Lateral Sclerosis
    Huntington's disease
    Parkinson's Plus Syndromes
    Medical Mimics of Neurodegenerative Diseases
    Prion Diseases
    Managing Neuropsychiatric Symptoms of Neurodegenerative Diseases
    HIV and Other Infectious Causes of Dementia
    Neuroinflammatory Disorders
    Clinical Trials in Neurodegeneration
    Palliative Care and End of Life Care.
    Digital Access Springer 2016
  • Digital
    Emanuel DiCicco-Bloom, James H. Millonig, editors.
    Summary: This book contains a compendium of induced pluripotent stem cells (iPSCs) articles and reviews concerning state of the art technologies and how they are being applied to human neurodevelopmental disorders. With the establishment of effective technologies to produce iPSCs and their derivatives, like neural precursors, neurons, and glia, researchers have new platforms to study neurodevelopmental disorders. iPSC technology enables researchers to study how human neurons develop in individuals with neurodevelopmental disorders, providing an unparalleled opportunity to investigate their etiology. In turn, researchers have now begun to understand the underlying molecular and cellular pathways that contribute to human diseases. iPSCs technologies also provide an emerging tool for future translational studies and disease classification. The chapters will emphasize how among the diverse idiopathic and genetic disorders, there are common clinical as well as cellular and molecular phenotypes.

    Contents:
    Intro
    Contents
    About the Editors
    Modeling Neurodevelopmental Deficits in Tuberous Sclerosis Complex with Stem Cell Derived Neural Precursors and Neurons
    1 Background of Tuberous Sclerosis Complex
    1.1 Neurology of TSC
    1.2 mTORC1 and mTORC2
    2 Neural Stem Cell Development in TSC
    2.1 TSC2 Deficiency in hESCs and hiPSCs
    2.2 Effects of mTORC1 Pathway Activation in Human Neural Stem Cell Proliferation
    2.3 Differentiation Capacity and Morphological Development of TSC-Deficient Stem Cell Derived NPCs
    2.4 Abnormal Purkinje Cell Differentiation of TSC2-Deficient hiPSCs 3 Gliosis and Myelination in TSC
    3.1 Astrocyte Differentiation from TSC-Deficient Neural Precursor Cells
    3.2 Development of Oligodendrocytes and Myelination Deficits in TSC
    4 Cellular Homeostasis and Viability in TSC
    4.1 Mitochondrial Dysfunction in TSC
    4.2 Autophagy in TSC
    5 Autism and Epilepsy in TSC
    5.1 MTOR-Pathway in Autism and Epilepsy
    5.2 Tsc-Deficient Rodent Models of Epilepsy and Autism
    5.3 Genes Associated with Neural Differentiation and Synaptic Development in TSC2-Deficient Human Neurons 3.1 Unique Features of Human Genetics and Neural Development Require Human FXS Models
    3.2 Human Pluripotent Stem Cells as a Platform to Understand the Pathogenesis of FXS
    3.3 Human PSCs for Understanding FMR1 Silencing in FXS
    4 Human PSCS for Targeting FMR1 Gene Reactivation for Treating FXS
    4.1 Rationale for FMR1 Gene Restoration as a Potential Therapy
    4.2 FMR1 Gene Restoration Strategies by Targeting Known Pathways
    4.3 Search for Novel FMR1 Gene Restoration Strategies Using High-Throughput Screening of Chemicals
    4.4 FMR1 Gene Reactivation by Genetic Targeting of CGG Repeats 5 Summary: Challenges and Perspectives
    References
    IPSC Models of Chromosome 15Q Imprinting Disorders: From Disease Modeling to Therapeutic Strategies
    1 Prader-Willi Syndrome
    2 Angelman Syndrome
    3 15q11-q13 Duplication
    4 Special Considerations for Disease Models of Imprinting Disorders
    5 Physiological and Morphological Phenotypes
    5.1 Cellular Phenotypes in Angelman Syndrome-Derived Neurons
    5.2 Cellular Phenotypes in Dup15q Syndrome-Derived Neurons
    5.3 Cellular Phenotypes in Prader-Willi Syndrome-Derived Neurons 5.4 Synaptic Function and Excitability of TSC2-Deficient Human Neurons
    6 Future Prospects
    6.1 Pharmacological Treatment of Neurological Deficits in TSC
    6.2 Drug Screening Assays in TSC2-Deficient Human Neurons
    References
    Advances in Human Stem Cells and Genome Editing to Understand and Develop Treatment for Fragile X Syndrome
    1 Introduction
    2 Unique and Complex Genetics of FXS
    2.1 CGG Expansion of the Human FMR1 Gene
    2.2 Epigenetic Silencing of the Human FMR1 Gene
    3 Human Pluripotent Stem Cells Models for FXS
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    edited by Lawrence K. Fung.
    Summary: "Neurodiversity: From Phenomenology to Neurobiology and Enhancing Technologies is the first APA title to address the totality of neurodiversity through positive explorations of "invisible diversities"-from ADHD and savantism to autism spectrum disorder (ASD) and dyslexia. Edited by the director of the Stanford Neurodiversity Project, the book emphasizes strengths-based approaches to clinical practice and investigates interventions to improve the lives of neurodiverse individuals. Following a compelling preface by Temple Grandin, the book proceeds to address neurodiversity in four parts: first, an introduction that presents neurodiversity's differences in brain function and behavior as part of the normal variation of the human population; second, presentation of the strengths-based model of neurodiversity (SBMN), including positive psychology, neurobiology, and SBMN in savantism, autism, ADHD, and dyslexia; third, a discussion of neurodiverse individuals in the real world, including higher education and employment; and finally, a review of technologies that enhance our abilities to maximize the potential of neurodiversity, including inclusive design and assessment tools that provide support for neurodiverse young adults seeking meaningful employment"-- Provided by publisher.
  • Digital
    edited by Paul W. Glimcher, Ernst Fehr.
    Summary: This title provides a comprehensive reference on the neurobiology of decision making, and is suitable as an advanced undergraduate or graduate textbook, as well as a reference for active researchers. Subject coverage includes reinforcement learning, risk, inter-temporal choice, drift-diffusion models, game theory, and prospect theory.

    Contents:
    I. The fundamental tools of neuroeconomics
    II. Neural and psychological foundations of economic preferences
    III. Learning and valuation
    IV. The neural mechanisms for choice
    V. Brain circuitry of social valuation and social choice.
    Digital Access ScienceDirect 2014
  • Digital
    Giordano Beretta, Alfredo Berruti, Emilio Bombardieri, Nicola Fazio, Orlando Goletti, editors.
    Summary: This book provides the most recent update on the management of neuroendocrine neoplasia (NEN), a term covering all tumors of various organs and/or with a particular histology, including MEN (multiple endocrine neoplasia) related tumors, MiNEN (mixed neuroendocrine-non-neuroendocrine neoplasms), NEC (neuroendocrine carcinoma) and Merkel's carcinoma. NENs are heterogeneous in their biology, clinical presentation and prognosis, showing a great variability in aggressiveness and therapy response. As a result, their treatment is based on a large spectrum of options. The standard therapies are surgery in early disease, various loco-regional procedures in certain conditions and mostly of a palliative nature in metastatic disease. At present, thanks to our increased understanding of molecular signaling pathways, several pharmacological approaches can be used in patients with advanced NENs. Somatostatin analogs display both anti-tumor effects and symptom control. Novel peptide-radio-receptor treatment (PRRT) is used in patients with well differentiated tumors. The agents targeting angiogenesis and/or PI3K/AKT/mTOR pathway, alone or in combination with analogues, have provided encouraging results in advanced disease. The first part of the book focuses on the history, epidemiology and the most relevant scientific achievements, covering the discoveries in genetic and molecular biology, the endoscopic techniques with guided biopsy, and the metabolic imaging with hybrid PET/CT and MRI/CT. It particularly highlights the emerging strategies in therapy, surgery and mini-invasive surgery as well as loco-regional and systemic treatments, including targeted therapy and/or biological therapies. The second part then explores the management of NENs of various anatomical origins and/or with peculiar biology. It describes the range of the current options and the most relevant results from the clinical trials. This informative book provides valuable insights for all those interested in the management of neuroendocrine neoplasia.

    Contents:
    Part-1: General. History of Neuroendocrine Neoplasia
    Epidemiology of neuroendocrine neoplasms. Part-2: Diagnosis. New concepts in patholog
    Molecular Biology of Neuroendocrine Tumors
    Circulating biochemical markers of gastro-entero-pancreatic (GEP) neuroendocrine neoplasms (NENs)
    Advances in diagnostic imaging. Part-3: New Approaches for Treatment. Treatment of NET related symptoms
    New Surgical Strategies
    New approaches in medical therapies
    Loco-regional Therapies of NEN
    Radioreceptor therapy
    NETs of the lung
    Part-4: Treatment of NETs From Different Organ Origin. Gastric Neuroendocrine Tumors
    Treatment of Pancreatic Neurendocrine Tumors
    Treatment of intestinal NETs (including appendix)
    Treatment of NETs from rare origin
    Neuroendocrine Neoplasms with Peculiar Biology and Features: MEN1, MEN2A, MEN2B, MEN4, VHL, NF1. Part-5: NETs with Peculiar Biology and Feature. Mixed Neuroendocrine and Non-Neuroendocrine Neoplasms ( Mi NEN)
    Merkel Cell Carcinoma
    Therapy in poorly differentiated neuroendocrine neoplasms (NEN G3)
    Conclusion:NENs management today looking at the future.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    Lique M. Coolen, David R. Grattan, editors.
    Summary: This special volume provides twelve contributions that discuss different aspects of social and endocrine behaviors with an emphasis on the neural regulation of these behaviors. In addition, several review chapters address the neural plasticity that results from exposure to hormones or the experiences with the behavior. Finally, each of the contributions emphasizes future directions and incorporation of newly developed neuroscience techniques and approaches.

    Contents:
    Female Reproductive Behavior
    The Sexual Differentiation of the Human Brain: Role of Sex Hormones Versus Sex Chromosomes
    Sexual Differentiation and Sex Differences in Neural Development
    Neural Regulation of Paternal Behavior in Mammals: Sensory, Neuroendocrine, and Experiential Influences on the Paternal Brain
    Neuroendocrinology and adaptive physiology of maternal care
    Neural Circuits Underlying Rodent Sociality: A Comparative Approach
    Hypothalamic Integration of the Endocrine Signaling Related to Food Intake
    The Impact of Stressor Exposure and Glucocorticoids on Anxiety and Fear
    Circadian Regulation of the Brain and Behavior: A Neuroendocrine Perspective
    Neuroendocrine Control of Sleep
    Hormonal Regulation of Hippocampal Neurogenesis: Implications for Depression and Exercise
    Neuroimmune Impacts of Early-Life Stress on Development and Psychopathology.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    volume editors, Mauro Papotti, Wouter W. de Herder.
    Contents:
    Epidemiology of neuroendocrine tumors / Fraenkel, M.; Faggiano, A. ; Valk, G.D.
    Biochemical testing in patients with neuroendocrine tumors / Granberg, D.
    Clinical syndromes related to gastrointestinal neuroendocrine neoplasms / Boutzios, G.; Kaltsas, G.
    Radiological imaging : computed tomography, magnetic resonance imaging and ultrasonography / Sundin, A.; Wills, M.; Rockall, A.
    Nuclear medicine imaging of neuroendocrine tumors / Brabander, T.; Kwekkeboom, D.J.; Feelders, R.A.; Brouwers, A.H.; Teunissen, J.J.M.
    Endoscopy and endoscopic ultrasound in assessing and managing neuroendocrine neoplasms / O'Toole, D.; Palazzo, L
    Pathology : classification and immunoprofile / Blank, A.; Schmitt, A.; Perren, A.
    Genetics and epigenetics of pancreatic neuroendocrine tumors and pulmonary carcinoids / Dreijerink, K.M.A.; Derks, J.L.; Cataldo, I.; Scarpa, A.; Valk, G.D.; Speel, E.-J.M.
    Pancreatic surgery / Maurizi, A.; Partelli, S.; Falconi, M.
    Gastrointestinal surgery of neuroendocrine neoplasms / Palns Hansen, C.; Holst Olsen, I.; Knigge, U.
    Transplantation and debulking procedures for neuroendocrine tumors / Frilling, A.; Al-Nahhas, A.; Clift, A.K.
    A 25-year experience of gastroenteropancreatic neuroendocrine tumors and somatostatin (congeners) analogs : from symptom control to antineoplastic therapy / O'Dorisio, T.M. ; Anthony, L.B.
    Medical therapy of pulmonary neuroendocrine neoplasms : targeted, symptomatic and chemotherapy / Ferolla, P.
    Peptide receptor radionuclide therapy of neuroendocrine tumors / Bodei, L.; Kidd, M.; Prasad, V.; Modlin, I.M.
    Hormone and receptor candidates for target and biotherapy of neuroendocrine tumors / Hofland, L.J.; Vandamme, T.; Albertelli, M.; Ferone, D.
    The role of chemotherapy in well-differentiated gastroenteropancreatic neuroendocrine tumors / Strosberg, J.; Goldman, J.; Costa, F.; Pavel, M.
    Other novel therapies : biomarkers, microRNAs and microRNA inhibitors, DNA methylation, epigenetics, immunotherapy and virotherapy / Giandomenico, V.; Thirlwell, C.; Essand, M.
    Digital Access Karger 2015
  • Digital
    Jordan M. Cloyd, Timothy M. Pawlik, editors.
    Summary: This book is a comprehensive, state-of-the art, definitive reference for the surgical management of Neuroendocrine Tumors (NETs). It provides a practical, clinically useful guide that prioritizes the diagnostic work-up, indications for surgery, surgical principles, and perioperative care of patients with NETs in the context of multi-disciplinary care. Most textbooks on NETs have traditionally focused on patients with advanced disease, highlighting systemic therapies and emerging treatment options. In contrast, this book provides a concise yet comprehensive summary of the surgical management of NETs and serves as an invaluable resource for physicians, fellows, and residents who treat this difficult disease by providing helpful guidelines and up-to-date information on clinical management. Written by experts in the field, Neuroendocrine Tumors includes the most up-to-date clinical information from national and international leaders in their respective disciplines. It not only serves as an invaluable resource for many as they seek to provide the best possible surgical and multidisciplinary cancer care, but also an opportunity to identify new avenues of scientific discovery that may lead to significant advances in the diagnosis and management of NETs.

    Contents:
    Epidemiology and Diagnosis of Neuroendocrine Tumors
    Imaging of Neuroendocrine Tumors
    Pathology of Neuroendocrine Neoplasms in the Digestive System
    Perioperative Management
    Neoadjuvant and Adjuvant Treatment Strategies for Well Differentiated Neuroendocrine Tumors
    Carcinoid Crisis: History, Dogmas, and Data
    Gastroduodenal NETs
    Non Functional Pancreatic Neuroendocrine Tumors
    Pancreas Functional
    Jejunoileal Neuroendocrine Tumors
    Colon and Rectal Neuroendocrine Tumors
    Surgical evaluation of appendiceal neuroendocrine tumors
    Primary Neuroendocrine Tumors of the Lung
    Medullary Thyroid Cancer
    Paraganglioma and Pheochromocytoma
    Merkel Cell Carcinoma
    Neuroendocrine liver metastases
    Neuroendocrine Peritoneal Metastases
    Palliative Interventions for Metastatic Neuroendocrine Tumors
    Emerging Systemic Therapies for Neuroendocrine Tumors.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    Annamaria Colao, Antongiulio Faggiano, Wouter de Herder, editors.
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Digital
    edited by Suzanne L. Dickson, Julian G. Mercer.
    Contents:
    Neuroanatomy of Feeding Pathways / Brian J Oldfield, Paul N Mirabella, Aneta Stefanidis
    Afferent Endocrine Control of Eating / Wolfgang Langhans, Jens Juul Holst
    Ontogeny of Neuroendocrine Feeding Circuits / Sophie Croizier, Sebastien G Bouret
    Hypothalamic Peptides and Meal Patterns / Yada Treesukosol, Timothy H Moran
    Food Hedonics / Karolina P Skibicka, Scott E Kanoski
    Functional and Anatomical Dissection of Feeding Circuits / Deniz Atasoy, Scott M Sternson
    Exploring Appetite and Hypothalamic Circuitry through Manipulating Gene Expression / Tara Jois, Mark W Sleeman
    Electrophysiology of the Appetite-Regulating Circuits of the Hypothalamus / Nancy Sabatier, John Menzies, Gareth Leng
    Functional Neuroimaging of Appetite and Gut-Brain Interactions / Paul AM Smeets, Hubert Preissl
    Appetite Disorders / Mathieu Mquinion, Susanne Fleur, Odile Viltart
    Future Prospects of the Management of Appetite Disorders / Carel Roux, Karl Neff
    Discovery of New Drugs for Weight Loss and Prevention of Weight Regain / Anders Lehmann, Udo Bauer, Stephan Hjorth, Rudolph L Leibel, Michael Rosenbaum.
    Digital Access Wiley 2016
  • Digital
    [edited by] Jaime Gerardo Torres-Corzo, Leonardo Rangel-Castilla, Peter Nakaji.
  • Digital
    Spyros Sgouros, editor.
    Summary: During the past decade, neuroendoscopy has undergone a variety of technological improvements, and both indications and techniques have been significantly refined. As a result, neuroendoscopy is now used in the treatment of many more patients, enabling the performance of previously unavailable operations with low complication rates and rapid patient recovery. This book presents the distilled experience of world experts in this evolving field. Current applications are explained in detail and likely future developments are identified. Among the topics discussed are the neuroendoscopic management of hydrocephalus, a wide variety of tumors, colloid and suprasellar arachnoid cysts, Chiari malformation, and craniosynostosis; the use of neuroendoscopic techniques in improving altered CSF physiology; and the status of neuroendoscopically assisted neurosurgery. In addition, the available neuroendoscopic instruments are reviewed and the results of international trials and collaborative studies, presented. This book will fully acquaint the reader with the breadth and depth of available neuroendoscopy techniques and their impressive therapeutic potential. It should serve as the reference book on neuroendoscopy for the next 10 years.

    Contents:
    1. Historical Trends of Neuroendoscopic Surgery / Bernhard L. Bauer
    2 The Application of Neuroendoscopic Techniques in Improving Altered CSF Physiology / Yavor P. Enchev and Shizuo Oi
    3. Neuroendoscopy in Infants and the International Infant Hydrocephalus Study (IIHS) / Shlomi Constantini, Spyros Sgouros, and Abhaya V. Kulkarni
    4. Controversies in the Endoscopic Management of the Various Forms of Hydrocephalus / Giuseppe Cinalli and Pietro Spennato
    5. Current Status and Future Developments of Neuroendoscopic Management of Pituitary Tumours and Craniopharyngiomas / Paolo Cappabianca, Luigi Maria Cavallo, Isabella Esposito, and Felice Esposito
    6. Current Status and Future Developments of Neuroendoscopically Assisted Neurosurgery / Henry W.S. Schroeder
    7. Neuroendoscopic Instruments and Surgical Technique / André Grotenhuis
    8. Integrating Endoscopy in the Technological Environment of the Modern Neurosurgical Operating Room / Dieter Hellwig
    9. Endoscopic Treatment of Hypothalamic Hamartomas / Harold L. Rekate
    10. Endoscopic Management of Intraventricular Brain Tumors in Children / Mark M. Souweidane
    11. Neuroendoscopic Treatment of Colloid Cysts / Phillipe Decq
    12. MRI of Patients with Hydrocephalus / Jérôme Hodel, Alain Rahmouni, and Philippe Decq
    13. Neuroendoscopic Management of Intraparenchymal Lesions / Luiz Carlos de Alencastro, Luiz Felipe de Alencastro, Ademir A. Lodetti, and Mário de Barros Faria
    14. Neuroendoscopic Techniques in the Management of Pineal Region Tumors / Tai-Tong Wong
    15. The “Complex” Management of Sylvian Fissure Arachnoid Cysts / Concezio Di Rocco, Federica Novegno, and Gianluca Trevisi
    16. Neuroendoscopy in Spinal Pathology: Our Experience, New Trends, and Developments / Alvaro Cordoba
    17. Endoscopy-Assisted Craniosynostosis Surgery / Erik J. van Lindert, Anke M. Ettema, and Wilfred A. Borstlap
    18. Endoscopic Endonasal Repair of CSF Leak / Yaron A. Moshel, Madeleine R. Schaberg, Vijay K. Anand, and Theodore H. Schwartz
    19. Man-to-Machine Interface in Neuroendoscopy: The Importance of Human Interface in the Development of Neuroendoscopy / Spyros Sgouros.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    edited by Michael J. Aminoff, François Boller and Dick F. Swaab.
    Contents:
    Epidemiology for the clinical neurologist / M.E. Jacob, M. Ganguli
    Population neuroscience / T. Paus
    Advanced epidemiologic and analytical methods / E. Albanese
    Basics of neuroanatomy and neurophysiology / C.K. Barha, L.S. Nagamatsu, T. Liu-Ambrose
    Population imaging in neuroepidemiology / M.W. Vernooij, M. de Groot, D. Bos
    Use of "omics" technologies to dissect neurologic disease / G. Tosto, C. Reitz
    Neuropsychologic assessment / P. Palta, B. Snitz, M.C. Carlson
    Dementias / S.F. Sacuiu
    Epidemiology of alpha-synucleinopathies: from Parkinson disease to dementia with Lewy bodies / R. Savica, B.F. Boeve, G. Logroscino
    Epidemiology of epilepsy / S. Abramovici, A. Bagić
    The epidemiology of multiple sclerosis: insights to a causal cascade& / D.S. Goodin
    Neuroepidemiology of traumatic brain injury / A.J. Gardner, R. Zafonte
    The epidemiology of amyotrophic lateral sclerosis / E.O. Talbott, A.M. Malek, D. Lacomis
    Cerebrovascular disease / M.L.P. Portegies, P.J. Koudstaal, M.A. Ikram
    Peripheral neuropathies / R. Hanewinckel, M.A. Ikram, P.A. Van Doorn
    Migraine / K.R. Peck, Y.L. Johnson, T.A. Smitherman
    Neuroepidemiology of cancer and treatment-related neurocognitive dysfunction in adult-onset cancer patients and survivors / P. Jean-Pierre, B.C. McDonald
    Sickle cell disease / J. Strouse.
    Digital Access ScienceDirect 2016
  • Digital
    edited by Pierre-Marie Preux and Michel Dumas.
    Summary: "Neuroepidemiology in Tropical Health covers major neurological diseases of relevance in tropical settings and examines the specificities of epidemiology of neurological diseases in the context of tropical countries that face many challenges when compared to the developed world. Part One focuses on methods and their eventual specificities, and how such methods, like sampling, can be adapted for specific scenarios. Parts Two and Three discuss environmental factors and their consequences for neurology in the tropical world, as well as large geographical areas and their specificities. Finally, Part Four presents relevant neurological diseases in in-depth chapters. This invaluable information will help readers recognize the various neurological conditions presented, with the inclusion of their aetiologies and treatment in tropical areas. The book therefore fills a gap in the neuroepidemiology literature, with chapters written by an international collection of experienced authors in the field. Highlights differences and similarities between neuroepidemiology in tropical areas and temperate zones with a focus on methods and underlying factorsCovers environmental factors in the tropical world and their consequences for neurologyChapters include references (key articles, books, protocols) for additional detailed studyIncludes wide topics of neurological disease in the tropics, not only infectious diseases, but also nutrition and public health"-- Provided by publisher.

    Contents:
    Methodological challenges of neuroepidemiological studies in low- and middle-income countries / Farid Boumediene, Benoît Marin, and Pierre-Marie Preux
    Sociocultural factors / Philippe Nubukpo and Catherine-Marie Dubreuil
    Climatic factors under the tropics / Jacques Reis, Pascal Handschumacher, Valerie S. Palmer, and Peter S. Spencer
    Economic aspects / Achille Tchalla
    Tropical epidemiology / Jean-Claude Desport, Pierre Jésus, and Philippe Fayemendy
    Genetics of infections and diseases caused by human parasites affecting the central nervous system / Alain Dessein, Agnès Fleury, Hélia Dessein, and Sandrine Marquet
    Asia / Mohamed I. Idris and Chong T. Tan
    Neurologic diseases in tropical oceania / Jacques Joubert and Craig Barnett
    Neuroepidemiology in Latin America / Carlos N. Ketzoian, Abayubá Perna, and Heber J. Hackembruch
    Epidemiology of neurological disorders in sub-saharan Africa / Redda Tekle-Haimanot, Edgard B. Ngoungou, and Dawit Kibru
    Epilepsy / Charles R. Newton and Pierre-Marie Preux
    Dementia / Maëlenn Guerchet and Martin Prince
    Other neurocognitive disorders in tropical health / Benoît Marin, Philippe Couratier, Annie Lannuzel, and Giancarlo Logroscino
    Vascualr disorders / Thierry Adoukonou and Philippe Lacroix
    Neuromuscular disorders in tropical areas / Stéphane Mathis, Laurent Magy, and Jean-Michel Vallat
    Headaches in tropical areas / Dismand Houinato and Athanase Millogo
    Neuropsychiatric disorders and addictions / Jean-Pierre Clément and Philippe Nubukpo
    Neurological syndromes or diseases caused by parasites in tropical areas / Francisco J. Carod-Artal, Hector H. Garcia, Andrea S. Winkler, and Daniel Ajzenberg
    Bacterial diseases of the nervous system / Jean-Franc̦ois Faucher and Marie-Cécile Ploy
    Viral diseases / Franc̦ois Denis and Sébastien Hantz
    Other diseases / Mouhamadou Diagana and Michel Dumas.
    Digital Access ScienceDirect 2018
  • Digital
    Raul Delgado-Morales, editor.
    Contents:
    Part I. Neurodevelopmental and Childhood Disorders
    1. MeCP2, a modulator of neuronal chromatin organization invovled in Rett Syndrome
    2. The role of noncoding RNAs in neurodevelopmental disorders: the case of Rett Syndrome
    3. Rubinstein-Taybi Syndrome and eipigenetic alterations
    4. Epigenetics of autism specctrum disorder
    Part II. Adolescence Brain Diseases
    5. Eating disorders and epigenetics
    6. Drug addiction and DNA modifications
    7. Drug addiction and histone code alterations
    8. Anxiety and epigenetics
    Part III. Brain Disorders During Adulthood
    9. Histone modifications in major depressive disorder and related rodent models
    10. DNA methylation in major depressive disorder
    11. Noncoding RNAs in depression
    12. DNA methylation in schizophrenia
    13. Histone posttranslational modifications in schizophrenia
    14. Epigenetic mechanisms of gene regulation in amyotrophic lateral sclerosis
    15. Epigenetics of Huntington's Disease
    Part IV. Elderly Disorders
    16. DNA modifications and Alzheimer's disease
    17. Alzheimer's disease and histone code alterations
    18. Alzheimer's disease and ncRNAs
    19. Epigenetics in Parkinson's disease
    Part V. New Approaches for Neuroepigenomic Studies
    20. Single-cell genomics unravels brain cell-type complexity
    21. Epigenome editing in the brain
    22. Techniques for single-molecule mRNA imaging in living cells
    23. Stem cell technology for (epi)genetic brain disorders
    24. Technologies for deciphering epigenomic DNA patterns
    25. Bioinformatics tools for genome-wide epigenetic research
    Index.
    Digital Access Springer 2017
  • Digital
    edited by Judy Illes.
    Contents:
    Part 1. Neurotechnology: today and tomorrow: When emerging biomedical technologies converge or collide / Debra J.H. Mathews
    Emerging neuroimaging technologies: toward future personalized diagnostics, prognosis, targeted intervention, and ethical challenges / Urs Ribary ... [et al.]
    Incidental findings: current ethical debates and future challenges inadvanced neuroimaging / Lorna M. Gibson, Cathie L.M. Sudlow, and Joanna M. Wardlaw
    Vulnerability, youth, and homelessness: ethical considerations on the roles of technology in the lives of adolescents and young adults / Niranjan S. Karnik
    The neuroethical future of wearable and mobile health technology / Karola V. Kreitmair and Mildred K. Cho
    Technologies of the extended mind: defining the issues / Peter B. Reiner and Saskia K. Nagel
    Neuromodulation ethics: preparing for brain- computer interface medicine / Eran Klein
    Integrating ethics into neurotechnology research and development: the US National Institutes of Health BRAIN Initiative® / Khara M. Ramos and Walter J. Koroshetz
    Part 2. Neuroethics at the frontline of healthcare: What do new neuroscience discoveries in children mean for their open future? / Cheryl D. Lew
    Neuroprognostication after severe brain injury in children: science fiction or plausible reality? / Sarah S. Welsh, Geneviéve Du Pont-Thibodeau, and Mathew P. Kirschen
    No pain no gain: a neuroethical place for hypnosis in invasive intervention / Elvira V. Lang
    Placebo beyond controls: the neuroscience and ethics of navigating a new understanding of placebo therapy / Karen S. Rommelfanger
    Ethical challenges of modern psychiatric neurosurgery / Sabine Müller
    At the crossroads of civic engagement and evidence-based medicine: lessons learned from the chronic cerebrospinal venous insufficiency experience / Shelly Benjaminy and Anthony Traboulsee
    Ethical dilemmas in neurodegenerative disease: respecting patients at the twilight of agency / Agnieszka Jaworska
    Anticipating a therapeutically elusive neurodegenerative condition: ethical considerations for the preclinical detection of Alzheimer's disease / Hervé Chneiweiss
    When bright lines blur: deconstructing distinctions between disorders of consciousness / David B. Fischer and Robert D. Truog
    Brain death and the definition of death / James L. Bernat
    Part 3. Social, legal, and regulatory frameworks: Lessonsof the past guide policy for the future: Minors and incompetent adults: a tale of two populations / Vasiliki Rahimzadeh ... [et al.]
    Behavioral and brain-based research on free moral agency: threatening or empowering? / Reic Racine and Veljko Dubljević
    Cognitive enhancement of today may be the normal of tomorrow / Fabrice Jotterand
    Environmental neuroethics: setting the foundations / Laura Y. Cabrera
    First Nations and environmental neuroethics: perspectives on brain health from a world of change / Jordan Tesluk, Judy Illes, and Ralph Matthews
    The neurobiology of addiction as a window on voluntary control of behavior and moral responsibility / Steven E. Hyman
    Looking to the future: clinical and policy implications of the brain disease model of addiction / Adrian Carter and Wayne Hall
    Concussion, neuroethics, and sport: policies of the past do not suffice for the future / Brad Partridge and Wayne Hall
    Security threat versus aggregated truths: ethical issues in the use of neuroscience and neurotechnology for national security / Michal N. Tennison, James Giordano, and Jonathan D. Moreno
    Communicating about the brain in the digital era / Julie M. Robillard and Emily Wight
    The impact of meuroscience in the law: how perceptions of control and responsibility affect the definition of disability / Jennifer A. Chandler
    Neuroethics and global mental health: establishing a dialogue / Dan J. Stein and James Giordano
    Neuroethics and neurotechnology: instrumentality and human rights / Joseph J. Fins.
    Digital Access Oxford 2017
  • Digital
    L. Syd M Johnson, Andrew Fenton, Adam Shriver, editors.
    Contents:
    Intro
    Acknowledgments
    Contents
    Editors and Contributors
    About the Editors
    About the Authors
    List of Figures
    1: Introduction to Animal Neuroethics: What and Why?
    1.1 Introduction
    1.2 What Is Animal Neuroethics?
    1.3 Animal Neuroethics: The What and the Why
    1.4 Concluding Thoughts
    References
    Part I: Neuroscience of Nonhuman Minds
    2: Sentience and Consciousness as Bases for Attributing Interests and Moral Status: Considering the Evidence and Speculating S ...
    2.1 Introduction
    2.2 Methodological Assumptions 2.3 Evidence of Sentience in Different Animal Classes
    2.3.1 Mammals and Birds
    2.3.2 Reptiles
    2.3.3 Amphibians
    2.3.4 Fish
    2.3.5 Cephalopods
    2.3.6 Arthropods
    2.4 Conclusion: From Bees to Bots and Back
    References
    3: The Human Challenge in Understanding Animal Cognition
    3.1 Introduction
    3.2 Definition of Cognition: One or Many Cognitions?
    3.3 Ecological and Social Drivers of Cognition in Chimpanzees
    3.3.1 Finding Food in Dense Forests Represents a Special Cognitive Challenge
    3.3.2 Extracting Embedded Food
    3.3.3 Hunting and Cooperation 3.4 Are There Real Differences Between Captive and Wild Populations?
    3.5 Human Bias and Ecological Validity
    3.6 The Future of Animal Cognition Studies?
    References
    4: Mental Capacities of Fishes
    4.1 Introduction
    4.2 Definition of Sentience
    4.3 Do Fish Form Relationships?
    4.4 Cognitive Ability and Neurodevelopment
    4.4.1 Social Learning
    4.4.2 Spatial Navigation
    4.4.3 Numerical Skills
    4.4.4 Decision-Making
    4.5 Welfare and Capacities for Feeling: Pain, Fear, and Pleasure
    4.5.1 Pain
    4.5.2 Fear
    4.5.3 Pleasure 4.6 Individual Recognition, Self-Recognition, and Consciousness
    4.7 Conclusions
    References
    5: Bovine Prospection, the Mesocorticolimbic Pathways, and Neuroethics: Is a Cowś Future Like Ours?
    5.1 Introduction
    5.2 Why Bovine Prospection Matters
    5.3 Rights and Interests
    5.4 What Is This Cow Planning?
    5.5 Prospection: Some Definitions
    5.6 Cow Behaviors
    5.7 Hypothesis: Cows Have Intuitive Prospection
    5.8 Bovine Prospection: Belief and Desire
    5.9 Neural Correlates of Human Desire
    5.10 Neural Correlates of Bovine Desire?
    5.11 Neural Correlates of Human Belief 5.12 Neural Correlates of Bovine Belief: What Do We Know?
    5.13 Is a Cowś Prospection Like Ours?
    5.14 Belief and Desire in Neotenic Complex Syndrome
    5.15 Nonreporting Human Intuitive Prospection
    5.16 Conclusion
    References
    6: Speciesism and Human Supremacy in Animal Neuroscience
    6.1 Introduction: Speciesism and Human Supremacy
    6.2 Sentience and Comparative Neuroscience
    6.3 Sentience: Pain and Suffering
    6.4 The Evidence for Pain in Nonhuman Animals
    6.4.1 Consider Fishes
    6.4.2 Reconsidering Fishes
    6.5 Domination and Oppression
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    Jon T. Sakata, Sarah C. Woolley, Richard R. Fay, Arthur N. Popper, editors.
    Summary: This volume provides comprehensive, integrative, and comparative perspectives on birdsong and underscores the importance of birdsong research to behavioral and systems neuroscience, evolutionary biology, and biomedical research. Scaling the Levels of Birdsong Analysis Jon T. Sakata and Sarah C. Woolley Neural Circuits Underlying Vocal Learning in Songbirds Jon T. Sakata and Yoko Yazaki-Sugiyama New Insights into the Avian Song System and Neuronal Control of Learned Vocalizations Karagh Murphy, Koedi S. Lawley, Perry Smith, and Jonathan F. Prather The Song Circuit as a Model of Basal Ganglia Function Arthur Leblois and David J. Perkel Integrating Form and Function in the Songbird Auditory Forebrain Sarah C. Woolley and Sarah M.N. Woolley Hormonal Regulation of Avian Auditory Processing Luke Remage-Healey The Neuroethology of Vocal Communication in Songbirds: Production and Perception of a Call Repertoire Julie E. Elie and Frédéric E. Theunissen Linking Features of Genomic Function to Fundamental Features of Learned Vocal Communication Sarah E. London Vocal Performance in Songbirds: From Mechanisms to Evolution Jeffrey Podos and HaCheol Sung.

    Contents:
    Intro
    The Acoustical Society of America
    Series Preface
    Springer Handbook of Auditory Research
    Preface 1992
    Volume Preface
    Contents
    Contributors
    Chapter 1: Scaling the Levels of Birdsong Analysis
    1.1 Introduction
    1.2 Songbirds as Models for Human Speech
    1.3 Defining Song Learning
    1.3.1 Requirements of Song Learning: Sensory and Sensorimotor Learning
    1.3.2 Oscine Versus Suboscines
    1.3.3 Types of Vocal Plasticity
    1.3.4 Evidence for and Against Vocal Learning in Other Species
    1.3.5 Relationship to Visual Imprinting 1.4 Diversity of Song-Learning Strategies
    1.4.1 Variation in the Timing of Song Learning
    1.4.1.1 Open-Ended Versus Close-Ended Learning and Critical Periods for Song Learning
    1.4.1.2 Overlap of Sensory and Sensorimotor Periods
    1.4.1.3 Variation in Reliance on Sensory Learning
    1.4.2 Variation in the Extent of Song Learning
    1.4.2.1 Variation in Song Repertoires
    1.4.2.2 Variation in the Breadth of Acoustic Elements that Can be Learned
    1.4.3 Variation in the Dependence of Song Learning on Social Interactions 1.5 Allison Doupe as a Seminal Figure in the Study of the Neural Basis of Birdsong
    1.6 Overview of Chapters and Conclusion
    References
    Chapter 2: Neural Circuits Underlying Vocal Learning in Songbirds
    2.1 Songbirds as a Model to Reveal Neural Mechanisms Underlying Vocal Learning
    2.1.1 Critical Periods for Song Learning
    2.1.2 Neural Circuitry for Song Learning, Production, and Perception
    2.2 Mechanisms Underlying the Sensory Learning of Song
    2.2.1 Neural Circuits for the Sensory Learning of Song 2.2.2 Neural Mechanisms Underlying Timing of the Critical Period for Sensory Learning
    2.3 Mechanisms Underlying the Sensorimotor Learning of Song
    2.3.1 Neural Circuits for the Sensorimotor Learning of Song
    2.3.2 Neural Mechanisms Underlying the Timing of the Critical Period for Sensorimotor Learning
    2.4 Mechanisms Underlying Variation in Song Learning
    2.4.1 Mechanisms Underlying Social Influences on Vocal Learning
    2.4.2 Mechanisms Underlying Biological Predispositions in Learning
    2.5 New Perspectives and Directions for the Study of Vocal Learning in Songbirds 2.6 Chapter Summary
    References
    Chapter 3: New Insights into the Avian Song System and Neuronal Control of Learned Vocalizations
    3.1 Introduction
    3.2 Historical Perspective
    3.2.1 The Canonical Song System
    3.2.2 Composition of the Song System and Functions of Specific Components
    3.3 New Insights Into the Function of Sites in the Canonical Song System
    3.3.1 Role of HVC in Imitative Learning
    3.3.2 Activity of HVC During Singing
    3.3.3 Function of the Vocal Motor Pathway in Singing
    3.3.4 Neural Basis of Vocal Sequencing
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    Pascale Vincent.
    Summary: The artificial intelligence of robots capable of learning from their errors and modifying their behavior accordingly is modeled on the activity of neurons in the brain.Emotional stress, traffic accidents, bereavement; these are all factors that can disrupt this neural activity, sometimes to the point of generating suffering that can be difficult to relieve. Neurofeedback, derived from neuroscience, is a computerized technique for training and re-balancing the brain's electrical activity using neuroplasticity, which allows the brain to self-correct and regain a stable equilibrium, thus promoting recovery from traumas and a return to well-being. Neurofeedback: Tools, Methods and Applications deals with neurofeedback, explaining the functioning of the tool, its action on the equilibration of neural activity, and the differences between classical and dynamic systems. The results of the author's research and observations, the applications of these two tools, and the effects produced on the patients are explored, along with testimonies that describe and explain concepts in detail. Different neurofeedback tools are presented in this book, together with their function and explicit specificities adapted to the needs of each user. Their applications to psychological and cognitive disorders make neurofeedback an efficient and promising neurotherapy technique.

    Contents:
    What is neurofeedback?
    Signal processing
    The principle of homeostasis
    How neurofeedback works
    Training the brain
    Cerebral areas
    Personal research
    An aid for self-understanding
    Statistical information
    Clinical cases
    Testimonials.
    Digital Access ScienceDirect 2018
  • Digital
    edited by Daniel H. Geschwind, Henry L. Paulson, and Christine Klein.
    Digital Access
    Provider
    Version
    ScienceDirect
    ScienceDirect
  • Digital
    by Tobias Warnecke, Rainer Dziewas, Susan Langmore.
    Summary: This book is a clinical manual that covers the whole spectrum of swallowing and its disorders. It starts with physiology of swallowing, pathophysiology of disordered deglutition, diagnostic methods (clinical and instrumental) and ends with an in-depth's and up-to-date presentation of current treatment options. The clinically most relevant topics of dysphagia management on the stroke unit and the intensive care unit are dealt with in separate chapters. Also the closely intertwined issue of nutritional management is specifically addressed. Most importantly, the book covers all obligatory topics of the Flexible Endoscopic Evaluation of Swallowing (FEES)-curriculum, an educational initiative that started in Germany in 2014 and is currently being extended to other European and non-European countries. The book is richly illustrated and an online video section provides a number of typical patient cases. FEES is probably the most commonly chosen method for the objective assessment of swallowing and its disorders. It is used in stroke units, intensive care facilities, geriatric wards but also in rehabilitation clinics and within dedicated outpatient services. This book on neurogenic dysphagia therefore addresses a wide range of different medical disciplines, such as neurologists, geriatricians, intensive care physicians, rehabilitation physicians, gastroenterologists, otolaryngologists, phoniatrists and also speech-language pathologists.

    Contents:
    Foreword
    Preface
    Neuroanatomy and physiology of deglutition
    Clinical procedures
    FEES and other instrumental methods for swallowing evaluation
    Special findings in neurogenic dysphagia
    Using FEES in the stroke unit and the intensive care unit
    Treatment of neurogenic dysphagia
    Nutritional requirements in patients with neurogenic dysphagia
    Bibliography
    Abbreviations
    Index
    Appendix: Scales and scores.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    Alexei Verkhratsky, Margaret S. Ho, Robert Zorec, Vladimir Parpura, editors.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    editor, Kiwon Lee.
    Contents:
    Section 1: Neurocritical care diseases
    Section 2: Neurocritical care monitoring
    Section 3: Neurosurgery
    Section 4: Trauma and surgical intensive care
    Section 5: Cardiovascular section
    Section 6: Pulmonary diseases
    Section 7: Renal and electrolyte disorders
    Section 8: Hematology
    Section 9: Infectious disease
    Section 10: Nutrition and endocrinology
    Section 11: Ethics and end-of-life issues.
    Digital Access AccessNeurology 2018
  • Digital
    edited by Joseph C. Masdeu and R. Gilberto González.
    Digital Access
    Provider
    Version
    ScienceDirect
    ScienceDirect
  • Digital
    Edison Bicudo.
    Summary: This book analyses the social contexts in which programmers design neuroimaging software used in brain studies. It shows that in the same way people engage in everyday communication, programmers are involved in a series of communicative processes to realize the negotiations and discussions generated by software development. In this way, highly technical activities such as computer code writing are also underpinned by values, preferences, and power relations. At the same time, the book sheds new light on scientists' increasing dependence on software. On the one hand, many scientific tasks can no longer be performed without the help of computational technologies. On the other hand, most scientists have only superficial computing knowledge. As a result, inequalities emerge whereby some scientists take the most strategic methodological decisions whereas other scientists can only rely on the technical help provided by user-friendly computer applications.

    Contents:
    Intro; Foreword; Acknowledgements; Contents; List of Charts; List of Tables; List of Maps; List of Boxes; chapterOne First Words; Observing the Brain; Neuroimaging Through Software; Neuroimaging Through Handicraft; Neuroimaging Software's Trajectory; Brain Images, Brain Data; The Socialization of Computer Programming; Software Development and Communication; Open Source Software and the Internet; Research Methods; Structure of the Book; References; 1stPart Socializing Code; chapterTwo (Sharing Code: Social Mediations in Software Development) { 14
    .2. Halting Social Changesection15 (Leading Institutions, Main Classes) {; 15
    .1. Basic Hierarchies in Software Development; 15
    .2. International Hierarchies in Software Development; 15
    .3. Knowledge Hierarchies in Software Development; section16 (R & D, SPM) {; section17 Empirical Example: The MatLab Programming Language; References; chapterFive (Using Code: The Social Diffusion of Programming Tasks) {; section18 (Intuition, Automation) {; section19 (Everyday Norms, Routine Parameters) {; 19
    .1. Requests from Users; 19
    .2. Solutions from Users 4
    .4. Software Development and Communicationsection5 Empirical Example: GitHub; References; chapterThree (Writing Code: Software Development and Communication) {; section6 [Open Talk, Open Code] {; section7 [Social Morphology, Code Syntax] {; 7
    .1. The Logics of Programming; 7
    .2. Control and Coordination; section8 [Discursive Interface, Graphical Interface] {; 8
    .1. The Expressive Dimension of Code; 8
    .2. Scientific Code Writing; 8
    .3. Vital Software, Residual Software; section9 [Human Community, Developer Community] {; 9
    .1. The "Other Face" of Programming 9
    .2. Self-Explanation and Documentation9
    .3. The Community of Programmers; section10 Empirical Example: FORTRAN, ALGOL, and COBOL; References; 2ndPart Codifying Society; chapterFour (Owning Code: Institutional Aspects of Software Development) {; section11 (Institutional Barriers, Code Shields) {; section12 (Geographical Space, Namespace) {; section13 ("Economic Order" & "Social Order") {; 13
    .1. Funding for Software Development; 13
    .2. Software Development and Scientific Reputation; section14 (Social Paralysis, Software Evolution) {; 14
    .1. Fostering Code Evolution Section1 [Swift Relations, Agile Development] {1
    .1. The Technical Worth of Collaboration; 1
    .2. Expressions of Collaboration; 1
    .3. Individuals and Groups; 1
    .4. Distant Collaboration; section2 [Globalization, Modularization] {; 2
    .1. Modules and Toolboxes; 2
    .2. Modularization and Communication; 2
    .3. Software Flexibility; section3 [Inherited Knowledge, Inherited Code] {; 3
    .1. Inheritance; 3
    .2. Libraries; section4 [Social Connections, Technical Connections] {; 4
    .1. Software Development as State of Nature; 4
    .2. Software Development as Culture; 4
    .3. Trust and Leadership
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital/Print
    Print Access
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Periodicals (Downstairs)
    42
    Stored offsite. Please request print.
    16
  • Digital
    Hiroshi Matsuda, Takashi Asada, Aya Midori Tokumaru, editors.
    Summary: This book describes the latest modalities such as tau PET imaging for diagnosis of Alzheimer's disease and other dementias, and also provides information on handling and analyzing imaging data that is not found in other books. In addition, it introduces routine imaging studies in the management of dementia in Japan. The prevalence of dementia has increased over the past few decades, either because of greater awareness and more accurate diagnosis, or because increased longevity has created a larger population of the elderly, the age group most commonly affected. Although only clinical assessment can lead to a diagnosis of dementia, neuroimaging in dementia is recommended by most clinical guidelines, and its adjunct role has traditionally been to exclude a mass lesion rather than to support a specific diagnosis. Neuroimaging may be also helpful for developing new strategies to achieve diagnoses as early as possible for therapies aimed at slowing the progression of neurodegenerative diseases manifesting dementia. Under these conditions, all clinicians and researchers who are involved in neuroimaging for dementia should decide which patients to scan, when imaging patients is most useful, which modality to use, how to handle imaging data from many institutions, and which analytical tool to use. This edition comprises contributions from leading Japanese experts in their fields.

    Contents:
    1
    Epidemiology of dementia in Japan 2
    Diagnostic criteria for Alzheimer's disease 3
    Pathology for Alzheimer's disease and other dementias 4
    Structural neuroimaging in Alzheimer's disease 5
    MRI diagnosis in other dementias 6
    Diffusion Tensor Imaging in dementia 7
    Arterial Spin Labeling in dementia 8
    Magnetic Resonance Spectroscopy in dementia 9
    Resting-state fMRI in dementia 10
    FDG-PET in Alzheimer's disease 11
    Amyloid PET in Alzheimer's disease 12
    Tau PET in neurodegenerative diseases manifesting dementia 13
    Bran perfusion SPECT in Alzheimer's disease 14
    Neuroimaging of dementia with Lewy bodies 15
    Neuroimaging of frontotemporal lobe degeneration 16
    Neuroimaging study of Alzheimer's disease in population-based cohort 17
    Handling of MRI data in a multi-center study 18
    Standardization and quality control of PET data in a multi-center study.
    Digital Access Springer 2017
  • Digital
    edited by Kristin L. Bigos, Ahmad R. Hariri, Daniel R. Weinberger.
    Contents:
    Imaging genetics / Kristin L. Bigos, Ahmad R. Hariri, Daniel R. Weinberger
    Molecular neuroimaging genetics / Patrick M. Fisher and Gitte M. Knudsen
    Neuroreceptor imaging of genetic variation impacting the serotonin transporter / Greg Perlman, Christine DeLorenzo, J. John Mann, Ramin Parsey
    Imaging of genetic variation impacting dopamine transmission parameters / Elsmarieke van de Giessen, Rassil Ghazzaoui, Raj Narendran, Anissa Abi-Dargham
    Imaging genetics of dopamine synaptic terminal activity / Giuseppe Blasi and Alessandro Bertolino
    Variability of antidepressant drug response : contribution of imaging genetics studies / Ulrich Rabl, Bernhard M. Meyer, Lukas Pezawas
    Imaging genetics of pharmacological response in psychiatric disorders / Philip R. Szeszko and Anil K. Malhotra
    Imaging genetics of Williams syndrome / Daniel P. Eisenberg, Ranjani Prabhakaran, Karen F. Berman
    Identifying unanticipated genes and mechanisms in serious mental illness : GWAS based imaging genetics strategies / Steven G. Potkin, Theo G.M. van Erp, Shichun Ling, Fabio Macciardi, Xiaohui Xie
    Imaging genetics of brain structure / Jason L. Stein, Derrek P. Hibar, Paul M. Thompson
    Imaging genetics of the reward system / Caroline F. Zink
    Imaging genetics of schizophrenia / Thomas M. Lancaster, Joanne Doherty, David E.J. Linden, Jeremy Hall
    Imaging genetics of depression / Matthew D. Sacchet, Lara C. Foland-Ross, Ian H. Gotlib
    Imaging genetics of anxiety disorders / Mats Fredrikson
    Imaging genetics of bipolar disorder / Ole A. Andreassen
    Genetic-neuroimaging studies of basal ganglia disorders / Trevor W. Robbins, James B. Rowe, Roger A. Barker
    Imaging genetics of antisocial behavior and psychopathy / Hayley M. Dorfman, Joshua W. Buckholtz
    Incorporating the environment into neurogenetics research an imaging gene by environment interactions (IG x E) approach / Luke Hyde, Ryan Bogdan, Ahmad R. Hariri
    Imaging genetics of episodic memory / Björn Rasch, Susanne Erk, Andreas Papassotiropoulos, Dominique J.-F. de Quervain
    Imaging genetics of working memory / Tristram A. Lett, Eva J. Brandl, Daniel J. Müller, Andreas Heinz, Henrik Walter
    Neurobiology and genetics of cognitive aging : insights from neuroimaging studies / John C. Muse, Milap Nowrangi, Daniel R. Weinberger, Venkata S. Mattay
    Neuroimaging genetics of Alzheimer's disease / Theresa M. Harrison, Alison C. Burggren, Susan Y. Bookheimer
    Imaging genetics of the hypothalamic pituitary adrenal axis : implications for psychopathology / Nadia S. Corral-Frias, Lindsay J. Michalski, Christina R. Di Iorio, Ryan Bogdan.
    Digital Access Oxford [2016]
  • Digital
    Marek Kubicki, Martha E. Shenton, editors.
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    Simonetta Gerevini, editor.
    Summary: This book presents the variability of the effects of Covid-19 on the nervous system (NS), with the purpose to update content and images based on improved scientific evidence. Current available data show that involvement of the NS is frequent in patients with SARS-CoV-2 infection. The most common neurologic syndromes include cerebrovascular disorders, encephalopathies, inflammatory Central Nervous System (CNS) syndromes, peripheral neurologic disorders, psychiatric disorders. The pathophysiology of neurological manifestations is far from being understood. They can be coincidental, common complications of severe viral infection, or direct consequence of the viral infection either via indirect para-infective mechanisms or direct viral penetration of NS. Experimental animal models had previously demonstrated the neuroinvasive potential of SARS-CoV and the detection of viral particles in special structures such as the thalamus, nucleus ambiguous and nucleus of the solitary tract, suggesting that CNS invasion can contribute significantly to the severe outcome not only through direct damage to neurological structures, but also through a potential detrimental effect on cardiorespiratory responses. Up to now, the detection of SARS-CoV-2 RNA in the cerebrospinal fluid of COVID-19 patients has been reported occasionally and conclusive pathological demonstration of the virus in the CNS is lacking. In this scenario, the role of neuroimaging is fundamental. These considerations highlight the urgent need to better clarify the neurotropic potential of the SARS-CoV-2 virus, and to verify on human autoptic tissue the mechanisms demonstrated in the experimental animal model in order to develop potential strategies to prevent CNS invasion and to adapt treatment protocols based on neurological involvement. CT scan is useful to detect large hemorrhage and ischemic lesions, that have been reported in Covid-19 patients, but lacks identifying other possible neurological complications, such as microhemorrhage or encephalitis. MRI could overcome these limitations; in particular the use of specific sequences may reveal microvascular lesions that can occur during the disease course, according to the described pathogenesis. This book will be an invaluable tool for neuroradiologists, radiologists, neurologists, and all physicians involved in the pandemic.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    Silvana Galderisi, Lynn E. DeLisi, Stefan Borgwardt, editors.
    Summary: This book presents the state of the art in the use of neuroimaging technologies in the study of schizophrenia and other primary psychotic disorders. The contributions of neuroimaging in the characterization of these disorders are reviewed across diagnoses, by focusing on psychopathological domains and at-risk populations in order to understand the implications for treatment. The principal neuroimaging findings are described in detail, identifying those that are common to and specific for each disorder and highlighting important pitfalls. Attention is drawn to potential translational aspects of research in the field, with discussion of emerging innovative perspectives. Neuroimaging research has shown that abnormalities of brain structure and function associated with psychiatric disorders do not reflect the boundaries of current diagnostic categories. However, neuroimaging findings are being reconsidered in the light of recent research proposals aimed at re-conceptualizing classification systems in Psychiatry. Written by leading experts, this book will appeal to all with an interest in the field, including researchers, clinicians, and trainees.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    Natalia Zakharova, Valery Kornienko, Alexander Potapov, and Igor Pronin.
    Summary: The main purpose of this book is to present emerging neuroimaging data in order to define the role of primary and secondary structural and hemodynamic disturbances in different phases of traumatic brain injury (TBI) and to analyze the potential of diffusion tensor MRI, tractography and CT perfusion imaging in evaluating the dynamics of TBI. The authors present a new MRI classification of brain stem and hemispheric cortical/subcortical damage localization that is of significant prognostic value. New data are provided regarding the pathogenesis and dynamics of diffuse and focal brain injuries and qualitative and quantitative changes in the brain white matter tracts. It is shown that diffuse axonal injury can be considered a clinical model of multidimensional "split brain" with commissural, association and projection fiber disorders. The book will be of interest for neuroradiologists, neurosurgeons, neurologists and others with an interest in the subject.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    Daniel Thomas Ginat, Juan E. Small, Pamela Whitney Schaefer, editors.
    Summary: This book reviews the imaging features associated with selected classes of pharmaceuticals and drugs on brain, head and neck, and spine and explains the implications of the imaging findings for the neuroradiologist and the clinician. Some agents produce characteristic abnormalities with distinctive imaging features, while others have a spectrum of manifestations on imaging. Still further agents produce rather nonspecific changes on imaging, requiring a differential diagnosis. In this book, informative cases are depicted by rich images, with concise accompanying explanatory text that reviews the class of agent and the mechanism of action and discusses image interpretation and its significance.

    Contents:
    Anti-Tumor and Immunosuppressive Agents
    Contrast Agents
    Illicit, Recreational, Abuse
    Anti-Seizure
    Hemostatic, Embolization
    Anticoagulant
    Radiopharmaceuticals
    Antibiotics
    Antipsychotic, Neurodegenerative
    Electrolytes, Minerals, and Fluid Regulating Agents
    Cosmetic Fillers
    Miscellaneous
    Drug Delivery Mechanisms.
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Digital
    Daniel Thomas Ginat, Juan E. Small, Pamela Whitney Schaefer, editors.
    Summary: This book, now in a revised and updated second edition, reviews the imaging-relevant features of selected classes of pharmaceuticals and drugs regarding CNS and head and neck images. The agents discussed belong to classes like Drugs and Alcohol; Contrast Agents; Chemotherapy; Immunotherapy; Antibiotics, Antiviral Agents, and Vaccines; Antiepilectic and Antipsychotic Agents; and Hematologic Agents, each of which is addressed in a separate chapter. The books closing part addresses agents from various other classes. For each class, concise texts and rich images review and illustrate the mechanism of action. All chapters from the previous edition have been extensively updated, and new chapters on certain pharmaceuticals have been added. Highlighting the implications of these agents for imaging findings, the book offers an excellent resource for neuroradiologists and clinicians alike. .
    Digital Access Springer 2022
  • Digital
    Manoj Mannil, Sebastian F.-X. Winklhofer, editors.
    Summary: This book provides a concise overview of emerging technologies in the field of modern neuroimaging. Fundamental principles of the main imaging modalities are described as well as advanced imaging techniqes including diffusion weighted imaging, perfusion imaging, arterial spin labeling, diffusion tensor imaging, intravoxel incoherent motion, MR spectroscopy, functional MRI, and artificial intelligence. The physical concepts underlying each imaging technique are carefully and clearly explained in a way suited to a medical audience without prior technical knowledge. In addition, the clinical applications of the various techniques are described with the aid of illustrative clinical examples. Helpful background information is also presented on the core principles of MRI and the evolution of neuroimaging, and important references to current medical research are highlighted. The book will meet the needs of a range of non-technological professionals with an interest in advanced neuroimaging, including radiology researchers and clinicians in the fields of neurology, neurosurgery, and psychiatry.

    Contents:
    Introduction
    Ultrasound in Neuroimaging
    X-Ray
    Basics of Computed Tomography
    CT Angiography
    CT Perfusion
    Flat Panel CT/ Cone Beam CT
    Dual Energy CT
    Photon counting CT
    Basics of Magnetic Resonance Imaging
    MR Angiography
    Perfusion Techniques
    Susceptibility Weighted Imaging
    Diffusion weighted Imaging (DWI)
    Diffusion tensor imaging
    Diffusion kurtosis imaging Technical background and clinical applications
    IVIM Technical background and clinical applications
    MR Spectroscopy
    MTR
    Functional MRI
    PET in Neuroimaging
    EEG
    Radiomics - Outlook into the future.
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    Berczi, Istvan; Szentivanyi, Andor.
  • Digital
    Hiroshi Mitoma, Mario Manto, editors.
    Summary: A translational overview of neuroimmune diseases for neuroscientists and clinicians that clarifies the pathological mechanisms underlying neuroimmune diseases and builds a comprehensive bridge between the latest research findings and their clinical implications in daily practice. The material is presented in two steps. The first section comprises a review of the pathogenic actions of immune cells in brain diseases. Here the authors discuss the mechanisms through which immune cells disrupt the functions of nerve cells. The second section explores the ways in which the brain becomes dysfunctional due to impaired nerve cell function. Based on pathogenesis, diagnostic and therapeutic strategies are discussed for each clinical category. The book will be invaluable for use in clinical practice of neuroimmune diseases.

    Contents:
    Intro; Contents; Part I: Fundamental Mechanisms and General Principles; Overview of Mechanisms Underlying Neuroimmune Diseases; Introduction; Divergence and Convergence in Neuroimmune Diseases; Blood-Brain Barrier and Blood-Nerve Barrier; Local Immune Cascades; Therapeutic Strategies of Neuroimmune Diseases; Clinical Features of Neuroimmune Diseases; Lesion-Dependent Neurological Symptoms; Association of Other Neuroimmune Diseases; Multifocal Lesions; Divergent Immune Mechanisms; Fundamental Pathogenic Factors Determining Clinical Profiles; Autoantibody- and Cell-Mediated Immune Mechanisms Actions of Divergent Pro-Inflammatory CytokinesTh17 Cell Plasticity; Multiple Actions of IL-17; Th17-Related Inflammation and the Neuronal Apoptosis; Multiple Actions of IL-22, IL-23, and GM-CSF; Open Problems and Therapeutic Applications; The Role of Th17 Cells in Immunopathogenesis of Alzheimer Disease; Link Between Immune System and Neurodegeneration; Th17-Mediated Mechanisms in Alzheimer Disease; The Role of Th17 Cells in Immunopathogenesis of Parkinson Disease; Immune-Mediated Mechanisms in Parkinson Disease; Th17 Cell Role in Parkinson Disease Neuroimmune Mechanisms in Neuropsychiatric DiseasesFuture Perspective; References; Roles of Effector T Cells in Neurological Autoimmunity; Introduction; Dysregulation of the Th1/Th2 Balance in MS; Th17 Cells in MS/EAE; CD8 T Cells in MS/EAE; Possible Therapeutic Targets for Neurodegeneration and Demyelination in MS and EAE; Conclusion; References; The Role of Th17 Cells in Immunopathogenesis of Neuroinflammatory Disorders; Introduction; The Role of Th17 Cells in Immunopathogenesis of Multiple Sclerosis; Roles of Th1 and Th17 Cells in Pathogenesis of Multiple Sclerosis Neuroinflammatory CascadesTriggering of Autoimmunity: Parainfectious and Paraneoplastic Conditions; Cross Talk Between the Immune System and Degenerative or Psychiatric Diseases; Mechanisms of Neuroimmune Diseases; Mechanisms of T Cell-Mediated Neuroinflammation and Autoimmunity; Mechanisms of Antibody-Mediated Neuroinflammation and Autoimmunity; Role of Infections in the Neuroinflammation and Autoimmunity; Neuroimmune Mechanisms in Paraneoplastic Diseases; Neuroimmune Mechanisms in Vascular Inflammatory Diseases; Neuroimmune Mechanisms in Neurodegenerative Diseases The Role of Th17 Cells in Immunopathogenesis of Schizophrenia DiseaseImmunopathology of Schizophrenia Disease; Immunopathology of Schizophrenia from Th17 Cell Viewpoint; Conclusion; References; Significance of Autoantibodies; Introduction; Theme A: Causes of Antibody Development; Paraneoplastic Neurologic Disorders (PNS); Clinical Example; Anti-Yo Antibody-Associated Paraneoplastic Cerebellar Degenerations; Infection; Clinical Example; Herpes Simplex Virus-1 (HSV-1) Encephalitis and NMDAR Encephalitis; Injuries to the CNS; Clinical Example
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    Susumu Kusunoki, editor.
    Contents:
    Part I. Basic Neuroimmunology
    1. Cellular Immunity and multiple sclerosis: Current understanding
    2. Glia and neuroimmunology
    3. Animal model
    4. Blood-brain barrier and blood-nerve barrier
    Part II. Clinical Neuroimmunology
    5. Multiple Sclerosis: etiology and mechanism, with special reference to Asians
    6. Multiple sclerosis: Diagnosis and treatment
    7. Neuropsychological aspects of multiple sclerosis
    8. Neuromyelitis optica: Diagnosis and treatment
    9. Guillain-Barré syndrome: Epidemiology, diagnosis and treatment
    10. Autoantibodies in Guillain-Barre syndrome
    11. Fisher syndrome
    12. POEMS syndrome
    13. Treatment of myasthenia gravis after the 2014 Japanese clinical guideline
    14. N-methyl-D-aspartate receptor antibody-associated autoimmune encephalitis
    15. Hashimoto encephalopathy
    16. Paraneoplastic neurological diseases
    17. Antibodies to ganglionic acetylcholine receptor
    18. Novel treatment.
    Digital Access Springer 2016
  • Print
    edited by Bibiana Bielekova, Gary Birnbaum, Robert P. Lisak.
    Contents:
    Neuroimmunology for neurologists
    Therapies of neuro-immunologic diseases
    Multiple sclerosis
    Multiple sclerosis in children
    Neuromyelitis optica spectrum disorders
    Immune-mediated disease of the neuromuscular junction
    Immmunopathogenesis of inflammatory myopathies : current concepts
    Guillain Barré syndrome
    CIDP and related variants and overlap disorders
    Paraneoplastic and idiopathic autoimmune neurological disorders affecting the central nervous system and autoimmune dysautonomia
    Neurologic complications of systemic autoimmune diseases.
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Books: General Collection (Downstairs)
    QP356.47 .N48 2019
    1
  • Digital
    Amanda L. Piquet, Enrique Alvarez, editors.
    Summary: This book provides a clinical focus on neuroinflammatory diseases as well as a review in pathophysiology and treatment approaches. Organized into six parts, the book begins with a basic review of the immune system and concepts for learning and treating neuroimmune conditions. The next four sections cover specific subfields of neuroimmunology and autoimmune neurology - the clinical and diagnostic features of multiple sclerosis, other autoimmune conditions of the central nervous system, autoimmune conditions of the peripheral nervous system, and systemic autoimmune conditions that affect the nervous system. To conclude, Section six discusses various clinical approaches to specific presentations in neuroimmunology, including pediatric demyelinating diseases. These sections provide practical clinical information to improve the reader's knowledge in this complex field. The chapters are written by world renown authors with extensive knowledge to help provide up to date information. The full scope of autoimmune neurology is discussed, which is a unique feature of this book. Neuroimmunology serves as a resource for those in training including residents and fellows to provide clear clinical reasoning and background in a rapidly advancing field.

    Contents:
    Part 1 Immunology, Pathophysiology and ImmunotherapyIntroduction to Immunology and Overview of the Immune System
    Immunology of Multiple sclerosis
    Pathology of Multiple sclerosis
    Antibody pathogenesis and detection method for neuronal autoantibodies
    Mechanisms and Principles of Immunotherapy.-Part 2 Multiple Sclerosis
    Natural history of MS
    Evolution of the diagnostic criteria in MS
    Epidemiology/Demographics/Environmental effects of MS
    Pediatric MS
    Treatment of MS
    Trial design
    Disease modifying treatments
    Treatment selection and Treatment discontinuation.-Part 3 Autoimmune Neurology
    Autoimmune Encephalitis
    Autoimmune Myelitis and Myelopathy
    Autoimmune Epilepsy
    Autoimmune Movement Disorders
    Autoimmune Demyelinating disease: NMOSD and anti-MOG
    Autoimmune Ophthalmologic disease
    Autoimmune Neurology in Pediatrics
    Treatment Approaches in Autoimmune Neurology
    Part 4 Other CNS inflammatory diseases
    Neurorheumatology
    Neurosarcoidosis
    Vasculitis
    Hypertrophic Pachymeningitis
    Role of infection and immunodeficiency in inflammatory disease
    Role of Oncological disease in inflammatory disease.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    edited by Samuel David.
    Contents:
    Immune response in the human central nervous system in multiple sclerosis and stroke / Hans Lassmann
    In vivo imaging of glial and immune cell responses in CNS injury and disease / Alexandre Paré and Steve Lacroix
    Roles of CD4 and CD8 T lymphocytes in multiple sclerosis and experimental autoimmune encephalomyelitis / Nathalie Arbour and Alexandre Prat
    Microglia and macrophage responses and their role after spinal cord injury / Antje Kroner, Andrew D. Greenhalgh, and Samuel David
    The complexity of the innate immune system activation in stroke pathogenesis / María Isabel Cuartero, Ignacio Lizasoain, María Angeles Moro, and Ivan Ballesteros
    Neuroinflammation in aging / Ashley M. Fenn, Diana M. Norden, and Jonathan P. Godbout
    Peripheral and central immune mechanisms in neuropathic pain / Ji Zhang
    Inflammation in the pathogenesis of inherited peripheral neuropathies / Janos Groh, Dennis Klein, Antje Kroner, and Rudolf Martini
    Obesity and neuroinflammation-associated mood and cognitive disorders / Nathalie Castanon, Giamal Luheshi, and Sophie Layé
    Viral infections of the central nervous system : pathogenic and protective effects of neuroinflammation / John G. Walsh and Christopher Power
    The interplay between the peripheral and local immune response in recovery from acute central nervous system injuries / Catarina Raposo and Michal Schwartz
    Inflammation and optic nerve regeneration / Lukas Andereggen, Ephraim F. Trakhtenberg, Yin Yuqin, and Larry I. Benowitz
    Effects of macrophages and monocytes in remyelination of the CNS / Muktha Natrajan, Bibiana Bielekova, Robin JM Franklin
    Microglial involvement in Rett syndrome / Noël C. Derecki, James C. Cronk, and Jonathan Kipnis
    The role of regulatory T cells and microglia in amyotrophic lateral sclerosis / David R. Beers, Weihua Zhao, Kristopher G. Hooten, and Stanley H. Appel
    Role of TNF-alpha in synaptic plasticity / Renu Heir and David Stellwagen
    Resolution mediators that control inflammation / Jan M. Schwab, Harald Prüss, and Charles N. Serhan.
    Digital Access Wiley 2015
  • Digital
    [edited by] Nicola Woodroofe and Sandra Amor.
    Contents:
    Immune privilege of the brain
    Innate immunity in the CNS : a focus on the myeloid cell
    Adaptive immune responses in the CNS
    Ageing and the immune response in the CNS
    Brain repair : the role of endogenous and transplanted neural stem cells
    Neuroinflammation in Alzheimer's, Parkinson's, and Huntington's diseases
    CNS infections
    Neuroimmunology of amyotrophic lateral sclerosis
    Demyelinating disorders of the CNS
    Other autoimmune disorders : systemic lupus erythematosus, primary Sjogren's syndrome, gluten-related neurological dysfunction, and paraneoplastic neurological syndromes
    Inflammation in the pathogenesis of depression
    Immune responses in the CNS in epilepsy
    Inflammatory mediators and dysfunction of the neurovascular unit following ischaemia reperfusion
    Spinal cord injury
    Immune responses to tumours in the CNS.
    Digital Access Wiley 2014
  • Digital
    Golam M. Khandaker, Urs Meyer, Peter B. Jones, editors.
    Summary: This book provides a comprehensive summary of the cutting edge scientific evidence regarding the role of immune system in the pathogenesis and treatment of schizophrenia and related psychotic disorders. It illustrates the role of inflammation and immunity in schizophrenia drawing on both basic science and clinical research. The chapters provide up-to-date summaries of immunological risk factors for schizophrenia and related psychotic disorders, and underlying mechanisms as informed by neuroimaging, genetic, clinical and animal experimental studies. In addition, the book will illuminate the scope for immunological treatment for schizophrenia.

    Contents:
    Preface
    A Brief History of Immunological Research into Psychosis and Pathways for Immune Influence of the Brain.-Basic Concept of Microglia Biology and Neuroinflammation in Relation to Psychiatry
    Epidemiological Studies of Prenatal and Childhood Infection and Schizophrenia
    Schizophrenia, Cytokines and Other Systemic Inflammatory Mediators [to include oxidative stress and lymphocyte alterations]
    Association between Schizophrenia, Microbial Infection and Microbiota
    Autoantibodies and psychosis
    Effect of Infection on Cognition in Schizophrenia and Healthy People
    Role of Infection, Autoimmunity, Atopic Disorders and the Immune System in Schizophrenia: Evidence from Epidemiological and Genetic Studies
    Microglial Activation and Psychotic Disorders: Evidence from Pre-clinical and Clinical Studies
    Early-Life Adversity, Systemic Inflammation, and Co-Morbid Physical and Psychiatric Illnesses of Adult Life
    Inflammation, Antipsychotic Drugs and Evidence for Effectiveness of Anti-inflammatory Agents in Schizophrenia.
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    Katja E. Wartenberg, Khalid Shukri, Tamer Abdelhak, editors.
    Summary: This book provides guidance for physicians confronted with acute neurological crises in the context of patient safety centred practice standards. It highlights how the implementation of patient safety standards in the neurointensive care unit leads to better clinical outcomes and emphasizes the importance of utilizing appropriate resources, ensuring evidence-based practice is followed. Cost effectiveness, continuous performance improvement and the creation of a non-punitive culture are also discussed. Neurointensive Care: A Clinical Guide to Patient Safety is aimed at physicians around the world caring for critically ill neurological patients either in the emergency department or intensive care unit, and may also be valuable for nurses working in these settings. Neurointensivists, neurologists, neurosurgeons, anesthesiologists, general intensivists, emergency physicians, and trainees dealing with neurological catastrophes will find this book of interest.

    Contents:
    Patient Safety Standards in the Neuro-ICU
    Airway Safety in the Neurocritical Care Unit
    Mechanical Ventilation in the Neuro-ICU
    Nutrition in Neuro-ICU
    Monitoring in the Neurocritical Care Unit
    Intracranial Pressure Monitoring
    Postoperative Care in Neurooncology
    Subarachnoid Hemorrhage
    Intracerebral Hemorrhage
    Patient Safety in Acute Ischemic Stroke
    Cerebral Venous Thrombosis
    Bacterial Meningitis
    Brain Abscess
    Seizures and Status Epilepticus in the Neurologic Intensive Care Unit
    Traumatic Brain Injury
    Patient Safety in Guillain Barre Syndrome and Acute Neuromuscular Disorders
    Acute Spinal Disorders
    Care for Complications after Catastrophic Brain Injury
    Neuroimaging in the Neuro-ICU
    Brain Death
    Ethics in the Neuro-ICU.
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Digital
    Sarah E. Nelson, Paul A. Nyquist, editors.
    Contents:
    Intro
    Preface
    Series Editor Introduction
    Contents
    Contributors
    Part I: Pathways for Intervention
    1: Management of Elevated Intracranial Pressure
    Introduction
    Intracranial Anatomy and Physiology
    Anatomy
    Physiology
    Diagnosis of Elevated ICP
    Clinical Symptoms
    Physical Examination Findings and Herniation Syndromes
    Causes of Increased ICP
    Algorithm for Management of ICP
    Monitoring ICP
    Patient Triage and Flow
    Individual Methods for ICP Control
    Head Positioning
    Hyperventilation
    Osmolar Therapy
    Sedation
    Seizure Control Hypothermia
    Decompressive Craniectomy
    Barbiturates
    Steroids
    Paralysis
    Conclusions
    References
    2: Emergent Treatment of Status Epilepticus
    Definitions and Epidemiology
    Etiology
    SE Patients: Triage to the Neurointensive Care Unit
    Diagnostic Workup
    General
    EEG
    Imaging
    Management of SE
    Initial SE Management
    Refractory SE and Super-refractory SE
    SE Pharmacology
    Complications of SE
    In-Hospital Decision-Making
    SE Outcomes and Discharge Destinations
    Clinical Outcomes
    Prognostic Scores
    Conclusion
    References 3: Acute Airway Management and Ventilation in the Neurocritical Care Unit
    Introduction
    The Decision to Intubate
    Acute Airway Management
    Assessing Difficulty
    Initial Management
    Pharmacotherapy for Airway Management
    Induction Agents
    Neuromuscular Blockade
    Mechanical Ventilation
    Volume Versus Pressure Control
    Ventilatory Modes
    Airway Concerns in Specific Neurologic Conditions
    Cervical Spine Injury
    Traumatic Brain Injury
    Acute Stroke
    Status Epilepticus
    Neuromuscular Disorders
    Extubation and Tracheostomy
    References 4: Cardiac Complications in Neurocritical Care Patients
    Introduction
    Hypertension
    Cardiomyopathy
    Shock
    Cardiogenic Shock
    Septic Shock
    Neurogenic Shock
    Hemorrhagic Shock
    Myocardial Infarction
    STEMI
    NSTEMI
    EKG Abnormalities and Arrhythmias
    EKG Abnormalities
    Arrhythmias
    Cardiac Arrest
    Pharmacology
    References
    5: Therapeutic Hypothermia in Neurocritical Care
    History of TH
    Therapeutic Hypothermia: Definitions and Mechanism
    Definitions
    Mechanism
    Indications for Therapeutic Hypothermia Induced Normothermia for Fever Prevention in Neurocritical Care
    Critical Care Management During Therapeutic Hypothermia
    Monitoring Temperature
    Induction of TH
    Maintenance of TH
    Rewarming
    Adverse Effects of TH
    Conclusion
    References
    6: Pharmacological Challenges in Neurocritical Care
    Introduction
    Principles of Pharmacokinetic Changes in Adult Critically Ill Patients
    Absorption, Distribution, Metabolism, Elimination (ADME)
    Renal Replacement Therapy (RRT)
    Extracorporeal Membrane Oxygenation (ECMO)
    Plasmapheresis
    Obesity
    Therapeutic Classes
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    edited by Randall C. Edgell, Sean I. Savitz, John Dalfino.
    Summary: Neurointervention in the Medical Specialties is a first-of-its-kind reference that serves as a bridge between the neurointerventionalist and the physicians who most frequently look to these specialists for answers to some of the most intractable problems they face. Providing background on the wide range of diseases treated through neurointervention along with the indications and alternatives to such treatments, this landmark title is grouped into four parts: an introduction to the tools and anatomical structures that are integral to the field; disease processes most often encountered by neurologists, cardiologists, and vascular surgeons; those diseases more frequently treated by neurosurgeons; and finally those diseases first seen by several other specialties including ophthalmologists and head and neck surgeons. Importantly, each chapter includes details of neurointerventional technique and case discussions that are sufficiently detailed to provide a treatment template and guidance to neurointerventionalists in training and practice. At the same time, the descriptions provide referring physicians with insight into how neurointerventional procedures are performed. Finally, there are several concluding, thought-provoking chapters that examine what new opportunities await the field of neurointervention on the horizon. Neurointervention in the Medical Specialties is a major contribution to the literature and invaluable resource for all clinicians and researchers interested in this exciting field.
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Digital
    Randall C. Edgell, Kara M. Christopher, editors.
    Summary: This book covers the intersections between neurointervention and neurology, neurointervention and neurosurgery, and neurointervention and other specialties. It fills the gap in the literature by placing specific emphasis on appropriate patient selection, preparation, and post-procedural management. Concise and comprehensive, this text covers the increasingly important aspects of the neurointerventionalist profession, as it has moved away from a purely technical role to a focus on clinical care. In addition, the most rapidly expanding area of neurointervention, ischemic stroke, is thoroughly examined in this text, where other texts on this subject fail. It is also meant as a reference for non-neurointerventionalists who may desire to learn more about how their patients can benefit from the therapeutic or adjunctive techniques that the neurointerventionalist can provide. Neurointervention in the Medical Specialties, Second Edition is an essential guide written for neurointerventional specialists from all backgrounds, both in practice and in training.
    Digital Access Springer 2022
  • Digital
    Kalani, Yashar; Park, Min S.; Stiefel, Michael F.
    Digital Access
    Provider
    Version
    Thieme-Connect
    Thieme MedOne Neurosurgery
  • Digital
    Philip A. Weissbrod, David O. Francis, editors.
    Summary: This comprehensive text summarizes what is known about the myriad of different neurological conditions that cause dysfunction of communication, swallowing, and breathing as it relates to the upper aerodigestive tract. It serves to provide clinicians and scientists, at all levels of experience, a practical and thorough review of these diseases, their management, and frontiers in science. Chapters are written by experts in these conditions from a broad spectrum of medical specialties in order to create a book that is inclusive of diagnostic and therapeutic considerations that clinicians should think about when caring for patients with these conditions. Neurologic and Neurodegenerative Diseases of the Larynx will be an instrumental resource in guiding clinicians to better recognize the subtle and not so subtle voice, swallowing, and airway manifestations of these diseases, and improve management of patient symptoms and concerns in order to maximize both quality of life and longevity. It will aide otolaryngologists, laryngologists, neurologists, speech language pathologists, and other allied health care professionals in developing a more efficient, evidence-based, patient-focused, and multi-specialty approach to managing these complex and challenging patients.

    Contents:
    Part I: Evaluations
    Anatomy from the Inside Out
    Laryngeal Physiology
    Neuroanatomy of Voice and Swallowing
    The Complete Neurologic Exam
    Evaluation of Neurogenic Voice Disorders
    Evaluation of Speech
    Evaluation of Swallow
    High-Resolution manometry
    Evaluation of the Pulmonary System
    Electomyography of the Larynx
    Part II: Neurologic Disease
    Amyotrophic Lateral Sclerosis and Motor Neuron Disease
    Parkinson Disease
    Parkinson-Plus Syndromes
    Multiple Sclerosis
    Alzheimer Disease
    Laryngeal Dystonia
    Essential Tremor
    Cerebrovascular Accident
    Iatrogenic Injury
    Congential Neurologic Disease
    Neurogenic Cough
    Inducible Laryngeal Obstruction/Paradoxical Vocal Fold Motion
    Part III Intervention
    A Person-Centered Approach to Breaking Bad News
    Treatment of the Velum
    Laryngeal and Extralaryngeal Botulinum Toxin Injections
    Saliva Management
    Management of Glottic Incompetency
    Laryngeal Diversion Procedures
    Deep Brain and Vagal Nerve Stimulation
    Laryngeal Reinnervation
    Management of the Cricopharyngeus
    Voice Therapy
    Swallow Therapy
    Augmentative and Alternative Communication.
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    volume editors José Biller and José M. Ferro.
    Digital Access
    Provider
    Version
    ScienceDirect
    ScienceDirect
    ScienceDirect
  • Digital/Print
    Digital Access
    Provider
    Version
    ClinicalKey
    ScienceDirect
    Print Access
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Periodicals (Downstairs)
    52
    Stored offsite. Please request print.
    41
  • Print
    Eelco F.M. Wijdicks.
    Summary: "Neurologic consultations are essential to patient outcomes, not only providing diagnostic, therapeutic, and prognostic advice but also directing care to the patient. Neurologic Complications of Critical Illness is the foremost guide for neurologists entering the intensive care unit (ICU). This fourth edition has been thoroughly updated, refreshed, and expanded in recognition of the vast number of changes in neurology and neurocritical care. In addition, every chapter provides a representative selection of the state-of-the art management and latest clinical innovations in critical care medicine."--Provided by publisher.
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Books: General Collection (Downstairs)
    RC350.N49 W55 2023
    1
  • Digital
    Michael A. Meyer.
    Contents:
    Chapter 1. Introduction to Differential Diagnosis in Neurology
    Chapter 2. Cellular and Sub-Cellular Elements of the Nervous System
    Chapter 3. Stroke
    Chapter 4. Epilepsy
    Chapter 5. Demyelinating Disease of the Peripheral and Central Nervous System: Guillain Barre and Multiple Sclerosis
    Chapter 6. The Hippocampus
    Chapter 7. Alzheimer's Disease
    Chapter 8. Neurodegenerative Diseases
    Chapter 9. Diseases of Skeletal Muscle
    Chapter 10. Diseases of the Spinal Cord
    Chapter 11. Cerebellum
    Chapter 12. The Visual Cortex
    Chapter 13. Infections of the Nervous System
    Chapter 14. Neoplastic Disease
    Chapter 15. Traumatic and Toxic Effects on the Nervous System
    Chapter 16. Conclusions.
    Digital Access Springer 2016
  • Digital
    Latha Ganti, Joshua N. Goldstein, editors.
    Summary: This book is an unparalleled resource on neurologic emergencies. Most books on neurologic emergencies focus on treatment of a disease after it is diagnosed (such as stroke, subarachnoid hemorrhage, or meningitis). There are but a few books that focus on how to evaluate the patient with a neurologic symptom, before the diagnosis is made. This is the area that frontline providers, including emergency physicians, family physicians, primary care physicians, hospitalists, urgent care physicians, and midlevel providers struggle with. This book is written by clinicians with a clear understanding of the needs of non-neurologists in the front lines of medicine. The editors are board-certified emergency physicians with fellowship training and expertise in neurologic emergencies. Neurologic Emergencies includes these point-of-care-friendly features: Extensive number of algorithms for distinct presenting symptoms Classic neuroimaging findings A concise bullet on what information needs to be conveyed to consultants Reference to relevant national guidelines where applicable Common chapter format to facilitate quick look-up.

    Contents:
    1. The fast focused neurologic exam
    2.?Rule out acute stroke?
    3. Acute head injury: When to image, when to observe?
    4. Seizure activity: How to examine while treating
    5. Syncope: Who needs imaging? Who needs admission?
    6. Dizziness: An evidence based approach: Better than MRI?
    7. Acute eye symptoms: diplopia and loss of vision
    8. Headache: When to image, when to tap
    9. Neck and back pain: Who needs an MRI?
    10. The non-anatomic exam: psychogenic syndromes and malingering
    11. Altered mental status
    12. Acute generalized weakness
    13. Acute manifestations of chronic neurologic disease
    14. CNS infections
    15. Encephalopathy and Neurotoxicology
    16. Movement disorders emergencies
    17. Basic neuroanatomy
    18. Basic emergent neuroimaging
    Glossary.
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Digital
    Eli E. Zimmerman, Martin A. Samuels, Howard S. Kirshner, Karl E. Misulis.
    Summary: "Written for a wide range of neurology and non-neurology clinicians and residents, Neurologic Localization and Diagnosis: Differential Diagnosis by Complaint-Based Approach is a concise, easy-to-use guide to establishing a neurologic diagnosis. This unique learning resource uses an algorithmic, complaint-based approach to localizing the condition, developing a list of differential diagnoses, and focusing further evaluation on establishing the diagnosis. Leading neurologists provide up-to-date, practical guidance for neurology residents, medical students, and neurologists, as well as nurse practitioners, physician assistants, and non-neurology physicians"-- publisher's description.
    Digital Access ClinicalKey 2023
  • Digital
    edited by Deborah S. Nichols-Larsen, PT, PhD, FASAHP, Professor and Director, School of Health & Rehabilitation Sciences, Associate Dean, College of Medicine, Associate Vice President, Health Services, Columbus, Ohio, [and 5 others].
    Summary: This is a full-colour neuroscience text that skillfully integrates neuromuscular skeletal content. A full-color neuroscience text that skillfully integrates neuromuscular skeletal content covers both pediatric and adult issues Beautiful full-color presentation with numerous images neurorehabilitation in Physical Therapy delivers comprehensive coverage of the structure and function of the human nervous system. It also discusses normal motor development and motor control, as well as common treatment techniques in physical therapy. In order to be engaging to students, cases open each chapter, with questions about those cases appearing throughout the chapter. The text includes numerous tables, flow charts, illustrations, and multiple-choice board-style review questions and is enhanced by a roster of world-renowned clinical contributors.

    Contents:
    Introduction to neuroanatomy / John Buford
    Neuronal structure and function / John A. Buford and D. Michele Basso
    Somatosensory pathways and perception / Deborah S. Larsen
    Sensorimotor systems of the spinal cord / Michele Basso
    Motor control & the descending systems / John A. Buford
    The special senses / Anne Kloos and Deborah S. Larsen
    Cognition, emotion, and language / Deborah S. Larsen
    Neurologic exam / Deborah K. Kegelmeyer, Jill C. Heathcock, and Deborah S. Larsen
    Stroke / Deborah S. Larsen and Deborah Kegelmeyer
    Traumatic brain injury and brain tumor / Deborah Kegelmeyer and Deborah S. Larsen
    Multiple sclerosis / Deborah Kegelmeyer and Anne Kloos
    Basal ganglia disorders: Parkinson's and Huntington's diseases / Anne D. Kloos and Deborah A. Kegelmeyer
    Vestibular/cerebellar disorders / Anne Kloos
    Age-related neurologic changes / Deborah K. Kegelmeyer and Deborah S. Larsen
    Neural tube disorders and hydrocephalus / Jill Heathcock and Deborah S. Larsen
    Cerebral palsy / Jill C. Heathcock and Deborah S. Larsen
    Developmental disabilities / Deborah S. Larsen and Jill Heathcock.
    Digital Access
    Provider
    Version
    AccessPhysiotherapy
    AccessPhysiotherapy
  • Digital
    Jeffrey N. Weiss.
    Summary: This is a concise how-to of successfully treating previously poorly or untreatable neurologic conditions with stem cell therapies. The text examines the IRB approved protocols of NEST (Neurologic Bone Marrow Derived Stem Cell Treatment Study), SCiExVr (Stem Cell Spinal Cord Injury Exoskeleton and Virtual Reality Treatment Study), and ACIST (Alzheimers and Cognitive Impairment Stem Cell Treatment Study). The discussion focuses on the protocols and informed consents and may be used as a template for specialists to develop clinical trials utilizing stem cell based therapy. Other potential noninvasive treatments for brain injury are also discussed. Neurologic Stem Cell Surgery, the sister text to the recently published Retinal and Optic Nerve Stem Cell Surgery, is an invaluable reference for all physicians with an interest in the development of stem cell based treatments.

    Contents:
    1. Study Protocols and Informed Consent
    2. Procedure - Additional Patient Explanation
    3. Some Thoughts
    4. Other Treatment Modalities.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    Norbert Weidner, Rüdiger Rupp, Keith E. Tansey, editors.
    Summary: This clinically focused book aims to cover for the first time all of the neurological aspects relevant to the diagnosis and treatment of spinal cord disease. Furthermore, innovative neurorestorative therapeutic strategies - aiming for repair of the damaged spinal cord and/or reorganization of the remaining nervous system - with significant potential for translation into clinical routine are presented. The book covers a comprehensive list of topics, including epidemiology, neuroanatomy, etiology of compressive and non-compressive spinal cord injury, imaging, neurophysiology, neurological sequelae, and complications with emphasis on dysfunction of the autonomic nervous system. Both clinically established and preclinical therapies are discussed in detail. The book is suited for trainees and practicing clinicians including neurologists, spine surgeons, rehabilitation specialists, neuroradiologists, and occupational/physical therapists; it will also be of value to neuroscientists involved in research into spinal cord disease.

    Contents:
    Part 1 Basics: Epidemiology
    Neuroanatomy
    Pattern of Neurological Dysfunction
    Natural Disease Course
    Part 2 Non-traumatic spinal cord injury: Ischemia
    Neuroimmunology
    Cord Compression (metastasis, hemorrhage, empyema, spondylodiscitis)
    CNS tumors (glioma, ependymoma)
    Pearls: myelopathy
    Part 3 Diagnostics: Blood/CSF workup
    Spinal Cord Imaging
    Spinal Cord Neurophysiology
    Part 4 Neurological Complications: Pain
    Spasticity
    Syringomyelia
    Neurogenic respiratory failure
    Part 5 Autonomic nervous system dysfunction: Neuro Internal Medicine (cardiovasc, endocrine)
    Neurourology
    Neurogastroenterology
    Part 6 Therapy: Neurorehabilitation
    upper extremity restauration
    Neurorehabilitation
    lower extremity restauration
    Neuroregeneration
    Neuroprotection
    Neuroprosthetics
    Translation
    relevance of SCI animal models
    Translation
    clinical trial design.
    Digital Access Springer 2017
  • Digital
    edited by Ahmad Riad Ramadan and Gamaleldin Osman.
    Digital Access
    Provider
    Version
    ScienceDirect
    ClinicalKey
  • Digital/Print
    by the staff of the first division ; ed. by Joseph Collins ...
    Digital Access Google Books 1918-
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Stored offsite. Please request print.
    L346 .N49
    1
  • Digital
    Rodrigo Hasbun, Karen C. Bloch, Adarsh Bhimraj, editors.
    Summary: This book offers a comprehensive review of the most common infectious diseases that affect the nervous system. Written by international experts, it provides a guide to clinicians for accurately diagnosing and treating these challenging syndromes. Organized into six sections, the book presents didactic, up-to-date information on the following topics relating to central nervous system (CNS) infections: diagnosis and evaluation of the patient, bacterial, viral, fungal and mycobacterial infections, disorders of the spinal cord, and a myriad of miscellaneous infections. Chapters specifically reflect and look to resolve the common obstacles clinicians face in the field, such as having unknown etiologies on the majority of CNS infections, insensitive and slow microbiological techniques, an increasing number of immunosuppressed individuals with atypical presentations and pathogens, and a lack of standardized diagnostic algorithms. A complex yet accessible addition to the Current Clinical Neurology Series, Neurological Complications of Infectious Diseases invaluably examines a wide range of infections that have neurological complications and sequelae.

    Contents:
    I. Diagnosis and Evaluation of the Patient with a CNS Infection.-1. Diagnostic Approach to a Patient with Suspected CNS Infection
    2. Molecular Diagnostics in Central Nervous System Infections
    3 .Neurological and Psychiatric Side Effects of Antimicrobials
    II. Bacterial Infections
    4. Neurological Complications of Infective Endocarditis
    5. Neurobrucellosis
    6. Neurological Complications of Syphilis
    III. Viral Infections
    7. Arboviral Central Nervous System Infections
    8. Update on HSV and VZV Encephalitis in Adults
    9. Neurologic Disease in HIV Infection
    IV. Fungal and Mycobacterial Infections
    10. Fungal Infections of the Brain
    11. Neurocysticercosis and Other CNS Helminthic Infections
    12. Free-Living Ameba
    V. Disorders of the Spinal Cord
    13. Bacterial Infections of the Spine
    14. Infectious Primary Myelitis
    15. Post-infectious Encephalomyelitis
    VI. Miscellaneous Infections
    16. Tick-borne Infections of the Central Nervous System
    17. CNS Whipple's Disease.-18. Prion Diseases. .
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Print
    Print
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Books: General Collection (Downstairs)
    Call number varies. Search for Neurological disease and therapy to find individual volumes of this title.
  • Digital
    Armin Ariana.
    Summary: "Despite ongoing research, the cause of most neurological diseases are not completely known and their pathophysiology remains poorly understood. Current treatment options help to manage symptoms and slow the progression of some of the diseases or relieve specific symptoms. Therefore, multidisciplinary clinical care and coordination is essential for increasing survival rate and enhancing patient quality of life. The book covers 8 of the neurological diseases that are more commonly seen in practice and most likely to be ambiguous to junior learners. The first part of each chapter begins by describing and discussing the disease that is the focus of that chapter. The second part focuses on the clinical complications and management of the disease with an emphasis on the delivery of care and communication between practitioners. The ultimate goal is better care and more accurate and efficient treatment. Each chapter ends with a section on the coordination of care between dentist and physician specifically"-- Provided by publisher.

    Contents:
    Introduction / Armin Ariana
    Parkinson's Disease
    Multiple Sclerosis
    Amyotrophic Lateral Sclerosis
    Alzheimer's Disease
    Stroke
    Epilepsy and other Seizure Disorders
    Myasthenia Gravis
    Facial paralysis.
  • Digital
    Şerefnur Öztürk.
    Contents:
    Parkinson's disease
    Stroke
    Multiple sclerosis
    Epilepsy
    Migraine
    Dementia
    Guillain Barré Syndrome
    Subarachnoid haemorrhage
    Neuropathic pain
    Narcolepsy
    Encephalitis
    Brain tumor
    Dystonia
    Myasthenia Gravis
    Transient ischemic attack
    Amyotrophic lateral sclerosis.
    Digital Access Springer 2016
  • Digital
    editors, Julien Bogousslavsky, Laurent Tatu.
    Summary: "Provides examples of human life and creativity as being influenced by mind and brain activity changes"-- Provided by publisher.

    Contents:
    Joan Miró and cyclic depression / M.G. Delgado, J. Bogousslavsky
    Abstract expressionists and brain disease / B. Piechowski-Jozwiak, J. Bogousslavsky
    Louis-Ferdinand Céline: from First World War neurological wound to mythomania / L. Tatu, O. Roynette, J. Bogousslavsky
    Creative minds in the aftermath of the Great War: four neurologically wounded artists / C. Maingon, L. Tatu
    Writers as shell shock witnesses during World War I / L. Tatu, J. Bogousslavsky
    Édouard Manet's tabes dorsalis: from painful ataxia to phantom limb / J. Bogousslavsky, L. Tatu
    Thomas Mann and neurology / N. Caputi, D. Birnbaum, F. Boller
    Arthur Rimbaud: "the man with wind soles' riders" osteosarcoma with postamputation stump pain / J. Bogousslavsky, L. Tatu
    Travelling into alienation and neurology with a painter: Georges Moreau (1848-1901) / O. Walusinski
    Neurology in Russian writers: Tolstoy and Turgeniev / R. Altavilla, M. Paciaroni
    Raymond Roussel's cure with Pierre Janet / L.-P. Luauté
    Henrik Ibsen's battle with cerebrovascular disease / J.C. Frich
    Letter to his father by Franz Kafka: literary reconstruction of a traumatic childhood? / E. Castelon Konkiewitz, E.B. Ziff
    Dementia and change of style: Willem de Kooning: obliteration of disease patterns? / B. Piechowski-Jozwiak, J. Bogousslavsky
    Machado de Assis: original sin / G.R. de Freitas
    Cesare pavese: the laboratory of loneliness: a study of among women only / J. Steffen
    Dissociation, delusion and the splitting of the self in the trial by Franz Kafka: phenomenology and neurobiology of schizophrenia / E. Castelon Konkiewitz, E.B. Ziff.
    Digital Access Karger 2018
  • Digital
    Hani T. S. Benamer.
    Summary: This book includes all the clinically relevant data on the frequencies and patterns of major neurological disorders among Arabs living in or outside the Arab world. Topics covered include stroke, epilepsy, Parkinson's disease, multiple sclerosis, dementia and headache. Neurological Disorders in the Arab World is aimed at neurologists who are resident in Arab countries, as well as other physicians who encounter Arab patients, and also researchers performing neuroepidemiological studies. Those responsible for planning and implementing neurological services in Arab countries will also find this book beneficial.

    Contents:
    The Arab World
    Neurology in the Arab World
    The Frequency of Neurological Disorders in the Arab World
    Stroke
    Epilepsy
    Parkinson's Disease
    Multiple Sclerosis
    Dementia
    Headache.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    Alejandro A. Rabinstein, editor.
    Summary: This comprehensive and up-to-date book covers the common emergencies in neurology, neurosurgery, and psychiatry. Chapters examine a variety of neurological emergencies, and offer pragmatic approaches to treatment and management. High-quality tables, figures, and algorithms supplement expertly written text, and provide readers with clear, rapid answers in an easily accessible format. Additionally, the book includes discussions on less common conditions, and incorporates specific methods for treating specific populations, such as pregnant women and transplant patients. Neurological Emergencies: A Practical Approach is a go-to reference for all medical professions working in emergency treatment settings, and will increase their ability to better care for patients with acute neurological diseases.

    Contents:
    Acute coma: Approach and management
    Status epilepticus and other epilepsy urgencies
    Emergent and urgent headaches
    Neuro-otologic emergencies
    Neuro-ophthalmologic urgencies and emergencies
    Neuro-oncologic emergencies
    Infections of central nervous system: Emergencies
    Acute Neuromuscular Respiratory Failure
    Intraparenchymal hemorrhage
    Subarachnoid hemorrhage
    Traumatic brain injury
    Traumatic spinal cord and spine injury
    Neurological Emergencies from recreational substances
    Neurological Emergencies from prescription drugs
    Emergencies of demyelinating diseases
    Movement disorders emergencies
    Psychiatric emergencies
    Sleep disorders emergencies
    Neurologic emergencies in transplant patients
    Neurologic emergencies in pregnant patients
    Acute ischemic stroke
    Acute cerebral venous stroke.
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    Hiroshi Shibasaki, MD, PhD, Emeritus Professor, Kyoto University Graduate School of Medicine, Kyoto, Japan, Mark Hallett, MD, Chief, Human Motor Control Section, National Institution of Neurological Disorders and Stroke, National Institute of Health, Bethesda, Maryland, President, International Federation of Clinical Neurophysiology.
    Digital Access Oxford 2016
  • Digital
    edited by Autumn Klein, M. Angela O'Neal, Christina Scifres, Janet F.R. Waters, Jonathan H. Waters.
    Contents:
    The history and examination / M. Angela O'Neal
    Hormonal and physiologic changes in pregnancy / Janet Waters
    Neuroimaging / William Delfyett and David T. Fetzer
    Neurologic complications in the obstetrical anesthesia patient / Olajide Kowe and Jonathan H. Waters
    Headaches during pregnancy and peripartum / Huma Sheikh
    Stroke in pregnancy and the puerperium / Louis Caplan and Diogo C. Haussen
    Selecting contraception for women treated with antiepileptic drugs / Page Pennell
    Epilepsy / Mark Yerby
    Multiple sclerosis / Aiden Haghikia and Kerstin Hellwig
    Neuromuscular disorders / Mohammad Kian Salajegheh and Kathy Chuang
    Anterior and posterior pituitary diseases and pregnancy / Mark Molitch
    Movement disorders and pregnancy / Sathiji Nageshwaran, Marsha Smith. and Yvette M. Bordelon
    Brain tumors and pregnancy / Elizabeth R. Gerstner and Soma Sengupta
    Neuro-ophthalmology in pregnancy / Linda P. Kelly, Nancy J. Newman, Valérie Biousse
    Neurological infections in pregnancy / Shibani S. Mukerji and Jennifer L. Lyons
    Neurosurgical illnesses in pregnancy : principles and practice / Judith M. Wong, Anil Can, Rose Du
    Sleep disorders / Sally Ibrahim and Nancy Foldvary-Schaefer
    Neurourology of pregnancy / Victor Nitti, Benjamin Brucker, and Kimberly Ferrante.
    Digital Access Wiley 2016
  • Print
    von Wilbrand und Saenger ; bearbeitet von Prof. Dr. H. Wilbrand und Prof. Dr. Carl Behr ...
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Stored offsite. Please request print.
    Q48 .W66a
    1
  • Print
    by S.A. Kinnier Wilson ; edited by A. Ninian Bruce.
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Stored offsite. Please request print.
    L341 .W76 1955
    3
  • Digital
    Andrew Tarulli.
    Summary: This concise, thoroughly updated text provides a comprehensive, state-of-the art review of neurology and will serve as a highly practical resource for neurology residents and medical students. Emphasizing a practical approach to common neurologic disorders, the author blends chapters that cover the evaluation of specific complaints (confusion, dizziness and vertigo, visual loss, headache and facial pain) with others that focus on particular disorders (Parkinsonism, multiple sclerosis, dementia). Noting the core practice of neurology is largely unchanged from years ago and still largely done at the bedside, the author emphasizes the importance of acquiring expertise in the time-tested, classical techniques of history taking, directed examination, and localization. Toward that, the author encourages a focus on the key clinical pathways for diagnosis and management. A wide range of clinical pearls are provided and the diagrams and illustrations are well-designed and comprehensible, as are the clinical images (EEGs, CT, MRI) which provide excellent examples of a variety of neurologic disorders. The discussions and algorithms offered are evidence-based and state-of-the-art. Importantly, the author discusses a range of breakthroughs in the treatment of almost every disorder, with new medications available to treat amyotrophic lateral sclerosis, epilepsy, multiple sclerosis, and Parkinson's disease, among others. Concise and well-written, Neurology: A Clinician's Approach, 3rd Edition is an invaluable resource that will again serve as a very useful, gold-standard resource for trainees.

    Contents:
    Confusion
    Coma and Related Disorders
    Aphasia
    Dementia
    Visual Loss and Other Visual Disturbances
    Diplopia
    Disorders of the Eyelids and Pupils
    Facial Weakness, Dysarthria, and Dysphagia
    Dizziness and Vertigo
    Proximal and Generalized Weakness
    Focal Limb Weakness
    Rapidly Progressive Weakness
    Parkinsonism
    Hyperkinetic Movement Disorders
    Distal and Generalized Sensory Symptoms
    Focal Pain Syndromes of the Extremities
    Back Pain, Myelopathy, and Radiculopathy
    Gait Disorders
    Headache and Facial Pain
    Seizures and Epilepsy
    Stroke
    Multiple Sclerosis
    Intracranial Mass Lesions.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    edited by Charles Clarke, Robin Howard, Martin Rossor, Simon Shorvon.
    Digital Access Wiley 2016
  • Digital
    [edited by] Jeffrey Perlman, Maria Roberta Cilio ; consulting editor, Richard A. Polin.
    Contents:
    Cerebral circulation and hypotension in the premature infant : diagnosis and treatment / Shahab Noori, Claire McLean, Tai Wei-Wu, Istvan Seri
    Intraventricular hemorrhage and white matter injury in the preterm infant / Jeffrey M. Perlman and Vivien Yap
    Post hemorrhagic hydrocephalus : management strategies / Andrew Whitelaw
    Hypothermia for neonatal hypoxic-ischemic encephalopathy : different cooling regimens and infants not included in prior trials / Adrienne Bingham, Abbot R. Laptook
    Management of the term infant with neonatal encephalopathy following intrapartum hypoxia-ischemia / Jeffrey M. Perlman and Ericalyn Kasdorf
    Focal cerebral infarction / Donna M. Ferriero and Dawn Gano
    Diagnosis and management of acute seizures in neon / Francesco Pisani
    Neonatal-onset epilepsies : early diagnosis and targeted treatment / Maria Roberta Cilio and Tristan Sands
    Glucose and perinatal brain injury : questions and controversies / Jerome Yale Yager
    Hyperbilirubinemia and the risk for brain injury / Jean-Baptiste Le Pichon, Sean M. Riordan, Steven M. Shapiro
    Neonatal meningitis : current treatment options / Pablo J. Sanchez
    Bilirubin / Jean-Baptiste Le Pichon, Sean M. Riordan, and Steven M. Shapiro
    Viral infections / David W. Kimberlin and Nazia Kabani
    Neonatal hypotonia / Enrico Bertini and Adele D'Amico
    Amplitude integrated EEG and its potential role in augmenting management within the NICU : the use of aEEG in neonatal intensive care / L.C. Weeke, M.C. Toet, L.S de Vries
    The impact of congenital heart diseases on brain development / Vann Chau, Torin Glass, and Mike Seed
    Long term follow-up of the very preterm graduate / Neil Marlow.
    Digital Access ClinicalKey 2019
  • Digital/Print
    David J. Anschel.
    Contents:
    The neurological examination and diagnostic tests
    Cerebrovascular disease
    Epilepsy and seizures
    Headache and facial pain
    Traumatic and occupational injuries
    Infections
    Neoplasms
    Nutritional and metabolic disorders
    Dementia and cognitive disorders
    Movement disorders
    Disorders of myelination
    Developmental and hereditary disorders
    Neuromuscular disorders
    Toxic injuries
    Eye disease and visual disturbances
    Disturbances of hearing, balance, smell, and taste
    Spinal cord and root disease
    Peripheral neuropathy
    Neurological emergencies.
    Digital Access AccessNeurology 2017
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Books: General Collection (Downstairs)
    RC343.5 .L43 2017
    2
  • Digital/Print
    David J. Anschel.
    Summary: "PreTest Neurology offers a full range of Board style questions that help you succeed on your clerkship and the shelf exam. The questions are targeted and high yield and each is accompanied by a detailed answer that clearly and succinctly explains why each answer option is right or wrong. You will learn by completing the questions; the answers are robust enough to also serve as a study tool. To reflect today's neurology clerkships, you'll find the latest information in the field. We've expanded content in the following key areas: psychiatry, lesion localization and drug intoxication syndromes. To ensure all content is relevant, timely and high yield, this edition was carefully reviewed and edited by medical students who successfully mastered their clerkship"-- Provided by publisher.
    Digital Access AccessNeurology 2021
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Exam Review Books (shelved at Information Desk)
    RC343.5 .L43 2021
    2
  • Digital
    edited by Eric A.P. Steegers, Marilyn J. Cipolla, Eliza C. Miller.
    Digital Access ScienceDirect 2020
  • Digital
    edited by Eric A.P. Steegers, Marilyn J. Cipolla, Eliza C. Miller.
    Digital Access ScienceDirect 2020
  • Digital
    Mary Angela O'Neal, editor ; Leena Mittal, guest editor.
    Summary: This comprehensive resource covers a range of women's health issues and their intersection with neurologic and psychiatric disease. Chapters feature high quality, integrated information based on leading-edge research on gender-specific care and are grouped by reproductive years, pregnancy and health, and aging. Emerging science regarding sex differences in neurological and psychiatric illnesses, including anxiety, reproductive health, conversion disorders, depression and ethical issues in pregnancy, stroke risk factors, and successful aging strategies are covered along with clinical application of this knowledge to the delivery of care. In addition, in those medical problems that afflict both men and women, authors will point out the different risks, prevalence, presentations, and responses to treatments or outcomes in women. Written by renowned experts in the field, this textbook will thoroughly address the educational needs of physicians, nurse practitioners, and physician assistants in the areas of neurology, psychiatry, internal medicine, and obstetrics and expanding their understanding of concerns unique to female patients.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    edited by Alasdair Coles, Joanna Collicutt.
    Summary: This innovative book examines what can be learnt about the brain mechanisms underlying religious belief and practice from studying people with neurological disorders, such as stroke, epilepsy and Parkinson's disease. Using a clinical case study approach, the book analyses the interaction of social influences, religious upbringing and neurological disorders on lived religious experience in a number of different religions. The interdisciplinary contributors to the book ensure a variety of perspectives to help understand how the religious life is affected when different cognitive functions are impaired; how faith modifies the effects of neurological disorders; and how awareness of faith practices may assist in the treatment of these conditions.

    Contents:
    The discipline of neurology / Alasdair Coles
    The scientific study of religion / Joanna Collicutt
    Methodological hazards in the neuroscientific study of religion / Stuart Judge
    Embodied cognition and the neurology of religion / Warren Brown
    Phenomenology, neurology, psychiatry, and religious commitment / Ian Kidd
    Philosophical hazards in the neuroscientific study of religion / Daniel de Haan
    The glass onion / Sophie Grace Chappell
    Towards an Islamic neuropsychiatry : a classification of the diseases of the head in ʻAlī ibn Sahl Rabbān al-Ṭabarī's Paradise of wisdom / Neil Krishan Aggarwal
    Temporal lobe epilepsy, Dostoyevsky and irrational significance / Alasdair Coles
    Parkinson's Disease, religious belief and spirituality / Roger Barker and Clare Redfern
    Beyond reasonable doubt : cognitive and neuropsychological implications for religious disbelief / Gordon Pennycook, Daniel Tranel, Kelsey Warner and Erik Asp
    Ramadam fasting and neurologic disorders / Ashraf El-Mitwalli
    Autism and the panoply of religious belief, disbelief and experience / Kelly Clark and Ingela Visuri
    Personhood and religion in people with dementia / Julian Hughes
    Religion and frontotemporal dementia / Nicolas Block and Bruce Miller
    Religion and spirituality in neuro-rehabilitation : a case study / Joanna Collicut
    Eastern spirituality, mind-body practices and neuro-rehabilitation / Giles Yeates
    Examining the continuum of life to determine death : a Jewish perspective / Aron Buchman
    Near-death and out-of-body experiences : a case for dialogue between scientist and theologian? / Michael Marsh.
    Digital Access Cambridge 2019
  • Digital
    Daniel Kondziella, Gunhild Waldemar.
    Summary: "This book teaches readers the clinical skills residents in neurology have to acquire in the course of their training, and approaches neurology like a doctor approaches a patient: first there is a chapter on how to perform an efficient neurological history according to neuroanatomical key features, then a chapter on the bedside examination, followed by chapters on differential diagnosis, diagnostic procedures and lastly, the treatment. Neurology at the Bedside aims to provide readers with a personal clinical mentor. It takes them by the hand and guides them through the whole patient encounter from the history to the treatment, at each step pointing out what is essential and what is not. Extensive differential diagnostic flow charts and detailed treatment suggestions make it a perfect coat pocket reference for the wards. In addition, more than 50 unique case histories cover the entire spectrum of the field"--Publisher's description.

    Contents:
    What to expect from this book (and what not to)
    Clinical history and neuroanatomy "Where is the lesion?"
    Neurological bedside examination "Can I confirm my anatomical hypothesis?"
    Differential diagnosis "What is the lesion?"
    Ancillary investigations
    Treatment of neurological disorders.
    Digital Access Springer 2017
  • Digital
    by Amy McGregor.
    Contents:
    The autonomic nervous system
    Behavioral neurology
    Cerebrovascular disease
    Congenital disorders including neurocutaneous disorders
    Critical care and trauma
    Dementia
    Demyelinating diseases and neuroimmunology
    Epilepsy
    Metabolic disorders
    Movement disorders
    Neuroanatomy
    Neurochemistry
    Neurogenetics
    Neuroinfectious disease
    Neurologic complications of systemic diseases
    Neuromuscular disease
    Neuro-oncology
    Neuro-ophthalmology
    Neuro-otology
    Neuropathology
    Neuropharmacology
    Neurophysiology
    Neurotoxicology
    Pain and headache
    Pediatric neurology
    Psychiatry
    Sleep disorders
    Substance abuse
    Vitamin deficiency and excess.
    Digital Access Oxford [2016]
  • Digital
    [edited by] Ayush Batra, Kate T. Brizzi, Joel Salinas, Nancy Wang.
    Contents:
    Section1. Ischemic stroke
    Section 2. Cerebral hemorrhage
    Section 3. Traumatic brain injury
    Section 4. Neurologic intensive care
    Section 5. Neuroinfectious diseases
    Section 6. Neuro-oncology
    Section 7. Neuromuscular
    Section 8. Movement disorders
    Section 9. Multiple sclerosis
    Section 10. Autoimmune neurology
    Section 11. Epilepsy
    Section 12. Headache and pain
    Section 13. Cognitive neurology
    Section 14. Pediatric neurology.
    Digital Access Ovid 2017
  • Digital
    Nizar Souayah.
    Summary: 1,200+ Q&A's provide the ultimate review for the neurology boards.

    Contents:
    Anatomy and physiology of the central and peripheral nervous system
    Localization signs in neurology
    Pediatrics
    Neurophysiology, epilepsy, evoked potentials, and sleep disorders
    Neuromuscular diseases
    Behavioral neurology
    Cerebrovascular diseases
    Infections of the nervous system
    Neuroimmunology
    Neurophramacology and neurochemistry
    Neurogenetics
    Neuroophthalmology
    Neurooncology
    Movement disorders
    Neuropathology
    Neuroradiology
    Psychiatry
    Neurocritical care
    Digital Access AccessNeurology 2017
  • Digital
    Mustapha El Alaoui-Faris, Antonio Federico, Wolfgang Grisold, editors.
    Summary: This book is the result of reflections and work of the Specialty group on neurology in migrants of the World Federation of Neurology. The volume provides a synthesis of migrants' health in relation to the sustainable development goals and the 2030 agenda, and an up-to-date overview on neurological diseases among migrants, refugees and ethnic minorities. The book is composed of both general chapters dealing with the history of migration, the relationship between climate change and migration flows, the migration and neurosciences research and the barriers to migrant's health. Other chapters deal with the migrants' particularities of the common neurological diseases such as cerebrovascular diseases, epilepsy, dementia, movement disorders, multiple sclerosis, headache, functional and mental disorders. In addition, also neurological manifestation of COVID-19 in ethnic minorities and palliative care in migrants are discussed. Neurology in Migrants and Refugees will be useful to neurologists worldwide who can find appropriate knowledge for diagnosis and treatment when facing migrants with neurological disorders which are sometimes difficult to assess in the absence of clinical experience with the migrant population. It will also be very useful for international organizations, policymakers and non-governmental organizations working in the field of health and migration. This book will certainly find an indispensable place in neurological departments libraries and will constitute a basic textbook for teaching neurology taking into account ethnicity, culture and health inequalities in the care of neurological disorders.

    Contents:
    Foreword
    Preface
    Part I. Introductory Testimonies
    Chapter 1. The trauma of migration. Considerations from a first-line doctor in Lampedusa
    Chapter 2. Migration and Poetry
    Part II. Historical, Geography, and Health Problems of Migration
    Chapter 3. History of Migration
    Chapter 4. Migration across History
    Chapter 5. History of North African Migration to Europe: the Case of Morocco
    Chapter 6. Migration, Environment and Climate Change
    Chapter 7. Child Migration and School Achievement
    Chapter 8. Barriers to Health for Migrants and Refugees
    Chapter 9. Contributions of Migration and Refugees Research to Neurology and Neurosciences
    Chapter 10. How can Host Countries Provide Neurological Care to Migrants and Refugees
    Chapter 11. Neurological and Mental Health Problems among Refugees from South Asia
    Part III. Neurological Disorders in Migrants
    Chapter 12. Neuroinfectious Diseases in Migrants and Refugees
    Chapter 13. The Devastating Effects of the COVID-19 Pandemic Among Ethnic Minorities, Migrants, and Refugees
    Chapter 14. Cerebrovascular Risk Factors in Migrants and Refugees
    Chapter 15. Stroke in Migrants
    Chapter 16. Multiple Sclerosis in Migrants
    Chapter 17. Neuromyelitis Optica Spectrum Disorders in Migrants
    Chapter 18. Neurological Manifestations of Behçet Diseases related to Migration and Ethnicity
    Chapter 19. Headache in Migrants and Refugees
    Chapter 20. Epilepsy in Migrants
    Chapter 21. Movement Disorders in Migrants
    Chapter 22. Cross-cultural Cognitive Examination in Aging Migrants
    Chapter 23. Dementia in Aging Migrants
    Chapter 24. Anxiety and Depression in Migrants
    Chapter 25. Somatization and Functional Disorders in Migrants and Refugees
    Chapter 26. Palliative Care in Migrants
    Part IV. Future Developments
    Chapter 27. Migrants' Health, the Sustainable Development Goals and the COVID-19 pandemic.
    Digital Access Springer 2022
  • Digital/Print
    R. John Leigh, David S. Zee.
    Contents:
    A survey of eye movements : characteristics and teleology
    The ocular motor periphery
    The vestibular-optokinetic system
    The saccadic system
    Smooth visual tracking and fixation
    Gaze holding and the neural integrator
    The neural basis for conjugate eye movements
    Eye-head movements
    Vergence eye movements
    Diagnosis of peripheral ocular motor palsies and strabismus
    Diagnosis of nystagmus and saccadic intrusions
    Diagnosis and management of vestibular disorders
    Disorders of ocular motility due to disease of the brainstem, cerebellum, and diencephalon
    Disorders of ocular motility with disease affecting the basal ganglia, cerebral cortex, and in systemic conditions.
    Digital Access Oxford [2015]
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Books: General Collection (Downstairs)
    RE731 .L44 2015
    1
  • Digital
    edited by Bruce James Brew.
    Summary: "The Neurology of HIV Infection covers all aspects of nervous system involvement and pathology in HIV-infected individuals. Specialists in this field cover epidemiology, global aspects, pathology and pathogenesis of nervous system disease in HIV-infection. All complications, including the pathology caused by HIV itself and all opportunistic infections of the nervous system are reviewed in detail. Both central nervous and peripheral nervous system complications, including neuropathies and myopathies, are discussed. Key chapters on global developments, HIV-associated neurocognitive disorders, IRIS, stroke and neuro-aids in children complete this volume."--Publisher's description.

    Contents:
    Introduction to HIV infection and HIV neurology
    HIV neuropathology
    Neuropathogenesis of human immunodeficiency virus infection
    Animal models of HIV-associated Disease of the central nervous system
    Neuro-pharmacology
    Neurologic sequelae of primary HIV infection
    HIV-associated neurocognitive disorder
    Neuro-AIDS in children
    Central nervous system infection with Toxoplasma gondii
    Progressive multifocal leukoencephalopathy
    Cryptococcal meningitis in AIDS
    Other central nervous system opportunistic infections: Cytomegalovirus, Mycobacterium tuberculosis and Treponema pallidum
    CNS-immune reconstitution inflammatory syndrome
    Primary CNS lymphoma in HIV infection
    HIV infection and stroke
    Neuromuscular complications of HIV infection
    HIV and spinal cord disease
    Neuroradiology
    Global developments in HIV-neurology.
    Digital Access ScienceDirect 2018
  • Digital
    volume editors, David B. Vodušek and François Boller.
    Digital Access ScienceDirect 2015
  • Digital
    edited by Jason J.S. Barton, Alexander Leff.
    Contents: <br/
    >1. A review of diseases of the retina for neurologists;
    2. Amblyopia;
    3. Retinal ganglion cells and the magnocellular, parvocellular, and koniocellular subcortical visual pathways from the eye to the brain;
    4. Perimetry and visual field defects;
    5. Electrophysiology in neuro-ophthalmology;
    6. The role of optical coherence tomography in the diagnosis of afferent visual pathway problems: A neuroophthalmic perspective;
    7. The striate cortex and hemianopia;
    8. Color vision;
    11. Object recognition and visual object agnosia;
    10. Prosopagnosia and disorders of face processing;
    11. The relationship between mental and physical space and its impact on topographical disorientation;
    12. Reading and alexia;
    13. Bálint syndrome;
    14. Motion perception and its disorders;
    15. Aphantasia: The science of visual imagery extremes;
    16. Blindsight;
    17. Illusions, hallucinations, and visual snow;
    18. Vision, attention, and driving;
    19. Rehabilitation of visual disorders
    Digital Access ScienceDirect 2021
  • Digital
    [edited by] Joseph S. Kass, Eli M. Mizrahi.
    Contents:
    1. Clinical neuroscience
    2. Clinical neuroanatomy
    3. Approach to the patient with neurologic disease
    4. Myopathies
    5. Neuromuscular junction diseases
    6. Peripheral neuropathies and motor neuron diseases
    7. Radiculopathy and degenerative spine disease
    8. Myelopathies
    9. Brain stem disease
    10. Cerebellar disease
    11. Basal ganglia disorders
    12. movement disorders
    13. Autonomic nervous system
    14. Demyelinating and autoimmune diseases
    15. Alzheimer's disease and mild cognitive impairment
    16. Non-Alzheimer's dementias
    17. Neuropsychiatry and behavioral neurology
    18. Cerebrovascular disease
    19. Neurocritical care
    20. Neuro-oncology
    21. Headaches
    22. Seizures and epilepsy
    23. Sleep disorders
    24. Neurologic complications of systemic disease
    25. Infectious diseases of the nervous system
    26. Neurogenetic disorders
    27. Pain processing and modulation
    28. Pediatric neurology
    29. Psychiatry in neurology
    30. Neuro-otology
    31. Electroencephalography
    32. Electromyography
    33. Neuropathology.
    Digital Access ClinicalKey 2017
  • Digital
    Boris I. Prilutsky, Donald H. Edwards, editors.
    Summary: For over a century, research has yielded enormous amounts of quantitative information about animal motor systems. Yet our understanding of neural control mechanisms of animal balance and locomotion remains cursory and fragmented. This book aims to change that. This is the first book on neuromechanical modeling, a tool that integrates the massive body of knowledge in computational models and complex motor behaviors to reveal the mechanisms by which these behaviors emerge. The majority of research groups working in this area have contributed chapters to this book. The book covers a wide range of topics from theoretical studies linking the organization of spinal reflex pathways and central pattern generating circuits with morphology and mechanics of the musculoskeletal system, to detailed neuromechanical models of balance and locomotor control, to analyses of nonlinear transformations of neural signals by the musculoskeletal system. This book can be used as an introductory guide to this new and exciting area of computational neuroscience research. .

    Contents:
    Preface
    Better science through predictive modeling: Numerical tools for understanding neuromechanical interactions
    A neuromechanical model of spinal control of locomotion
    Neural regulation of limb mechanics: Insights from the organization of proprioceptive circuits
    Model-based approaches to understanding musculoskeletal filtering of neural signals
    Modeling the organization of spinal cord neural circuits controlling two-joint muscles
    Muscles: non-linear transformers of motor neuron activity
    Why is neuromechanical modeling of balance and locomotion so hard?
    Neuromusculoskeletal modeling for the adaptive control of posture during locomotion
    Model-based interpretations of experimental data related to the control of balance during stance and gait in humans
    Computing motion dependent afferent activity during cat locomotion using a forward dynamics musculoskeletal model
    Modeling and optimality analysis of pectoral fin locomotion
    Control of cat walking and paw-shake by a multifunctional central pattern generator.
    Digital Access Springer 2016
  • Digital
    Alessandro P. Burlina, editor.
    Contents:
    Principles of human genetics and Mendelian inheritance
    Newborn screening and high risk screening population for neurological inherited metabolic diseases
    Neuroimaging of inherited diseases of adulthood
    Fabry Disease
    Pompe Disease
    Niemann-Pick Disease Type C
    Wilson's Disease
    Homocystinuria. .
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Digital/Print
    Walz, Wolfgang.
    Digital Access Springer v. 1-, 1985-
    Print
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Books: General Collection (Downstairs)
    Call number varies. Search for Neuromethods to find individual volumes of this title.
  • Digital
    edited by Elliot S. Krames, P. Hunter Peckham, Ali R. Rezai.
    Summary: "Neuromodulation: Comprehensive Textbook of Principles, Technologies, and Therapies, Second Edition, serves as a comprehensive and in-depth reference textbook covering all aspects of the rapidly growing field of neuromodulation. Since the publication of the first edition seven years ago, there has been an explosion of knowledge in neuromodulation, optogenetics, bioelectronics medicine and brain computer interfacing. Users will find unique discussions of the fundamental principles of neuromodulation and therapies, and how they are applied to the brain, spinal cord, peripheral nerves, autonomic nerves and various organs. The book focuses on comprehensive coverage of spinal cord stimulation, non-interventional and interventional brain stimulation, peripheral nerve stimulation, and the emerging fields of neuromodulation, including optogenetics and bioelectronics medicine"--Publisher's description.

    Contents:
    Volume 1. Section I: Defining neuromodulation
    Section II: The brain initiative: implications for a revolutionary change in clinical medicine via neuromodulation technology
    Section III: Fundamentals and mechanisms of neuromodulation
    Section IV: Technology and devices
    Section V: Brain, computer and machine interfacing
    Section VI: Emerging technologies and techniques
    Section VII: Surgical procedures and techniques
    Volume 2. Section VIII: Neuromodulation for pain control
    Section VIII A: Spinal cord stimulation for pain control
    Section VIII B: Peripheral nerve stimulation for pain control introduction: peripheral nerve stimulation for pain control
    Section VIII C: Intrathecal therapies for pain control and the control of spasticity
    Section VIII D: Intracranial procedures for chronic pain
    Section X: Neurostimulation for epilepsy
    Section XI: Neuromodulation for behavioral and cognitive disorders
    Volume 3. Section XII: Neuromodulation for functional restoration
    Section XIII: Neuromodulation for organ systems
    Section XIII A: Neuromodulation for cardiovascular disorders
    Section XIII B: Neuromodulation for pulmonary disorders
    Section XIII C: Neuromodulation for gastrointestinal disorders
    Section XIII D: Neuromodulation for urogenital disorders
    Section XIV: Neuromodulation for endocrine, immune, and inflammatory disorders
    Section XV: Noninvasive neuromodulation
    Section XVI: The business end of neuromodulation
    Digital Access
    Provider
    Version
    ScienceDirect
    ClinicalKey
  • Digital
    edited by Jeffrey Arle.
    Contents:
    Percutaneous trial lead placement for failed back surgery syndrome
    Percutaneous trial case for complex regional pain syndrome
    Percutaneous spinal cord stimulation trial for cervical lead placement
    Percutaneous permanent procedures
    Paddle placement for failed back surgery syndrome
    Paddle lead placement in the cervical spine region
    Paddle lead trial in the case of a prior fusion
    Complications involving spinal cord stimulation and implantable pulse generators
    Dorsal root ganglion stimulation
    Programming concerns with spinal cord stimulation
    Subthalamic nucleus deep brain stimulation for Parkinson's disease
    Globus pallidus internus deep brain stimulation for dystonia
    Thalamic deep brain stimulation for essential tremor
    Programming cases for DBS in Parkinson's Disease, dystonia, and tremor
    Case example and trial for peripheral nerve stimulation
    Peripheral field stimulation for back pain
    Peripheral field stimulation for atypical face pain
    Occipital nerve stimulation: trial and permanent
    Miscellaneous peripheral nerve stimulations
    New vagus nerve stimulation lead and implantable pulse generator placement
    Revision or removal of vagus nerve stimulator lead and implantable pulse generator
    Evaluation and programming in vagus nerve stimulation (VNS)
    Responsive neural stimulation for epilepsy.
    Digital Access ClinicalKey 2020
  • Digital
    volume editor, Konstantin V. Slavin.
    Summary: "This book presents a collection of chapters on all kinds of neuromodulation approaches used today in the management of facial pain, providing a comprehensive review of the entire field in a systematic manner"-- Provided by publisher.
    Digital Access Karger 2020
  • Digital
    Giorgio Lambru, Michel Lanteri-Minet, editors.
    Summary: This book addresses all aspects of neuromodulation therapy in the management of headache and facial pain disorders, paying particular attention to the application of this rapidly growing and fascinating therapy to different forms of headache and facial pain conditions. It is divided into sections covering the principles of and rationale behind neuromodulation for headache, including in-depth discussions of challenging topics such as the definition of refractory headache and prognostic factors, and the technical aspects of devices used to modulate peripheral and central neuronal targets for the management of headaches. In addition, the book reviews the state-of-the art in current neuromodulation practice for headaches, discusses therapeutic strategies and therapy selection for each headache and facial pain disorder, and presents an in-depth, critical analysis of the published evidence, with sections covering innovative devices and emerging applications of novel neuromodulation technologies in the field. Gathering papers by internationally respected, leading experts, the book offers a unique guide to neuromodulation therapies in headache for neurologists, pain specialists, neurosurgeons, neuroscientists, trainees and general practitioners with an interest in headache and facial pain management.

    Contents:
    Part-1: Principles of neuromodulation in headache field and facial pain field. Trigeminal mechanisms of nociception and principles of neuromodulation in pain
    Definition of refractory chronic headache. Part-2: Neuromodulation approaches in headache and facial pain disorders. Hypothalamic deep brain stimulation
    Occipital nerve stimulation
    Sphanopalatine ganglion stimulation
    Vagus nerve stimulation
    Cervical spinal cord stimulation in headache
    Transcranial direct current stimulation
    Repetitive transcranial magnetic stimulation
    External trigeminal nerve stimulation. Part-3: Clinical indication for neuromodulation in headache and facial pain disorders. Neuromodulation in migraine
    Neuromodulation and other non-pharmacological approaches in tension-type headache
    Neuromodulation in cluster headache
    Neuromodulation in other tacs and other primary headaches
    Neuromodulation in cervicogenic headache and occipital neuralgia
    Neuromodulation in classical trigeminal neuralgia and painful trigeminal neuropathy. Part-4: Challenges in neuromodulation: methodological barriers in clinical trials design and cost-effectiveness issues. Methodological difficulties in clinical trials assessing neuromodulation devices in the headache field
    Clinical and cost effectiveness of neuromodulation devices in the treatment of headaches: focus on non-invasive therapies.
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    edited by Clement Hamani, Paul Holtzheimer, Andres Lozano & Helen Mayberg.
    Contents:
    History of invasive brain stimulation in psychiatry : lessons for the current practice of neuromodulation / Marwan Hariz
    Ethics of neuromodulation in psychiatry / Joseph J. Fins and Barbara R. Pohl
    Neurocircuits commonly involved in psychiatric disorders and their stimulation and lesion therapies / Sarah R. Heilbronner, Ziad Safadi, and Suzanne N. Haber
    MRI in neuromodulation / Jonathan Downar and Karen D. Davis
    Nuclear medicine in neuromodulation / Alexandra M. Rodman and Darin D. Dougherty
    Basic principles of deep brain and cortical stimulation / Caio Matias, Scott Lempka, and Andre Machado
    Electrophysiology in neuromodulation : current concepts of the mechanisms of action of electrical and magnetic cortical stimulation / Jean-Pascal Lefaucheur
    Transcranial magnetic stimulation : introduction and technical aspects / Yiftach Roth, Gaby S. Pell, and Abraham Zangen
    Magnetic stimulation for depression : subconvulsive and convulsive approaches / Andrada D. Neacsiu and Sarah Hollingsworth Lisanby
    Repetitive transcranial magnetic stimulation for psychiatric disorders other than depression / Daniel M. Blumberger, Mera S. Barr, and Zafiris J. Daskalakis
    Direct current stimulation : introduction and technical aspects / André Russowsky Brunoni and Felipe Fregni
    Transcranial direct current simulation / Collen Loo and Donel Martin
    Deep brain stimulation : introduction and technical aspects / Willard S. Karsoff and Robert E. Gross
    Deep brain stimulation : clinical results in treatment resistant depression / Shane J. McInerney, Peter Giacobbe, Anna Cyriac, and Sidney H. Kennedy
    Deep brain stimulation for the treatment of obsessive-compulsive disorder / Michael Giffin, Martijn Figee, and Damiaan Denys
    Deep brain stimulation : emerging indications / Yasin Temel, Sarah Hescham, Maartje Melse, Veerle Visser-Vandewalle
    Vagus nerve stimulation : introduction and technical aspects / Jared Pisapia and Gordon Baltuch
    Vagus nerve stimulation for treatment-refractory depression / Charles R. Conway, Britt M. Gott, and Naazia H. Azhar
    Gamma knife surgery : introduction and technical aspects / Alessandra A. Gorgulho, Antonio A.F. De Salles
    Gamma knife surgery : clinical results / Antonio Carlos Lopes, Marcelo Batistuzzo, Andre Felix Gentil, Marcelo Queiroz Hoexter, Euripedes Constantino Miguel
    Radiofrequency lesions : introduction and technical aspects / Seth F. Oliveria, Kristopher G. Hooten, Kelly D. Foote
    Ablative procedures in psychiatric neurosurgery / David Huie, Joshua P. Aronson, Emad N. Eskandar
    Electroconvulsive therapy : introduction and technical aspects / Sandarsh Surya, Peter B. Rosenquist, W. Vaughn McCall
    Electroconvulsive therapy : clinical results / Malek Bajbouj
    Neuromodulation in psychiatry : conclusions / Paul Holtzheimer, Helen Mayberg, Andres Lozano, Clement Hamani.
    Digital Access Wiley 2016
  • Digital
    Tiago da Silva Freitas, Bernardo Assumpcao de Monaco, Stanley Golovac, editors.
    Summary: Neuromodulation implants are currently one of the most successful techniques in the treatment of chronic pain, a condition that affects more and more patients each year, leading to reduced quality of life as well as economic losses. Neuromodulation implants for pain are a relatively new technique and are being increasingly used around the globe. However, technical training is not available for every implanter as there are relatively few centers in the world. Further, refresher courses for low-rate implanters are not available. This book fills that gap by offering an update on the best techniques currently used, providing a step-by-step guide on how to perform these procedures correctly. Based on the experiences of leading physicians in the field, it also discusses how to manage both major and minor complications. Lastly, it covers the neuromodulatory intervention techniques used to treat chronic pain in various clinical areas. As such it is a valuable resource for pain physicians as well as neurosurgeons, orthopedists and anesthetists.

    Contents:
    1. Introduction and History of Neuromodulation for Pain
    2. Spinal Cord Stimulation: Percutaneus Technique
    3. Spinal Cord Stimulation: Surgical (Paddle) Technique
    4. The Penta Implant As I Do It
    5. Deep Brain Stimulation for Pain: Indications and Techniques
    6. Introduction to Dorsal Root Ganglion Stimulation an Overview of the Field
    7. Percutaneous/Paddle Techniques: Values and Pearls
    8. Peripheral Nerve Field Stimulation (PNfS)
    9. Ultrasound Indications, Historical Aspects and Devices in Peripheral Nerve Stimulation
    10. Brachial Plexus Stimulation Using Ultrasound: New Technique Description
    11. Occipital Nerve Stimulation Using a Ultrasound-Surgical Technique
    12. Peripheral Nerve Stimulation in Upper Limb Using Ultrasound Technique
    13. Peripheral Nerve Stimulation Technique Using Ultrasound in Lower Limbs
    14. Peripheral Nerve Stimulation (PNS) Using Ultrasound: Thrunk and Pelvic Regions
    15. Abdominal and Pancreatic pain: Sites and Techniques in Neuromodulation
    16. IPG Site Creation, Considerations, and Risk Mitigation
    17. Intrathecal Drug Delivery System: Surgical Technique
    18. Intracerebroventricular Drug Infusion System Implant: Surgical Technique
    19. Peripheral Nerve Stimulation: Fluoroscopic Implant Techniques
    20. The Value of Intraoperative Neuromonitoring for Neuromodulation
    21. Sacral Neuromodulation for Urinary and Fecal Incontinence: Surgical Technique
    22. Motor Cortex Stimulation: Neural Circuits and Practical Approach on Electrode Implantation Technique.
    Digital Access Springer 2022
  • Digital
    Alaa Abd-Elsayed.
    Summary: Neuromodulation Techniques for the Spine, a volume in the Atlas of Interventional Pain Management series, is a concise, practical guide that provides clinicians with detailed, step-by-step guidance on how to perform spinal nerve stimulation procedures for patients with chronic pain. This comprehensive, easy-to-follow guide offers expert coverage of how to deliver safe, accurate, and cost-effective pain relief to patients using all clinically useful imaging modalities, including ultrasound-guided techniques and fluoroscopy. With high-quality images and clear, authoritative guidance throughout, it shows exactly how to evaluate the causes of pain, identify the most promising stimulation technique, locate the site with precision, and deliver effective relief.

    Contents:
    History of neuromodulation
    Patient selection
    Psychological evaluation for neuromodulation
    Perioperative care in neuromodulatory systems
    Surgical instruments
    General review of wound closure in neuromodulation cases
    Waveform parameters: Electrical field interaction on neuronal milieu
    Percutaneous spinal cord stimulator trial
    Spinal cord stimulation implant (percutaneous leads)
    Spinal cord stimulator paddle lead trial technique
    Spinal cord stimulator system permanent implant with laminectomy for paddle lead
    Dorsal root ganglion stimulator trial
    Dorsal root ganglion stimulation—implant
    Medial branch neurostimulator trial
    Multifidus muscle neurostimulator implant
    Programming
    Sacral neuromodulation
    Spinal cord stimulation: Controversial topics
    Patient selection for intrathecal drug delivery systems
    Perioperative care with intrathecal drug delivery systems
    Medications used in pain pumps
    Intrathecal pump trial
    Intrathecal pump implant
    Interrogation and refill
    Important topics in neuromodulation—understanding of imaging, location of pump or generator placement, and anesthesia need during trial and implants
    Measuring outcomes for neuromodulation.
    Digital Access ClinicalKey 2024
  • Digital
    edited by Hemanshu Prabhakar.
    Summary: Neuromonitoring Techniques: Quick Guide for Clinicians and Residents provides a quick and easy guide to understanding various neuromonitoring equipment. Chapters include intracranial pressure monitoring, EEG-based monitors, evoked potentials and transcranial doppler. This book is written for trainees, clinicians and researchers in the fields of neurosurgery, neurocritical care, neuroradiology, neuroanesthesia and neurology. As specialized neuromonitoring is now routinely done in neurosurgical cases, it provides an important resource for neurologists, neurophysiologists, anesthesiologists and residents who are expected to have theoretical and practical knowledge on different systems. Each monitoring system is discussed separately, with examples, images, reference values and their interpretations.

    Contents:
    Intracranial pressure monitoring / Chiara Robba
    Cerebral blood flow monitoring / Frank Rasulo, Basil Matta and Niccoló Varanini --Jugular venous oximetry / Nophanan Chaikittisilpa, Monica Shanta Vavilala and Abhijit Lele --Electroencaphalography-based monitors / Gabriel Tran, Aline Defresne, Colette Franssen and Vincent Bonhomme --Transcranial Doppler ultrasonography / Deepak Sharma and Hemanshu Prabhakar --Evoked response monitoring / Antoun Koht and Tod B. Sloan --Near infrared spectroscopy / Andre Y. Denault, Ali M. Shaaban, Alexis Cournoyer, Aymen Benkreira and Tanya Mailhot --Brain microdialysis / Michael James and Marc McLawhorn --Brain tissue oxygenation / Alexa Hollinger, Martin Siegemund, Nadine Cueni and Luzius Steiner --Cognitive function monitoring / Anastasia Borozdina, Federico Bilotta and Lis Evered --Functional MRI imaging / Ramachandran Ramani.
    Digital Access
    Provider
    Version
    ScienceDirect
    ClinicalKey
  • Digital
    H. Manji, C. Turner, M.R.B. Evans (eds.).
    Summary: This book presents 50 cases, common and rare, genetic and acquired, in a practical, easy-to-read format. Each case includes history and examination, lab test results, neuropathology as appropriate, neuroradiology, differential diagnosis and management.

    Contents:
    Section 1: Peripheral nerve, neuromuscular junction and motor neuron disorders
    A woman who could not wear high heels
    Rare as rocking horse droppings...- A lady with ataxia ? an example of Hickam?s Dictum
    A lady with tremor not due to Parkinson?s disease
    A makeup artist with Crohn?s disease
    Not a laughing matter
    Leg swelling and painful feet in a business man
    A man with back pain and weight loss
    A man with progressive weakness and muscle twitching
    A woman with burning hands
    Another case of unsteadiness
    A young man with blurred vision and foot drop
    Progressive motor weakness in a Somalian man
    A man with a pacemaker develops difficulty walking
    Cramps, weakness and fasciculations
    A lady with weakness since childhood
    A man with an insidious, painful mononeuropathy
    A lady with head drop
    The dangers of home preserved vegetables
    A man with a dry mouth and weakness
    A man with difficulty chewing gum and an ominous family history
    A patient with an acute syndrome, recovers and represents years later
    A man with recurrent chest infections
    A medical student with episodes of weakness and sensory disturbance
    Weakness in an Indian man
    A man with episodes of shoulder pain and a weak arm
    A man with painful feet and hand ulcers
    A psychologist with wrist drop
    Section 2: Muscle disorders
    Longstanding drooping eyelids
    Drooping eyelids PLUS
    Neither one nor the other
    When is myotonia not caused by myotonic dystrophy?
    Myotonia and paralysis-two syndromes, one diagnosis
    Typical phenotype, MRI and histology
    Atypical phenotype, MRI and histology
    A multisystem muscle disorder needs monitoring
    The less aggressive and less common cousin
    A common cause of progressive proximal weakness..
    ... and the other common cause
    A treatable systemic muscle disease
    A blood vessel disease causing weakness
    Antibody-mediated muscle disease?
    When the wind comes back
    When the wind does not come back
    Paralysis is only a part of the problem
    “Back to the basics”-never forget to look at the back
    Is it time to take the heat out of the problem?
    Praying for an answer can be helpful
    Neuromuscular junction dysfunction is not always myasthenic
    Carrying shopping can be difficult, especially for men.
    Digital Access Springer 2016
  • Digital/Print
    Anthony A. Amato, MD, Vice-Chairman, Department of Neurology, Chief, Neuromuscular Divbision, Brigham and Women's Hospital, Boston, Massachusetts, Harvard Medical School, Boston, Massachusetts, James A. Russell, DO, FAAN, Vice Chairman, Department of Neurology, Lahey Hospital & Medical Center, Director, ALS Clinic, Lahey Hospital & Medical Center, Chairman, Ethics Center, Lahey Hospital & Medical Center, Clinical Professor of Neurology, Tufts University School of Medicine, Boston, Massachusetts.
    Contents:
    Approach to patients with neuromuscular disease
    Testing in neuromuscular disease
    Muscle and nerve histopathology
    Principles of immunomodulating treatment
    The rehabilitation of neuromuscular diseases / Sabrina Paganoni and Erik Ensrud
    Amyotrophic lateral sclerosis
    Hereditary spastic paraparesis
    Spinal muscular atrophies
    Other motor neuron disorders
    Disorders of motor nerve hyperactivity
    Charcot-Marie-Tooth disease and related disorders
    Other hereditary neuropathies
    Guillain-Barré syndrome and related disorders
    Chronic inflammatory demyelinating polyradiculoneuropathy and related neuropathies
    Vasculitic neuropathies
    Neuropathies associated with systemic disease
    Neuropathies associated with infections
    Neuropathies related to nutritional deficiencies
    Neuropathies associated with malignancy
    Toxic neuropathies
    Neuropathies associated with endocrinopathies
    Idiopathic polyneuropathy
    Cervical and thoracic radiculopathies, brachial plexopathies, and mononeuropathies of the arm
    Focal neuropathies of the lower extremities : radiculopathies, plexopathies, and mononeuropathies
    Autoimmune myasthenia gravis
    Other disorders of neuromuscular transmission
    Muscular dystrophies
    Congenital myopathies
    Metabolic myopathies
    Mitochondrial disorders
    Myotonic dystrophies
    Nondystrophic myotonias and periodic paralysis
    Inflammatory myopathies
    Myopathies associated with systemic disease
    Toxic myopathies
    Neuromuscular mimics / Sabrina Paganoni and Erik Ensrud.
    Digital Access AccessNeurology 2015
    Print
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
  • Digital
    [edited by] Tulio E. Bertorini.
    Summary: Offering an authoritative, multidisciplinary approach to the complex issues associated with neuromuscular disease, Neuromuscular Disorders, 2nd Edition, provides the latest tools and strategies for minimizing disability and maximizing quality of life. Dr. Tulio Bertorini, an expert in clinical neuromuscular care, and a team of world-renowned contributors cover all management and therapeutic considerations regarding the full range of neuromuscular disorders and resulting complications. Offering an authoritative, multidisciplinary approach to the complex issues associated with neuromuscular disease, Neuromuscular Disorders, 2nd Edition, provides the latest tools and strategies for minimizing disability and maximizing quality of life. Dr. Tulio Bertorini, an expert in clinical neuromuscular care, and a team of world-renowned contributors cover all management and therapeutic considerations regarding the full range of neuromuscular disorders and resulting complications.
    Digital Access
    Provider
    Version
    ScienceDirect
    ClinicalKey
  • Digital
    edited by Basil T. Darras, H. Royden Jones, Jr., Monique M. Ryan, Darryl C. De Vivo.
    Digital Access ClinicalKey 2015
  • Digital
    [edited by] Amer F. Samdani, Peter O. Newton, Paul D. Sponseller, Harry L. Shufflebarger, Randal R. Betz.
    Summary: "About 85% of spine deformities (scoliosis, kyphosis, lordosis) are idiopathic, but some forms are caused by severe neuromuscular disorder such as muscular dystrophy, cerebral palsy, Friedreich's ataxia, and spinal cord tumors and lesions. These are more difficult conditions, since curve progression is much greater than in idiopathic conditions and bracing does not usually prevent progression of the spinal curvature. Smaller curvatures in nonambulatory patients can sometimes be treated by wheelchair modifications, but most patients will undergo surgery. These surgeries are complex because of the severity of the condition itself and because of the various other medical conditions affecting these patients. There is currently no book on the topic, and chapters in spine deformity books give the topic scant coverage. Samdani et al are the world's leader in this field, and they will present the definitive book on the topic, featuring foundational chapters, coverage of the specific neuromuscular disorders, surgical techniques, and postop considerations and complications, and the will be accompanied by surgical videos. The Authors are members of the prestigious Harms Study Group, a worldwide association of spine surgeons performing multi-center research studies on scoliosis"--Provided by publisher.
    Digital Access
    Provider
    Version
    Thieme-Connect
    Thieme MedOne Neurosurgery
  • Digital
    Niraj Arora, Raghav Govindarajan, Saurabh Kataria, Premkumar Nattanmai Chandrasekaran, editors.
    Summary: "This book functions as a practical reference for recognizing various patient presentations, signs, and symptoms that must be considered when treating neuromuscular disorders (NMD). It emphasizes the importance of recognizing these preexisting conditions as this can be crucial to treating patients properly with appropriate medications and procedures. Concise yet comprehensive, this 10-chapter guide analyses various neuromuscular weaknesses including respiratory and progressive muscle weakness. Chapters address the involvement of multiple organ systems in NMD, with specific attention to cardiomyopathy, cardiac arrhythmias, and dystrophinopathies. Discussions also address the challenges practitioners face when treating vulnerable demographics such as pregnant women and those with hyper metabolic conditions"--Publisher's description.

    Contents:
    Approach to weakness
    Neuromuscular respiratory weakness
    Rapidly progressive muscle weakness
    Cardiac complications associated with neuromuscular diseases
    Neuromuscular emergencies in the neuroscience intensive care unit
    Anesthesia-related complications in neuromuscular disorders in adults
    Pregnancy and neuromuscular emergencies
    Malignant hyperthermia
    Pediatric neuromuscular emergencies and urgencies
    Management of pain in neuromuscular disorders
    Correction to: Neuromuscular urgencies and emergencies
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    edited by Laura Lossi and Adalberto Merighi.
    Contents:
    Neuronal cell death : an overview of its different forms in central and peripheral neurons / Laura Lossi, Claudia Castagna, and Adalberto Merighi
    Cell volume regulation monitored with combined epifluorescence and digital holographic microscopy / Nicolas Pavillon and Pierre Marquet
    Flow cytometric analysis of DNA synthesis and apoptosis in central nervous system using fresh cell nuclei / Noelia López-Sánchez and José M. Frade
    Nuclear signs of pre-neurodegeneration / Fernando C. Baltanás ... [et al.]
    Multi-parametric O2 imaging in three-dimensional neural cell models with the phosphorescent probes / Ruslan I. Dmitriev and Dmitri B. Papkovsky
    Calcium imaging in neuron cell death / María Calvo, Carlos Villalobos, and Lucía Núñez
    Monitoring mitochondrial membranes permeability in live neurons and mitochondrial swelling through electron microscopy analysis / Macarena S. Arrázola and Nibaldo C. Inestrosa
    Real-time visualization of caspase-3 activation by fluorescence resonance energy transfer (FRET) / Silvia Alasia ... [et al.]
    Design and cloning of short hairpin RNAs (shRNAs) into a lentiviral silencing vector to study the function of selected proteins in neuronal apoptosis / Nadia Canu
    Genomic analysis using affymetrix standard microarray genechips (169 format) in degenerate murine retina / Sook Hyun Chung , Weiyong Shen , and Mark Gillies
    Genomic analysis of transcriptional changes underlying neuronal apoptosis / Sebastiano Cavallaro
    High-throughput cell death assays / Matthew E. Pamenter and Gabriel G. Haddad
    Staining of dead neurons by the golgi method in autopsy material / Stavros J. Baloyannis
    Image analysis algorithms for immunohistochemical assessment of cell death / Stan Krajewski ... [et al.]
    In vitro oxygen-glucose deprivation to study ischemic cell death / Carla I. Tasca, Tharine Dal-Cim, and Helena Cimarosti
    Laser microbeam targeting of single nerve axons in cell culture / Nicholas Hyun , Linda Z. Shi , and Michael W. Berns
    Real-time imaging of retinal cell apoptosis by confocal scanning laser ophthalmoscopy / Eduardo M. Normando ... [et al.]
    Targeted toxicants to dopaminergic neuronal cell death / Huajun Jin ... [et al.]
    Stem cells, neural progenitors, and engineered stem cells / Raj R. Rao and Shilpa Iyer
    Herpes simplex virus type 1 (HSV-1)-derived recombinant vectors for gene transfer and gene therapy / Peggy Marconi , Cornel Fraefel, and Alberto L. Epstein
    Herpes simplex virus type 1 (HSV-1)-derived amplicon vectors for gene transfer and gene therapy / Cornel Fraefel Peggy Marconi, and Alberto L. Epstein
    Bone marrow transplantation for research and regenerative therapies in the central nervous system / David Díaz, José Ramón Alonso, and Eduardo Weruaga
    Detection of activated caspase-8 in injured spinal axons by using fluorochrome-labeled inhibitors of caspases (FLICA) / Antón Barreiro-Iglesias and Michael I. Shifman
    Generation of zebrafish models by CRISPR/Cas9 genome editing / Alexander Hruscha and Bettina Schmid
    In vivo assessment of neuronal cell death in Drosophila / Pierre Dourlen
    Drosophila model for studying phagocytosis following neuronal cell death / Boris Shklyar, Flonia Levy-Adam, and Estee Kurant.
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Digital
    edited by Ksenia Z. Meyza, Ewelina Knapska.
    Summary: Neuronal Correlates of Empathy: From Rodent to Human explores the neurobiology behind emotional contagion, compassionate behaviors and the similarities in rodents and human and non-human primates. The book provides clear and accessible information that avoids anthropomorphisms, reviews the latest research from the literature, and is essential reading for neuroscientists and others studying behavior, emotion and empathy impairments, both in basic research and preclinical studies. Though empathy is still considered by many to be a uniquely human trait, growing evidence suggests that it is present in other species, and that rodents, non-human primates, and humans share similarities.

    Contents:
    1. Introduction- empathy beyond semantics
    2. The Vicarious Brain: Integrating Empathy and Emotional Learning
    3. The neural bases of empathy in humans
    4. Vicarious activations: our current understanding of the neural correlates of human empathy, its limitations and how rodent neuroscience is critical for further progress
    5. Ethological Approaches to Empathy in Primates
    6. Mirror mechanism and embodied emotions
    7. The Neurobiological Influence of Stress in the Vole Pair Bond
    8. The Social Transmission of Associative Fear in Rodents- Individual Differences in Fear Conditioning by Proxy
    9. Neuronal correlates of remote fear learning in rats
    10. Feeling others' pain: Affective communication in rodent models
    11. Relief provided by conspecifics: social buffering
    12. Helping behavior in rats
    13. Reconstructing empathy from the bottom-up with rodent models of shared affect
    14. Lack of empathy - mouse models
    15. Future directions in empathy studies
    Digital Access ScienceDirect 2018
  • Digital
    edited by Carl L. Faingold, Hal Blumenfeld.
    Summary: "How the brain accomplishes many of its more complex tasks can only be properly understood via the study of neuronal network control mechanisms and the interactions among networks. Large networks can undergo major changes, resulting in substantial alterations of brain function, affecting everything from learning to the potential for epilepsy and other CNS disorders ... the volume serves to advance the understanding of how the brain carries out important tasks via networks, how these networks interact in normal brain function, major mechanisms that control network activity, and the interaction of the normal networks to produce more complex behaviors. The chapters also show how brain disorders can result from adnormal network interactions, and how therapy of these disorders can be advanced through this network approach"--Page 4 of cover.

    Contents:
    Introduction to Neuronal networks of the brain / Carl L. Faingold, Hal Blumenfeld
    Network models of absence seizures / Alain Destexhe
    Functional magnetic resonance imaging in epilepsy: methods and applications using awake animals / Craig F. Ferris, Jeffrey Tenney
    Network experimental approaches: inactivation, microinjection, neuronal stimulation, and recording / Hua-Jun Feng and Carl L. Faingold
    Network experimental approaches: ex vivo recording / Victor V. Uteshev
    Network imaging / Jennifer N. Guo, Hal Blumenfeld
    Network control mechansims: c ellular inputs, neuroactive substances, and synaptic changes / Carl L. Faingold
    Volume transmission and the Russian-doll organization of brain cell networks: aspects of their integrative actions / L.F.Agnati, S. Genedani, P.F. Spano, D. Guidolin, K. Fuxe
    Electrophysiological mechanisms of network control: bursting in the brain - from cells to networks / Taufik A. Valiante, Peter L. Carlen
    Network Control Mechanisms: cellular milieu / Victor V. Uteshev, Alexander G. Gusev, Evgeny A. Sametsky
    Neuronal network mechanisms: sex and development / Aristea S. Galanopoulou, Solomon Moshé
    Astrocytic regulation of synapses, neuronal networks, and behavior / Michael M. Halassa, Marcello D'Ascenzo, Anna Boccaccio, Tommaso Fellin
    The fear memory network / Glenn E. Schafe
    Orchestration of the circadian clock network by the suprachiasmatic nucleus / Shelley A. Tischkau, Stacey L. Krager
    mTOR signaling in cortical network development / Tiffany V. Lin, Angelique Bordey
    Network control mechanisms - synaptogenesis and epilepsy development / Kevin Staley, Jonas Dyhrfjeld-Johnsen, Waldemar Swiercz, F. Edward Dudek
    The brain and spinal cord networks controlling locomotion / Larry M. Jordan, Urszula Sławińska
    The brainstem respiratory network / Tara G. Bautista, Teresa E. Pitts, Paul M. Pilowsky, Kendall F. Morris
    Visual network / Moran Furman
    Auditory neuronal networks and chronic tinnitus / Thomas J. Brozoski, Carol A. Bauer
    Consciousness and subcortical arousal systems / Joshua Motelow, Hal Blumenfeld
    Networks of normal and disordered sleep / Pierre-Hervé Luppi, Patrice Fort
    Networks for the modulation of acute and chronic pain / Inna Sukhotinsky, Marshall Devor
    Networks in mood and anxiety disorders / Hamada Hamid
    Neuronal networks and therapeutics in neurodegenerative disorders / Amanda-Amrita D. Lakraj, Bahman Jabari, Duarte G. Machado
    Neuronal networks in epilepsy: comparative audiogenic seizure networks / Carl L. Faingold, Manish Raisinghani, Prosper N'Gouemo
    Physiological and pathophysiological expansion of neuronal networks / Prosper N'Gouemo, Norberto Garcia-Cairasco and Carl L. Faingold
    Neuronal network plasticity and network interactions are critically dependent on conditional multireceptive (CMR) brain regions / Carl L. Faingold, Awais Riaz, James D. Stittsworth, Jr.
    Neuronal network interactions in the startle reflex, learning mechanisms, and CNS disorders, including sudden unexpected death in epilepsy / Carl L. Faingold, Srinivasan Tupal
    Emergent properties of neuronal networks / Carl L. Faingold
    Neuronal network involvement in stimulation therapies for CNS disorders / Carl L. Faingold, Hua-Jun Feng
    Neuronal network effects of drug therapies for CNS disorders / Carl L. Faingold
    Future trends in neuronal networks - selective and combined targeting of network hubs / Carl L. Faingold, Hal Blumenfeld.
    Digital Access ScienceDirect 2014
  • Digital
    Caroline Fonta, László Négyessy.
    Summary: Phosphatases such as TNAP are fundamental in regulating cellular, and consequently numerous body functions. TNAP is a ubiquitous enzyme with a wide spectrum of substrates and specificity regulation at the cellular level and the lack of TNAP activity is a lethal condition. Recent findings of a highly specific regional, laminar and subcellular localization of TNAP in the cerebral cortex indicates that in addition to its metabolic and skeletal functions, TNAP also plays a role in regulating cerebral functions, most probably cognition. In fact, TNAP disturbance could result in complex diseases such as epilepsy, developmental retardation and Alzheimer disease. Available data suggest that, regarding brain functions, TNAP is a potentially important target of clinical research. The proposed book aims to provide an overview of our current understanding of the functions of TNAP in the brain.

    Contents:
    1. Clinical forms and animal models of hypophosphatasia
    2. Molecular genetics of hypophosphatasia and phenotype-genotype correlations
    3. Genetically modified mice for studying TNAP function
    4. Tissue-Nonspecific Alkaline Phosphatase in the Developing Brain and in Adult Neurogenesis
    5. Rediscovering TNAP in the brain: a major role in regulating the function and development of the cerebral cortex
    6. TNAP in the retina
    7. Tissue Non-specific Alkaline Phosphatase (TNAP) in vessels of the brain
    8. What can we learn about the neural functions of TNAP from studies on other organs and tissues?
    9. TNAP, an essential player in membrane lipid rafts of neuronal cells
    10. Signal transduction pathways of TNAP: molecular network analyses
    11. Vitamin B-6 Metabolism and Interactions with TNAP
    12. Tetramisole and levamisole suppress neuronal activity independently from their inhibitory action on Tissue Non-Specific Alkaline Phosphatase in mouse cortex
    13. TNAP and Pain Control
    14. Neurological symptoms of Hypophosphatasia
    15. Recombinant enzyme replacement therapy in hypophosphatasia
    16. Neurogenetic Aspects of Hyperphosphatasia in Mabry Syndrome
    17. The role of tissue non-specific alkaline phosphatase (TNAP) in Neurodegenerative diseases: Alzheimer's disease in the focus
    18. TNAP plays a key role in neural differentiation as well as in neurodegenerative disorders
    Index.
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Digital
    edited by Murat Gokden, Manoj Kumar.
    Summary: Neuroscience is an evolving, complex, and multidisciplinary field of medicine. Neuroradiologists and neuropathologists are an important part of the multidisciplinary team in addition to neurosurgeons, neurologists, and other disciplines. Featuring over nine hundred images, this practical textbook and atlas combines the specialties of neuroradiology and neuropathology, providing an extensive understanding of the disease process. It offers a comprehensive review of the nervous system diseases, including eye, skeletal muscle, and bone and soft tissue diseases. Topics are covered in chapters arranged by region, allowing for quick reference of conditions such as brain tumors, spinal cord diseases, or congenital malformations. Introductory chapters on pathologic and radiologic techniques are also featured, enabling specialists of both areas to familiarize themselves with the other's subject. Packaged with a password to give the user online access to all the text and images, this is a must-have resource for comprehensive and accurate diagnosis.

    Contents:
    Radiologic techniques / Manoj Kumar
    Pathologic techniques / Theodore Friedman, Mahtab Tehrani
    Meningeal mass lesions / Mahlon D. Johnson, Ali Hussain
    Diffuse leptomeningeal and dural lesions / Ali Hussain, Mahlon D. Johnson
    Sellar and suprasellar region / Beatriz Lopes, Prashant Raghavan
    Pineal region / Melissa Gener, Stephen Kralik, Eyas Hattab
    Mass effect and edema / Bret Evers, Travis Danielsen, Manoj Kumar
    Cerebral mass lesions / Douglas C. Miller, Girish M. Fatterpekar
    Cerebral atrophy / Robert E. Mrak, Edgardo J.C. Angtuaco
    Ventricular system / Bruce C. Gilbert, Suash Sharma, Ramon Figueroa, Amyn M Rojiani
    White matter / Suash Sharma, Brandi Villarreal, John Edry, Reed Murtagh, Amyn M. Rojiani
    Cerebellum and brainstem mass lesions / Raghu H. Ramakrishnaiah, Veena Rajaram, Charles M. Glasier
    Malformations / Veena Rajaram, Korgun Koral
    Cerebellopontine angle / Rohan S. Samant, Murat Gokden
    Spinal cord / Sumit Singh, S. Humayun Gultekin
    Bone and soft tissues / Roopa Ram, Kedar Jambhekar, Robin Elliott
    Peripheral nervous system / Shivani Ahlawat, Laura M. Fayad, Fausto Rodriguez
    Skeletal muscle / S. Humayun Gultekin, Brooke Beckett
    Ophthalmic diseases / Anat O. Stemmer-Rachamimov, Nora Laver, Declan McGuone, Baiju Shah, Gene M. Weinstein, Harprit Singh Bedi.
    Digital Access Cambridge 2017
  • Digital
    [edited by] Anthony T. Yachnis, Marie L. Rivera-Zengotita.
    Contents:
    Cerebral Edema
    Hydrocephalus
    Herniations
    Malformations
    Acquired Developmental Defects
    Cerebral Ischemia and Hypertensive Changes --Intracranial Aneurysms
    Vascular Malformations
    Vasculitis
    Inherited Cerebrovascular Diseases
    Closed Versus Open (Penetrating) Head Trauma
    Traumatic Intracranial Hemorrhage
    Diffuse Gliomas : Astrocytic
    Diffuse Gliomas : Oligodendroglial
    Other Astrocytic Tumors
    Ependymomas and Subependymoma
    Tumors with Ependymal-Like Features Choroid Plexus Tumors
    Neuronal and Glioneuronal Tumors
    Embryonal (Primitive) Neuroepithelial Tumors i. Meningiomas (Tumors of the Meninges)
    Nerve Sheath Tumors
    Primary CNS Lymphoma (Pcnsl)
    Pineal Parenchymal Tumors
    Germ Cell Tumors of the Central Nervous System Hemangioblastoma
    Sellar and Suprasellar Tumors
    Primary Melanocytic Tumors of the Central Nervous System
    Central Nervous System Cysts --. Metastatic Brain Tumors
    Tumors of the Skull Base
    Bacterial Infect ions
    Mycoses
    Parasitic Infections
    Viral Infections
    Neuropathology of AIDS Prion Diseases
    Alzheimer's Disease
    Frontotemporal Lobar Degenerations and Related Tauopathies
    Frontotemporal Lobar Degenerations with Ubiquitin-Inclusions (FTLD-U and FTLD-MND) (TDP-43)
    Parkinson's Disease and Related Alpha-Synucleinopathies
    Amyotrophic Lateral Sclerosis (ALS) Triple-Repeat Inherited Neurodegenerations
    Neuroaxonal Dystrophies
    Vascular Dementia and Binswanger Disease
    Multiple Sclerosis
    Acute Disseminated Encephalomyelitis
    Acute Hemorrhagic Leukoencephalitis (Hurst Disease)
    Tumefactive Demyelinating Lesions (TDL)
    Toxic Injury
    Nutritional Diseases
    Metabolic Diseases
    Peripheral Nerve Disease
    Skeletal Muscle Diseases.
    Digital Access ScienceDirect 2012
  • Digital
    edited by Gabor G. Kovacs and Irina Alafuzoff.
    Contents:
    1. Techniques in neuropathology
    2. Banking brain tissue for research
    3. Cellular reactions of the central nervous system
    4. Raised intracranial pressure and brain edema
    5. Cerebrospinal fluid circulation and hydrocephalus
    6. Developmental and perinatal brain diseases
    7. Neuropathology of cerebrovascular diseases
    8. Neurotrauma
    9. Neurometabolic and neurodegenerative diseases in children
    10. Mitochondrial diseases
    11. Neurodegeneration with brain iron acculumation
    12. Nutritional and systemic metabolic disorders
    13. Alcohol-related diseases
    14. Neurotoxicology and drug-related disorders
    15. Neuropathology of epilepsy
    16. Acute and chronic bacterial infections and sarcoidosis
    17. Acute and chronic viral infections
    18. Parasitic and fungal infections
    19. Inflammatory demyelinating diseases of the central nervous system
    20. Immune-mediated disorders
    21. Concepts and classification of neurodegenerative diseases
    22. Genetics of neurodegenerative diseases: an overview
    23. Alzheimer disease
    24. Alpha-synucleinopathies
    25. Tauopathies
    26. Amyotrophic lateral sclerosis and non-tau frontotemporal lobar degeneration
    27. Trinucleotide repeat disorders
    28. Prion diseases
    29. Spinal cord
    30. Diseases of the peripheral nerves
    32. Clinical neuropathology of brain tumors
    33. Bioimaging and surgery of brain tumors
    34. Brain tumors, other treatment modalities
    35. Overview of cerebrospinal fluid cytology
    36. Comorbidities
    37. Overview of neuroradiology
    Index.
    Digital Access ScienceDirect 2017
  • Digital
    edited by Richard A. Prayson, Gabrielle Yeaney ; series editor, John R. Goldblum.
    Digital Access ClinicalKey 2023
  • Digital
    Meghana Chougule.
    Summary: This highly illustrated book explores the pathological and radiological diagnosis of various brain tumors. Featuring 900 high-quality colored images, it covers MR images, intra-operative squash cytology, histopathology and immunohistochemistry microphotographs of various brain and spine tumors, including differential diagnosis, as well as the molecular diagnosis and prognosis of each tumor. The book also presents case studies of typical and rare presentations, and introduces readers to a new procedure for intra-operative cytology: the modified fields stain, which stains the slide within 2 minutes, allowing quick, accurate reporting. This book uses concise text and a consistent point-wise format that makes reading and reviewing easy. The radiological and pathological correlates of brain and spine tumors serve as a ready-reference resource for residents, surgical and neuropathologists, neuroradiologists, neurosurgeons, neuro-oncologists and research scientists.

    Contents:
    Squash staining
    new procedure
    Diffuse astrocytic and oligodendroglial tumors
    Other astrocytic tumors
    Ependymal tumors
    Neuronal and glio-neuronal tumors
    Embryonal tumors
    Meningeal tumors
    Mesenchymal, non-menigothelial tumors
    Tumors of sellar region
    Germ cell tumors
    Choroid plexus tumors
    Cranial and paraspinal tumors
    Lymphoma
    Plasmacytoma
    Metastatic tumors
    Benign cysts of CNS
    Fungus on Squash
    Pituitary adenoma
    List of spinal tumors, Intra-axial/extra-axial, intra-dural and extra-dural tumors.
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    Andreas Büttner.
    Summary: This book provides a comprehensive overview of the current state of knowledge concerning neuropathologies resulting from drug abuse. The first chapters offer readers detailed information on the neurobiological basics of drug abuse and the results of neuroimaging studies in drug abusers. The focus of the book is on neuropathological findings in drug abusers for the predominant substances, which include cannabis, opiates, cocaine, amphetamine, methamphetamine and a broad spectrum of designer drugs. These findings are supported by histological illustrations and discussed in connection with recent scientific publications. A chapter specifically addressing clinicians is also included, and highlights the implications for further therapy. The book is essential reading for neuropathologists, neurologists, neuroradiologists and psychiatrists, as well as other health professionals and scientists interested and engaged in the problem of drug abuse. Although a great deal of data has been derived from animal models and from human neuroimaging studies, little is known about the morphological effects of drug abuse on the human brain. In recent years, fundamental drug-induced effects on the cellular elements of the brain have been detected. These alterations might not only be the substrate of the neuroimaging data but might also have implications for clinical research and therapy. In addition, drug abuse may induce premature neurodegeneration.

    Contents:
    Chapter 1. Introduction
    Chapter 2. Neurobiological Basics of Drug Abuse
    Chapter 3. Neuroimaging Studies in Drug Abusers
    Chapter 4. Basic Substance Characteristics and Neuropathological Findings in Drug Abusers
    Chapter 5. Neuropathological Findings in Drug Abusers
    Chapter 6. Neurotoxicity and Neurodegeneration of Drug Abuse
    Chapter 7. Summary and Implications for Research.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    Udo Rüb, Jean Paul G. Vonsattel, Helmut Heinsen, Horset-Werner Korf.
    Summary: This monograph describes the progress in neuropathological HD research made during the last century, the neuropathological hallmarks of HD and their pathogenic relevance. Starting with the initial descriptions of the progressive degeneration of the striatum as one of the key events in HD, the worldwide practiced Vonsattel HD grading system of striatal neurodegeneration will be outlined. Correlating neuropathological data with results on the functional neuroanatomy of the human brain, subsequent chapters will highlight recent HD findings: the neuronal loss in the cerebral neo-and allocortex, the neurodegeneration of select thalamic nuclei, the affection of the cerebellar cortex and nuclei, the involvement of select brainstem nuclei, as well as the pathophysiological relevance of these pathologies for the clinical picture of HD. Finally, the potential pathophysiological role of neuronal huntingtin aggregations and the most important and enduring challenges of neuropathological HD research are discussed.
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Digital
    Matthew Williams, editor.
    Summary: In the past few decades, neuropathology has witnessed a resurgence. The rise of structural and functional imaging techniques has allowed pathological studies to target regions of special interest as revealed by whole-brain techniques, and the development of comprehensive software packages has facilitated cellular and pathological measurements. Furthermore, a new generation of antibodies and improved staining methods has made the field more accessible to researchers and revealed more detail than could once have been envisaged. Perhaps most important of all has been the sourcing of high-quality tissue through modern, large-scale databases covering multiple tissue banks, removing much of the heterogeneity that had made repeat studies all but impossible. The Neuropathology of Schizophrenia reviews the field following these recent improvements in techniques and contrasting more modern methods against older studies. This book presents the current state of neuropathological knowledge in schizophrenia by means of examination of neuropathology as informed by functional systems. It starts by considering the frontal cortical region, a particularly well-examined region of the brain, before moving through other cortical regions, subcortical pathways and the deep white matter. In addition, potential new routes for investigation are considered, particularly in glial cells.

    Contents:
    Introduction
    A note of neuroanatomy
    Gross Pathology in Schizophrenia
    Frontal Cortex
    Temporal Cortex
    The amygdala, hippocampus, fornix and nucleus basalis
    The Cingulate Cortex
    Parietal and Occipital Lobes
    The Basal Ganglia
    The Thalamus
    The Neuropathology of White Matter in Schizophrenia
    Glial Cells.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    David A. Hilton, Aditya G. Shivane.
    Summary: This book provides the reader with an up-to-date, practical and succinct overview of basic neuropathology. It does not replace large reference textbooks in neuropathology but emphasizes key concepts and basic principles including recent advances, genetics and classification, and discusses important aspects of specific neuropathological disorders. It also gives practical hints on aspects of neuropathology, including how to best use the neuropathology service and interpret the results of pathological tests. The reader will gain a sufficiently broad basic knowledge of neuropathology which will be of use in their future clinical careers.Neuropathology Simplified is aimed at trainees and residents in neurology, neurosurgery and psychiatry around the world. It may also be of use to basic scientists involved in neuroscience research and also to general histopathology trainees and residents.

    Contents:
    Normal Histology and Commonly Used Stains
    Basic Pathologic Reactions
    Requesting and Interpreting Pathological Tests
    Vascular Diseases
    Infections
    Tumours of Nervous System
    Demyelinating Diseases
    Epilepsy
    Skeletal Muscle Diseases
    Peripheral Nerve Diseases
    Metabolic, Toxic and Nutritional Diseases
    Neurodegenerative Diseases
    Trauma
    Paediatric Diseases
    Autopsy.
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Digital
    David A. Hilton, Aditya G. Shivane.
    Summary: This updated second edition provides a practical and succinct overview of basic neuropathology. Key concepts and basic principles are covered and discussed with particular focus on recent advances, classification, and genetics. Practical points are included to detail how to best use the neuropathology service and interpret the results of pathological tests. Neuropathology Simplified aims to aid the development of multidisciplinary teams and help clinical trainees understand recent advances in neuropathological disorders. The book is also relevant to trainee and resident neurologists, pathologists, and neurosurgeons.

    Contents:
    Normal histology and commonly used stains
    Basic pathologic reactions
    Requesting and interpreting pathological tests
    Vascular diseases
    Infections
    Tumours of central nervous system
    Demyelinating diseases
    Epilepsy
    Muscle diseases
    Peripheral nerve diseases
    Metabolic, toxic and nutritional diseases
    Neurodegenerative disorders
    Trauma
    Paediatric diseases
    Autopsies.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    edited by Hari Shanker Sharma, Aruna Sharma.
    Contents:
    Chapter 1: Concussive head injury exacerbates neuropathology of sleep deprivation: Superior neuroprotection by co-administration of TiO2-nanowired cerebrolysin, alpha-melanocyte-stimulating hormone, and mesenchymal stem cells
    Chapter 2: Spinal cord stimulation and intrathecal baclofen therapy for patients with severe spasticity after spinal cord injury
    Chapter 3: Co-administration of TiO2-nanowired dl-3-n-butylphthalide (dl-NBP) and mesenchymal stem cells enhanced neuroprotection in Parkinson's disease exacerbated by concussive head injury
    Chapter 4: Mild traumatic brain injury exacerbates Parkinson's disease induced hemeoxygenase-2 expression and brain pathology: Neuroprotective effects of co-administration of TiO2 nanowired mesenchymal stem cells and cerebrolysin
    Chapter 5: Protein kinase inhibitors in traumatic brain injury and repair: New roles of nanomedicine
    Chapter 6: Diabetes exacerbates brain pathology following a focal blast brain injury: New role of a multimodal drug cerebrolysin and nanomedicine
    Chapter 7: The therapeutic and neuroprotective effects of an antiepileptic drug valproic acid in glioma patients
    Chapter 8: Is the ALS a motor neuron disease or a hematopoietic stem cell disease?
    Chapter 9: Cerebrolysin enhances spinal cord conduction and reduces blood-spinal cord barrier breakdown, edema formation, immediate early gene expression and cord pathology after injury
    Chapter 10: Human mind has microwave electromagnetic nature and can be recorded and processed.
    Digital Access ScienceDirect 2020
  • Digital
    David J.K. Balfour, Marcus R. Munafó, editors.
    Contents:
    Imaging Tobacco Smoking with PET and SPECT
    Behavioral Mechanisms Underlying Nicotine Reinforcement
    The Role of Mesoaccumbens Dopamine in Nicotine Dependence
    Nicotine Withdrawal
    Neurobiologal bases of cue- and nicotine-induced reinstatement of nicotine seeking
    Psychiatric disorders as vulnerability factors for nicotine addiction: What have we learned from animal models?.
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Digital
    edited by Yu Chen and Babak Kateb.
    Contents:
    Section I. Optical spectroscopy and spectral imaging of brain
    Section II. Brain imaging and mapping from micro to macroscales
    Section III. Intraoperative neuroimaging
    Section IV. Image-guided intervention and phototherapy.
    Digital Access TandFonline 2017
  • Digital
    Abdul Qayyum Rana, Ali T. Ghouse, Raghav Govindarajan.
    Digital Access Springer 2017
  • Digital
    edited by William E. Armstrong, Jeffrey G. Tasker.
    Contents:
    Electrophysiology of magnocellular neurons in vivo
    Oxytocin neurons during suckling : lessons from organotypic cultures
    Peptidergic control of oxytocin and vasopressin neurons and its role in reproductive and hypertension-associated plasticity
    The osmotic control of vasopressin releasing neurons
    Function and localization of epithelial sodium channels in vasopressin and oxytocin neurons
    Visible markers of vasopressin and oxytocin activity and their use in identifying the neuronal activity of specific neuroendocrine cell types
    Neurophysiology of neurohypophysial terminals
    Neuronal-glia remodeling of the magnocellular system
    Dendritic release of the neuropeptides vasopressin and oxytocin
    Endocannabinoid modulation of synaptic inputs to magnocellular neurons
    Role of central vasopressin in the generation of multimodal homeostatic responses
    Elucidating the structure and function of gonadotropin-releasing hormone (GnRH) neuron dendrites
    Roles of estrogen and kisspeptin in controlling gonadotropin releasing hormone (GnRH) neuronal excitability
    Multiple-unit activity recording of the gonadotropin-releasing hormone pulse generator.
    Digital Access Wiley 2015
  • Digital
    Gianluca Coppola, Wei-Ta Chen, editors/.
    Summary: Roughly one in every five patients referred to a neurologist suffers from headaches; the majority have migraines. Although headache specialists understand migraine on a clinical basis, the pathophysiological changes that provoke and accompany the development of a migraine attack continue to elude us. Several decades have passed since the pioneering electroencephalographic study by Golla and Winter (1959), which underscored the role of abnormal rhythmic activities in migraine. Since then, there have been substantial advances in the field; a wealth of neurophysiological studies has enriched our understanding of the pathophysiological facets of the migraine pathology. Virtually every known technique of clinical electrophysiology has since been used to study the migraine brain and, more recently, new neurophysiological tools have been added to the arsenal. Nevertheless, applying the principles of peripheral and central neuromodulation offers a promising way to transfer the principles of synaptic plasticity to the patient's bedside. This book belongs to the Headache Series endorsed by the European Headache Federation. Written by internationally recognized experts in their respective fields, it covers all aspects of clinical neurophysiological methods that represent significant advances in our understanding of the pathophysiology of migraine. It will offer a valuable toolkit for beginners, and a reference guide for experts.

    Contents:
    Electroencephalography
    2 Magnetoelectroencephalography
    3 Evoked potentials
    4 Cognitive potentials
    5 Sleep and migraine
    6 Brain oscillations and migraine
    7 Brainstem reflexes
    8 Spinal reflexes in migraine
    9 Sensorimotor integration in migraine
    10 Pain-related evoked potentials
    11 Pain perception and migraine
    12 The genetic basis of the neurophysiological findings
    13 Neuromodulation for evaluating the pathophysiology of migraine
    14 Neurophysiology of migraine aura
    15 Neurophysiology in children and elders with migraine
    16 Neuroimaging correlates of neurophysiological findings
    17 Neurophysiological model of migraine pathophysiology: bringing the past into to the future.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Print
    edited by Angelo Quartarone, Maria Felice Ghilardi, François Boller.
    Contents:
    Intro
    Neuroplasticity: From Bench to Bedside
    Copyright
    Available titles
    Foreword
    Preface
    Contributors
    Contents
    Introduction
    Section I: Introduction
    Chapter 1: Defining neuroplasticity
    Introduction
    Developmental Plasticity
    Neurogenesis and the control of neuronal number
    Neuronal migration
    Neuronal differentiation
    Formation of connections
    Activity dependent formation of connections: Ocular dominance
    Plasticity of cortical connections
    Cytoarchitectonic/areal specializations
    System-wide changes in development
    Language learning Myelin Plasticity
    Adult Plasticity
    Adaptive vs Maladaptive Plasticity
    Conclusions
    Acknowledgments
    References
    Section II: Neuroplasticity: Basic mechanism and assessment at system level
    Chapter 2: Basic mechanisms of plasticity and learning
    Introduction
    Synaptic and Neuronal Basis of Learning and Memory
    Molecular Mechanisms of Synaptic Long-Term Changes: Lessons From the Hippocampus
    NMDAR-dependent LTP
    NMDAR-independent LTP
    Main forms of synaptic LTD
    The Nucleus Striatum and the Dopaminergic Regulation of Synaptic Plasticity Homeostasis and circadian regulation of sleep
    The Homeostatic Control of Plasticity During Sleep
    The synaptic homeostasis hypothesis
    Open questions and limitations of SHY
    Synaptic strengthening and the cognitive benefits of sleep
    Brain resilience, plasticity, and sleep
    Translational findings in neurodegenerative and neurodevelopmental disorders
    Multidimensional Assessment of Sleep and Homeostatic Control of Plasticity
    Molecular and cellular basis
    Neurochemical correlates of sleep
    Cortical electrophysiology and thalamo-cortical oscillations Implications Of neural Plasticity and Sleep Homeostasis for the Diagnosis and Treatment of Sleep Disorders.
    Digital Access ScienceDirect 2022
  • Digital
    volume editors, Angelos Halaris, Brian E. Leonard.
    Contents:
    Neuroprogression in schizophrenia and psychotic disorders : the possible role of inflammation / Müller, N
    The link between refractoriness and neuroprogression in treatment-resistant bipolar disorder / Bauer, I.E., Soares, J.C., Selek, S., Meyer, T.D.
    Neuroprogression and immune activation in major depressive disorder / Meyer, J.H
    Inflammation effects on glutamate as a pathway to neuroprogression in mood disorders / Haroon, E., Miller, A.H
    Major depression as a neuroprogressive prelude to dementia : what is the evidence? / Leonard, B.E
    Innate immune memory : implications for microglial function and neuroprogression / Salam, A.P., Pariante, C.M., Zunszain, P
    Inflammatory and innate immune markers of neuroprogression in depressed and teenage suicide brain / Pandey, G.N
    Towards an integrated view of early molecular changes underlying vulnerability to social stress in psychosis / Barron, H., Hafizi, S., Mizrahi, R.
    Neurodegeneration, neuroregeneration, and neuroprotection in psychiatric disorders / Tang, S.W., Helmeste, D.M., Leonard, B.E
    The contribution of adult hippocampal neurogenesis to the progression of psychiatric disorders / Kohman, R.A., Rhodes, J.S
    The brain-gut axis contributes to neuroprogression in stress-related disorders / Rea, K., Dinan, T.G., Cryan J.F
    Pharmacological and nonpharmacological interventions to arrest neuroprogression / Boufidou, F., Halaris, A.
    Digital Access Karger 2017
  • Digital
    Toru Nakazawa, Yasushi Kitaoka, Takayuki Harada, editors.
    Summary: This book provides the latest findings on neuroprotection and neuroregeneration as potential therapeutic strategies for various eye diseases, namely, glaucoma, age-related macular degeneration (AMD), retinal detachment, and retinitis pigmentosa. Glaucoma is one of the main causes of blindness throughout the world, and other diseases such as AMD and retinitis pigmentosa also lead to loss of vision. All these conditions are characterized by degeneration of specific retinal cell types, making it essential to establish treatments to protect retinal neurons and the optic nerve. With that aim in mind, this book explains the mechanisms underlying aforementioned diseases and their experimental models. The novel strategy proposals for the treatment of retinal diseases based on the concept of neuroprotection are also discussed in the main body of the text, while the section on regenerative research discusses optic nerve regeneration, endothelial progenitor cells, and iPS cells. This book is recommended as a professional reference work for all doctors and trainees in the field of ophthalmology who are interested in neuroprotective and neuroregenerative treatments.

    Contents:
    Part I Neuroprotection for Glaucoma
    1. Molecular Architecture of Glutamate Signaling Pathway in Glaucomatous Optic Neuropathy
    2. Calcium and Calpain Activation
    3. Classical Signaling Pathways
    4. Antioxidative Treatment for Neuroprotection in Glaucoma
    5. ER stress
    6. Nitric Oxide Contributes to Retinal Ganglion Cell Survival Through Protein S-Nitrosylation after Optic Nerve Injury
    7. Neurotrophic factors
    8. RIP Kinase-Mediated Programmed Necrosis
    9. Axonal Degeneration
    10. Axonal Transport
    11. Interaction Between RGC Bodies and Glia
    12. Aquaporin in optic neuropathies
    13. Microglia
    Part II Neuroprotection for Age-Related Macular Degeneration (AMD), Retinal Pigmentary Degeneration
    14. Neuroprotection for Photoreceptors
    15. Retinal Photooxidative Stress and Its Modifiers
    16. Roles of the Retinal Pigment Epithelium in Neuroprotection
    17. Oxidative Stress in the RPE and Its Contribution to AMD Pathogenesis; Implication of Light Exposure
    18. Interaction Between Photoreceptors and RPEs
    Part III Neuroprotection for Other Retinal Diseases
    19. Neuroprotection for Retinal Detachment
    20. Neuroinflammation
    21. Optic Neuritis
    22. Neuroprotection by Endothelial Progenitor Cells for Retinal Degeneration
    23. Optic Nerve Regeneration.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    Kenzo Uchida, Masaya Nakamura, Hiroshi Ozawa, Shinsuke Katoh editors; Yoshiaka Toyama honory editor.
    Summary: Neuroprotection and Regeneration of the Spinal Cord comprehensively covers the most recent research in the field of spinal cord injury. The first part of this book focuses on the latest animal models and clinically oriented work, providing extensive information on morphological factors and, biomechanical analysis, in addition to the mechanism of functional recovery. The book goes on to provide information on clinical relevance introducing analysis of spinal cord injuries using MRI and PET. Edited by renowned experts in the field, this book will provide clinical physicians, basic researchers, and postgraduate students with valuable insight into the cutting-edge research and progress in the field of spinal cord injury, treatment, and repair.

    Contents:
    Pathologies of Spinal Cord Injury
    The Mechanism Behind Functional Recovery After the Incomplete Spinal Cord Injury
    Microenvironment Within the Injured Spinal Cord Focusing on IL-6
    Autophagy in Spinal Cord Injury: Pathogenic Roles and Therapeutic Implications
    The Role of the Endoplasmic Reticulum Stress Response in Neural Apoptosis of the Injured Spinal Cord
    Roles of Microglia in Spinal Cord Injury
    Pathologies of Chronic Compressive Spinal Cord
    Biomechanics of the Spinal Cord and the Pia Mater
    Biomechanical Analysis of Compressive Myelopathy: The Influence of Morthometry of the Spinal Cord
    Morphologic Change and Glial Response to Unilateral Spinal Cord Compression
    Morphological Changes in Anterior Horn Cells, Immunoreactivity to Neurotrophic Factors, and Neuronal Cell Death of Spinal Cord Lesions in the Spinal Hyperostotic Mouse (twy/twy) with Chronic Mechanical Cord Compression
    In Vivo Tracing of Neural Tracts in Tiptoe-Walking Yoshimura Mice by Diffusion Tensor Tractography
    Microarray Analysis of Expression of Cell Death-Associated Genes in Spinal Cord Cells with Cyclic Tensile Strain
    Spinal Kyphosis Causes Demyelination and Neuronal Loss in the Spinal Cord
    Neuroprotection
    Granulocyte Colony-Stimulating Factor-Mediated Neuroprotective Therapy for Spinal Cord Injury
    Recombinant Human Hepatocyte Growth Factor Promotes Functional Recovery After Spinal Cord Injury
    The Proteoglycan-Degrading Enzymes Promote Functional Recovery After Spinal Cord Injury: Keratan Sulfate and Chondroitin Sulfate
    Targeted Retrograde Gene Delivery into the Injured Spinal Cord Using Recombinant Adenovirus Vector Carrying Neurotrophic Factor Gene
    Blockade of Interleukin-6 Effects on Cytokine Profiles and Macrophage Activation After Spinal Cord Injury in Mice
    Oxidative Stress as Secondary Injury Mechanism After Mechanical Trauma in the Spinal Cord
    Transplantation
    Regenerative Medicine for Spinal Cord Injury Utilizing iPS Cells
    Transplantation of Neural Stem Cells with Valproate for Spinal Cord Injury
    The Effects of Mesenchymal Stem Cell-Transduced Multineurotrophin to Improve Function Following Spinal Cord Injury
    Axonal Regeneration Across an Artificial Scaffold Combined with Cell Transplantation Applied to the Transected Spinal Cord
    Transplantation of Mesenchymal Stem Cells Derived from Bone Marrow in the Injured Spinal Cord
    Vascular Regeneration Therapies for Spinal Cord Injury
    Clinical Relevance
    Stress Distribution of the Spinal Cord and Clinical Relevance in Cervical Spondylotic Myelopathy
    Applications and Limitations of pNF-H, a Novel Biomarker for Spinal Cord Injury: Strategy for the Evaluation of Therapeutic Outcomes
    Neuroprotective Therapy Using Granulocyte Colony-Stimulating Factor for Acute Spinal Cord Injury: A Multicenter Prospective Controlled Clinical Trial
    Assessment of Injured Spinal Cord Using Diffusion Tensor Tractography
    Clinical Significance of 3D-MRI/18F-FDG PET Fusion Imaging of Patients with Cervical Compressive Myelopathy
    Visualization of Electrophysiological Activity in the Spinal Cord Using Magnetospinography
    Spinal Synaptic Plasticity in Chronic Pain
    Evaluation of Pain with Functional Neuroimaging.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    edited by Illana Gozes.
    Contents:
    Introduction / I. Gozes
    Neural regeneration as a disease-modifying therapeutic strategy for Alzheimer's disease / S.F. Kazim, K. Iqbal
    Animal models of Alzheimer's disease / S. Amram, D. Frenkel
    Mechanisms of neuronal mocrotubule loss in Alzheimer's disease / T.O. Austin, L. Qiang, P.W. Bass
    Tau-centric therapies for treating Alzheimer's disease / S. Quraishe, C.M. Cowan, A. Mudher
    The potential of small molecules in preventing tau oligmer fromation and toxicity / J.E. Gerson, F.L. Cascio, R. Kayed
    A novel neuroprotection target with distinct regulation in stroke and Alzheimer's disease / A. Gamir-Morralla, C. López-Menéndez, M. Medina, T. Iglesias
    Sirtuinmodulation as novel neuroprotective strategy for Alzheimer's disease / L. Polito, G. Biella, D. Albani
    Rescue of neurons by resolving inflammation / E. Hjorth, M. Schultzberg
    Targeting transition metals for neuroprotection in Alzheimer's disease / S. Ayton, A.A. Belaidi, P. Lei, A.I. Bush
    Multifunctional effects of human serum albumin toward neuroprotection in Alzheimer disease / A. Ezra, I. Rabinovich-Toidman, B. Solomon
    RGS2 and SIRT1 link renin angiotensin aldosterone system to Alzheimer's disease / A. Hadar I. Gozes, D. Gurwitz
    Neuroprotective drug development / I. Gozes.
    Digital Access ScienceDirect 2017
  • Digital
    edited by David L. Reich, Stephan Mayer, Suzan Uysal.
    Contents:
    Physiologic modulators of neural injury after brain and spinal cord injury / W. Dalton Dietrich
    Pharmacologic neuroprotection / Nino Stocchetti and Marco Carbonara
    Imaging assessment of brain injury / Matthew A. Warner, Carlos Marquez de la Plata, David S. Liebeskind, and Ramon Diaz-Arrastia
    Tissue biomarkers and neuroprotection / Axel Petzold
    Neurophysiological monitoring and neuroprotection / Aws Alawi, Michael Reznik, Jan Claassen
    Neurological and functional outcomes assessment / Suzan Uysal and Stephan A. Mayer
    Assessment of postoperative cognitive decline / Suzan Uysal and David L. Reich
    Neuroprotection for traumatic brain injury / Jonathan J. Ratcliff and David W. Wright
    Neuroprotection for cardiac arrest / Joseph Pitcher and David B. Seder
    Neuroprotection for acute ischemic stroke / Diana Mayor and Michael Tymianski
    Neuroprotection for intracranial hemorrhage / Julius Griauzde, Neeraj Chaudhary, Joseph J. Gemmete, Aditya S. Pandey, Guohua Xi
    Neuroprotection for mechanical circulatory support / Lauren E. Dunn, Joshua Z. Willey, Ronald M. Lazar
    Neuroprotection in sepsis and acute respiratory distress syndrome / Neha S. Dangayach, Charles L, Francoeur, Stephan A. Mayer, Tarek Sharshar
    Neuroprotection for premature birth and neonatal brain injury / Eugene Chang
    Neuroprotection for spinal cord injury / Christopher S. Ahuja and Michael Fehlings
    Neuroprotection for valvular and coronary bypass surgery / Karsten Bartels, G. Burkhard Mackensen
    Neuroprotection for aortic surgery and stenting / Jared W. Feinman and John G. Augoustides
    Neuroprotection for carotid endarterectomy and stenting / Zirka H. Anastasian and Eric J. Heyer
    Neuroprotection for vascular and endovascular neurosurgery / Travis R. Ladner, Nishant G. Kumar, Lucy He, J. Mocco
    Neuroprotection for spine surgery / Jess W. Brallier and Jonathan S. Gal
    Neuroprotection for general, orthopedic, peripheral vascular and ENT surgery / Magdy Selim.
    Digital Access Oxford 2017
  • Digital
    edited by Goutam Brahmachari.
    Summary: Focusing on the molecular mechanisms of powerful naturally occurring agents and their implication for drug discovery, this timely book presents an overview of the most recent research advances in the field of bioactive natural products and natural drug formulations to combat today's destructive diseases. To this extent, the authors discuss the most severe neurological disorders in our modern civilization, such as Alzheimer's, Parkinson's and Huntington's disease, as well as ischemic brain stroke and depression. The emerging diversity of active compounds is covered in detail, including flavonoids, cannabinoids and oleanolic acid, while experts in the field explain the chemistry, mode of action and clinical aspects of novel nEuroprotective natural products. In each case, the benefits of treatments using natural products are addressed from the perspective of modern as well as traditional medicine. With its multidisciplinary viewpoint, this is the ideal companion for medicinal and natural products chemists as well as neuroscientists, biochemists, pharmacologists, neurobiologists, and phytotherapists.

    Contents:
    Neuroprotective natural products : clinical aspects and modes of action : an overview / Goutam Brahmachari
    Neuroprotective agents : an overview on the general modes of action / Christina Volsko, Ranjan Dutta
    Beneficial upshots of naturally occurring antioxidant compounds against neurological disorders / Sukanya Saha, Pritam Sadhukhan, Parames C. Sil
    Natural neuroprotectives for the management of Parkinson's fisease / Bharti Gaba, Shobhit Kumar, Shadab Md, Sanjula Baboota, Jasjeet K. Narang, Javed Ali
    Neuroprotective effect of Ayurvedic preparations and natural products on Parkinson's disease / Anupom Borah, Amarendranath Choudhury, Rajib Paul, Muhammed K. Mazumder, Swapnali Chetia
    Lipid peroxidation and mitochondrial dysfunction in Alzheimer's and Parkinson's diseases : role of natural products as cytoprotective agents / Carlos Fernández-Moriano, Elena González-Burgos, Maria Pilar Gómez-Serranillos
    Marine-derived anti-Alzheimer's agents of promise / Kapil Dev, Rakesh Maurya
    Natural products against Huntington's disease (HD) : implications of neurotoxic animal models and transgenics in preclinical studies / Abhijit Dey
    Possible role of neuroprotectants and natural products in epilepsy : clinical aspects and mode of action / Anil Kumar, Manveen Bhardwaj, Harshpreet Kaur
    Neuroprotective effects of flavonoids in epilepsy / Hossein Hosseinzadeh, Marjan Nassiri-Asl
    The role of noncompetitive antagonists of the N-methyl-D-aspartate (NMDA) receptors in treatment-resistant depression / Gianluca Serafini, Shawn Hayley, Mehdi Ghasemi, Mario Amore
    Safety and efficacy of Ashwagandha (Withania somnifera) / Shri K Mishra, Bharathi A Venkatachalapathy, Hadi M Khanli
    Cannabinoids : a group of promising neuroprotective agents / Laura R Caltana, Alicia Brusco.
    Digital Access Wiley 2017
  • Digital
    Paul A. Lapchak, John H. Zhang, editors.
    Summary: This book is a critical and comprehensive look at current state-of-the-art scientific and translational research being conducted internationally, in both academia and industry; it serves to address new ways to provide effective treatment to victims of ischemic and hemorrhagic stroke and other ischemic diseases. Currently, stroke can be successfully treated through the administration of a thrombolytic, but the therapeutic window is short and many patients are not able to receive treatment. Only about 30% of patients are "cured" by available treatments. Divided into five sections, the proposed volume explores historical and novel neuroprotection mechanisms and targets, new and combination therapies, as well as clinical trial design for some of the most recent bench-side research.
    Digital Access Springer 2017
  • Digital
    Ana Verdelho, Manuel Gonçalves-Pereira, editors.
    Summary: This book is an up-to-date, comprehensive review of the neuropsychiatry of different types of cognitive impairment by active authorities in the field. There is an emphasis on diagnostic and management issues. Cognitive impairment both with and without criteria for dementia is covered. A critical appraisal of the methodological aspects and limitations of the current research on the neuropsychiatry of cognitive impairment and dementia is included. Unanswered questions and controversies are addressed. Non-pharmacological and pharmacological aspects of management are discussed, to provide robust information on drug dosages, side effects and interaction, in order to enable the reader to manage these patients more safely. Illustrative cases provide real life scenarios that are clinically relevant and engaging to read. Neuropsychiatric Symptoms of Cognitive Impairment and Dementia is aimed at neurologists, psychiatrists, gerontologists, and general physicians. It will also be of interest to intensive care doctors, psychologists and neuropsychologists, research and specialist nurses, clinical researchers and methodologists.

    Contents:
    Neuropsychiatric Symptoms in Cognitive Impairment and Dementia: A Brief Introductory Overview
    Part 1. Common Issues in Cognitive Impairment
    The Difficult Distinction Between Affective Disorders and Mild Cognitive Deterioration
    Behavior Symptoms in Primary Progressive Aphasia Variants
    The Ability to Drive in Mild Cognitive Impairment
    Global Hypoactivity and Apathy
    Neuropsychiatric Symptoms in Reversible Dementias
    Part 2. Main Neuropsychiatric Symptoms and Syndromes in Dementia
    Delirium and Dementia in Older People: A Complex Link
    Depression and Anxiety in Dementia Subjects
    Aggression, Agitation, Hyperactivity and Irritability
    Psychosis in Dementia
    Inappropriate Sexual Behaviors in Dementia
    Insomnia in Dementia: A Practical Approach
    Fronto-Temporal Dementia
    Part 3. Non-Pharmacological Approaches
    Cognitive and Psychological Interventions in Neurocognitive Disorders
    Family Issues in Behavioral and Psychological Symptoms of Dementia: Unraveling Circular Pathways?
    Towards a Family-Sensitive Practice in Dementia.
    Digital Access Springer 2017
  • Digital
    Marco Mula, editor.
    Contents:
    Neurobehavioral Comorbidities of Epilepsy: Lessons from Animal Models
    Depression
    Mania and Elation
    Anxiety
    Delusions and Hallucinations
    Obsessiveness and Viscosity
    Aggressive Behavior
    Sleep
    Dissociation
    Consciousness
    Emotion Recognition
    Neuropsychiatric Symptoms in Learning Disability
    Attention, Executive Function and Attention Deficit Hyperactivity Disorder
    Dementia
    Stress and Epilepsy
    Epilepsy in Psychiatric Disorders
    The Role of Epilepsy Surgery
    The Role of Antiepileptic Drugs
    The Role of Stimulation Techniques.
    Digital Access Springer 2016
  • Digital
    Bruno Brochet, editor.
    Contents:
    Part I: Psychiatry of Demyelinating Diseases
    The Spectrum of Demyelinating Inflammatory Diseases of the Central Nervous System
    Depression and Multiple Sclerosis: Clinical Aspects, Epidemiology and Management
    Depression and Multiple Sclerosis: Imaging, Mechanisms
    Anxiety and Multiple Sclerosis
    Multiple Sclerosis and Bipolar Disorders
    Psychiatric Co-morbidity
    Psychiatric Presentation of Brain Inflammation
    Drug Management of Psychiatric Co-morbidity in Multiple Sclerosis
    Part II: Psychology
    Psychology of Multiple Sclerosis
    Coping and Multiple Sclerosis
    Fatigue
    Psychological and Behavioral Therapies in Multiple Sclerosis
    Part III: Cognitive Perspective
    Introduction to Social Cognition
    Psychopathology of Alexithymia and Multiple Sclerosis
    Social Cognition and Multiple Sclerosis
    Cognitive Impairment in Multiple Sclerosis
    Neuropsychiatry of Neuromyelitis Optica
    Dementia in Multiple Sclerosis
    Depression, Anxiety and Cognitive Functioning in Multiple Sclerosis.
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Digital
    edited by Heinz Reichmann.
    Summary: This is an up-to-date, comprehensive review of the neuropsychiatry of patients with movement disorders, i.e. Parkinson?s disease, Huntington?s disease, dystonia and others, by active authorities in the field, with an emphasis on diagnostic and management issues. This book includes critical appraisal of the methodological aspects and limitations of the current research on the neuropsychiatry of movement disorders and on unanswered questions/controversies. Symptomatology and pharmacological aspects of management are discussed, to provide robust information on drug dosages, side effects and interaction, in order to enable the reader to manage these patients more safely. Illustrative cases provide real life scenarios that are clinically relevant and engaging to read. Neuropsychiatric Symptoms of Movement Disorders is aimed at neurologists, movement disorder specialists and psychiatrists, and will also be of interest to intensive care doctors, psychologists and neuropsychologists, research and specialist nurses, clinical researchers and methodologists.

    Contents:
    Depression, Apathy, Anhedonia, Fatigue in Parkinson's Disease
    Mild Cognitive Impairment in Parkinson's Disease
    Parkinson's Disease Dementia
    Impulse Control Disorders
    Influence of Dietary Constituents on Motor and Non-Motor Symptoms in Parkinson's Disease
    Psychosis in Parkinson's Disease
    Neuropsychiatric Manifestations in Atypical Parkinsonian Syndromes
    Neuropsychiatric Disturbances in Dystonia
    Depression in Huntington's Disease
    Cognitive Impairment and Dementia (Mild or Major Neurocognitive Disorder) in Huntington's Disease
    Tics
    Wilson's Disease
    Ataxia.
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Digital
    Shunsei Hirohata, editor.
    Summary: Neuropsychiatric manifestation in systemic lupus erythematosus (NPSLE) is one of the most recalcitrant complications of the disease. According to the 1999 ACR nomenclature and case definitions, diffuse psychiatric/neuropsychological syndromes in NPSLE (anxiety disorder, acute confusional state, cognitive dysfunction, mood disorder, psychosis) (diffuse NPSLE) present psychiatric manifestations unlike neurologic syndromes (focal NPSLE) originating from focal CNS lesions, such as cerebrovascular disease, demyelinating syndrome, headache, aseptic meningitis, chorea, seizures and myelopathy. A number of studies have reported that diffuse NPSLE is usually associated with the presence of autoantibodies against neuronal cells in serum as well as in cerebrospinal fluid (CSF). Moreover, IL-6 has been shown to be elevated in CSF of patients with diffuse NPSLE. Recently, it has been demonstrated that the severity of blood-brain barrier damages plays a crucial role in the development of acute confusional state, the severest form of diffuse NPSLE through the accelerated entry of larger amounts of autoantibodies to NMDA receptor subunit NR2 into the CNS. Since the importance of autoantibodies in the NPSLE has been now evident, such an aggressive treatment, especially B cell depleting therapy, would make sense in that it would reduce the levels of pathogenic autoantibodies, leading to a better prognosis of NPSLE. As far as we know, no single book specifically dedicated to NPSLE alone has been published as yet. As mentioned above, NPSLE constitutes a vastly expanding field of research with increasing numbers of papers published annually. Therefore, we believe that an effort to collect and critically review these publications is invaluable. Such an effort will provide an important contribution to basic researchers as well as clinicians working in the field of neurology, rheumatology, psychiatry and internal medicine fields.

    Contents:
    Intro; Preface; Contents;
    Chapter 1: Epidemiology of Neuropsychiatric Systemic Lupus Erythematosus; 1.1 Introduction; 1.2 Classification; 1.3 Demographic Features of NPSLE; 1.3.1 Prevalence; 1.3.2 Age of Onset and Ethnicity; 1.3.3 Risk Factors; 1.4 The Limitations of 1999 ACR Nomenclatures and Definitions; 1.5 NPSLE in Childhood; 1.6 Steroid Induced Psychosis; 1.7 Mortality; 1.8 Emerging Problems from the Epidemiological Studies; 1.9 Summary; References;
    Chapter 2: Genetics; 2.1 Introduction; 2.2 Genetics of Overall SLE; 2.2.1 Major Histocompatibility Complex (MHC) Region. 2.2.2 Type I Interferon Pathway and Nucleic Acid Response Genes2.2.3 Defective Clearance of Dying Cell Nucleic Acids; 2.2.4 Signaling Molecules in Immune System Cells; 2.3 Genetics of Neuropsychiatric SLE; 2.3.1 TREX1; 2.3.2 Other Candidate Genes; 2.4 Summary; References;
    Chapter 3: Immunopathology of Neuropsychiatric Systemic Lupus Erythematosus; 3.1 Introduction; 3.2 Autoantibodies Implicated in the Pathogenesis of NPSLE; 3.2.1 Anti-Phospholipid Antibodies; 3.2.2 Anti-Ribosomal P Antibodies; 3.2.3 Anti-NMDA Receptor NR2 Subunit Antibodies; 3.2.4 Anti-Sm Antibodies. 3.2.5 Anti-Neuronal Antibodies3.2.6 Other Autoantibodies; 3.3 Intrathecal Ig Production and Blood-Brain Barrier Damages in NPSLE; 3.3.1 Intrathecal Ig Production; 3.3.2 Blood-Brain Barrier Damages in NPSLE; 3.4 Roles of Complements and Microglia in the Pathogenesis of NPSLE; 3.4.1 Complements; 3.4.2 Microglia; 3.5 Summary; References;
    Chapter 4: Pathology of Neuropsychiatric Systemic Lupus Erythematosus; 4.1 Introduction; 4.2 Overall Characteristic Features in Pathology in NPSLE; 4.3 The Pathogenesis of Vasculopathy in NPSLE; 4.4 Diffuse Psychiatric/Neuropsychological Syndromes. 4.4.1 Acute Confusional State4.4.2 Non-ACS Diffuse NPSLE; 4.5 Neurologic Syndromes; 4.5.1 Cerebrovascular Disease and Reversible Focal Neurological Deficits; 4.5.2 Seizures; 4.5.3 Cranial Neuropathy; 4.5.4 Myelopathy; 4.5.5 Peripheral Neuropathy; 4.6 Other Pathological Features in NPSLE; 4.6.1 Choroid Plexus; 4.6.2 Microglia; 4.6.3 Perivenous Changes; 4.7 Summary; References;
    Chapter 5: Clinical Features; 5.1 Introduction; 5.2 Classification; 5.3 Case Definition and Clinical Significance; 5.3.1 Diffuse Psychiatric/Neuropsychological Syndromes; 5.3.1.1 Acute Confusional State. 5.3.1.2 Anxiety Disorder5.3.1.3 Cognitive Dysfunction; 5.3.1.4 Mood Disorder; 5.3.1.5 Psychosis; 5.3.2 Neurologic Syndromes of CNS; 5.3.2.1 Aseptic Meningitis; 5.3.2.2 Cerebrovascular Disease; 5.3.2.3 Demyelinating Syndrome.; 5.3.2.4 Headache; 5.3.2.5 Movement Disorder (Chorea); 5.3.2.6 Myelopathy; 5.3.2.7 Seizures and Seizure Disorders; 5.3.3 Neurologic Syndromes of PNS; 5.3.3.1 Neuropathy, Cranial; 5.3.3.2 Acute Inflammatory Demyelinating Polyradiculoneuropathy (Guillain-Barré Syndrome); 5.3.3.3 Autonomic Disorder; 5.3.3.4 Mononeuropathy (Single/Multiplex); 5.3.3.5 Myasthenia Gravis.
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Digital
    editors, David Silbersweig, Laura T. Safar, Kirk R. Daffner.
    Summary: "Neuropsychiatry and Behavioral Neurology: Principles and Practice is a clinically-oriented text-book that aims to link rapid advances in basic, cognitive, and affective neuroscience with the care of patients struggling with losses that often involve their most cherished human capacities"-- Provided by publisher.
    Digital Access AccessNeurology 2021
  • Digital
    Heinz Boeker, Peter Hartwich, Georg Northoff, editors.
    Summary: This book presents a comprehensive neuropsychodynamic strategy for treating psychiatric disorders. Rather than pursuing an exclusively biological, psychological, or psychodynamic approach, it offers a methodology that links all three aspects in a unifying, integrative model. Central to this approach is the view of the brain as a bio-psychosocial organ in a neuro-ecological model, rather than the purely neuronal model often presupposed in current neuroscience and psychiatry. Moreover, the book views psychopathological symptoms as spatiotemporal disorders of the altered spatiotemporal structure spanning the brain and its surrounding world. The relation between one of the core symptoms and altered neuronal activity calls for the development of integrated, circular neuropsychodynamic models of psychopathological symptoms in severe psychiatric disorders and their treatment.

    Contents:
    Intro; Preface; Contents;
    1: Introduction; 1.1 The First Part of the Book: Neuropsychodynamic Foundations; 1.2 The Second Part of the Book: Neuropsychodynamics of Psychiatric Disorders; 1.3 The Third Part of the Book: Neuropsychodynamic Perspectives; References; Part I: Neuropsychodynamic Foundations;
    2: Why Do We Need Psychopathology? From the Brain's Spontaneous Activity to "Spatiotemporal Psychopathology"; 2.1 Introduction; 2.2 "Spatiotemporal Psychopathology": Determination and Distinction; 2.2.1 Psychological Approaches to Psychopathology 2.2.2 "Common Currency" Between the Brain and Cognition2.2.3 Experiential Approaches to Psychopathology; 2.2.4 "Common Currency" Between the Brain and Experience; 2.3 Spatiotemporal Psychopathology: Depression and Bipolar Disorder; 2.3.1 Spatiotemporal Psychopathology: Bipolar Disorder and Neuronal Variability; 2.3.2 Spatiotemporal Psychopathology: From Neuronal Variability to Cognition and Experience; References;
    3: Psychoanalysis and Neuroscience: The Development of Neuropsychoanalysis; 3.1 Introduction; 3.2 Freud and the Demystification of the Unconscious 3.3 Freud's Voyage of Discovery3.4 The Discovery of the Phantasm; 3.5 The Topographical Model; 3.6 Freud's Second Topography and Concepts of Instincts; 3.7 The Mysterious Message of the Other and Its Consequences for the Concept of the Unconscious; 3.8 Unconscious Phantasy: Psychoanalysis and "Embodied Cognitive Science"; 3.9 Beginnings of the Dialogue Between Psychoanalysis and Neuroscience; 3.10 Lurija's Neurodynamic Approach; 3.11 Kaplan-Solms and Solms' Neuroanatomical Methods; 3.12 The Neuroscience of Subjective Experience; 3.13 Affective Neuroscience; 3.14 Concluding Remarks 4.8 Neuroscientific Findings Ia: Spatial Patterns of Neural Activity During Self-Specific Stimuli4.9 Neuroscientific Findings Ib: Temporal Patterns of Neural Activity During Self-Specific Stimuli; 4.10 Neuroscientific Findings Ic Social Patterns of Neural Activity During Self-Reference; 4.11 Conclusion: Self as Brain-Based Neurosocial Structure and Organization; References;
    5: Three-Dimensional Neuropsychodynamic Model of Mental Disorders and Their Defence Mechanisms; 5.1 Introduction
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Digital
    edited by Jacobus Donders, Scott J. Hunter.
    Summary: "This unique analysis of neuropsychological conditions provides readers with a review of both pediatric and adult presentations in one convenient place. Covering the most common disorders encountered in clinical practice, including those specific to the extremes of the age spectrum, this book provides dedicated chapters on: Preterm and Low Weight Birth, Spina Bifida Myelomeningocele, Autism Spectrum Disorder, Intellectual Disability, Fetal Alcohol Spectrum Disorders, Attention-Deficit/Hyperactivity Disorder, Learning Disability, Traumatic Brain Injury, Cancer, Epilepsy, Human Immunodeficiency Virus, Multiple Sclerosis, Stroke, Dementia. Each chapter provides evidence-based guidelines that can be readily applied to daily practice"--Provided by publisher.

    Contents:
    1. Preterm and Low Birth Weight Birth / Julia Jaekel and Megan Scott
    2. Spina Bifida Myelomeningocele / Colleen F. Bechtel Driscoll, Grayson N. Holmbeck, Kathy Zebracki, T. Andrew Zabel, Alexa Stern, Jaclyn Lennon Papadakis and Diana Ohanian
    3. Autism Spectrum Disorder (ASD) / Julie M. Wolf, Marianne Barton, and Roger Jou
    4. Neuropsychological Conditions across the Lifespan Intellectual Disability Syndromes / Kelly Janke and Lisa Jacola
    5. Fetal Alcohol Spectrum Disorders / Israel M. Gross, and Douglas Bodin
    6. Neuropsychological Conditions Across the Lifespan: Attention-Deficit/Hyperactivity Disorder / J.G. Fine, D.J. Marks, D. Wexler, V.M Dahl, and E.P. Horn
    7. Learning Disabilities / Richard Boada, Robin L. Peterson and Robert L. Mapou
    8. Traumatic Brain Injury / Tresa Roebuck-Spencer, Naddley Desire, and Miriam Beauchamp; 9. Cancer, Iris Paltin, Marsha Gragert, Tanya Antonini, and Chad Noggle
    10. Epilepsy / Julie Janecek, Klajdi Puka, Evan Schulze and Mary Lou Smith
    11. Neuropsychological Conditions across the Lifespan: Human Immunodeficiency Virus / Steven Paul Woods, Kelli L. Sullivan, Sharon Nichols, and Scott J. Hunter
    12. Multiple Sclerosis / Lana Harder, Julie A. Bobholz, and William S. MacAllister
    13. Stroke / Robyn Westmacott, Angela Deotto, and David Nyenhuis
    14. Dementia / Laura Lacritz, Heidi Rossetti, and Christian LoBue.
    Digital Access Cambridge 2018
  • Digital
    Ronald Cohen.
    Summary: Once viewed as a somewhat vague metaphysical construct, not suitable for behavioral inquiry, attention is now recognized as a core cognitive function, essential to the brain's processing of outside stimuli. Not surprisingly in an era of advanced information technologies--and rising rates of ADD--attention has also emerged as a significant area of study within neuropsychology. The Second Edition of Neuropsychology of Attention reflects this evolution, integrating fruitful lines of inquiry from disciplines as varied as psychology, medicine, and cognitive science, and synthesizing the current state of attention-related theory, conceptualization, findings, and therapy. Focusing on cognitive, behavioral, and neural processes, mechanisms, and disorders, this reference expands on previous models of brain structures and function in light of the latest theoretical and technological advances. Imaging, clinical, and experimental data locate attention in the context of executive functioning and track the attentional effects of specific conditions from depression to TBI to Alzheimer's disease. And the book's updated clinical chapters offer state of the art methods for the assessment and treatment of attention disturbances, providing possibilities for addressing these and other real-life concerns. Included in the coverage: Phenomenology, history and evolution of the neuropsychology of attention. Behavioral and cognitive manifestations and processes of attention. Relationships of attention to consciousness, awareness and memory. Neural substrates of attention. Functional brain systems underlying attention. Impact on attention of specific neurological, psychiatric, and medical illnesses. Current methods for assessing attentional disorders. Effective behavioral treatments and pharmacotherapy. Neural, behavioral, and physical constraints on attention. New directions from neuroimaging and computational neuroscience. The Second Edition of Neuropsychology of Attention brings a variety of professionals up to speed, including neuropsychologists, cognitive neuroscientists, health psychologists, primary care physicians, and educators.

    Contents:
    Part I. Foundations of attention
    Introduction
    Historical and philosophical antecedents
    Cognitive psychology of attention: foundations
    Cognitive science of attention: current concepts and approaches
    Intention, response selection, and executive-attention
    Focused and sustained attention a-- Behavioral perspectives
    The orienting response: index of attention
    Electrophysiology of attention
    Neural mechanisms of attention
    Models and mechanisms of attention
    Part II. Neuropsychology of attention
    Disorders of sensory selective attention
    Attention and the frontal cortex
    Subcortical and limbic attentional influences
    Attention disturbances associated with neurological disease
    Medical disorders and behavioral risk factors
    Psychiatric disturbances of attention
    Developmental disorders of attention
    Clinical considerations: assessment and treatment
    Neuropsychological models of attention
    Part III. Toward and integrated attention framework
    Consciousness and self-directed attention
    Neural constraints on attention
    Processing speed and attentional resources
    Mutual constraint of memory and attention
    Spatial and temporal dynamics of attention
    Neuroimaging of attention
    Computational approaches to attention
    Neuropsychology of attention: synthesis.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    Peter Riederer, Gerd Laux, Toshiharu Nagatsu, Weidong Le, Christian Riederer, editors.
    Summary: This book provides a reference guide describing the current status of medication in all major psychiatric and neurological indications, together with comparisons of pharmacological treatment strategies in clinical settings in Europe, USA, Japan and China. In addition, it highlights herbal medicine as used in China and Japan, as well as complementary medicine and nutritional aspects. This novel approach offers international readers a global approach in a single dedicated publication and is also a valuable resource for anyone interested in comparing treatments for psychiatric disorders in three different cultural areas. There are three volumes devoted to Basic Principles and General Aspects, offering a general overview of psychopharmacotherapy (Vol. 1); Classes, Drugs and Special Aspects covering the role of psychotropic drugs in the field of psychiatry and neurology (Vol. 2) and Applied Psychopharmacotherapy focusing on applied psychopharmacotherapy (Vol. 3). These books are invaluable to psychiatrists, neurologists, neuroscientists, medical practitioners and clinical psychologists.

    Contents:
    Vol 1. Basic Principles and General Aspects
    Vol 2. Classes, Drugs and Special Aspects
    Vol 3. Applied Psychopharmacotherapy.
    Digital Access Springer 2022
  • Digital
    editors, Prachi Dubey, Sathish Kumar Dundamadappa, Daniel Thomas Ginat, Rafeeque Bhadelia, Gul Moonis.
    Contents:
    Neoplastic abnormalities
    Inflammatory and demyelinating conditions
    Skull, ventricles and developmental abnormalities
    Trauma
    Brain infections
    Inherited and neurodegenerative abnormalities
    Vascular abnormalities
    Manifestations of toxic, metabolic and systemic pathologies
    Spine trauma and degeneration
    Spine infection, inflammation and demyelination
    Spine neoplastic and vascular abnormalities
    Congenital and development abnormalities of the spine
    Soft tissue neck
    Nose and paranasal sinuses
    Orbit
    Sella/suprasellar lesions
    Skull base
    Temporal bone
    Noninterpretive skills.
    Digital Access Ovid 2018
  • Digital
    Martina Špero, Hrvoje Vavro.
    Summary: This book presents a selection of unusual neuroradiology cases, each documented with a short medical history, CT and MRI images, and one page with clinical features and radiological findings. A total of 25 rare and peculiar cases were selected from the authors' clinical experience. Over time, the authors witnessed several of these cases - for which there is little or no information in the international literature - being misinterpreted, especially by residents, general radiologists who occasionally have to deal with neuroradiology cases, or young neuroradiologists. Written by experienced practitioners, this atlas, with its thoroughly documented collection of rare neuroradiological cases, represents a valuable clinical tool for young radiologists and will encourage them to "think outside the box" and successfully find the correct diagnosis.

    Contents:
    I.Most likely differential diagnose
    II.Vascular
    III.Infections/Metabolic/Toxic
    IV.Skull and orbit anomalities
    V.Unusual Spine
    VI.Something different.
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Digital
    Martina Špero, Hrvoje Vavro.
    Summary: The aim of this book is to emphasize firstly that rare and serious conditions can be hidden behind common (mis)leading neurological symptoms. Secondly, it stresses the importance of the collaboration with clinician colleagues - a neuroradiologist needs complete and accurate patient information to make a proper diagnosis or a differential diagnosis that can properly guide further diagnostic processing. The book, structured as an atlas, is divided into three sections according to the most common leading symptoms encountered in hospital emergency units or in outpatient settings. Each proposed case is accompanied by a short medical history, CT and MRI images, and a text describing its most important radiological features. 27 cases were chosen from the authors everyday practice: rare and peculiar cases, as well as common cases with a twist. Although both authors are experienced neuroradiologists, several of the cases were surprising and it took considerable time to arrive at the correct diagnosis. A certain level of knowledge and experience, together with information from literature, the Internet or from clinicians, helped them solve most of the cases directly, or after consultation with clinicians and further medical examinations and interventions. This book is mainly intended for residents, general radiologists and neuroradiologists. However, it will also be of help to less experienced colleagues or trainees who need to solve particular cases, encouraging them to think outside the box to find the answers.

    Contents:
    I.PAIN AND VERTIGO
    Voltage-gated potassium channel (VGKC)-complex antibody limbic encephalitis
    Cranial bone changes in megaloblastic anemia due to anorexia nervosa
    Multinodular and vacuolating neuronal tumor (MVNT)
    Intracranial extra-axial teratoma in an adult female patient
    Ruptured dermoid cyst and ischemic stroke (after in-vitro fertilization treatment)
    Trigeminal nerve cavernoma
    Aortic pseudoaneurysm eroding thoracic spine
    Spinal extradural arachnoid cyst
    Spinal intramedullary ependymal cysts
    Pilocytic astrocytoma at the L5-S1 level
    CAPNON
    II. EPILEPTIC SEIZURE
    Antiphospholipid syndrome in patients with systemic lupus erythematosus elements
    Posterior reversible encephalopathy syndrome (PRES): holohemispheric watershed pattern
    Thrombotic thrombocytopenic purpura (TTP) and hemolytic-uremic syndrome (HUS)
    Citrobacter Koseri brain abscess in chronic cocaine addict
    Intaventricular meningioma
    Large cavernoma vs brain tumor
    Supratentorial extraventricular ependymoma vs arteriovenous malformation
    Pachymeningeal involvement in acute myeloid leukemia (AML)
    Gliosarcoma
    Is this really a gliobastoma?
    Extradural spinal meningioma
    Chronic venous sinus thrombosis vs brain metastases
    Progressive multifocal leukoencephalopathy (PML) after obinutuzumab treatment for chronic lymphocytic leukemia (CLL)
    Large cerebral vessel vasculitis in undiagnosed HIV positive patient meningovascular syphilis
    Cerebral amyloid angiopathy vs primary brain tumor (glioblastoma).
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    [edited by] Juan E. Small, Daniel L. Noujaim, Daniel T. Ginat, Hillary R. Kelly, Pamela W. Schaefer.
    Summary: "Acquire a better understanding of disease evolution and treatment response with Neuroradiology Spectrum and Evolution of Disease. The unique format includes carefully chosen clinical images that depict the pathologic evolution of disease from initial presentation across the continuum of progression. Colorful graphics plot characteristic changes, helping you visualize how normal and abnormal variations alter over time. Extensive illustrations and concise descriptions distill complex concepts, making this first-of-its-kind resource an excellent tool for imaging interpretation and clinical problem solving"--Publisher's description.

    Contents:
    Section I: Brain. Parenchymal hemorrhage and trauma.
    Brain parenchymal hematoma
    Subdural hemorrhage and post-traumatic hygroma
    Disorders of cerebral vascular autoregulation. Posterior reversible encephalopathy syndrome
    Arteriopathy. Cerebral amyloid angiopathy
    Metabolic disorders. Wernicke encephalopathy
    Central pontine myelinolysis
    Infection. Herpes simplex encephalitis
    Toxoplasmosis
    Neurocysticercosis
    Autoimmune/inflammatory disorders. Acute disseminated encephalomyelitis
    Autoimmune encephalitis
    Progressive multifocal leukoencephalopathy
    Immune reconstitution inflammatory syndrome
    Neurosarcoidosis
    Tumors. Glial tumors
    Hemangioblastoma
    Ventricular system alterations. Intracranial hypotension
    Intracranial hypertension
    Pituitary abnormalities. Partially empty sella
    Rathke's cleft cyst
    Pituitary apoplexy
    Neurodegenerative disease. Hypertrophic olivary degeneration
    Section II: Spine. Degenerative Disease. Ossification of the posterior longitudinal ligament
    Lumbar interbody fusion
    Post-traumatic effects. Kummel's disease
    Infection. Discitis-osteomyelitis
    Tuberculous spinal infection
    Bone lesions. Chordoma
    Vertebral hemangioma
    Cord lesions. Syringohydromyelia
    Cord infarct
    Subacute progressive ascending myelopathy
    Cord tumors. Spinal cord ependymoma
    Astrocytoma
    Spine deformity. Hiryama
    Thoracic web
    Section III: Head and neck. Infection. Orbital Infection
    Suppurative thyroiditis
    Inflammatory disorders. Thyroid-associated orbitopathy
    IgG4-related disease in the head and neck
    Sjogren's
    Cholesteatoma
    Labyrinthitis
    Tumors. Paraganglioma
    Esthesioneuroblastoma
    Post-traumatic effects. Vocal cord augmentation
    Bone lesions. Otospongiosis
    Paget's
    Vascular lesions. Carotid blowout syndrome
    Digital Access ClinicalKey 2019
  • Digital
    Val M. Runge, Wendy R. K. Smoker, Anton Valavanis.
    Contents:
    Brain
    Head and neck
    Spine.
  • Digital
    Val M. Runge.
    Summary: "Neuroradiology: The Essentials with MR and CT, Second Edition, written by world-renowned neuroradiologist and MRI pioneer Val Runge, builds on the acclaimed prior edition. The splendidly illustrated compendium features in-depth discussion of important imaging findings, focused primarily on common disease processes. An impressive cadre of international experts contribute to the text, which is written from a clinical radiology perspective and draws from firsthand experiences. MRI physics pearls and tips throughout the book will help radiologists avoid common pitfalls"-- Provided by publisher.
    Digital Access
    Provider
    Version
    Thieme-Connect
    Thieme MedOne Radiology
  • Digital
    Rohini Nadgir, David M. Yousem.
    Contents:
    Cranial anatomy
    Neoplasms of the brain
    Vascular diseases of the brain
    Head trauma
    Infectious and noninfectious inflammatory diseases of the brain
    White matter diseases
    Neurodegenerative diseases and hydrocephalus
    Congenital anomalies of the central nervous system
    Orbit
    Sella and central skull base
    Temporal bone
    Introduction to head and neck
    Sinonasal disease
    Mucosal disease of the head and neck
    Extramucosal diseases of the head and neck
    Anatomy and degenerative diseases of the spine
    Nondegenerative diseases of the spine
    Approach and pitfalls in neuroimaging.
    Digital Access ClinicalKey 2017
  • Digital
    Chang Yueh Ho, Rocky Saenz.
    Contents:
    Easy cases
    Moderately difficult cases
    Most difficult cases.
    Digital Access AccessNeurology 2015
  • Digital
    Carlos Zamora, MD, PhD, Assistant Professor of Radiology, Division of Neuroradiology, Department of Radiology, The University of North Carolina School of Medicine, Chapel Hill, North Carolina, Mauricio Castillo, MD, FACR, James H. Scatliff Distinguished Professor, Chief of Neuroradiology, Department of Radiology, The University of North Carolina School of Medicine, Chapel Hill, North Carolina.
    Digital Access
    Provider
    Version
    Ovid
    LWW Health Library
  • Print
    Salvatore V. Labruzzo, DO, Major, US Army Medical Corps, Staff Neuroradiologist, MRI Section Chief, William Beaumont Army Medical Center, El Paso, Texas, Russell H. Morgan Department of Radiology and Radiological Science, Neuroradiology Division, Johns Hopkins Medical Institution, Baltimore, Maryland, Laurie A. Loevner, MD, Professor of Radiology, Otorhinolaryngology, Head and Neck Surgery, and Neurosurgery, Department of Radiology, University of Pennsylvania Medical Center, Hospital of the University of Pennsylvania, Philadelphia, Pennsylvania, Efrat Saraf-Lavi, MD, Associate Professor of Radiology, Neuroradiology Section, Medical Director of Applebaum MRI Center, University of Miami, Miller School of Medicine, Miami, Florida, David M. Yousem, MD, MBA, Asociate Dean for Professional Development, Johns Hopkins School of Medicine, Director of Neuroradiology, Vice Chairman of Program Development, Johns Hopkins Medical Institution, Baltimore, Maryland.
    Contents:
    Opening round
    Fair game
    Challenge.
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Exam Review Books (shelved at Information Desk)
    RC386.6.R3 L33 2017
    1
  • Print
    Derek C. Harwood-Nash, with the assistance of Charles R. Fitz.
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Books: General Collection (Downstairs)
    RJ488 .H37 1976
    3
  • Digital
    Michelangelo Bartolo, Riccardo Soffietti, Martin Klein, editors.
    Summary: This book provides a comprehensive, practical, and timely guide to neurorehabilitation for patients affected by tumors of the central nervous system. These patients encounter various physical and psychosocial impairments, due to sensory-motor, psychological and cognitive limitations, as well as depression, anxiety and fatigue. These common tumor and treatment consequences reduce quality of life and produce long-term limitation in functioning and disability that may benefit from rehabilitative interventions. In the early stages of the disease, rehabilitation aims at restoring functioning after tumor treatment, while in the advanced stages, rehabilitation becomes an integral part of palliative care, which aims to increase patients’ independence, to prevent complications and to improve quality of life. Based on an interdisciplinary approach, the book is structured in two main parts. The first is devoted to the basics of cancer and to the main clinical features of the tumors of the nervous system, as well as to the essentials of therapeutic approaches. The second part is dedicated to rehabilitation issues, providing the tools for health personnel to take in charge persons affected by neuro-oncological disease. This unique volume is a valuable resource for all health professionals (physicians, psychologists, trainees nurses specialized in neuro-oncology, occupational therapists, physiotherapists, speech therapists) involved in the interdisciplinary management of individuals affected by tumors of the central nervous system.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    Dr. Jodie Copley, Dr. Kathy Kuipers.
    Contents:
    Seeing the bigger picture : using clients' experiences to shape clinical practice
    What happens to the upper limb after brain injury?
    The hypertonicity intervention planning model for upper limb neurorehabilitation
    Making sense of the clinical picture : assessment and goal setting
    Case studies
    Movement and strength training
    Splinting
    Casting
    Botulinum neurotoxin
    Surgery
    Case studies revisited.
    Digital Access Wiley 2014
  • Digital
    David J. Reinkensmeyer, Volker Dietz, editors.
    Contents:
    Part I. Basic framework: motor recovery, learning, and neural impairment
    Part II. Human-machine interaction in rehabilitation practice
    Part III. Robots for upper extremity recovery
    Epilogue: what lies ahead?
    Index.
    Digital Access Springer 2016
  • Digital
    David J. Reinkensmeyer, Laura Marchal-Crespo, Volker Dietz, editors.
    Summary: This revised, updated, and substantially expanded third edition provides an accessible, practical overview of major areas of research, technical development and clinical application in the field of neurorehabilitation movement therapy. The initial section provides the basic framework and a rationale for technology application in movement therapy by summarizing recent findings in neuroplasticity and motor learning. The following section provides a detailed overview of the movement physiology of various neurologic conditions, illustrating how this knowledge has been used to design various neurorehabilitation technologies. The third section then explains the principles of human-machine interaction for movement rehabilitation. The fourth section provides an overview of assessment technology and predictive modeling in neurorehabilitation. The fifth section provides a survey of technological approaches to neurorehabilitation, including spinal cord stimulation, functional electrical stimulation, virtual reality, wearable sensing, brain computer interfaces, mobile technologies, and telerehabilitation. The final two sections examine in greater detail the ongoing revolution in robotic therapy for upper extremity movement and walking, respectively. The promises and limitations of these technologies in neurorehabilitation are discussed, including an Epilogue which debates the impact and utility of robotics for neurorehabilitation. Throughout the book the chapters provide detailed practical information on state-of-the-art clinical applications of these devices following stroke, spinal cord injury, and other neurologic disorders and future developments in the field. The text is illustrated throughout with photographs and schematic diagrams which serve to clarify the information for the reader. Neurorehabilitation Technology, Third Edition is a valuable resource for neurologists, biomedical engineers, roboticists, rehabilitation specialists, physiotherapists, occupational therapists and those training in these fields.
    Digital Access Springer 2022
  • Digital
    edited by Krishnan Padmakumari Sivaraman Nair, Marlis Gonzalez-Fernandez, Jalesh N. Panicker.
    Summary: Cognitive impairment, dysphagia, communication issues, pain, spasticity, bladder dysfunction, sexual dysfunction and bowel incontinence are but a few problems frequently reported by individuals living with long-term neurological conditions. The management of long-term neurological conditions requires co-ordinated inputs from multiple disciplines, and this practical handbook facilitates this by combining physical, cognitive and psychological strategies to patient management. Featuring contributions from leading experts in neurology, health services and clinical rehabilitation, this book is a comprehensive overview of common neurological impairments and solutions. It adopts an evidence-based approach to both pharmacological and non-pharmacological options for alleviating neurological symptoms. An easy-to-refer to guide, bridging multiple disciplines, aided by current research, to provide effective, and practical management for all aspects and issues arising in the rehabilitation phases of the neurological patient. This unique pocketbook is intended for practitioners at all levels, and is ideally suited as a quick guide during ward rounds, out-patient clinics and therapy sessions.

    Contents:
    An introduction to neurological rehabilitation / Diane Playford and Krishnan Padmakumari Sivaraman Nair
    Management of disorders of cognition in neurorehabilitation / Pegah Touradji and Anna V. Agranovich
    Management of mood and behaviour in neurorehabilitation / Lewys Morgan and Abhijeeth Shetty
    Management of disorders of consciousness in neurorehabilitation / Andreas Bender
    Management of communication disorders in neurorehabilitation / Rajani Sebastian and Donna C. Tippett
    Management of disorders of eating, drinking, and swallowing in Neurorehabilitation / Rachel Mulheren, Alba Azola and Marlis Gonzalez-Fernandez
    Management of salivary disorders in neurorehabilitation / Nicole Rogus-Pulia, Joanne Yee and Korey Kennelty
    Management of upper limb impairment in neurorehabilitation / Preeti Raghavan and Manuel Wilfred
    Management of vestibular disorders in neurorehabilitation / Adolfo M. Bronstein and Marousa Pavlou
    Management of walking disorders in neurorehabilitation / Jonathan F. Marsden
    Management of spasticity in neurorehabilitation / Valerie L. Stevenson
    Neurorehabilitation in parkinson's disease and parkinsonism / Amit Batla and Fiona Lindop
    Neuropathic pain / Alina Zakin and David M. Simpson
    Management of phantom limb in neurorehabilitation / Rohit Bhide and Apurba Barman
    Management of neuro-ophthalmologic disorders in neurorehabilitation / Simon J. Hickman and Martin J. Rhodes
    Management of pressure ulcers in neurological rehabilitation / Ramaswamy Hariharan and Anand Viswanathan
    Management of disorders of blood pressure control in neurorehabilitation / Ellen Merete Hagen
    Management of neurogenic lower urinary tract dysfunction / Mahreen Pakzad and Pierre Denys
    Management of neurogenic bowel dysfunction / Anton Emmanuel
    Management of neurogenic sexual dysfunction / Gila Bronner and Tanya Gurevich.
    Digital Access Cambridge 2018
  • Print
    Mark F. Bear, Ph. D., Picower Professor of Neuroscience, the Picower Insititute for Learning and Memory, Department of Brain and Cognitive Sciences, Massachusetts Insitute of Technology, Cambridge, Massachusetts, Barry W. Connors, Ph. D., L. Herbert Ballou University Professor, Professor of Neuroscience and Chair, Department of Neuroscience, Brown University, Providence, Rhode Island, Michael A. Paradiso, Ph. D., Sidney A. Fox and Dorothea Doctors Fox Professor of Ophthalmology and Visual Science, Department of Neuroscience, Brown University, Providence, Rhode Island.
    Summary: "Neuroscience: Exploring the Brain surveys the organization and function of the human nervous system. We present material at the cutting edge of neuroscience in a way that is accessible to both science and nonscience students alike. The level of the material is comparable to an introductory college text in general biology. The book is divided into four parts: Part I, Foundations; Part II, Sensory and Motor Systems; Part III, The Brain and Behavior; and Part IV, The Changing Brain. We begin Part I by introducing the modern field of neuroscience and tracing some of its historical antecedents. Then we take a close look at the structure and function of individual neurons, how they communicate chemically, and how these building blocks are arranged to form a nervous system. In Part II, we go inside the brain to examine the structure and function of the systems that serve the senses and command voluntary movements. In Part III, we explore the neurobiology of human behavior, including motivation, sex, emotion, sleep, language, attention, and mental illness. Finally, in Part IV, we look at how the environment modifies the brain, both during development and in adult learning and memory"--Provided by publisher.

    Contents:
    pt. I. Foundations
    1. Neuroscience : past, present, and future
    The origins of neuroscience
    Views of the brain in ancient Greece
    Views of the brain during the Roman Empire
    Views of the brain from the Renaissance to the Nineteenth Century
    Nineteenth-Century views of the brain
    Neuroscience today
    Levels of analysis
    Molecular
    Cellular
    Systems
    Behavioral
    Cognitive
    Neuroscientists
    The scientific process
    Use of animals in neuroscience research
    Animal welfare
    Animal rights
    The cost of ignorance : nervous system disorders
    2. Neurons and glia
    The Neuron doctrine
    The Golgi stain
    Cajal's contribution
    The prototypical neuron
    The soma --The nucleus
    Neuronal genes, genetic variation, and genetic engineering
    Endoplasmic reticulum
    Golgi apparatus
    The mitochondrion
    The neuronal membrane
    The cytoskeleton
    The axon
    Dendrites
    Classifying neurons
    Neuronal structure
    Gene expression
    Glia
    Astrocytes
    Meylinating glia
    Other non-neuronal cells
    3. The neuronal membrane at rest
    The cast of chemicals
    Cytosol and extracellular fluid
    The phospholipid membrane
    Protein
    The movement of ions
    Diffusion
    Electricity
    The ionic basis of the membrane potential
    4. The action potential
    Properties of the action potential
    The action potential, in theory
    Membrane currents and conductances
    The action potential, in reality
    The voltage-gated sodium channel
    Action potential conduction
    Conduction velocity
    Myelin and saltatory conduction
    Action potentials, axons, and dendrites
    5. Synaptic transmission
    Electrical synapses
    Chemical synapses
    Principles of chemical synaptic transmission
    Neurotransmitters
    Principles of synaptic integration
    Neuropharmacology
    6. Neurotransmitter systems
    Transmitter release
    Synaptic mimicry
    Receptors
    Ligand-binding
    Neurotransmitter chemistry
    cholinergic neurons
    Catecholaminergic neurons
    Serotonergic neurons
    Amino acidergic neurons
    Other neurotransmitter candidates and intercellular messengers
    Transmitter-gated channels
    G-protein-coupled receptors and effectors
    Divergence and convergence in neurotransmitter systems
    7. The structure of the nervous system
    Gross organization of the mammalian nervous system
    The central nervous system
    The peripheral nervous system
    The cranial nerves
    The meninges
    The ventricular system
    Understanding CNS structure through development
    Neural tube
    Three primary brain vesicles
    Differentiation of the forebrain
    Midbrain
    Hindbrain
    spinal cord
    Special features of the human CNS
    A guide to the cerebral cortex
    Appendix : an illustrated guide to human neuroanatomy. pt. II. Sensory and motor systems
    8. The chemical senses
    Taste
    Basic tastes
    Organs of taste
    Taste receptor cells
    Mechanisms of taste transduction
    Central taste pathways
    Neural coding of taste
    Smell
    The organs of smell
    Olfactory receptor neurons
    Central olfactory pathways
    Spatial and temporal representations of olfactory information
    9. The eye
    Properties of light
    Light
    Optics
    The structure of the eye
    Gross anatomy of the eye
    Cross-sectional anatomy of the eye
    Image formation by the eye
    Refraction by the cornea
    Accommodation by the lens
    The Pupillary light reflex
    The visual field
    Visual acuity
    Microscopic anatomy of the retina
    Photoreceptor structure
    Phototransduction
    Rods
    cones
    Dark and light adaptation
    Calcium's role
    Local adaptation of dark, light, and color
    Retinal processing and output
    Receptive field
    Bipolar cell receptive fields
    Ganglion cell receptive fields
    Ganglion cell photoreceptors
    Parallel processing
    10. The central visual system
    The retinofugal projection
    The optic nerve, optic chiasm, and optic tract
    Right and left visual hemifields
    Targets of the optic tract
    The lateral geniculate nucleus
    Anatomy of the striate cortex
    Retinotopy
    Cytochrome oxidase blobs
    Physiology of the striate cortex
    Receptive fields
    Parallel pathways and cortical modules
    Beyond the striate cortex
    The dorsal stream
    The ventral stream
    From single neurons to perception
    11. The auditory and vestibular systems
    The nature of sound
    The structure of the auditory system
    The middle ear
    Ossicles
    The attenuation reflex
    The inner ear
    anatomy of the cochlea
    Hair cells and the axons of the auditory nerve
    Central auditory processes
    Auditory pathway
    Encoding sound intensity and frequency
    Stimulus frequency, tonotopy, and phase locking
    Mechanism of sound localization
    Horizontal plane
    Vertical plane
    Auditory cortex
    Neuronal response properties
    Effects of auditory cortical lesions and ablation
    The vestibular system
    The vestibular labyrinth
    The otolith organs
    The semicircular canals
    Central vestibular pathways and vestibular reflexes
    Vestibular pathology
    12. The somatic sensory system
    Touch
    Mechanoreceptors of the skin
    Vibration and the pacinian corpuscle
    Mechanosensitive ion channels
    Primary afferent axons
    The spinal cord
    The dorsal column-medial lemniscal pathway
    The trigeminal touch pathway
    Somatosensory cortex
    Pain
    Nociceptors and the transduction of painful stimuli
    Hyperalgesia and inflammation
    Itch
    Primary afferents and spinal mechanisms
    Ascending pain pathways
    The spinothalamic pain pathway
    The trigeminal pain pathway
    The thalamus and cortex
    The regulation of pain
    Temperature
    Thermoreceptors
    The temperature pathway
    13. Spinal control of movement
    The somatic motor system
    The lower motor neuron
    Alpha motor neurons
    Types of motor units
    Excitation-contraction coupling
    Muscle fiber structure
    Spinal control of motor units
    Proprioception from muscle spindles
    Gamma motor neurons
    Proprioception from golgi tendon organs
    Spinal interneurons
    The generation of spinal motor programs for walking
    14. Brain control of movement
    Descending spinal tracts
    The lateral pathways
    The ventromedial pathways
    The planning of movement by the cerebral cortex
    Motor cortex
    Posterior parietal and prefrontal cortex
    Neuronal correlates of motor planning
    Mirror neurons
    The basal ganglia
    Basal ganglia disorders
    The initiation of movement by primary motor cortex
    The cerebellum
    The motor loop through the lateral cerebellum. pt. III. The brain and behavior
    15. Chemical control of the brain and behavior
    The secretory hypothalamus
    Homeostasis --Pathways to the pituitary
    The autonomic nervous system
    ANS circuits
    Sympathetic and parasympathetic divisions
    The enteric division
    Neurotransmitters and the pharmacology of autonomic function
    Preganglionic neurotransmitters
    Postganglionic neurotransmitters
    The diffuse modulatory systems of the brain
    The serotonergic raphe nuclei
    The dopaminergic substantia nigra and ventral tegmental area
    The cholinergic basal forebrain and brain stem complexes
    Drugs and the diffuse modulatory systems
    Hallucinogens
    Stimulants
    16. Motivation
    The hypothalamus, homeostasis, and motivated behavior
    The long-term regulation of feeding behavior
    energy balance
    Hormonal and hypothalamic regulation of body fat and feeding
    The short-term regulation of feeding behavior
    Appetite, eating digestion, and satiety
    Ghrelin
    Gastric distension
    Cholecystokinin
    Insulin
    Why do we eat?
    Reinforcement and reward
    The role of dopamine in motivation
    Serotonin, food, and mood
    Other motivated behaviors
    Drinking
    Temperature regulation
    17. Sex and the brain
    Sex and gender
    The genetics of sex
    Sex chromosome abnormalities
    Sexual development and differentiation
    The hormonal control of sex
    Principal male and female hormones
    Control of sex hormones by the pituitary and hypothalamus
    The neural basis of sexual behaviors
    Reproductive organs and their control
    Mammalian mating strategies
    The neurochemistry of reproductive behavior
    Love, bonding and the human brain
    Why and how male and female brains differ
    Sexual dimorphisms of the central nervous system
    Sexual dimorphisms of cognition
    Sex hormones, the brain, and behavior
    Direct genetic effects on behavior and sexual differentiation of the brain
    The activational effects of sex hormones
    Brain changes associated with maternal and paternal behavior
    Estrogen effects on neuron function, memory, and disease
    18. Brain mechanisms of emotion
    Early theories and neural representations
    The James-Lange Theory
    The Cannon-Bard Theory
    Implications of unconscious emotion
    The limbic system
    Broca's limbic lobe
    The Papez circuit
    Emotion theories and neural representations
    Basic emotion theories
    Dimensional emotion theories
    What is an emotion?
    Fear and the amygdala
    The Klüver-Bucy Syndrome
    Anatomy of the amygdala
    Effects of amygdala stimulation and lesions
    A neural circuit for learned fear
    Anger and aggression
    The amygdala and aggression
    Neural components of anger and aggression beyond the amygdala
    Anger, aggression, and the hypothalamus
    The midbrain and aggression
    Serotonergic regulation of anger and aggression
    19. Brain rhythms and sleep
    The electroencephalogram
    Recording brain waves
    EEG rhythms
    Mechanisms and meanings of brain rhythms
    Synchronous rhythms
    Seizures of epilepsy
    Sleep
    The functional states of the brain
    The sleep cycle
    Why do we sleep?
    Functions of dreaming and REM sleep
    Neural mechanisms of sleep
    Wakefulness and the ascending reticular activating system
    Falling asleep and the non-REM state
    Mechanism of REM sleep
    Sleep-promoting factors
    Gene expression during sleeping and waking
    Circadian rhythms
    Biological clocks
    The suprachiasmatic nucleus : a brain clock
    20. Language
    What is language?
    Human sound and speech production
    Language in animals
    Language acquisition
    Genes involved in language
    FOXP2 and verbal dyspraxia
    Genetic factors in specific language impairment and dyslexia
    The discovery of specialized language areas in the brain
    Broca's Area and Wernicke's Area
    Language insights from the study of aphasia
    Broca's aphasia
    Wernicke's aphasia
    The Wernicke-Geschwind model of language and aphasia
    Conduction aphasia
    Aphasia in bilinguals and deaf people
    Asymmetrical language processing the two cerebral hemispheres
    Language processing split-brain humans
    Left hemisphere language dominance
    Language functions of the right hemisphere
    anatomical asymmetry and language
    Language studies using brain stimulation and human brain imaging
    21. The resting brain, attention, and consciousness
    Resting state brain activity
    The brain's default mode network
    Attention
    Behavioral consequences of attention
    Physiological effects of attention
    Brain circuits for the control of attention
    The pulvinar
    The frontal eye fields, eye movements, and attention
    Salience and priority maps
    A priority map in the parietal lobe
    The frontoparietal attention network
    22. Mental illness
    Mental illness and the brain
    Psychosocial approaches to mental illness
    Biological approaches to mental illness
    Anxiety disorders
    Panic disorder
    Agoraphobia
    Other disorders characterized by increased anxiety
    Post-traumatic stress disorder
    Obsessive-compulsive disorder
    Biological bases of anxiety disorders
    Treatments of anxiety disorders
    Psychotherapy
    Anxiolytic medications
    Affective disorders
    Major depression
    Bipolar disorder
    Biological bases of affective disorders
    The monoamine hypothesis
    The diathesis-stress hypothesis
    Anterior cingulate cortex dysfunction
    Treatments for affective disorders-- Electroconvulsive therapy
    Psychotherapy
    Antidepressants
    Lithium
    Deep brain stimulation
    Schizophrenia
    Biological bases of schizophrenia
    Genes and the environment
    The dopamine hypothesis
    The glutamate hypothesis
    Treatments for schizophrenia. pt. IV. The changing brain
    23. Wiring the brain
    The genesis of neurons
    Cell proliferation
    Cell migration
    Cell differentiation
    Differentiation of cortical areas
    The genesis of connections
    The growing axon
    Axon guidance
    Synapse formation
    The elimination of cells and synapses
    Cell death
    Changes in synaptic capacity
    Activity-dependent synaptic rearrangement
    Synaptic segregation
    Synaptic convergence
    Synaptic competition
    Modulatory influences
    Elementary mechanisms of cortical synaptic plasticity
    24. Memory systems
    Types of memory and amnesia
    Declarative and nondeclarative memory
    Procedural memory
    Declarative memory
    Amnesia
    Working memory
    The prefrontal cortex and working memory
    Area LIP and working memory
    Declarative memory
    The neocortex and declarative memory
    Hebb and the cell assembly
    Studies implicating the medial temporal lobes
    Temporal lobe amnesia
    Temporal lobectomy and amnesia
    An animal model of human amnesia
    Memory functions of the hippocampal system
    Hippocampal lesions
    Spatial memory, place cells, and grid cells
    Hippocampal functions beyond spatial memory
    Consolidating memories and retaining engrams
    Procedural memory
    The striatum and procedural memory in rodents
    Habit learning in humans and nonhuman primates
    25. Molecular mechanisms of learning and memory
    Memory acquisition
    Cellular reports of memory formation
    Distributed memory storage
    Strengthening synapses
    Anatomy of the hippocampus
    Weakening synapses
    LTP, LTD, and memory
    Synaptic homeostasis
    Metaplasticity
    Synaptic scaling
    Memory consolidation
    Persistently active protein kinases
    Protein synthesis and memory consolidation
    synaptic tagging and capture
    CREB and memory
    Structural plasticity and memory.
    Print Unavailable: Checked out Recall Item
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Books: General Collection (Downstairs)
    QP355.2 .B425 2016
    1
  • Digital
    Mark Bear, Barry Connors and Michael A. Paradiso.
    Limited to 3 simultaneous users
  • Digital
    Kendra Menzies Kent.
    Summary: "The book provides an overview of the certification exams written specifically by the certification organizations themselves. Distinctive to this book is a format of asking a question and thinking through a response with rationales. This review book is unique in "Think in Questions" format, which helps readers to anticipate the kinds of questions that might be asked and promote critical thinking throughout the exam. The content review is comprised of bite-sized sections for easier learning and memorization that includes thousands of unfolding questions, answers, and hints"-- Provided by publisher.

    Contents:
    Chronic neurological trauma
    Cerebrovascular disorders
    Tumors of the brain and spinal cord
    Immune/Infections part 1
    Immune/infections part 2
    Seizures
    Pediatric and developmental disorders
    Neurological trauma : traumatic brain injury
    Neurological trauma : spinal cord injury
    Practice exam
    Answers and rationales for the practice exam
    Bonus exam questions
    Answers and rationales for the bonus exam questions.
    Digital Access R2Library 2020
    Limited to 1 simultaneous user
  • Digital
    edited by Hamed Ekhtiari and Martin Paulus.
    Contents:
    Preface: Neuroscience for addiction medicine: from prevention to rehabilitation
    Part 1: Neuroscience constructs for addiction medicine. Neuroscience of resilience and vulnerability for addiction medicine: from genes to behavior
    Drug-induced neurotoxicity in addiction medicine: from prevention to harm reduction
    Stress psychobiology in the context of addiction medicine: from drugs of abuse to behavioral addictions
    Reinforcement principles for addiction medicine; from recreational drug use to psychiatric disorder
    Neuroscience of attentional processes for addiction medicine: from brain mechanisms to practical considerations
    Neuroscience of learning and memory for addiction medicine: from habit formation to memory reconsolidation
    Neuroscience of drug craving for addiction medicine: from circuits to therapies
    Response inhibition and addiction medicine: from use to abstinence
    Neuroscience of inhibition for addiction medicine: from prediction of initiation to prediction of relapse
    Part 2: Drugs and behaviours for addiction medicine. Neuroscience of nicotine for addiction medicine: novel targets for smoking cessation medications
    Neuroscience of alcohol for addiction medicine: neurobiological targets for prevention and intervention in adolescents
    Neuroscience of opiates for addiction medicine: from stress-responsive systems to behavior
    Opioid neuroscience for addiction medicine: from animal models to FDA approval for alcohol addiction
    Competing neurobehavioral decision systems theory of cocaine addiction: from mechanisms to therapeutic opportunities
    Clinical neuroscience of amphetamine-type stimulants: from basic science to treatment development
    Behavioral addictions in addiction medicine: from mechanisms to practical considerations
    Neural systems implicated in obesity as an addictive disorder: from biological to behavioral mechanisms.
    Digital Access ScienceDirect 2016
  • Digital
    edited by Hamed Ekhtiari and Martin Paulus.
    Contents:
    Preface: Neuroscience for addiction medicine: from prevention to rehabilitation
    Part I: Neuroscience methods for addiction medicine. Animal models for addiction medicine: from vulnerable phenotypes to addicted individuals
    Animal models of drug relapse and craving: from drug priming-induced reinstatement to incubation of craving after voluntary abstinence
    Computational modeling for addiction medicine: from cognitive models to clinical applications
    Electrophysiology for addiction medicine: from methodology to conceptualization of reward deficits
    Neurocognitive rehabilitation for addiction medicine: from neurophysiological markers to cognitive rehabilitation and relapse prevention
    Structural imaging for addiction medicine: from neurostructure to neuroplasticity
    Functional neuroimaging for addiction medicine: from mechanisms to practical considerations
    Resting state functional connectivity analysis for addiction medicine: from individual loci to complex networks
    PET imaging for addiction medicine: from neural mechanisms to clinical considerations
    Genetic imaging consortium for addiction medicine: from neuroimaging to genes
    Part II: Neuroscience for interventions in addiction medicine. Human pharmacology for addiction medicine: from evidence to clinical recommendations
    Emerging targets for addiction neuropharmacology: from mechanisms to therapeutics
    Cognitive interventions for addiction medicine: understanding the underlying neurobiological mechanisms
    Adolescent psychotherapy for addiction medicine: from brain development to neurocognitive treatment mechanisms
    Cognitive neuroscience of cognitive retraining for addiction medicine: from mediating mechanisms to questions of efficacy
    Perspectives on neurocognitive rehabilitation as an adjunct treatment for addictive disorders: from cognitive improvement to relapse prevention
    Noninvasive brain stimulation for addiction medicine: from monitoring to modulation
    What the alcohol doctor ordered from the neuroscientist: theragnostic biomarkers for personalized treatments
    What does addiction medicine expect from neuroscience? From genes and neurons to treatment responses.
    Digital Access ScienceDirect 2016
  • Digital
    Barbara J. O'Kane and Laura C. Barritt.
    Summary: A practical, reader-friendly guide for dental students on the neuroscience of the orofacial region Understanding neural mechanisms that control orofacial pain, proper masticatory function, taste, speech, swallowing, and proprioceptive input to the temporomandibular joint and teeth is an important facet of dentistry. Neuroscience of Dentistry by renowned educators Barbara J. O'Kane and Laura C. Barritt provides foundational knowledge on these topics. The text integrates fundamental concepts of general neuroscience with vital information on neural mechanisms of the orofacial region and associated pain pathways. The book is organized in two parts covering basic neuroscience and orofacial neuroscience. Part one is subdivided into four units on the central nervous system, brain and spinal cord gross anatomy, sensory systems, and motor systems. Part two features three units focused on orofacial structures and tissues, dental structures, and orofacial pain and anesthesia. Each generously illustrated, succinctly written, and consistently formatted chapter includes an introductory overview and learning objectives. Key Highlights Throughout the book, relevant clinical correlations emphasize the relationship between basic neuroscience and clinical practice Concise, high-yield illustrations, schematics, charts, and tables enhance understanding of general and orofacial neuroanatomy concepts Helpful overviews at the beginning of each chapter highlight key concepts National board style questions at the end of each chapter emphasize board-relevant information that enables self-study This is a must-have resource for dental students taking neuroscience during their first or second year of dental school. It will also benefit other health science and dental hygiene students, as well as oral and maxillofacial surgery residents.
  • Digital
    Tony Mosconi, Victoria Graham.
    Summary: The first neuroanatomy text written specifically for physical therapy studentsWritten by recognized experts in human nervous system development, Neuroanatomy for Rehabilitation provides physical therapy students with a thorough understanding of the anatomical localization of brain function. Approximately 200 line illustrations and photographs teach students how to accurately interpret the wealth of new human brain images now available.The text opens with an informative section that discusses the structural and functional organization of the nervous system and includes coverage of functional neuroanatomy and response to injury. This is followed by sections covering: Vascular Supply of the Central Nervous System (arterial supply, venous drainage, response to injury), Cellular Organization of the Nervous System, Development of the Central Nervous System, Functional Neuroanatomy by Ascending Region, The Brainstem, Cranial Nerves and Visual Pathways, The Cerebellum and Basal Ganglia, Diencephalon, The Cortex. Each section opens with a case study and an overview of key concepts, and concludes with case discussion and review questions. No other text provides physical therapy students and instructors with such relevant, authoritative, and well-written material designed to enhance understanding of the human nervous system as Neuroanatomy for Rehabilitation. [Ed.].

    Contents:
    Structural and functional organization of the nervous system
    Vascular supply of the central nervous system
    Cellular organization of the nervous system
    Development of the central nervous system
    The spinal cord
    The brainstem, cranial nerves and visual pathways
    Cerebellum --Basal nuclei
    Diencephalon
    Cerebral cortex.
    Digital Access
    Provider
    Version
    AccessPhysiotherapy
    AccessPhysiotherapy
  • Digital
    Subhash C. Bhatnagar, PhD, CCC-SLP.
    Summary: Develop an understanding of neuroscience as it relates to your future career as a clinician, researcher, or instructor with this revised best-seller. The 5th Edition provides an easy-to-understand, meaningful overview of the basics of essential neuroscience concepts enhanced by case studies that connect neuroscience to the disorders you'll see in practice. Features eBook available. Fast, smart, and convenient, today's eBooks can transform learning. These interactive, fully searchable tools offer 24/7 access on multiple devices, the ability to highlight and share notes, and much more. NEW! The complexity of neuroscience has been simplified in every chapter, making it easier for you to master key neurological concepts. NEW! Expanded Clinical Correlates sections include more treatment examples and mental function cases, as well as applied Clinical Relevance boxes. NEW! Additional chapter-ending, problem-solving case studies deepen your understanding and help you hone your critical thinking skills. A consistent, step-by-step structure beginning in Chapter 4 supports learning through learning objectives, chapter introductions, anatomy and terminology by structure, clinical concerns with neurologic concepts including pathology, and a clinical application. Charts, graphs, diagrams, illustrations, brain mapping pictures, and MR and CT images (both normal and with pathologies) help you prepare for you­r future role as an SLP therapist or audiologist. Chapter-ending learning aids include summaries and review questions (with answers at the end of the book). An end-of-book glossary helps you master the vocabulary of neuroscience. Interactive, online study tools, including animations, video clips, labeling exercises, a digital Student Workbook, and more, help you master the content you need to succeed in your course and future career.

    Contents:
    Essential neurological concepts
    Gross anatomy of the central nervous system
    Internal anatomy of the central nervous system
    Development of the nervous system
    Nerve cell physiology
    Diencephalon : thalamus and associated structures
    Cerebrovascular system
    Ventricles and cerebrospinal fluid
    Auditory system
    Vestibular system
    Somatosensory system
    Visual system
    Motor system 1 : spinal cord
    Motor system 2 : cerebellum
    Motor system 3 : basal ganglia
    Motor system 4 : motor cortex
    Synopsis of cranial nerves
    Axial-limbic brain: autonomic nervous system, limbic system hypothalamus, and reticular formation
    Cerebral cortex : higher mental functions
    Clinical concepts in neuroradiology, neurosurgery, neurology, neurolinguistics, genetics, and pharmacology and their applications.
    Digital Access Ovid 2018
  • Print
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Stored offsite. Please request print.
    v. 1-49, 51-54, 1978-97, [1998], 1999.
    Vol. 2-10 BOUND WITH: Neuroscience letters, v. 14-32.
    10
  • Digital
    Klaus A. Miczek, Andreas Meyer-Lindenberg, editors.
    Contents:
    Neurogenetics of Aggressive Behavior
    Studies in Rodents
    Neurogenetics of Aggressive Behavior
    Studies in Primates
    Glucocorticoids and Escalated Aggressive Behavior.-Models of Female Aggression
    Prefrontal Cortex.-Nitric Oxide, Serotonin and Aggression
    Hypothalamus and Aggressive Behavior
    Vasopressin-Serotonin Interactions in Aggressive Behavior
    Dopamine-oxytocin: Attachment and Conflict
    Stress and violence.-Gene-environment interactions and violence.-MAO-A and genetic risk for violence
    The development of violent behavior in humans
    Schizophrenia and violence.-Psychopathy
    Violent and callous behavior in children
    Aggression in Children and Adolescents-Alcohol and Aggression.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    Edmund S. Higgins, Mark S. George.
    Contents:
    Neuroanatomy
    Cells and circuits
    Neurotransmitters
    Receptors and signaling the nucleus
    Genetics and epigenetics
    Hormones and the brain
    Plasticity and adult development
    Immunity and inflammation
    The electrical brain
    Pain
    Pleasure
    Appetite
    Anger and aggression
    Sleep
    Sex and the brain
    Social attachment
    Memory
    Intelligence
    Attention
    Depression
    Anxiety
    Schizophrenia
    Alzheimer's disease.
    Digital Access
    Provider
    Version
    Ovid
    LWW Health Library
  • Digital
    edited by Larry Stevens, C. Chad Woodruff.
    Summary: The Neuroscience of Empathy, Compassion, and Self-Compassion provides contemporary perspectives on the three related domains of empathy, compassion and self-compassion (ECS). It informs current research, stimulates further research endeavors, and encourages continued and creative philosophical and scientific inquiry into the critical societal constructs of ECS. Examining the growing number of electrocortical (EEG Power Spectral, Coherence, Evoked Potential, etc.) studies and the sizeable body of exciting neuroendocrine research (e.g., oxytocin, dopamine, etc.) that have accumulated over decades, this reference is a unique and comprehensive approach to empathy, compassion and self-compassion.
    Digital Access ScienceDirect 2018
  • Digital
    Victor G. Carrión, Carl F. Weems.
    Contents:
    Executive function
    Memory
    Emotion processing
    Dissociation
    Sleep
    Self-injurious behaviors
    Comorbidity in pediatric PTSD
    Treatment outcomes
    Brain function in pediatric PTSD : review and implications.
    Digital Access Oxford 2017
  • Digital
    José R. Lemos, Govindan Dayanithi, editors.
    Summary: How do electrical activity and calcium signals in neurons influence the secretion of peptide hormones? This volume presents the current state of knowledge regarding the electrical, calcium signaling and synaptic properties of neuroendocrine systems from both vertebrate and invertebrate systems. The contributions span in vivo and in vitro studies that address: statedependent plasticity, relevance of firing patterns, membrane properties, calcium flux (including dynamic imaging and homeostasis), and molecular mechanisms of exocytosis, including from non-neuronal secretory cells. The chapters focus not only on research results but also on how experiments are conducted using state-of-the-art techniques, and how the resulting data are interpreted. While there are many books on the secretory properties of neurons, this is the first to focus on the distinctive secretory properties of neuroendocrine neurons. Accordingly, it offers an important text for undergraduate and graduate neuroscience students, and will also appeal to established scientists and postdoctoral fellows. This is the eighth volume in the Masterclass in Neuroendocrinology series* - now a co-publication between Springer Nature and the INF (International Neuroendocrine Federation). *Volumes 1-7 published by Wiley.

    Contents:
    Neurosecretion: A Historical Overview
    Neurosecretion: Hypothalamic Somata versus Neurohypophysial Terminals
    Cyclic ADP-Ribose and Heat Regulate Oxytocin Release via CD38 and TRPM2 in the Hypothalamus
    Somato-Dendritic Secretion of Neuropeptides
    Neurosecretory Vesicles: Structure, Distribution, Release and Breakdown
    Molecular Controls on Regulated Neurotransmitter and Neurohormone Secretion
    Secretory Astrocytes
    Action Potential-Induced Ca2+ Influx for Both Acute and Sustained Insulin Secretion in Pancreatic Beta Cells
    Plasticity in the Morphology of Lactotrophs and Folliculo-Stellate Cells and Prolactin Secretion
    Neuroendocrine and Metabolic Regulation of Plasma Growth Hormone Secretory Profiles
    Role of the TWIK-Related Potassium (TREK)-1 Channels in the Regulation of Adrenocorticotropic Hormone (ACTH) Secretion from Pituitary Corticotropes
    How Do Bacterial Neurotoxins Affect Neurosecretion?
    Secretory Mechanisms in Paramecium.
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    by Giovanni Malferrari, Marialuisa Zedde, Patrizio Prati.
    Summary: Although, within neurosonology, study of both the extracranial and the intracranial circulation began at least 15 years ago, it is only in recent years that ultrasound evaluation of cerebral veins and cerebral venous hemodynamics has attracted wider attention. Nevertheless, the huge variability in venous outflow pathways in normal subjects means that the potential usefulness of this examination is still often neglected. This atlas provides concise descriptions of the main normal and pathological ultrasound features of the cerebral venous circulation for neurosonologists and clinicians. It is designed as a practical tool that will be of assistance in everyday practice in the ultrasound lab and will improve the knowledge of sonologists and the reliability of venous ultrasound studies. The multimedia format, with detailed images, explanatory videos, and short, targeted descriptions, ensures that information is clearly conveyed and that users will become fully acquainted with the variability of normal findings of venous examinations. The atlas will be of value both to trainees in this field of ultrasound and to neurosonologists who are beginning to perform venous examinations in addition to arterial extra- and intracranial examinations.

    Contents:
    Part I Extracranial veins
    1 Ultrasound machine: the significance of venous preset
    2 Ultrasound anatomy and how to do the examination
    3 Postural changes and activation tests
    4 Main pathological pictures with ultrasound
    Part II Intracranial veins
    5 Ultrasound machine: the significance of venous preset
    6 Ultrasound anatomy and how to do the examination
    7 Main pathological pictures with ultrasound
    8 Global hemodynamic evaluation and outflow variability
    9 Imaging-fusion technology for studying intracranial veins. .
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    José M. Valdueza, Stephan J. Schreiber, Jens-Eric Roehl, Florian Connolly, Randolf Klingebiel.
    Summary: "Neurosonology is a first-line modality in the diagnosis and management of cerebrovascular disease and especially of stroke. In this new edition of Neurosonology and Neuroimaging of Stroke, this noninvasive, realtime imaging method has been given expanded coverage, particularly for its clinical utility. As in the first edition, the new edition offers both a clear overview of the principles of neurosonology and a casebook exploring critical cerebrovascular problems. Ultrasound anatomy, technical aspects of clinical application, and the advantages and limitations of ultrasound are reviewed and contrasted to conventional, magnetic resonance, and computed tomography angiography. Forty-five selected cases from the authors' extensive collections at Charite - Universitatsmedizin Berlin and the Center of Neurology in Bad Segeberg, Germany, are then discussed. The patient histories and working diagnoses are followed by detailed assessments of the extra- and intracranial color-coded duplex sonographic findings and additional diagnostic procedures. The relevant clinical aspects are presented in a compact, comprehensible way, and for the majority of the cases videos are available in the Thieme MediaCenter, providing further in-depth understanding of the full potential of the method. Features:Complete extra- and intracranial arterial and venous ultrasound examination. New techniques: ultrasound fusion imaging, ultrafast ultrasound, contrast applicationMore than 1,300 high-quality illustrations, including full-color duplex images. Fifteen newly selected cases on conditions such as subarachnoid hemorrhage and dural fistula, as well as rare stroke causes including sickle cell disease and reversible cerebral vasoconstriction syndrome. Revision of many cases from the first edition. More than 60 new video clips (for a total of 130) available at the Thieme MediaCenter, bringing ultrasound anatomy and challenging cases to your monitor! Neurosonology and Neuroimaging of Stroke, Second Edition, offers neurologists, neuroradiologists, and all physicians treating patients with cerebrovascular disease an authoritative introduction and guide to this powerful diagnostic tool"--Provided by publisher.
    Digital Access
    Provider
    Version
    Thieme MedOne Neurosurgery
    Thieme MedOne Radiology
  • Digital
    Camilo N. Rodríguez, Claudio Baracchini, Jorge H. Mejia-Mantilla, Marek Czosnyka, Jose I Suarez, László Csiba, Corina Puppo, Eva Bartels, editors.
    Summary: This textbook addresses the classical use of Transcranial Doppler (TCD) and Transcranial Color-Coded Duplex Sonography (TCCS), focusing on the usefulness of neurological monitoring beyond classical acute brain injuries present in the daily intensive care medical practice. It encompasses a wide range of critical pathologies where neurological impact is part of clinical evolution, offering practical approaches for managing, application and interpretation of neurosonology to assist the physician to making real-time individualized decisions at bedside. It is an academic guide developed and edited by international experts being a very useful resource in daily practice for intensivists, neurologists, neurosurgeons and other specialists involving in critical care.

    Contents:
    Part I. Neurocritical Care: Concepts to Review
    Part II. Neurosonology: Basic Principles
    Part III. Neurosonology: Neurocritical Care Patient
    Part IV. Neurosonology: Beyond Usual Monitoring.
    Digital Access Springer 2022
  • Digital
    Isabelle M. Germano, Editor.
    Summary: This book is a combination of ideas and experiences from over 100 dedicated and brilliant neurosurgeons around the world. Their common goal is to provide data for a deeper understanding of the multi-faceted aspects of neurosurgery and, by doing so, to better serve patients across the globe. Scientific curiosity, deep dedication, incredible work ethics, entrepreneurship, and creativity are the common traits among all neurosurgeons, and not the exception. By allowing readers to see the field of neurosurgery from the perspectives of surgeons spanning five continents, this book serves to provide multiple, diverse viewpoints and to build a foundation for future collaborations. The books 24 chapters are organized into 3 parts. Part I provides the reader with an overview of the role of neurosurgery in worldwide health care, its evolution over the past decades, the current state and future directions of each neurosurgical subspecialty across the five continents. Over the years, the overarching goal for neurosurgeons has been to develop new, more effective and high-end solutions for complex diseases and to provide access to neurosurgical services for all patients. Part II discusses the differences and similarities of neurosurgery education and training across the globe, providing a snapshot of how new tools, technology, and paradigms reduce inequality and increase access to neurosurgical education. Educational accomplishments and challenges still present for the in different regions of the world are reviewed. Part III focuses on economic aspects influencing neurosurgery globally, including how to make efficient decisions in the face of scarcity, yet demand. The authors provide theories, models, and tools helpful to apply when planning to allocate resources, not just financial, but also human and intellectual. A deeper understanding of economics does not necessarily provide the answer to the problem; rather it provides the tools to find an answer, or, ideally, multiple possible solutions. Neurosurgery and Global Health is the first comprehensive guide to the role of neurosurgery in the global health care sphere, providing an in-depth compendium about the understanding of the neurosurgical role within global health, its efforts in the education of tomorrows workforce, and the economic aspects driving the field.

    Contents:
    The Role of Neurosurgery in Worldwide Healthcare and its Disparities: An Overview
    Historical Perspective: The History of Neurosurgery
    Head Trauma
    Pediatric Neurosurgery
    Cerebrovascular Neurosurgery
    Neurosurgical oncology
    Spine
    The role of Neurosurgey in Global Health Radiosurgery, Function and Epilepsy Surgery
    Integrating Mass casualty Disaster response
    Quality of Care and Patient Safety in Global Neurosurgery
    Ethical and Legal Considerations in Neurosurgery
    Future Directions
    Africa
    Asia
    Australasia
    Europe
    Central and South America
    North America: Canada, United States and Mexico
    The Neurosurgery enterprise and stakeholders
    Medical Technology innovation and Entrepreneurship in Neurosurgery
    Digital Technology in Neurosurgery: a successful Entrepreneurship story
    The role of nonprofit and academic institutions in global Neurosurgery
    The World Health Organization and Neurosurgery
    The impact of Covid-19 pandemic in Neurosurgery world.
    Digital Access Springer 2022
  • Digital
    Cargill Alleyne, M. Neil Woodall, Jonathan Citow.
    Digital Access
    Provider
    Version
    Thieme-Connect
    Thieme MedOne Neurosurgery
  • Digital
    [edited by] Remi Nader, Abdulrahman J. Sabbagh, Samer K. Elbabaa, Hosam Al-Jehani, Jaime Gasco, Cristian Gragnaniello.
    Summary: "Neurosurgery Case Review: Questions and Answers, 2nd Edition by Remi Nader, Abdulrahman Sabbagh, Samer Elbabaa, Hosam Al Jehani, Jaime Gasco, and Cristian Gragnaniello provides a robust study guide for the American Board Neurological Surgery and the Royal College of Physicians and Surgeons of Canada oral board examinations. The second edition expands on the highly successful first edition, presenting 148 cases commonly encountered by neurosurgeons in clinical practice. The cases are broadly divided into seven sections-tumor, vascular intracranial pathology, trauma, pediatric, functional, spine, and peripheral nerves. The chapters are arranged in a manner that mirrors the oral board exam. Each case includes a brief clinical scenario followed by questions on presentation, diagnosis, imaging, management, surgical detail, complications, and outcome. The presented information is backed by the latest available evidence-based references and data. Key Features: Contributions from internationally renowned neurosurgical educators Detailed answers enhance readers' knowledge and provide guidance on how to respond to questions asked in the oral board exams More than 760 high-quality images, many in full color, ensure visual understanding of key concepts Suggested readings at the end of cases offer additional study resources This is an indispensable, one-stop resource for neurosurgical residents and fellows prepping for the ABNS and Royal College oral board examinations. Neurosurgeons studying for recertification will also find this book an invaluable reference for rapid review"-- Provided by publisher.
    Digital Access
    Provider
    Version
    Thieme MedOne Neurosurgery
    Thieme-Connect
  • Digital
    Marc Sindou, George Georgoulis, Patrick Mertens.
    Summary: "The book is devoted to the neurosurgical management of spasticity. Starting with a chapter on the anatomical and physiological foundations of spasticity and a short history of its neurosurgical treatment, it describes the neurosurgical methods currently available. As management differs between adults and children, the book is also structured accordingly, including evaluation, decision-making, Intrathecal Baclofen Therapy (ITB), botulinum toxin therapy, and surgery. Beyond ITB, the neurosurgical options covered include procedures focusing on the peripheral nerves, dorsal roots, Dorsal Root Entry Zone and spinal cord. Based on surgical experience collected with more than a thousand patients, the book gathers the most important aspects of our present understanding, presented using a practical, educational approach. It stresses the importance of a multidisciplinary approach, including neurologists, pediatricians and rehabilitation specialists. Close collaboration with other surgical disciplines like orthopedic surgery and neuro-urology are also outlined."--Publisher's website.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    [edited by] Robert E. Harbaugh, Christopher Shaffrey, William T. Couldwell, Mitchel S. Berger.
    Digital Access
    Provider
    Version
    Thieme-Connect
    Thieme MedOne Neurosurgery
  • Digital
    Jonathan S. Citow, Robert J. Spinner, Ross C. Puffer.
    Digital Access
    Provider
    Version
    Thieme MedOne Neurosurgery
    Thieme-Connect
  • Digital
    Paul E. Kaloostian, Christ Ordookhanian.
    Summary: "Surgery requires a combination of knowledge and skill acquired through years of direct observation, mentorship, and practice. The learning curve can be steep, frustrating, and intimidating for many medical students and junior residents. Too often, books and texts that attempt to translate the art of surgery are far too comprehensive for this audience and counterproductive to learning important basic skills to succeed. Neurosurgery Outlines by neurosurgeon Paul Kaloostian is the neurosurgical volume in a series of textbooks that offer a simplified roadmap to surgery. This unique resource outlines key steps for common surgeries, laying a solid foundation of basic knowledge from which trainees can easily build and expand. The text serves as starting point for learning neurosurgical techniques, with room for adding notes, details, and pearls collected during the journey. Chapters are systematically organized and formatted by subspecialty, encompassing spine, radiosurgery, brain tumors and vascular lesions, head trauma, functional neurosurgery, epilepsy, pain, and hydrocephalus. Each chapter includes symptoms and signs, surgical pathology, diagnostic modalities, differential diagnosis, treatment options, indications for surgical intervention, step-by-step procedures, pitfalls, prognosis, and references where applicable"-- Provided by publisher.
    Digital Access
    Provider
    Version
    Thieme MedOne Neurosurgery
    Thieme-Connect
  • Digital
    Amgad S. Hanna.
    Digital Access
    Provider
    Version
    Thieme MedOne Neurosurgery
    Thieme-Connect
  • Digital
    Mark R. Shaya, Cristian Gragnaniello, Remi Nader ; section editor (Spine, peripheral nerve, neuroradiology), Hussam Abou-Al-Shaar.
    Contents:
    Neuroanatomy
    Neurophysiology
    Neuropathology
    Neuropharmacology
    Cranial neurosurgery
    Spine
    Peripheral nerves
    Neurology
    Neuroradiology.
    Digital Access
    Provider
    Version
    Thieme MedOne Education
    Thieme MedOne Neurosurgery
  • Digital
    [editors], Remi Nader, Cristian Gragnaniello, Scott C. Berta, Abdulrahman J. Sabbagh, Michael L. Levy.
    Summary: "Neurosurgery Tricks of the Trade: Cranial presents core surgical procedures in a concise, highly didactic format, enabling surgeons to quickly grasp their essence from the bulleted text and superb illustrations that accompany them. Expert neurosurgeons specializing in the cranial region describe how they perform common procedures and offer surgical tips and pearls. Key Features: - Distills a wealth of information in a concise, step-by-step format, making it easy for novice surgeons to review how procedures are performed - Includes more than 150 surgical procedures for the cranial region, each accompanied by high-quality, original illustrations - Presents topics in either a pathology-based or an approach-based manner - Consistently organizes the procedures into the headings: Introduction and Background, Operative Detail and Preparation, Outcomes and Postoperative Course, and References, enabling rapid reference. Neurosurgeons at all levels, from residents learning procedures to experienced practitioners needing a quick refresher, will find this book, along with its companion volume, Neurosurgery Tricks of the Trade: Spine and Peripheral Nerves, to be an invaluable resource throughout their surgical careers"--Provided by publisher.
  • Digital
    edited by Remi Nader, Cristian Gragnaniello, Scott C. Berta, Abdulrahman J. Sabbagh, Michael L. Levy.
  • Digital
    Mark E. Oppenlander, editor.
    Summary: This book provides a modern and up to date overview of the evaluation and management of sports-related neuro trauma. The primary target audience is the "sports neurosurgeon," who can be found on the sidelines of collision sports at all levels of play from high school to professional, or who may care for these athletes in the acute setting in hospital or the outpatient clinics. The reach of this book, however, will also extend to professionals in other fields of medicine due to some topics that extend outside the typical neurosurgical specialty, ranging from chiropractic care in the evaluation and treatment of elite athletes to alternative medical therapies for concussion. The importance of the emerging "sports neurosurgeon" subspecialty is exemplified by the adoption of a policy by the National Football League to require an Unaffiliated Neurotrauma Consultant on-field for player safety. This policy also speaks to the recent public awareness of the importance of recognizing and treating sports-related neuro trauma. This text aims to capitalize on this trend and become a multi-specialty reference to anyone interested in the field. Neurosurgical Care of Athletes serves as a comprehensive resource for physicians and researchers involved in sports-related neuro trauma. All chapters are prepared by experts in their fields and include the most up to date scientific and clinical information.

    Contents:
    1. Pre-participation screening for the sports neurosurgeon
    2. On Field Assessment of the Athlete
    3. Spinal Injury in Athletes: Prevalence and Classification
    4. Neurosurgical Management of Spinal Cord Injuries in Athletes
    5. Evaluation and Management of Cervical Radiculopathy in Athletes
    6. Return to Play After Spinal Injury
    7. Chiropractic- An Integrative Approach to the Evaluation and Treatment of Elite Athletes utilizing Spinal Manipulation
    8. Diagnosis of Sports-related Peripheral Nerve Injury
    9. Non-Operative and Operative Management of Sports-Related Peripheral Nerve Injury
    10. Concussion in sports: What is it and how is it managed?
    11. Sport-related Structural Brain Injury
    12. Neuroimaging and Blood Biomarkers of Sport Concussion
    13. Active Rehabilitation and Return to Play after Concussion
    14. Sports concussions: Is there a role for alternative treatments?
    15. Chronic Traumatic Encephalopathy: Past, Present, and Future.
    Digital Access Springer 2022
  • Digital
    edited by Risheng Xu, Jordina Rincon-Torroella, Ann Liu.
    Summary: "Written by neurosurgery residents for neurosurgery residents and other providers, The Neurosurgical Consult Book focuses on the initial care and treatment of the neurosurgical consult patient, providing the key guidance you need when quick clinical management decisions are critical. You will learn to recognize the acuity of patient presentation and determine how to immediately triage the needs of the patient at an appropriate level of care. This portable, practical guide helps you quickly steer neurosurgical patients to medical stability and safety until a definitive treatment plan is implemented"-- publisher's description.
    Digital Access ClinicalKey 2023
  • Digital
    [edited by] Leon T. Lai, Cristian Gragnaniello.
    Summary: "Evidence-based neurosurgery is one of the most important pillars upon which to build decision management pathways. Effective delivery of care involves understanding the natural history of the disease and the evidence behind available treatment options. Neurosurgical Diseases: An Evidence-Based Approach to Guide Practice by esteemed neurosurgeons Leon T. Lai, Cristian Gragnaniello, and expert contributors covers cranial pathologies neurosurgeons commonly encounter in everyday practice"-- Provided by publisher.
    Digital Access
    Provider
    Version
    Thieme-Connect
    Thieme MedOne Neurosurgery
  • Digital
    [edited by] Christopher M. Loftus.
    Digital Access
    Provider
    Version
    Thieme-Connect
    Thieme MedOne Neurosurgery
  • Digital
    Ahmed Ammar, Mark Bernstein, editors.
    Summary: Good neurosurgical practice is based not only on evidence, skills, and modern equipment, but also on good values. Young surgeons often learn about ethical behavior by observing the behavior of their teachers in different situations, but for several reasons, this is not enough. This book discusses the ethical issues that arise during the daily practice of neurosurgery. It will be especially informative for neurosurgeons, other surgeons, physicians, residents, medical students, and allied health care providers. The book is not a philosophical expose but an easily readable and highly practical road map on how to navigate ethically challenging situations in neurosurgical and other practice. The book is divided into five parts addressing general issues, patients' rights, end of life issues, neurosurgeons' duties, and neurosurgeons and society. The contributing authors are well-established neurosurgeons and other doctors with long experience and from different backgrounds. They discuss ethical problems encountered in everyday practice, introduced by cases, and in all, there are more than 50 neurosurgical cases drawn from real life. The editors introduce in the title and throughout the book the term 'value-based medicine' which reinforces that while modern medicine and surgery have come very far in technical aspects, the core of what we do must be based on the values embodied in bioethics.

    Contents:
    Brief History of Bioethics
    Ethics Principles and Theories
    Cross-Cultural Ethics
    Patients' Rights
    Informed Consent
    Privacy and Confidentiality
    Severe Neurosurgical Conditions in Children
    End-of-Life Care
    Dying with Dignity
    Brain Death
    Neurosurgeons' Duties
    Ethical Decision-Making
    Errors
    Workplace Ethics and Professionalism
    Neurosurgical Innovation
    Research Ethics
    Consent in Emergency Clinical Research
    Neuroethics
    Training of Neurosurgeons
    Conflict of Interest
    Priority Setting
    Medicolegal Issues
    Neurosurgeons and the Media
    International Neurosurgery Collaborations.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    [edited by] Walter A. Hall, Peter D. Kim.
    Contents:
    Immunology of the CNS / Pragati Nigam and Maciej Lesniak
    Microbiological diagnosis of CNS / Yuriko Fukuta and Karin E. Byers
    Antibiotics and development of resistance / Peter D. Kim and Walter A. Hall
    Radiology of infections of the CNS / Kunal M. Patel and Charles L. Truwit
    Viral infections of the CNS
    Joseph B. Domachowske and Manika Suryadevara
    Fungal infections of the CNS / Walter A. Hall and Peter D. Kim
    Parasitic infections of the CNS / Ali Akhaddar and Mohamed Boucetta
    Bacterial brain abscess / Peter D. Kim and Walter A. Hall
    Meningeal infections / Manika Suryadevara and Joseph B. Domachowske
    Epidural and subdural infections / Sandi K. Lam and Peter C. Warnke
    Intracranial vascular infections / Hoon Choi, Walter A. Hall, and Eric M. Deshaies
    Vertebral column infections / Kyle I. Swanson and Daniel K. Resnick
    Spinal canal infections / Ian E. McCutcheon
    Neurosurgical antibiotic prophylaxis / DaraspreetKainth, Dino Terzic, and Stephen J. Haines
    Postoperative intracranial infections / Arya Nabavi, Friederike Knerlich-Lukoschus, and Andreas M. Stark
    Implanted devices and CNS infection / Ramesh Grandhi, Gillian Harrison, and Elizabeth C. Tyler-Kabara
    Pediatric CNS infections / Ian Mutchnick and Thomas Moriarty
    Immune compromise and CNS infections / Ouzi Nissim ... [et al.]
    Systemic infections in neurocritical care / Michael F. Regner ... [et al.].
  • Digital
    [edited by] Javed Siddiqi.
    Contents:
    Bedside neurologic exam / Robert Dahlin, Dan E. Miulli, and Javed Siddiqi
    Altered mental status and coma: pathophysiology and management / Jason Duong, Shokry Lawandy, Jeffery M. Jones, Dan E. Miulli, and Javed Siddiqi
    Neuroimaging and the neurosurgical intensive care unit patient / Christopher Elia, Blake Berman, and Dan E. Miulli
    Diagnostic laboratory studies in the ICU patient: what, when, and how often? / John Ogunlade, Dan E. Miulli, and Jon Taveau
    Team management of the multisystem-injured neurosurgical intensive care unit patient / Mark Krel, Javed Siddiqi, Silvio Hoshek, Rosalinda Menoni, Vladimir Adriano Cortez, Jeff W. Chen, and David T. Wong
    The spinal cord injury patient / Christopher Elia, Blake Berman, Jeffery M. Jones, Shokry Lawandy, Yancey Beamer, and Dan E. Miulli
    Delayed intracerebral hemorrhage / Tyler Carson, Marc Billings, Todd M. Goldenberg, Vladimir Adriano Cortez, and Dan E. Miulli
    Sedation and pain management in the neurosurgical intensive care unit patient / Gohar Majeed and Dan E. Miulli
    Homeostatic mechanisms in the neurosurgical intensive care unit patient / Jerry Noel, Dan E. Miulli, Gayatri Sonti, and Javed Siddiqi
    Neurophysiology in the neurosurgical intensive care unit: options, indications, and interpretations / Tyler Carson, Dennis Cramer, and Dan E. Miulli
    Cerebral perfusion / Deependra Mahato, Kevin Roy, Dan E. Miulli, and Javed Siddiqi
    Cerebrospinal fluid dynamics and pathology / Deependra Mahato, Kevin Roy, John D. Cantando, Dan E. Miulli, and Javed Siddiqi
    Intracranial pressure fundamentals / Tyler Carson, Dan E. Miulli, and Javed Siddiqi
    Cerebral protection measures / Tyler Carson, Dennis Cramer, Dan E. Miulli, and Javed Siddiqi
    Neuropharmacology / John Ogunlade, Nicholas Qandah, and Dan E. Miulli
    Nutrition / Jerry Noel, Silvio Hoshek, Rosalinda Menoni, and Dan E. Miulli
    Fluid management / Samir Kashyap, Robert Dahlin, Raed Sweiss, James Berry, and Dan E. Miulli
    Ventilator management / Justen Watkins, Dan E. Miulli, James Berry, Glenn Fischberg, and Javed Siddiqi
    Seizure disorders: diagnosis and management / Vivek Ramakrishnan, Margaret Wacker, Dan E. Miulli, and Glenn Fischberg
    Infections / Marc Cabanne and Dan E. Miulli
    Cerebral microdialysis in the neurosurgical intensive care unit / Jeff W. Chen, Daniella Abrams-Alexandru, and Javed Siddiqi
    Anticoagulation and antiplatelet therapy in the neurosurgical intensive care unit / Bo-Lin Liu, and Javed Siddiqi
    Restraints in the neurosurgical intensive care unit patient / Colleen Rose and Justen Watkins
    Unique pediatric neurosurgical intensive care unit issues / Tanya Minasian, Daniel J. Won, and Dan E. Miulli
    Systemic complications and disease-specific phenomena leading to ischemic injury / Hammad Ghanchi and Dan E. Miulli
    Acute ischemic stroke / Robert J. Claycomb, Luis T. Arangua, Vladimir Adriano Cortez, Glenn Fischberg, and Javed Siddiqi
    Brain death / Omid R. Hariri and Dan E. Miulli
    Family communication / Mark Krel and Dan E. Miulli
    Spiritual care of the neurosurgical intensive care unit patient and family / John Spitalieri, Marc Billings, and Javed Siddiqi
    Medical-legal issues in the neurosurgical intensive care unit / Bailey Zampella, Dan E. Miulli, Silvio Hoshek, Rosalinda Menoni, and Yancey Beamer
    Discharge planning for the neurosurgical intensive care unit patient / Dan E. Miulli, Jacob Bernstein, and Paula Snyder.
  • Print
    edited by Mikhail F. Chernov, Jamil A. Rzaev, Roberto Martínez-Álvarez.
    Digital Access
    Provider
    Version
    ScienceDirect
    ScienceDirect
  • Digital
    [edited by] Robert E. Gross, Nicholas M. Boulis.
    Contents:
    1. Intracranial monitoring techniques
    2. The stereoelectroencephalography technique and methodology
    3. Surgical anatomy of the temporal lobe
    4. Tailored and standard temporal lobectomy
    5. Selective amygdalohippocampectomy
    6. Surgical treatment of extratemporal epilepsy
    7. Magnetic resonance imaging-guided stereotactic laser ablation for epilepsy
    8. Hypothalamic hamartomas
    9. Anatomic hemispherectomy
    10. Peri-insular hemispherotomy
    11. Multiple subpial transections and multiple hippocampal transections for epilepsy in eloquent brain areas
    12. Technical aspects of callosotomy
    13. Responsive neurostimulation for th treatment of epilepsy
    14. Deep brain stimulation of anterior thalamic nuclei for epilepsy
    15. Vagus nerve stimulation for intractable epilepsy
    16. Frame-based stereotactic DBS implantation of vim for essential treamor and other cerebellar outflow tremors
    17. Chronic subthalamic nucleus stimulation for Parkinson's Disease
    18. Frame-based globus pallidus deep brain stimulation for Parkinson's Disease or dystonia
    19. Interventional MRI-guided deep brain stimulator implantation
    20. Frameless DBS implantation with the O-arm
    21. DBS implnatation with 3D-printed stereotactic platforms and the cranial vault probabilistic atlas
    22. Frameless and frame-based lead implantation in computed tomography scanner
    23. Ablative procedures for movement disorders: pallidotomy
    24. Stereotactic surgery for obsessive-compulsive disorders and Tourette Syndrome
    25. Stereotactic surgery for depression
    26. Pediatric functional neurosurgery
    27. Radiosurgery for functional neurosurgical procedures
    28. MVD and open rhizotomy for cranial neuralgias
    29. Stereotactic radiosurgery for trigeminal neuralgia
    30. Percutaneous ablative treatment of neuropathic facial pain
    31. Dorsal root entry zone: spinal cord
    32. Dorsal root entry zone: nucleus caudalis
    33. Open surgical and percutaneous radiofrequncy cordotomy
    34. Peripheral nerve stimualation for pain relief: primer on occipital nerve stimulation
    35. Spinal nerve root and dorsal root ganglion stimulation
    36. Neurosurgical interventions for neuropathic craniofacial pain
    37. Implantation of a spinal cord stimulator for pain relief
    38. Motor cortex stimulation for the treatment of noncancer chronic pain
    39. Deep brain stimulation for medically intractable pain syndromes
    40. Sympathectomy
    41. Interventional pain management techniques for low back pain
    42. Pumps for pain and spasticity
    43. Treatment of idiopathic intracranial hypertension and normal pressure hydrocephalus with cerebrospinal fluid shunt implantation
    44. Trigeminal ganglion stimulation.
    Digital Access
    Provider
    Version
    Thieme-Connect
    Thieme MedOne Neurosurgery
  • Digital
    [edited by] R. Loch Macdonald.
    Digital Access
    Provider
    Version
    Thieme-Connect
    Thieme MedOne Neurosurgery
  • Digital
    Vasilios A. Zerris.
    Contents:
    Peripheral nerves
    Spine and spinal cord
    Vascular
    Oncology (brain)
    Head injury
    Pediatric neurosurgery
    Functional neurosurgery
    Other diseases
    Anatomy
    Surgical procedures
    Surgical complications
    Neurology for neurosurgeons.
    Digital Access Thieme-Connect 2020
  • Digital
    edited by Ana Rita Londral, Pedro Encarnação, José Luis Pons Rovira, editors.
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Digital
    Qiao Niu, editor.
    Summary: "This book reviews the scientific literature and the authors' own research linking aluminum neurotoxicity with cognitive impairment and Alzheimer's disease (AD). It focuses on aluminum levels in the brain, region-specific and subcellular distribution, and its relation to neurofibrillary tangles and amyloid beta. Further, the book stresses the importance of aluminum's complex speciation chemistry in relation to biology, and details aluminum's mechanism in oxidative stress and cell death, especially in connection with apoptosis and necroptosis. The electrophysiological variation and synaptic plasticity induced by aluminum are covered, while the metal's debatable role in AD and the cross-talk between aluminum and genetic susceptibility are also discussed. In closing, the book reviews the neurotoxic effects of aluminum and its important role in the pathogenesis of AD. Given its depth of coverage, the book provides readers with a systematic summary of aluminum neurotoxicity"--Publisher's description.

    Contents:
    Overview of the relationship between aluminum exposure and health of human being / Qiao Niu
    The chemistry of human exposure to aluminium / Christopher Exley
    Entry and deposit of aluminum in the brain / Linping Wang
    Aluminum as a CNS and immune system toxin across the life span / Christopher A. Shaw
    Occupational exposure to aluminum and cognitive impairment / Xiaoting Lu
    Exposure to aluminum in daily life and Alzheimer's disease / Jisheng Nie
    Animal model of aluminum-induced Alzheimer's disease / Jing Song
    Aluminum-induced neural cell death / Qinli Zhang
    Aluminum-induced electrophysiological variation, synaptic plasticity impairment, and related mechanism / Huifang Zhang
    Cross talk between aluminum and genetic susceptibility and epigenetic modification in Alzheimer's disease / Ruifeng Liang.
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Digital
    Richard M. Kostrzewa, Trevor Archer, editors.
    Contents:
    From the contents: Preface
    ADHD Modeling by Perinatal Insult in Animals
    Perinatal Insults to Model Human Neuro-Psychiatric Disorders
    Selective Life-long Destructive of Brain Monoaminergic Nerves
    NGF in Perinatal Development
    Life-long Susceptibility Consequent to Perinatal Substances of Abuse
    Schizotypic Effects of Perinatal Insults.
    Digital Access Springer 2016
  • Digital/Print
    Mieczyslaw Pokorski, editor.
    Summary: A host of neurotransmitters and neuroactive substances underlies respiratory regulation in health and disease. The centerpiece of investigations regarding adaptation to hypoxia and sensorial perception has been the dopaminergic system. It is now clear that a complex interaction among various neuroactive substances, rather than a single one, forms the basis of respiratory changes. The research on neurotransmitter interactions provides the knowledge of how the brain functions and a new level of understanding of mind-to-body connection, which opens up avenues for novel therapeutic interventions.

    Contents:
    Inherited Disorders of Brain Neurotransmitters: Pathogenesis and Diagnostic Approach
    Inhibition of Peripheral Dopamine Metabolism and the Ventilatory Response to Hypoxia in the Rat
    Adaptation of Olfactory Threshold at High Altitude
    Guanosine Protects Glial Cells against 6-Hydroxydopamine Toxicity
    Chemoresponsiveness and Breath Physiology in Anosmia
    Cognitive Functioning of the Prelingually Deaf Adults
    Hypoxia-Related Brain Dysfunction in Forensic Medicine
    Does Health Status Influence Acceptance of Illness in Patients with Chronic Respiratory Diseases?.
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Digital
    Samer S. Hoz, Iype Cherian, Ali A. Dolachee, Zahraa F. Al-Sharshahi, Hayder R. Salih, Mohammed A. Al-Rawi, Mohammed A. Al-Dhahir.
    Summary: Neurotrauma in Multiple Choice Questions is the FIRST review book to use the multiple-choice question format in neurosurgical trauma. Students of neurosurgery, the resident, the fellow, the younger neurosurgeon preparing for exams or practice, and even the later stage neurosurgeon are the target audience of this book. The information in this work is in accordance with the most up-to-date best practice evidence, with a style that mirrors the format adopted by the majority of local, regional, and international board examinations. The strategy and format of the questions provide a stepwise progression from definition to surgical decision-making, to a comprehensive and concise overview of neurological trauma.

    Contents:
    Section 1: Cranial Neurotrauma
    Chapter1: Principles, and initial assessment
    Chapter2: Management
    Chapter3: Complications, outcome and other aspects
    Section 2: Spinal Neurotrauma
    Chapter4: Principles, and initial assessment
    Chapter5: Management
    Chapter6: Complications, outcome and other aspects
    Section 3: Peripheral Neurotrauma and Miscellaneous issues
    Chapter7: Peripheral nerves Neurotrauma
    Chapter8: Miscellaneous issues related to Neurotrauma.
    Digital Access Springer 2022
  • Digital
    [edited by] Jack Jallo, Christopher M. Loftus.
    Contents:
    Neurotrauma and Critical Care of the Brain
    Title Page
    Copyright
    Contents
    Foreword
    Preface
    Contributors
    Part I: Introduction
    1. Brain Trauma and Critical Care: A Brief History
    2. The Epidemiology of Traumatic Brain Injury in the United States and The World
    3. The Classification of Traumatic Brain Injury
    Part II: Science
    4. Pathophysiology of Traumatic Brain Injury
    5. Blood Biomarkers: What is Needed in the Traumatic Brain Injury Field?
    6. Noninvasive Neuromonitoring in Severe Traumatic Brain Injury
    7. Multimodality Monitoring in Neurocritical Care
    8. Brain Injury Imaging
    Part III: Management
    9. Prehospital Care for Patients with Traumatic Brain Injury
    10. Assessment of Acute Loss of Consciousness
    11. Guidelines Application for Traumatic Brain Injury
    12. Mild Brain Injury
    13. Moderate Traumatic Brain Injury
    14. Severe Traumatic Brain Injury
    15. Wartime Penetrating Injuries
    16. Guidelines for the Surgical Management of Traumatic Brain Injury
    17. Concomitant Injuries in the Brain-injured Patient
    18. Pediatric Brain Injury
    Part IV: Critical Care
    19. Neurological Critical Care
    20. Fluids Resuscitation and Traumatic Brain Injury
    21. Sedation and Analgesia in Traumatic Brain Injury
    22. Mechanical Ventilation and Pulmonary Critical Care
    23. Nutrition Support in Brain Injury
    24. Cardiovascular Complications of Traumatic Brian Injury
    25. Paroxysmal Sympathetic Hyperactivity
    26. Venous Thromboembolism Prophylaxis in the Neurocritical Care Population
    27. Traumatic Brain Injury and Infection
    28. Targeted Temperature Management in Acute Traumatic Brain Injury
    Part V: Outcome
    29. Neurorehabilitation after Brain Injury
    30. Prognosis for Traumatic Brain Injury
    Part VI: Socioeconomics
    31. Ethics: Life and Death Choices for Traumatic Brain Injury
    32. Cost of Traumatic Brain Injuries in the United States and the Return on Helmet Investments
    Index
    Digital Access
    Provider
    Version
    Thieme MedOne Neurosurgery
    Thieme-Connect
  • Digital
    [edited by] Jack Jallo, Alexander R. Vaccaro.
    Contents:
    Epidemiology of spinal injuries / Basheer A. Shakir, Ignacio Jusue-Torres, and Howard B. Levene
    Pathophysiology of spinal cord injury / Basheer A. Shakir and Howard B. Levene
    Spinal cord protective and regenerative therapies / Ahad M. Siddiqui, Chris S. Ahuja, Charles H. Tator, and Michael G. Fehlings
    Spinal trauma classification systems / Jefferson R. Wilson and Srinivas Prasad
    Imaging of spinal injuries / Paul D. Campbell Jr., Yehuda Kerbel, William B. Morrison, and John A. Carrino
    Biomechanics of the spine / Nina Z. Moore, Assem A. Sultan, and Edward C. Benzel
    Neurological assessment of spinal injury / Ralph J. Marino
    Prehospital care for spinal cord injury / Geoffrey Stricsek, Paul Park, Kevin T. Foley, and Joshua Heller
    Clearing the cervical spine / Daniel G. Tobert and Mitchel B. Harris
    Surgical decompression in traumatic spinal cord injury : the importance of timing / Allan Levi and Shelby Burks
    Management of cervical injuries / Sander P.J. Muijs and F.C. Oner
    Thoracolumbar fractures / Joost P.H.J. Rutges and Marcel Dvorak
    Management of concurrent traumatic brain injury and spinal injury / Eli M. Baron, Paula Eboli, and Doniel Drazin
    Spinal cord injuries in the athlete / Gregory D. Schroeder, Andrew R. Helber, Douglas A. Hollern, and Alexander R. Vaccaro
    Critical care management of spinal cord injuries : mean arterial pressure control and hypertonic therapy / Courtney Pendleton, Rani Nasser, Matthew Vibbert, and Jack Jallo
    Targeted temperature management in spinal cord injury / Jacqueline Kraft, Anna Karpenko, and Fred Rincon
    Comprehensive review of spinal cord injury pharmacology and recent medical advances in treatment / John Gillick and Srinivas Prasad
    Autonomic dysreflexia / Mohan Kottapally and Kristine H. O'Phelan
    Infections after spinal cord injury / Amandeep S. Dolla and M. Kamran Athar
    Emerging therapies for spinal cord injury / Richard F. Schmidt, George M. Ghobrial, and James S. Harrop
    Rehabilitation of traumatic spinal cord injury / Mendel Kupfer, Matthew Sonagere, and Christopher Formal
    Socioeconomics of spinal injuries / Jeffrey A. Rihn, Zachary T. Wilt, Rob D. Dickerman, Michael O'Malley, and Jack E. Zigler
    Quality of life after spinal cord injury / John Cheng, Sarah Durante, Christopher Formal, and Guy Fried.
    Digital Access
    Provider
    Version
    Thieme-Connect
    Thieme MedOne Neurosurgery
  • Digital
    James M. Ecklund, Leon E. Moores, editors.
    Summary: This text addresses many of the questions which occur when medical professionals of various disciplines interact and have different plans and interventions, each with its own valid scientific and/or experience-based rationale: Questions involving tourniquet placement, ideal fluids and volumes for resuscitation, VTE prophylaxis and many other management considerations. Straightforward decisions in the patient with a single diagnosis often conflict when applied to the neurologically injured polytrauma patients. Neurotrauma Management for the Severely Injured Polytrauma Patient answers as many of these questions as possible based on the current literature, vast experience with severe neurotrauma in the current conflicts in Afghanistan and Iraq, and the experience of trauma experts across the globe as well as proposes areas for future study where answers are currently less clear. .

    Contents:
    The Difficult Conversation
    Communication Between Teams and Multidisciplinary Rounds and Single Primary POC for Family Communication
    Lessons Learned and Who's in Charge?
    Mass Casualty Events and Your Hospital
    Rural and Austere Environments
    Prehospital Care and EMS Considerations in the Polytrauma Patient with CNS Injuries
    AIS vs. ISS vs. GCS ? What?s Going On Here?
    Trauma Resuscitation and Fluid Considerations in the Polytrauma Patient with CNS Injury
    Initial Imaging Considerations, Repeat Imaging Frequency
    Evidence Based Review of the Use of Steroids in Neurotrauma
    Interventional Radiology in the Civilian Neurotrauma Setting
    Vertebral artery injuries in penetrating neck and cervical spine trauma
    Clearing the Cervical Spine in Blunt Trauma
    Initial evaluation and management
    Transport of the Neurotrauma Patient
    Multiple Surgical Teams in the O. R. at Once ? Priority of Effort and Who Takes the Lead?
    Laparotomy for refractory ICP
    Associated Musculoskeletal Injuries
    Neuro Anesthetic Considerations
    Decompressive Craniectomy for Severe TBI
    Hemodynamic Considerations in the Polytrauma Patient with Traumatic Brain Injury (TBI)
    Coagulopathy in Traumatic Brain Injury
    Venous Thromboembolism Prophylaxis
    Mechanical Ventilation in Traumatic Brain Injury
    Nutrition, Antibiotics, and Posttraumatic Seizure Prophylaxis
    Therapeutic Hypothermia for Traumatic Brain Injury and Spinal Cord Injury
    Rehabilitation in the setting of Neuro-Trauma
    Craniofacial Reconstruction in the Polytrauma Patient
    Functional Restoration for Neurological Trauma: Current Therapies and Future Directions
    Pediatric Neurotrauma
    Care of Patients with Burns and Traumatic Brain Injury.
    Digital Access Springer 2017
  • Digital
    edited by Gary R. Lewin, Bruce D. Carter.
    Summary: This book provides critical reviews of the role of neurotrophins and their receptors in a wide variety of diseases including neurodegenerative diseases like Huntington's syndrome, cognitive function, psychiatric disorders such as clinical depression, Rett syndrome, motoneurone disease, spinal cord injury, pain, metabolic disease and cardiovascular disease. It also contains contributions from leaders in the field dealing with the basic biology, transcriptional and post-translational regulation of the neurotrophins and their receptors. The present book will review all recent areas of progress in the study of neurotrophins and their biological roles.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    Limin Liao, Helmut Madersbacher, editors.
    Summary: This book introduce neurourology as an emerging interdisciplinary area that covers the basic and clinical studies of the neural control on the normal lower urinary tract and the lower/upper urinary tract dysfunction due to neuropathy disorders. It systematically describes all aspects of neurourology from the epidemiology of the neurogenic bladder; to the pathology and pathophysiology of the lower urinary tract; to the diagnosis and treatment of the neurogenic bladder by conservative therapies or surgeries. This book provides a useful resource for medical doctors, nurses and students in the field of neurourological conditions. All the topics are written by internationally recognized specialists in their field. Editor Limin Liao is Professor and Director of the Department of Urology, China Rehabilitation Research Center, affiliated to Capital Medical University, China. Prof. Helmut Madersbacher is a Professor of Urology and em.Head of the Neurourology Unit of the University Hospital, Innsbruck, Austria.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    Timo Krings, Sasikhan Geibprasert, Juan Pablo Cruz, Karel G. terBrugge.
    Summary: "This book employs a cased-based format similar to the earlier Krings book, Case-Based Interventional Neuroradiology. After describing a clinical scenario the relevant anatomic structure or variation will be described and explained (embryological background) and its impact on treatment decisions and treatment modalities are explained. Potential complications that may arise if not properly recognized are indentified. Images of other similar cases are added to show the spectrum of the anatomy and its variations. References to the pertinent literature are provided for each case. Cases are grouped to allow for smooth reading cover to cover and at the same time to quickly get one up to speed prior to performing a procedure where one encounters a similar variation. Imaging includes conventional angiography but will also include MR/MRA and CT/CTA when appropriate"--Provided by publisher.
    Digital Access
    Provider
    Version
    Thieme-Connect
    Thieme MedOne Radiology
  • Digital
    edited by Mingrui Zhao, Department of Neurological, Brain and Mind Research, Institute, Weill Cornell Medican College, New York, NY, USA, Hongtao Ma, Department of Neurological Surgery, Brain and Mind Research Institute, Weill Corniell Medical College, New York, NY, USA, Theodore H. Schwartz, Department of Neurological Surgery, Brain and Mind Research Institute, Weill Cornell Medical College, New York Presbyterian Hospital, New York, NY, USA.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    Javier Fandino, Serge Marbacher, Ali-Reza Fathi, Carl Muroi, Emanuela Keller, editors.
    Summary: This book contains articles presented at the 12th International Conference on Cerebral Vasospasm, held in Lucerne, Switzerland, in July 2013. The included papers represent a balanced cross-section of the enormous progress achieved in basic and clinical research on aneurysmal subarachnoid hemorrhage and its sequelae, including early neurovascular events and delayed cerebral vasospasm. The section on basic research covers a broad range of aspects, from pathophysiology and neuroprotection in early brain injury through to macro- and microcirculatory disturbances, inflammation and blood-brain barrier disruption, spreading depolarization, and the role of nitric oxide. There is a special focus on animal models for the study of acute events after experimental subarachnoid hemorrhage. The section on clinical topics encompasses imaging and endovascular management, surgical innovations and techniques, management and monitoring in neurocritical care, the status of clinical trials, and factors involved in aneurysm formation. This edition is of interest not only for basic researchers but also for clinicians who wish to apply state-of-the-art knowledge to the research and management of this devastating condition.

    Contents:
    Basic Research Topics: Early Brain Injury: Pathophysiology
    Early Brain Injury: Neuroprotection
    Macro- and Microcirculatory Disturbance
    Inflammation and Blood-Brain-Barrier Disruption
    Spreading Depolarization: From Bench to Bedside and Back
    Nitric Oxide: From Bench to Bedside. Clinical Topics: Imaging and Endovascular Management
    Treatment: Surgical Innovations and Techniques
    Neurocritical Care: Management
    Neurocritical Care: Monitoring
    Clinical Trials: Current Status and the Way forward
    Aneurysm Formation: Morphology, Environment, and Genetics.
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Print
    American Nurses Association, Association of Neurovascular Clinicians.
    Summary: "The Neurovascular Nursing: Scope and Standards of Practice is an essential document for every Neurovascular nurse practicing in the United States. The scope of practice statement answers the who, what, when, where, how, and why questions of neurovascular nursing. The standards provide authoritative statements of the actions and behaviors that all registered neurovascular nurses are expected to competently perform, regardless of role, population, specialty, and setting. The product of extensive thought work by many registered nurses, this new edition provides 18 national standards of practice and professional performance. Each standard is accompanied by detailed competencies for the three practice levels. This premier professional resource informs and guides Neurovascular nurses in their vital work providing safe, quality, and competent care. It is a must-have for every registered neurovascular nurse"--Publisher's description.

    Contents:
    Neurovascular Nursing
    Introduction to Neurovascular Nursing Practice : Foundational Documents of Professional Nursing ; Audience for this Publication
    Scope of Neurovascular Nursing Practice : Definition of Neurovascular Nursing ; Integrating the Science and Art of Neurovascular Nursing ; Neurovascular Disease ; Characteristics of Neurovascular Nursing ; Roles, Education, and Settings in Neurovascular Nursing Practice ; Societal and Ethical Dimensions of Neurovascular Nursing ; The How of Neurovascular Nursing ; The Future of the Neurovascular Nursing Specialty ; Direction for Neurovascular Nursing Practice ; Summary of the Scope of Neurovascular Nursing Practice ; Neurovascular nursing practice and the Association of Neurovascular Clinicians
    Standards of Neurovascular Nursing Practice and Professional Performance. Competency as a function of standards
    Standards of Neuovascular Nursing Practice : Standard 1. Assessment ; 2. Diagnosis ; Standard 3. Outcomes Identification ; Standard 4. Planning ; Standard 5. Implementation ; Standard 5a. Coordination of care ; Standard 5b. Health teaching and health promotion ; Standard 6. Evaluation
    Standards of Professional Performance : Standard 7. Ethics ; Standard 8. Advocacy ; Standard 9. Respectful and equitable practice ; Standard 10. Communication ; Standard 11. Collaboration ; Standard 12. Leadership ; Standard 13. Education ; Standard 14. Scholarly Inquiry ; Standard 15. Quality of practice ; Standard 16. Professional practice evaluation ; Standard 17. Resource steardship ; Standard 18. Environmental health
    Appendices: ANVC Leadership Framework : Clinical localization assesment by vascular territoy.
    Digital Access R2Library 2023
  • Digital
    Wendy C. Ziai, Christy L. Cornwell, editors.
    Summary: This book provides a comprehensive and concise, review of the fundamental concepts and clinical indications for Transcranial Doppler (TCD) imaging. An overview of the physics of ultrasonography as it pertains to TCD is presented, as well as neuroanatomy and cerebrovascular physiology in healthy and diseased states. Recommended protocols for neuroimaging are reviewed and serves as a guide for existing neurovascular laboratories and medical systems seeking to develop laboratories that are in need of a guide to establish their own protocols. The most common, relevant and challenging clinical conditions where TCD is incorporated to assist with patient management are discussed. In addition, chapters provide a framework for building a neurovascular laboratory, including necessary equipment, steps to obtain national accreditation by accrediting bodies, and reimbursement procedures for tests performed. The book concludes with "clinical pearls" and "tricks of the trade", which serve as a commentary to guide physicians and neurosonologists on best-practices for TCD acquisition and interpretation.

    Contents:
    Principles of Transcranial Doppler Sonography
    Overview of Pertinent Cerebral Vascular Anatomy
    Cerebral Waveforms for Hemodynamic assessment
    Monitoring in Neurocritical Care – Overview
    Transcranial Doppler in Subarachnoid Hemorrhage
    Reversible Cerebral Vasoconstriction Syndrome (RCVS) and Vasculitis
    MONITORING FOR EMBOLI DETECTION (without and with MICROBUBBLES)
    EVALUATION OF CEREBRAL CIRCULATORY ARREST
    Intracranial Stenosis
    Therapeutic TCD for patients with acute cerebral ischemia
    Clinical Application of Cerebrovascular Physiology
    Adult Traumatic Brain Injury
    Traumatic Brain Injury : Pediatric
    Cerebrovascular Reactivity Assessments in Traumatic Brain Injury
    Transcranial Doppler Protocols and Procedures: Vasomotor Reactivity
    Continuous Cerebral Autoregulation Monitoring using TCD
    Optic Nerve Sheath Diameter for Increased Intracranial Pressure
    Cranial Ultrasound
    Applications of Transcranial Doppler Ultrasonography in Sickle Cell Disease, Stroke, and Critical Illness in Children
    Point of care Transcranial Doppler
    CEREBROVASCULAR PHYSIOLOGY IN THE SETTING OF TEMPORARY AND DURABLE MECHANICAL CIRCULATORY SUPPORT
    Electroencephalography versus Transcranial Doppler Ultrasonography; Indications and Applications for Intracranial Monitoring
    Moyamoya Disease
    Vertebral Steal
    Transcranial Doppler in Acute Bacterial Meningitis
    TCD equipment, Lab Accreditation, Reimbursement, and Practice Issues
    Use of Transcranial Doppler in the Outpatient Ultrasound Lab
    Protocol for Non- Imaging Transcranial Doppler
    Transcranial Color Doppler Imaging for Adults
    Protocol for Monitoring for Emboli Detection (and with Microbubbles)
    How to obtain measurements of the optic nerve sheath diameter in adults and children utilizing point-of-care ophthalmic ultrasonography
    Protocol for Extracranial Carotid Exam.
    Digital Access Springer 2022
  • Digital
    edited by Robert F. Spetzler, M. Yashar S. Kalani, Peter Nakaji.
    Summary: "The complex, highly technological field of neurovascular surgery is quickly expanding, encompassing traditional surgical approaches, as well as endovascular and neurointerventional techniques. The last decade has seen increased cross-specialty interest in utilizing minimally invasive techniques to help prevent and treat cerebrovascular disease. Concurrently, there has been important research analyzing the efficacy of surgical methods versus endovascular approaches and the clip versus coil discussion is covered herein. Written by 21st Century pioneers in the field, this second, cutting-edge edition offers the latest science throughout 1,400 pages and a remarkable video library covering anatomy, diagnosis, epidemiology, history, treatment indications, technical nuances, outcomes, and complications. Internationally renowned experts from across the globe share clinical pearls and best practices, from the research lab to the ER to the OR. Medical, surgical, endovascular, cerebral revascularization, bypass surgery, radiation therapy, and other procedures are covered in depth. Evidence-based and transdisciplinary, the second edition covers the full spectrum of neurovascular pathologies, preoperatively and postoperatively, including: Ischemic Stroke and Vascular Insufficiency, Cerebral and Spinal Aneurysms, Cerebral Spinal Arteriovenous Fistulae and Malformations, Vascular Tumors, Carotid Artery Disease, Moya-Moya Disease. Organized into 11 primary sections, 99 richly illustrated chapters, and more than 140 videos, this volume is an invaluable, one-stop reference tool. It is a must-have for general, vascular and endovascular neurosurgeons; interventional radiologists; neurologists; critical care practitioners; and neuro-rehabilitation specialists"--Provided by publisher.
    Digital Access
    Provider
    Version
    Thieme-Connect
    Thieme MedOne Neurosurgery
  • Digital
    edited by Alex C. Tselis and John Booss.
    Summary: This volume in the Handbook of Clinical Neurology series provides a complete review of the history, science and current state of neurovirology. It covers the science and clinical presentation, diagnosis, and treatment of viruses of the brain and central nervous system, and is a trusted resource for scholars, scientists, neuroscientists, neurologists, virologists, and pharmacologists working on neurovirology. Neurovirology has been significantly bolstered by modern technologies such as PCR and MRI with direct impact on isolating viruses and advancing therapeutics based on molecular medicine. These advances are particularly important today with the introduction of emerging and re-emerging diseases such as HIV/AIDS, Nipah encephalitis and the appearance of West Nile encephalitis in the western hemisphere.
    Digital Access ScienceDirect 2014
  • Digital
    edited by Peter C.E. Moody.
    Contents:
    Chapter One: Fundamentals of neutron crystallography in structural biology
    Chapter Two: Large crystal growth for neutron protein crystallography
    Chapter Three: Prospects for membrane protein crystals in NMX
    Chapter Four: IMAGINE: The neutron protein crystallography beamline at the high flux isotope reactor
    Chapter Five: The macromolecular neutron diffractometer at the spallation neutron source
    Chapter Six: Current status and near future plan of neutron protein crystallography at J-PARC
    Chapter Seven: Neutron macromolecular crystallography at the European spallation source
    Chapter Eight: Dynamic nuclear polarization enhanced neutron crystallography: Amplifying hydrogen in biological crystals
    Chapter Nine: Implementation of the riding hydrogen model in CCTBX to support the next generation of X-ray and neutron joint refinement in Phenix
    Chapter Ten: Interactive model building in neutron macromolecular crystallography
    Chapter Eleven: What are the current limits on determination of protonation state using neutron macromolecular crystallography?
    Chapter Twelve: Proton transfer and drug binding details revealed in neutron diffraction studies of wild-type and drug resistant HIV-1 protease
    Chapter Thirteen: Neutron crystallographic studies of carbonic anhydrase
    Chapter Fourteen: Protein kinase A in the neutron beam: Insights for catalysis from directly observing protons
    Chapter Fifteen: Pyridoxal 5′-phosphate dependent reactions: Analyzing the mechanism of aspartate aminotransferase
    Chapter Sixteen: The role of hydrogen atoms in redox catalysis by the flavoenzyme cholesterol oxidase
    Chapter Seventeen: Heme peroxidase—Trapping intermediates by cryo neutron crystallography.
    Digital Access ScienceDirect 2020
  • Digital
    edited by Mark T. Quinn, Frank R. DeLeo.
    Contents:
    The role of neutrophils in the immune system : an overview / Harry L. Malech, Frank R. DeLeo, and Mark T. Quinn
    Isolation of human neutrophils from venous blood / William M. Nausef
    Neutrophil isolation from nonhuman species / Daniel W. Siemsen ... [and 7 others]
    Collection of in vivo transmigrated neutrophils from human skin / Karin Christenson ... [and 6 others]
    Subcellular fractionation of human neutrophils and analysis of subcellular markers / Stine Novrup Clemmensen, Lene Udby, and Niels Borregaard
    Rho family and Rap GTPase activation assays / Richard T. Jennings and Ulla G. Knaus
    Measurement of phospholipid metabolism in intact neutrophils / Susan Sergeant and Linda C. McPhail
    Optical methods for the measurement and manipulation of cytosolic calcium signals in neutrophils / Maurice B. Hallett, Maha Al-Jumaa, and Sharon Dewitt
    Analysis of electrophysiological properties and responses of neutrophils / Deri Morgan and Thomas E. DeCoursey
    Assessment of neutrophil apoptosis / David A. Dorward ... [and 3 others]
    Microinjection methods for neutrophils / Iraj Laffafian ... [and 3 others]
    Generation of functionally mature neutrophils from induced pluripotent stem cells / Colin L. Sweeney ... [and 6 others]
    Neutrophil migration through extracellular matrix / Richard T. Jennings and Ulla G. Knaus
    Spinning disk confocal imaging of neutrophil migration in zebrafish / Pui-Ying Lam ... [and 4 others]
    Detection of bidirectional signaling during integrin activation and neutrophil adhesion / Stuart M. Altman, Neha Dixit, and Scott I. Simon
    Immunofluorescence and confocal microscopy of neutrophils / Lee-Ann H. Allen
    Expressin of genetically encoded fluorescent probes to monitor phospholipid dynamics in live neutrophils / Benjamin E. Steinberg, Marco A.O. Magalhaes, and Sergio Grinstein
    Quantitative assessment of neutrophil phagocytosis using flow cytometry / Pontus Nordenfelt
    Analysis of neutrophil bactericidal activity / Heather A. Parker ... [and 4 others]
    Induction and quantification of neutrophil extracellular traps / Alejandro Sanchez Gonzalez ... [and 3 others]
    Measurement of respiratory burst products, released or retained, during activation of professional phagocytes / Johan Bylund ... [and 4 others]
    Cell-free NADPH oxidase activation assays : "In vitro veritas" / Edgar Pick
    Assessment of priming of the human neutrophil respiratory burst / Margarita Hurtado-Nedelec ... [and 4 others]
    Affinity pruification and reconstitution of human phagocyte flavocytochrome b for detection of conformational dynamics in the membrane / Marcia Riesselman and Algirdas J. Jesaitis
    Evaluation of p47phox phosphorylation in human neutrophils using phospho-specicfic antibodies / Sahra Amel Belambri, Pham My-Chan Dang, and Jamel El-Benna
    Genome-scale transcript analyses with human neutrophils / Scott D. Kobayashi, Daniel E. Sturdevant, and Frank R. DeLeo
    Fast and accurate quantitative analysis of cytokine gene expression in human neutrophils / Nicola Tamassia, Marco A. Cassatella, and Flavia Bazzoni
    High-purity neutrophil isolation from human peripheral blood and saliva for transcriptome analysis / Flavia S. Lakschevitz and Michael Glogauer
    Detection of intact transciption factors in human neutrophils / Patrick P. McDonald and Richard D. Ye
    Disorders of neutrophil function : an overview / Mary C. Dinauer
    Diagnostic assays for chronic granulomatous disease and other neutrophil disorders / Houda Zghal Elloumi and Steven M. Holland
    Diagnostic assays for myeloperoxidase and myeloperoxidase deficiency / William M. Nauseef.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    Daniel Wallach, Marie-Dominique Vignon-Pennamen, Angelo Valerio Marzano editors.
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Digital
    Brahma Singh, K.V. Peter, editors.
    Summary: Importance of herbs (medicinal plants) can hardly be overemphasized. They are exploited for manyfold applications, ranging from phytopharmaceuticals, to nutraceuticals, to cosmetics and many others. Keeping in view the richness of herbs and their vast potential, this book collates the most up-to-date knowledge of important herbs and herbals. The book also gives an overview of some issues causing hindrance in the promotion of herbals. This book attempts to compile the rich experience of experts working on various herbs. New age single plant species, having multiple medicinal traits worth exploiting i.e. Hippophae rhamnoides (seabuckthorn), and Morinda citrifolia (noni) also find place as full chapters in the book.

    Contents:
    Intro; Foreword; Preface; Acknowledgements; Contents; Introduction; Commonly Used Herbs; Herbs Availability; Conservation Strategy; Cultivation; Herbal Science; Herbal/Botanicals; Alkaloids; Glycosides; Polyphenols; Terpenes; Research Hurdles in Phyto-medicines; Constraints Associated with the Dealing of Herbal Medicines; Cosmeceuticals; Nutraceuticals; India New Age Herbal Potential; National Policy; The Book Coverage; Further Readings; Part I: New Age Medicinal Plants; Research and Development on Artemisia annua in India; Introduction; In planta Artemisinin Biosynthesis. Feel-Good FactorsCultivation of Sea Buckthorn; Soil and Climate; Varieties; Propagation; Seeds; Suckers; Stem Cuttings; Hard Wood; Soft Wood; Planting and Care; Pruning and Training; Insect Pests; Diseases; Yields; Post-Harvest Management; Commercial Sea Buckthorn Products; Requirements for Promotion of Sea Buckthorn; Summary; References; Noni (Morinda citrifolia L.): Research and Development; Noni Production; Planting Materials Production; Seeds; Planting Season; Pits for Planting; Spacing; Weed Management; Nutrient Management; Irrigation Management; Green Manure Crops; Inter and Mixed Crops. Genetic Resources and Elite Genotypes of A. annuaCharacterization of Genetic Elements from A. annua; Responsiveness of A. annua to Biotic and Abiotic Factors; Other Uses; Some Recent Developments; Societal Impact; Conclusion; References; Indian Sea Buckthorn; Introduction; Authorś Association with Sea Buckthorn; The Shrub; Importance; The Fruit; The Leaf; Traditional Medical Uses; Feed, Fodder, Fuel, and Bio-Fencing; Phytochemicals; Sea Buckthorn Oil; Seed Oil Extraction Techniques; Chemical Profile of Sea Buckthorn Oil; Health Benefits of Sea Buckthorn; Ice Nucleating Agents. Harvest and Postharvest Processing Yield; Storage; References; Rhodiola: An Overview of Phytochemistry and Pharmacological Applications; Introduction; Distribution of Rhodiola Species; Rhodiola rosea; Rhodiola imbricata; Rhodiola heterodonta; Rhodiola crenulata; Rhodiola kirilowii; Rhodiola bupleuroides; Rhodiola dumulosa; Rhodiola algida; Rhodiola sachalinensis; Rhodiola quadrifida; Rhodiola alsi; Chemoprofiling of Rhodiola Species; Rhodiola rosea; Rhodiola imbricata; Rhodiola heterodonta; Rhodiola crenulata; Rhodiola kirilowii; Rhodiola bupleuroides; Rhodiola dumulosa; Rhodiola algida. Rhodiola sachalinensisRhodiola qundrifida; Bioactivity of Rhodiola Species; Rhodiola rosea; Rhodiola imbricata; Rhodiola heterodonta; Rhodiola crenulata; Rhodiola kirilowii; Rhodiola bupleuroides; Rhodiola algida; Rhodiola sachalinensis; Rhodiola qundrifida; In Vitro Propagation/Culture; References; Ophiocordyceps sinensis: The Medicinal Caterpillar Mushroom; Introduction; Taxonomy; Life Cycle of Ophiocordyceps sinensis and Insect Thitarodes armoricanus; Ophiocordyceps Habitat in India; Ethnomycology; Medicinal Uses; Ophiocordyceps Improves the Respiratory Functions.
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Print
    Danielle Harlan, Ph. D.
    Summary: "Offers [an] ... interactive program that is designed to help you find meaning and fulfillment in your life while increasing your competency as a leader. It provides a step-by-step, developmental framework for setting goals, building relationships, and using your power and influence to incite positive change"--Amazon.com.

    Contents:
    Introduction: Welcome to the new alpha movement
    Personal excellence. Demonstrate character and ethics
    Build positive and productive relationships with others
    Prioritize your health and wellness
    Develop a mindset for success
    Psychological and organizational strategies to help you achieve your goals
    Personal leadership. Define your personal leadership identity
    Identify your vision
    Develop your plan
    Execute your plan
    Team and organizational leadership. Identify the vision
    Develop the plan
    Execute the plan
    Sustaining progress, growth, and motivation.
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    BioSciences Career Center Collection (Duck Room)
    Prof Dev 114
    1
  • Digital
    Franco Rongioletti, Bruce R. Smoller, editors.
    Summary: In recent years new, obscure or poorly known dermatological disorders have been described and better defined, with emphasis on clinical, histopathological and etiopathogenetic features. Familiarity with these new, emerging or revisited clinical entities is fundamental, and recognizing them with their differential diagnosis has important implications in clinical practice for better patient management. This book offers an in-depth discussion of the clinical and pathologic features of newly described or less well-known and revisited cutaneous disorders. It provides clinical findings, as well as the histologic, immunologic, and molecular features of these diseases in addition to therapeutic notes. The first section of the book covers cutaneous diseases that lack any systemic implications, such as circumscribed palmoplantar hypokeratosis, necrotizing infundibular crystalline folliculitis, and dermal hyperneury, amongst others. The second section offers coverage on cutaneous diseases with systemic implications, such as AESOP-POEMS syndrome, lipoatrophic panniculitis of children, and obesity associated with lymphedematous mucinosis. Each chapter describes an entity, along with an atlas of clinical manifestations that will serve as a "bed-side" clinical reference, followed by a series of photomicrographs depicting the histologic changes. Chapters also offer recent updates on molecular tools helpful in attaining the diagnosis as well as therapeutic recommendations based upon the more recent acquisitions. New and Emerging Entities in Dermatology and Dermatopathology is a must-have reference for the practicing dermatopathologist, internists, general pathologist reviewing skin biopsies, general dermatologists, family practitioners and nurse practitioners, geneticists, immunologists and other health care providers that care for patients with skin conditions.

    Contents:
    Part 1. ENTITIES WITHOUT OR LITTLE SYSTEMIC IMPLICATIONS
    1.Autoinflammatory Keratinization Diseases
    2.Adult Mucinoses: New And Revisited Variants
    3.Pediatric Cutaneous Mucinoses
    4.Circumscribed Palmoplantar Hypokeratosis
    5.Necrotizing Infundibular Crystalline Folliculitis And Necrotizing Eosinophilic Folliculitis
    6.Annular Erythema: New And Revisited Variants
    7.Frontal Fibrosing Alopecia
    8.Terra Firma-Forme Dermatosis And Dermatosis Neglecta
    9.Papular Epidermal Nevus With "Skyline" Basal Cell Layer (PENS)
    10.Grover Disease
    11.The Spectrum Of Acquired Elastolytic Disorders
    12.Post Irradiation Pseudo-Sclerodermatous Panniculitis
    13.Linear Focal Elastosis And Pxe-Like Fibroelastolytic And Elastotic Papulosis Disorders
    14. Rare Variants Of Keratosis Pilaris
    15.Cutaneous Collagenous Vasculopathy
    16.Acquired Hyperpigmentation Disorders Of Uncertain Etiology
    17. Eruptive pseudoangiomatosis, eruptive hypomelanosis and paraviral exanthems
    18.Morbihan Disease
    Part 2.ENTITIES WITH SYSTEMIC IMPLICATIONS
    19.Aquagenic Keratoderma
    20.New Or Unusual Skin Manifestations In Monoclonal Gammopathies
    21.Lipophagic/Lipoatrophic Panniculitis: A Th1 Mediated Autoimmune Disorder Of The Subcutaneous Fat
    22.Covid19-Related Cutaneous Manifestations
    23.PAPA, PASH, PAPASH, PsAPASH and PASS: autoinflammatory syndromes of Hidradenitis Suppurativa
    24.Re-Emerging And New Skin Infections
    25.Skin Adverse Reactions From New Cancer Immunotherapy
    26.Newly Recognized Variants Of Neutrophilic Dermatosis
    27.Cutaneous Reactive Angiomatoses
    28.Skin Manifestations of Immunoglobulin G4-Related Disease
    29.Necrolytic Acral Erythema (NAE)
    30.Reactive Granulomatous Dermatitis (Interstitial granulomatous dermatitis, palisaded neutrophilic and granulomatous dermatitis, and variants)
    31.Chronic Atypical Neutrophilic Dermatosis With Lipodystrophy And Elevated Temperature (CANDLE) and Proteasome Associated Autoinflammatory Syndrome (PRAAS)
    32.Spiny Keratoderma
    33.Cocaine-Levamisole-Induced Vasculitis/Vasculopathy Syndrome
    34.Lymphocytic Thrombophilic Arteritis (Macular Lymphocytic Arteritis)
    35.Dermal Hyperneury
    36.Emergent cutaneous T-cell pseudolymphomas.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    Airín D. Martínez, Scott D. Rhodes, editors.
    Summary: This timely volume serves as a comprehensive and much-needed update to the literature on Latinx health. As both the United States and Latinx subgroups experience and anticipate demographic shifts, it is critical to examine the current epidemiology of Latinx health, as well as the factors influencing this population's health and well-being. Chapters in this book, written by highly respected experts, illuminate the diversity of the Latinx population and provide strategies to mitigate many of the challenges faced by them, including challenges related to migrating to new destinations. The book is designed to enrich dialogue around the multilevel determinants of Latinx health, and concludes with a call to action for both increased culturally congruent and sound Latinx-focused research and the mentorship of Latinx early-career investigators. A selection of the perspectives included among the chapters: Chronic disease and mental health issues in Latinx populations Substance use among Latinx adolescents in the United States Health insurance reform and the Latinx population Immigration enforcement policies and Latinx health Research priorities for Latinx sexual and gender minorities Racial and ethnic discrimination, intersectionality, disability, and Latinx health New and Emerging Issues in Latinx Health is an invaluable compendium that provides a foundation of understanding Latinx health and well-being and guides future research and practice. The book is essential for researchers, practitioners, and students in the fields of public health, health education, population and community health, preventive medicine, health administration and policy, and community and health psychology, and is also relevant for federal, state, and local agencies including health departments and other Latinx- and immigrant-serving community-based organizations.

    Contents:
    Foreword There are numerous potential candidates for authoring of the Foreword, including but not limited to:Eliseo J. Pérez-Stable, MD, Director of the National Institute of Minority Health and Health Disparities David Hayes-Bautista, MD, PhD, Professor of Medicine and Director of the Center for the Study of Latino Health and Culture at the School of Medicine, UCLA. David Hayes-Bautista was the first person of color to graduate from the medical sociology program at UCSF. Ruth E. Zambrana, PhD, Professor at the University of Maryland, College Park, Department of Women's Studies, Director of the Consortium on Race, Gender and Ethnicity, Interim Director of the U.S. Latino Studies Initiative at the University of Maryland, College Park, and Adjunct Professor of Family Medicine at University of Maryland Baltimore, School of Medicine, Department of Family Medicine Chapter 1: Latinx in the US: An Introduction to Demographic Trends and the Epidemiology of Health and Well-BeingAuthors: Rhodes and Martinez In this chapter, the editors will describe demographic changes in the US over time, outline what the population of Latinas/os will look like in the future, outline some of the major health issues facing Latinos/Latinas; describe the rationale for and significance of this book; outline the structure of book (i.e., 2 sections: (1) The health status of Latinas/os in the US, and (2) Communities, Systems, and Structures); and the subsequent chapters; identify cross chapter themes; and delineate next steps in terms of research to improve the health and well-being of Latinas/Latinos in the US. All subsequent chapters will adhere to the following structure: 1. Describe current state of epidemiology/knowledge with consideration to subgroups and heterogeneity of population as relevant (7-10 pages)2. Review of relevant conceptual/theoretical approaches (1-2 pages)3. Briefly identify successful research and interventions (2-3 pages)4. Identify research and intervention needs and priorities (3-5 pages) Section 1: The Health Status of Latinx in the US Chapter 2: Chronic DiseaseAuthors: Barbara Baquero, PhD, MPH (University of Iowa) and colleagues. Chapter 3: Sexual and Reproductive HealthAuthors: Scott D. Rhodes, PhD, MPH (Wake Forest School of Medicine) and colleagues. Chapter 4: Occupational Health Authors: Abel Valenzuela, PhD (UCLA) and colleagues. Chapter 5: Mental HealthAuthors: Hector M. Gónzalez, PhD (Michigan State University) and colleagues. Chapter 6: Im/Migrant HealthAuthors: Thomas Painter, PhD (Centers for Disease Control and Prevention) and colleagues. Chapter 7: LGBT HealthAuthors: Scott D. Rhodes, PhD, MPH (Wake Forest School of Medicine) and colleagues. Chapter 8: Aging and Older Latinas/osAuthors: Adriana Pérez, PhD, ANP (University of Pennsylvania School of Nursing) and colleagues. Chapter 9: Disabilities Among Latinas/osAuthors: Fabricio Balcazar, PhD, (Department of Disability and Human Development at University of Illinois at Chicago) and colleagues. Chapter 10: Substance UseAuthors: Flavio Marsiglia, PhD, MSW (School of Social Work & Southwest Interdisciplinary Research Center Arizona State University) and colleagues. Section 2: Communities, Systems, and Structures Chapter 11: ACA and Health Care UtilizationAuthors: Mark Hall, JD, and Lilli Mann, MPH (Wake Forest Schools of Medicine and Law) Chapter 12: Immigration Enforcement Policies and HealthAuthors: Heide Castañeda, PhD, MPH (University of South Florida) and colleagues. Chapter 13: The Built EnvironmentAuthors: Francisco Lara-Valencia, PhD (Arizona State University) and colleagues. Chapter 14: Expansions of AcculturationAuthors: Airin D. Martinez, PhD, (Arizona State University), Samantha Sabo, PhD, MPH, (University of Arizona), Rebecca Crocker, PhDc (University of Arizona) Alma Hernández, PhDc (University of New Mexico) Chapter 15: DiscriminationAuthors: Edna Viruell-Fuentes, PhD, MPH (University of Illinois
    Urbana-Champaign Chapter 16: Representation, Politics, and LeadershipAuthors: Carlos Rodriguez-Diaz, PhD, MPH (University of Puerto Rico).
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    Bruce A. Palfey.
    Contents:
    Methods for determining the reduction potentials of flavin enzymes / Shelbi L. Christgen, Sophia M. Becker and Donald F. Becker
    Anaerobic methods for the transient-state study of flavoproteins: The use of specialized glassware to define the concentration of dioxygen / Graham R. Moran
    Performing anaerobic stopped-flow spectrophotometry inside of an anaerobic chamber / Hannah Valentino and Pablo Sobrado
    Chemical quenching and identification of intermediates in flavoenzyme-catalyzed reactions / Kalani Karunaratne and Tatiana V. Mishanina
    On the use of noncompetitive kinetic isotope effects to investigate flavoenzyme mechanism / Kevin Francis and Giovanni Gadda
    Isotopically labeled flavoenzymes and their uses in probing reaction mechanisms / Andreea I. Iorgu, Matthew J. Cliff, Jonathan P. Waltho, Nigel S. Scrutton and Sam Hay
    Unraveling flavoenzyme reaction mechanisms using flavin analogues and linear free energy relationships / Christopher J. Thibodeaux, Wei-chen Chang and Hung-wen Liu
    Vibrational spectroscopy of flavoproteins / James N. Iuliano, Jarrod B. French and Peter J. Tonge
    Measuring electronic structure properties of flavins and flavoproteins by electronic stark spectroscopy / Robert J. Stanley and Cornelius J. van Galen
    EPR spectroscopy on flavin radicals in flavoproteins / Daniel Nohr, Stefan Weber and Erik Schleicher
    Applications of molecular modeling to flavoproteins: Insights and challenges / Emil Sjulstok, Ilia A. Solov'yov and Peter L. Freddolino
    Exploring the sequence, function, and evolutionary space of protein superfamilies using sequence similarity networks and phylogenetic reconstructions / Janine N. Copp, Dave W. Anderson, Eyal Akiva, Patricia C. Babbitt and Nobuhiko Tokuriki
    Structural methods for probing the interaction of flavoenzymes with oxygen and its surrogates / Raspudin Saleem-Batcha and Robin Teufel
    Reduction midpoint potentials of bifurcating electron transfer flavoproteins / A.-F. Miller, H.D. Duan, T.A. Varner and N. Mohamed Raseek
    Investigations of two-component flavin-dependent monooxygenase systems / John M. Robbins and Holly R. Ellis
    The styrene monooxygenase system / George T. Gassner
    Flavin-N5-oxide intermediates in dibenzothiophene, uracil, and hexachlorobenzene catabolism / Sanjoy Adak and Tadhg P. Begley
    Prenylated FMN: Biosynthesis, purification, and Fdc1 activation / Anna N. Khusnutdinova, Johnny Xiao, Po-Hsiang Wang, Khorcheska A. Batyrova, Robert Flick, Elizabeth A. Edwards and Alexander F. Yakunin
    Heterologous production, reconstitution and EPR spectroscopic analysis of prFMN dependent enzymes / Stephen A. Marshall, Karl A.P. Payne, Karl Fisher, Deepankar Gahloth, Samuel S. Bailey, Arune Balaikaite, Annica Saaret, Irina Gostimskaya, Godwin Aleku, Huanming Huang, Stephen E.J. Rigby, David Procter and David Leys
    Physical methods for studying flavoprotein photoreceptors / Estella F. Yee, Siddarth Chandrasekaran, Changfan Lin and Brian R. Crane.
    Digital Access ScienceDirect 2019
  • Digital
    Ulrich Nielsch, Ulrike Fuhrmann, Stefan Jaroch, editors.
    Summary: This volume gives an overview of state of the art technologies and future developments in the field of preclinical pharmaceutical research. A balanced mix of experts from academia and industry give insight in selected new developments in the drug discovery pathway. The topics cover the different parts of the drug discovery process, starting with new developments in the target identification and validation area. The lead generation part as a next step focuses on the requirements and technologies to identify new small molecules as lead compounds for further optimization; in a second section the technologies to identify biologics as leads are addressed. The final part focuses on the pharmacological models and technologies to characterize new compounds and the impact of biomarkers to facilitate the transfer of drug candidates into the development phase.

    Contents:
    Preface
    Part 1. Historical View
    Drug discovery in the past and today.Part 2. Target Discovery
    Emerging target families: intractable targets. In vivo target validation especially for biological targets. HR RNAi/High Content analysis
    Part 3. Lead generation and Optimization
    Sources for leads: natural products, libraries. Screening: assays, readout, technology. Impact of structural biology, fragment based screening/Virtual screening. Predictive in silico tools of compound properties. High throughput synthesis. New compound classes: Protein-Protein Interaction. Sources for biological leads/Screening of biologicals
    Part 4. Test systems for Efficacy and Safety
    In vitro / Cell based assays. Pharmacodynamic. Pharmacokinetic. Safety and toxicology. Impact of biomarkers/personalized medicine. Simulating in vivo drug effects.
    Digital Access Springer 2016
  • Digital
    Soodabeh Saeidnia.
    Summary: This book provides an up-to-date review of recently identified natural anti-tumor compounds from various natural origins including plants, fungi, endophytic fungi and marine organisms. It also℗ℓincludes discussion of℗ℓnew areas℗ℓsuch as℗ℓbiotechnology and nanoparticles. Chapters explain the challenges and developments in anti-cancer drug discovery approaches, traditional remedies for prevention and treatment of cancer, marine-derived anti-cancer compounds, and antibiotics used as anti-cancer agents, as well as different classes of terpenoids and carbohydrates, which have℗ℓbeen the subject of discussion℗ℓin this field as efficient anti-cancer candidates. This book will be a concise guide for researchers in the field of pharmaceutical sciences, students and residents in pharmacy and medicine as well as those researching phytochemistry and natural products.

    Contents:
    Anticancer drug discovery approaches; challenges and development
    An Evidence Based Approach to Traditional Herbal Remedies for the Management of Cancer
    Marine-derived Anticancer Compounds
    Anti-cancer Antibiotics
    Anticancer terpenoids; Carbohydrates Against Cancer. .
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Digital
    edited by Michael Goodfellow, Iain Sutcliffe, Jongsik Chun.
    Contents:
    Chapter 1. The Need for Change: Embracing the Genome / William B. Whitman
    Chapter 2. An Introduction to Phylogenetics and the Tree of Life / Tom A. Williams, Sarah E. Heaps
    Chapter 3. The All-Species Living Tree Project / Pablo Yarza, Raul Munoz
    Chapter 4. 16S rRNA Gene-Based Identification of Bacteria and Archaea using the EzTaxon Server / Mincheol Kim, Jongsik Chun
    Chapter 5. Revolutionizing Prokaryotic Systematics Through Next-Generation Sequencing / Vartul Sangal, Leena Nieminen, Nicholas P. Tucker, Paul A. Hoskisson
    Chapter 6. Whole-Genome Analyses: Average Nucleotide Identity / David R. Arahal
    Chapter 7. Whole-Genome Sequencing for Rapid and Accurate Identification of Bacterial Transmission Pathways / Simon R. Harris, Chinyere K. Okoro
    Chapter 8. Identification of Conserved Indels that are Useful for Classification and Evolutionary Studies / Radhey S. Gupta
    Chapter 9. Reconciliation Approaches to Determining HGT, Duplications, and Losses in Gene Trees / Olga K. Kamneva, Naomi L. Ward
    Chapter 10. Multi-Locus Sequence Typing and the Gene-by-Gene Approach to Bacterial Classification and Analysis of Population Variation / Alison J. Cody, Julia S. Bennett, Martin C.J. Maiden
    Chapter 11. Multi-locus Sequence Analysis: Taking Prokaryotic Systematics to the Next Level / Xiaoying Rong, Ying Huang
    Chapter 12. Bacterial Typing and Identification By Genomic Analysis of 16S-23S rRNA Intergenic Transcribed Spacer (ITS) Sequences / Volker Gürtler, Gangavarapu Subrahmanyam, Malathi Shekar, Biswajit Maiti, Indrani Karunasagar
    Chapter 13. MALDI-TOF Mass Spectrometry Applied to Classification and Identification of Bacteria / Peter Schumann, Thomas Maier
    Chapter 14. Continuing Importance of the “Phenotype” in the Genomic Era / Peter Kämpfer
    Index.
    Digital Access ScienceDirect 2014
  • Digital
    Satoru Takeda, editor.
    Summary: This book offers a highly informative guide to forceps devices and delivery techniques. Extensive figures and animations offer readers vivid insights into the fetus station, pelvis, and inserted forceps. The book covers normal presentation and abnormal rotation, presentation and attitudes, and especially focuses on the assessment of fetal descent. It discusses the problem with conventional fetal station, and explains the revised one based on the trapezoidal plane. Instrumental delivery is chosen in cases of worrisome fetal status, protracted labor, or maternal fatigue. Forceps can provide a greater pulling power than vacuum extraction, and the fetus can be delivered in a short time, though this technique calls for experience and technical proficiency. The book argues that in order to ensure safe and reliable forceps delivery, assessment of the fetal station and the site of the largest fetal head circumference is critical. The book offers a new and indispensable reference guide for all obstetricians, not only for residents, but also for all experienced professionals involved in the training of beginners, and even for those using vacuum extraction who would like to assess the fetus more objective and practically.
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Digital
    Whitney Casares.
    Contents:
    Front Cover
    Title Page
    Copyright
    Dedication
    Contents
    Preface
    Acknowledgments
    Chapter 1. Preparing Your Mind
    Chapter 2. "Gearing" Up
    Chapter 3. Finding a Pediatrician
    Chapter 4. Taking Care of You and Your Partner
    Chapter 5. Finding a Child Care Provider
    Chapter 6. In the Hospital
    Chapter 7. What's Typical, What's Not
    Chapter 8. Setting Yourself Up for Breastfeeding Success
    Chapter 9. At Home in the First Few Weeks
    Self-care Guides and Newborn Care Resources
    Index
    Back Cover
    Digital Access AAP ebooks 2020
  • Print
    Hemprova Ghosh McDonald ; editorial assistance of Janya Martin.
    Contents:
    v.1. Mammary carcinoma, basal and squamous cell carcinoma, etc.
    v.2. Cardiac muscle
    v.3. New discoveries in hematology
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Books: General Collection (Downstairs)
    QP92 .M135
    3
  • Digital
    Juarez M. Avelar, editor.
    Contents:
    History of abdominoplasty
    Anatomy of the abdominal panniculus Pre-operatory evaluation of the abdomen and surgical planning
    New umbilical region
    Its creation during abdominoplasty
    Abdominoplasty
    Personal technique
    Preservation of perforator vessels during abdominoplasty
    Miniabdominoplasty
    Personal technique
    Abdominoplasty combined with liposuction
    Upper abdominoplasty
    Lower abdominoplasty
    Full abdominoplasty
    The use of surgical principles to Improve rhytidoplasty Procedure
    Preservation of the future pedicle of the auricle to improve ear reconstruction
    Abdominoplasty to improve body contouring
    Abdominoplasty combined with lipo injection to improve body contouring
    Abdominoplasty associated with superficial liposuction: selection of patients and indications
    Medial tight lifting
    Aesthetic plastic surgery of the axila
    Plication of the medial infraumbilical wall to reduce the final surgical scar of abdominoplasty
    Plication of the supraumbilical abdominal wall during abdominoplasty
    Robotic procedure for plication of the musculo-aponeurotic abdominal wall
    "H" shaped plication of the aponeurotic wall on abdominoplasty
    Abdominoplasty combined with mastoplasty
    Secondary abdominoplasty
    Combination of liposuction with abdominoplasty for breast reconstruction
    Complications during and after abdominoplasty.
    Digital Access Springer 2016
  • Digital
    João Manuel R.S. Tavares, Paulo Rui Fernandes, editors.
    Summary: This book gathers selected, extended and revised contributions to the 15th International Symposium on Computer Methods in Biomechanics and Biomedical Engineering (CMBBE2018), and the 3rd Conference on Imaging and Visualization, which took place on 26-29 March, 2018, in Lisbon, Portugal. The respective chapters highlight cutting-edge methods, e.g. new algorithms, image analysis techniques, and multibody modeling methods; and new findings obtained by applying them in biological and/or medical contexts. Original numerical studies, Monte Carlo simulations, FEM analyses and reaction-diffusion models are described in detail, together with intriguing new applications. The book offers a timely source of information for biologists, engineers, applied mathematicians and clinical researchers working on multidisciplinary projects, and is also intended to foster closer collaboration between these groups.

    Contents:
    Intro; Preface; Contents; About the Editors; The Impact of Patches on Blood Flow Disorders In Carotid Artery; 1 Introduction; 2 Methods; 2.1 Mathematical Analysis; 2.2 Summary; 2.3 Numerical Analysis; 3 Results; 4 Conclusions; References; Numerical Study of Carotid Bifurcation Angle Effect on Blood Flow Disorders; 1 Introduction; 2 Methods; 3 Results; 4 Conclusions; References; Evaluating the Effect of Tissue Anisotropy on Brain Tumor Growth Using a Mechanically Coupled Reaction-Diffusion Model; 1 Introduction; 2 Materials and Methods; 2.1 Mathematical Model; 2.2 Simulation Domain 2.2 Material Constitutive Modeling3 Results and Discussion; 4 Conclusions; References; New Techniques for Combined FEM-Multibody Anatomical Simulation; 1 Introduction; 2 Reduced Coordinate Modeling; 2.1 Reduced Dynamics; 2.2 Application to an FEM Tongue Model; 2.3 Application to an FEM Foot Model; 3 Attaching Points and Frames to Deformable Bodies; 3.1 Point Attachments; 3.2 Frame Attachments; 4 Skinning and Embedded Meshes; 4.1 Skinning for Modeling the Human Airway; 4.2 Mesh Embedding Applied to Modeling the Masseter; 5 Conclusion; References 2.3 Simulation Assumptions2.4 Analysis; 3 Results; 4 Discussion; 5 Conclusion; References; Prediction of Stress and Strain Patterns from Load Rearrangement in Human Osteoarthritic Femur Head: Finite Element Study with the Integration of Muscular Forces and Friction Contact; 1 Introduction; 2 Methods; 3 Results and Discussion; 4 Conclusions; References; Numerical Simulation of the Deployment Process of a New Stent Produced by Ultrasonic-Microcasting: The Role of the Balloon's Constitutive Modeling; 1 Introduction; 2 Description of the Methodology; 2.1 Geometry 2.6 Modeling Cell Deformation During Cancer Metastasis3 Discussion; 4 Conclusion; References; Estimation of 6 Degrees-of-Freedom Accelerations from Head Impact Telemetry System Outputs for Computational Modeling; 1 Introduction; 2 Methods; 3 Results; 4 Discussion; 5 Conclusion; References; Physiological Cybernetics: Methods and Applications; 1 Introduction: Physiological Cybernetics; 2 Homeostasis; 3 Modeling and Control; 4 Case Studies; 5 Conclusions; References; New Computational Solution to Compute the Uptake Index from 99mTc-MDP Bone Scintigraphy Images; 1 Introduction Computational Cell-Based Modeling and Visualization of Cancer Development and Progression1 Introduction; 1.1 Mathematical Modeling on Various Scales; 1.2 Mathematical Modeling from a View of Cancer Development and Progression; 1.3 Mathematical Modeling from a View of Identified Cancer Types; 1.4 Mathematical Modeling from a View of Model Types; 2 Mathematical Concepts; 2.1 Applications; 2.2 Modeling Tumor Initiation; 2.3 Modeling of T-cells Migration in Pancreatic Cancer; 2.4 Modeling Angiogenesis; 2.5 Modeling of Durotaxis-Driven Migration of Cancer Cells in Metastasis
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Print
    [edited by] Silvano Arieti and Gerard Chrzanowski.
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Stored offsite. Please request print.
    RC454 .A68
    2
  • Print
    edited by Saul I. Harrison and John F. McDermott, Jr.
    Contents:

    v. 1. Developmental considerations.--
    v. 2. Deviations in development.
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Books: General Collection (Downstairs)
    RJ499 .N44
    2
  • Digital
    Maurizio Pompili, Roger McIntyre, Andrea Fiorillo, Norman Sartorius, editors.
    Summary: This book focuses on hot issues faced by clinicians in everyday clinical practice, and provides in-depth analyses of both met and unmet needs in the management of psychiatric disorders. It has been repeatedly shown that the needs of patients, relatives, the community at large and those of the governmental bodies only partially overlap. For instance, patients in their families are more concerned about quality of life, treatment, autonomy, and independent living; whereas governmental stakeholders are typically more concerned about relapse prevention and reduction of hospitalizations. As such, a volume bridging the gap between theoretical notions and practical understanding of patients untreated aspects of their psychiatric disorders is much needed. Instead of focusing on traditional descriptions of psychopathology and diagnostic criteria, the volume guides readers to core problems for each topic, taking into account new approaches in the classification of mental disorders as proposed by DSM-5. It elaborates on much-debated controversial problems such as the assessment and treatment of psychomotor agitation, and non-adherence to treatment that impacts on the psychiatric context. With its unique approach, this volume appeals to anyone with an interest in the field, including researchers, clinicians, and trainees.

    Contents:
    Foreword
    Preface.-1.Unmet needs in modern psychiatric practice.-2.Unmet needs in patients with schizophrenia
    3.The Unmet Needs for Major Depressive Disorder.-4.Unmet Needs in Psychiatry: Bipolar Depression.-5.Unmet needs in mixed-states.-6.Unmet needs in personality disorders.-7.Unmet needs in the assessment and treatment of psychomotor agitation.-8.Unmet needs in the management of suicide risk.-9.Unmet needs in education in psychiatry.-10.Unmet needs of resident's.-11.Unmet needs in youth mental health: transforming models of care to improve outcomes.-12.Classification systems of mental disorders
    where did we go wrong?.-13.Stigma: an old unmet need in psychiatric practice.
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Print
    by Mark Mathieu ; with contributions from Christopher-Paul Milne, George Mills, Rachel Meyers ... [and seven others]
    Digital Access R2Library [2021]
  • Digital
    Jaime Gómez-Ramirez.
    Summary: The purpose of the book is to advance in the understanding of brain function by defining a general framework for representation based on category theory. The idea is to bring this mathematical formalism into the domain of neural representation of physical spaces, setting the basis for a theory of mental representation, able to relate empirical findings, uniting them into a sound theoretical corpus. The innovative approach presented in the book provides a horizon of interdisciplinary collaboration that aims to set up a common agenda that synthesizes mathematical formalization and empirical procedures in a systemic way. Category theory has been successfully applied to qualitative analysis, mainly in theoretical computer science to deal with programming language semantics. Nevertheless, the potential of category theoretic tools for quantitative analysis of networks has not been tackled so far. Statistical methods to investigate graph structure typically rely on network parameters. Category theory can be seen as an abstraction of graph theory. Thus, new categorical properties can be added into network analysis and graph theoretic constructs can be accordingly extended in more fundamental basis. By generalizing networks using category theory we can address questions and elaborate answers in a more fundamental way without waiving graph theoretic tools. The vital issue is to establish a new framework for quantitative analysis of networks using the theory of categories, in which computational neuroscientists and network theorists may tackle in more efficient ways the dynamics of brain cognitive networks. The intended audience of the book is researchers who wish to explore thevalidity of mathematical principles in the understanding of cognitive systems. All the actors in cognitive science: philosophers, engineers, neurobiologists, cognitive psychologists, computer scientists etc. are akin to discover along its pages new unforeseen connections through the development of concepts and formal theories described in the book. Practitioners of both pure and applied mathematics e.g., network theorists, will be delighted with the mapping of abstract mathematical concepts in the terra incognita of cognition.

    Contents:
    Research tools and paradigms
    State of the Art: Mathematical approaches in brain science
    The Categorical Imperative: Category theory in Cognitive and Brain Science
    Elementary principles in cognitive systems modeling
    The shift towards structure
    A general framework for representation
    Towards a Theory of Brain Structure and Function
    A theory of hippocampus structure and function based on Category Theory
    From Cells to Memories. A Categorical Approach
    Epilogue.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    Suresh Mathivanan, Pamali Fonseka, Christina Nedeva, Ishara Atukorala, editors.
    Summary: The field of extracellular vesicles (EVs) has progressed immensely in recent times with evidences highlighting their importance in physiology and pathology. This book entails extensive reflective literature on many subtypes of EVs including exosomes, exomeres, ectosomes, apoptotic vesicles, bacterial EVs and fungal EVs. The book further discusses the biogenesis and secretion of these EVs, detailing the biological pathways and proteins involved. Research investigating the biological functions of EVs is rapidly increasing and the current knowledge around their role in progression of diseases such as cancer, neurodegeneration and metabolic disorders is discussed in multiple chapters. The implications of EVs in intercellular communication and the significance of biologically active cargo carried within these EVs are further examined. Moreover, the numerous applications of EVs in diagnostics and treatment of diseases are reviewed in detail, particularly their potential as biomarkers and drug delivery vehicles. Taken together, this book is a compilation of the key implications of EVs that are secreted by virtually all cell types. Readers will gain a perspective into the biology, functions and applications of EVs and their constantly evolving knowledge base.

    Contents:
    Intro
    Preface
    EVs: A Diverse Community
    Functional Role and Clinical Implications of EVs
    Contents
    About the Editors
    Part I: Subtypes, Biogenesis, and Secretion of Extracellular Vesicles
    Chapter 1: Introduction to the Community of Extracellular Vesicles
    Introduction
    Subtypes of EVs
    Molecular Composition of EVs
    Isolation and Characterisation of EVs
    Concluding Remarks
    References
    Chapter 2: Biogenesis of Extracellular Vesicles
    Introduction: Extracellular Vesicles
    Large Oncosomes
    Apoptotic Bodies
    Migrasomes
    Ectosomes/Shedding Microvesicles ApoBDs in Cell Clearance
    ApoBDs in Intercellular Communication
    Intercellular Communication Through DNA as Cargos
    Intercellular Communication Through RNA as Cargos
    Intercellular Communication Through Proteins as Cargos
    Intercellular Communication Through Pathogen-Derived Material
    Concluding Remarks
    References
    Chapter 5: Exomeres: A New Member of Extracellular Vesicles Family
    Introduction
    Exomeres
    Proteomic Cargo of Exomeres
    Isolation of Exomeres
    Concluding Remarks
    References
    Part II: Functional Role and Clinical Implications of Extracellular Vesicles Chapter 4: Apoptotic Bodies: Mechanism of Formation, Isolation and Functional Relevance
    Introduction
    Mechanisms of Apoptotic Cell Disassembly
    Step 1: Plasma Membrane Blebbing
    Step 2: Apoptotic Membrane Protrusion Formation
    Pannexin 1
    Plexin B2
    Cytoskeleton
    Vesicle Trafficking
    Step 3: ApoBD Fragmentation
    Maintenance of Plasma Membrane Integrity to Prevent Premature Lysis
    Methods of ApoBD Isolation
    Differential Centrifugation
    Filtration
    Fluorescence-Activated Cell Sorting (FACS)
    Validation of ApoBDs
    Functional Significance of ApoBD Formation Chapter 6: Pathogenesis Mediated by Bacterial Membrane Vesicles
    Introduction
    What are Bacterial Membrane Vesicles?
    The Study of BMVs
    Isolation and Purification
    Characterisation & Analysis
    BMV Biogenesis
    Mechanisms of OMV Biogenesis
    Mechanisms of MV Biogenesis
    Cargo Packaging into BMVs
    Physiological Roles of BMVs
    Physiological Roles of OMVs Produced by Gram-Negative Bacteria
    Biofilm Formation
    Nutrient Acquisition
    Competition and Predation
    Bacterial Defence
    Horizontal Gene Transfer
    Physiological Roles of MVs Produced by Gram-Positive Bacteria Exosomes
    ESCRT-Dependent Pathway of ILV Biogenesis
    ESCRT-Independent Pathway of ILV Biogenesis
    Role of Tetraspanins in Biogenesis of Exosomes
    Secretion of Exosomes
    Exomeres
    Concluding Remarks
    References
    Chapter 3: The Role of Post-Translational Modifications in Targeting Protein Cargo to Extracellular Vesicles
    Introduction
    Phosphorylation
    Glycosylation
    Ubiquitination
    SUMOylation
    Oxidation
    Citrullination
    ISGylation
    Myristoylation
    Palmitoylation
    Concluding Remarks
    References
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    César Carriazo, María José Cosentino, editors.
    Summary: This book updates the reader about the latest bio-mechanical concepts underlying keratoconus diagnosis and the various treatment alternatives: from conventional alternatives with a real cost/benefit description, to some innovative alternatives that have come to the fore in recent years. It discusses the latest software and technology utilized in keratoconus diagnosis as well as the more innovative surgical techniques used to treat keratoconus. New Frontiers for the Treatment of Keratoconus represents an essential book for ophthalmologists and specialists in cornea and refractive surgery who are looking to position themselves at the forefront of the diagnosis and treatment of keratoconus.

    Contents:
    Introduction
    New features in corneal biomechanics
    Corneal Topography, corneal tomography and epithelial maps
    Histopathological findings in keratoconus
    The last developments in keratoconus diagnosis
    Intracorneal rings to treat keratoconus
    Phakic intraocular lens to treat keratoconus
    Stromal regeneration
    Excimer laser to treat keratoconus
    Corneal remodeling to treat keratoconus.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    Jean Decety, Yves Christen, editors.
    Summary: Traditionally, neuroscience has considered the nervous system as an isolated entity and largely ignored influences of the social environments in which humans and many animal species live. However, there is mounting evidence that the social environment affects behavior across species, from microbes to humans. This book brings together scholars who work with animal and human models of social behavior to discuss the challenges and opportunities in this interdisciplinary academic field.

    Contents:
    Preface
    Robin Dunbar: What's so social about the social brain?
    Steve Rogers: The neurobiology of a transformation from asocial to social life during swarm formation in desert locusts
    Jakob Bro-Jorgensen: Social neuroscience and the study of animal communication.- Jay J. van Bavel et al.: The group mind: the pervasive influence of social identity on cognition
    Sarah Blaffer Hrdy: Development and social selection in the emergence of "emotionally modern" humans
    Mark van Vugt: On faces, gazes, votes, and followers: evolutionary psychological and social neuroscience approaches to leadership
    Craig Ferris: Using awake animal imaging to understand neural circuits of emotion: studies ranging from maternal care to aggression
    Jean Decety: The neuro-evolution of empathy and caring for others: why it matters for morality.- Beatrice de Gelder and Ruud Hortensius: The many faces of the emotional body
    Kiley J. Hamlin: The origins of human morality: complex socio-moral evaluations by preverbal infants
    Ilanit Gordon: Can oxytocin improve core brain and behavioral features of Autism Spectrum Disorders in children?
    Jack van Honk et al.: Testosterone and dominance in humans: behavioral and brain mechanisms
    Subject index.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    Amitava Rakshit, Harikesh Bahadur Singh, Anand Kumar Singh, Uma Shankar Singh, Leonardo Fraceto, editors.
    Summary: Using accessible farming practices to meet the growing demands on agriculture is likely to result in more intense competition for natural resources, increased greenhouse gas emissions, and further deforestation and land degradation, which will in turn produce additional stress in the soil-water-plant-animal continuum. Stress refers to any unfavorable force or condition that inhibits customary functioning in plants. Concurrent manifestations of different stresses (biotic and abiotic) are very frequent in the environment of plants, which consequently reduces yield. Better understanding stress not only changes our perspective on the current environment, but can also bring a wealth of benefits, like improving sustainable agriculture and human beings living standards. Innovative systems are called for that protect and enhance the natural resource base, while increasing productivity via 'holistic approaches, such as agroecology, agro-forestry, climate-smart agriculture and conservation agriculture, which also incorporate indigenous and traditional knowledge. The book 'New Frontiers in Stress Management for Durable Agriculture' details the current state of knowledge and highlights scientific advances concerning novel aspects of plant biology research on stress, biotic and abiotic stress responses, as well as emergent amelioration and reclamation technologies to restore normal functioning in agroecology.

    Contents:
    Intro
    Preface
    Acknowledgement
    Contents
    Editors and Contributors
    About the Editors
    Contributors
    Part I: Abiotic Stress Response in Plants and Approaches Towards Mitigation
    1: Physiological Responses and Resilience of Plants to Climate Change
    1.1 Introduction
    1.2 Climate Change and Limiting Factors for Crop Development
    1.3 Physiological Responses of Plants to Climate Change
    1.4 Resilience of Plant to Climate Change
    1.4.1 Avoidance Mechanism
    1.4.2 Physiological Mechanisms
    1.4.2.1 Phytohormonal Modulation
    1.4.2.2 ROS Scavenging Systems 1.4.2.3 Signal Sensing, Transduction and Stress Response
    1.4.2.4 Heat-Shock Proteins (HSPs)
    1.5 Approaches Towards Improved Understanding of Resilience
    1.6 Intervention for Expanding Resilience
    1.7 Conclusion
    References
    2: Allelopathy: Implications in Natural and Managed Ecosystems
    2.1 Introduction
    2.2 Allelopathy: Basics of the Discipline
    2.3 Mechanism of Allelopathy
    2.4 Role of Allelopathy in Natural Ecosystem
    2.5 Role of Allelopathy in Managed Ecosystem
    2.6 Prospective and Challenges in Allelopathic Research
    2.7 Conclusions
    References 3: Effect of Drought Stress on Crop Production
    3.1 Introduction
    3.2 Morphological Effect
    3.2.1 Growth
    3.2.2 Yield
    3.3 Physiological Effects
    3.3.1 Association Between Water Availability and Nutrient Requirement
    3.3.2 Effect on Photosynthesis
    3.3.3 Assimilate Partitioning
    3.4 Drought Stress Causing Oxidative Damage
    3.5 Conclusion and Future Prospects
    References
    4: Impact of Salinity Stress in Crop Plants and Mitigation Strategies
    4.1 Introduction
    4.2 Effect of Salinity on Crop Plants
    4.2.1 Effect on Seed Germination and Growth 4.2.2 Effects on Photosynthesis
    4.2.3 Effect on Water Relations
    4.2.4 Effect on Lipids and Proteins
    4.2.5 Effect on Antioxidative Machinery
    4.2.6 Effect on Yield of Crop Plants
    4.3 Mitigation Strategies for Salinity
    4.3.1 Salinity Mitigation by Employing Proper Management Practices
    4.3.2 Salinity Mitigation Using Bacteria and Mycorrhizal Fungi
    4.3.3 Mitigation of Salinity Stress by Exploiting Plant Salinity Tolerance and Transgenics
    References
    5: Sustainable Production of Rice Under Sodicity Stress Condition
    5.1 Introduction 5.2 Sodicity Trend Around the Globe and India
    5.3 Sodicity as a Property
    5.4 Sodicity as a Constrain in Rice Production
    5.5 Strategies for Rice Production Under Sodicity
    5.5.1 Vegetative Bioremediation
    5.5.2 Incorporating Inorganic Fertilizers by Organic Amendments
    5.5.3 Reutilisation of Drainage Water
    5.5.3.1 Cyclic Reuse
    5.5.3.2 Reuse After Blending
    5.5.3.3 Sequential Reuse
    5.5.4 Molecular Approach Towards Sustainable Rice Production Under Sodicity
    5.6 Future Prospects Towards Sustainable Rice Production
    References
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    Carlo V. Bellieni.
    Summary: This book illustrates why a holistic approach is important in Pediatric Palliative Care (PPC). Readers will learn this approach has a horizonta axis, featuring the patients mental and physical needs, as well as their environments. It has also a "vertical axis" the evolutive changes of the patients throughout their development and their illness, their aspirations and fears. An evolutive (or dynamic) approach is mandatory. Each child/parent has a different experience of illness and a different path to recovery that is influenced by their age, gender, culture, but also by the state of their grief. To take care of them, we need to know the state of the subjects we are dealing with throughout their evolution in age (children) and in sorrow (both children and parents). Jungs and Piaget schemes will be of support. This book also helps caregivers to know what ethics is. It teaches a new insight on the word ethics not a series of principles or norms, but an approach based on humanistic virtues. Two criteria will be proposed to this aim: an ethics based on the refusal of inauthentic behaviors (or those behaviors that are copies of animals or machines) and a new criterion that even children have some ethical duties (not based on rules, but on naturally acceptance that their sight is modulated by the presence of their parents and friends). This ethical approach is explained to caregivers in a practical mode, ready for clinical exigencies. This book is also unique because it demonstrates that PPC also involves the true care of caregivers. It will explain how to approach, measure and overcome caregivers burn-out. Special attention is devoted to the approach to babies and childrens pharmacological and non-pharmacological analgesia and sedation. Pain assessment methods will be illustrated, as well as the development of a PPC web on the territory. This text includes perinatal and neonatal PPC. The book will be of valuable support to all those intensivists, pediatricians, nurses, psychologists, physiotherapists and healthcare professionals working in PPC units.
    Digital Access Springer 2022
  • Digital
    edited by Kazuto Masamoto, Hajime Hirase and Katsuya Yamada.
    Contents:
    Part I: A physiological basis of neurovascular coupling. Neurogenic control of parenchymal arterioles in the cerebral cortex / H. Hotta
    Involvement of astrocytes in neurovascular communication / M. Nuriya, H. Hirase
    Vascular potassium channels in NVC / K. Yamada / Part II: Methodology for measurements of brain circulation. Bridging macroscopic and microscopic methods for the measurements of cerebral blood flow: Toward finding the determinants in maintaining the CBF homeostasis / I. Kanno, K. Masamoto
    New horizons in neurometabolic and neurovascular coupling from calibrated fMRI / C.Y. Shu, B.G. Sanganahalli, D. Coman, P. Herman, F. Hyder
    Submillimeter-resolution fMRI: Toward understanding local neural processing / M. Fukuda, A.J. Poplawsky, S.-G. Kim
    Hemodynamic signals in fNIRS / Y. Hoshi / Part III: Plastic changes in neurovascular coupling. Mechanisms of cellular plasticity in cerebral perivascular region / N. Egawa, J. Lok, K. Arai
    Development and pathological changes of neurovascular unit regulated by hypoxia response in the retina / T. Kurihara
    Neurovascular coupling and energy metabolism in the developing brain / M. Kozberg, E. Hillman
    Exercise and cerebrovascular plasticity / T. Nishijima, I. Torres-Aleman, H. Soya
    Neurovascular coupling: what next? / K. Masamoto, H. Hirase, K. Yamada, I. Kanno.
    Digital Access ScienceDirect 2016
  • Digital
    Yasser El Miedany, editor.
    Summary: This book provides a review of the most recent data on osteoporosis and bone health, presenting a vision of diagnosis and management for the year 2021 and beyond. It covers all pertinent aspects of bone health including diagnosis, fracture prevention, optimized practice, impaired orthostasis, and falls. The book examines recent developments in therapeutics, including goal-directed therapy, individualizing therapy, sequential and combined therapies, pharmaceuticals, and anabolic vs. antiresorptive therapy. In addition, it provides an in-depth overview of osteoporosis and bone health in complex patients, covering Duchene dystrophy, renal failure, periodontal diseases, and steroid-induced osteoporosis as well as considerations for pediatric populations and men. New Horizons in Osteoporosis Management is an essential resource for physicians and related professionals, residents, fellows, graduate students and nurses in rheumatology, endocrinology, radiology, pediatrics, primary care, and internal medicine. .

    Contents:
    Part I. Bone Health: Towards Better Bones
    1. Bone Health and Osteoporosis
    2. Recognizing People at Highest Risk of Fracture
    3. T-score as an Indicator of Fracture Risk
    Part II. Osteoporosis Diagnosis: Clinicians Guide
    4. Current Imaging Techniques
    5. The Challenges of Diagnosing Osteoporosis
    6. The Role of the Radiographer in DXA Scan Service
    7. Pitfalls in DXA Scanning
    Part III. Fracture Prevention
    8. Osteoporosis Update for Primary Care Physicians
    9. Fracture Liaison Service
    10. Imminent Fracture Risk
    Part IV. Bone Health: Towards Optimized Practice
    11. Guidelines for Management of Osteoporosis
    12. The Role of Pharmacist in Osteoporosis Treatment
    13. A Treatment Gap in Osteoporosis Management
    14. Denosumab Vs Bisphosphonates
    15. Romosozumab: Rebuilding the Bone Strength
    16. Recent Trends in Osteoporosis Management
    17. Optimizing Sequential and Combined Osteoporosis Therapy
    Part V. Bone Health: Osteoporosis Treatment
    18. Goal Directed Therapy
    19. Long Term Osteoporosis Management
    20. Complications of Osteoporosis Therapy
    Part VI. Bone Health in Complex Patients
    21. Pediatric Osteoporosis
    22. Osteoporosis in Duchenne dystrophy
    23. Osteoporosis in Renal Failure
    24. Steroid Induced Osteoporosis
    25. Osteoporosis in Men
    26. Periodontal Diseases
    27. Hormone Antagonist Therapy
    Part VII. Bone Health, Falls, and Impaired Orthostasis
    28. Disequilibrium
    29. Dysautonomia
    30. Sarcopenia
    31. Advances in the Assessment and Management of Falls.
    Digital Access Springer 2022
  • Digital
    volume editors, Kazunori Toyoda, Craig S. Anderson, Stephan A. Mayer.
    Contents:
    Epidemiology of intracerebral haemorrhage / Poon, M.T.C., Bell, S.M., Al-Shahi Salman, R.
    Emergency imaging of intracerebral haemorrhage / Alobeidi, F., Aviv, R.
    Evidence-based critical care of intracerebral hemorrhage : an overview / Küppers-Tiedt, L., Steiner, T.
    New insights into blood pressure control for intracerebral haemorrhage / Manning, L., Robinson, T.G.
    Emergency reversal strategies for anticoagulation and platelet disorders / Levi, M.
    Reperfusion-related intracerebral hemorrhage / Hayakawa, M.
    Cerebral microbleeds : detection, associations, and clinical implications / Yakushiji, Y.
    New insights into nonvitamin K antagonist oral anticoagulants' reversal of intracerebral hemorrhage / Yasaka, M.
    Ultra-early hemostatic therapy for intracerebral hemorrhage : future directions / Wartenberg, K.E.
    Ventriculostomy and lytic therapy for intracerebral hemorrhage / Ziai, W.C., Nyquist, P., Hanley, D.F.
    Surgical craniotomy for intracerebral hemorrhage / Mendelow, A.D.
    New insights in minimally invasive surgery for intracerebral hemorrhage / Wang, W.-M., Jiang, C., Bai, H.-M.
    Surgical strategies for acutely ruptured arteriovenous malformations / Martinez, J.L., Macdonald, R.L.
    Prognosis and outcome of intracerebral haemorrhage / Moulin, S., Cordonnier, C.
    Digital Access Karger 2016
  • Digital/Print
    Michelle Alexander.
    Summary: "A tenth-anniversary edition of the iconic bestseller '"one of the most influential books of the 20 years," according to the Chronicle of Higher Education' with a new preface by the author. Seldom does a book have the impact of Michelle Alexander's The New Jim Crow. Since it was first published in 2010, it has been cited in judicial decisions and has been adopted in campus-wide and community-wide reads; it helped inspire the creation of the Marshall Project and the new $100 million Art for Justice Fund; it has been the winner of numerous prizes, including the prestigious NAACP Image Award; and it has spent nearly 250 weeks on the New York Times bestseller list. Most important of all, it has spawned a whole generation of criminal justice reform activists and organizations motivated by Michelle Alexander's unforgettable argument that "we have not ended racial caste in America; we have merely redesigned it." As the Birmingham News proclaimed, it is "undoubtedly the most important book published in this century about the U.S." Now, ten years after it was first published, The New Press is proud to issue a tenth-anniversary edition with a new preface by Michelle Alexander that discusses the impact the book has had and the state of the criminal justice reform movement today."--Provided by publisher.

    Contents:
    Preface to the Tenth Anniversary Edition
    Foreword / Cornel West
    The rebirth of caste
    The lockdown
    The color of justice
    The cruel hand
    The new Jim Crow
    The fire this time.
    Digital Access EBSCO 2020
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    HV9950 .A437 2020
    1
  • Digital
    Pascale Cossart, Institut Pasteur, Paris, France.
    Summary: "Microbiology has undergone radical changes over the past few decades and ushered in an exciting new era in science. Microbes, specifically bacteria, are incredibly diverse: some are associated with disease and many others are essential for health. Bacteria are highly complex life forms able to communicate with each other and form mutually beneficial relationships with organisms they colonize. In plants, humans, and other animals, communities of microbes form biofilms and microbiota that use incredibly sophisticated strategies to influence their environment. The study of bacterial immune systems has led to a revolution: the development of the CRISPR/Cas9 system, a precise tool for editing DNA whose usefulness we are just beginning to imagine. Bacteria in both health and disease are at the forefront of global challenges we face today. They evolve to resist the antibiotics used against them, but they can also be used to modify mosquitoes that serve as carriers of diseases like malaria. As we learn about the complex and vitally important intestinal microbiome, it unlocks secrets to good health and potential treatments for problems such as obesity"--Provided by publisher.

    Contents:
    1. Bacteria: many friends, few enemies
    2. Bacteria: highly organized unicellular organisms
    3. The RNA revolution
    4. From the CRISPR defense system to the CRISPR/Cas9 method for modifying genomes
    5. Antibiotic resistance
    6. Biofilms: when bacteria gather together
    7. How bacteria communicate: chemical language and quorum sensing
    8. When bacteria kill each other
    9. Human-animal symbioses: the microbiotas
    10. Bacterium-plant symbioses: microbiotas of plants
    11. Endosymbiotic relationships
    12. Pathogenic bacteria, major scourges, and new diseases
    13. The multiple strategies of pathogenic bacteria
    14. Pathogenic bacteria in insects
    15. Plants and their pathogenic bacteria
    16. New visions in infecction defense
    17. Bacteria as tools for research
    18. Bacteria: old and new health tools
    19. Bacteria as environmental tools
    Conclusion
    Appendix: Major figues in microbiology.
    Digital Access Wiley 2018
  • Digital
    Pedro Luiz Mangabeira Albernaz, Francisco Zuma e Maia, Sergio Carmona, Renato Valério Rodrigues Cal, Guillermo Zalazar.
    Summary: Neurotology is a branch of medicine that focuses on diagnosing and treating neurological conditions of the inner ear and related structures. There have been many recent advances in neurotology that have been published in general medicine, otolaryngology and neurology journals. This comprehensive book will aggregate this information to provide a more complete picture of the state of the field and will include the authors' own clinical experience. There is a recent marked increase in interest in neurotology, manifested by the clinical experiences and research-publication work of otolaryngologists, neurologists, neuro-ophtalmologists, audiologists and physiotherapists. As a result, this will be a completely state-of-the-art work that includes all up-to-date neurophysiological data related to the vestibular system. It has been estimated that 10% of patients that present at an emergency clinic have vestibular disorders, including vertigo, and these disorders are frequently a cause of falls in elderly patients. On the other hand, many physicians treat their patients with vertigo with vestibular blockers, which treat the symptoms but do not cure the disorders. We feel that it is important to supply a source of information on the vestibular system and balance disorders, and this title will do that in a comprehensive manner.

    Contents:
    Introduction
    1. Anatomy and Clinical Physiology of the Organs of Equilibrium
    2. The Role of the Clinical History in Neurotology
    3. An Introduction to Vestibular Disorders
    4. The Bedside Tests: Practical Key Strategies to the Diagnosis of Vestibular and Oculomotor Disorders
    5. Clinical Evaluation of the Vestibular System: The Vestibular Lab Tests
    6. The Head Impulse Tests
    7. The Role of Audiology in Clinical Neurotology
    8. The Vestibular Syndromes
    9. Menière's Disease
    10. Vestibular Migraine
    11. Benign Paroxysmal Positional Vertigo
    12. Bilateral Vestibulopathy
    13. Ataxia
    14. Functional Vestibular Disorders
    15. Glucose, Insulin and Inner Ear Pathology
    16. Surgical Treatment of Vestibular Disorders.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Print
    Melissa McConaghy.
    Summary: Exercise cannot be underestimated for its role in slowing Parkinson's down. This book introduces the seven key concepts to help you get the most out of your exercise program, as well as easy strategies and hints to keep you motivated. Based on cutting edge research and tested extensively by Australian physiotherapists, this exercise program has been designed to bring out your inner warrior - your PD Warrior! The PD Warrior philosophy is that exercise, education, community, and a life-long commitment to fighting the symptoms of Parkinson's can help you develop a greater state of physical, mental, and social wellbeing.
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Books: General Collection (Downstairs)
    RC350.E85 M45 2015
    1
  • Digital
    Giovanni Rinaldi, editor.
    Summary: "This book provides innovative practical suggestions regarding the production and management of medical records that are designed to address the inconsistencies and errors that have been highlighted especially in relation to national eHealth programs. Challenges and lessons that have emerged from the use of clinical information and the design of medical records are discussed, and principles underpinning the implementation of health IT are critically examined. New trends in the use of clinical data are explored in depth, with analysis of issues relating to integration and sharing of patient information, data visualization, big data analytics, and the requirements of modern electronic health records. The spirit pervading the book is one of co-production, in which the needs of practitioners are taken into account from the outset. Readers will learn the basic concepts of how clinical information emanating from the doctor-patient relationship can be effectively integrated with genetic and environmental data and analyzed by complex algorithms with the goal of improving medical decision making and patient care. The book, written by European experts and researchers, will be of interest to all stakeholders in the field, including doctors, technicians, and policy makers."--Back cover.
    Digital Access Springer 2017
  • Digital
    Theodore Tulchinsky, Elena A. Varavikova with Joan D. Bickford ; foreword by Jonathan Fielding.
    Summary: The book provides a unified approach to public health appropriate for all masters' level students and practitioners-specifically for courses in MPH programs, community health and preventive medicine programs, community health education programs, community health nursing programs.
    Digital Access ScienceDirect 2014
  • Digital
    Hajo Thermann ; translated by Jeremy Somerson.
    Contents:
    Achilles tendon procedures
    Lateral ankle ligament procedures
    Arthroscopy of the ankle joint
    Arthroscopy of the subtalar joint
    Metatarsophalangeal joint procedures
    Procedures for hindfoot axis deviations
    Tendon transfer for the planovalgus foot
    Forefoot surgery
    Ankle arthroplasty
    Aftercare protocols.
    Digital Access Springer 2017
  • Digital
    Solange Peters, Benjamin Besse, editor.
    Summary: This book provides an up-to-date review of current management techniques for Non-Small Cell Lung Cancer. It addresses all of the latest issues that have been raised by the discovery of oncogenic drivers and the improvement of diagnosis and therapeutic methods, including new radiotherapy techniques and anticancer strategies like immunotherapy. New strategies for patients with molecular alterations and the management of particular types of cases are also highlighted. Written by recognized experts in their field, the book represents a unique and valuable resource in the field of lung cancer, both for those currently in training and for those already in clinical or research practice.

    Contents:
    Preface
    Foreword
    Screening
    New Diagnostic Approaches
    PET and Staging Minimally Invasive (EBUS)
    Innovative Approaches in Early NSCLC
    Minimally Invasive Surgery for Early NSCLC
    Stereotaxic Radiotherapy in Localized Cancer
    How to Personalize Perioperative Chemotherapy in Early Cancer?
    New Approaches in Locally Advanced NSCLC
    Advances in Radiotherapy for Locally Advanced NSCLC
    Advances in Systemic Treatment for Locally Advanced NSCLC
    Surgery of Advanced Tumors
    New Approaches in Stage IV NSCLC
    How to Personalize Chemotherapy in Stage IV NSCLC?
    Supportive Care
    Molecular Subgroups
    Strategies in EGFR Mutated NSCLC Patients
    Strategies in ALK Rearranged NSCLC patients
    Strategies in KRAS mutated NSCLC Patients
    Strategies in Patients with Other Molecular Alterations
    New Approaches in Immunotherapy
    Management of Particular Cases
    Oligometastasis
    Bone Metastasis
    Brain Metastasis.
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Digital
    edited by Kim A. Heidenreich, University of Colorado, Anschutz Medical Campus, Aurora, CO, United States.
    Digital Access ClinicalKey 2017
  • Digital
    Piotr Rutkowski, Mario Mandalà, editors.
    Summary: This book provides a detailed overview of the activity and efficacy of new treatments and promising perspectives in the field of cutaneous malignancies. The first part of the book covers the basic molecular and immunological mechanisms. It then goes on to cover specific strategies in melanoma and non-melanoma skin cancers that, starting from the basic mechanisms, translate this information into clinical routine or translational research. This unique handbook comprises very practical structured descriptions of more than 10 new agents used in treatment of melanomas and skin carcinomas together with biological background of their mechanisms of action. It provides structured and up-to-date information about all therapeutics in cutaneous malignancies, making it extremely useful in clinical practice, for clinicians that need timely and focused information. Prepared by a group of international authors from expert melanoma centres in Europe, the book provides knowledge distilled from the diverse perspectives of the contributing authors (pathologists, translational scientists and clinicians). This book is of interest to medical oncologists, oncological surgeons, dermatologists and immunologists as well as biologists and pharmacologists.

    Contents:
    Pathology of Melanoma and Skin Carcinomas
    Molecular Landscape Profile of Melanoma
    Molecular Landscape of Skin Carcinomas
    Immunological Features of Melanoma
    Dabrafenib and Trametinib
    Vemurafenib and Cobimetinib
    Encorafenib and Binimetinib
    Vismodegib
    Sonidegib
    Ipilimumab
    Nivolumab
    Pembrolizumab
    Talimogene Leharparepvec
    Perspectives of Immunotherapy in Advanced Melanoma Combinations and Sequencing
    Avelumab
    Cemiplimab
    Perspectives of Immunotherapy in Non-Melanoma Skin Cancers
    Mechanisms of Resistance to Targeted Therapies in Skin Cancer
    Mechanisms of Resistance to Immunotherapy
    Neoadjuvant and Adjuvant Therapy in Melanoma
    Adoptive Cell Therapy
    Immunotherapy in Immunosuppressed Patients
    New Therapies in Advanced Cutaneous Malignancies: Conclusions.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    Sylvie Pucheu, Kelly E. Radziwon, Richard Salvi, editors.
    Summary: This volume focuses on new molecular therapies that aim to prevent specific pathologies of the ear, like age-related hearing loss, noise-induced hearing loss and ototoxicity. The book discusses the regenerative capacity of hair cells in the inner ear, exploring the idea that hair cells capacity to regenerate appears "repressed" in adult mammals, but that it will be possible to re-activate regeneration with an appropriate therapeutic approach. The book provides an overview of inflammatory and immune cells in the cochlear lateral wall, the pathways involved in cochlear damage, and their potential as therapeutic targets. It also describes the significant advances in animal models which play an important role in revealing the underlying mechanisms and treatment for tinnitus and hyperacusis. Finally, the book describes two new automatic and robust measures to evaluate hearing loss and tinnitus in preclinical models.

    Contents:
    Intro
    Introduction
    Contents
    Lifestyle Intervention to Prevent Age-Related Hearing Loss: Calorie Restriction
    1 Introduction
    2 Effects of Age on Auditory Function
    3 Effects of Calorie Restriction on Aging
    3.1 Types of Calorie Restriction Regimens
    3.2 Effects of Calorie Restriction on Hearing Loss in Laboratory Animals
    4 Mechanisms Underlying the Beneficial Effects of CR on AHL
    4.1 Oxidative Stress
    4.2 Apoptosis
    4.3 mtDNA Mutations
    5 Conclusion
    References
    Noise-Induced Hearing Loss and Drug Therapy: Basic and Translational Science
    1 Introduction 1 Introduction
    1.1 Global Estimates and Impact of Hearing Impairment
    1.2 Categories of Hearing Loss
    1.3 Native HCs Regeneration Capacity in Mammals and Non-mammals
    2 Approaches to Regenerate HCs and SGNs
    2.1 Gene Therapy
    Cochlear Gene Therapy Vehicles
    2.2 Key Signaling Pathway Genes for HC Regeneration
    2.3 Atoh1-Based Gene Therapy
    2.4 Inactivation of Cell Cycle Inhibitors Based Gene Therapy
    2.5 Gene Therapy for SGN Regeneration
    3 Stem Cell Therapy
    4 Conclusion
    References 2 Cochlear Pathology
    2.1 Oxidative Stress
    2.2 Cochlear Blood Flow Changes
    2.3 Apoptotic Cell Death
    2.4 Mechanical Damage and Stereocilia Injury
    3 Noise-Induced Deafferentation
    3.1 Consequences of Synaptopathy
    4 Auditory Threshold Shift as a Measure of Noise-Induced Hearing Loss
    4.1 Extended High-Frequency Audiometry
    5 Effects of Noise on Suprathreshold Measures of Hearing
    5.1 Speech-in-Noise Testing
    6 Pharmaceutical Otoprotection from Noise-Induced Hearing Loss
    6.1 Antioxidants
    6.2 Steroid Therapy
    6.3 S-Ketamine and Glutamate Excitotoxicity 6.4 Cell Death and Stress Inhibitors
    7 Summary
    References
    Review of Ototoxic Drugs and Treatment Strategies for Reducing Hearing Loss
    1 Significance and Background
    2 Cisplatin Ototoxicity
    2.1 Entry of Cisplatin into the Cochlea
    2.2 Mechanisms Underlying Cisplatin Ototoxicity
    Increased Oxidative Stress
    Promoting Cellular Apoptosis
    Covalent Modification of DNA
    2.3 Pharmacogenomics of Cisplatin Ototoxicity
    2.4 Approaches to Treating Cisplatin Ototoxicity
    Relieving Oxidative Stress
    Targeting Cochlear Inflammation Drugs Targeting G Protein-Coupled Receptors for Treating Cisplatin Ototoxicity
    2.5 Ongoing Clinical Trials for Cisplatin Ototoxicity
    3 Cyclodextrin-Induced Hearing Loss
    4 Aminoglycosides
    4.1 Overview
    4.2 Studies Showing Hearing Loss
    4.3 Uptake of Aminoglycosides into the Cochlea
    4.4 Aminoglycoside Genetic Susceptibility
    4.5 Preventative Strategies for Ototoxicity
    Antioxidants
    Inhibition of Apoptosis
    Mechanoelectrical Transducer Channel Blockers
    5 Summary
    References
    Approaches to Regenerate Hair Cell and Spiral Ganglion Neuron in the Inner Ear
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    Jane Morris, Royal Cornhill Hospital, Caz Nahman, Nottinghamshire Healthcare NHS Trust.
    Summary: "An important item on the Workplan of FED (the Faculty of Eating Disorders Section of the Royal College of Psychiatrists) is the provision of high-quality training in the speciality. The New to Eating Disorders project has been based on two pioneering Scottish projects which had similar aims in different specialities: New to Forensic and New to CAMHS"-- Provided by publisher.
    Digital Access Cambridge 2020
  • Digital
    Fazl Q. Parray, Nisar Ahmad Chowdri, editors.
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    edited by Giancinto Bagetta and Carlo Nucci.
    Summary: New Trends in Basic and Clinical Research of Glaucoma: A Neurodegenerative Disease of the Visual System is the latest volume from Progress in Brain Research focusing on new trends in basic and clinical research of glaucoma. This established international series examines major areas of basic and clinical research within neuroscience, as well as emerging subfields.
    Digital Access
    Provider
    Version
    ScienceDirect
    ScienceDirect
  • Print
    Janelle L. Aby, MD.
    Contents:
    Chapter 1. Prenatal ultrasound
    Chapter 2. General characteristics
    Chapter 3. Head
    Chapter 4. Eyes
    Chapter 5. Ears
    Chapter 6. Nose
    Chapter 7. Jaw and mouth
    Chapter 8. Neck
    Chapter 9. Chest
    Chapter 10. Abdomen
    Chapter 11. Umbilicus
    Chapter 12. Genitalia
    Chapter 13. Extremities
    Chapter 14. Back
    Chapter 15. Skin
    Chapter 16. Body fluids & substances
    Appendixes
    Index.
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Books: General Collection (Downstairs)
    RJ255.5 .A49 2014
    1
  • Digital
    [edited by] Eduardo Bancalari ; consulting editor, Richard A. Polin.
    Contents:
    Molecular bases for lung development, injury, and repair / Shu Wu
    Perinatal events and their influence on lung development and injury / Suhas G. Kallapur and Alan H. Jobe
    Vascular development and neonatal pulmonary circulation / Robin H. Steinhorn
    The omics of the new BPD / Namasivayam Ambalavanan, Charitharth Vivek Lal and Vineet Bhandari
    Role of microbiome in lung injury / Namasivayam Ambalavanan and Rose M. Viscardi
    Definitions and diagnostic criteria of bronchopulmonary dysplasia : clinical and research implications / Eduardo Bancalari, Nelson Claure, Alan Jobe, Matthew Laughon
    Patent ductus arteriosus and the lung : acute effects and long-term consequences / Martin Kluckow, Eduardo Bancalari, Ilene R.S. Sosenko, Nelson Claure
    Ventilator-associated pneumonia / Thomas A. Hooven and Richard A. Polin
    Long-term pulmonary outcome of preterm infants / Lex Doyle and Jeanie Cheong
    Respiratory and cardiovascular support in the delivery room / Gary M. Weiner, Stuart B. Hooper, Peter G. Davis, Myra H. Wyckoff
    Noninvasive ventilation of preterm infants : an alternative to mechanical ventilation / Brett J. Manley
    Newer strategies for surfactant delivery / Peter Dargaville
    Respiratory control and apnea in premature infants / Richard J. Martin, Vidhi Shah and Juliann Di Fiore
    Oxygenation instability in the premature infant / Nelson Claure, Richard Martin, Juliann Di Fiore, Eduardo Bancalari
    Optimal oxygenation in extremely preterm infants / Waldemar A. Carlo
    Patient ventilator interaction / Nelson Claure, Eduardo Bancalari and Martin Keszler
    Pulmonary-cardiovascular interaction / Shahab Noori
    Ventilator strategies to reduce lung injury and duration of mechanical ventilation / Nelson Claure and Martin Keszler
    Automation of respiratory support / Nelson Claure, Martin Keszler and Eduardo Bancalari
    Pre and post natal steroids and pulmonary outcomes / Alan H. Jobe
    Cell based therapy for neonatal lung diseases / Karen C Young, Bernard Thebaud, Won Soon
    Management of the infant with severe bronchopulmonary dysplasia / Leif D. Nelin, Steven Abman and Howard Panitch.
    Digital Access ClinicalKey 2019
  • Digital
    Sarfaraz Jalil Baig, Deepraj Bhandarkar, Pallawi Priya, editors.
    Summary: The atlas focuses on the surgical steps of the latest hernia surgeries elucidated by labeled pictures. It aims to explain the technical aspects of hernia procedures. It includes images that are both graphic and intraoperative clinical photographs for better understanding. The book is written by international experts who have invented and pioneered the newer hernia procedures. Hernia surgery has evolved at a tremendous pace in the last decade. In the last decade, there has been a proliferation of more than 20 procedures in hernia repair, and they offer advantages compared to the older procedures in various clinical situations. Presently, the resources, including images of the newer procedures, are limited to the published journals. This book aims to fill this gap by providing technique based knowledge in an illustrated manner for learning newer hernia procedures. It is written in a succinct style. The book serves as a ready reference for practicing surgeons, minimal access surgeons and, resident surgeons, fellows.

    Contents:
    Extended Totally Extra Peritoneal (eTEP) Rives-Stoppa repair for lower midline hernia
    Extended Totally Extra Peritoneal (eTEP) Rives-Stoppa for upper midline/ Subxiphoid hernia
    Extended Totally Extra Peritoneal Transversus Abdominus Release (eTEP TAR) for midline hernia
    Extended Totally Extra Peritoneal (eTEP) reapir for Lumbar hernia
    Extended Totally Extra Peritoneal (eTEP) repair for Right iliac fossa incisional hernia
    Extended Totally Extra Peritoneal (eTEP) repair for subcostal hernia
    Extended Totally Extra Peritoneal (eTEP) repair for groin hernia
    Mini or Less Open Sublay (MILOS) and e-MILOS repair for midline hernias
    Transabdominal Retromuscular (TARM) approach to hernias
    Subcutaneous Onlay Approach (SCOLA) repair
    Pre aponeurotic Endoscopic Repair (REPA) and TESLA
    Endoscopic assisted Line alba reconstruction (ELAR)
    Transabdominal Retromuscular Umbilical Prosthetic repair (TARUP)
    Transabdominal Preperitoneal approach to ventral hernia (TAPP)
    Laparoscopic Intracorporeal Rectus Aponeuroplasty (LIRA)
    Open Transversus Abdominus Release (TAR)
    ACST and its modifications
    Peritoneal flap for midline hernias
    Peritoneal flap for lateral hernias
    Modified peritoneal flap
    STORM - parastomal hernia
    Abdominoplasty
    IPOM Plus - different suturing techniques
    PPOM.
    Digital Access Springer 2022
  • Digital
    [edited by] Michael G. Newman, Henry H. Takei, Perry R. Klokkevold, Fermin A Carranza.
    Summary: "From basic science and fundamental procedures to the latest advanced techniques in reconstructive, esthetic, and implant therapy, Newman and Carranza's Clinical Periodontology, 13th Edition is the resource you can count on to help master the most current information and techniques in periodontology. Full color photos, illustrations, radiographs and videos show you how to perform periodontal procedures, while renowned experts from across the globe explain the evidence supporting each treatment and lend their knowledge on how to best manage the outcomes"--Publisher's description.

    Contents:
    Evidence-based decision making
    Critical thinking : assessing evidence
    Anatomy, structure, and function of the periodontium
    Aging and the periodontium
    Classification of diseases and conditions affecting the periodontium
    Fundamentals in the methods of periodontal disease epidemiology
    Periodontal disease pathogenesis
    Biofilm and periodontal microbiology
    Practical molecular biology of host-microbe interactions
    Resolution of inflammation
    Precision dentistry : genetics of periodontal disease risk and treatment
    Smoking and periodontal disease
    The role of dental calculus and other local predisposing factors
    Influence of systemic conditions
    Impact of periodontal infection on systemic health
    Defense mechanisms of the gingiva
    Gingival inflammation
    Clinical features of gingivitis
    Gingival enlargement
    Acute gingival infections
    Gingival disease in childhood
    Desquamative gingivitis
    The periodontal pocket
    Bone loss and patterns of bone destruction
    Periodontal response to external forces
    Masticatory system disorders that influence the periodontium
    Chronic periodontitis
    Aggressive periodontitis
    Necrotizing ulcerative periodontitis
    Pathology and management of periodontal problems in patients with human immunodeficiency virus infection
    Levels of clinical significance
    Periodontal examination and diagnosis
    Radiographic aids in the diagnosis of periodontal disease
    Clinical risk assessment
    Determination of prognosis
    The treatment plan
    Electronic dental records and decision support systems
    Conscious sedation
    Periodontal treatment of medically compromised patients
    Sleep-disordered breathing
    Periodontal therapy in the female patient
    Periodontal treatment for older adults
    Treatment of aggressive and atypical forms of periodontitis
    Treatment of acute gingival disease
    Treatment of periodontal abscess
    Endodontic-periodontic lesions : pathogenesis, diagnosis, and treatment considerations
    Phase i periodontal therapy
    Plaque biofilm control for the periodontal patient
    Breath malodor
    Scaling and root planing
    Sonic and ultrasonic instrumentation and irrigation
    Systemic anti-infective therapy for periodontal diseases
    Locally delivered, controlled-release antimicrobials
    Host modulation
    Occlusal evaluation and therapy
    Orthodontics : interdisciplinary periodontal and implant therapy
    Phase ii periodontal therapy
    Periodontal and peri-implant surgical anatomy
    General principles of periodontal surgery
    Periodontal surgical therapy
    Treatment of gingival enlargement
    Resective osseous surgery
    Periodontal regeneration and reconstructive surgery
    Furcation : involvement and treatment
    Periodontal plastic and aesthetic surgery
    Leukocyte- and platelet-rich fibrin : biologic properties and applications
    Periodontal microsurgery
    Lasers in periodontal and peri-implant therapy
    Preparation of the periodontium for restorative dentistry
    Restorative interrelationships
    Multidisciplinary versus interdisciplinary approaches to dental and periodontal problems
    Supportive periodontal treatment
    Results of periodontal treatment
    Peri-implant anatomy, biology, and function
    Clinical evaluation of the implant patient
    Diagnostic imaging for the implant patient
    Prosthetic considerations for implant treatment
    Basic implant surgical procedures
    Localized bone augmentation and implant site development
    Advanced implant surgical procedures
    Aesthetic management of difficult cases (minimally invasive approach)
    Dental implant microsurgery : immediate placement
    Piezoelectric bone surgery
    Digitally assisted implant surgery
    Implant-related complications and failures
    Supportive implant treatment
    Results of implant treatment
    Atlas of periodontal diseases.
    Digital Access ClinicalKey 2019
  • Digital
    Melanie V. Sinche.
    Contents:
    Part I. Getting to know yourself
    Connecting your interests to careers
    But I have no skills and other myths
    Identifying your personal values
    Part II. Getting to know the world of work
    To postdoc or not to postdoc?
    Career options for PhDs in science
    Strategies for exploring careers and building experience
    Networking effectively to uncover opportunities
    Part III. Getting started on your job search
    Crafting your individual development plan
    Assembling your application materials and applying for jobs
    Interviewing and negotiating tactics
    Conclusion: Making a successful transition.
    Limited to 3 simultaneous users
  • Digital/Print
    edited by Isabel Moraes.
    Contents:
    Expression Screening of Integral Membrane Proteins by Fusion to Fluorescent Reporters
    Detergents in Membrane Protein Purification and Crystallisation
    NMR of Membrane Proteins: Beyond Crystals
    Characterisation of Conformational and Ligand Binding Properties of Membrane Proteins Using Synchrotron Radiation Circular Dichroism (SRCD)
    Membrane Protein Crystallization: Current Trends and Future Perspectives
    Crystal Dehydration in Membrane Protein Crystallography
    Nonlinear Optical Characterization of Membrane Protein Microcrystals and Nanocrystals
    Exploiting Microbeams for Membrane Protein Structure Determination
    Applications of the BLEND Software to Crystallographic Data from Membrane Proteins
    Serial Millisecond Crystallography of Membrane Proteins
    Serial Femtosecond Crystallography of Membrane Proteins
    Beyond Membrane Protein Structure: Drug Discovery, Dynamics and Difficulties.
    Digital Access Springer 2016
  • Digital
    editors, Emmanuel E. Baetge, Anil Dhawan, Andrew M. Prentice.
    Digital Access Karger 2016
  • Digital/Print
    edited by Paola Mina-Osorio.
    Contents:
    Part I. Diangnosis, Patient Stratification and Biomarkers
    A tale of two worlds: pharmaceutical investigators and clinicians define "diagnosis"
    Biomarkers in clinical trials for rheumatoid arthritis
    The role of microparticles as biomarkers in the development of therapy for autoimmune disease
    Part II. Genomic Medicine
    The future of genomic medicine in inflammatory diseases
    Part III. Bispecific Antibodies
    Bispecific antibodies
    Part IV. Cross-Functional Targers
    Targeting CD13 with Asn-Gly-Arg (NGR) peptie-drug conjugates
    Energy homeostasis of immune cells: transplanting cell bioenergetics into clinical application in rheumatoid arthritis
    The intestinal microbiome, the immune system, and spondyloarthropathy
    Stem cell therapy in the treatment of rheumatic diseases and application in the treatment of systemic lupus erythematosus
    Index.
    Digital Access Springer 2017
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Books: General Collection (Downstairs)
    RB131 .N49 2017
    1
  • Digital
    Timothy J. Hoff.
    Contents:
    Doctor-patient relationships and our expectations
    The forces impacting doctor-patient relationships and our expectations
    Retail thinking comes to health care : the patient as consumer
    All roads lead to trust : how doctors see the relationship and our expectations
    The tyranny of lowered expectations : how patients see the relationship
    Ceding care to the corporation : making doctors disappear
    Saving the doctor-patient relationship and raising expectations
    Appendix : how the study was conducted.
    Digital Access Oxford 2018
  • Digital
    Robin DiAngelo.
    Summary: "Nice Racism asserts that it is white progressives who are responsible for inflicting the most daily harm on people of color"-- Provided by publisher. DiAngelo identifies many common white racial patterns and breaks down how well-intentioned white people unknowingly perpetuate racial harm. She explains how spiritual white progressives seek community by co-opting Indigenous and other groups' rituals create separation, not connection. Challenging the ideology of individualism, DiAngelo explains why it is OK to generalize about white people, and she demonstrates how white people who experience other oppressions still benefit from systemic racism. -- adapted from jacket

    Contents:
    Introduction
    What is a nice racist?
    Why it's OK to generalize about White people
    There is no choir
    What's wrong with niceness?
    The moves of White progressives
    Spiritual, not religious
    Let's talk about shame
    What about my trauma?
    We aren't actually that nice
    How White people who experience other oppressions can still be racist, or "But I'm a minority myself!"
    How do you make a White progressive a better racist?
    Niceness is not courageous: how to align your professed values with your actual practice.
    Digital Access
    Provider
    Version
    Fulltext (1 concurrent user)
    Fulltext (1 concurrent user) Limited to 1 simultaneous userSUNet ID login required
    Audio Book (1 concurrent user)
    Audio Book (1 concurrent user) Limited to 1 simultaneous userSUNet ID login required
  • Digital/Print
    Colson Whitehead.
    Summary: As the Civil Rights movement begins to reach the black enclave of Frenchtown in segregated Tallahassee, Elwood Curtis takes the words of Dr. Martin Luther King to heart: He is "as good as anyone." Abandoned by his parents, but kept on the straight and narrow by his grandmother, Elwood is about to enroll in the local black college. But for a black boy in the Jim Crow South of the early 1960s, one innocent mistake is enough to destroy the future. Elwood is sentenced to a juvenile reformatory called the Nickel Academy, whose mission statement says it provides "physical, intellectual and moral training" so the delinquent boys in their charge can become "honorable and honest men." In reality, the Nickel Academy is a grotesque chamber of horrors where the sadistic staff beats and sexually abuses the students, corrupt officials and locals steal food and supplies, and any boy who resists is likely to disappear "out back." Stunned to find himself in such a vicious environment, Elwood tries to hold onto Dr. King's ringing assertion "Throw us in jail and we will still love you." His friend Turner thinks Elwood is worse than naive, that the world is crooked, and that the only way to survive is to scheme and avoid trouble. The tension between Elwood's ideals and Turner's skepticism leads to a decision whose repercussions will echo down the decades. Formed in the crucible of the evils Jim Crow wrought, the boys' fates will be determined by what they endured at the Nickel Academy.
    Digital Access EBSCO 2019
    Limited to 1 simultaneous user
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    PS3573.H4768 N53 2019
    1
  • Digital
    Emilija Veljkovic, Wenhao Xia, Blaine Phillips, Ee Tsin Wong, Jenny Ho, Alberto Oviedo, Julia Hoeng, Manuel Peitsch.
    Summary: Nicotine and Other Tobacco Compounds in Neurodegenerative and Psychiatric Diseases: Epidemiological Data on Smoking and Preclinical and Clinical Data on Nicotine provides a comprehensive summary of the epidemiological data on smoking and several neurological disorders, including Alzheimer's disease, Parkinson's disease, Multiple Sclerosis, Tourette's syndrome, schizophrenia, anxiety, depression and ADHD, as well as preclinical and clinical data on the effects of nicotine. Despite the obvious and undisputed harmful nature of smoking, evidence suggests that some tobacco and tobacco smoke-derived constituents may offer neuroprotective effects, possibly in combinations, rather than individually. This unprecedented book describes the complex relationships between smoking and neurological disease and the bioactive compounds found in tobacco. It provides a comprehensive review of nicotine and other compounds found in tobacco plant, with scientific evidence of neuroprotective and anti-inflammatory effects that may act in conjunction with nicotine to exert neuroprotective effects observed in smokers. By presenting findings beyond harmful cigarette smoke effects, attention can be drawn to individual compounds of tobacco that may serve as inspiration for further therapy development.
    Digital Access ScienceDirect 2018
  • Digital
    Akinori Akaike, Shun Shimohama, Yoshimi Misu, editors.
    Summary: This open access book presents the roles and mechanisms of signal transduction triggered by nicotinic acetylcholine receptors (nAChRs) stimulation in neuroprotection against toxic effects of risk factors of neurodegenerative diseases. Accumulating evidence suggests that nAChRs in the CNS play important roles not only in excitatory neurotransmission but also in neuronal survival and related functions. Neuroprotection mediated by nAChRs in neurodegenerative diseases such as Alzheimer's disease is the major topic of this book. In response to rapidly evolving areas in clinical and laboratory neuropharmacology and neurochemistry, this volume provides in-depth coverage of neuroprotection in basic research and future developments in the clinical application of effective neuroprotective strategies in neurodegenerative diseases. This work appeals to both basic and clinical researchers in several fields, such as neuroscience, neurology, and pharmacology. This book is published with open access under a CC BY 4.0 license.

    Contents:
    1. Overview
    2. In vivo imaging of nicotinic acetylcholine receptors in the central nervous system
    3.A new aspect of cholinergic transmission in the central nervous system
    4. Nicotinic acetylcholine receptor signaling: roles in neuroprotection
    5. Regulation by nicotinic acetylcholine receptors of microglial glutamate transporters: role of microglia in neuroprotection
    6. Shati/Nat8l and N-acetylaspartate (NAA) have important roles in regulating nicotinic acetylcholine receptors in neuronal and psychiatric diseases in animal models and humans
    7. Nicotinic acetylcholine receptors in regulation of pathology of cerebrovascular disorders
    8. Roles of nicotinic acetylcholine receptors in the pathology and treatment of Alzheimer's and Parkinson's diseases
    9. SAK3-induced neuroprotection is mediated by nicotinic acetylcholine receptors
    10. Removal of blood amyloid as a therapeutic strategy for Alzheimer's disease: the influence of smoking and nicotine.
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Digital
    American Academy of Pediatrics.
    Summary: Parents of babies in the NICU will become more informed partners in care with this essential resource. This fully revised and updated journal provides educational content and a way to monitor their baby's progress. The journal includes helpful information on common questions about the NICU, offers tips on coping, and provides helpful checklists to help parents stay organized and informed while in the NICU.
    Digital Access AAP ebooks 2017
  • Digital
    [edited by] Amy P. Holmes, PharmD, Neonatal Clinical Pharmacy Specialist, Novant Health Forsyth Medical Center, Winston Salem, North Carolina, and Adjunct Assistant Professor, Wingate School of Pharmacy, Wingate, North Carolina.
    Contents:
    General NICU considerations / Megan Lunberry and Miyuki Nakayama Shouse
    Developmental pharmacology, pharmacokinetics, and pharmacodynamics / John Brock Harris
    Total parenteral nutrition / Ying-Tang Ng
    Drugs in lactation / Amy P. Holmes
    Neonatal abstinence syndrome / Amy P. Holmes
    Apnea of prematurity / John Brock Harris
    Respiratory distress syndrome and bronchopulmonary dysplasia / Julia Lau
    Patent ductus arteriosus / Betsy Walters Burkey
    Pain and sedation / Ashley McCallister and Amy P. Holmes
    Neonatal bacterial sepsis and meningitis / John Brock Harris
    TORCH infections / Amy P. Holmes
    Respiratory syncytial virus / Betsy Walters Burkey and Michelle F. F. Poole
    Necrotizing enterocolitis / John Brock Harris
    Gastrointestinal disorders / John Brock Harris
    Vaccine use in infants / Amy P. Holmes
    Pulmonary hypertension / Julia Lau
    Neonatal seizures / John Brock Harris
    Extracorporeal membrane oxygenation / Wyn Wheeler.
  • Digital
    Joseph Abiodun Balogun.
    Summary: The modern-day practice of health care was imported into Nigeria over 500 years ago. In 1947, the first national health plan was developed in Nigeria with the primary goal of providing universal health care (UHC), but this goal remains elusive to date. This comprehensive book presents the roadmap needed to attain UHC in Nigeria and offers a blueprint for achieving high-quality health care in the nation. Starting with a brief overview of the Nigerian state, the fundamentals of health care, including the challenges to affordable quality healthcare delivery, the author critically examines the healthcare system in Nigeria and offers specific recommendations to invigorate the system and improve interprofessional collaborations. Each chapter includes case studies to allow readers to contextualize the information presented and behavioral learning objectives to test readers' knowledge. Among the topics covered: The Organizational Structure and Leadership of the Nigerian Healthcare System The Vulnerabilities of the Nigerian Healthcare System The Spectrum of Complementary and Alternative Medicine Emerging Developments in Traditional Medicine Practice in Nigeria The Plight of Persons Living with Disabilities: The Visible Invisibles in Nigeria A Comparative Analysis of the Health System of Nigeria and Six Selected Nations Around the World A Qualitative Investigation of the Barriers to the Delivery of High-Quality Healthcare Services in Nigeria The Political and Economic Reforms Needed to Achieve Universal and High-Quality Health Care in Nigeria Reimagining the Nigerian Healthcare System to Achieve Universal and High-Quality Health Care by 2030 The Nigerian Healthcare System: Pathway to Universal and High-Quality Health Care is ideal for adoption as a textbook in health services administration, health policy and management, health informatics, healthcare delivery systems, and primary health care courses offered at universities in Nigeria. It also would appeal to students and faculty in African diaspora programs internationally. The book is also essential for policymakers, health systems technocrats, researchers, and professionals in various health disciplines, including medicine, nursing, and allied health.

    Contents:
    Intro
    Foreword
    Preface
    Acknowledgments
    Contents
    About the Author
    Abbreviations
    Chapter 1: Introduction
    Overview of the Nigerian State
    Geography and Politics
    Ethnicity
    Religion
    Economy
    Income Inequity
    Health System
    Overview of the Chapters
    Competition and Conclusion
    References
    Chapter 2: The Fundamentals of Health Care
    Introduction
    What Is Health?
    Determinants of Health
    Health Equity
    Health Disparities and Health Inequalities
    Health in All Policies
    Is Health a "Consumption Good" or an "Investment Good"? Relationship Between Health and Development
    United Nations Development Goals
    Global Access to Health Care
    Burden of Disease
    Life Expectancy
    Hand Hygiene in Healthcare Settings
    The Global Burden of Healthcare-Associated Infections
    Measuring Healthcare Outcomes
    Assessment of Quality of Health Care
    Framework for Monitoring Performance of Health Systems
    Recent Advances and Innovations in Health Care
    Healthcare Financing Models
    Conclusion
    References
    Chapter 3: The Evolutionary Developments, Threats and Opportunities Within the Nigerian Healthcare System Introduction
    Critical Milestones in the Development of Western-Style Healthcare System (1472-2019)
    The Current State of the Nigerian Health System (2019-2021)
    Health Outcome Indicators
    The National Health Insurance Scheme Debacle
    Present and Future Threats to the Health System
    Opportunities Within the Health System
    Performance of Health System in African Countries
    Conclusion
    References
    Chapter 4: The Organizational Structure and Leadership of the Nigerian Healthcare System
    Introduction
    Operational Definitions Organization Structure of the Federal Ministry of Health
    Healthcare System Structure
    Impact of the Private Sector in Health Service Delivery
    Conventional Medicine Private Health Care
    Traditional Medicine Private Health Care
    Management and Leadership of the Health Departments
    Leadership of the Federal Ministry of Health
    The Functions of the Health Minister and Skills Needed to Be Successful
    The Controversy Over the Surgeon General Position
    Conclusion
    References
    Chapter 5: The Vulnerabilities of the Nigerian Healthcare System
    Introduction
    Methodology Health System Vulnerabilities
    Vulnerability #1: Poor Governance and Ineffective Leadership
    Vulnerability #2: Low-Quality Health Service Delivery
    Vulnerability #3: Shortage of Healthcare Workforce
    Vulnerability #4: Paltry Health Systems Financing
    Vulnerability #5: Limited Access to Essential Medicines and Vaccines
    Vulnerability #6: Weak Health Information Systems
    Major Achievements and Contributions of Nigeria to Global Health
    Genesis of Primary Health Care and Itinerant/Community-Based Physiotherapy Systems
    Community Health Workers
    Medical and Surgical Discoveries
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital/Print
    Leila Mottley.
    Summary: "A dazzling, unforgettable novel about a young Black woman who walks the streets of Oakland and stumbles headlong into the failure of its justice system--a debut that announces a blazingly original voice. Kiara Johnson and her brother Marcus are barely scraping by in a squalid East Oakland apartment complex that calls itself, optimistically, the Royal-Hi. Both have dropped out of high school, their family fractured by death and prison. But while Marcus clings to his dream of rap stardom, Kiara hunts for work to pay their rent--which has now more than doubled--and to keep the 9-year-old boy next door, abandoned by his mother, safe and fed. What begins as a drunken misunderstanding with a stranger one night soon becomes the job Kiara never wanted but now desperately needs: nightcrawling. And her world breaks open even further when her name surfaces in an investigation that exposes her as a key witness in a massive scandal within the Oakland police department. Full of edge, raw beauty, electrifying intensity, and piercing vulnerability, Nightcrawling marks the stunning arrival of a voice unlike any we have heard before"-- Provided by publisher
    Digital Access 2022
    Limited to 1 simultaneous userSUNet ID login required
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Books: General Collection (Downstairs)
    PS3613.O8455 N54 2022
    1
  • Digital
    Michael J. Parnham, Frans P. Nijkamp, Adriano G. Rossi, editors.
    Summary: Principles of Immunopharmacology provides a unique source of essential knowledge on the immune response, its diagnosis and its modification by drugs and chemicals. The 4th edition of this internationally recognized textbook has been revised to include recent developments, but continues the established format, dealing with four related fields in a single volume, thus obviating the need to refer to several different textbooks. The first section of the book, providing a basic introduction to immunology and its relevance for human disease, has been updated to accommodate new immunological concepts, particularly the role of epigenetics and the latest understanding of cancer immunology. The second section on immunodiagnostics offers a topical description of widely used molecular techniques and a new chapter on imaging techniques. This is followed by a systematic coverage of drugs affecting the immune system, including natural products. This third section contains 15 updated chapters, covering classical immunopharmacological topics such as anti-asthmatic, anti-rheumatic and immunosuppressive drugs, but also deals with antibiotics, plant-derived and dietary agents, with new chapters on monoclonal antibodies, immunotherapy in sepsis and infection, drugs for soft-tissue autoimmunity and cell therapy. The book concludes with a chapter on immunotoxicology and drug safety tests. Aids to the reader include a two-column format, glossaries of technical terms and appendix reference tables. The emphasis on illustrations is maintained from the first three editions. The book is a valuable single reference for undergraduate and graduate medical and biomedical students, postgraduate chemistry and pharmacy students, researchers in chemistry, biochemistry and the pharmaceutical industry and researchers lacking basic immunological knowledge, who want to understand the actions of drugs on the immune system.

    Contents:
    PART 1
    Immunity Initiation, Propagation and Resolution of Inflammation.- Haematopoeisis and lymphocyte development: an introduction.- T cell subsets and T-cell mediated immunity.- Antibody diversity and B-cell mediated immunity.- Dendritic cells.- Cytokines.- Epigenetic regulation of immunity.- Innate immunity: phagocytes, NK cells, and and humoral defence.- Inflammatory mediators and intracellular signalling.- Immune response in human pathology: infections caused by bacteria, viruses, fungi, and parasites.- Immune response in human pathology: hypersensitivity and autoimmunity.- Cancer immunity.- Neuroimmunoendocrinology. PART 2
    Immunodiagnosis Antibody detection.- Immunoassays.- Flow cytometry.- Microarrays.- Imaging Inflammation.- PART 3
    Immunotherapeutics.- Vaccines and adjuvants.- Plasma-derived immunoglobulins.- Monoclonal antibodies for the treatment of immune.- Anti-allergic drugs.- Drugs for the treatment of airway disease.- Immunotherapy in the management of asthma and other allergic conditions.- Immunostimulants in cancer therapy.- Immunomodulation in sepsis and infection.- Immunopharmacology of probiotics and prebiotics.- Mild plant and dietary immunomodulators.- Influence of antibacterial drugs on the immune system.- Cytotoxic drugs.- Immunosuppressives in transplant rejection.- Corticosteroids.- Non-steroidal anti-inflammatory drugs.- Disease-modifying antirheumatic drugs.- Drugs for soft tissue autoimmune disorders.- Cell and gene therapy of immune disorders.- PART 4
    Immunotoxicology Immunotoxicology 2017.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital/Print
    Peter M. Eller, editor.
    Digital Access Google Books Feb.1984-
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Stored offsite. Please request print.
    RA1221 .N718
    2
  • Print
    editors, Frank W. Mackison, R. Scott Stricoff, Lawrence J. Partridge, Jr. ; [prepared by Arthur D. Little, Inc.]
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Stored offsite. Please request print.
    T55.3.H3 N18
    3
  • Digital
    edited by Louis J. Ignarro and Bruce Freeman.
    Digital Access ScienceDirect 2017
  • Digital
    Dharmendra K. Gupta, José M. Palma and Francisco J. Corpas, editors.
    Summary: This book describes nitric oxide (NO) and hydrogen peroxide (H2O2) functions in higher plants. Much progress has been made in the field of NO and H2O2 research regarding the various mechanisms and functions of these two molecules, particularly regarding stress tolerance and signaling processes, but there are still gaps to be filled. NO and H2O2 are both crucial regulators of development, and act as signaling molecules at each step of the plant lifecycle, while also playing important roles in biotic and abiotic responses to environmental cues. The book summarizes key advances in the field of NO and H2O2 research, focusing on a range of processes including: signaling, metabolism, seed germination, development, sexual reproduction, fruit ripening, and defense.

    Contents:
    Hydrogen peroxide and nitric oxide generation in plant cells : overview and queries
    Hydrogen peroxide and nitric oxide signaling network
    Hydrogen peroxide (H₂O₂)-and nitric oxide (NO)-derived posttranslational modifications
    Transcriptional regulation of gene expression related to hydrogen peroxide (H₂O₂) and nitric oxide (NO)
    Metabolism and interplay of reactive oxygen and nitrogen species in plant mitochondria
    Hydrogen peroxide and nitric oxide metabolism in chloroplasts
    Participation of hydrogen peroxide and nitric oxide in improvement of seed germination performance under unfavorable conditions
    Nitric oxide and hydrogen peroxide in root organogenesis
    Nitric oxide and hydrogen peroxide : signals in fruit ripening
    Plant abiotic stress : function of nitric oxide and hydrogen peroxide
    Nitric oxide and hydrogen peroxide in plant response to biotic stress
    Biotechnological application of nitric oxide and hydrogen peroxide in plants.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    edited by Amedea Barozzi Seabra.
    Summary: Nitric Oxide Donors: Biomedical Applications and Perspectives presents the current state of art, challenges and innovations in the design of therapeutics nitric oxide donors with great impact in several aspects of human physiology and pathophysiology. Although considerable innovative progress has been achieved using Nitric Oxide donors in biomedical applications, certain drawbacks still need to be overcome to successfully translate these research innovations into clinical applications. This book encompasses several topics on nitric oxide such as its sources and biological properties; its performance in the cardiovascular and neurologic systems, in the human skin and its application in the treatment of neglected diseases, neurodegenerative disorders, and cancer. Additionally, it covers its role in inflammation and immunity, penile erection function, photodynamic therapy, antimicrobial activities. It also discusses the future of nitric oxide donors in combination with other therapeutic drugs, in implantable sensors, and nitric oxide releasing hydrogels and medical devices for topical applications. The book is a valuable source for researchers on different areas of biomedical field who are interested in the improvements that these molecules can make in the treatment of several conditions.
    Digital Access ScienceDirect 2017
  • Digital
    Nathan S. Bryan, Joseph Loscalzo, editors.
    Summary: This fully revised and updated new edition provides a comprehensive look at nitrite and nitrate and their effect on human health and disease. The first section describes the biochemical analysis of nitrite and nitrate and its role in human physiology. The book then shifts to sources of human exposure of nitrite and nitrate, including environmental and dietary. Finally, the last section discusses nitric oxide-based therapeutics and how nitrite and nitrate biochemistry can be safely harnessed to improve human health. Each chapter provides a balanced, evidence-based view and heavily cites the most recent published literature. They follow a strict chapter format which includes keywords, key points, a conclusion highlighting major findings, and extensive references. The second edition contains new chapters on nitrite and nitrate in age medicine, nitrite and nitrate as a treatment for hypertension, and nitrite and nitrate in exercise performance. Additionally, the editors have expanded the biochemistry section to include chapters on nitrate reducing oral bacteria, nitrite mediated S-Nitrosation, epigenetics and the regulation of nitric oxide, and nitrite control of mitochondrial function. Nitrate and Nitrite in Human Health and Disease, 2e, will be of interest to health professionals, nutritionists, dieticians, biomedical scientists, and food scientists.
    Digital Access Springer 2017
  • Print
    Contents:

    v. 1. Introduction to the nitrofurans.
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Stored offsite. Please request print.
    I761 .E13
    1
  • Digital
    Kunal Gupta, Dimitrios Emmanouil, Amit Sethi, editors.
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital/Print
    [edited by] Bruce E. Jarrell, MD, Professor, Department of Surgery, University of Maryland School of Medicine, Baltimore, Maryland, Stephen M. Kavic, MD, Associate Professor, Department of Surgery, Program Director, Residency in General Surgery, University of Maryland School of Medicine, Baltimore, Maryland.
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Books: General Collection (Downstairs)
    RD32 .S825 2016
    2
  • Digital/Print
    [edited by] Bruce E Jarrell, l, MD, President, University of Maryland, Baltimore, Baltimore, Maryland, Eric Strauch, M.D., Associate Professor of Surgery, Clerkship Director, Medical Student Rotation in Surgery, University of Maryland School of Medicine, Baltimore, Maryland, Stephen Kavic, MD, Professor of Surgery, Program Director, Residency in Surgery, University of Maryland School of Medicine, Baltimore, Maryland.
    Summary: "This book is written primarily for students and residents in general surgery. It is meant to serve as an introduction to the field of surgery, rather than a comprehensive review. In this edition, we have re-organized the overall structure. First and foremost, we reduced the size to fit in a lab coat pocket, so you can carry it with you for quick reference. Accordingly, we pared down some of the text to focus on the essential information. New features to this edition include "Trusted Sources," which are links to non-commercial websites and other sources of up-to-date details and practice guidelines on relevant topics. We have also aimed to create more alignment with the NMS Surgery Casebook. This involved changing the order of the chapters from the previous edition and adding "Cut to Casebook" cross-references to make it easier to find the appropriate cases to complement the textbook. We have also revised the outline of each chapter to open with highlights, called "Chapter Cuts." The key points are immediately followed by "Critical Surgical Associations," which provide triggers for medical students to remember important connections in the surgical thought process. For the tremendous work put into this edition, we thank the individual contributors. Their highquality and frequently punctual contributions have made our jobs as editors pleasant. We are also grateful to the editorial team at Wolters Kluwer for their guidance and support throughout the Process"-- Provided by publisher.
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Exam Review Books (shelved at Information Desk)
    RD32 .S825 2021
    1
  • Print
    Bruce E. Jarrell, Stephen M. Kavicc, Eric D. Strauch.
    Summary: "The cases in this book represent how surgeons think and make decisions about clinical problems. We have attempted to write it in a way that allows us to "talk to you" as you read it, so that the book will be the next best thing to teaching in person. The cases are organized by systems address the common presentations of clinical problems. The history and physical examination clues, radiologic images, and other figures help you formulate a differential and ultimately a diagnosis. Case variations are also presented to help you consider the appropriate treatment of patients with various complications and coexisting conditions"-- Provided by publisher. "Lippincott® Connect Featured TitlePurchase the new print edition of this Lippincott® Connect title includes lifetime access to the digital version of the book, plus related materials such as videos and multiple-choice Q&A and self-assessments.Ideal as a stand-alone review or as a perfect companion to NMS Surgery, Seventh Edition, this leading casebook for the surgical rotation presents a series of surgical cases that begin with a clinical scenario and progress step by step through the decision-making process of patient management. Concise and portable, NSM Surgery Casebook, Third Edition fits in a lab coat pocket-ideal for review on the wards.Retaining the structured subject review, practice questions for the USMLE Step 2 exam, and focus on helping students work through clinical cases with a unique "what next" approach to decision making, this third edition offers a new full-color design, new study aids, and key updates throughout.A unique, case-based surgical review, with case variations, teaches effective surgical approach and allows students to practice real-world clinical decision making and prepare for exams.New and updated cases reflect modern surgical practice.Revised Cutting to the Chase feature at the beginning of each chapter presents a high-yield overview of important concepts.New Critical Surgical Associations from NMS Surgery cover associations and important sequences in a highly visual way.All-new radiographic images are easier to read and interpret.Easy-to-spot Digging Deep boxes provide high-yield information in an easily accessible way.An extensive illustration program provides opportunities to make patient management decisions based on visual cues.Lippincott® Connect features: Lifetime access to the digital version of the book with the ability to highlight and take notes on key passages for a more personal, efficient study experience.Carefully curated resources, including interactive diagrams, video tutorials, flashcards, organ sounds, and self-assessment, all designed to facilitate further comprehension.Lippincott® Connect also allows users to create Study Collections to further personalize the study experience. With Study Collections you can: Pool content from books across your entire library into self-created Study Collections based on discipline, procedure, organ, concept or other topics.Display related text passages, video clips and self-assessment questions from each book (if available) for efficient absorption of material.Annotate and highlight key content for easy access later.Navigate seamlessly between book chapters, sections, self-assessments, notes and highlights in a single view/page"-- Provided by publisher.
  • Digital/Print
    Bruce E. Jarrell, Eric D. Strauch.
    Contents:
    Preoperative care / Bruce E. Jarrell, Molly Buzdon, Daniel Bochicchio, Eric D. Strauch
    Postoperative care / Bruce E. Jarrell, Molly Buzdon, Eric D. Strauch
    Wound healing / Bruce E. Jarrell, Eric D. Strauch
    Thoracic and cardiothoracic disorders / Bruce E. Jarrell, Joseph S. MacLaughlin, Eric D. Strauch
    Vascular disorders / Bruce E. Jarrell, Marshall Benjamin, Eric D. Strauch
    Upper gastrointestinal tract disorders / Bruce E. Jarrell, John L. Flowers, Molly Buzdon, Eric D. Strauch
    Pancreatic and hepatic disorders / Bruce E. Jarrell, Eric D. Strauch
    Lower gastrointestinal disorders / Bruce E. Jarrell, Molly Buzdon, Daniel Bochicchio
    Endocrine disorders / Bruce E. Jarrell, W. Bradford Carter
    Skin and soft tissue disorders and hernias / Bruce E. Jarrell
    Breast disorders / Bruce E. Jarrell, Emily Bellavance, Michelle Townsend-Watts, Katherine Tkaczuk, Eric D. Strauch
    Trauma, burns, and sepsis / Bruce E. Jarrell, Thomas Scalea, Molly Buzdon
    Congenital anomalies / Clint D. Cappiello, Eric D. Strauch, Bruce E. Jarrell.
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Exam Review Books (shelved at Information Desk)
    RD32 .S8251 2016
    2
  • Digital
    Kristin Haltinner.
    Summary: "In No Perfect Birth: Trauma and Obstetric Care in the Rural United States, Kristin Haltinner examines the institutional and ideological forces that cause harm to women in childbirth in the rural United States"-- Provided by publisher.
  • Digital
    George Berci, Frederick L. Greene.
    Summary: This book is a tribute to early pioneers and later innovators in applications of surgical principles for biliary stone disease. It is written as a challenge to all surgeons applying these principles to approach the biliary system with the safest and most appropriate technical support. This book is also written as a challenge to all those involved in the training of future generations of surgeons in the hope that critical standards in biliary surgical management will be promulgated and highlighted. The text contains knowledge from surgical leaders who played a vital part in the modern management of biliary stone disease. These contributions include their perceptions, wisdom and recommendations for the future. In doing so, the authors aim to discover ways to make the surgical management of biliary stone disease even better. This volume, thoughtfully curated by two eminent surgical scholars, provides perhaps the most complete history of the field. Dr. Berci and Dr. Greene enlisted a remarkable panel of distinguished colleagues from around the world to discuss every important element of surgical practice. These elements include: The resourcefulness of developing novel optics and instruments on the fly, the integration of new imaging capabilities into pre-operative assessments and intraoperative management, the challenge of educating prideful senior surgeons who were ill at ease with the distance imposed by a laparoscope, and the introduction of progressively more elegant ex vivo modules to train inexperienced juniors with limited open operative experience. Finally, it also discusses the never-ending task of ensuring the safety of one of the most common operations performed in the world, yet one with a persistent, if small, risk of life altering injury to the biliary ducts. No Stones Left Unturned aims to build on a classic surgical text and then discusses the issues faced by surgeons performing biliary surgery in the modern era. It serves as a valuable resource for surgeons, practicing clinicians, surgical residents, and fellows that wish to apply this knowledge and improve upon the current standards of biliary surgical management.

    Contents:
    Intro
    Preface
    Acknowledgement
    Introduction
    Contents
    Contributors
    Part I: Kehr and His Textbook
    1: The History of Biliary Stone Disease
    References
    2: Professor Dr. Hans Kehr (1862-1916)
    References
    3: Translation of Professor Dr. Hans Kehr
    Instruments
    Description of Surgical Cases (Bilingual) Translation
    4: The Anatomy and Variations of Important Structures
    5: Biliary Stones
    Summarized Case Report
    Gallbladders with Carcinomas
    Preoperative Position
    6: Surgery
    Summarized Detail of 68 Operated Cases
    Mortality: 7 Cases (9.3%) Part II: The Gallbladder and Adjacent Structures
    7: History of Endoscopy
    Maximilian Nitze (1849-1906), Germany
    Hans Christian Jacobeus [2] (1879-1937), Sweden
    References
    8: Early Biliary Surgeons
    References
    9: Early American Surgeons
    References
    10: Endoscopy
    References
    11: Laparoscopy
    Heinz Kalk (1895-1973), Germany
    John Ruddock (1891-1964), USA
    References
    12: Advances in Visualization for Laparoscopic Surgery
    References
    13: Laparoscopic Cholecystectomies
    References
    14: Cholangiography in the Operating Room Standard Operative Cholangiography [6]
    Operative Fluoro-Cholangiography
    Benefits of the Cholangiogram
    Biliary Ductal Anatomy
    Biliary Duct Stones
    References
    15: Bile Duct Injuries
    References
    16: Common Bile Duct Stones and Choledocholithotomy
    CBD Stones
    References
    Publications
    ERCP USA
    ERCP International
    17: Laparoscopic Cholecystectomy: Introduction, Uptake, Maturity, and Impact on Surgical Practice-Personal Reflections from the Shop Floor
    Introduction
    Nomenclature and Origin of Laparoscopic Surgery/Cholecystectomy
    General Considerations Initial Nosocomial Surgical Epidemic
    Techniques of Laparoscopic Cholecystectomy
    Patients with Symptomatic Gallstones and Ductal Calculi
    Day Case/Ambulatory LC
    Bleeding Complications Associated with LC
    Training and Simulation
    Impact of LC on Surgical Practice across the Specialties
    Advent of Robotically Assisted Laparoscopic Surgery
    What Next?
    References
    Part III: Commentaries
    18: Commentaries
    Commentary
    Teaching the Laparoscopic Common Bile Duct Exploration to Acute Care Surgeons
    Commentary: Berci-Greene "No Stones Left Unturned" Kehr Book The Trajectory of Biliary Surgery: Personal Reflections
    Commentary
    Laparoscopic Cholecystectomy: At the Beginning...1989-1990
    Personal Perspective/Experience-In This Surgical Space
    Historical Context: The Early Pioneers
    Recent Developments and We "Late Comers"
    Convergence of Disciplines
    Disruptive Technologies
    Current State
    Surgical Training
    Final and Future Thoughts
    Each Major Advance in Biliary Surgery Needed a New Way of Teaching
    Biliary Surgery: A Story of Innovation and Change
    Commentary
    For Me, It Started with Diagnostic Laparoscopy
    Commentary
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Print
    Print
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Books: General Collection (Downstairs)
    Call number varies. Search for Nobel Symposium (Series) to find individual volumes of this title.
  • Digital
    editors, Mei-Chuan Ko and Girolamo Caló.
    Summary: The aim of this book is not only to introduce readers with a broad spectrum of biological actions of the NOP receptor, but also to feature a detailed look at the N/OFQ-NOP receptor system, medicinal chemistry, pharmacology, and clinical data of NOP-targeted ligands. This special volume book - for the first time focusing on the NOP receptor - is designed to serve as a useful reference, stimulate more research on the N/OFQ-NOP receptor system, and lead to more development of NOP-related ligands for several therapeutic applications.

    Contents:
    Intro; Preface; Contents; The History of N/OFQ and the NOP Receptor; 1 Introduction; 2 The ``Orphan Receptor Strategy ́́Launches the Era of ``Reverse Pharmacology;́́ 3 The Quest for the Endogenous Ligand of ORL1 (and Other Orphan GPCRs); 3.1 Uncertainties Setting the Stage; 3.2 In the Eye of the Storm: It Is Back to cAMP; 3.3 The Isolation; 4 The Novel Opioid Peptide from Basel ... ; 5 ... Is Simultaneously Discovered in Toulouse; 6 Race to the Finish Line; 7 Early Steps to Uncover the Physiological Functions of N/OFQ; 8 Hopes for Clinical Applications; 9 Reverse Pharmacology Success Stories 10 ConclusionReferences; NOP-Targeted Peptide Ligands; 1 Introduction; 2 Structure-Activity Relationship Studies on N/OFQ-Related Peptides; 2.1 Linear N/OFQ Derivatives; 2.2 Cyclic N/OFQ Derivatives; 3 Structure-Activity Relationship Studies on N/OFQ-Unrelated Peptides; 4 Bivalent NOP Peptide Ligands; 5 Tetrabranched NOP Peptide Ligands; 6 Concluding Remarks; References; NOP-Targeted Nonpeptide Ligands; 1 Nonpeptide NOP Ligands As Tools and Candidate Drugs in Development; 2 Structure-Activity, Structure-Selectivity, and Structure-Function Relationships of Nonpeptide NOP Ligands 2.1 G-Protein-Activated Inwardly Rectifying K+ Channels (Kir3)2.1.1 The Periaqueductal Grey; 2.1.2 The Rostral Ventral Medial Medulla; 2.1.3 The Amygdala; 2.1.4 The Locus Coeruleus; 2.1.5 The Dorsal Raphe Nucleus; 2.1.6 The Spinal Cord; 2.2 Voltage-Gated Calcium Channels (CaV); 2.2.1 Primary Sensory Neurons; 2.2.2 CNS Neurons; 2.3 Other Postsynaptic N/OFQ Actions; 2.4 NOP Desensitisation; 3 Presynaptic Actions of N/OFQ; 3.1 Short-Term Modulation of Neurotransmitter Release; 3.1.1 Locus of Action: Presynaptic; 3.1.2 Mechanisms of Presynaptic Action; 3.2 Long-Term Synaptic Plasticity 4 Implications of the Electrophysiological Actions of N/OFQ in NociceptionReferences; NOP Receptor Signaling Cascades; 1 Classic Gi-Signaling Pathways; 2 NOP Receptors and Kinase Signaling; 3 NOP Receptors and Arrestin Signaling; 4 Conclusion; References; Regulation of the Genes Encoding the ppN/OFQ and NOP Receptor; 1 Nociceptin/Orphanin FQ (N/OFQ): Gene, Transcriptional Regulation, and Neuropeptide Precursor; 2 NOP Receptor: Gene and Transcriptional Regulation; 3 Genetic Manipulation of the N/OFQ-NOP Receptor System; 4 ppN/OFQ and NOP Receptor Gene Polymorphisms
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    Robert C. Basner, Sairam Parthasarathy, editor.
    Summary: This comprehensive resource brings together the most current theories, evidence and best practice parameters for the use of nocturnal non-invasive ventilation (nNIV). Chapters focus on the application of acute and chronic nNIV in patients with cardio-respiratory disorders over a range of major medical settings. Updates on past and recent research in this field are highlighted. Authored by leading clinicians and investigators, Nocturnal Non-Invasive Ventilation provides practical and cutting-edge knowledge to physicians, researchers and allied health professionals on the front lines of treating cardio-respiratory and sleep disorders.
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Digital
    Joe J. Eggermont, Emeritus Professor of Physiology & Pharmacology, and Psychology, University of Calgary, Calgary, Alberta, Canada.
    Summary: In our industrialized world, we are surrounded by occupational, recreational, and environmental noise. Very loud noise damages the inner-ear receptors and results in hearing loss, subsequent problems with communication in the presence of background noise, and, potentially, social isolation. There is much less public knowledge about the noise exposure that produces only temporary hearing loss but that in the long term results in hearing problems due to the damage of high-threshold auditory nerve fibers. Early exposures of this kind, such as in neonatal intensive care units, manifest themselves at a later age, sometimes as hearing loss but more often as an auditory processing disorder. There is even less awareness about changes in the auditory brain caused by repetitive daily exposure to the same type of low-level occupational or musical sound. This low-level, but continuous, environmental noise exposure is well known to affect speech understanding, produce non-auditory problems ranging from annoyance and depression to hypertension, and to cause cognitive difficulties. Additionally, internal noise, such as tinnitus, has effects on the brain similar to low-level external noise. Noise and the Brain discusses and provides a synthesis of the underlying brain mechanisms as well as potential ways to prvent or alleviate these aberrant brain changes caused by noise exposure. Authored by one of the preeminent leaders in the field of hearing research. Emphasizes direct and indirect changes in brain function as a result of noise exposure. Provides a comprehensive and evidence-based approach. Addresses both developmental and adult plasticityIncludes coverage of epidemiology, etiology, and genetics of hearing problems; effects of non-damaging sound on both the developing and adult brain; non-auditory effects of noise; noise and the aging brain; and more.
    Digital Access ScienceDirect 2014
  • Digital
    edited by Ramesh Khanna, Raymond T. Krediet.
    Springer Nature Living Reference.
    Summary: Peritoneal dialysis represents an intracorporeal technique for blood purification. This unique dialysis system represents one of many human attempts to manipulate nature for sustenance of life. Recent advances have focused on further improvement of the technique.^Areas that have fueled the interest of researchers include: (1) Physiology of high transporters (and the role of genetics and inflammation); (2) Continued debate over the most appropriate adequacy indices (small solute clearances, large solute clearances, clinical assessment etc.); (3) Understanding, preventing and treating the MIA syndrome in PD patients ( including the roles of leptin,^and adiponectin); (4) Pathogenesis and newer management strategies of vascular calcification; (5) Continued improvements in infectious complications including peritonitis; (6) Further improvements in catheter technology; (7) Automated techniques; (8) Explaining and correcting PD underutilization; (9) Rationale and applications of newer dialysis solutions; (10) New understanding and approaches to management of osteodystrophy; (11) Refinements in anemia management including new insights in iron metabolism in PD patients; (12) Further definition of indications for PD; (13) The ideal time to initiate dialysis. Nolph and Gokal's Text Book of Peritoneal Dialysis, 4th Edition will cover advances made in this field since 2007. During the past decade, the time during which this therapy has been increasingly utilized, the 3rd Edition has continued to be recognized as the major source of the discipline's base knowledge.^The evolution of this text to its newest edition parallels the growth of peritoneal dialysis from Continuous Ambulatory Peritoneal Dialysis in the eighties to the current therapy that encompasses manual and automated therapies with full emphasis on adequacy of dialysis dose. Textbook of Peritoneal Dialysis is perhaps the most in-depth publication on this dialysis technique. The first starting place for anyone wanting to know PD as a dialysis therapy, or for those already practicing PD to find information to support its wider use. This book will be easy-to-read, current and topical. It should be available to everyone practicing PD. Nowhere else can one find such a broad and detailed description of the modality of PD in one volume. It has been close to eight-ten years since the 3rd edition was published. There have been many advances in the field including technology, treatment methods, complications and many more.

    Contents:
    History of Peritoneal Dialysis
    Current Status of Peritoneal Dialysis
    Comparing Survival Outcomes in Peritoneal Dialysis and Hemodialysis
    The Peritoneal Microcirculation in Peritoneal Dialysis
    Functional Structure of the Peritoneum as a Dialyzing Membrane
    The Physiology of Peritoneal Solute, Water, and Lymphatic Transport
    Physiology of High/Fast Transporters
    Animal Models for Peritoneal Dialysis Research
    Pharmacological Alterations of Peritoneal Transport Rates and Pharmacokinetics in Peritoneal Dialysis
    Peritoneal Dialysis Connectology
    New Peritoneal Dialysis Solutions and Solutions on the Horizon
    Automated Peritoneal Dialysis
    Peritoneal Dialysis Program Organization and Management
    Peritoneal Dialysis Access and Exit-Site Care Including Surgical Aspects
    Monitoring the Functional Status of the Peritoneum
    Adequacy of Peritoneal Dialysis, Including Fluid Balance
    Ultrafiltration Failure
    Quality of Life in Patients on Peritoneal Dialysis
    Peritonitis
    Noninfectious Complications of Peritoneal Dialysis
    Protein-Energy Malnutrition/Wasting During Peritoneal Dialysis
    Calcium, Phosphate, and Renal Osteodystrophy
    Cardiovascular Disease and Inflammation
    Vascular Calcification in Chronic Kidney Disease
    Anemia in PD Patients
    Chronic Peritoneal Dialysis in the Elderly
    Long-Term Peritoneal Dialysis Patients
    Peritoneal Dialysis in Diabetic End-Stage Renal Disease
    Peritoneal Dialysis in Children
    Intraperitoneal Chemotherapy
    Peritoneal Dialysis in Developing Countries.
    Digital Access Springer Live 2020-
    Continuously updated edition
  • Digital
    Todd W. Vanderah.
    Contents:
    Introduction to the nervous system
    Development of the nervous system
    Gross anatomy and general organization of the central nervous system
    Meningeal coverings of the brain and spinal cord
    Ventricles and cerebrospinal fluid
    Blood supply of the brain
    Electrical signaling by neurons
    Synaptic transmission between neurons
    Sensory receptors and the peripheral nervous system
    Spinal cord
    Organization of the brainstem
    Cranial nerves and their nuclei
    The chemical senses of taste and smell
    Hearing and balance : the eighth cranial nerve
    Brainstem summary
    The thalamus and internal capsule : getting to and from the cerebral cortex
    The visual system
    Overview of motor systems
    Basal ganglia
    Cerebellum
    Control of eye movements
    Cerebral cortex
    Drives and emotions : the hypothalamus and limbic system
    Formation, modification, and repair of neuronal connections.
    Digital Access ClinicalKey 2019
  • Digital
    Todd W. Vanderah.
    Summary: "In the 5th Edition of this highly accessible atlas, Dr. Todd Vanderah continues the mission of his esteemed colleague, Dr. John "Jack" Nolte, to clearly depict and explain the challenging subject of neuroanatomy. Designed to promote a rapid understanding of complex concepts, Nolte's The Human Brain in Photographs and Diagrams combines easy-to-digest coverage of the brain, spinal cord, and brainstem with carefully selected visuals to cover all aspects of the information needed for success in coursework, on exams, and in clerkships and clinical "--Publisher's description.

    Contents:
    External anatomy of the brain
    Transverse sections of the spinal cord
    Transverse sections of the brainstem
    Building a brain : three-dimensional reconstructions
    Coronal sections
    Axial sections
    Sagittal sections
    Functional systems
    Clinical imaging
    An introduction to neuropathology.
    Digital Access ClinicalKey 2020
  • Digital
    Elisabetta Bugianesi, editor.
    Summary: The goal of this book is to promote awareness of non-alcoholic fatty liver disease (NAFLD) - which is rapidly replacing viral hepatitis as the leading cause of chronic liver disease in Europe, North and South America and Asia - and to share the latest information on evolving approaches to diagnosis and treatment. The book offers a comprehensive overview of the current topics of interest in the field, and provides clinical guidance on NAFLD through a multidisciplinary approach based on the latest scientific understanding of this multisystemic disease, involving the expertise of specialists including hepatologists, diabetologists, and cardiologists. The respective contributions address various aspects, including the newly released international guidelines, novel diagnostic modalities, and new experimental drugs. The work will appeal to a broad readership, from residents in internal medicine to specialists.

    Contents:
    Introduction
    Obesity and NAFLD: same problem? The burden of NAFLD worldwide
    Histo-pathology of NAFLD
    NAFLD and insulin resistance: a multisystemic
    Etiopathogenesis of NAFLD: diet, gut and NASH
    Etiopathogenesis of NAFLD: molecular mechanisms of fibrogenesis
    The natural history of NAFLD: Environmental vs Genetic Risk Factors
    NAFLD and endocrine disease: clinical implications
    NAFLD and Cardiovascular Disease: clinical implications
    NAFLD, Hepatocellular Carcinoma and extrahepatic cancers
    NAFLD in children: implications for the future
    Diagnostic algorithm for the identification of NAFLD in primary care
    Non-Invasive diagnostic approach to NASH: Biological Markers
    Non-Invasive diagnostic approach to NASH: Radiological Diagnostics
    Dietary approach to NAFLD
    Physical Activity in NAFLD: what and how much? Pharmacological Therapy of NASH
    Bariatric Surgery and NASH: a feasible option? Liver transplantation and NASH
    Unmet needs and future goals.
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    edited by Michael D. Geschwind, Caroline Racine Belkoura.
    Contents:
    The multidisciplinary evaluation of the atypical dementia patient / Michael D. Geschwind & Caroline Racine Belkoura
    Atypical Alzheimer's disease (AD) / Sharon J. Sha and Gil D. Rabinovici
    Vascular cognitive impairment (VCI) : diagnosis and treatment / Helena C. Chui and Liliana Ramirez Gomez
    Frontotemporal dementia (FTD) / David C. Perry and Howard J. Rosen
    Lewy body dementias (DLB/PDD) / Carol F. Lippa and Katherine L. Possin
    Corticobasal degeneration (CPD) and progressive supranuclear palsy (PSP) / Suzee E. Lee and Bruce L. Miller
    Repeat expansion diseases and dementia / Praveen Dayalu, Roger L. Albin, and Henry Paulson
    Prion diseases and rapidly progressive dementias / Leonel T. Takada and Michael D. Geschwind
    Autoimmune dementias / Andrew McKeon and Sean J. Pittock
    Toxic and metabolic dementias / Michelle Mattingly, Katie E. Osborn, and Leon Prockop
    Leukoencephalopathies/leukodystrophies / Gregory M. Pastores and Swati A. Sathe
    Infectious causes of dementia / Cheryl A. Jay, Emily L. Ho, and John J. Halperin
    Rheumatologic and other autoimmune dementias / Laura J. Julian and Christopher M. Filley
    Comprehensive management of the patient with an atypical dementia / Jennifer Merrilees, Cynthia Barton, Amy Kuo, and Robin Ketelle.
    Digital Access Wiley 2016
  • Digital
    Daan J.A. Crommelin, Jon S.B. de Vlieger, editors.
    Contents:
    Introduction: defining the position of non-biological complex drugs
    Polymeric micelles
    Liposomes: the science and the regulatory landscape
    Glatiramoids
    Iron carbohydrate complexes: characteristics and regulatory challenges
    Drug nanocrystals
    Analytical methods for determining the size (distribution) in parenteral dispersions
    NBCD pharmacokinetics and bioanalytical methods to meaure drug release
    Low molecular weight heparins, biological drugs close to non-biological complex drugs
    Nanoparticle albumin-bound anticancer agents
    The EU regulatory landscape of non-biological complex drugs
    Epilogue: What did we learn? What can we expect in the future? Concluding remarks and outstanding issues
    Index.
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Digital/Print
    Dagmar Wilhelm, Pascal Bernard, editors.
    Contents:
    1. The reproductive system
    2. Non-coding RNAs: an introduction
    3. How many non-coding RNAs does it take to compensate male/female genetic imbalance?
    4. The piRNA pathway guards the germline genome against transposable elements
    5. Non-coding RNA in spermatogenesis and epididymal maturation
    7. Non-coding RNAs in mammary gland development and disease
    8. Non-coding RNAs in prostate cancer: from discovery to clinical applications
    9. Non-coding RNAs in uterine development, function and disease
    Index.
    Digital Access Springer 2016
  • Digital
    Muller Fabbri, editor.
    Contents:
    Introduction / Muller Gabbri
    Biogenesis and physiology of microRNAs / Carlos A. Melo and Sonia A. Melo
    Detecting noncoding RNA expression : from arrays to next-generation sequencing / Catalina Perdomo, Joshua Campbell, and Frank Schembri
    MicroRNAs in solid tumors / Jin Wang and Subrata Sen
    MicroRNAs in hematologic malignancies / Johannes Bloehdorn ... [et al.]
    miRNAs as cancer biomarkers / Edward R. Sauter
    Unraveling the complex network of interactions between noncoding RNAs and epigenetics in cancer / Veronica Davalos and Manel Esteller
    MicroRNA SNPs in cancer / Yujing LI and Peng Jin
    Bioinformatics approaches to the study of MircoRNAs / Ravi Gupta and Ramana V. Davuluri
    Beyond miRNAs : role of other noncoding RNAs in cancer / Roxana S. Redis and George A. Calin
    Translational implication for noncoding RNA in cancer / Duaa Dakhallah, Melissa Piper, and S. Patrick Nana-Sinkam.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    Paul Holvoet ; illustrations by Pieterjan Ginckels.
    Summary: This book gives insight into the functional role of non-coding RNAs in central pathways contributing to the development of obesity, type 2 diabetes, non-alcoholic fatty liver disease, atherosclerosis, myocardial infarction, cardiomyopathy, and heart failure. It also sheds light on the relationship of this cluster with cancer. Tumor cells, in contrast to cells in cardiometabolic tissues, can regulate this cluster of non-coding RNAs to escape from oxidative stress and anti-tumor immunity and maintain insulin sensitivity, facilitating cancer progression. The book presents a cluster of non-coding RNAs that may be prospectively analyzed in extensive cohort studies to determine their value in risk-predicting machine learning algorithms. In addition, it emphasizes the role of microvesicles in communication between tumor-adjacent tissue, inflammatory cells, and tumor cells, with a special focus on the role of miR-155. The book intends to promote interdisciplinary research. Due to the comprehensive background information provided in each chapter, it is suitable for researchers in academia and industry and for graduate students in biology, bioengineering, and medicine. .

    Contents:
    Biogenesis and Modes of Action Of miRs And Circular And Long Non-coding RNAs
    Non-coding RNAs Related to Obesity
    Non-coding RNAs Related to Type 2 Diabetes
    Non-coding RNAs Related to Lipid Metabolism and Non-Alcoholic Fatty Liver Disease
    Non-coding RNAs Related to Atherosclerosis
    Non-coding RNAs Related to Cardiomyopathy and Heart Failure
    Non-coding RNAs Related to Cardiometabolic Diseases and Associated to Cancer
    Regulation of Non-coding RNAs in Cardiometabolic Tissues and Tumors
    Communication between Tumor-Adjacent Tissues and Tumors with Emphasis on Role of Inflammatory Cells
    The Impact of Non-coding RNA Networks on Disease Comorbidity: Cardiometabolic Diseases, Inflammatory Diseases, and Cancer.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    Junjie Xiao, editor.
    Summary: This book presents the latest research on non-coding RNAs in cardiovascular disease, a major cause of death worldwide. Non-coding RNAs play a significant role in development, proliferation, differentiation and apoptosis. Since altered non-coding RNA expression is often associated with various diseases, their potential use in diagnostics, prognostics and therapeutics is an important current area of study. The book consists of six parts: 1) An overview of non-coding RNAs and cardiovascular system, 2) Bioinformatics and interactions, 3) Non-coding RNA regulation in cardiovascular system, 4) Non-coding RNAs and cardiovascular diseases, 5) Potential biomarkers and therapeutic implications, 6) Future prospects. It is particularly useful for researchers and students in the field of non-coding RNA and cardiovascular biology, as well as for cardiologists, pharmacologists and physiologists.

    Contents:
    3 Analysis of ncRNA Functions by Computational Methods Intro
    Contents
    Part I: Overview
    1: An Overview of Non-coding RNAs and Cardiovascular System
    1 Background
    1.1 Discovery of Non-coding RNAs
    1.2 Types of Non-coding RNAs
    1.3 Classification of Long Non-coding RNAs
    1.3.1 Classification of Long Non-coding RNAs According to Structural Organization
    1.3.2 Functional Classification of Long ncRNAs
    2 Methods to Study Non-coding RNAs
    3 Mechanisms of Non-coding RNAs Regulation
    3.1 The Transcriptional Regulation Control
    3.2 The Post-transcriptional Regulation Control
    3.3 miRNA-Independent mRNA Degradation 3.4 Transient lncRNA Transcribed from Active Enhancers
    3.5 eRNA as Enhancer in Calcium Signalling
    4 LncRNA Genes with Enhancer-like Activity
    5 Micro RNAs as a Source of Non-coding RNA
    5.1 Micro RNA as Negative Regulator of Gene Expression
    6 Circular RNAs (CircRNAs) as Non-coding RNAs
    7 Non-Coding RNA Functions
    7.1 Functions of Long Non-coding RNAs
    7.2 Micro RNAs as Non-coding RNAs in Cardiovascular Diseases
    7.3 Role of Long Non-coding RNA in Cardiovascular Diseases
    7.4 Long Non-coding RNA in Myocardial Infarction and Atherosclerosis 7.5 Non-Coding RNAs in Apoptosis Linked Cardiovascular Pathologies
    7.5.1 Micro RNAs as Regulator of Apoptosis
    7.5.2 Long Non-coding RNAs in Apoptosis
    8 miRNA as Therapeutic Target in Cardiovascular Diseases
    8.1 Role in Acute Myocardial Infarction
    8.2 Role in Fibrosis
    8.3 Role of miRNA in Cardiac Hypertrophy and Failure
    8.4 Role of miRNA in Atherosclerosis and Remodeling
    8.5 miRNA as a Therapeutic Approach for CVDs
    9 miRNA Modification
    9.1 Antisense Oligonucleotides
    9.2 siRNAs
    9.3 Restoration of miRNA Levels 9.4 Therapeutic Potential of AntagomiRs
    9.5 Therapeutic Potential of LNA AntimiRs
    9.6 Challenges for AntimiR
    10 miRNAs as Biomarker
    10.1 miRNA as Biomarker in Atherosclerosis
    10.2 miRNAs as Biomarker in Ischemic Stroke
    10.3 miRNAs as Biomarker in Hypertension
    10.4 miRNAs as Biomarker in Hypertrophy and Heart Failure
    11 The Role of Long Non-coding RNA in Cardiovascular System
    11.1 Role of lncRNA in Myocardial Infarction
    11.2 Role of lncRNA in Cardiac Fibrosis and Hypertrophy
    11.3 Role of lncRNA in Atherosclerosis and Angiogenesis 12 Targeting lncRNA for the Treatment of Cardiovascular Diseases
    12.1 Restoration of lncRNA by Overexpression
    12.2 Circulating LnRNA as Biomarkers for Cardiovascular Diseases
    12.3 Challenges for lncRNA Therapeutics
    References
    Part II: Bioinformatics and Interactions
    2: Bioinformatics Research Methodology of Non-coding RNAs in Cardiovascular Diseases
    1 Introduction
    2 Wet-Lab Methodological Considerations
    2.1 Sample Preparation
    2.2 Non-coding RNA Quantification
    2.3 Data Processing from Quantification Methods
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital/Print
    Ondrej Slaby, George A. Calin, editors.
    Contents:
    Introduction.-Part I Non-coding RNAs: biology and implications in colorectal cancer pathogenesis.-Non-coding RNAs: classification, biology and functioning.-Involvement of non-coding RNAs in hallmarks and key signaling pathways of colorectal cancer.-MicroRNAs and inflammation in colorectal cancer
    Interplay between transcription factors and microRNAs regulating epithelial-mesenchymal transitions in colorectal cancer
    Non-coding RNAs functioning in colorectal cancer stem cells
    MicroRNA Methylation in Colorectal Cancer
    Polymorphisms in non-coding RNA genes and their targets sites as risk factors of sporadic colorectal cancer
    Part II Non-coding RNAs: new class of biomarkers in colorectal cancer
    Non-coding RNAs as biomarkers for colorectal cancer screening and early detection
    Circulating non-coding RNAs as biomarkers in colorectal cancer
    Non-coding RNAs enabling prognostic stratification and prediction of therapeutic response in colorectal cancer patients
    Part III Non-coding RNAs: therapeutic targets and colorectal cancer therapeutics
    Involvement of non-coding RNAs in chemo- and radioresistance of colorectal cancer
    Non-coding RNAs: therapeutic strategies and delivery systems
    MicroRNAs as therapeutic targets and colorectal cancer therapeutics
    Summary
    Index.
    Digital Access Springer 2016
  • Digital
    Xia Li, Juan Xu, Yun Xiao, Shangwei Ning, Yunpeng Zhang, editors.
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Digital
    Andriy Sibirny, editor.
    Summary: This volume scopes several aspects of non-conventional yeast research prepared by the leading specialists in the field. An introduction on taxonomy and systematics enhances the readers knowledge on yeasts beyond established ones such as Saccharomyces cerevisiae. Biotechnological approaches that involve fungal utilization of unusual substrates, production of biofuels and useful chemicals as citric acid, glutathione or erythritol are discussed. Further, strategies for metabolic engineering based on knowledge on regulation of gene expression as well as sensing and signaling pathways are presented. The book targets researchers and advanced students working in Microbiology, Microbial Biotechnology and Biochemistry.

    Contents:
    1. Utilization of ?-glucosidic disaccharides by Ogataea (Hansenula) polymorpha: genes, proteins and regulation
    2. Biotechnological application of non-conventional yeasts for xylose valorization
    3. Application of non-Saccharomyces yeast in wine production
    4. Citric acid production by Yarrowia lipolytica
    5. Effective technologies to isolate yeast oxido-reductases of analytical importance
    6. Glutathione metabolism in yeasts and construction of the advanced producers of this tripeptide
    7. Nitrogen assimilation pathways in budding yeasts
    8. Microtubules in non-conventional yeast
    9. Systematics, diversity and ecology of the genus Yarrowia and the methanol-assimilating yeasts
    10. Anhydrobiosis in the non-conventional yeasts
    11. Non-conventional yeasts for producing alternative beers
    12. Yeasts for bioconversion of crude glycerol to high-value chemicals
    13. Frontier in antifungal treatments against major human fungal opportunistic pathogen Candida species and other medically important yeasts
    14. Glucose sensing and regulation in yeasts
    15. L-Cysteine metabolism found in Saccharomyces cerevisiae and Ogataea parapolymorpha
    16. Strategies at bioreactor-scale for the production of recombinant proteins in <i>Yarrowia lipolytica</i>.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    Alexander Lerman.
    Summary: This volume is to examine the phenomena of non-disclosure in its wide ranging forms, study its properties, and to deepen the capacity of a mental health professional --as well as all clinicians who provide mental health counseling -- to detect and engage it across a range of clinical settings. Unengaged, sustained DNDD represents an impasse that is destructive to a clinician's capacity to both understand and treat a patient. Successfully engaged, on the other hand, DNDD offers a unique perspective on in individuals anxieties, presuppositions, and mental functioning. A clinician who is both aware that a patient is withholding information, and comfortable with that awareness, may approach the patient material while listening for both indications of non-disclosed material and--critically--a growing awareness of psychopathology or other motivational forces driving non-disclosure. Written by experts in this area from both adult and child psychiatric specialties, this book is the first to address the issue of DNDD and present clinical pearls for addressing it. This text is a valuable resource for psychiatrists, psychologists, addiction medicine specialists, family physicians, and a wide array of clinicians treating patients who may struggle with disclosure and integrity.

    Contents:
    Part I: DND & The Clinical Encounter
    A Personal Encounter with Deceit
    The Psychiatric Interview
    Types of Interviews, and Types of Listening
    Therapeutic and Anti-therapeutic Relationships
    Engaging Deceit
    Deceit and Its Meaning
    Part II: Personality Functioning and DND
    Neurobiology of Deception
    Shared Consciousness and the Emergence of Mind
    Personality Disorders, Psychopathy and Deceit
    Non-disclosure, Deceit and Denial in Patients with Substance Use Disorders
    Assessment and Implications for Psychotherapeutic Treatment
    Part III: Assessment in a "Gated" Simulated Patient Interview
    "Biggie" Assessing Process in a "Gated" Simulated Patient Interview
    Simulated Case Scenario: Karl Moehller.
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    editor, Fulvio Amato.
    Summary: Non-Exhaust Emissions: An Urban Air Quality Problem for Public Health comprehensively summarizes the most recent research in the field, also giving guidance on research gaps and future needs to evaluate the health impact and possible remediation of non-exhaust particle emissions. With contributions from some of the major experts and stakeholders in air quality, this book comprehensively defines the state-of-the-art of current knowledge, gaps and future needs for a better understanding of particulate matter (PM) emissions, from non-exhaust sources of road traffic to improve public health. PM is a heterogeneous mix of chemical elements and sources, with road traffic being the major source in large cities. A significant part of these emissions come from non-exhaust processes, such as brake, tire, road wear, and road dust resuspension. While motor exhaust emissions have been successfully reduced by means of regulation, non-exhaust emissions are currently uncontrolled and their importance is destined to increase and become the dominant urban source of particle matter by 2020. Nevertheless, current knowledge on the non-exhaust emissions is still limited. This is an essential book to researchers and advanced students from a broad range of disciplines, such as public health, toxicology, atmospheric sciences, environmental sciences, atmospheric chemistry and physics, geochemistry, epidemiology, built environment, road and vehicle engineering, and city planning. In addition, European and local authorities responsible for air quality and those in the industrial sectors related to vehicle and brake manufacturing and technological remediation measures will also find the book valuable.

    Contents:
    Current state of particulate air quality / Philip K. Hopke, Roy M. Harrison, Frank de Leeuw, Xavier Querol
    Vehicle non-exhaust emissions: impact on air quality / Elio Padoan, Fulvio Amato
    Impact on public health: epidemiological studies / Massimo Stafoggia, Annunziata Faustini
    Regulation on brake/tire composition / Theodoros Grigoratos
    European emission inventories and projections for road transport non-exhaust emissions / Hugo Denier Van Der Gon, Jan Hulskotte, Magdalena Jozwicka, Richard Kranenburg, Jeroen Kuenen, Antoon Visschedijk
    Review of brake wear emissions / Jana Kukutschová, Peter Filip
    Review of tire wear emissions / Julie Panko, Marisa Kreider, Kenneth Unice
    Review of road wear emissions / Mats Gustafsson
    Review of road dust emissions / Bruce R. Denby, Kaarle J. Kupiainen, Mats Gustafsson
    Technological measures for brake wear emission reduction / Sebastian Gramstat
    Non-technological measures on road traffic to abate urban air pollution / Xavier Querol, Fulvio Amato, Francesc Robusté, Claire Holman, Roy M. Harrison
    Non-exhaust PM emissions from battery electric vehicles / Victor R.J.H. Timmers, Peter A.J. Achten
    Air quality in subway systems / Teresa Moreno, Vânia Martins, Cristina Reche, Maria Cruz Minguillón, Eladio de Miguel, Xavier Querol.
    Digital Access ScienceDirect 2018
  • Digital/Print
    Andrew M. Evens, Kristie A. Blum, editors.
    Summary: This book provides clinical practitioners and the research community with detailed information on the diagnosis, prognosis, and treatment of non-Hodgkin lymphoma, taking into account the significant growth in knowledge including multiple therapeutic advances that have been achieved over the past 5-10 years. The work is subdivided into epidemiology, pathogenesis, pathology, imaging, and therapy of the non-Hodgkin lymphomas. The full range of therapeutic options are examined according to the major subtypes of non-Hodgkin lymphoma and the most up-to-date information is provided on current standard treatment options, including stem cell transplantation as well as new cutting-edge therapeutics.

    Contents:
    Allogeneic Hematopoietic Cell Transplantation in Non-Hodgkin's Lymphomas
    Management of Diffuse Large B-cell Lymphoma
    Epidemiology and Etiology of Non-Hodgkin Lymphoma
    Current Therapeutic Strategies and New Treatment Paradigms for Follicular Lymphoma
    Gene Expression Profiling in Non-Hodgkin lymphomas
    Management of the Marginal Zone Lymphomas
    Treatment Strategies in Mantle Cell Lymphoma
    Pathology of B-cell Lymphomas: Diagnosis and Biomarker Discovery
    Pathology of T-cell lymphomas: Diagnosis and Biomarker Discovery
    Imaging of non-Hodgkin lymphomas: Diagnosis and Response-Adapted Strategies
    Current Management of Peripheral T-cell lymphomas
    Post Transplant Lymphoproliferative Disorders
    Biology, Prognosis and Therapy of Waldenström Macroglobulinemia
    Prognosis and Therapy of Chronic Lymphocytic Leukemia and Small Lymphocytic Lymphoma.
    Digital Access Springer 2015
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Books: General Collection (Downstairs)
    RC280.L9 N66 2015
    1
  • Digital
    Oussama Abla, Andishe Attarbaschi, editors.
    Summary: This text provides a state-of-the-art overview on Non-Hodgkin's lymphoma (NHL) in children and adolescents. The volume is divided into seven sections, each of which focuses on a critical component of pediatric NHL, including history and epidemiology, pathology and molecular biology, disease evaluation and response, common and rare sub-types of NHL, and current and novel treatment strategies. The text also comprehensively reviews the late effects of treatment, quality of patient life, and NHL treatment in countries with limited resources.

    Contents:
    Part I: Introduction: 1. History of diagnoses and treatment strategies in pediatric non-Hodgkin's lymphomas / Georg Mann
    2. Epidemiology of non-Hodgkin lymphomas in childhood and adolescence / Nirav Thacker and Oussama Abla
    3. Diagnosis and classification / Thierry Jo Molina. Part II: Pathology and molecular biology: 4. Pathogenesis of B-cell lymphoma / Rabea Wagener, Cristina López, and Reiner Siebert
    5. Pathogenesis of T-non-Hodgkin's lymphoma / Jonathan Bond and Owen Patrick Smith
    6. The pathogenesis of anaplastic large cell lymphoma / Suzanne Dawn Turner
    7. Pathology / Christoph Kornauth, Ana-Iris Schiefer, and Ingrid Simonitsch-Klupp
    8 Genetic predisposition to non-Hodgkin lymphoma / Oskar A. Haas and Arndt Borkhardt. Part III: Evaluation: 9. Response assessment in pediatric non-Hodgkin lymphoma / Tony H. Truong and Veronique Minard-Colin
    10. Minimal disseminated and minimal residual disease in pediatric non-Hodgkin lymphoma / Lara Mussolin, Christine Damm-Welk, and Wilhelm Woessmann
    11. Prognostic factors in childhood and adolescent non-Hodgkin lymphoma / Marta Pillon, Ana C. Xavier, and Mitchell S. Cairo. Part IV: Lymphoblastic lymphoma: 12. Lymphoblastic lymphoma / Birgit Burkhardt and Birte Wistinghausen. Part V: Mature B-non-Hodgkin's lymphoma: 13. Burkitt lymphoma and diffuse large B-cell lymphoma / Grace Egan, Sheila Weitzman, and Sarah Alexander
    14. Primary mediastinal and gray zone lymphomas / Lisa Giulino-Roth and Kieron Dunleavy
    15. Epstein-Barr virus-associated post-transplantation lymphoproliferative disease / Ashley V. Geerlinks, Thomas G. Gross, and Angela S. Punnett
    16. Pediatric-type follicular lymphoma (PTFL) / Andishe Attarbaschi
    17. Marginal zone lymphoma / Birgit Burkhardt
    18. Primary central nervous system lymphoma / Oussama Abla, Tracy T. Batchelor, and Andishe Attarbaschi
    19. Rare B-cell non-Hodgkin's lymphomas in childhood and adolescence / Auke Beishuizen, Vasiliki Tzotzola, Lena Uzunova, and Amos Burke. Part VI: Mature T-non-Hodgkin's lymphoma: 20. Anaplastic large cell lymphoma in children and adolescents / Eric J. Lowe and Laurence Brugieres
    21. Peripheral T-cell lymphoma / Karin Mellgren and Udo Kontny
    22. Extranodal NK-/T-cell lymphomas and EBV+ lymphoproliferative diseases of childhood / Chinadol Wanitpongpun and Ritsuro Suzuki
    23. Cutaneous T-cell lymphomas in childhood and adolescence / Rein Willemze. Part VII: Treatment: 24. Principles of immunotherapy / Stanton Goldman and Jessica Hochberg
    25. Hematopoietic stem cell transplantation / Tetsuya Mori and Tomoo Osumi
    26. Novel therapies in paediatric NHL / Amos Burke, Joerg Krueger, and Birte Wistinghausen
    27. Childhood and adolescence non-Hodgkin lymphomas in low- and middle-income countries / Nmazuo W. Ozuah and Nader Kim El-Mallawany
    28. Long-term outcomes in survivors of childhood and adolescent non-Hodgkin lymphoma / Paul C. Nathan, Karin P. S. Langenberg-Ververgaert, and Noelle Cullinan.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    Stefano Nava, Francesco Fanfulla.
    Summary: Over the last two decades, the increasing use of noninvasive ventilation (NIV) has reduced the need for endotracheal ventilation, thus decreasing the rate of ventilation-induced complications. Thus, NIV has decreased both intubation rates and mortality rates in specific subsets of patients with acute respiratory failure (for example, patients with hypercapnia, cardiogenic pulmonary edema, immune deficiencies, or post-transplantation acute respiratory failure). Despite the increased use of NIV in clinical practice, there is still a need for more educational tools to improve clinicians' knowledge of the indications and contraindications for NIV, the factors that predict failure or success, and also what should be considered when starting NIV. This book has the dual function of being a "classical" text where the major findings in the literature are discussed and highlighted, as well as a practical manual on the tricks and pitfalls to consider in NIV application by both beginners and experts. For example, setting the ventilatory parameters; choosing the interfaces, circuits, and humidification systems; monitoring; and the "right " environment for the "right" patient will be discussed to help clinicians in their choices.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    edited by Roi Cohen Kadosh, Tino Zaehle, Kerstin Krauel.
    Contents:
    1. Cortical current density magnitudes during transcranial direct current stimulation correlate with skull thickness in children, adolescent and young adults / Alexander Hunold
    2. Potential targets for the treatment of ADHD using transcranial alternating current simulation / Christoph S. Herrmann
    3. Neuroplasticity and non-invasive brain stimulation in the developing brain / Igor D. Bandeira
    4. Effects of transcranial stimulation in developmental neurocognitive disorders: A critical appraisal / Flavia H. Santos, Jochen A. Mosbacher, Deny Menghini, Katya Rubia, Roland H. Grabner and Roi Cohen Kadosh
    5. Transcranial direct current stimulation in ADHD: A meta-analysis of clinical efficacy outcomes / Alexander Prehn-Kristensen, Carolin Breitling-Ziegler and Vera Moliadze
    6. Five-day application of HD-tDCS to the right IFG in children and adolescents with ADHD / Carolin Breitling-Ziegler-- 7. Effects of a short, intensive, multi-session tDCS treatment in developmental dyslexia: preliminary results of a sham-controlled randomized clinical trial / Deny Menghini and Stefano Vicari
    8. Dysfunctional auditory gamma oscillations in developmental dyslexia: A potential target for a tACS-based intervention / Katharina S. Rufener and Tino Zaehle
    9. Effects of anodal high-definition transcranial direct current stimulation (HD-tDCS) on social-cognitive performance in healthy subjects: A randomized sham-controlled crossover pilot study / Helena Catarina Pereira and Miguel Castelo-Branco
    10. Brain stimulation by tDCS as treatment option in Autism-Spectrum-Disorder: A systematic literature review and critical discussion / Christina Luckhardt
    11. Impact of chronic tRNS on prefrontal cortex excitation-inhibition balance in young mice / Javier Marquez Ruiz
    12. NIBS to rehabilitate neurodevelopmental disorders: A study on professionals' beliefs / Alessandro Antonietti
    13. Transcranial direct-current stimulation and pediatric attention deficit hyperactivity disorder (ADHD)
    findings from an interview ethics study with children, adolescents, and their parents / Anna Karolina Sierawska, Kerstin Krauel and Michael Siniatchkin
    14. From Adults to Pediatrics: A Review of Noninvasive Brain Stimulation (NIBS) to Facilitate Recovery from Brain Injury / Badran W. Bashar, Patty C. Coker-Bolt, Mark George, Marom Bikson and Bernadette Gillick
    15. Transcutaneous vagus nerve stimulation in patients with attention-deficit hyperactivity disorder: Current Evidence and Opinion / Tino Zaehle.
    Digital Access ScienceDirect 2021
  • Digital
    Bernardo Dell'Osso, Giorgio Di Lorenzo, editors.
    Summary: This book presents the state of the art regarding the use of non-invasive brain stimulation (TMS and tDCS) in the research and treatment of neuropsychiatric disorders. The contributions, all of which were prepared by internationally recognized experts in the field, are divided into two main sections (for TMS and tDCS, respectively) across diagnoses, following an introductory section on the mechanisms of action and neurophysiological background. Neuropsychological perspectives and approaches are provided as well. The book is ultimately intended to offer a unique, integrated approach to the use of non-invasive brain stimulation across the clinical neurosciences, providing a comprehensive and updated perspective that will benefit psychiatrists, neurologists, clinical psychologists and neurophysiologists alike.

    Contents:
    Foreword. Preface
    SECTION 1: Introducing NIBS: from research to clinical practice: Neurophysiological bases and mechanisms of action of Transcranial Magnetic Stimulation. Neurophysiological bases and mechanisms of action of Transcranial Direct Current Stimulation. Safety and guidelines recommendations of NIBS interventions. The role of transcranial brain stimulation in integrative neuroscience. NIBS as a research tool in clinical and translational neuroscience
    SECTION 2: TMS and its applications in neuropsychiatry and clinical neuroscience: Depressive Disorders. TMS in Psychotic Disorders. TMS in Obsessive Compulsive Disorder. TMS in ADHD and Impulse Control Disorders. Use of TMS in neurodevelopmental and motor disorders. Use of TMS in addiction. Use of TMS in Dementia. TMS applications in patients with Anxiety Disorders. Transcranial Magnetic Stimulation for cognitive neuroscience. Applications and open questions. TMS combined with EEG to study psychiatric and neurological disorders
    SECTION 3: tDCS and its applications in neuropsychiatry and clinical neuroscience: tDCS in Depressive Disorders. tDCS in Psychotic Disorders. tDCS in Obsessive Compulsive Disorder. tDCS in addiction. The use of tDCS in neurodevelopmental and motor disorders. tDCS in Anxiety Disorders. The use of tES in dementia: from pathophysiology to treatment. Neuropsychological, emotional and cognitive investigations with tDCS. Research perspectives of tES in clinical neurosciences. Conclusions. .
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    Enzo Berardesca, Howard Maibach, Klaus Wilhelm, editors.
    Summary: This book is a comprehensive but compact guide to the latest technical and technological developments in the growing field of non invasive diagnosis in clinical dermatology. Information is provided on the practical and technical characteristics of a wide range of equipment and methods for in vivo measurements that aid in the investigation of skin function, the evaluation of topically applied products, and the monitoring of skin disease. Individual sections are devoted to imaging techniques, skin analysis, superficial skin analysis, skin mechanics, water and stratum corneum hydration, and erythema and blood flow. All of the authors are experts in the field, with detailed knowledge of the techniques they describe. Non Invasive Diagnostic Techniques in Clinical Dermatology will be of value for all dermatologists, whether they are engaged in delivering patient care or in research programs, for cosmetic scientists, and for biologists involved in skin research and product assessment.

    Contents:
    Imaging Techniques
    Skin Analysis
    Superficial skin Analysis
    Water and Stratum Corneum Hydration
    Erythema and Blood Flow
    Hair and Follicles
    Nails.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    Penelope Mary Franklin, editor.
    Summary: This book explores key developments in Non-medical Prescribing in the UK. Addressing the needs of countries in the European Market and beyond, which have been closely watching UK developments and would be interested in embedding or developing counterparts of their own. Featuring chapters by clinicians, leaders and practitioners in the UK Non-medical Prescribing arena, it identifies both current and potential future developments. Attention is paid to the different prescribing practices and governance within the four countries constituting the United Kingdom. Many lessons have been learned along the way and the purpose of this book is to share these lessons, tog ether with best practice examples in connection with the implementation of nurse/health professional led patient care, implementation of patient centered practice, and governance. Designated Registered Practitioners who have completed an enhanced training now receive a professional body qualification which enables them to prescribe within their scope of practice as Non-medical Independent Prescribers and, providing that they are competent, from anywhere within the British National Formulary independently of doctors; for Nurses, this also includes most controlled drugs. The book will be of interest to policy makers and to forward-looking professionals and practitioners in the diverse European Health and Social Care market.
    Digital Access Springer 2017
  • Digital
    Othon Papadopoulos, editor-in-chief ; Nikolaos A. Papadopulos, Grigorios Champsas, editors.
    Summary: This book describes and illustrates the reconstructive surgical techniques appropriate in patients with skin cancer and melanoma, according to anatomic region, with a view to enabling readers to perform these techniques optimally. An extensive introductory section discusses skin cancer and melanoma from the points of view of dermatology, oncology, pathology, radiotherapy, nuclear medicine, and plastic and reconstructive surgery. The surgical treatment and reconstruction of localized skin cancer and melanoma in each anatomic region are then explained step by step with the aid of a wealth of color photos. The final section similarly presents the techniques and procedures appropriate for the surgical treatment and reconstruction of lymph node metastases, covering the sentinel node, lymphadenectomy, and lymphedema. This book will be immensely valuable for plastic and general surgeons, and also of interest for dermatologists, pathologists, oncologists, and nuclear medicine physicians.
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    Faruque Riffat, Carsten E. Palme, Michael Veness, editors.
    Summary: Non-melanoma skin cancer is a global public health issue. With an ever-increasing, and ageing, world population coupled with increasing numbers of immunosuppressed individuals the number of patients continues to rise. The head and neck is overwhelmingly the most frequent location for the development of a non-melanoma skin cancer and as such challenges the clinician with its complex anatomy. The importance of maintaining the aesthetics of the face and the function of the anatomy cannot be overstated, yet ultimately it is always the aim of curing a patient with the minimum of morbidity that clinicians strive for. However, the spectrum of presentations and subsequent management varies widely, ranging from patients with the ubiquitous low-risk mid-face basal cell carcinoma to those diagnosed with relatively uncommon but potentially life-threatening high-risk squamous cell carcinomas (e.g. involving metastatic lymph nodes or with perineural invasion present) and Merkel cell carcinomas.

    Contents:
    Epidemiology and aetiology of non-melanoma skin cancer
    Pathology reporting of non-melanoma skin cancer at the ICPMR.-Evaluation, staging and prognostication
    Non-melanoma skin cancer: Primary non-surgical therapies and prevention strategies
    Mohs surgery and facial flaps
    Merkel cell carcinoma, adnexal carcinoma and basal cell carcinoma
    The role of sentinel lymph node biopsy in non-melanoma skin cancer of the head and neck
    Metastatic cutaneous squamous cell carcinoma of the head and neck
    Managing perineural and skull base involvement
    Squamous cell carcinoma extending to the temporal bone
    Reconstructive options for the face
    Management of critically ill head and neck surgical patients
    Future directions in the management of non-melanoma skin cancer .
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Digital
    Raul S. Gonzalez, Kay Washington.
    Contents:
    Introduction
    Normal-Appearing Liver
    Portal Inflammation
    Lobular Changes
    Biliary/Vascular Changes
    Cholestasis
    Steatosis
    Fibrosis/Cirrhosis
    Granulomas
    Sinusoidal Changes
    Necrosis
    Pigment/Inclusions
    Transplant Liver Biopsies
    Pediatric Liver Biopsies
    Special Stains
    Index.
    Digital Access Springer 2016
  • Digital
    edited by Roger Feakins.
    Summary: "Prior to the development of the first fibre-optic endoscopes in the 1960's, gastroenterology, in common with other traditional medical specialties, relied on biochemical and radiological techniques in order to investigate the gastrointestinal tract. Histological confirmation of a disease process usually required the presence of a surgeon, was invasive, and carried inherent risks. Because of a rapid improvement in technology, we are now able to sample the entire gastrointestinal tract from the mouth and anus through to the ileal / jejunal junction"-- Provided by publisher.

    Contents:
    The value of gastrointestinal (GI) biopsy / Constantinos Parisinos, Vinay Sehgal and Gareth Parkes
    Gastrointestinal involvement by systemic disease / Adrian Bateman
    Radiation effect / Roger Feakins
    Transplantation, Immunodeficiency and iimmunosuppression / Newton Wong
    Drug-induced disease / Aoife McCarthy and Kieran Sheahan
    Ischaemia and vascular disorders / RomuloCelli and Xuchen Zhang
    Paediatric conditions / Paula Borralho-Nunes
    Dysplasia / Magali Svrcek and Roger Feakins
    Normal oesophageal, gastric and duodenal mucosa / Roger Feakins
    Gastro-oesophageal reflux and Barrett's oesophagus / Naziheh Assarzadegan and Maryam Kherad Pezhouh
    Infective oesophagitis and special types of oesophagitis / Shaun Walsh
    Assessment of gastric biopsies / Tim Andrews and Fiona Campbell
    Types of gastritis / Tim Andrews and Fiona Campbell
    Duodenitis and related conditions / Lindsey Clarke and Roger Feakins
    Coeliac disease and its mimics / Colan Ho-Yen and Fuju Chang
    Involvement of the upper gastrointestinal tract by inflammatory bowel disease / Roger Feakins
    Normal lower gastrointestinal mucosa / Roger Feakins
    Infective disorders of the lower gastrointestinal tract / Nicole Panarelli
    Jejunitis and ileitis / Karel Geboes and Anne Jouret-Mourin
    Microscopic colitis / Maurice Loughrey
    Inflammatory bowel disease: diagnosis / Roger Feakins
    Inflammatory bowel disease : histological mimics / Roger Feakins
    Inflammatory bowel disease : complications / Roger Feakins
    Inflammatory bowel disease: an approach to reporting / Roger Feakins
    Ileal pouch anal anastomosis / Shaun Walsh and Roger Feakins
    Diverticular disease, mucosal prolapse and related conditions / Lukasz Adamczyk and Neil Shepherd
    Anal lesions / Morgan Moorghen
    Digital Access Cambridge 2020
  • Digital
    Sanjay Mukhopadhyay.
    Summary: This generously illustrated textbook is a simple guide to the pathologic diagnosis of 'medical' lung disease, written by an expert, subspecialty-trained pulmonary pathologist. General surgical pathologists and pathology residents will find it accessible and full of practical pearls that can be used in real-life situations. The algorithms in this book provide a glimpse into the thought process of a subspecialist. They start with an abnormal histologic finding, and take the reader step by step to the correct diagnosis. Unlike most pathology textbooks, diseases are grouped on the basis of pathologic findings rather than etiology, mirroring the actual practice of surgical pathology. Another novel feature of this book is that it provides actual examples of pathology reports for each disease. Pathologists will find this book tremendously helpful when faced with difficult cases of interstitial lung disease or lung granulomas. It should be part of every surgical pathologist's library.
    Digital Access Cambridge 2016
  • Digital
    Matteo Balzarro, Vincenzo Li Marzi, editors.
    Summary: This book is exclusively devoted to the often-challenging diagnosis, management and treatment of patients with non-neurogenic bladder dysfunction. A unique team of experts in the field report on the state of the art and the latest trends concerning overactive and underactive bladder dysfunctions, while also discussing detrusor overactivity impaired contractility. Given its scope, the book will benefit all urologists, and offers a valuable tool for professionals and physicians who care and deal with patients with non-neurogenic bladder dysfunctions.

    Contents:
    Intro
    Foreword
    Preface
    Preface
    Contents
    1: Physiopathology of Overactive Bladder
    1.1 Definitions
    1.2 Pathophysiology
    1.3 Neurogenic Factors
    1.4 Non-neurogenic Factors
    1.4.1 Myogenic Factor
    1.4.2 Urotheliogenic Factor
    1.4.3 Bladder Outlet Obstruction
    1.4.4 Bladder Ischemia
    1.4.5 Inflammation
    1.4.6 Gender
    1.4.7 Psychological Factors
    References
    2: Diagnosis of Overactive Bladder
    2.1 The Initial Diagnostic Workup in the Uncomplicated OAB Patient
    2.1.1 History
    2.1.2 Physical Examination 2.1.3 Urinalysis and Urine Culture
    2.1.4 Voiding Diaries and Pad Testing
    2.1.5 Symptom Questionnaires and Scores
    2.2 The Diagnostic Workup in the Complicated OAB Patient
    2.2.1 Cystoscopy
    2.2.2 Urinary Tract Ultrasound
    2.2.3 Uroflowmetry
    2.2.4 Urodynamic Test
    References
    3: Treatment Options in Patients with Overactive Bladder: Initial and Pharmacological Management
    3.1 Introduction
    3.2 Initial Management of Overactive Bladder
    3.2.1 Lifestyle Modification
    3.3 Pharmacological Treatment of Overactive Bladder Symptoms
    3.3.1 Antimuscarinics Drugs 3.5.1.3 Cognitive Impairment
    3.5.1.4 Associate BOO
    3.5.1.5 Frail Older Patients
    References
    4: Treatment Options in Patients with Overactive Bladder: The Invasive Management
    4.1 Introduction
    4.2 Botulinum Toxin
    4.2.1 Molecular Structure and Mechanism of Action
    4.2.2 BoNTA Intradetrusor Injection
    4.2.3 BoNTA Efficacy
    4.2.4 Adverse Events
    4.3 Sacral Neuromodulation (SNM)
    4.3.1 Technique
    4.3.2 Mechanism of Action
    4.3.3 SNM Efficacy
    4.3.4 Adverse Events
    4.4 Percutaneous Tibial Nerve Stimulation
    4.4.1 PTNS Technique and Efficacy 4.5 Major Surgery
    4.5.1 Enterocystoplasty
    References
    5: Bladder Outlet Obstruction and Overactive Bladder in Females
    5.1 Lower Urinary Tract Symptoms' Epidemiology
    5.2 Bladder Outlet Obstruction Pathophysiology
    5.3 OAB Pathophysiology
    5.4 Diagnosis
    5.4.1 History
    5.4.2 Physical Examination
    5.4.3 Diagnostic Tools
    5.5 Management
    5.6 OAB Management
    5.7 BOO Management
    References
    6: Bladder Outlet Obstruction and Overactive Bladder in Males
    6.1 Definition
    6.2 Epidemiology
    6.3 Pathophysology
    6.4 Diagnosis
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    Jun Chen, John H. Zhang, Xiaoming Hu, editors.
    Contents:
    Part 1. Microvascular integrity in stroke
    1. Structural alterations to the endothelial tight junction complex during stroke
    2. Role of pericytes in neurovascular unite and stroke
    3. Glial support of blood-brain barrier integrity: Molecular targets for novel therapeutic strategies in stroke
    4. Barrier mechanism in neonatal stroke
    5. Angiogenesis: a realistic therapy for ischemic stroke
    Part 2. Glial cells in stroke
    6. Astrocytes as a target for ischemic stroke
    7. Microglia: a double-sided sword in stroke
    8. Crosstalk between cerebral endothelium and oligodendrocyte after stroke
    Part 3. Peripheral immune cells in stroke
    9. The peripheral immune response to stroke
    10. The Role of spleen-derived immune cells in ischemic brain injury
    11. Regulatory T cells in ischemic brain injury
    12. B cells in stroke and preconditioning-induced protection against stroke
    13. Mast cell as an early responder in ischemic brain injury
    14. Roles of neutrophils in stroke
    15. The function of cytokines in ischemic stroke
    Part 4. White matter injury and repair in stroke
    16. Ischemic injury to white matter: an age-dependent process
    17. Neurovascular repair after stroke
    18. The role of non-neuronal Nrf2 pathway in ischemic stroke: damage control and potential tissue repair
    19. Stem cell therapy for ischemic stroke.
    Digital Access Springer 2016
  • Digital
    [edited by] Mark S. Weiss, Lee A. Fleisher.
    Summary: The demand for anesthesiologists outside of the operating room continues to grow as the number of minimally invasive procedures proliferates and the complexity of diagnostic procedures undertaken outside of the OR increase. Non-Operating Room Anesthesia is an easy-to-access, highly visual reference that facilitates an in-depth understanding of NORA procedures and protocols needed to minimize risk and complications and to maximize growth opportunities. Effectively assess and manage risks and differences in procedures through in-depth discussion.

    Contents:
    Engineering excellence in non-operating room anesthesia care
    Designing safety and engineering standards for the non-operating room anesthesia procedure site
    Room setup, critical supplies, and medications
    The role of the non-operating room anesthetist
    Continuous quality improvement for non-operating room anesthesia locations
    Critical monitoring issues for non-operating room anesthesia
    Intravenous anesthesia and sedation outside the operating room
    Practice procedure
    Preoperative evaluations
    Anesthesia in the catheterization laboratory: valves and devices
    Anesthesia for electrophysiology procedures
    Anesthesia for cardioversion
    High-frequency ventilation for respiratory immobilization
    Anesthesia for upper gastrointestinal endoscopy
    Anesthesia for colonoscopy
    Anesthesia in the bronchoscopy suite
    Adult anesthesia in the radiology suite
    Pediatric anesthesia in the radiology suite
    Anesthesia concerns in the magnetic resonance imaging environment
    Scheduling anesthesia services outside the operating room
    Financial and operational analysis for non-operating room anesthesia
    Anesthesia and competititve strategies
    Development of future systems
    Novel staffing coverage for anesthesia outside the operating room.
    Digital Access ClinicalKey 2015
  • Digital
    Grant Cooper.
    Contents:
    Introduction
    Part I: Lumbar Spine Topics
    Anatomy of the Lumbar Spine
    Lower Back Pain: An Overview of the Most Common Causes
    Treatment of Acute Lower Back Pain.- When Are Imaging Studies Indicated, and What Do They Tell Us?- Discogenic Lower Back Pain.- Facet Joint Arthropathy.- Sacroiliac Joint Pain.- Spondylolisthesis.- Spondylolysis
    Lumbar Radiculopathy.- Piriformis Syndrome.- Spinal Stenosis
    Compression Fractures.- Epidural Steroid Injections: Dispelling Common Myths
    Red Flag Signs and Symptoms.- Exercises for Lower Back Pain.- The Mind-Body Connection: Is Stress Important?- Alternative Treatments
    Part II: Case Scenarios.
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Digital
    edited by Deborah A. Hall, Brandon R. Barton.
    Contents:
    Approach to movement disorders / Deborah Hall and Brandon Barton
    Hypokinetic (non-Parkinsonian) movement disorders / Shyamal H. Mehta and Alberto J. Espay
    Tremor / Jeff Kraakevik, Bernadette Schoneburg
    Myoclonus / Daniel Burdick and Pinky Agrawal
    Tics and Tourette syndrome / David Shprecher
    Hyperkinetic disorders : chorea, athetosis, and ballism / Rohit Dhall
    Hyperkinetic : dystonia / Lauren Schrock, Tao Xie and Brandon Barton
    Neurology in practice
    hyperkinetic disorders : ataxia / Samantha Holden and Deborah Hall
    Restless legs syndrome / Olga Klepitskaya
    Hemifacial spasm and other facial movement disorders / Tao Xie, Ifeoma Nwaneri, Un Jung Kang
    Periodic limb movements of sleep and REM sleep behavior disorder / Aleksandar Videnovic
    Stereotypies / Michael Rotstein
    Paroxysmal movement disorders / Christina L. Vaughan
    Uncommon movement disorders and movement disorder mimics / Nina Browner
    Tardive syndromes / Stephanie Lessig
    Heavy metal accumulation diseases / Khashayar Dashtipour and Janice Fuentes
    ICU intensive care unit movement disorder emergencies / Florence C.F. Chang, Steven J. Frucht
    Functional or psychogenic movement disorders / Elizabeth Zauber
    Genetics of movement disorders / Deborah Hall
    Neuroimaging finding in movement disorders / Kathleen Poston
    Clinical rating scales in movement disorders / Padmaja Vittal and Brandon R. Barton
    Videotaping suggestions for movement disorders / Gian Pal, Deborah A Hall.
    Digital Access Wiley 2017
  • Digital
    Gregory Ninot.
    Summary: Non-pharmacological interventions (NPIs) have become essential solutions for better living, preventing disease, and self-care, in addition to biomedical treatments, and for increasing longevity without loss of quality of life. Over the past 20 years, these practices have gone from general diet and hygiene advice to targeted and personalized solutions for prevention, care optimization, and curative treatments. Selected empirically for centuries or recently with the help of technological innovations and epigenetic, interventional, and medico-economic studies, their development is growing and diversifying around the world. Today an NPI ecosystem is made up of a myriad of public and private actors. As interest in NPIs grows, so do questions about safety, effectiveness, standardization, ethical practice, and surveillance. In this book, the author answers these questions with a scientific approach, because evidence-based science, evidence-based practice, clinical research, and data monitoring have revolutionized this field. Topics explored among the chapters include: · Defining Non-Pharmacological Interventions · The Benefits and Dangers of Non-Pharmacological Interventions · Motives and Facilitators of Non-Pharmacological Intervention Use · The Market for Non-Pharmacological Interventions · Evaluation of Non-Pharmacological Interventions · The Future of Non-Pharmacological Interventions Non-Pharmacological Interventions: An Essential Answer to Current Demographic, Health, and Environmental Transitions is a must-have resource for clinicians and other health professionals, researchers, students, health insurers, policy-makers, caregivers, and entrepreneurs in the health and wellness space, as well as any users who wish to inform themselves about NPIs.

    Contents:
    Defining Non-Pharmacological Interventions (NPIs)
    The Reasons for the Success of Non-Pharmacological Interventions
    Mechanisms Involved in Non-Pharmacological Interventions
    The Benefits of Non-Pharmacological Interventions
    The Dangers of Non-Pharmacological Interventions
    Motives and Facilitators of Non-Pharmacological Intervention Use
    The Market for Non-Pharmacological Interventions
    Evaluation of Non-Pharmacological Interventions
    The Future of Non-Pharmacological Interventions.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    Mehrsheed Sinaki, Michael Pfeifer, editors.
    Summary: This practical guide presents the most up-to-date information on the application of non-pharmacological and physical therapeutic measures, either used independently or in combination with pharmacotherapy, for the management of osteoporosis. Pharmacotherapy remains the primary treatment for osteoporosis, but to improve the biomechanical competence of bone and improve quality of life, there needs to be more comprehensive management approach involving non-pharmacological methods. The book opens with a discussion of the diagnosis, pathophysiology, complications and consequences of osteoporosis. Exercise, nutrition, orthotics, and other rehabilitation measures such as whole body vibration and electrical muscle stimulation, each described in details in chapters of their own, have had a beneficial impact on fall and fracture prevention as well as recovery post-fracture. In addition, the application of acupuncture for pain management and movement-based mind-body therapies like tai chi and the Feldenkrais method are explored. Providing a description of independent and adjuvant techniques and practices for treatment and improving quality of life, Non-Pharmacological Management of Osteoporosis is an excellent resource for endocrinologists, bone specialists, physical therapists, occupational therapists and all clinical practitioners and staff working with osteoporosis patients.
    Digital Access Springer 2017
  • Digital
    Jeremy B. Richards, Renee D. Stapleton, editors.
    Summary: "Clinical research in critical care has exploded in the past several years and we now have a much better understanding of how to care for intensive care unit (ICU) patients in areas such as management of sepsis, fluid resuscitation, mechanical ventilation, antibiotic administration, and sedation and analgesia. However, despite improved clinical care, many critically ill patients continue to experience complications of critical illness - some complications are iatrogenic and preventable, while others are simply a component of the natural history of critical illness. These complications lead to increased mortality, morbidity, cost, and long-term chronic conditions. Non-Pulmonary Complications of Critical Care: A Clinical Guide is a valuable resource for trainees and clinicians who aim to better understand and improve the quality of critical care medicine. Armed with information about potential non-pulmonary complications of ICU care and strategies to minimize or prevent those complications, the critical care clinician will be able to help ICU patients potentially avoid much of the morbidity associated with critical illness. This book is organized by organ system such that it can be easily used as a bedside reference. Complications caused by pharmaceuticals are dispersed throughout every chapter and the concluding chapters provide a special emphasis on meticulous supportive care of the critically ill patient to allow the best chance for recovery."--Publisher's website.

    Contents:
    1.Cardiovascular complications
    2. Renal complications
    3. Neurologic complications
    4. Hematologic complications
    5. Gastrointestinal complications
    6. Non-pulmonary infectious complications
    7. Nutritional and endocrinologic complications
    8. Procedural complications
    9. Preventing complications: consistent meticulous supportive care in the ICU
    Index.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    Kazuaki Mitsudo.
    Contents:
    Intro
    Foreword
    Acknowledgments
    Contents
    Contributors
    List of Columns
    1: Mitsudo's PCI Techniques for CTO
    1.1 Approach (Puncture Site)
    1.1.1 Selection of the Approach
    1.1.1.1 Guiding Catheter Size
    1.1.1.2 Fluoroscopic Angles for Biplane Cineangiography and Puncture Sites
    1.1.1.3 Influence of Severe Tortuosity and/or Stenosis
    1.2 Sheath
    1.3 Guiding Catheter
    1.3.1 Selection of the Guiding Catheter
    1.3.1.1 Amplatz-Type Catheter for the RCA
    1.3.1.2 Tips When Using an Amplatz Left-Type Guiding Catheter for the RCA Shape of the Catheter Tip
    1.3.1.3 Short-Tipped Judkins Catheter or Extra Backup Catheter for the LCA
    1.3.1.4 Size of the Catheter Tip Curve
    1.3.2 Anchoring Technique
    1.3.2.1 Size and Inflation Pressure of the Anchoring Balloon
    1.3.2.2 If No Side Branch Is Available for Anchoring
    1.4 Anticoagulation Strategy
    1.4.1 Administration of Heparin
    1.4.2 Blood Sample Collection for ACT Measurement
    1.4.3 Precautions When Collecting Blood via the Guiding Catheter
    1.5 Fluoroscopy and Imaging Strategies
    1.5.1 Video Imaging Equipment and Fluoroscopy Angles 1.5.1.1 Is Biplane Imaging Essential?
    1.5.1.2 Direction of the Longitudinal Axis of the Target Vessel in the Region of Interest for Guidewire Advancement
    1.5.1.3 Selecting Two Orthogonal Projections
    1.5.1.4 Isocenter
    1.5.2 Bilateral Angiography and Collateral Flow Angiography (Contralateral Imaging, etc.)
    1.6 Antegrade Approach
    1.6.1 Mechanism of CTO Formation and Changes After Occlusion
    1.6.1.1 Occlusion Resulting from Tight Stenosis (Fig. 1.42)
    1.6.1.2 Acute Thrombotic Occlusion (Fig. 1.46)
    1.6.1.3 Occlusions with Complex Etiologies 1.6.2 Histological Features Before and After Occlusion
    1.6.3 Guidewire Crossing Based on the Presumed Mechanism of CTO Formation and Changes After Occlusion
    1.6.4 Guidewire Strategies
    1.6.4.1 Tip Load and Penetration Force: Why a Crossing Guidewire Is Needed to Perform Antegrade PCI for CTO
    1.6.4.2 Curve of the Guidewire Tip
    1.6.4.3 Fixed Point Guidewire Rotation
    1.6.4.4 Guidewire Trapping and Inflection
    1.6.4.5 Does a Stiff Guidewire Only Advance Toward the Larger Curvature in a Curved Vessel?
    1.6.4.6 Straightening of the Guidewire Tip 1.6.4.7 Basic Techniques for Manipulating a CTO Guidewire
    1.6.4.8 Selection and Manipulation of Guidewires in Various Situations
    Role of the First Guidewire
    1.6.4.9 Setting a Landmark
    1.6.4.10 Parallel Wire Technique
    Choice of the Second Guidewire (Figs. 1.109, 1.110, 1.111, 1.112, 1.113, and 1.114)
    1.6.4.11 Correcting the Guidewire Route by Using a Landmark
    1.6.4.12 IVUS-Guided Wiring: Side Branch Technique
    1.6.4.13 IVUS-Guided Wiring: False Lumen Technique
    1.6.4.14 Confirmation of Crossing the True Lumen and Points to Be Considered After Crossing 1.6.5 Microcatheter.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    Laurence Claes, Jennifer J. Muehlenkamp, editors.
    Summary: Non-suicidal self-injury and eating disorders represent significant problems among today's youth and pose unique challenges for clinicians, particularly when they co-occur. This book is a rare resource in that it provides cutting-edge information on the interactions between self-injury and disordered eating, empirically informed treatments for the co-occurrence of these behaviors, and specific topics relevant to understanding nuances in the risk factors, treatment, and prevention of both self-injury and eating disorders. Practitioners, graduate students, and researchers working within this specialized area will find this text to be instrumental in advancing their knowledge and improving the treatment of self-injury in those with eating disorders.

    Contents:
    Background and general aspects
    Non-suicidal self-injury and eating disorders: dimensions of self-harm / Laurence Claes and Jennifer J. Muehlenkamp
    Epidemiology and sociocultural aspects of non-suicidal self-injury and eating disorders / Colleen M. Jacobson and Cynthia C. Luik
    Developmental influences in NSSI and eating pathology / Andrea L. Barrocas, Jill M. Holm-Denoma, and Benjamin L. Hankin
    Etiological models of non-suicidal self-injury and eating disorders / Kathryn H. Gordon, Mun Yee Kwan, Allison M. Minnich, and Darren L. Carter
    Psychological meanings and functions of non-suicidal self-injury and eating disorders / Michelle M. Wedig
    Assessment and treatment
    Functional assessment of non-suicidal self-injury and eating disorders / Margaret S. Andover, Caroline S. Holman, and Marguerite Y. Shashoua
    Cognitive-behavioral therapy / Christine M. Peat
    Dialectical behavior therapy / Barent W. Walsh and Jennifer E. Eaton
    Family therapy for eating disorders and non-suicidal self-injury / Elizabeth K. Hughes, Erica Allan, and Daniel Le Grange
    Mentalisation-based therapy of non-suicidal self-injury and eating disorders: MBT-ED / Paul H. Robinson
    The use of interpersonal psychotherapy for non-suicidal self-injury and eating disorders / Jon Arcelus, Walter Pierre Bouman, and Jonathan Baggott
    Pharmacological treatment of non-suicidal self-injury and eating disorders / Paul L. Plener and Ulrike M. Schultze
    Specific topics
    Co-occurring health-risk behaviors of non-suicidal self-injury and eating disorders / Jamie M. Duggan and Nancy L. Heath
    Experience of the body / Amy M. Brausch and Jennifer J. Muehlenkamp
    Peer influences on non-suicidal self-injury and disordered eating / Lori M. Hilt and Emily H. Hamm
    Non-suicidal self-injury, eating disorders, and the Internet / Stephen P. Lewis and Alexis E. Arbuthnott
    Prevention and postvention of NSSI and disordered eating / Lara J. Cox and Michael P. Levine
    Eating disorders and non-suicidal self-injury: from primary care to inpatient hospitalization / Jason J. Washburn, Denise M. Styer, Michelle Gebhardt, and Delia Aldridge
    Males with non-suicidal self-injury and eating disorder: a unique approach / Fernando Fernández-Aranda, Susan Jimenez-Murcia, Isabel Sánchez, Mohammed Anisul Islam, and José M. Menchón.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    Takayuki Kinoshita, editor.
    Summary: Covering the history of breast cancer, theory of radiofrequency ablation (RFA), resection of carcinoma, imaging before and after non-surgical ablation therapy and quality of life, this book focuses on extensive breast-conserving treatment for the preservation of a cosmetically acceptable breast. It investigates the feasibility of percutaneous, minimally invasive techniques to ablate breast tumors and several modalities such as cryosurgery, laser ablation, thermoablation and high-intensity focused ultrasound. Non-surgical Ablation Therapy for Early-stage Breast Cancer centers on RFA and provides insights into cryoablation and focused ultrasound surgery. RFA has been shown to be effective for treating tumors in many types of tissue, including liver, bone, brain, kidney, pancreas and prostate. As such this book is a valuable resource for breast and general surgeons, radiation oncologists and medical oncologists in all areas. The extensive discussions enable scholars to gain radiological expertise and a basic understanding of molecular biology, leading to better surgery without scalpels.
    Digital Access Springer 2016
  • Digital
    Paul A. Levi, Jr., Robert J. Rudy, Y. Natalie Jeong, Daniel K. Coleman.
    Contents:
    Empowering Your Patients: From Compliance to Concordance: Basics
    Methods of Plaque Removal by the Patient. Instrumentation for Diagnosis and Basic Treatment of Gingivitis/Periodontitis: Periodontal Probing and Detection of Calculus
    Theory of Scaling, Root Planing, Soft Tissue Curettage
    Local Anesthesia for Scaling, Root Planing and Gingival Curettage
    Hand Instrumentation
    Power Instruments. Pharmacotherapeutics: Theory
    Local Delivery
    Systemic
    Oral rinses. Supportive therapy/Necessary for Long Term Success: Step by step protocol for maintenance hygiene therapy
    Relationship between general dental office and periodontal specialist office
    Relationship between patient and therapist.
    Digital Access Springer 2016
  • Digital
    Souphiyeh Samizadeh, editors.
    Summary: This book provides a practically applicable guide to facial aesthetics, non-surgical treatment and enhancement in patients of Asian descent. The available evidence base for the use of a range of available techniques when treating an Asian patient is presented and relevant aspects of facial analysis, treatment planning and provision are covered. Detailed instruction is given on how to use cutting edge techniques enabling the reader to develop a thorough understanding of how to proficiently perform these approaches in their clinical practice. Non-Surgical Rejuvenation of Asian Faces systematically reviews the evidence base for and details how to use the latest available non-surgical techniques for facial rejuvenation in this group of patients. It is a valuable resource for aesthetic medicine professionals and trainees alike seeking a reference on the topic.

    Contents:
    Aesthetic Medicine in Asia
    An introduction to the field and demand for aesthetic medicine in Asia, in particular China
    Past, Current trends, Future
    Concept of facial beauty
    Ideals of beauty in Asia and China
    Influence of facial physiognomy
    Facial assessment
    What is facial analysis?
    General assessment
    Medical, dental, social history and cosmetic history
    Lighting for examination
    Natural head position
    Analysis
    Frontal
    Lateral
    Vertical dimension
    Transverse dimension
    Craniofacial soft tissue landmarks
    Subunit analysis
    Clinical photography
    Background
    Lighting
    Patient position
    Standardization
    3D imaging
    Consent
    Asian facial features
    Skeletal structure
    Soft tissues
    Facial sexual dimorphism
    Asian and Western
    Treatment indications, landmarks
    Upper face
    Midface
    Lower face
    Facial contouring: Shape and Proportions in Asians
    Young patients
    Aged patients
    Popular Non-surgical Facial rejuvenation techniques in Asia
    The Yes-Pyramid Approach
    The MTV Approach
    The Butterfly Approach.
    Digital Access Springer 2022
  • Digital
    Eduard Shantsila, Gregory YH Lip.
    Contents:
    1. Introduction
    2. Direct thrombin inhibitors
    3. Factor Xa inhibitors
    4. Conclusions.
    Digital Access Springer 2016
  • Digital
    Isidoro Di Carlo, editor ; foreword by Masatoshi Makuuchi.
    Summary: This book offers a complete overview on noncolorectal nonneuroendocrine (NCRNNE) liver metastases and describes in detail the currently available therapies. Each chapter focuses on the treatment of metastases from a particular primary malignancy and also provides valuable information on incidence, natural history, and diagnosis. NCRNNE metastases to the liver are rare entities compared with colorectal and neuroendocrine metastases, for which the treatments are well codified. While more publications have appeared on the topic in recent years, an in-depth study has to date been lacking. Furthermore, most published series are insufficiently comparable as they comprise patients with NCRNNE hepatic metastases from a variety of primary malignancies and consequently overlook differences in tumor behavior, frequency of isolated hepatic metastases, response to neoadjuvant or adjuvant therapy, and interval between diagnosis of the primary tumor and the liver metastases. This book, with its more specific approach, will serve not only as an up-to-date guide to diagnosis and treatment but also as a reference on which to base future studies.

    Contents:
    1. Liver metastases from adrenocortical cancer
    2. Liver metastases from brain cancer
    3. Liver metastases from breast cancer
    4. Liver metastases from kidney cancer
    5. Liver metastases from larynx cancer
    6. Liver metastases from lung cancer
    7. Liver metastases from melanoma cancer
    8. Liver metastases from ovarian and uterus cancer
    9. Liver metastases from pancreas cancer
    10. Liver metastases from salivar glands cancer
    11. Liver metastases from sarcomas cancer
    12. Liver metastases from stomach cancer
    13. Liver metastases from testis cancer
    14. Liver metastases from thyroid cancer
    15. Liver metastases from ureteral, bladder and prostate cancer
    16. Liver Metastases from Brain Cancer.
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Digital/Print
    Mieczyslaw Pokorski, editor.
    Summary: Diseases of the respiratory system often cause multisystem dysfunction and morbidity. Respiratory diseases not transmissible by a direct contact are rarer than those of inflammatory or infectious background. Such noncommunicable diseases, often entailing genetic and immune aspects, are areas of limited understanding; sarcoidosis being a case in point. This book tackles the issues relevant to such diseases. The research on novel cytokine markers, which may help in the diagnosis and management of sarcoidosis, is described. Modern approaches to the management of pneumothorax, a frequent accompaniment of lung diseases or chest wall trauma are dealt with as well. There are also chapters that underscore the immuno-inflammatory mechanisms of disorders seemingly unrelated to respiration, such as obesity or aplastic anemia, which may appreciably affect the control of the respiratory system and thus its vulnerability to diseases. The book will be of interest to clinicians and medical researchers.

    Contents:
    Interleukin-33 as a New Marker of Pulmonary Sarcoidosis
    Finite Elements Modeling in Diagnostics of Small Closed Pneumothorax
    Comparison of Small Bore Catheter Aspiration and Chest Tube Drainage in the Management of Spontaneous Pneumothorax
    Brown Adipose Tissue and Browning Agents: Irisin and FGF21 in the Development of Obesity in Children and Adolescents
    Regulatory T cells in obesity
    Peroxynitrite in Sarcoidosis: Relation to Mycobacterium Stationary Phase
    Effects on Lung Function of Small-Volume Conventional Ventilation and High-Frequency Oscillation Ventilation in a Model of Meconium Aspiration Syndrome
    Expression of HIF-1A/VEGF/ING-4 Axis in Pulmonary Sarcoidosis
    Factors Influencing Utilization of Primary Health Care Services in Patients with Chronic Respiratory Diseases
    Influence of Iron Overload on Immunosuppressive Therapy in Children with Severe Aplastic Anemia.
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Digital
    editors, Kadir Caliskan, Osama I. Soliman and Folkert J. ten Cate.
    Summary: This book provides a comprehensive but concise overview of noncompaction cardiomyopathy. Information on congestive heart failure, thromboembolic events, (potentially lethal) arrhythmias, and sudden cardiac death is presented. Topics covered include the use of modern imaging modalities, such as contrast echocardiography and magnetic resonance imaging in relation to noncompaction cardiomyopathy treatment. Noncompaction Cardiomyopathy is a critical resource for all medical professionals managing these patients, including clinicians in cardiology, electrophysiology, clinical and molecular genetics, pediatrics, pathology, neurology and general practitioners.

    Contents:
    Preface: why do we need this book?
    Noncompaction cardiomyopathy, a novel clinical entity (historical perspective)
    Clinical features of noncompaction cardiomyopathy
    Imaging and diagnostic uncertainties of noncompaction cardiomyopathy
    Neuromuscular diseases and noncompaction cardiomyopathy
    Sudden cardiac death, prevention and treatment with implantable cardiac defibrillators
    Prevalence and prevention of thromboembolic events in noncompaction cardiomyopathy
    Noncompaction cardiomyopathy in childhood
    Noncompaction look-a-likes: the athletes, the hypertensives and the blacks
    Familial screening and cardio-genetics of noncompaction cardiomyopathy
    Prognosis and treatment of noncompaction cardiomyopath
    Future perspectives.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    Alan Weissman, Twyla B. Bartel.
    Digital Access
    Provider
    Version
    Thieme MedOne Radiology
    Thieme-Connect
  • Digital
    Antonio M. Esquinas, editor.
    Contents:
    Section A. NIV and weaning
    Section B. NIV and weaning methodology aspects
    Section C. Treatment of postextubation acute respiratory failure: clinical indications
    Section D. Prevention of postextubation failure
    Section E. NIV in difficult weaning
    Section F. Pediatric and neonatology weaning
    Section G. Influence on postextubation respiratory failure complications
    Section H. NIV weaning relations with organizational models (ICU)
    Section I. Evidence for NIV weaning: guidelines and new perspectives.
    Digital Access Springer 2016
  • Digital
    edited by Lieve Page-Christiaens, Hanns-Georg Klein.
    Summary: "Since its introduction in 2012, cell-free (cf) DNA based Non-Invasive Prenatal Testing (NIPT) has been employed to test for fetal chromosome abnormalities, and gene mutations that lead to a variety of genetic conditions, by millions of pregnant women, in more than 90 countries worldwide. With Noninvasive Prenatal Testing (NIPT): Applied Genomics in Prenatal Screening and Diagnosis, Dr Lieve Page-Christiaens and Dr Hanns-Georg Klein have compiled the first authoritative volume on cfDNA NIPT methods and their clinical implementation"--Publisher's description.

    Contents:
    Section 1: Cell-freeDNA (CfDNA): overview and technology. Fetal DNA in maternal plasma: an amazing two decades
    Understanding the basics of next generation sequencing in the context of cell-free DNA based NIPT
    The technology and bioinformatics of cell-free DNA based NIPT
    Section 2: CfDNA in clinical practice. Prenatal screening for common aneuploidies before and after the introduction of cell-free DNA based NIPT
    Why cell-free DNA based NIPT for fetal chromosome anomalies is not diagnostic
    The role of cell-free DNA based NIPT in twin pregnancy
    Genomewide testing for autosomal trisomies and copy number variations
    Non-invasive fetal blood group typing
    Noninvasive prenatal diagnosis (NIPD) of monogenic disorders
    Maternal constitutional and acquired copy number variations (CNVs)
    Section 3: Clinical integration. Best practices for integrating cell-free DNA based NIPT into clinical practice
    Quality assurance and standardization of cell-free DNA based NIPT laboratory procedures
    Decisional support for expectant parents
    Cell-free DNA based NIPT and society
    Ethics of cell-free DNA based NIPT for sex chromosome aneuploidies and sex determination
    Cost-effectiveness of cell-free DNA based NIPT: summary of evidence and challenges
    Section 4: The future. Exome sequencing in the evaluation of the fetus with structural anomalies
    Cell-based NIPT: a promising path for prenatal diagnosis
    Maternal circulating nucleic acids as a marker of placental health
    Prenatal treatment of genetic diseases in the unborn
    Digital Access ClinicalKey 2018
  • Digital
    by Fridon Todua, Dudana Gachechiladze.
    Summary: This book is a state of the art guide to the diagnosis of extracranial vascular pathologies with modern noninvasive neuroimaging and vascular imaging techniques. The opening sections provide a thorough introduction to arterial and venous anatomy, basic hemodynamics, and the principles of noninvasive vascular diagnostics, including by means of color Doppler ultrasound, CT and CT angiography (356- and 640-slice systems), and MRI and MR angiography (1.5 and 3 T). The main body of the book is devoted to the use of these methods to image cerebral ischemia and a wide variety of extracranial arterial and venous anomalies and pathologies. Neuroimaging and vascular imaging diagnostic criteria are clearly identified with the aid of many high-quality images, and the advantages and disadvantages of each modality for each pathology are explained. Information is also presented on etiology, pathophysiology, and other relevant aspects. A concluding section discusses the role of complementary noninvasive functional tests. The book will be a valuable resource for neurologists, angiologists, neuroradiologists, neurosurgeons, trainees, and all physicians who care for patients with cerebrovascular diseases.

    Contents:
    Introduction
    Part I
    Vascular anatomy and Basic hemodynamics
    1. Anatomy of cerebral circulation system
    2. Basic Principles of hemodynamics
    Part II
    Basic principles of non-invasive vascular diagnostic
    1. Basic principles of Ultrasound diagnostics
    2. Principles of extracranial arterial and venous ultrasound examination
    3. Principles of Computed Tomography and Computed Tomography angiography
    4. Principles of Magnetic Resonance Imaging and Magnetic Resonance angiography
    5. CTA and MRA- Postprocessing and Data Analysis
    Part III
    Cerebral ischemia
    1. Stroke (Epidemiology, Pathophysiology, Risk-factors, Types, Imaging)
    2. CT / MRI perfusion in Acute stroke--94
    Part IV
    Pathologies of extracranial vessels
    1. Atherostenosis and thrombosis of extracranial vessels
    2. Common Carotid Artery Intima-media layer changes
    3. Structural characteristics of atherosclerotic plaque
    4. Surgical treatment end endovascular revascularization of carotid stenosis
    5. Deformation of extracranial arteries
    6. Takayasu`s arteritis
    7. Subclavian steal effect
    8. Dissection of extracranial arteries
    9. Aneurism and pseudoaneurism of extracranial arteries
    10. Congenital variations of extracranial arteries
    11. Pathological findings in the jugular veins
    Part V
    Methods of non-invasive functional examination of cerebrovascular system
    1. Detection of cerebral microemboli
    2. Assessment of cerebrovascular reactivity.
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Digital
    Ali F. AbuRahma, editor ; Dennis F. Bandyk, Henrik Sillesen, Patrick A. Stone, associate editors.
    Summary: "This revised and updated edition reflects the increasing popularity of noninvasive techniques in the management of vascular disease. It represents the definitive text written on the subject and has been honed over the past editions to represent the enormous number of changes to the use of imaging to diagnose the multitude of conditions being seen in the clinic and surgical suite. Noninvasive Vascular Diagnosis comprehensively covers all aspects of noninvasive evaluation of the circulatory system, including the extremities, cerebrovascular, and abdomen. It is well supported by exceptional illustrative material, making it invaluable to all those who work in vascular laboratories as well as internists, cardiologists, radiologists, vascular surgeons, vascular medicine specialists, vascular laboratory directors and staff, general surgeons involved in vascular surgery and the vascular surgery community in general." -- Back cover.

    Contents:
    Improving quality in noninvasive testing by certification and accreditation
    Physician qualifications in the clinical diagnostic vascular laboratory
    Quality in the vascular laboratory
    Principles of vascular ultrasound physics
    Vascular hemodynamics
    Overview of cerebrovascular disease
    Color duplex scanning of the extracranial carotid arteries
    Ultrasonic characterization of carotid plaques and its clinical implications
    Role of duplex ultrasound in carotid screening
    Intraoperative ultrasound assessment of carotid endarterectomy and carotid stent angioplasty
    Intima media thickness and plaque evaluation: predictive value of cardiovascular events and contribution to cardiovascular risk evaluation
    Color duplex scanning of the brachiocephalic /subclavian arteries
    Color duplex scanning of vertebral artery
    Transcranial doppler sonography
    Tcd monitoring during carotid artery stenting
    Errors and artifacts of carotid ultrasound evaluation
    Computed tomography angiography and magnetic resonance angiography of the carotids
    Carotid duplex criteria consensus on interpretation of carotid duplex ultrasound
    Color duplex scanning on other miscellaneous carotid topics
    Overview of peripheral arterial disease of the lower extremity
    Segmental doppler pressures and doppler waveform analysis in peripheral vascular disease of the lower extremities
    Pulse volume recording in the diagnosis of peripheral vascular disease
    Duplex scanning for lower extremity arterial disease
    Duplex surveillance of infrainguinal bypass grafts
    Duplex surveillance after prosthetic infrainguinal bypass grafting
    Rationale of surveillance after endovascular intervention of iliac and femoral arteries
    Lower extremity arterial mapping: duplex ultrasound as an alternative to arteriography prior to femoral, popliteal and infrapopliteal reconstructions
    Duplex ultrasound: evaluation and management of post-catheterization femoral pseudoaneurysms
    Noninvasive diagnosis of upper extremity arterial disease
    Duplex ultrasound imaging of the radial artery
    Vascular laboratory protocol and ultrasound mapping techniques for dialysis access planning
    Color duplex ultrasound in dialysis access surveillance
    Noninvasive evaluation for congenital arteriovenous fistulas and malformations
    Noninvasive vascular testing for the trauma patient
    Color duplex ultrasound for diagnosis of peripheral artery aneurysms (lower and upper extremity)
    Color duplex ultrasound in dialysis access surveillance
    Noninvasive evaluation for congenital arteriovenous fistulas and malformations
    Noninvasive vascular testing in the trauma patient
    Color duplex ultrasound for diagnosis of peripheral artery aneurysms (lower and upper extremity)
    Color duplex ultrasound in other miscellaneous arterial topics
    Overview of venous disorders
    Plethysmographic techniques in the diagnosis of venous disease
    Color venous duplex ultrasound of the lower extremity in the diagnosis of deep venous thrombosis
    Color duplex for diagnosis of venous reflux
    Venous duplex ultrasound of the upper extremities
    Role of the noninvasive vascular laboratory in thoracic outlet syndrome
    Color duplex ultrasound-guided cava filter placement
    Intravascular ultrasound for venous stenting and inferior vena cava filter insertion
    The role of duplex ultrasound before, during, and after endovenous procedures
    Preoperative saphenous vein mapping
    Color duplex scanning of the hepatoportal circulation
    Color duplex scanning of the renal arteries
    Duplex evaluation after renal artery intervention
    Duplex ultrasonography of the mesenteric circulation
    Color duplex scanning of superior mesenteric and celiac artery stenting
    The role of color duplex ultrasound in patients with abdominal aortic aneurysms and peripheral aneurysms
    Role of color duplex ultrasound for aortic endografts
    Transcutaneous oxygen tension: principles and applications
    Three-dimensional vascular imaging and power doppler angiographic imaging
    Contrast-enhanced ultrasound
    Arterial and venous intravascular ultrasound applications
    Coding and reimbursement for vascular lab testing
    Clinical application of ultrasound guidance in arterial and venous access
    Computed tomographic angiography in the diagnosis of peripheral arterial disease
    Magnetic resonance angiography in the diagnosis of peripheral arterial disease.
    Digital Access Springer 2017
  • Digital
    Ali F. AbuRahma, Bruce A. Perler, editors.
    Summary: This revised and updated edition reflects the increasing popularity of noninvasive techniques in the management of vascular disease. It represents the definitive text written on the subject and has been honed over the past editions to represent the enormous number of changes to the use of imaging to diagnose the multitude of conditions being seen in the clinic and surgical suite. Noninvasive Vascular Diagnosis comprehensively covers all aspects of noninvasive evaluation of the circulatory system, including the extremities, cerebrovascular, and abdomen. In this updated edition, it is well supported by exceptional illustrative material, making it invaluable to all those who work in vascular laboratories as well as internists, cardiologists, radiologists, vascular surgeons, vascular medicine specialists, vascular laboratory directors and staff, general surgeons involved in vascular surgery and the vascular surgery community in general.

    Contents:
    Part I Vascular Laboratory Operations
    Improving Quality in Noninvasive Testing by Certification and Accreditation
    Physician Qualifications in the Clinical Diagnostic Vascular Laboratory
    Quality in the Vascular Laboratory
    Ergonomics and Vascular Lab
    Part II Vascular Hemodynamics and Basic Vascular Physics
    Principles of Vascular Ultrasound Physics
    Vascular Hemodynamics
    Part III Noninvasive Diagnosis of Cerebrovascular Disease
    Overview of Cerebrovascular Disease
    Color Duplex Scanning of the Extracranial Carotid Arteries
    Ultrasonic Characterization of Carotid Plaques and Its Clinical Implications
    Role of Duplex Ultrasound in Carotid Screening
    Duplex Ultrasound Velocity Criteria in Carotid Artery Stenting Patients
    Intraoperative Ultrasound Assessment of Carotid Endarterectomy and Carotid Stent Angioplasty
    Intima-Media Thickness and Plaque Evaluation: Predictive Value of Cardiovascular Events and Contribution to Cardiovascular Risk Evaluation
    Color Duplex Scanning of the Brachiocephalic/Subclavian Arteries
    Color Duplex Scanning of Vertebral Artery
    Transcranial Doppler Sonography
    TCD Monitoring During Carotid Artery Stenting
    Errors and Artifacts of Carotid Ultrasound Evaluation
    Computed Tomography Angiography and Magnetic Resonance Angiography of the Carotids
    Carotid Duplex Consensus Criteria on Interpretation of Carotid Duplex Ultrasound
    Correlation of Doppler PSV/EDV in Determining Severity of Stenosis Beyond 70%: 70-80%, 80-90% and >90%
    Role of Duplex Ultrasound in Subclavian Steal: Incidence and Clinical Implications
    Duplex Ultrasound Surveillance After Carotid Endarterectomy
    Color Duplex Scanning on Other Miscellaneous Carotid Topics
    Part IV Noninvasive Diagnosis of Peripheral Arterial Disease of the Extremities
    Overview of Peripheral Arterial Disease of the Lower Extremity
    Segmental Doppler Pressures and Doppler Waveform Analysis in Peripheral Vascular Disease of the Lower Extremities
    Pulse Volume Recording in the Diagnosis of Peripheral Vascular Disease
    Duplex Ultrasound Assessment of Lower Extremity Arterial Disease
    Duplex Surveillance of Infrainguinal Bypass Grafts
    Duplex Surveillance After Prosthetic Infrainguinal Bypass Grafting
    Rationale of Surveillance After Endovascular Intervention of Iliac and Femoral Arteries
    Lower Extremity Arterial Mapping: Duplex Ultrasound as an Alternative to Arteriography Prior to Femoral, Popliteal, and Infrapopliteal Reconstructions
    Duplex Ultrasound: Evaluation and Management of Post-catheterization Femoral Pseudoaneurysms
    Noninvasive Diagnosis of Upper Extremity Arterial Disease
    Duplex Ultrasound Imaging of the Radial Artery
    Vascular Laboratory Protocol and Ultrasound Mapping Techniques for Dialysis Access Planning
    Color Duplex Ultrasound in Dialysis Access Surveillance
    Noninvasive Evaluation for Congenital Arteriovenous Fistulas and Malformations
    Noninvasive Vascular Testing in the Trauma Patient
    Color Duplex Ultrasound for Diagnosis of Peripheral Artery Aneurysms
    Color Duplex Ultrasound in Other Miscellaneous Arterial Topics
    Part V Noninvasive Diagnosis of Venous Disorders of the Extremities
    Overview of Venous Disorders
    Plethysmographic Techniques in the Diagnosis of Venous Disease
    Color Venous Duplex Ultrasound of the Lower Extremity in the Diagnosis of Deep Venous Thrombosis
    Color Duplex for Diagnosis of Venous Reflux
    Venous Duplex Ultrasound of the Upper Extremities
    Role of the Noninvasive Vascular Laboratory in Thoracic Outlet Syndrome
    Color Duplex Ultrasound-Guided Cava Filter Placement
    Intravascular Ultrasound for Venous Stenting and Inferior Vena Cava Filter Insertion
    The Role of Duplex Ultrasound Before, During, and After Endovenous Procedures
    Preoperative Saphenous Vein Mapping
    Role of Follow-Up Duplex Ultrasound Post Deep Vein Thrombosis
    Role of Duplex Ultrasound Screening/Surveillance in High-Risk Deep Vein Thrombosis Patients
    Part VI Noninvasive Diagnosis of Abdominal/Visceral Arteries
    Color Duplex Scanning of the Hepatoportal Circulation
    Color Duplex Scanning of the Renal Arteries
    Duplex Ultrasound of Renal Transplants
    Duplex Evaluation After Renal Artery Intervention
    Duplex Ultrasonography of the Mesenteric Circulation
    Color Duplex Scanning of Superior Mesenteric and Celiac Artery Stenting
    The Role of Color Duplex Ultrasound in Patients with Abdominal Aortic Aneurysms and Peripheral Aneurysms
    Clinical Validation of 3-Dimensional Ultrasound for Diagnosis of Abdominal Aortic Aneurysm
    Duplex Ultrasound Screening for Abdominal Aortic Aneurysm
    Role of Color Duplex Ultrasound for Aortic Endografts
    Role of CT Angiography in Pre and Post Abdominal Aortic Aneurysm Endovascular Grafts
    Part VII Miscellaneous
    Transcutaneous Oxygen Tension: Principles and Applications
    Three-Dimensional Vascular Imaging and Power Doppler Angiographic Imaging
    Contrast-Enhanced Ultrasound
    Arterial and Venous Intravascular Ultrasound Applications
    Coding and Reimbursement for Vascular Lab Testing
    Clinical Application of Ultrasound Guidance in Arterial and Venous Access
    Computed Tomographic Angiography in the Diagnosis of Peripheral Arterial Disease
    Magnetic Resonance Angiography in the Diagnosis of Peripheral Arterial Disease
    Role of Vascular Laboratory in Society for Vascular Surgery Vascular Center Certification.
    Digital Access Springer 2022
  • Digital
    Antonio M. Esquinas, editor.
    Summary: The past few decades have seen major impacts of different pandemics and mass casualty events on health resource use in terms of rising healthcare costs and increased mortality. In this context, the development of acute respiratory failure in patients requires the use of mechanical ventilation, either invasive or noninvasive. Recently, noninvasive ventilation (NIV) has proved to be a valuable strategy to reduce mortality rates in patients. This is the first book to describe the clinical indications of NIV in patients who have been hospitalized with high-risk infections as well as in the prehospital management of mass casualty incidents, including chemical or biological disasters and pandemics. Compiled by internationally respected experts, it offers comprehensive coverage of all aspects of noninvasive mechanical ventilation in public health emergencies, such as equipment needs and guidelines for health organizations. Considering recent events (SARS, H1N1 influenza pandemic), the book concludes with a critical review of current studies and future prospects for the use of NIV, offering a valuable resource for all practitioners managing mass casualty incidents and disasters.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    Antonio M. Esquinas, editor-in-chief ; Giuseppe Fiorentino, Giuseppe Insalaco, Bushra Mina, Jun Duan, Maria Cristina Mondardini, Fabio Caramelli, editors.
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    Syed A. Abutalib, Jean M. Connors, Margaret V. Ragni, editors.
    Contents:
    Part 1. Red Blood Cells
    Evaluation of anemia in children and adults
    Iron cycle and pathophysiology of iron homeostasis
    Porphyrias: Diagnosis and management
    Disorders of hemoglobin synthesis: Pathophysiology and diagnostic evaluation
    Management of thalassemias
    Allogeneic hematopoietic cell transplant in ss-thalassemia major
    Sickle cell disease: Prevention of complications
    Sickle cell disease: Management of complications
    Allogeneic hematopoietic cell transplant in sickle cell disease
    Anemia of inflammation
    Iron overload: Diagnosis, complications and management
    Megaloblastic and nutritional anemias
    Sideroblastic anemias: Diagnosis and management
    Primary autoimmune warm antibody hemolytic anemias
    Intrinsic hemolytic anemias: Pathophysiology, diagnosis and management
    Part 2. Platelets and Coagulation System
    Platelet disorders: Diagnostic tests and their interpretations
    Inherited platelet disorders: Diagnosis and management
    Acquired platelet disorders: Diagnosis and management
    Immune mediated thrombocytopenia
    Coagulation cascade and fibrinolysis pathway: Assessment in the laboratory
    Abnormalities in fibrinolysis pathway and clinical implications
    Congenital disorders of fibrinogen: Clinical presentations, diagnosis and management
    Hemophilias A and B: Diagnosis and management
    Coagulation factor inhibitors: Diagnosis and management
    Rare coagulation factor deficiencies: Diagnosis and management
    von Willebrand disease: Differential diagnosis and diagnostic approach to specific subtypes
    von Willebrand disease: Prevention of complications and management of the disease
    Antifibrolytics: Indications and precautions
    Gene therapy for bleeding disorders
    Part 3. Coagulopathy in Systemic Diseases
    Disseminated intravascular coagulopathy
    Coagulopathy in critically ill subjects
    Trauma-associated coagulopathy
    Coagulation related issues in malignant hematology: Diagnosis and management
    Unmet clinical needs of antithrombotic treatment in BCR/ABL negative myeloproliferative neoplasms
    Bleeding and thrombosis in a cancer patient
    Management of surgical patient with thrombotic and bleeding diathesis
    Part 3. Thrombosis and Therapeutics
    Prevention and treatment of arterial thromboembolism
    mes New Roman","serif"">Prevention of venous thromboembolism
    Diagnostic, prognostic and therapeutic challenges in venous thromboembolisim
    Complications of venous thromboembolic disease
    Hereditary thrombophilias: Pathophysiology, timing of testing and familiar testing
    Anti-phospholipid antibodies and syndrome: Complexities in diagnosis and management
    Unidentifiable thrombophilias
    Anticoagulation drugs: Indications, therapeutic monitoring and antidotes
    Heparin induced thrombocytopenia: Diagnosis and management
    Thrombotic thrombocytopenic purpura and hemolytic uremic syndrome
    Surgical treatment of thromboembolic disease
    Part 4. Immune System and Related Disorders
    Nonmalignant leukocyte disorders
    Primary immunodeficiency disorders: Diagnosis and management
    Disorders of phagocytic function: Diagnosis and treatment
    Inherited bone marrow failure syndromes
    Hemophagocytic lymphohistiocytosis: Diagnosis and management challenges
    Lysosomal storage disorders: Hematology perspective
    Cryoglobulins and cryoglobulinemia
    Part 5. Hemostasis and Thrombosis in Pregnancy, Newborn and Elderly
    Reproductive issues in women with bleeding and thrombotic disorders
    Pregnancy in subjects with hemoglobinopathies: Precautions and management
    Neonatal thrombosis and coagulopathies
    Bleeding and thrombosis in elderly
    Part 6. Transfusion Medicine
    Transfusion support: Indications, efficacy and complications
    Human blood antigens and antibodies: Diagnostic and therapeutic implications
    Therapeutic apheresis in hematologic disorders: When and Why?
    Digital Access Springer 2016
  • Digital
    Gabriella Fabbrocini, Maria Pia De Padova, Antonella Tosti, editors.
    Contents:
    Preface
    1. Introduction: Anatomy of the lips and eyes
    2. Rejuvenative outcomes for the lip and eye regions
    3. Aesthetic procedures to increase lip volume: Hyaluronic acid fillers
    4. Aesthetic procedures for lip wrinkles: skin needling and botulinum toxins
    5. Aesthetic procedures for eye wrinkles: skin needling and botulinum toxins
    6. Chemical peeling for the lip and eye regions
    7. Radiofrequency indications and complications
    8. Biorevitalization and combination techniques
    9. Laser for periorbital rejuvenation
    10. PRP for lip and eye rejuvenation
    11. Suture suspension technique for lip and eye rejuvenation
    12. Complications of hyaluronic acid fillers
    13. Complications of botulinum toxins
    14. Complications of fractional lasers (ablative and nonablative).
    Digital Access Springer 2016
  • Digital
    Shoib A. Myint, editor.
    Summary: This book offers surgeons the most up-to-date information related to non-surgical techniques specific to periorbital rejuvenation. This easy-to-use reference guide is for ophthalmologists, oculoplastic surgeons, dermatologists, plastic surgeons, maxillofacial and plastic surgery residents, as well as ENT facial plastic fellows. Complete with videos of specific techniques to better inform surgeons about these evolving procedures, Nonsurgical Peri-orbital Rejuvenation teaches the reader how to measure predictable outcomes when deciding to approach the periorbital area.

    Contents:
    Practical anatomy of the face and eyelids: cosmetic applications
    Neuromodulators: contemporary indications and techniques in the upper and midface
    Periorbital chemical peels
    Periorbital lasers
    Radiofrequency/ultrasound
    Filler augmentation
    Periorbital fat grafting: the 3D lift.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    edited by Nina Vardjan and Robert Zorec.
    Summary: "Noradrenergic Signaling and Astroglia integrates what is known about the active role of astroglia in the locus coeruleus-noradrenergic system and outlines the most recent advances in the field. It discusses the molecular mechanisms underlying norepinephrine-induced receptor activation in astroglia, cellular metabolism and CNS energy provision, in vitro, ex vivo, and in vivo models, gliosignalling and neuronal activity, and astroglial networks, gap junctions, and morphological plasticity. The book also addresses the role of astroglial adrenergic receptor activation in memory formation, cognition, regulation of sleep homeostasis, and lastly in neurological disorders, including trauma (cellular edema), neurodegeneration (Alzheimer's disease), and neuroinflammation (multiple sclerosis). Noradrenergic Signaling and Astroglia is a valuable source of new knowledge for a wide audience, including graduate students, post-doctoral fellows, and researchers in neuroscience, life sciences, and the biological and biomedical sciences."--Publisher's website.

    Contents:
    Locus coeruleus noradrenergic neurons and astroglia in health and disease / Robert Zorec, Nina Vardjan and Alexei Verkhratsky
    Astroglial adrenergic receptor signaling in brain cortex / Leif Hertz and Ye Chen
    White matter astrocytes: Adrenergic mechanisms / Maria Papanikolaou and Arthur Morgan Butt
    Role for astroglial [alpha] ₁-adrenergic receptors in glia-neuron communications and aging-related metaplasticity in the neocortex / Ulyana Lalo and Yuriy Pankratov
    Adrenergic Ca₂₊ and cAMP excitability: effects on glucose availability and cell morphology in astrocytes / Robert Zorec, Marko Kreft and Nina Vardjan
    Adrenergic receptors on astrocytes modulate gap junctions / Eliana Scemes, Randy F. Stout, Jr. and David C. Spray
    Fluxes of lactate into, from, and among gap junction-coupled astroglia and their interaction with noradrenaline / Gerald A. Dienel
    Dialogue between astrocytes and noradrenergic neurones via L-lactate / Anja G. Teschemacher and Sergey Kasparov
    Noradrenergic system and memory: The role of astrocytes / Manuel Zenger, Sophie Burlet-Godinot, Jean-Marie Petit and Pierre J. Magistretti
    Hippocampal noradrenaline regulates spatial working memory in the rat / Rosario Gulino, Anna Kostenko, Gioacchino De Leo, Serena Alexa Emmi, Domenico Nunziata and Giampiero Leanza
    Enteric astroglia and noradrenergic/purinergic signaling / Vladimir Grubišic and Vladimir Parpura
    Noradrenaline drives structural changes in astrocytes and brain extracellular space / Ang D. Sherpa, Chiye Aoki and Sabina Hrabetova
    Signalling pathway of [beta]-adrenergic receptor in astrocytes and its relevance to brain edema / Baoman Li, Dan Song, Ting Du, Alexei Verkhratsky and Liang Peng
    Noradrenaline, astroglia, and neuroinflammation / José L.M. Madrigal
    Astrocytic [beta]₂-adrenergic receptors and multiple sclerosis / Jacques De Keyser
    Potentiation of [beta]-amyloid-induced cortical inflammation by noradrenaline and noradrenergic depletion: implications for Alzheimer's disease / Douglas L. Feinstein and Michael T. Heneka.
    Digital Access ScienceDirect 2017
  • Digital
    Jean-Marc Levaillant, Jean-Philippe Bault, Bernard Benoit, Gérard Couly.
    Digital Access Springer 2017
  • Digital
    Mohamed A. Baky Fahmy, editor.
    Summary: This book is an academic and practical guide to the diagnostic methods and management strategies for both common and rare scrotal diseases. Chapters focus on the normal anthropometric measures of the scrotum as a unique organ and the latest relevant advancements in the field. Techniques including scrotal reconstruction for congenital abnormalities, trauma, and cancer-related extirpation are all covered. Critical tools and methods related to aesthetics are also detailed. Emphasis is also placed on identifying common pitfalls and how to avoid them, ensuring that the reader is fully equipped to deal with a range of scenarios. Normal and Abnormal Scrotum describes how to approach diagnosing and managing the entire range of scrotal diseases, making it essential for all general practitioners, pediatricians, urologists, and pediatric and aesthetic surgeons who encounter these patients in their day-to-day practice.

    Contents:
    Introduction
    Nomenclature and terminology
    Scrotum in Human Conscience
    Scrotal Evolution
    Animal Scrota
    Scrotal Functions and Missions
    Embryology of Scrotum
    Anatomy of Scrotum
    Morphology and Anthropometric Measurements of Scrotum
    Congenital Scrotal Anomalies
    Common anomalies
    Rare anomalies
    Scrotomegaly
    Vascular anomalies
    Scrotal calcinosis
    Case reports
    Common acquired diseases of scrotum
    Acute scrotum
    Rare acquired diseases of scrotum
    Neoplastic lesions of scrotum
    Scrotal swelling and cysts
    Dermatological diseases specific to scrotum
    Scrotal Imaging
    Scrotoplasty.
    Digital Access Springer 2022
  • Digital
    edited by Gregory I. Bain, Eiji Itoi, Giovanni Di Giacomo, Hiroyuki Sugaya.
    Contents:
    Introduction
    Osseous Structures
    Gleno-Humeral Joint
    Other Joints
    Musculo-Tendinous Structures.- Neurovascular.
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Digital
    written and translated by Lorenzo Ressel.
    Contents:
    Cellular biology and cytological interpretation : the philosophy behind the system
    Distribution of cells in tissues and organs
    Cytotypes
    Cytoarchitectures
    Background
    Morphological alterations of cells.
    Digital Access Wiley 2017
  • Digital
    Madelyn Lew, Judy Pang, Liron Pantanowitz, editors.
    Summary: In the practice of cytopathology, cytologists frequently encounter a spectrum of benign, normal cells in samples. In fact, these normal cells frequently comprise the greatest proportion of material present on a cytology slide. This is frequently the case in Pap smears of the uterine cervix , urine samples, and lung samples such as bronchial brushings. Normal cytology can often mimic pathology leading to misdiagnoses, especially in cases with reactive and metaplastic changes. Moreover, cytopathology findings of certain neoplasms can also mimic normal cytology. Today, cytology laboratories are no longer confined to dealing with just exfoliative specimens and superficial aspirations. With interventional radiology as well as endobronchial and endoscopic ultrasound-guided fine needle aspirations (FNA), we increasingly encounter visceral samples. Hence, cytologists are even likely to encounter normal elements from deep-seated organs. Sometimes, unexpected normal elements may be found within cytology specimens because a FNA procedure has contamination or inadvertently sampled a nearby organ or normal anatomical structure. Despite the importance of knowing the spectrum of normal cytology, there are limited reference materials available on this topic for cytologists. Most cytopathology texts deal with abnormal cytology. Often, the chapters in these books only devote a few sentences about normal cytology (euplasia). This book intends to fulfil this need. The book contains a mixture of text and images. Important aspects related to cytology practice are highlighted such as clinical relevance, differential diagnoses, mimics and pitfalls. The images include a variety of cytology specimen preparations (e.g. direct smears, liquid based samples, touch preparations, cell blocks) and stains (e.g. Diff Quik/MGG, Papanicolaou, H&E). In selected cases, the expected immunoprofile of normal cells is addressed. Each chapter includes a modest list of helpful and contemporary references.

    Contents:
    Introduction
    Respiratory System
    Digestive tract (oral cavity, esophagus, stomach, intestines, and anus)
    The Hepatobiliary System
    Exocrine Glands
    The Endocrine Glands
    Lymphoid & hematopoietic systems (nodes, thymus, spleen, bone marrow)
    The Urinary Tract
    Female Reproductive System
    Male Reproductive System (prostate, seminal vesicle, and testis)
    Breast
    Musculoskeletal System (bone, cartilage, muscle, soft tissue) and Skin
    Body Cavities (mesothelium, synovium)
    Central Nervous System, Peripheral Nervous System, and Eye.
    Digital Access Springer 2022
  • Digital
    Michael J. Fritsch, Uwe Kehler, Ullrich Meier ; with the collaboration of Johannes Lemcke, Christoph Miethke.
    Summary: "Presents information on pathophysiology, diagnosis, and treatment of idiopathic normal pressure hydrocephalus. Highlights the importance of determining the benefits of surgical implantation of a VP shunt. Because NPH is often incorrectly diagnosed with disorders such as Parkinson disease, the challenges faced in accurate diagnosis of NPH are discussed. Describes clinical signs and symptoms, radiographic findings, and diagnostic testing"--Provided by publisher.

    Contents:
    1. Introduction
    2. Epidemiology of Idiopathic Normal Pressure Hydrocephalus
    3. History
    4. Clinical Characteristics and Differential Diagnosis
    5. Pathophysiology
    6. Noninvasive DiagnosticWork-up
    7. Imaging
    8. Invasive Diagnostic Work-up
    9. Shunt and Valve Technology
    10. Shunt and Valve Settings
    11. Surgical Technique
    12. Endoscopic Third Ventriculostomy in Normal Pressure Hydrocephalus
    13. Scales and Scores
    14. Follow-up Management of Idiopathic Normal Pressure Hydrocephalus
    15. Complications
    16. Prognosis
    17. Summary and Future Perspectives
  • Print
    Print
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Varies.
    Call number varies. Search for Norman neurosciences series to find individual volumes of this title.
  • Print
    Print
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Call number varies. Search for Norman science and technology series to find individual volumes of this title.
  • Print
    Print
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Varies.
    Call number varies. Search for Norman surgery series to find individual volumes of this title.
  • Digital
    Stephanie L. Greene, Karen A. Williams, Colin K. Khoury, Michael B. Kantar, Laura F. Marek, editors.
    Summary: The plant species that humans rely upon have an extended family of wild counterparts that are an important source of genetic diversity used to breed productive crops. These wild and weedy cousins are valuable as a resource for adapting our food, forage, industrial and other crops to climate change. Many wild plant species are also directly used, especially for revegetation, and as medicinal and ornamental plants. North America is rich in these wild plant genetic resources. This book is a valuable reference that describes the important crop wild relatives and wild utilized species found in Canada, the United States and Mexico. The book highlights efforts taken by these countries to conserve and use wild resources and provides essential information on best practices for collecting and conserving them. Numerous maps using up-to-date information and methods illustrate the distribution of important species, and supplement detailed description on the potential value these resources have to agriculture, as well as their conservation statuses and needs. There is broad recognition of the urgent need to conserve plant diversity; however, a small fraction of wild species is distinguished by their potential to support agricultural production. Many of these species are common, even weedy, and are easily overshadowed by rare or endangered plants. Nevertheless, because of their genetic proximity to agriculturally important crops or direct use, they deserve to be recognized, celebrated, conserved, and made available to support food and agricultural security. This comprehensive two-volume reference will be valuable for students and scientists interested in economic botany, and for practitioners at all levels tasked with conserving plant biodiversity. The chapters 'Public Education and Outreach Opportunities for Crop Wild Relatives in North America' and 'Genetic Resources of Crop Wild Relatives - A Canadian Perspective' are open access under a CC BY 4.0 license via link.springer.com.

    Contents:
    Securing economically important wild plant species in North America
    Sampling wild species to conserve genetic diversity
    Practicalities of collecting
    Challenges of storing seed of wild species
    Seed production in wild species
    In situ strategies to conserve genetic resources
    Canada
    USA
    Mexico
    Indigenous
    Forging partnerships
    Maize
    Beans
    Grain and cereal crops
    Leafy or stem vegetables
    Root, bulb or tuberous vegetables
    Fruit bearing vegetables
    Temperate small fruits
    Grape
    Temperate tree fruits
    Nut
    Tropical tree fruits
    Sunflower
    Industrial crops
    Forage and turf
    Revegetation species
    Herbaceous ornamentals
    Woody ornamentals
    Aromatics
    Medicinal.
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Digital
    editors, Stephanie L. Greene, Karen A. Williams, Colin K. Khoury, Michael B. Kantar, Laura F. Marek.
    Summary: The plant species that humans rely upon have an extended family of wild counterparts that are an important source of genetic diversity used to breed productive crops. These wild and weedy cousins are valuable as a resource for adapting our food, forage, industrial and other crops to climate change. Many wild plant species are also directly used, especially for revegetation, and as medicinal and ornamental plants. North America is rich in these wild plant genetic resources. This book is a valuable reference that describes the important crop wild relatives and wild utilized species found in Canada, the United States and Mexico. The book highlights efforts taken by these countries to conserve and use wild resources and provides essential information on best practices for collecting and conserving them. Numerous maps using up-to-date information and methods illustrate the distribution of important species, and supplement detailed description on the potential value these resources have to agriculture, as well as their conservation statuses and needs. There is broad recognition of the urgent need to conserve plant diversity; however, a small fraction of wild species is distinguished by their potential to support agricultural production. Many of these species are common, even weedy, and are easily overshadowed by rare or endangered plants. Nevertheless, because of their genetic proximity to agriculturally important crops or direct use, they deserve to be recognized, celebrated, conserved, and made available to support food and agricultural security. This comprehensive two-volume reference will be valuable for students and scientists interested in economic botany, and for practitioners at all levels tasked with conserving plant biodiversity.

    Contents:
    Intro; Foreword; Reinvesting in Crop Wild Relatives in North America; References; Preface; Reference; Contents; Reviewers; Abbreviations; Part I: Cereals and Legumes;
    Chapter 1: Wild Relatives of Maize; 1.1 Introduction; 1.1.1 Origin of the Crop and Brief History of Use Worldwide; 1.1.2 Modern Day Use; 1.1.3 Challenges in Cultivation; 1.1.3.1 Pests, Diseases, and Edaphic and Climatic Limitations; 1.1.3.2 Nutritional, Functional Use; 1.1.3.3 Anticipating Climate Change; 1.2 Maize Wild Relatives; 1.2.1 Maize Crop Wild Relatives (CWR) and Their Genepool Classifications 1.2.2 Distribution/Habitat/Abundance; 1.2.3 Utilization; 1.2.3.1 Breeding and the Relative Importance of CWR (Use to Date, Valuation); 1.2.3.2 Desirable Characters: From the Perspective of Use; 1.2.3.3 Challenges to Increased Use; 1.3 Wild Utilized Species (Uses Other than for Maize Improvement: Forage); 1.3.1 What Are They and Where and How Are They Used; 1.3.2 Distribution and Habitat; 1.3.3 Potential for Expanded Use; 1.4 Conservation Status of CWR and WUS; 1.4.1 In Situ; 1.4.2 Ex Situ; 1.4.2.1 Status (Genebank Coverage and Gaps) 1.4.2.2 Current Activities (Exploration, Regeneration, Others); 1.4.3 Suggestions on Ways to Improve Conservation; References;
    Chapter 2: North American Wild Relatives of Grain Crops; 2.1 Introduction; 2.2 Amaranth (Amaranthus L.); 2.2.1 Introduction; 2.2.1.1 Origin of the Crop and Brief History of Use; 2.2.1.2 Cultivation; 2.2.2 Crop Wild Relatives in North America; 2.2.2.1 Gene Pools; 2.2.2.2 Useful Crop Wild Relative Traits; 2.2.3 Wild Economic Species; 2.2.4 Conservation Status of North American Wild Relatives; 2.3 Barley (Hordeum vulgare L. subsp. vulgare); 2.3.1 Introduction 2.3.2 Crop Wild Relatives in North America; 2.3.3 Wild Economic Species; 2.3.4 Conservation Status of North American Wild Relatives; 2.3.4.1 In Situ; 2.3.4.2 Ex Situ; 2.4 Barnyard Millet (Echinochloa P. Beauv.); 2.4.1 Introduction; 2.4.1.1 Origin of the Crop and Brief History of Use; 2.4.1.2 Cultivation; 2.4.2 Crop Wild Relatives in North America; 2.4.2.1 Gene Pools; 2.4.2.2 Useful Crop Wild Relative Traits; 2.4.3 Wild Economic Species; 2.4.4 Conservation Status of North American Wild Relatives; 2.5 Buckwheat (Fagopyrum Mill.); 2.5.1 Crop Wild Relatives in North America 2.6 Oat (Avena sativa L.); 2.6.1 Introduction; 2.6.2 Crop Wild Relatives in North America; 2.6.3 Wild Economic Species; 2.6.4 Conservation Status of North American Wild Relatives; 2.7 Proso and Related Millets (Panicum L.); 2.7.1 Introduction; 2.7.1.1 Origin of the Crop and Brief History of Use; 2.7.1.2 Cultivation; 2.7.2 Crop Wild Relatives in North America; 2.7.2.1 Gene Pools; 2.7.2.2 Useful Crop Wild Relative Traits; 2.7.3 Wild Economic Species; 2.7.4 Conservation Status of North American Wild Relatives; 2.8 Quinoa (Chenopodium quinoa Willd.); 2.8.1 Introduction
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    Hans Behrbohm.
    Digital Access
    Provider
    Version
    Thieme MedOne Otolaryngology
    Thieme MedOne Plastic Surgery
    Thieme-Connect
  • Print
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Stored offsite. Please request print.
    L966.5 .N27
    1
  • Digital
    edited by Hugo J. Bellen, Shinya Yamamoto.
    Contents:
    Introduction to notch signaling / Shinya Yamamoto, Karen L. Schulze, and Hugo J. Bellen
    Genetic screens to identify new notch pathway mutants in Drosophila / Nikolaos Giagtzoglou
    Structure-function analysis of Drosophila notch using genomic tescue transgenes / Jessica Leonardi and Hamed Jafar-Nejad
    Overview of genetic tools and techniques to study notch signaling in mice / Thomas Gridley and Andrew K. Groves
    Immunohistochemical tools and techniques to visualize notch in Drosophila melanogaster / Emiliana Tognon and Thomas Vaccari
    Antibody uptake assay and in vivo imaging to study intracellular trafficking of notch and delta in Drosophila / Lydie Couturier and François Schweisguth
    Tracking trafficking of notch and its ligands in mammalian cells / Patricia Chastagner and Christel Brou
    Visualizing notch signaling in vivo in Drosophila tissues / Benjamin E. Housden, Jinghua Li, and Sarah J. Bray
    Monitoring notch activity in the mouse / Swananda Marathe and Lavinia Alberi
    Notch signaling assays in Drosophila cultured cell lines / Jinghua Li, Benjamin E. Housden, and Sarah J. Bray
    Monitoring notch activation in cultured mammalian cells : transcriptional reporter assays / Ma. Xenia G. Ilagan and Raphael Kopan
    Monitoring notch activation in cultured mammalian cells : luciferase complementation imaging assays / Ma. Xenia G. Ilagan and Raphael Kopan
    Visualization of notch signaling oscillation in cells and tissues / Hiromi Shimojo, Yukiko Harima, and Ryoichiro Kageyama
    Proteomic analysis of the notch interactome / K. G. Guruharsha ... [et al.]
    Bacterial expression and in vitro refolding of limited fragments of the notch receptor and its ligands / Pat Whiteman, Christina Redfield, and Penny A. Handford
    Analyzing the posttranslational modification status of notch using mass spectrometry / Shinako Kakuda and Robert S. Haltiwanger
    Assay to probe proteolytic processing of notch by [gamma]-secretase / Lutgarde Serneels, Ina Tesseur, and Bart De Strooper
    Analyzing the nuclear complexes of notch signaling by electrophoretic mobility shift assay / Kelly L. Arnett and Stephen C. Blacklow
    Identifying direct notch transcriptional targets using the GSI-washout assay / Will Bailis, Yumi Yashiro-Ohtani, and Warren S. Pear
    Probing the epigenetic status at notch target genes / Robert Liefke and Tilman Borggrefe
    Notch-ligand binding assays in Drosophila cells / Aiguo Xu and Kenneth D. Irvine
    Modeling notch signaling : a practical tutorial / Pau Formosa-Jordan and David Sprinzak
    Small molecules that inhibit notch signaling / Gerdien E. De Kloe and Bart De Strooper
    Application and evaluation of anti-notch antibodies to modulate notch signaling / Wendy R. Gordon and Jon C. Aster
    Application of anti-ligand antibodies to inhibit notch signaling / Jun-ichiro Koga and Masanori Aikawa.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    Jörg Reichrath, Sandra Reichrath, editors.
    Summary: This comprehensive assessment of our present knowledge of the role of notch signaling in embryology and cancer analyzes a range of topics from the latest findings in cellular and molecular pathology to new concepts for prophylaxis and treatment of cancer.
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    edited by Jörg Reichrath, Sandra Reichrath.
    Contents:
    Notch signaling in prevention ant therapy: fighting cancer with a two-sided sword
    Transcription factor RBPJ as a molecular switch in regulating the Notch response
    Unraveling of Hidden Secrets: The tumour suppressor Lethal (2) giant discs (Lgd)/CC2D1, Notch Signaling and Cancer
    Notch and endometrial cancer
    Notch and Esophageal Squamous Cell Carcinoma
    Notch signaling and liver cancer
    Notch inHead and Neck Cancer
    Notch Signaling and Human Papillomavirus-Associated Oral Tumorigenesis
    The impact of Notch signalingfor carcinogenesis and progression of non-melanoma skin cancer: lessons learned fromcancer stem cells, tumor angiogenesis, and beyond
    Notch Signaling in Thyroid Cancer
    The Relevance of Notch Signaling in Cancer Progression
    Notch Signaling and the Breast Cancer Microenvironment
    Notch pathway: a journey from notching phenotypes to cancer immunotherapy
    Index.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    Jörg Reichrath, Sandra Reichrath, editors.
    Summary: This thoroughly revised second edition is an up-to-date overview of the current knowledge of Notch and Notch signaling in embryology and cancer. It discusses this topic from Notch's role in the development of the embryo to the Notch signaling pathway's role in the development of a number of cancers, including breast cancer, malignant melanoma, Non-melanoma skin cancer, intestinal cancer and others. In the years since the previous edition, there have been numerous developments and insights within this rapidly moving field, making this new edition urgently needed. This volume also features discussions of current insights on Notch's role in senescence, the regulation of Notch signaling by microRNAs, Notch's role in the microbiome, diet and its influence on Notch signaling and more. Taken as a whole, with its companion books - Molecular Biology of Notch Signaling and Notch Signaling in Cancer - this is a definitive discussion of the topic, presented by internationally-recognized contributors. Presented in a coherent and accessible structure, this revised and updated second edition is an essential and up-to-date guide for oncologists, embryologists, researchers and advanced students. -- Provided by publisher.

    Contents:
    Notch signaling and tissue patterning in embryology : an introduction / Jörg Reichrath, Sandra Reichrath
    Notch signalilng and embryonic development : an ancient friend, revisited / Jörg Reichrath, Sandra Reichrath
    The five faces of notch signalling during Drosophila melanogaster embryonic CNS development / Epigenetic regulation of notch signaling during Drosophila development / Chuanxian Wei, Chung-Weng Phang, Renjie Jiao
    Regulation of proneural wave propagation through a combination of notch-mediated lateral inhibition and EGF-mediated reaction diffusion / Matkoto Sato, Tetsuo Yasugi
    A nuclear protein, Nepro, is essential for the maintenance of early neural stem cells and preimplantation embryos / Tetsuichiro Saito
    Role of notch signaling in leg development in Drosophila melanogaster / Sergio Córdoba, Carlos Estella
    Notch signalling : the multitask manager of inner ear development and regeneration / Nicolas Daudet, Magdalena Żak
    Notch pathway and inherited diseases : challenge and promise / Jörg Reichrath, Sandra Reichrath.
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital/Print
    Digital Access
    Provider
    Version
    Google Books
    Google Books
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Stored offsite. Please request print.
    L969 .U64 1951
    3
  • Digital
    John R. Romanelli, David J. Desilets, David B. Earle, editors.
    Digital Access Springer 2017
  • Digital
    Stephen R. Baker.
    Contents:
    Part I. Early residency : preparation and participation
    Part II. Late residency, fellowship and just beyond
    Part III. Radiology elsewhere in the world
    Part IV. Radiologist inclusiveness : minority features
    Part V. The appearances and implications of the radiology report
    Part VI. Radiologist responsibilities
    Part VII. Quality considerations
    Part VIII. Malpractice apology and appropriateness
    Part IX. Opportunities for radiologists
    Part X. The challenges facing American radiologists
    Part XI. Research
    Part XII. Radiation dose
    Part XIII. Nooks and crannies in general radiology including some forgotten observations.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Print
    J. Patel, secrétaire de rédaction.
    Contents:
    T. 3. Pathologie de la tête et du cou / M. Arnaud ... [et al].
    t. 6. Pathologie de l'appareil urinaire et de l'appareil génital masculin ; Pathologie de l'appareil génital féminin / R. Couvelaire, J. Patel et P. Petit.
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Stored offsite. Please request print.
    M57 .N93
    3
  • Digital/Print
    sous la direction de A. Le Dentu, Pierre Delbet.
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Stored offsite. Please request print.
    M31 .L47
    34
  • Print
    Garnier, M.; Roger, Henri; Teissier, Pierre Joseph; Widal, Fernand.
    Contents:
    Fascicule 1. Maladies infectieuses
    Fascicule 2. Maladies infectieuses (suite)
    Fascicule 3. Maladies infectieuses (suite
    Fascicule 4. Maladies infectieuses (suite) et parasitaires
    Fascicule 5. Maladies infectieuses et parasitaires (fin) Le cancer
    Fascicule 6. Intoxications
    Fascicule 7. Avitaminoses : Maladies par agents physiques : troubles de la nutrition
    Fascicule 8. Pathologie des glandes endocrines : troubles du développement
    Fascicule 9. Affections du sang et des organes hématopoīétiques
    Fascicule 10. Pathologie de l'appareil circulatoire (coeur et vaisseaux) Tome I-III (1933)
    Fascicule 11. Pathologie de l'appareil respiratoire (Nez - Larynx - Trachée - Bronches - Poumons)
    Fascicule 12. Pathologie de l'appareil respiratoire (suite)
    Fascicule 13. Appareil digestif (bouche, pharynx, oesophage, estomac)
    Fascicule 14. Appareil digestif (intestin)
    Fascicule 15. Glandes salivaires. Pancréas et péritoine
    Fascicule 16. Pathologie du foie et des voies biliaires
    Fascicule 17. Pathologie des reins. Hémoglobinurie
    Fascicule 18. Pathologie du système nerveux (Sémiologie générale)
    Fascicule 19. Pathologie du cerveau et du cervelet
    Fascicule 20. Pathologie du systeme nerveux (Bulbe, nerfs, craniens, méninges, moelle)
    Fascicule 21. Nerfs. Sympathique. Névroses
    Fascicule 22. Muscles, os et articulations.
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Stored offsite. Please request print.
    L41 .R72
    25
  • Digital/Print
    Arnould, Jules; Arnould, Emile.
    Digital Access Google Books 1881-
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Stored offsite. Please request print.
    I425 .A76 1895
    1
  • Digital/Print
    par A. Laveran, J. Teissier.
    Contents:
    t. 1. Maladies générales : maladies du système nerveux et de l'appareil locomoteur
    t. 2. Maladies des appareils circulatoire, respiratoire et digestif du foie, des reins du péritoine et de ses annexes.
    Digital Access
    Provider
    Version
    Google Books
    Google Books
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Stored offsite. Please request print.
    J24 .L39 1889
    2
  • Print
    Abderhalden, Emil.
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Stored offsite. Please request print.
    10
  • Print
    Print
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Books: General Collection (Downstairs)
    Call number varies. Search for Novartis Foundation Symposium (Series) to find individual volumes of this title.
  • Digital
    edited by David A. Phoenix, Frederick Harris and Sarah R. Dennison.
    Contents:
    The problem of microbial drug resistance
    Conventional antibiotics
    revitalized by new agents
    Developing novel bacterial targets: carbonic anhydrases as antibacterial drug targets
    Magainins
    a model for development of eukaryotic antimicrobial peptides (amps)
    Antimicrobial peptides from prokaryotes
    Peptidomimetics as antimicrobial agents
    Synthetic biology and therapies for infectious diseases
    Nano-antimicrobials based on metals
    Natural products as antimicrobial agents
    an update
    Photodynamic antimicrobial chemotherapy
    The antimicrobial effects of ultrasound
    Antimicrobial therapy based on antisense agents
    New delivery systems
    liposomes for pulmonary delivery of antibacterial drugs.
    Digital Access Wiley 2015
  • Digital
    editors, Hannu Koistinen, Ulf-Håkan Stenman.
    Contents:
    Novel approaches in immunoassays / Hannu Koistinen & Ulf-Håkan Stenman
    General principles of immunoassays / Annette C. Moser & Taylor L. Carlson
    Surface plasmon resonance-based immunoassays / Darragh Lemass, Stephen Hearty & Richard O'Kennedy
    Immunopeptidometric assays / Hannu Koistinen & Ulf-Håkan Stenman
    Bead-based immunoassays / Fimme Jan van der Wal, Jan H.W. Bergervoet, René P. Achterberg & Willem Haasnoot
    Automation of immunoassays through centrifugal lab-on-adisc platforms / Robert Burger, Maria Kitsara, Jennifer Gaughran, Charles Nwankire & Jens Ducrée
    Index.
    Digital Access Future Med 2014
  • Digital
    edited by Franklin G. Berger, C. Richard Boland.
    Digital Access ScienceDirect 2021
  • Digital/Print
    edited by Vered Stearns.
    Contents:
    1 Genomic Biomarkers for Cancer Risk
    2 Epigenetic Biomarkers of Breast Cancer Risk: Across the Breast Cancer Prevention Continuum
    3 Incorporating Biomarkers in Studies of Chemoprevention
    4 Breast Molecular Profiling and Radiotherapy Considerations
    5 Prognostic and Predictive Biomarkers of Endocrine Responsiveness For Estrogen Receptor Positive Breast Cancer
    6 Biomarkers for predicting response to Anti-HER2 Agents
    7 Intratumor Heterogeneity in Breast Cancer
    8 Intratumor Heterogeneity in Breast Cancer
    9 Pharmacogenetic Predictors of Response
    10 Metabolomics in Breast Cancer: Current Status and Perspectives
    11 Circulating Tumor Cells
    12 Circulating Plasma Tumor DNA.
    Digital Access Springer 2016
  • Digital
    Heung Jae Chun, Kwideok Park, Chun-Ho Kim, Gilson Khang, editors.
    Summary: "This book explores in depth a wide range of new biomaterials that hold great promise for applications in regenerative medicine. The opening two sections are devoted to biomaterials designed to direct stem cell fate and regulate signaling pathways. Diverse novel functional biomaterials, including injectable nanocomposite hydrogels, electrosprayed nanoparticles, and waterborne polyurethane-based materials, are then discussed. The fourth section focuses on inorganic biomaterials, such as nanobioceramics, hydroxyapatite, and titanium dioxide. Finally, up-to-date information is provided on a wide range of smart natural biomaterials, ranging from silk fibroin-based scaffolds and collagen type I to chitosan, mussel-inspired biomaterials, and natural polymeric scaffolds. This is one of two books to be based on contributions from leading experts that were delivered at the 2018 Asia University Symposium on Biomedical Engineering in Seoul, Korea – the companion book examines in depth the latest enabling technologies for regenerative medicine"--Publisher's description.

    Contents:
    The fate of stem cell by biomaterials. Human placenta laminin-111 as a multifunctional protein for tissue engineering and regenerative medicine / Johannes Hackethal, Christina M. A. P. Schuh, Alexandra Hofer, Barbara Meixner, Simone Hennerbichler, Heinz Redl [and others]
    A novel strategy for simple and robust expansion of human pluripotent stem cells using botulinum hemagglutinin / Mee-Hae Kim, Masahiro Kino-Oka
    Growth and differentiation of dental stem cells of apical papilla on polycaprolactone scaffolds / Mohamed Jamal, Yaser Greish, Sami Chogle, Harold Goodis, Sherif M. Karam
    Impact of three-dimentional culture systems on hepatic differentiation of puripotent stem cells and beyond / Thamil Selvee Ramasamy, Agnes Lee Chen Ong, Wei Cui
    Controlling of signal pathway of stem cell by biomaterials. Modulation of the osteoimmune environment in the development of biomaterials for osteogenesis / Fei Wei, Yin Xiao
    Novel biomimetic microphysiological systems for tissue regeneration and disease modeling / Karim I. Budhwani, Patsy G. Oliver, Donald J. Buchsbaum, Vinoy Thomas
    Silk fibroin in wound healing process / Md. Tipu Sultan, Ok Joo Lee, Soon Hee Kim, Hyung Woo Ju, Chan Hum Park
    The role of natural-based biomaterials in advanced therapies for autoimmune diseases / Helena Ferreira, Joana F. Fangueiro, Nuno M. Neves
    Functional biomaterials for regenerative medicine. Recent advancements in decellularized matrix-based biomaterials for musculoskeletal tissue regeneration / Hyunbum Kim, Yunhye Kim, Mona Fendereski, Nathaniel S. Hwang, Yongsung Hwang
    Clinical applications of injectable biomaterials / Hatice Ercan, Serap Durkut, Aysel Koc-Demir, Ayşe Eser Elçin, Yaşar Murat Elçin
    Advanced injectable alternatives for osteoarthritis / Şebnem Şahin [and others]
    Fabrication of hydrogel materials for biomedical applications / Jen Ming Yang, Olajire Samson Olanrele, Xing Zhang, Chih Chin Hsu
    Injectable nanocomposite hydrogels and electrosprayed nano(micro)particles for biomedical applications / Nguyen Vu Viet Linh, Nguyen Tien Thinh, Pham Trung Kien, Tran Ngoc Quyen, Huynh Dai Phu
    Advances in waterborne polyurethane-based biomaterials for biomedical applications / Eun Joo Shin, Soon Mo Choi
    Medical applications of collagen and hyaluronan in regenerative medicine / Lynn L. H. Huang, Ying-Hui Amy Chen, Zheng-Ying Zhuo, Ya-Ting Hsieh, Chia-Ling Yang, Wei-Ting Chen [and others]
    Inorganic biomaterials for regenerative medicine. Bioceramics for clinical application in regenerative dentistry / Ika Dewi Ana, Gumilang Almas Pratama Satria, Anne Handrini Dewi, Retno Ardhani
    Stem cell and advanced nano bioceramic interactions / Sevil Köse [and others]
    Recent trends in hydroxyapatite (HA) synthesis and the synthesis report of nanostructure ha by hydrothermal reaction / Pham Trung Kien, Huynh Dai Phu, Nguyen Vu Viet Linh, Tran Ngoc Quyen, Nguyen Thai Hoa
    Modification of titanium implant and titanium dioxide for bone tissue engineering / Tae-Keun Ahn, Dong Hyeon Lee, Tae-sup Kim, Gyu chol Jang, SeongJu Choi, Jong Beum Oh [and others]
    Smart natural biomaterials for regenerative medicine. Silk fibroin-based scaffold for bone tissue engineering / Joo Hee Choi, Do Kyung Kim, Jeong Eun Song, Joaquim Miguel Oliveira, Rui Luis Reis, Gilson Khang
    Collagen type i: a versatile biomaterial / Shiplu Roy Chowdhury, Mohd Fauzi Mh Busra, Yogeswaran Lokanathan, Min Hwei Ng, Jia Xian Law, Ude Chinedu Cletus [and others]
    Tissue-inspired interfacial coatings for regenerative medicine / Mahmoud A. Elnaggar, Yoon Ki Joung
    Naturally-derived biomaterials for tissue engineering applications / Matthew Brovold [and others]
    Mussel-inspired biomaterials for cell and tissue engineering / Min Lu, Jiashing Yu
    Chitosan for tissue engineering / Chun-Ho Kim, Sang Jun Park, Dae Hyeok Yang, Heung Jae Chun
    Demineralized dentin matrix (DDM) as a carrier for recombinant human bone morphogenetic proteins (rhBMP-2) / In Woong Um
    Prospects of natural polymeric scaffolds in peripheral nerve tissue-regeneration / Roqia Ashraf, Hasham S. Sofi, Mushtaq A. Beigh, Shafquat Majeed, Shabana Arjamand, Faheem A. Sheikh
    Chitosan-based dressing materials for problematic wound management / Ji-Ung Park, Eun-Ho Song, Seol-Ha Jeong, Juha Song, Hyoun-Ee Kim, Sukwha Kim.
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Digital/Print
    Christopher Ahern, Stephan Pless, editors.
    Contents:
    Introduction
    Engineered ionized side chains
    Cysteine modification: probing channel structure, function, and conformational change
    Functional site-directed fluorometry
    Bioreactive tethers
    Flipping the photoswitch: ion channels under light control
    Incorporation of non-canonical amino acids
    Index.
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Digital
    edited by Shivaani Kummar, Chris Takimoto.
    Contents:
    1. Changing landscape of early phase clinical trials: beyond the horizon
    2. Requirements for filing an investigational new drug application
    3. The evolution of phase I trials, past, present, and future: a biostatistical perspective
    4. Evolving early phase trial designs: a regulatory perspective
    5. The challenges of implementing multiarmed early phase oncology clinical trials
    6. Designing trials for drug combinations
    7. Dose selection of trageted oncology drugs in early development: time for change?
    8. Integrating biomarkers in early-phase trials
    9. Can early clinical trials help deliver more precise cancer care?
    10. Role of imaging in early-phase trials
    11. Clinical trial design in immuno-oncology
    12. Cell-based therapies: a new frontier of personalized medicine
    13. Incorporating patient-reported outcomes into early-phase trials
    Index.
    Digital Access ScienceDirect 2018
  • Digital
    Ambikanandan Misra, Aliasgar Shahiwala, editors.
    Summary: The application of drug delivery is a valuable, cost-effective lifecycle management resource. By endowing drugs with new and innovative therapeutic benefits, drug delivery systems extend products profitable lifecycle, giving pharmaceutical companies competitive and financial advantages, and providing patients with improved medications. Formulation development is now being used to create new dosage forms for existing products, which not only reduces the time and expense involved in new drug development, but also helps with regard to patent protection and bypassing existing patents. Todays culture demands convenience, a major factor determining adherence to drug therapy. Over the past few years, patient convenience-oriented research in the field of drug delivery has yielded a range of innovative drug-delivery options. As a result, various drug-delivery systems, including medicated chewing gums, oral dispersible tablets, medicated lozenges and lollipops, have now hit the market and are very popular. These dosage forms offer a highly convenient way to dose medications, not only for special population groups with swallowing difficulties, such as children and the elderly, but for the general populace as well. This book provides valuable insights into a number of formulation design approaches that are currently being used, or could be used, to provide new benefits from existing drug molecules.

    Contents:
    Chapter 1. Poorly water soluble drugs and formulation strategies to improve oral bioavailability
    Chapter 2. Buccal and intraoral drug delivery: Potential alternative to conventional therapy
    Chapter 3. Gastro-retentive drug delivery Systems: Current strategies and challenges
    Chapter 4. Peyers patch: Targeted drug delivery for therapeutics benefits
    Chapter 5. Colonic drug delivery systems as Multi-unit potential: Therapeutic strategies and opportunities
    Chapter 6. Controlled and prolonged drug delivery systems: Therapeutics needs and formulation strategies
    Chapter 7. Transdermal drug administration: Emerging techniques and improved patient compliance
    Chapter 8. Inhalation drug therapy: Emerging trends in Nasal and pulmonary drug delivery
    Chapter 9. Ophthalmic and otic drug administration: Novel approaches and challenges
    Chapter 10. Targeted drug delivery to brain: Challenges and formulation approaches
    Chapter 11. Opportunities and challenges in targeted carrier based drug delivery: Increased efficacy & reduced toxicity.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    editor, Srdan Verstovsek.
    Contents:
    Novel insights into myelofibrosis pathophysiology and treatment / Srdan Verstovsek
    Primary myelofibrosis : diagnosis and risk stratification / Ben Y. Zhang & Naseema Gangat
    Prognostication in myelofibrosis / Francesco Passamonti, Domenica Caramazza, Barbara Mora & Margherita Maffioli
    Prognostic relevance of mutations in myelofibrosis / Paola Guglielmelli, Giada Rotunno, Annalisa Pacilli & Carmela Mannarelli
    Disease burden for the patient with myelofibrosis : goals and response with therapy / Holly L. Geyer & Ruben A. Mesa
    Myeloproliferative neoplasms and splanchnic vein thrombosis / Giovanni Barosi & Vittorio Rosti
    Interferon therapy for myelofibrosis / Hans Carl Hasselbalch
    JAK inhibitors as therapy for myelofibrosis / Srdan Verstovsek & Kate J. Newberry
    What we can do about anemia in myelofibrosis / Francisco Cervantes & Arturo Pereira
    Rationale for combination therapies in myelofibrosis / Alessandro M. Vannucchi, Niccolò Bartalucci, Lisa Pieri & Paola Guglielmelli
    When and how to transplant patients with myelofibrosis / H. Joachim Deeg, Olga Sala-Torra & Bart L. Scot.
    Digital Access Future Med 2015
  • Digital
    editors, Rainer Haas, Ulrich Germing.
    Contents:
    Novel insights into pathophysiology, diagnostics and treatment of myelodysplastic syndromes / Rainer Haas & Ulrich Germing
    Myelodysplastic syndromes etiology and pathophysiology / Thomas Schroeder
    Clinical presentation of myelodysplastic syndromes / Kathrin Nachtkamp
    Diagnosis of myelodysplastic syndromes / Corinna Strupp, Kathrin Nachtkamp, Judith Neukirchen & Ulrich Germing
    Cytogenetic features in myelodysplastic syndromes / Julie Schanz & Detlef Haase
    Prognostic assessment in myelodysplastic syndromes / Corinna Strupp, Judith Neukirchen & Ulrich Germing
    Treatment of patients with myelodysplastic syndromes / Norbert Gattermann, Corinna Strupp, Andrea Kündgen, Esther Zipperer & Rainer Haas
    Hematopoietic stem cell transplantation in patients with myelodysplastic syndromes / Guido Kobbe
    Index.
    Digital Access Future Med 2014
  • Digital
    editors, Bente Danneskiold-Samsøe, Else Marie Bartels.
    Contents:
    Novel insights into the pathophysiology and treatment of fibromyalgia / Bente Danneskiold-Samsøe & Else Marie Bartels
    The history of fibromyalgia / Bente Danneskiold-Samsøe & Else Marie Bartels
    Pain in fibromyalgia / Kirstine Amris
    Pain assessment in fibromyalgia / Else Marie Bartels & Bente Danneskiold-Samsøe
    Fatigue and fibromyalgia / Philip Mease
    Genetic influence on fibromyalgia / Laia Rodriguez-Revenga, Elisa Docampo, Antonio Collado & Montserrat Mila
    Biomarkers in fibromyalgia / Nurcan Üçeyler & Claudia Sommer
    Assessment of activities of daily living in fibromyalgia / Eva E. Wæhrens
    Assessment of muscle strength and muscle function in fibromyalgia / Kaisa Mannerkorpi & Petri Salo
    Clinical assessment of fibromyalgia / Bente Danneskiold-Samsøe & Else Marie Bartels
    Treatment options for fibromyalgia / David A. Williams & Daniel J. Clauw
    Index.
    Digital Access Future Med 2014
  • Digital
    editor, Patrick Lévy.
    Contents:
    Novel insights into the pathophysiology and treatment of obstructive sleep apnea / Patrick Lévy
    Epidemiology of sleep apnea/hypopnea syndrome and sleep-disordered breathing / Poul J. Jennum & Renata L. Riha
    Pathophysiology of upper airway collapse / Jayne C. Carberry, Jane E. Butler & Danny J. Eckert
    Diagnosis of obstructive sleep apnea / Nancy A. Collop & Misha Peter
    Sleepiness in OSA : mechanisms, diagnosis and public health consequences / Luigi Ferini-Strambi
    Cardiovascular consequences of sleep apnea : pathophysiology and clinical implications / Lena Lavie, Jean-Louis Pépin, Renaud Tamisier & Peretz Lavie
    Metabolic consequences : pathophysiology and clinical implications / Jamie C.M. Lam & Mary S.M. Ip
    Treatment options in obstructive sleep apnea / Patrick Lévy, Jean-Louis Pépin, Renaud Tamisier & Sandrine Launois-Rollinat
    Treatment : oral appliances / Marie Marklund
    Index.
    Digital Access Future Med 2014
  • Digital
    editor, Tetsuro Matsumoto.
    Contents:
    Novel insights into urinary tract infections and their management / Tetsuro Matsumoto
    The limits of evidence for urinary tract infection management in adults / Ilan Schwartz & Allan Ronald
    Bacterial urinary tract infection : an application of high-resolution MR spectroscopy / Ashish Gupta & Navneeta Bansal
    Fallacies and misconceptions in diagnosing urinary tract infection / Sheela Swamy, Monika Gorny & James Malone-Lee
    Role of the microbiome in recurrent urinary tract infection / Yige Bao, Blayne Welk, Gregor Reid & Jeremy P. Burton
    Urinary tract infections in the spina bifida population / Ramiro J. Madden-Fuentes & Sherry S. Ross
    Complicated urinary tract infections in children / Tanja Kersnik Levart & Rajko B. Kenda
    Antimicrobial therapies for antimicrobial-resistant pathogens in urinary tract infections / Ryoichi Hamasuna, Tetsuro Matsumoto & Katsunori Suzuki.
    Digital Access Future Med 2014
  • Digital
    K.D. Rainsford, M.C. Powanda, M.W. Whitehouse, editors.
    Contents:
    Aloe vera: a Natural Healing Agent for Gastro-intestinal and Chronic Inflammatory Conditions
    Chondroitin Sulphate and Glucosamine Sulphate as Potential Disease-Modifying Agents for Osteoarthritis
    Probiotics as Natural Healing Agents for Gastro-intestinal Diseases and Arthritis.- Therapeutic Effects of Ribonucleinate (Ribonucleotides) in Immuno-inflammatory and Arthritic Diseases
    The Medicinal Properties and Phytochemistry of Plants of the Genus Terminalia (Combretaceae)
    Celery Seed and Related Extracts with Anti-athritic, Anti-Ulcer and anti-Microbial Activities
    Lyprinol, Lipids and other Components of Green Lipped Mussel as Anti-Arthritic and Anti-Ulcer Agents
    Zinc Compounds as Topical and Oral Anti-Arthritic and Anti-ulcer Compounds.
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Digital
    Paolo Martelletti, Lars Edvinsson, editors.
    Summary: Published in the series Headache, endorsed by the European Headache Federation, this is the first book on the novel synthetic treatment of migraine with ditans (lasmiditan) and gepants (atogepant, ubrogepant, rimegepant, vazegepant). These drugs will provide additional options for people with migraine put at risk of side effects by other medications or with unsatisfactory response to previous drugs. There is now a sufficient amount of literature published to interest a wide multidisciplinary readership (general physicians, general neurologists, clinical psychologists, neurologists in training, and medical students) facing every day this burdensome disorder in their clinical practice. The book aims therefore at offering an overview of these new drugs for both acute and prophylactic treatments of migraine, covering studies on clinical evidence, tolerability, and the different stages of clinical development.

    Contents:
    Intro
    Foreword
    Preface
    Contents
    Chapter 1: Novel Pharmacological Targets of Migraine: An Overview
    1.1 Introduction
    1.2 Novel Pharmacological Treatments for Migraine
    1.3 Acute Treatment for Migraine Beyond Ergots and Triptans
    1.3.1 5-HT1F Agonists: Ditans
    1.3.2 CGRP Receptor Antagonists: Gepants
    1.4 Gepants as Prophylactic Treatment for Migraine
    1.5 Mechanisms of Action of Ditans and Gepants: Is It a Common Pathway?
    1.6 Conclusion
    References
    Chapter 2: Molecular and Cellular Mechanisms of CGRP Antagonists
    2.1 Introduction 2.1.1 Trigeminovascular System
    2.2 Neuropeptide Signaling
    2.2.1 CGRP
    2.2.2 Amylin
    2.2.3 Neuropeptide Receptors
    2.2.4 Downstream Activation
    2.3 The Blood-Brain Barrier
    2.4 CGRP Antagonists
    2.5 Molecular Targets
    2.6 Cellular Targets
    2.6.1 Vascular Targets
    2.6.2 Trigeminal Targets
    2.6.2.1 Satellite Glial Cells
    2.6.2.2 Neuronal Targets
    2.6.2.3 Potential Antagonistic Effect at the Nodes of Ranvier
    2.7 Non-migraine Targets
    2.8 Conclusion
    References
    Chapter 3: Atogepant
    3.1 Introduction 3.2 Chemical Characteristics, Pharmacodynamics and Pharmacokinetics
    3.3 Atogepant in Preclinical Studies
    3.4 Efficacy of Atogepant in Phase II and Phase III Clinical Trials
    3.5 Safety and Adverse Events
    3.6 Future Developments
    3.7 Conclusions
    References
    Chapter 4: Ubrogepant
    4.1 Introduction
    4.2 Pharmacology
    4.2.1 Chemistry
    4.2.2 Pharmacodynamics
    4.2.3 Pharmacokinetics and Metabolism
    4.3 Clinical Registered Trials
    4.3.1 Phase I Trials
    4.3.2 Phase II Trials
    4.3.3 Phase III Trials: ACHIEVE I and II and Their Extension Study 4.3.4 Post-marketing Studies
    4.4 Safety and Tolerability
    4.5 Regulatory Affairs and Clinical Approval
    4.6 Conclusions
    References
    Chapter 5: Rimegepant
    5.1 Introduction
    5.2 Introduction to the Compound
    5.2.1 Chemistry
    5.2.2 Pharmacodynamics
    5.2.3 Pharmacokinetics and Metabolism
    5.2.4 Metabolism
    5.2.5 Drug Interactions
    5.3 Clinical Efficacy
    5.3.1 Phase II Studies
    5.3.2 Phase III Studies
    5.4 Safety and Tolerability
    5.4.1 Phase I Studies
    5.4.2 Phase II Studies
    5.4.3 Phase III Studies
    5.5 Exclusion Criteria
    5.6 Conclusions
    References Chapter 6: Zavegepant
    6.1 Introduction
    6.2 Preclinical Pharmacology
    6.3 Clinical Trials
    6.3.1 Safety and Tolerability
    6.3.2 Efficacy
    6.4 Conclusion
    References
    Chapter 7: Molecular Mechanisms of 5-HT1F Receptor Agonists
    7.1 Serotonin (5-HT) and 5-HT Receptors
    7.2 5-HT1B/D and 5-HT1F Receptors and Migraine Treatment
    References
    Chapter 8: Lasmiditan
    8.1 Introduction
    8.2 Pharmacological Profile
    8.3 Preclinical Studies
    8.4 Clinical Studies
    8.5 Safety
    8.6 Drug Interactions
    8.7 Conclusion
    References
    Digital Access Springer 2022
  • Digital
    Christopher Dittus, editor.
    Summary: This comprehensive volume reviews the clinical presentation, diagnosis, and treatment approach to rare lymphomas. There is particular emphasis placed on new diagnostic approaches, novel chemotherapy combinations, and treatment modalities with novel therapeutics. It highlights research advances in a group of diseases that are often overlooked, and serves as a single repository of information on the most recent advances in targeted small molecule inhibitors, monoclonal antibodies, immunotherapy, and CAR-T therapy as they pertain to rare types of lymphoma. Written for practicing oncologists, hematologists, fellows, and residents, Novel Therapeutics for Rare Lymphomas covers rare subtypes of lymphoma, including indolent and aggressive T-cell lymphomas and B-cell lymphomas.

    Contents:
    The Hematopathology and Diagnostic Challenges of Rare Lymphomas
    Novel Therapeutics in the Management of Waldenstrom Macroglobulinemia
    Immunotherapy in Hodgkin Lymphoma and other CD30+ Lymphomas
    Chronic Lymphocytic Leukemia with Alterations in TP53
    Mantel Cell Lymphoma
    Current and Emerging Treatment Strategies from Primary Mediastinal B-Cell Lymphoma
    Plasmablastic Lymphoma and Primary Effusion Lymphoma
    Novel Agents in Primary Central Nervous System Lymphoma
    Adult T-Cell Leukemia/Lymphoma
    Extranodal NK/T-Cell Lymphoma
    Anaplastic Large Cell Lymphoma
    Enteropathy-Associated T-Cell Lymphomas
    Hepatosplenic T-Cell Lymphoma
    Cutaneous T-Cell Lymphoma: Mycosis Fungoides and Sezary Syndrom.
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    volume editors, Christoph Stettler, Emanuel Christ, Peter Diem.
    Contents:
    Treatment goals in diabetes / Melmer, A., Laimer, M.
    The 'old' anti-diabetic agents : a systematic inventory / Buhse, S., Mühlhauser, I., Lenz, M.
    Novel therapeutic approaches in diabetes / Gallwitz, B.
    Diabetes technology / Pfützner, A.
    Novelties in diabetic retinopathy / Ebneter, A., Zinkernagel, M.S.
    Hypertension and diabetic nephropathy / Skov, J.; Christiansen, J.S., Poulsen, P.L.
    The diabetic foot : the never-ending challenge contemporary options of screening, management and prevention of foot pathologies in diabetic patients / Peter-Riesch, B.
    Diabetes and cancer / Holden, S.E.
    Beta-cell replacement : pancreas and islet cell transplantation / Niclauss, N., Meier, R., Bédat, B., Berishvili, E., Berney, T.
    Gestational diabetes mellitus / Spaight, C., Gross, J., Horsch, A., Puder, J.J.
    Genetic defects of the B-cell that cause diabetes / Stekelenburg, C.M., Schwitzgebel, V.M.
    Genetics of type 2 diabetes / Stanekov, A., Laakso, M.
    Digital Access Karger 2016
  • Digital/Print
    Huai Deng, editor.
    Summary: Nrf2, a transcription factor that mediates transcriptional responses to oxidative and xenobiotic stresses, plays a central role in cellular protection against internal or external toxins. Defects in Nrf2 and the relevant regulatory pathways are associated with a number of pathologies including inflammation,respiratory diseases, cardiovascular dysfunctions, metabolic syndrome and diabetes, neurodegeneration, and cancer. This book comprehensively reviews the up-to-date discoveries for the roles of Nrf2 in several human diseases in the context of inflammation. In particular, the molecular mechanisms that mediate the functions of Nrf2 and its interacting network in inflammation and pathogenesis are explicated. In addition, the research and therapeutic applications of Nrf2-targeting compounds in different diseases were summarized. This book is expected to be a valuable reference for worldwide researchers conducting both mechanistic and therapeutic studies of Nrf2 and relevant factors.
    Digital Access Springer 2020
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Books: General Collection (Downstairs)
    QP552.T68 N74 2020
    1
  • Digital
    Angel Lanas, editor.
    Contents:
    Chemistry, Pharmacodynamics, and Pharmacokinetics of NSAIDs
    Principles, Mechanisms of Action, and Future Prospects of Anti-Inflammatory Drugs
    Efficacy of NSAIDs in the Treatment of Rheumatic Diseases
    Adverse Effects of NSAIDs in the Gastrointestinal Tract: Risk Factors of Gastrointestinal Toxicity with NSAIDs
    Adverse Effects of NSAIDs on the Cardiovascular System
    Safe Prescription of NSAIDs in Clinical Practic
    NSAIDS and Aspirin: Recent Advances and Implications for Clinical Management
    Non-Prescription Analgesic Anti-inflammatory Drugs: Efficacy and Safety
    Low-Dose Aspirin in the Cardiovascular System
    Adverse Effects of Low-Dose Aspirin in the Gastrointestinal Tract
    Aspirin in the Treatment and Prevention of Cardiovascular Disease: Need for Individual Clinical Judgments
    Molecular and Experimental Basis for COX-Inhibition in Cancer
    Clinical Effects of NSAIDs and Coxibs in Colon Cancer Prevention
    Aspirin and the Prevention of Colorectal Cancer
    A Rational Approach for the Use of NSAIDs and/or Aspirin in Cancer Prevention in the Near Future: “Balancing Risk and Benefits”. .
    Digital Access Springer 2016
  • Digital
    edited by Shinichi Nakagawa, Tetsuro Hirose.
    Contents:
    Visualization of lncRNA by single-molecule fluorescence in situ hybridization / Margaret Dunagin , Moran N. Cabili , John Rinn , and Arjun Raj
    Super-resolution imaging of nuclear bodies by STED microscopy / Yasushi Okada and Shinichi Nakagawa
    High-resolution 3D DNA FISH using plasmid probes and computational correction of optical aberrations to study chromatin structure at the sub-megabase scale / Luca Giorgetti, Tristan Piolot, and Edith Heard
    Time-lapse imaging of nuclear bodies / Saskia Hutten, Samuel Swift, and Angus I. Lamond
    Visualization of nucleic acids with synthetic exciton-controlled fluorescent oligonucleotide probes / Dan Ohtan Wang and Akimitsu Okamoto
    Live CLEM imaging to analyze nuclear structures at high resolution / Tokuko Haraguchi, Hiroko Osakada, and Takako Koujin
    Ultrastructural analysis of nuclear bodies using electron microscopy / Sylvie Souquere and Gérard Pierron
    Analyses of nuclear proteins and nucleic acid structures using atomic force microscopy / Jamie L. Gilmore [and eight others]
    Genome-wide co-localization screening of nuclear body components using a fluorescently tagged FLJ cDNA clone library / Tetsuro Hirose and Naoki Goshima
    Purification of specific chromatin regions using oligonucleotides : capture hybridization analysis of RNA targets (CHART) / Christopher P. Davis and Jason A. West
    RNA antisense purification (RAP) for mapping RNA interactions with chromatin / Jesse Engreitz, Eric S. Lander, and Mitchell Guttman
    In situ dissection of RNA functional subunits by domain-specific chromatin isolation by RNA purification (dChIRP) / Jeffrey J. Quinn and Howard Y. Chang
    Extracting, enriching, and identifying nuclear body sub-complexes using label-based quantitative mass spectrometry / Archa Fox [and three othrs]
    Studying RNA-binding protein interactions with target mRNAs in eukaryotic cells : native ribonucleoprotein immunoprecipitation (RIP) assays / Joseph A. Cozzitorto [and eight others]
    Cross-linking and immunoprecipitation of nuclear RNA-binding proteins / Quan Li , Yuri Uemura , and Yukio Kawahara
    Purification of noncoding RNA and bound proteins using FLAG peptide-conjugated antisense-oligonucleotides / Shungo Adachi and Tohru Natsume
    MMCT-mediated chromosome engineering technique applicable to functional analysis of lncRNA and nuclear dynamics / Makiko Meguro-Horike and Shin-ichi Horike
    Reconstitution of nucleocytoplasmic transport using digitonin-permeabilized cells / Shingo Kose, Tomoko Funakoshi, and Naoko Imamoto
    Genome-wide analysis of long noncoding RNA turnover / Hidenori Tani [and eight others]
    Knockdown of nuclear-retained long noncoding RNAs using modified DNA antisense oligonucleotides / Xinying Zong [and six others]
    siRNA screening of nuclear proteins / Yuko Hasegawa and Shinichi Nakagawa.
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Digital
    Nikant Sabharwal, Parthiban Arumugam and Andrew Kelion.
    Summary: Readable, practical and concise, this self-contained guide to nuclear cardiology provides a foundation of essential knowledge for practitioners from any background. Including technical and clinical aspects of the subspecialty this fully updated handbook offers a core knowledge of nuclear cardiology ideal for use in a clinical setting.

    Contents:
    Introduction to nuclear cardiology
    Radiation physics, biology, and protection
    The gamma camera
    Single photon emission computed tomography (SPECT)
    Radionuclide ventriculography
    Introduction to myocardial perfusion scintigraphy
    Stress testing for myocardial perfusion scintigraphy
    Radiopharmaceuticals used in myocardial perfusion scintigraphy
    Myocardial perfusion scintigraphy: image interpretation
    Myocardial perfusion scintigraphy: clinical value
    Imaging with iodine-123-labelled radiopharmaceuticals
    Cardiac positron emission tomography (PET).
    Digital Access Oxford 2017
  • Digital
    Cláudio Tinoco Mesquita, Maria Fernanda Rezende, editors.
    Summary: This book covers relevant concepts in nuclear cardiology, combining imaging techniques and clinical data to do so. Today, nuclear cardiology is a worldwide discipline connected to the broader field of cardiovascular imaging. The combination of clinical aspects (symptoms, medications, previous cardiac procedures), ancillary exams and nuclear images is key to decision-making in clinical practice. Thus, a book on this topic is essential to provide better outcomes for cardiology patients. The chapters cover a comprehensive range of topics in current cardiology practice, such as ambulatory patients, patients in emergency settings, patients after complex cardiac procedures, and patients during and after the use of cancer therapies that are potentially toxic for the heart (cardio-oncology). As such, multiple clinical scenarios are also presented: patients with suspected coronary disease, patients with heart failure of unknown origin, patients with acute chest pain in the emergency department, patients with suspected pulmonary embolism, patients with complications of the left ventricular assist device, etc. Furthermore, the book describes nuclear cardiology procedures and techniques, discusses the main clinical indications and scenarios for each procedure, presents new technological advances in the field (machine learning and artificial intelligence tools), and mentions the coronavirus disease 2019 (COVID-19) pandemic. Given its scope, the book offers a valuable guide and videos for various medical professionals, especially cardiologists and nuclear physicians.

    Contents:
    Nuclear Medicine Radiotracers in Cardiology
    Cardiac PET Procedure
    Cardiac SPECT Procedure
    Quantification of Ischemia and Myocardial Blood Flow
    Cardiac PET/MRI
    MRI Techniques Applied to Cardiac PET
    Non-nuclear Cardiac Imaging Modalities: Echocardiography, CT, MRI and Invasive Coronary Angiography
    Coronary Physiology
    From Tracer Kinetics to Invasive FFR and iFR
    Myocardial Metabolism and Ventricular Function
    Coronary Blood Flow and Myocardial Ischemia
    Molecular Imaging in Atherosclerotic Vascular Disease
    PET and SPECT in Stable Ischemic Coronary Disease
    PET and SPECT in Acute Coronary Syndromes
    Nuclear Techniques after Coronary Revascularization
    Physiologic or Anatomic Assessment of CAD: Patient-centered Approach
    Microvascular Coronary Disease
    Pathophysiology of Heart Failure
    PET and SPECT in the Evaluation of Viable Myocardium
    Bone Tracers for the Diagnosis of Cardiac Amyloidosis
    Adrenergic Nervous System Imaging in HF Management
    Tako Tsubo Cardiomyopathy and Nuclear Imaging
    PET and SPECT in Systemic Inflammatory Diseases
    Sarcoidosis
    PET and SPECT in Myocarditis and Vasculitis of Large Vessels
    Evaluation of Complications of Circulatory Assist Devices
    Sudden Cardiac Death: Pathophysiology and Clinical Aspects
    123I-MIBG in the Risk Stratification of Sudden Cardiac Death
    Nuclear Imaging Guiding Cardiac Resynchronization Therapy
    PET and SPECT in Infective Endocarditis
    PET and SPECT in Cardiovascular Implantable Electronic Devices Infections
    The Clinical Basis of Heart Damage by Chemo and Radiotherapy
    Nuclear Medicine Tools for Cardiac Damage Diagnosis in Oncology
    Chest Pain Evaluation
    Diagnosis and Risk Stratification
    Diagnosis of Pulmonary Embolism
    Nuclear Medicine in Tako Tsubo Cardiomyopathy
    Deep Learning and Artificial Intelligence in Nuclear Cardiology.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    Gary V. Heller, Robert C. Hendel.
    Summary: This book covers basic principles of nuclear cardiology, including radiopharmaceuticals, instrumentation, quality imaging, and radiation exposure.

    Contents:
    Section 1: Fundamentals of Nuclear Cardiology
    Chapter 1: Fundamentals of Nuclear Cardiology Physics
    Chapter 2: Radiation Safety and Protection in Nuclear Cardiology
    Chapter 3: Radiopharmaceuticals for Cardiovascular Imaging
    Chapter 4: Cardiac SPECT and PET Instrumentation
    Chapter 5: Quality Control in SPECT, Dedicated PET, and Hybrid CT Imaging
    Chapter 6: Radiation Exposure and Reduction Strategies in Myocardial Perfusion Imaging
    Chapter 7: Physician Certification and Laboratory Accreditation
    Section 2: Radionuclide Myocardial Perfusion Imaging
    Chapter 8: Exercise and Pharmacologic Stress Testing
    Chapter 9: SPECT Myocardial Perfusion Imaging Protocols
    Chapter 10: Cardiovascular Positron Emission Tomographic Imaging
    Chapter 11: Myocardial Blood Flow Quantitation in Clinical Practice
    Chapter 12: Ventricular Function
    Chapter 13: Non-Cardiac Findings
    Chapter 14: Interpretation and Reporting of SPECT and PET Myocardial Perfusion Imaging
    Section 3: Indications and Applications
    Chapter 15: Clinical Applications of Quantitation and Artificial Intelligence in Nuclear Cardiology
    Chapter 16: Appropriate Use of Nuclear Cardiology Techniques
    Chapter 17: Evaluation of Patients with Suspected Coronary Artery Disease
    Chapter 18: Evaluation of Patients with Known Coronary Artery Disease
    Chapter 19: Risk Stratification with Myocardial Perfusion Imaging
    Chapter 20: Nuclear Cardiovascular Imaging in Special Populations
    Chapter 21: Preoperative Risk Assessment for Noncardiac Surgery
    Chapter 22: Radionuclide Imaging in Heart Failure
    Section 4: Beyond Perfusion Imaging
    Chapter 23: Nuclear Cardiology Procedures in the Evaluation of Myocardial Viability
    Chapter 24: Radionuclide Imaging of Cardiac Innervation
    Chapter 25: Imaging Cardiac Amyloidosis
    Chapter 26: 18F-FDG PET/CT for Imaging Cardiac Sarcoidosis and Inflammation
    Chapter 27: Hybrid Imaging: SPECT-CT and PET-CT.
    Digital Access AccessCardiology 2022
  • Digital
    [edited by] Marcelo Fernando Di Carli.
    Contents:
    Single photon emission computed tomography
    Positron emission tomography
    Principles of myocardial blood flow quantification with SPECT and PET imaging
    Radiopharmaceuticals for clinical SPECT and PET and imaging protocols
    Recognizing and preventing artifacts with SPECT and PET imaging
    Approaches to minimize patient dose in nuclear cardiology
    Patients with new-onset stable chest pain syndromes
    Applications of nuclear cardiology in known stable coronary artery disease
    Patient with prior revascularization
    Preoperative risk evaluation: When and how?
    Imaging in patients with acute chest pain in the emergency department
    Assessing the biology of high-risk plaque features with molecular imaging
    Patients with suspected coronary microvascular dysfunction
    Patient with cardiometabolic disease
    Patient with chronic kidney disease
    Women with suspected ischemic heart disease
    Key concepts in risk stratification and cost-effectiveness using nuclear scintigraphy in stable coronary artery disease
    The patient with new-onset heart failure
    Metabolic remodeling in heart failure
    Patient with ischemic heart failure: Ischemia and viability assessment and management
    Novel approaches for the evaluation of arrhythmic risk
    Screening for transplant vasculopathy
    Patient with known or suspected cardiac sarcoidosis
    Patients with known or suspected amyloidosis
    Patients undergoing cancer treatment
    Molecular imaging of myocardial infarction and remodeling
    Patient with mechanical dyssynchrony
    Aortic stenosis and bioprosthetic valve degeneration
    Infective endocarditis
    Large-vessel vasculitis
    Peripheral arterial disease
    Artificial intelligence in nuclear cardiology.
    Digital Access ClinicalKey 2022
  • Digital
    editors, Wael A. Jaber, Manuel D. Cerqueira.
    Contents:
    Physics and instrumentation
    Radiopharmaceuticals and radiation safety
    Nuclear cardiology diagnostic tests and procedures/protocols/artifacts
    Imaging protocols
    Image interpretation
    Cardiovascular positron emission tomography (pet)
    Imaging systemic diseases
    Appropriate use criteria in nuclear cardiology
    Rapid-fire review.
    Digital Access Ovid 2018
  • Digital
    Andrzej Moniuszko, B. Adrian Kesala.
    Summary: This book presents a comprehensive review of nuclear cardiology principles and concepts necessary to pass the Nuclear Cardiology Technology Specialty Examination. The practice questions are similar in format and content to those found on the Nuclear Medicine Technology Certification Board (NMTCB) and American Registry of Radiological Technologists (ARRT) examinations, allowing test takers to maximize their chances of success. The book is organized by test sections of increasing difficulty, with over 600 multiple-choice questions covering all areas of nuclear cardiology, including radionuclides, instrumentation, radiation safety, patient care, and diagnostic and therapeutic procedures. Detailed answers and explanations to the practice questions follow. It also includes helpful test-taking tips. Supplementary appendices include commonly used abbreviations and symbols in nuclear medicine, glossary of cardiology terms, and useful websites. Nuclear Cardiology Study Guide is a valuable reference for nuclear medicine technologists, nuclear medicine physicians, and all other imaging professionals in need of a concise review of nuclear cardiology.

    Contents:
    Tackling the Multiple-Choice Test
    Practice Test 1: Difficulty Level-Easy
    Practice Test? 2: Difficulty Level-Moderate
    Practice Test? 3: Difficulty Level-Hard
    Appendix A: Commonly Used Abbreviations and Symbols in Nuclear Medicine
    Appendix B: Glossary of Cardiology Terms
    Appendix C: Useful Websites.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Print
    editors: Sara G. Johnson, Mary Beth Farrell ; Ann Marie Alessi, Mark C. Hyun.
    Contents:
    1. Cardiac anatomy and physiology
    2. Electrocardiography
    3. Non-myocardial perfusion imaging indications and protocols
    4. Myocardial perfusion imaging indications, protocols, and acquisition procedures
    5. Myocardial PET
    6. Cardiac medications and emergencies in the cardiac stress laboratory
    7. Radiopharmaceuticals used in myocardial imaging
    8. Basic myocardial processing techniques
    9. Advanced processing and quantitative analysis
    10. Interpretation, reporting, and appropriateness of studies
    11. Quality assurance/quality control
    12. Exercise stress testing
    13. Pharmacologic stress agents
    14. Using myocardial perfusion imaging for optimal patient management
    15. Identifying image artifacts
    Mock examination
    Answers to mock examination
    Index.
    Print Unavailable: Checked out Recall Item
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Books: General Collection (Downstairs)
    RC683.5.R33 N83 2015
    1
  • Digital
    Georg Steinhauser, Akio Koizumi, Katsumi Shozugawa, editors.
    Summary: This book discusses nuclear events that may become imminent threats to the fabric of our society, and elucidates strategies for preventing these threats or mitigating their adverse effects. It addresses multidisciplinary aspects of various nuclear emergencies, including nuclear accidents, terror attacks involving nuclear materials, illicit trafficking of nuclear materials, and problems related to nuclear forensics and strikes with nuclear weapons/warheads. Very often, nuclear emergencies are only discussed within certain, specific communities. However, this volume brings together experts from various fields to provide a more holistic approach to the problem. Physical, chemical, environmental, social, and medical scientists, together with representatives from the media and authorities, present their views on and strategies for events that cause fear and anxiety among the public - an aspect that can be even more threatening than the direct health effects. The book offers a valuable guide for nuclear scientists, such as radioecologists, health physicists, radioanalytical scientists and nuclear engineers, as well as decision-makers and national/international authorities. .

    Contents:
    1 Two major nuclear emergencies: a comparison between Chernobyl and Fukushima
    2 Lessons learned from the Chernobyl accident
    3 Late atmospheric effects of a nuclear accident: comparison between the Fukushima Daiichi NPP and Chernobyl accidents
    4 Fear of Radiation
    A Comparison of Germany and Japan
    5 "The psychosocial consequences of the Fukushima disaster: What are we suffering from?"
    6 Impact of evacuation on lifestyle activity and metabolic status following the Fukushima Daiichi Nuclear Power Plant Accident: Preliminary Findings
    7 "After the meltdown: Post-Fukushima environmentalism and a nuclear energy industrial complex in Japan"
    8 Public relations in times of nuclear emergencies: examples from a medium-sized public university and a small Austrian municipality
    9 Fukushima live"
    about the role and responsibility of the media
    10 Teaching radioactivity: What is the goal of education?
    11 Agriculture in Fukushima
    Radiocesium contamination of agricultural products
    12 Isotopic signatures of actinides in environmental samples contaminated by the Fukushima Dai-ichi Nuclear Power Plant accident
    13 "The key role of isotopic analysis in tracing the Fukushima nuclear accident-released Pu and radiocesium isotopes in the environment"
    14 Radioactive iodines in the atmosphere
    15 Utilization of Radioxenon Monitoring to Aid Severe Nuclear Accident Response
    16 Response to Nuclear Terrorism in Germany
    17 Nuclear emergency preparedness in Germany- lessons learned from Fukushima and Chernobyl and their implementation.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    Doina Piciu.
    Summary: With endocrinologists deploying nuclear medicine on a daily basis, and with the rapid development of the latter, this concise and up-to-date guide to the vital information required has been designed to maximize relevance and ease of use in clinical practice.

    Contents:
    Part I: General Nuclear Medicine: Principles of Nuclear Medicine
    Specific Measurements and Terms
    Dosimetry
    The Radiation Protection
    Equipments in Nuclear Medicine
    Radiopharmaceuticals
    Part II: Nuclear Endocrinology: The Thryroid Gland
    The Parathyroid Glands
    The Adrenal Glands
    Neuroendocrine Tumors (NET)
    Hybrid positron emission tomography in endocrinology.
    Digital Access Springer 2017
  • Digital
    edited by Bruce G. Allan, Terence E. Hébert
    Contents:
    Studies of intracellular angiotensin II / Richard N. Re and Julia L. Cook
    Single-cell microinjection coupled to confocal microscopy to characterize nuclear membrane receptors in freshly isolated cardiomyocytes / Clémence Merlen and Jonathan Ledoux
    Design and application of light-activated probes for cellular signaling / David Chatenet, Steve Bourgault, and Alain Fournier
    Using caged ligands to study intracrine endothelin signaling in intact cardiac myocytes / Clémence Merlen, Louis R. Villeneuve, and Bruce G. Allen
    Quantification of catecholamine uptake in adult cardiac myocytes / Erika F. Dahl, Casey D. Wright, and Timothy D. O'Connell
    Characterization of the interaction between the prostaglandin D2 DP1 receptor and the intracellular L-Prostaglandin D synthase / Chantal Binda and Jean-Luc Parent
    Isolation and study of cardiac nuclei from canine myocardium and adult ventricular myocytes / Artavazd Tadevosyan, Bruce G. Allen, and Stanley Nattel
    High resolution imaging and function of nuclear G protein-coupled receptors (GPCRs) / Vikrant K. Bhosle [and others]
    Biochemical fractionation of membrane receptors in the nucleus / Ying-Nai Wang ... [et at.]
    Functional G protein-coupled Receptors on nuclei from brain and primary cultured neurons / Yuh-Jiin I. Jong and Karen L. O'Malley
    Automated microscopy of cardiac myocyte hypertrophy : a case study on the role of intracellular [alpha]-adrenergic receptors / Karen A. Ryall and Jeffrey J. Saucerman
    Measuring intranuclear and nuclear envelope [Ca2+] vs. cytosolic [Ca2+] / Senka Ljubojević and Donald M. Bers
    Assessing GPCR and G protein signaling to the nucleus in live cells using fluorescent biosensors / Julie Bossuyt and Donald M. Bers
    Tandem affinity purification to identify cytosolic and nuclear G [beta-gamma]-interacting proteins / Rhiannon Campden [and others]
    Examining the effects of nuclear GPCRs on gene expression using isolated nuclei / George Vaniotis [and others]
    Trafficking and function of GPCRs in the endosomal compartment / Davide Calebiro [and others].
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Print
    Richard P. Spencer, section editor.
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Retired Reference (Downstairs)
    RB37 .C181
    2
  • Digital
    Harvey A. Ziessman, Janis P. O'Malley, James H. Thrall ; associate editor, Frederic H. Fahey.
    Contents:
    Radiopharmaceuticals
    Molecular imaging
    Physics of nuclear medicine
    Radiation detection and instrumentation
    Single-photon emission computed tomography, positron emission tomography, and hybrid imaging
    Endocrine system
    Skeletal scintigraphy
    Hepatobiliary system
    Genitourinary system
    Pulmonary system
    Oncology : positron emission tomography
    Oncology : non
    positron emission tomography
    Gastrointestinal system
    Infection and inflammation
    Central nervous system
    Cardiac system
    Pearls, pitfalls, and frequently asked questions.
    Digital Access ScienceDirect 2014
  • Digital
    [edited] by Daniel E. Appelbaum, John Miliziano, Anup Jacob Alexander, Yong Bradley.
    Summary: "In recent years the field of nuclear medicine has witnessed an unprecedented explosion of new clinical diagnostic tracers, radionuclide therapies, hardware, and molecular imaging paradigms. This new second edition of RadCases Plus Q&A Nuclear Medicine by Daniel Appelbaum, John Miliziano, Anup Jacob Alexander, and Yong Bradley reflects these advances, presenting 100 new cases and 500 high-quality images. The book covers a wide spectrum, from classic topics, such as thyroid, bone, parathyroid, and renal scans, to the paradigm-shifting concept of "theranostics." For maximum ease of self-assessment, each case begins with the clinical presentation on the right-hand page; study that and then turn the page for imaging findings, differential diagnoses with the definitive diagnosis, essential facts, pearls and pitfalls, and more"-- Provided by publisher.
  • Digital
    editors, Chirayu Shah, MD, Assistant Professor, Department of Radiology and Radiological Sciences, Vanderbilt University Medical Center, Physician in Medical Imaging, Tennessee Valley Healthcare System, Nashville, Tennessee, Marques Bradshaw, MD, MSCR, Assistant Professor of Radiology, Medical University of South Carolina, Charleston, South Carolina.
    Contents:
    Radiopharmaceuticals
    Endocrine system
    Musculoskeletal system
    Head and neck
    Nuclear cardiology
    Vascular and lymphatics
    Pulmonary system
    Gastrointestinal system
    Genitourinary system
    Pediatric nuclear medicine
    Other oncology
    Physics, artifacts, NRC, quality control and safety.
    Digital Access Ovid 2016
  • Digital
    editors, Chirayu Shah, Marques Bradshaw, Ishani Dalal.
    Summary: "The second edition of the Nuclear Medicine: A Core Review builds on the success of the first edition by covering the essential aspects of nuclear medicine in a manner that serves as a guide for residents to assess their knowledge and review the material in a format that is similar to the ABR core examination"-- Provided by publisher.

    Contents:
    Radiopharmaceuticals
    Endocrine system
    Musculoskeletal system
    Head and neck
    Nuclear cardiology
    Vascular and lymphatics
    Pulmonary system
    Gastrointestinal system
    Genitourinary system
    Pediatric nuclear medicine
    Oncology
    Physics, artifacts, NRC, quality control, and safety.
    Digital Access Ovid 2022
  • Digital
    Dibya Prakash.
    Summary: The book is a compilation of guidelines from various organizations such as Society of Nuclear Medicine and Molecular Imaging, European Association of Nuclear Medicine, American College of Radiology, and International Atomic Energy Agency. The description of the procedures is simple, easy to understand and current. The aim of this book is: a) Nuclear medicine professionals can use this book as a quick reference about how a procedure is to be performed. The set of instructions given to a patient before, during and after the procedure have also been included in each chapter. b) To educate general physicians about nuclear medicine procedures. The procedures are explained briefly with common indications and precautions. Normal and abnormal nuclear medicine images have also been included for quick comparison. c) To educate paramedical staff or healthcare professionals so that they can brace themselves rather than embrace. By this they can clarify, suffice the eager and send patients to a nuclear medicine department after proper preparation. d) To educate patients who come for nuclear medicine procedure. e) To remove apprehensions and doubts which arise in the mind of the patients.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    Hossein Jadvar, Patrick M. Colletti.
    Summary: "Nuclear medicine is thriving as one of the most exciting fields in clinical medicine. The recent acceleration in development and approval of radiopharmaceuticals for imaging and targeted therapy have contributed meaningfully to the care of patients with a variety of illnesses in the domains of cardiology, neurology, oncology, and inflammatory and infectious diseases. The innovations in imaging technology including digital and time-of-flight PET/CT, PET/MRI, SPECT/CT, theragnostics and current research in incorporating sophisticated radiomics and artificial intelligence-deep learning algorithms have all provided unprecedented insights into health and disease which is the foundation for precision health and precision medicine"-- Provided by publisher. "Perfect for residents and fellows to use during rotations, or as a quick review for practicing radiologists and nuclear medicine physicians, Nuclear Medicine: The Essentials is a complete, concise overview of the most important knowledge in this challenging and evolving field. Each chapter begins with learning objectives and ends with board-style questions that help you focus your learning. A self-assessment examination in print and additional self-assessment material online test your mastery of the content and prepare you for exams. Follows the proven Essentials series format to provide a comprehensive yet concise overview of clinical nuclear medicine. Features image-rich, case-based multiple-choice questions with answers and explanations that mimic what you're likely to see on exams. Covers all relevant imaging modalities, including hybrid imaging systems such as SPECT/CT, PET/CT, and PET/MRI, as well as targeted radionuclide therapy, theranostics, and translational molecular imaging as it relates to nuclear medicine in adults and children. Puts indispensable information at your fingertips in a compact and practical, high-yield format. Enrich Your Ebook Reading Experience Read directly on your preferred device(s), such as computer, tablet, or smartphone. Easily convert to audiobook, powering your content with natural language text-to-speech. "-- Provided by publisher.
    Digital Access LWW Health Library 2022
  • Digital
    Sara Harsini, Abass Alavi, Nima Rezaei, editors.
    Summary: This book explores the close connection between immunology and nuclear medicine, which has led to radioimmunoimaging and radioimmunotherapy (RIT). Molecular imaging with positron emission tomography (PET) and single-photon emission computed tomography (SPECT) is increasingly being used to diagnose, characterize, and monitor disease activity in the context of inflammatory disorders of known and unknown etiology, such as sarcoidosis, atherosclerosis, vasculitis, inflammatory bowel disease, rheumatoid arthritis, and degenerative joint disease. The first chapters discuss the various radiopharmaceutical agents and radiolabeled preparations that have been employed in inflammation imaging. Of these, FDG-PET imaging has been shown to have the great value in the detection of inflammation and has become the centerpiece of several initiatives over the last several years. This very powerful technique will play an increasingly important role in the management of patients with inflammatory conditions in the future. The book also explores the growing role of nuclear medicine and molecular imaging in the diagnosis and treatment of cancer. The rapid pace of change has been fueled by advances in our understanding of tumor biology, on the one hand, and the development of specifically targeted medical therapies, diagnostic agents, and radiotherapies, on the other. Written by leading international experts in the field, this book is an invaluable tool for nuclear medicine physicians, radiologists, oncologists, and immunologists.

    Contents:
    1. Molecular Imaging in Inflammatory and Autoimmune Disorders
    2. Gallium Imaging of Infection and Inflammation
    3. 111Indium-Labeled Leukocyte Imaging of Infection and Inflammation
    4. 99mTc-HMPAO-Labeled-Leukocyte Imaging of Infection and Inflammation
    5. FDG-PET Imaging of Infection and Inflammation
    6. Imaging Procedures with Radiolabeled Monoclonal Antibodies
    7. Dosimetric Principles of Targeted Radiotherapy
    8. Radioimmunotherapy (RIT)
    9. Peptide Receptor Radionuclide Therapy (PRRT)
    10. Tumor Architecture and Targeted Delivery
    11. Antibodies and Novel Constructs for Tumor Targeting
    12. Pretargeted Radioimmunotherapy of Cancer
    13. Radioimmunotherapy of Lymphoma
    14. Radioimmunotherapy in Brain Tumors
    15. Radioimmunotherapy of Pancreatic Adenocarcinoma
    16. Radioimmunotherapy of Renal Cell Carcinoma
    17. Radioimmunotherapy of Prostate Carcinoma
    18. Radioimmunotherapy of Ovarian Cancer
    19. Targeted Radiotherapy in the Treatment of Osteosarcoma
    20. Targeted Radiotherapy of Neuroblastoma
    21. Targeted Radiotherapy of Squamous Cell Carcinoma of the Head and Neck
    22. Moving Forward: Expected Opportunities for the Development of New Therapeutic Agents
    23. Translation of Radiopharmaceuticals from Bench to Bedside.
    Digital Access Springer 2022
  • Digital
    Andor W.J.M. Glaudemans, Rudi A.J.O. Dierckx, Jan L.M.A. Gielen, Johannes (Hans) Zwerver, editors.
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Digital
    C. Richard Goldfarb, Murthy R. Chamarthy, Fukiat Ongseng.
    Contents:
    Radionuclides and radiopharmaceuticals
    Instrumentation
    Quality control
    Radiation safety and legal requirements
    Musculoskeletal
    Cardiac
    Central nervous system
    Thyroid gland and endocrine system
    Gastrointestinal
    Genitourinary
    Infection, inflammation, and oncology
    Pulmonary
    Basics of PET
    Basics of CT physics
    Breast cancer
    Gastrointestinal
    Pulmonary
    Genitourinary
    Lymphomas
    Head and neck cancer
    Thyroid cancer
    Neuro-PET
    Miscellaneous PET/CT
    Radionuclide therapy.
    Digital Access
    Provider
    Version
    Thieme MedOne Radiology
    Thieme-Connect
  • Digital
    Abdelhamid H. Elgazzar, Ismet Sarikaya.
    Summary: This book provides all the information required for the optimal use of nuclear medicine techniques, which are undergoing rapid development yet remain underutilized. Each chapter focuses on one particular clinical system or disease area. The first section of each chapter illustrates normal patterns observed on commonly and uncommonly performed scans as a reference and explains when and how the procedures should be performed. The following section illustrates both the imaging patterns of different diseases and the diagnostic role of individual studies. Comparisons with other modalities are provided, and the rationale for and effective utilization of each study are discussed. The volume includes near 250 case reviews. In addition, the normal patterns on relevant morphologic modalities are documented in an appendix. The book is directed at Nuclear Medicine physicians and technologists with different levels of training and expertise and also at radiologists who practice nuclear medicine and radiology residents.
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Digital
    George Barberio Coura-Filho, Mayara Torres Silva de Oliveira, Ana Luiza Morais de Campos.
    Summary: This book presents up-to-date information on the general principles of diagnostic and therapeutic nuclear medicine in the context of endocrinology. The content is divided into six parts. Section I examines general aspects of radiopharmaceuticals, scintigraphy, single-photon emission computed tomography (SPECT), positron emission tomography (PET), radionuclide therapies and radioguided surgery. Section II discusses diagnostic applications in benign thyroid diseases and evaluation of thyroid nodules. Section III gives an overview of the management of parathyroid diseases. Section IV presents diagnostic techniques in well-differentiated thyroid cancer. Section V addresses procedures and therapy in adrenal benign and malignant disorders (phaechromocytomas and paragangliomas). Lastly, the diagnosis and treatment of neuroendocrine tumors are featured in Section VI. Nuclear Medicine in Endocrine Disorders: Diagnosis and Therapy is intended for non-specialists in nuclear medicine working in the field of endocrinology, and is also a valuable resource for researchers and students.

    Contents:
    Radiopharmaceuticals Definitions
    Principles of Scintigraphies
    Principles of Single Photon Emission Tomography
    Principles of Positron Emission Tomography
    Principles of Nuclear Medicine Therapies
    Diagnostic Nuclear Medicine in Hyperparathyroidism
    Diagnostic Nuclear Medicine in Hyperthyroidism
    Diagnostic Nuclear Medicine in Well Differentiated Thyroid Cancer
    Diagnostic Nuclear Medicine in Medullary Thyroid Carcinoma
    Diagnostic Nuclear Medicine in Pheochromocytomas and Paragangliomas
    Diagnostic Nuclear Medicine in Pulmonary, Intestinal and Pancreatic Neuroendocrine Tumors
    Diagnostic Nuclear Medicine in Parathyroid Carcinomas
    Diagnostic Nuclear Medicine in Multiple Endocrine Neoplasia Syndromes
    Therapeutic Nuclear Medicine in Hyperthyroidism
    Therapeutic Nuclear Medicine in Well Differentiated Thyroid Cancer
    Therapeutic Nuclear Medicine in Pheochromocytomas and Paragangliomas
    Therapeutic Nuclear Medicine in Pulmonary, Intestinal and Pancreatic Neuroendocrine Tumors
    Intraoperative Radioguided Localization of Parathyroids
    Intraoperative Radioguided Localization of Sentinel Node in Thyroid Cancer.
    Digital Access Springer 2022
  • Digital
    Alberto Signore, Andor W.J.M. Glaudemans, editors.
    Summary: This book is designed as a reference manual that is exceptional in systematically discussing every aspect of nuclear medicine imaging of infections, with careful explanation of the most up-to-date concepts and recent guidelines on diagnostic flowcharts as shared between the EANM, ESR, ESNR, ESCMID, ESC, EACVI, ECCO, ESGAR and EBJIS. It is truly comprehensive, describing all methods, all acquisition parameters, and all interpretation criteria in all infectious diseases. The early chapters discuss currently available radiopharmaceuticals and nuclear medicine imaging technologies, including the hybrid modalities SPECT/CT, PET/CT, and PET/MRI. The remainder of the book is devoted to the nuclear medicine imaging of infections at different body sites as well as fever of unknown origin, fungal infections, and tuberculosis and AIDS-associated infections. Infections represent a real emergency globally, and early diagnosis and treatment follow-up will continue to pose huge challenges. In this context, Nuclear Medicine in Infectious Diseases will be a superb asset for nuclear medicine and infectious disease specialists and other clinicians everywhere.

    Contents:
    Intro; Foreword; Preface; Contents;
    1: Infections: The Emergency of the New Millennium; 1.1 Introduction; 1.2 From Optimism to the Harsh Reality: The History of Infectious Diseases in the Past Century; 1.3 What Are Emerging Infectious Diseases (EIDs)?; 1.4 The New Millennium: Infectious Disease Threats; 1.5 The Healthcare-Associated Infections and Their Burden of Antimicrobial Resistance in the New Millennium; 1.6 Conclusions; References;
    2: Gamma Camera Imaging of Infectious Diseases; 2.1 Clinically Validated and Commercially Available Radiopharmaceuticals 2.1.1 111In-8-Hydroxyquinoline and 99mTc-Exametazime2.1.2 Gallium-67 Citrate; 2.1.3 99mTc-Besilesomab; 2.2 Experimental Radiopharmaceuticals; 2.2.1 99mTc-Ciprofloxacin; 2.2.2 99mTc-Ubiquicidin 29-41; 2.3 Future Perspectives and New Trends; References;
    3: Radiopharmaceuticals for PET Imaging of Infection; 3.1 Introduction; 3.2 Clinically Validated/Tested and Commercially Available Radiopharmaceuticals; 3.2.1 [18F]FDG; 3.2.1.1 [18F]FDG and Different Microorganisms; 3.2.1.2 FDG Imaging of Some Site-Specific Infections Which Have Been Validated; Osteomyelitis; Spondylodiscitis Diabetic FootHip and Knee Prosthesis; Infected Vascular Graft; Infective Endocarditis; Cardiac Implantable Electronic Device Infections; 3.2.2 Labeled White Blood Cells; 3.2.3 [68Ga]Citrate; 3.2.4 Peptides; 3.2.5 Ubiquicidin (UBI) Fragments; 3.3 Experimental Radiopharmaceuticals; 3.3.1 Peptides; 3.3.1.1 Depsipeptide Derivative; 3.3.1.2 K-A9 Peptide; 3.3.2 Antibiotics; 3.3.2.1 Ciprofloxacin; 3.3.2.2 Trimethoprim; 3.3.2.3 Puromycin; 3.3.2.4 Rifampicin; 3.3.2.5 Isoniazid; 3.3.2.6 Pyrazinamide; 3.3.2.7 Fluconazole; 3.3.3 Antibody Labeling 3.3.3.1 Antibodies Against Gram-Negative Bacteria3.3.3.2 Antibodies Against Gram-Positive Bacteria; 3.3.3.3 Antibody Against Simian Immunodeficiency Virus Envelope Protein; 3.3.3.4 Aspergillus Fumigatus-Specific Monoclonal Antibody JF5; 3.3.4 Imaging Targeted Molecules or Metabolism Specific to Microorganisms; 3.3.4.1 Siderophores; 3.3.4.2 Carbohydrate Metabolism; 3.3.5 Other Metabolites; 3.3.5.1 Fialuridine (FIAU); 3.3.5.2 Para-Aminobenzoic acid (PABA); 3.3.5.3 d-Methionine; 3.3.5.4 Prothrombin; 3.3.5.5 Transferrin 3.3.6 Nonspecific Tracers Used in Infection to Discriminate Infection from Malignancy3.3.6.1 [18F]fluorothymidine ([18F]FLT); 3.4 Conclusion and Future Perspective; References;
    4: Hybrid SPECT/CT and PET/CT Imaging in Infectious Diseases; 4.1 Introduction; 4.2 SPECT/CT Characteristics; 4.2.1 Basic Concepts; 4.2.1.1 Planar Imaging; 4.2.1.2 SPECT and SPECT/CT; 4.2.2 Improved Anatomical Location; 4.2.3 Motion Correction and Iterative Reconstructions; 4.2.4 Attenuation and Scatter Correction; 4.2.5 Disadvantages; 4.2.6 Partial Volume Effects 4.3 Spect Quantitation and Its Relevance for Imaging Infections
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    Gang Huang, editor.
    Summary: This book introduces molecular imaging and Target Therapy in various cancers. The first part is the subjects and primary focused on the basics of nuclear physics, radiation dosimetry, nuclear medicine equipment and small animal imaging equipment. The second part is about the radiopharmaceutical and commonly used clinical radiopharmaceuticals, including positron emission imaging agent, single photon emission imaging agent, and radionuclide therapy agents as well as their radioactive preparation, quality control, and a brief clinical application were included. Also, this part introduces a number of new imaging agents which were potential value of clinical applications. In the third part, the clinical application of the conventional imaging agent 18F-FDG in different tumors and neurodegenerative diseases and 18F-Dopa imaging in the nervous system are discussed. Besides the clinical applications of 99mTc labeled radiopharmaceuticals in parathyroid disease, coronary heart disease, myocardial infarction, sentinel lymph node, metastatic bone tumors, liver and gallbladder disease in children are introduced. Finally, the applications of radionuclide 131I on treatments of Graves' disease and differentiated thyroid cancer and metastases are investigated respectively. This book is a useful reference for professionals engaged in nuclear medicine and clinical research, including clinical nuclear medicine physicians, nuclear medicine engineers and nuclear medicine pharmacists.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    Angela Collarino, Sergi Vidal-Sicart, Renato A. Valdés Olmos, editors.
    Summary: This book is mainly intended for residents and young physicians in Nuclear Medicine, Oncology and Gynaecology, as well as other professionals interested in this area. It covers the application of several relevant nuclear medicine procedures for malignancies affecting the female reproductive system and the breast. To date, there has never been a nuclear medicine textbook specifically focused on this topic, which this work seeks to remedy. In recent years, certain nuclear medicine procedures have proven to be extremely valuable for the diagnosis and staging of gynaecological malignancies and breast cancer. The book provides a comprehensive and structured review of these procedures, accompanied by a summary of the respective issues, making it a valuable asset for students, instructors and practitioners alike.

    Contents:
    Introduction (General aspects and epidemiology of female malignancies)
    BREAST CANCER
    VULVAR CANCER
    CERVICAL CANCER
    ENDOMETRIAL CANCER
    OVARIAN CANCER
    VAGINAL CANCER
    Index.
    Digital Access Springer 2022
  • Digital
    Ramesh Chandra, PhD, Emeritus Professor, Department of Radiology, New York University Langone Medical Center, New York, NY, Arman Rahmim, PhD, Associate Professor, Departments of Radiology, and Electrical & Computer Engineering, Johns Hopkins University, Baltimore, Maryland.
    Digital Access Ovid 2018
  • Digital
    Eleanor Mantel, Janet S. Reddin, Gang Cheng, Abass Alavi.
    Summary: This book prepares students and technologists for registry examinations in nuclear medicine technology by providing practice questions and answers with detailed explanations, as well as a mock registry exam. The questions are designed to test both the basic knowledge required of nuclear medicine technologists and the practical application of that knowledge. The topics covered closely follow the content specifications and the components of preparedness as published by the certification boards. This 5th edition includes expanded coverage of positron emission tomography, multimodality imaging, and other new procedures and practices in the field of nuclear medicine and molecular imaging.

    Contents:
    Introduction
    Radioactivity, Radiopharmacy and Quality Assurance
    Radiation Safety
    Instrumentation and Quality Assurance
    Image Presentation and Computers
    Skeletal System Scintigraphy
    Central Nervous System Scintigraphy
    Cardiovascular System Scintigraphy
    Respiratory System Scintigraphy
    Gastrointestinal Tract Scintigraphy
    Genitourinary System Scintigraphy
    Gncologic Scintigraphy
    Infection Scintigraphy
    Endocrine System Scintigraphy
    Non-Imaging Procedures and Radionuclide Therapy
    Patient Care
    Basic PET Principles
    Multi-Modality Imaging. Appendix 1: Mock Examination
    Appendix 2: Answers to Chapter 2
    Appendix 3: Answers to Chapter 3
    Appendix 4: Answers to Chapter 4
    Appendix 5: Answers to Chapter 5
    Appendix 6: Answers to Chapter 6
    Appendix 7: Answers to Chapter 7
    Appendix 8: Answers to Chapter 8
    Appendix 9: Answers to Chapter 9
    Appendix 10: Answers to Chapter 10.- Appendix 11: Answers to Chapter 11.- Appendix 12: Answers to Chapter 12.- Appendix 13: Answers to Chapter 13.- Appendix 14: Answers to Chapter 14.- Appendix 15: Answers to Chapter 15.- Appendix 16: Answers to Chapter 16
    Appendix 17: Answers to Chapter 17.- Appendix 18: Answers to Chapter 18.- Appendix 19: Mock Examination Answers.
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Digital
    Duccio Volterrani [and 4 others], editors.
    Summary: Building on the traditional concept of nuclear medicine, this textbook presents cutting-edge concepts of hybrid imaging and discusses the close interactions between nuclear medicine and other clinical specialties, in order to achieve the best possible outcomes for patients. Today the diagnostic applications of nuclear medicine are no longer stand-alone procedures, separate from other diagnostic imaging modalities. This is especially true for hybrid imaging guided interventional radiology or surgical procedures. Accordingly, today's nuclear medicine specialists are actually specialists in multimodality imaging (in addition to their expertise in the diagnostic and therapeutic uses of radionuclides). This new role requires a new core curriculum for training nuclear medicine specialists. This textbook is designed to meet these new educational needs, and to prepare nuclear physicians and technologists for careers in this exciting specialty.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    Luca Giovanella, editor.
    Summary: This book considers how Nuclear Medicine treatments have been further developed in the past several years and are now widely applied in clinical practice, especially in oncological patients, in addition to radioiodine therapy for various thyroid diseases. These treatments are very effective when properly indicated, but side effects and complications specifically related to the radioactive drugs and other potential clinical problems should also be considered, since other treatments, e.g. chemotherapy or radiotherapy, are frequently administered before, simultaneously with and/or after radionuclide therapies. Consequently, cumulative toxicities and treatment interactions must be considered, and physicians prescribing treatments should be capable of preventing (when possible) and properly diagnosing and treating such side effects and complications. Accordingly, expertise in radionuclide therapy and extensive clinical expertise are required to appropriately manage critical cases. This book provides essential information on the physiopathology and radiopharmacy of radionuclide treatments and addresses potential side effects and complications by providing a rapid consultation guide for clinicians: synopses, diagnostic flow-charts and treatment schedules for a range of nuclear medicine treatments.

    Contents:
    Preface
    Acknowledgement.-Nuclear medicine theranostics: between atoms and patients
    Radioiodine therapy of benign thyroid diseases
    Radioiodine therapy of thyroid cancers
    Peptide radio-receptor therapy (pprt) of neuroendocrine tumors
    [I-131]-MIBG therapy of malignant pheochromocytomas and neuroblastoma
    Radiometabolic therapy of bone metastases
    Selective internal radiotherapy (sirt) of primary hepatic carcinoma and liver metastases
    Radioimmunotherapy of lymphomas.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    H. William Strauss, Giuliano Mariani, Duccio Volterrani, Steven M. Larson, editors.
    Summary: This book discusses the role of nuclear medicine in the diagnosis, staging, and treatment of patients with specific cancers. It presents the incidence, pathophysiologic and clinical aspects of the disease, the use of nuclear imaging in diagnosis, staging requirements, management of specific tumors, and surveillance after primary treatment of cancers. It addresses the various diagnostic/therapeutic options that are currently available or are most likely to become available in the near future according to a prioritized approach, thereby keeping to a minimum the number of diagnostic imaging procedures the patient is expected to undergo. Topics include basic science, clinical applications, radionuclide therapy, radioguided surgery, heart disease in the cancer patient, and adverse effects of cancer therapy. Each clinical chapter discusses the radionuclide procedures within an integrated framework, thereby identifying the information required for effective treatment of specific tumors. The book concludes with a series of cases that define and expand the didactic material in the clinical application chapters. Thoroughly updated and revised, the second edition incorporates advances in imaging and therapy and features the current staging guidelines of the American Joint Committee on Cancer. With contributions from a group of internationally distinguished practitioners, Nuclear Oncology: From Pathophysiology to Clinical Applications, Second Edition, is a valuable reference for nuclear medicine physicians, radiologists, medical and surgical oncologists, and other clinicians involved in the care and management of cancer patients.

    Contents:
    Part I: Basic Science
    Cancer Biology
    Molecular Targeting for Radionuclide Therapy
    Single-photon Emitting Radiopharmaceuticals for Diagnostic Applications
    Positron Emitting Radiopharmaceuticals for Diagnostic Applications
    Radiopharmaceuticals for Therapy
    Novel Single-photon Emitting Radiopharmaceuticalsfor Diagnostic Applications
    Novel Positron Emitting Radiopharmaceuticals
    Novel Radiopharmaceuticals for Therapy
    Physics of Nuclear Oncology
    Instrumentation for Single-photon Emission Imaging
    Instrumentation for Positron Emission Imaging
    Instrumentation for Intraoperative Detection
    Radiobiology and Radiation Dosimetry in Nuclear Medicine
    Part II: Clinical Applications
    Lymphomas: Diagnostic Applications
    Multiple Myeloma
    Leukemias: Diagnostic Applications
    Brain Tumors
    Head and Neck Cancer
    Thyroid Tumors: Diagnostic Applications
    Parathyroid Tumors
    Breast Cancer
    Lung and Mediastinal Tumors
    Esophageal Cancers
    Gastric Cancers
    Small Bowel Cancers
    Tumors of the Liver and Biliary Tract: Diagnostic Applications
    Pancreatic Cancer
    Colorectal Cancer
    Neuroendocrine Tumors: Diagnostic Applications
    Kidney and Bladder Cancer
    Prostatic Cancer
    Testicular Cancer
    Penile Cancer
    Vulvar Cancer.- Uterine Cancers
    Ovarian Cancer
    Sarcomas
    Malignant Melanoma
    Pediatric Cancers: Diagnostic Applications
    Part III: Radionuclide Therapy
    Radionuclide Therapy of Thyroid Tumors
    Radionuclide Therapy of Lymphomas
    Radionuclide Therapy of Leukemias
    Neuroendocrine Tumors: Therapy with Radiolabeled Peptides
    Neuroendocrine Tumors: Therapy with 131I-MIBG
    Targeted Radionuclide Therapy for Bone Metastasis.
    Radionuclide Therapy of Tumors of the Liver and Biliary Tract
    Radionuclide Therapy of Pediatric Cancers
    Part IV: Radioguided Surgery
    Radioguided Surgery for Breast Cancer
    Radioguided Surgery for Malignant Melanoma
    Radioguided Surgery: Novel Applications
    Part V: Heart Disease in the Cancer Patient
    Imaging the Heart in the Cancer Patient
    Part VI: Adverse Effects of Cancer Therapy
    Nuclear Medicine in the Assessment of Adverse Effects of Cancer Therapy in the Lung, Kidney, and Gastrointestinal Tract
    Part VII: Teaching Cases
    Lymphomas.- Multiple Myeloma.
    Leukemias
    Brain Tumors
    Head and Neck Cancer
    Thyroid Tumors
    Parathyroid Tumors
    Breast Cancer
    Lung and Mediastinal Tumors
    Esophageal Cancers
    Gastric Cancers
    Small Bowel Cancers
    Tumors of the Liver and Biliary Tract.
    Pancreatic Cancer
    Colorectal Cancer
    Neuroendocrine Tumors
    Kidney and Bladder Cancer
    Prostatic Cancer
    Testicular Cancer
    Penile Cancer
    Vulvar Cancer
    Uterine Cancers
    Ovarian Cancer.
    Sarcomas
    Malignant Melanoma
    Pediatric Cancers
    Radioguided Surgery.
    Digital Access Springer 2017
  • Digital
    Duccio Volterrani, Paola A. Erba, H. William Strauss, Giuliano Mariani, Steven M. Larson, editors.
    Summary: This book discusses the role of nuclear medicine in the diagnosis, staging, and treatment of patients with specific cancers. It presents the incidence, pathophysiologic and clinical aspects of the disease, the use of nuclear imaging in diagnosis, staging requirements, management of specific tumors, and surveillance after primary treatment of cancers. It addresses the various diagnostic/therapeutic options that are currently available or are most likely to become available in the near future according to a prioritized approach, thereby keeping to a minimum the number of diagnostic imaging procedures the patient is expected to undergo. Topics include basic science, clinical applications, radionuclide therapy, radioguided surgery, heart disease in the cancer patient, and adverse effects of cancer therapy. Each clinical chapter discusses the radionuclide procedures within an integrated framework, thereby identifying the information required for effective treatment of specific tumors. The book concludes with a series of updated cases that define and expand the didactic material in the clinical application chapters. Thoroughly updated and revised, the third edition incorporates new clinical evidence validating the use of radionuclides for diagnosis and therapy in oncology, new radiotracers, and the growing integration of imaging modalities into different types of hybrid imaging. With contributions from a group of internationally distinguished practitioners, Nuclear Oncology: From Pathophysiology to Clinical Applications, Third Edition, is a valuable reference for nuclear medicine physicians, radiologists, medical and surgical oncologists, and other clinicians involved in the care and management of cancer patients.

    Contents:
    Volume 1, Part I: Basic Science
    Cancer Biology of Molecular Imaging
    Principles of Molecular Targeting for Radionuclide Therapy
    Single-Photon Emitting Radiopharmaceuticals for Diagnostic Applications
    Positron-Emitting Radiopharmaceuticals for Diagnostic Applications in Oncology
    Radiopharmaceuticals for Therapy
    Novel Single-Photon-Emitting Radiopharmaceuticals for Diagnostic Applications
    Novel Positron-Emitting Radiopharmaceuticals
    Novel Radiopharmaceuticals for Therapy
    Physics of Nuclear Oncology
    Instrumentation for Positron Emission Tomography
    Instrumentation for Single-Photon Emission Computed Tomography (SPECT)
    Instrumentation for Intraoperative Detection and Imaging
    Radiobiology and Radiation Dosimetry in Nuclear Medicine
    Imaging Biomarkers: Radiomics and the Use of Artificial Intelligence in Nuclear Oncology
    Part II: Diagnostic Applications of Nuclear Medicine
    Diagnostic Applications of Nuclear Medicine: Lymphomas
    Diagnostic Applications of Nuclear Medicine: Multiple Myeloma
    Diagnostic Applications of Nuclear Medicine: Leukemias
    Diagnostic Applications of Nuclear Medicine: Brain Tumors
    Diagnostic Applications of Nuclear Medicine: Head and Neck Cancer
    Diagnostic Applications of Nuclear Medicine: Thyroid Tumors
    Diagnostic Applications of Nuclear Medicine: Parathyroid Tumors
    Diagnostic Applications of Nuclear Medicine: Breast Cancer
    Diagnostic Applications of Nuclear Medicine: Lung and Mediastinal Tumors
    Diagnostic Applications of Nuclear Medicine: Esophageal Cancers
    Diagnostic Applications of Nuclear Medicine: Gastric Cancers
    Diagnostic Applications of Nuclear Medicine: Gastrointestinal Stromal Tumors. Volume 2: Diagnostic Applications of Nuclear Medicine: Tumors of the Liver and Biliary Tract
    Diagnostic Applications of Nuclear Medicine: Pancreatic Cancer
    Diagnostic Applications of Nuclear Medicine: Colorectal Cancer
    Diagnostic Applications of Nuclear Medicine: Neuroendocrine Tumors
    Diagnostic Applications of Nuclear Medicine: Kidney and Bladder Cancer
    Diagnostic Applications of Nuclear Medicine: Prostatic Cancer
    Diagnostic Applications of Nuclear Medicine: Testicular Cancer
    Diagnostic Applications of Nuclear Medicine: Penile Cancer
    Diagnostic Applications of Nuclear Medicine: Vulvar Cancer
    Diagnostic Applications of Nuclear Medicine: Uterine Cancers
    Diagnostic Applications of Nuclear Medicine: Ovarian Cancer
    Diagnostic Applications of Nuclear Medicine: Sarcomas
    Diagnostic Applications of Nuclear Medicine: Malignant Melanoma
    Diagnostic Applications of Nuclear Medicine: Pediatric Cancers
    Part III: Radionuclide Therapy
    Radionuclide Therapy of Lymphomas
    Radionuclide Therapy of Leukemias and Multiple Myeloma
    Radionuclide Therapy of Thyroid Tumors
    Neuroendocrine Tumors: Therapy with Radiolabeled Peptides
    Neuroendocrine Tumors: Therapy with 131 I-MIBG
    Targeted Radionuclide Therapy for Bone Metastasis
    Radionuclide Therapy of Tumors of the Liver and Biliary Tract Volume 3, Part IV: Radioguided Surgery
    Radioguided Surgery for Malignant Melanoma
    Radioguided Surgery for Head and Neck Cancer
    Radioguided Surgery: New Applications, Approaches, and Strategies
    Molecular Guidance for Planning External Beam Radiation Therapy in Oncology
    Part V: Heart Disease in the Cancer Patient
    Imaging the Cardiovascular System in the Cancer Patient
    Part VI: Adverse Effects of Cancer Therapy
    Nuclear Medicine in the Assessment of Adverse Effects of Cancer Therapy in the Lung, Kidney, Gastrointestinal Tract, and Central Nervous System
    Part VII: Teaching Cases in Nuclear Oncology
    Teaching Cases in Nuclear Oncology: Lymphomas
    Teaching Cases in Nuclear Oncology: Multiple Myeloma
    Teaching Cases in Nuclear Oncology: Brain Tumors
    Teaching Cases in Nuclear Oncology: Head and Neck Cancers
    Teaching Cases in Nuclear Oncology: Thyroid Tumors
    Teaching Cases in Nuclear Oncology: Parathyroid Tumors
    Teaching Cases in Nuclear Oncology: Breast Cancer
    Teaching Cases in Nuclear Oncology: Lung and Mediastinal Tumors
    Teaching Cases in Nuclear Oncology: Esophageal Cancers
    Teaching Cases in Nuclear Oncology: Gastric Cancers
    Teaching Cases in Nuclear Oncology: Small Bowel Cancers
    Teaching Cases in Nuclear Oncology: Tumors of the Liver and Biliary Tract
    Teaching Cases in Nuclear Oncology: Pancreatic Cancer
    Teaching Cases in Nuclear Oncology: Colorectal Cancer
    Teaching Cases in Nuclear Oncology: Neuroendocrine Tumors
    Teaching Cases in Nuclear Oncology: Kidney and Bladder Cancers
    Teaching Cases in Nuclear Oncology: Prostatic Cancer
    Teaching Cases in Nuclear Oncology: Testicular Cancer
    Teaching Cases in Nuclear Oncology: Penile Cancer
    Teaching Cases in Nuclear Oncology: Vulvar Cancer
    Teaching Cases in Nuclear Oncology: Uterine Cancers
    Teaching Cases in Nuclear Oncology: Ovarian Cancer
    Teaching Cases in Nuclear Oncology: Sarcomas
    Teaching Cases in Nuclear Oncology: Malignant Melanoma
    Teaching Cases in Nuclear Oncology: Pediatric Cancers
    Teaching Cases in Nuclear Oncology: Investigating the Heart in Cancer Patients.
    Digital Access Springer 2022
  • Digital
    edited by Valérie Doyle.
    Summary: Volume 122 of Methods in Cell Biology describes modern tools and techniques used to study nuclear pore complexes and nucleocytoplasmic transport in diverse eukaryotic model systems (including mammalian cells, Xenopus, C. elegans, yeast). The volume enables investigators to analyze nuclear pore complex structure, assembly, and dynamics; to evaluate protein and RNA trafficking through the nuclear envelope; and to design in vivo or in vitro assays appropriate to their research needs.
    Digital Access ScienceDirect 2014
  • Digital
    Maximiliano D'Angelo, editor.
    Summary: The three-dimensional organization of the DNA inside the eukaryotic cell nucleus has emerged a critical regulator of genome integrity and function. Increasing evidence indicates that nuclear pore complexes (NPCs), the large protein channels that connect the nucleus to the cytoplasm, play a critical role in the establishment and maintenance of chromatin organization and in the regulation of gene activity. These findings, which oppose the traditional view of NPCs as channels with only one: the facilitation of nucleocytoplasmic molecule exchange, have completely transformed our understanding of these structures. This book describes our current knowledge of the role of NPCs in genome organization and gene expression regulation. It starts by providing an overview of the different compartments and structures of the nucleus and how they contribute to organizing the genome, then moves to examine the direct roles of NPCs and their components in gene expression regulation in different organisms, and ends by describing the function of nuclear pores in the infection and genome integration of HIV, in DNA repair and telomere maintenance, and in the regulation of chromosome segregation and mitosis. This book provides an intellectual backdrop for anyone interested in understanding how the gatekeepers of the nucleus contribute to safeguarding the integrity and function of the eukaryotic genome.

    Contents:
    Intro; Preface; Contents; 1 Spatial Organization of the Nucleus Compartmentalizes and Regulates the Genome; 1.1 Introduction; 1.2 Subdomains of the Nucleus; 1.2.1 Nuclear Envelope; 1.2.2 Nuclear Pore Complexes; 1.2.3 Chromosomes; 1.2.4 Centromeres; 1.2.5 Telomeres; 1.2.6 Nucleolus; 1.2.7 Perinucleolar Compartment; 1.2.8 Cajal Bodies; 1.2.9 Gemini of Coiled Bodies; 1.2.10 PML/ND10 Bodies; 1.2.11 Speckles; 1.2.12 Paraspeckles; 1.2.13 Histone Bodies; 1.2.14 Polycomb Bodies; 1.3 Composition of Nuclear Structures; 1.3.1 Mass Spectrometry Opens a Whole New Dimension in Defining Nuclear Subdomains. 1.4 Self-Assembly of Nuclear Structures1.5 Genome Organization Patterns; 1.5.1 Loops and Topologically-Associated Domains; 1.5.2 Compartments; 1.6 Structure-Function Relationships; 1.6.1 Layers of Functional Separation; 1.6.2 Loops; 1.6.3 Scaffolds; 1.6.4 Boundary Elements; 1.7 General versus Tissue- or State-Specific Functions; 1.8 Conclusions and Open Questions; 1.8.1 Mechanism for Establishment and Function of Different Organizational Patterns; 1.8.2 Zip Codes and Dynamics; 1.8.3 Conclusions; References. 2 The Molecular Composition and Function of the Nuclear Periphery and Its Impact on the Genome2.1 The Conservation of the Spatial Positioning of the Genome Across Eukaryotes; 2.2 Integral INM Proteins; 2.3 A Brief History of INM Targeting; 2.4 The Nuclear Lamina; 2.5 Lamina Associated Domains; 2.6 LADs as Developmentally Regulated Regions; 2.7 Histone Modifications at the Nuclear Periphery; 2.8 Peripheral Tethers; 2.9 Lamina Associated Sequences; 2.10 Beyond Silencing: The Periphery and Genome Integrity; 2.11 Repetitive DNA and the Nuclear Periphery. 2.12 Inputs of Nuclear Compartmentalization on DNA Repair Mechanisms2.13 Outlook; References; 3 Nuclear Pore Complexes: Fascinating Nucleocytoplasmic Checkpoints; 3.1 Introduction; 3.2 Versatility of the NPCs Structural Configuration; 3.3 Composition, Heterogeneity and Dynamics of the NPCs; 3.4 NPCs as Fascinating Gatekeepers Between the Cytoplasm and the Nucleus; 3.5 Configuration and Functional Mechanisms of the Selective NPC Barrier: FG-Nups; References; 4 Nuclear Pore Complex in Genome Organization and Gene Expression in Yeast; 4.1 Introduction. 4.2 Spatial Organization of the Yeast Genome4.3 Composition of NPC; 4.4 Nuclear Pore Complex Interacts with the Genome; 4.5 Nups Influence Transcription; 4.6 Mechanisms of Gene Recruitment; 4.7 Interchromosomal Clustering at the NPC; 4.8 Regulation of Gene Recruitment and Clustering; 4.9 Gene Recruitment and Clustering Through the Cell Cycle; 4.10 Transcription Memory; 4.11 Molecular Mechanism of INO1 Transcriptional Memory; 4.12 Concluding Remarks; References; 5 Nuclear Pore and Genome Organization and Gene Expression in Drosophila; 5.1 Introduction.
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Digital
    edited by Nathalie Beaujean, Hélène Jammes, Alice Jouneau.
    Contents:
    Nuclear Transfer in the Mouse
    Nuclear Transfer in the Rabbit
    Nuclear Transfer in Ruminants
    Nuclear Transfer and Transgenesis in the Pig
    Embryonic Stem Cell-Somatic Cell Fusion and Post-Fusion Enucleation
    Analysis of Nuclear Reprogramming Following Nuclear Transfer to Xenopus Oocyte
    Assessing the Quality of Donor Cells: Karyotyping Methods
    Treatment of Donor Cell/Embryo with Different Approaches to Improve Development After Nuclear Transfer
    Fluorescent Immunodetection of Epigenetic Modifications on Pre-Implantation Mouse Embryos
    Visualization of Epigenetic Modifications in Preimplantation Embryos
    Live Embryo Imaging to Follow Cell Cycle and Chromosomes Stability After Nuclear Transfer
    Analysis of Nucleolar Morphology and Protein Localization as an Indicator of Nuclear Reprogramming
    Assessment of Cell Lineages and Cell Death in Blastocysts by Immunostaining
    Gene Expression Analysis in Early Embryos through Reverse Transcription Quantitative PCR (RT-qPCR)
    Studying Bovine Early Embryo Transcriptome by Microarray
    Methylation of Specific Regions: Bisulfite-Sequencing at the Single Oocyte or 2-Cell Embryo Level
    Micro Chromatin Immunoprecipitation ({uF06D}ChIP) from Early Mammalian Embryos
    Assessing Reprogramming by Chimera Formation and Tetraploid Complementation
    Whole-Mount In Situ Hybridization to Assess Advancement of Development and Embryo Morphology
    Genome-Wide Analysis of Methylation in Bovine Clones by Methylated DNA Immunoprecipitation (MeDIP).
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Digital
    Rakesh Kumar, editor.
    Contents:
    Preface
    Steroid Receptor Coactivators (SRCs) as Integrators of Multiple Signaling Pathways in Cancer Progression
    Role of Alteration/Deficiency in Activation (ADA) Complex in the Cell Cycle, Genomic Instability and Cancer
    RUNX2 Transcriptional Regulation in Development and Disease
    Epigenetic Mechanisms of Cancer Metastasis
    Regulatory Effects of Arsenic on Cellular Signaling Pathways: Biological Effects and Therapeutic Implications
    Nuclear Factors Linking Cancer and Inflammation
    Regulation of the Jak/STATs Pathways by Histone Deacetylases
    Receptor Tyrosine Kinases in the Nucleus: Nuclear Functions and Therapeutic Implications in Cancers
    Nucleolar Signaling Determines Cell Fate The RP-Mdm2-p53 Axis Fine-Tunes Cellular Homeostasis
    Transcriptional Regulation of Lipogenesis as a Therapeutic Target for Cancer Treatment
    Selective Inhibition of Acetyl-Lysine Effector Domains of the Bromodomain Family in Oncology
    Domain Specific Targeting of Cancer
    The Potential of Targeting Splicing for Cancer Therapy
    Exploiting Cell Cycle Pathways in Cancer Therapy: New (and Old) Targets and Potential Strategies
    Histone Demethylases in Prostate Cancer
    Therapeutic Significance of Chromatin Remodeling Complexes in Cancer
    Index.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    edited by Gunter Mayer.
    Contents:
    Selection of aptamers for metabolite sensing and construction of optical nanosensors / Yi Long ... [et al.]
    SELEX of cell-specific RNA aptamers / Katharina Berg, Eileen Magbanua, and Ulrich Hahn
    Developing aptamers by cell-based SELEX / Silvia Catuogno, Carla Lucia Esposito, and Vittorio de Franciscis
    DNA aptamer generation by genetic alphabet expansion SELEX (ExSELEX) using an unnatural base pair system / Michiko Kimoto, Ken-ichiro Matsunaga, and Ichiro Hirao
    Capillary electrophoresis for the selection of DNA aptamers recognizing activated protein C / Nasim Shahidi Hamedani and Jens Müller
    Preparation of SELEX samples for next-generation sequencing / Fabian Tolle and Günter Mayer
    Next-generation analysis of deep sequencing data : bringing light into the black box of SELEX experiments / Michael Blank
    Aptamer binding studies using MicroScale thermophoresis / Dennis Breitsprecher ... [et al.]
    Label-free determination of the dissociation constant of small molecule-aptamer interaction by isothermal titration calorimetry / Marc Vogel and Beatrix Suess
    Applications of aptamers in flow and imaging cytometry / Isis C. Nascimento ... [et al.]
    In vitro and in vivo imaging of fluorescent aptamers / Ioanna Théodorou ... [et al.]
    Crystallographic pursuit of a protein-RNA aptamer complex / John J. G. Tesmer
    Voltammetric aptasensor based on magnetic beads assay for detection of human activated protein C / Arzum Erdem, Gulsah Congur, and Ece Eksin
    Apta-PCR / Alessandro Pinto ... [et al.]
    Aptamer-based enzyme capture assay for measurement of plasma thrombin levels / Jens Müller ... [et al.]
    Application of aptamers in histopathology / Sarah Shigdar ... [et al.]
    Aptamer stainings for super-resolution microscopy / Maria Angela Gomes de Castro, Burkhard Rammner, and Felipe Opazo
    Synthesis and characterization of aptamer-targeted SNALPs for the delivery of siRNA / Samantha E. Wilner and Matthew Levy
    Screening of genetic switches based on the twister ribozyme motif / Michele Felletti, Benedikt Klauser, and Jörg S. Hartig.
    Digital Access Springer 2016
  • Digital
    Jørgen Kjems, Elena Ferapontova, Kurt V. Gothelf, editors.
    Summary: This volume on nucleic acid nanotechnology offers authoritative, up-to-date and comprehensive coverage of nanotechnological studies and applications of nucleic acids. It provides reviews of various aspects of nucleic acid nanotechnology, each written by an internationally leading expert in the field, and presents state-of-the-art and recent advances in nucleic acid synthetic modifications, nanoscale design, manipulation and current and future applications in bioengineering, medicine, electronics, genetic analysis, chemistry, molecular biology, surface and material sciences. It examines how nucleic acid research is merging with nanotechnology, allowing the nanoscale properties of nucleic acid to be exploited in performing challenging nanotechnological tasks, from nanorobotics and nanosensing to nucleic acid computing. This book will above all benefit anyone who is interested in nanotechnological concepts of nucleic acid design and applications, and offers a valuable resource for teaching these concepts. It is essential reading for a broad audience of scientists both in academia and industry who wish to expand their expertise on the potential of nucleic acid functions and applications.

    Contents:
    Self-assembly of DNA bases via hydrogen bonding studied by Scanning tunneling microscopy
    Force spectroscopy of DNA and RNA: structure and kinetics from single molecule experiments
    The power of single molecule FRET microscopy applied to DNA nanotechnology
    DNA nanostructures: DNA Tiles
    DNA Origami
    DNA nanotechnology: From biology and beyond
    DNA Templated Synthesis
    Mechanical DNA devices
    Nano-encapsulation of Oligonucleotides for Therapeutic Use
    Cell-specific aptamers for nano-medical applications
    Nucleic acid sequencing and analysis with nanopores
    Application of Nanomaterials For DNA Sensing.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    Katsuhiko S. Murakami, Michael A. Trakselis, editors.
    Summary: This book provides a review of the multitude of nucleic acid polymerases, including DNA and RNA polymerases from Archea, Bacteria and Eukaryota, mitochondrial and viral polymerases, and other specialized polymerases such as telomerase, template-independent terminal nucleotidyl transferase and RNA self-replication ribozyme. Although many books cover several different types of polymerases, no book so far has attempted to catalog all nucleic acid polymerases. The goal of this book is to be the top reference work for postgraduate students, postdocs, and principle investigators who study polymerase.

    Contents:
    Structural aspects of mitochondrial ribosome function
    Mechanism and control of protein synthesis in mammalian mitochondria
    Translation in mammalian mitochondria : Order and disorder linked to tRNA and Aminoacyl-tRNA synthetases
    Mitochondrial targeting of RNA and mitochondrial translation in yeast and mammalians
    Mechanisms and control of protein synthesis in yeast mitochondria
    Mitochondrial translation in trypanosomatids
    Translation in mitochondria and apicoplasts in Apicomplexa
    Translation in mitochondria in green alga and higher plants
    Translation in flowering plant chloroplasts
    The chloroplasts as platform for recombinant proteins production.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    edited by Ronald Hancock.
    Contents:
    Cell type-specific affinity purification of nuclei for chromatin profiling in whole animals / Florian A. Steiner and Steven Henikoff
    Lysis gradient centrifugation : a flexible method for the isolation of nuclei from primary cells / Karl Katholnig ... [et al.]
    Isolation of nuclei in media containing an inert polymer to mimic the crowded cytoplasm / Ronald Hancock and Yasmina Hadj-Sahraoui
    New rapid method for isolating nucleoli / Zhou Fang Li and Yun Wah Lam
    Sequential recovery of macromolecular components of the nucleolus / Baoyan Bai and Marikki Laiho
    Au nanoinjectors for electrotriggered gene delivery into the cell nucleus / Mijeong Kang and Bongsoo Kim
    Improving chromatin immunoprecipitation (ChIP) by suppression of method-induced DNA-damage signaling / Sascha Beneke
    Purification of specific chromatin loci for proteomic analysis / Stephanie D. Byrum, Sean D. Taverna, and Alan J. Tackett
    Chromatin structure analysis of single gene molecules by psoralen cross-linking and electron microscopy / Christopher R. Brown ... [et al.]
    Purification of proteins on newly synthesized DNA using iPOND / Huzefa Dungrawala and David Cortez
    Applying the ribopuromycylation method to detect nuclear translation / Alexandre David and Jonathan W. Yewdell
    Targeted nano analysis of water and ions in the nucleus using cryo-correlative microscopy / Frédérique Nolin ... [et al.]
    Redox-sensitive yellow fluorescent protein sensor for monitoring nuclear glutathione redox dynamics / Agata Banach-Latapy, Michèle Dardalhon, and Meng-Er Huang
    Determination of the dissociation constant of the NF[Kappa]B p50/p65 heterodimer in living cells using fluorescence cross-correlation spectroscopy / Manisha Tiwari and Masataka Kinjo
    Imaging and quantification of amyloid fibrillation in the cell nucleus / Florian Arnhold, Andrea Scharf, and Anna von Mikecz
    Analysis of nuclear organization with TANGO, software for high-throughput quantitative analysis of 3D fluorescence microscopy images / Jean Ollion ... [et al.]
    Quantitative analysis of chromosome localization in the nucleus / Sandeep Chakraborty ... [et al.].
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Print
    [por] Fernando D. Gómez [y] Julio García Otero.
    Contents:
    Contents
    1. pt. Semiología torácica. Aparato respiratorio, por Fernando D. Gómez. - Aparato circulatorio, por Julio García Otero. - Mediastino, por Fernando D. Gómez.
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Stored offsite. Please request print.
    L69 .G63 1930
    1
  • Digital
    Andrew B. Lumb and Caroline B. Thomas ; foreword by Peter Slinger.
    Contents:
    Functional anatomy of the respiratory tract
    Elastic forces and lung volumes
    Respiratory system resistance
    Control of breathing
    Pulmonary ventilation
    The pulmonary circulation
    Distribution of pulmonary ventilation and perfusion
    Diffusion of respiratory gases
    Carbon dioxide
    Oxygen
    Nonrespiratory functions of the lung
    Pregnancy, neonates and children
    Exercise
    Sleep
    Obesity
    High altitude and flying
    High pressure and diving
    Respiration in closed environments and space
    Drowning
    Smoking and air pollution
    Anaesthesia
    Changes in the carbon dioxide partial pressure
    Hypoxia
    Anaemia
    Oxygen toxicity and hyperoxia
    Comparative respiratory physiology
    Ventilatory failure
    Airways disease
    Pulmonary vascular disease
    Diseases of the lung parenchyma and pleura
    Acute lung injury
    Respiratory support and artificial ventilation
    Pulmonary surgery
    The atmosphere
    The history of respiratory physiology
    Appendices. Physical quantities and units of measurement
    The gas laws
    Conversion factors for gas volumes
    Symbols and abbreviations
    Mathematical functions relevant to respiratory physiology.
    Digital Access ClinicalKey 2021
  • Digital
    [edited by] Sass Elisha, Jeremy S. Heiner and John J. Nagelhout.
    Digital Access ClinicalKey Nursing 2023
  • Digital
    Lynn Fitzgerald Macksey, RN, MSN, CRNA.
    Contents:
    Core anesthesia information
    AGM airway ventilation
    Monitoring
    Intravenous fluids, colloids, blood products
    Anesthesia pharmacology
    Neuraxial anesthesia
    Peripheral nerve blocks
    Neuro anatomy and physiology
    Cardiac
    Arterial blood gases
    Pediatrics
    Obstetric anesthesia
    Abbreviations.
    Digital Access R2Library 2018
    Limited to 1 simultaneous user
  • Digital
    [edited by] Susan B. Bastable.
    Summary: "Nurse as Educator: Principles of Teaching and Learning for Nursing Practice, Sixth Edition prepares nurse educators, clinical nurse specialists, and nurse practitioners and students for their ever-increasing role in patient teaching, health education, and health promotion. One of the most outstanding and unique features of this text is that it focuses on multiple audiences therefore making it applicable to both undergraduate and graduate nursing courses. The Sixth Edition features coverage of relevant topics in nursing education and health promotion such as health literacy, teaching people with disabilities, the impact of gender and socioeconomics on learning, technology for teaching and learning, and the ethical, legal, and economic foundations of the educational process"-- Provided by publisher
    Digital Access R2Library 2023
    Limited to 1 simultaneous user
  • Digital
    Suzanne Waddill-Goad.
    Summary: Nursing is more than a job. It is a profession that attracts those who value compassion, want to make a difference in other people's lives, and want to do greater good in the world. While the profession provides endless options of practice, settings, and flexibility, nurses are burning out due to schedules, long shifts, mental and physical exhaustion, workload, conflict and bullying, challenging patients, rapid advances in technology, and lack of control. And when stress and fatigue take over a nurse's ability to prioritize self-care and recovery time, patient safety and quality is greatly affected and compromised. Nurse Burnout: Overcoming Stress in Nursing explores the stress-fatigue-burnout connection, the risks involved, and defines the health concerns and practice considerations for how to move the profession forward. Author Suzanne Waddill-Goad provides nurses with the tools they need set boundaries and combat compassion fatigue in order to renew energy to be at your personal and professional best.

    Contents:
    The effects of inherent stress
    A slice of reality
    Nursing : art vs. science
    The impact of nursing leadership
    Professional integrity
    The internal strain of silos
    The social milieu (culture)
    The clout of allies
    Planning intentional quality and safety
    Promoting work-life balance
    Looking toward the future.
    Digital Access
    Provider
    Version
    R2Library
    2016 Limited to 2 simultaneous user
    AccessAPN
  • Digital
    Mary E. McDonald.
    Summary: "Provides instructors with a comprehensive, in-depth guide to creating effective classroom exams. Nurse educators will learn how to craft reliable and valid assessment materials ranging from multiple-choice exams and true-false tests to matching exercises and essay responses. Hundred of sample test questions, as well as detailed scoring rubrics, serve as invaluable resources for educators preparing their students for successful careers in nursing. Additionally, the text delves into the pedagogy behind Bloom's taxonomy, how to gauge the difficulty level of questions, and how to revise questions to increase their cognitive challenge. This revised edition is an essential guide for developing questions that require students to think critically and features a chapter on NCLEX test question development"-- Provided by publisher.

    Contents:
    The role of assessment in instruction
    The language of assessment
    Developing instructional objectives
    Implementing systematic test development
    Selected-response format : developing multiple-choice items
    Writing critical thinking multiple-choice items
    Selected-response format : developing true-false and matching items
    Constructed-response format : developing short-answer and essay items
    Assembling, administering, and scoring a test
    Establishing evidence of reliability and validity
    Interpreting test results
    Laboratory and clinical evaluation
    Assigning grades
    Instituting item banking and test development software
    Preparing students for the licensure examination : the importance of NCLEX.
    Digital Access R2Library 2018
  • Digital
    Keeley C. Harmon, Joe Ann Clark, Jeffery M. Dyck, Vicki Moran.
    Contents:
    Issues and trends in nursing education
    Principles of teaching and learning
    Classroom teaching
    Clinical experiences
    Simulation
    Online learning
    Appendix A: Example course syllabus
    Appendix B: Program outcomes
    Appendix C: Exam blueprint
    Appendix D: Example case study
    Appendix E: Example welcome letter
    Appendix F: Key discussion points during advising
    Appendix G: Clinical organization tool
    Appendix H: Example of clinical syllabus
    AppendixI: Abbreviated second patient form
    Appendix J: Example of a clinical contract
    Appendix K: Sample action plan
    Appendix L: Sample of debriefing questions for simulation.
    Digital Access Springer 2016
  • Print
    Joyce J. Fitzpatrick, Celeste M. Alfes.
    Summary: "We have been teaching leadership for years, both formally and informally, modeling the way for new nurse leaders at all levels. We have been encouraged by the leadership roles that graduates have assumed, charting new territory in healthcare delivery, in academic leadership and in policy changes within society. We firmly believe that management and leadership skills can be taught. This conviction, and the fact that there was no comprehensive leadership and management book that met our teaching needs, led us to prepare this book. Graduate nursing students in management and leadership courses will benefit from the wisdom imparted in each chapter by distinguished nurse leaders. We know that this book will lead to substantial changes in how nurses view themselves and the leadership roles they can embrace in the future"-- Provided by publisher.

    Contents:
    Section I. Introduction. Leading in challenging times / Angela S. Prestia
    Professionalism / Germaine C. Nelson
    Nurse manager and leader competencies / Linda Q. Everett and Benjamin J. Farber
    Section II. Relational leadership in practice. The importance of relationships / Mary Beth Modic and Amy Windover
    Emotional intelligence / Mary T. Quinn Griffin and Lauraine Spano-Szekely
    Relationship-based leadership theories / Rosanne Raso and Rae Jean Hemway
    The coaching and mentoring process / M. Lisa Hedenstrom and Susan Dyess
    Section III. Innovative and expanding models of care delivery. Value based contracting / Kristine Adams and Nicholas Engelhardt
    Population and community health : leveraging leadership and empowering nurses to understand and positively impact social determinants of health / Natalia Cineas and Donna Boyle Schwartz
    Telehealth / Noreen B. Brennan
    Innovation / Cole Edmonson and Tim Raderstorf
    Section IV. Organizational analysis. Structures, processes, and organizational goals / Deidre O'Flaherty and Mary Joy Garcia-Dia
    Strategic development and planning / Moreen Donahue
    System perspectives for organizations / Michele P. Holskey and Reynaldo R. Rivera
    Section V. Essential management issues. Quality and safety / Mary Cathryn Sitterding and Amy Dee Wilson
    Information management and big data / Andrew P. Reimer
    Human resource management / MariLou Prado-Inzerillo and Bertha Ku
    Section VI. Healthcare finance and budgeting. Macro components of healthcare financing / Nathanial Schreiner and Todd Nelson
    Developing financial acumen for nurse leaders / Deborah J. Stilgenbauer
    Section VII. Governance. Board leadership and responsibilities / Kimberly J. Harperand and Laurie S. Benson
    Relationships between board and management / Pamela Austin Thompson
    Section VIII. Special topics. Unanticipated transitions / Theresa L. Champagne and Ashley M. Carlucci
    The nurse leader's role in philanthropy / Kate Judge
    Section IX. Case studies for nurse managers and executives. Comprehensive case studies
    Comprehensive case study 1: Human-centered leadership / Kay Kennedy, Lucy Leclerc, and Susan Campis
    Comprehensive case study 2: Effective mentoring through relational leadership / K. David Bailey and Joseph P. De Santis
    Comprehensive case study 3: Telehealth / Mary Joy Garcia-Dia
    Comprehensive case study 4: Nurse-led innovation to reduce occupational heat stress of operating room personnel / Jill Byrne
    Comprehensive case study 5: Leadership to drive quality through direct-care nurse feedback using an electronic health record dashboard / Anne Pohnert and Mary A, Dolansky
    Comprehensive case study 6: Resiliency / Deirdre O'Flaherty and Mary Joy Garcia-Dia
    Comprehensive case study 7: Main hospital : perioperative transition unit / Garry Brydges
    Comprehensive case study 8: Finance / Nathanial Schreine and Stuart Downs
    Digital Access R2Library [2023], ©2023
  • Digital
    Connie Curran.
    Contents:
    Board basics
    Hospital governance trends
    What nurses need to know to get on board(s)
    Top competencies for successful board service
    Planning your path to board service
    Serving as a productive board member
    What's holding you back?
    Digital Access AccessAPN 2016
  • Digital
    Margaret A. Fitzgerald, DNP, FNP-BC, NP-C, FAANP, CSP, DCC, FNAP, President, Fitzergerald Health Education Associates, LLC, North Andover, Massachusetts, Family Nurse Practitioner, Greater Lawrence Family Health Center, Lawrence, Massachusetts.
    Summary: Start preparing for your future - today! The new edition of this award-winning text, written by renowned NP educator and certification preparation expert Dr. Margaret Fitzgerald. A must read for anyone taking the NP certification exam. Develop critical thinking and test-taking skills for the exam and the firm knowledge-base needed for both the exam and practice. The 5th edition delivers the latest guidelines, recommendations, diagnostic and treatment protocols, and procedures -everything critical to passing the NP boards.

    Contents:
    Health promotion and disease prevention
    Neurological disorders
    Skin disorders
    Eye, ear, nose, and throat problems
    Cardiac disorders
    Respiratory disorders
    Gastrointestinal disorders
    Male genitourinary system
    Musculoskeletal disorders
    Peripheral vascular disease
    Endocrine disorders
    Renal disorders
    Hematological and select immunological disorders
    Psychosocial disorders
    Female reproductive and genitourinary systems
    Older adults
    Pediatrics
    Childbearing
    Professional issues.
    Digital Access R2Library 2017
    Limited to 1 simultaneous user
  • Digital
    Michelle Lajiness, Susanne Quallich, editors.
    Contents:
    Scope of practice, guidelines, clinical privileging
    Transitioning pediatric urology patients to adult urology practices
    Men's health, hypogonadism and fertility overview
    Evaluation and management of common scrotal conditions
    Erectile dysfunction
    Benign prostatic hyperplasia
    Prostatitis
    Urologic dermatology
    Stone disease
    Stricture and trauma
    Urinary tract infection and pyelonephritis
    Urodynamics
    Neurogenic bladder
    Stress incontinence
    Overactive bladder
    Underactive bladder
    Women's urology
    Painful bladder syndrome/interstitial cystitis
    Prostate cancer.-Bladder and urothelial cancer
    Kidney cancer
    Penile and testicular cancers.-Geriatric urology
    Office management
    Procedures for the nurse practitioner in urology
    Uroradiology
    Coding issues.
    Digital Access Springer 2016
  • Digital
    edited by Susanne A. Quallich, Michelle J. Lajiness.
    Summary: This new edition updates the previous one and adds additional content related to postoperative management, pain management, LGBTQ care, and uroradiology. This book is designed to meet the needs of nurse practitioners, advanced practice nurses globally and physician assistants working in urology. Content assumes some background knowledge regarding the normal anatomy and physiology of the genitourinary system and the pathophysiology underlying specific urologic health-related problems. This ensures that the provider can pursue exemplary management of patients with acute and chronic urologic conditions in a wide variety of settings, including independent practices, and academic urologic practices. This manual fills the gaps that traditional curricula may have left, permitting the reader to proceed with confident management of adult patients with urologic care needs, promoting the role of a skilled clinician in urology, especially for chronic, non-operative urologic conditions while recognizing those conditions which may benefit from surgical management. As the burden of urologic disease increases with an aging U.S. population, it is increasingly clear that nurse practitioners and physician assistants will be called on to move into roles caring for patients with urologic disease. Use of NPs and PAs to their highest education will become an increasingly important strategy for maintaining access and reducing costs, in the context of urologist workforce that is shrinking. However, urology topics receive sporadic attention in NP and PA curricula, leaving practicing NPs and PAs with gaps in their knowledge concerning trends and recommendations for management of urologic health conditions. As this demand for provider visits for urologic concerns increases, the demand for provider services to care for patients with urologic health concerns will also increase, and presents the opportunity for both NPs and PAs to move into specialty practice environments within urology.

    Contents:
    Preface
    Introduction
    1. Transitioning pediatric urology patients to adult urology practices
    2. Basics of hypogonadism evaluation and management
    3. Evaluation and management of common scrotal conditions
    4. Erectile dysfunction and men's sexual health
    5. Benign prostatic hyperplasia
    6. Hematuria
    7. Prostatitis and chronic male pelvic pain
    8. Stone disease
    9. Urethral stricture and trauma
    10. Urinary tract infection and pyelonephritis
    11. Basics of pre and postoperative management specific to urology patients
    12. Neurogenic bladder and underactive bladder
    13. Stress incontinence
    14. Overactive bladder
    15. Women's urology: Painful bladder syndrome and interstitial cystitis
    16. Prostate cancer
    17. Bladder and urothelial cancer
    18. Kidney cancer
    19. Penile and testicular cancers
    20. Uroradiology for the Nurse Practitioner
    21. Procedures for the nurse practitioner in urology
    22. Pain management and the urology patient
    23. Special topics for the Urology NP
    24. Appendix: Resources, coding resources, PSA screening, urologic emergencies. .
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    Carolyn Buppert.
    Summary: "Drawing from the author's extensive experience as an NP followed by nearly 30 years as a practicing attorney focused on the many and varied legal issues affecting NPs, it is unlike any other text. This unique resource explains and analyzes the legal issues relevant to NPs in a straightforward and easy-to-read approach. The Seventh Edition discusses NP competencies, how the Doctor of Nursing Practice (DNP) degree relates to NPs, the differences in primary care and acute care NPs, definitions of medical bio-ethics terminology, malpractice cases and the lessons to learn from them, emerging issues in health policy, guidelines around prescribing opioids and controlled drugs, clinical performance measures, electronic health records, and other relevant and practical topics specific to NPs. In how many states can NPs write prescriptions? What can an NP do if an insurance company refuses to pay the bill for a patient's visit? What should be covered in an employment contract? What is involved, legally, when starting a private practice? How does an NP know when to consult a physician? Nurse Practitioner's Business Practice and Legal Guide, Seventh Edition answers these questions and more, making it an indispensable resource for practicing NPs, students, those employing NPs, and attorneys representing NPs or the medical facilities in which NPs are employed"--Publisher's description.

    Contents:
    Intro
    Title Page
    Copyright Page
    Preface
    Contents
    Preface
    Chapter 1 What Is a Nurse Practitioner?
    Definition of Nurse Practitioner
    An NP, by Any Other Name
    Services Provided by NPs
    Preparation and License Requirements
    Initials
    Areas of Practice
    Legal History of NPs
    Demographics
    NPs in Primary Care
    NP Versus Physician Assistant: What Is the Difference?
    NP Versus Physician: What Is the Difference?
    NP Versus RN: What Is the Difference?
    NP Versus Clinical Nurse Specialist: What Is the Difference?
    Where Do Nurse Practitioners Practice? The NP Doctorate
    Use of the Title "Doctor"
    Appendix 1-A: State-by-State Definitions of Nurse Practitioner
    Appendix 1-B: State-by-State Titles for Nurse Practitioners
    Chapter 2 Nurse Practitioner Scope of Practice
    Professional Association Definition of Scope of Practice
    Statutory Versus Regulatory NP Scope of Practice
    Physician Challenges to NP Scope of Practice
    Need for Clarity of Scope of Practice
    NP Scope of Practice Compared with Registered Nurse Scope of Practice
    NP and Physician Scope of Practice Compared
    Can an NP Work Outside the NP's Certification? An Individual NP's Portfolio
    Mandated Physician Involvement with NP Practice
    Full Practice Authority
    Appendix 2-A: Scope of Practice
    Appendix 2-B: Physician Collaboration
    Chapter 3 State Regulation of Nurse Practitioner Practice
    How Laws About NP Practice Evolve
    What Is Regulated?
    Appendix 3-A: State-by-State List of Agencies That Regulate Nurse Practitioners
    Appendix 3-B: State-by-State Nurse Practitioner Qualifications Required by Law
    Chapter 4 Federal Regulation of the Nurse Practitioner Profession
    Medicare
    Medicaid
    Nursing Homes In-Office and Hospital Laboratories Under the Clinical Laboratory Improvement Amendments
    Self-Referral by Healthcare Providers Under the Stark Acts
    Prescription of Controlled Substances Under the DEA
    Reporting to the National Practitioner Data Bank
    Patient Confidentiality
    Discrimination in Hiring and Firing
    Requirements Under the Americans with Disabilities Act
    Appendix 4-A: Documentation Guidelines for Evaluation and Management Services
    Chapter 5 Prescribing
    Controlled Substances
    Guidelines for Prescribing Legally Appendix 5-A: State-by-State Law Prescriptive Authority
    Chapter 6 Hospital Privileges
    Are Hospital Privileges an Issue for NPs?
    Do PCPs Need Hospital Privileges?
    Do NPs Need Hospital Privileges for Advancement of the Profession?
    Do Individual NPs Need Hospital Privileges?
    Who Has Hospital Privileges?
    Does Federal Law Support Full Hospital Privileges for NPs?
    What Does It Mean to Have Hospital Privileges?
    Levels of Privilege
    The Application Process
    Expense
    Denial of Privileges
    Change on the Horizon
    Chapter 7 Negligence and Malpractice
    Digital Access R2Library 2021
  • Digital
    Angeline Dewey, Andrea Holecek.
    Contents:
    Ethical theories
    Healthcare ethics
    Modern healthcare ethics : landmark events that shaped hospital ethics protocols
    A nurse-led ethics committee
    Common ethical challenges
    Ethics case studies.
    Digital Access AccessAPN 2023
  • Digital
    clinical editor, Kathy G. Ferrell, BS, RN, LNCC, Board Certified, Medical-Legal Consulting, Thompson's Station, Tennessee.
    Contents:
    Nursing practice and the law / by Mariea Urubek
    Working in diverse clinical settings / by Leslie M. Durr
    Patients' rights / by Kelli M. Hansen
    Understanding malpractice liability / by Rebecca F. Cady
    Lawsuits and the legal process / by Kristopher T. Starr
    Legal risks on the job / by Samantha M. Steiner
    Legal aspects of documentation / by Patricia Iyer
    Legal risks while off duty / by Taralynn R. Mackay
    Nurses' rights as employees / by Lanette L. Anderson
    Ethical decision making / by Frances W. Sills
    Ethics in nursing practice / by Edith Brous.
    Digital Access Ovid 2016
  • Digital
    Karen Roush.
    Summary: "This book is designed to guide you step-by-step through the process of rewriting your dissertation or DNP project paper into a high-quality manuscript ready to be submitted for publication. And then guide you through the process of submitting it. It gives you the background information you need to confidently navigate the world of scholarly publishing"--Provided by publisher.

    Contents:
    The Essentials
    Writing Well
    Introduction and Literature Review
    Methodology and Analysis
    Results and Discussion
    Publication Primer
    Ethics and Legalities
    Open Access Models
    Submission Process
    Getting a Decision.
    Digital Access
    Provider
    Version
    R2Library
    AccessAPN
  • Print
    Karen Roush.
    Summary: Feeling overwhelmed by the mere thought of writing your dissertation or scholarly project? Wondering how to begin and where to find the time? You are not alone. Earning your advanced degree is an extraordinary accomplishment, but completing those final stages can be a daunting task. A Nurse's Step-By-Step Guide to Writing a Dissertation or Scholarly Project, Third Edition, is a straightforward how-to guide. This book is intentionally concise because, let's be honest, the last thing a busy candidate needs is another unwieldy, doorstop-sized book. Packed with practical steps and tools, this fully updated third edition will help you plan, document, organize, and write your dissertation or scholarly project. Don't go it alone; let author and fellow dissertation survivor Karen Roush help you get from square one to DONE. --back cover.

    Contents:
    Chapter 1: Writing Your Introduction
    Chapter 2: Writing Your Literature Review
    Chapter 3: Writing Your Methodology Chapter
    Chapter 4: Writing Your Results Chapter
    Chapter 5: Writing Your Discussion Chapter
    Chapter 6: Writing Manuscript Option Dissertations
    Chapter 7: Writing Well: The Basics
    Index
    Digital Access R2Library [2023]
  • Digital
    Sharon Edwards, Joyce Williams.
    Summary: "This is the indispensable guide to daily procedures and problems faced by nurses working in this specialty. The focus of the book is on the patient and not the technology; the aim is to put across that the critical care practitioner looks after the patient and uses the technology to assist and support care, it is not the care itself."-- Back cover.

    Contents:

    Section 1 General principles of critical care; 1.1 Introduction; 1.2 Health and Safety; 1.3 Emergencies and life-threatening complications; 1.4 Life threatening complications/ outcomes;
    Section 2 Patient assessment and investigations; 2.1 Identification of patient needs/problems; 2.2 Assessment; 2.3 Haemodynamic monitoring; 2.4 Diagnostic procedures;
    Section 3 Critical care interventions; 3.1 Medium-technology life-support interventions; 3.2 High-technology life-support interventions; 3.3 Caring for a critical care patient; 3.4 Intubation and ventilation; 3.5 Transfer of critical care patients;
    Section 4 Common conditions/reasons for admission; 4.1 Principles of cellular death, injury and repair; 4.2 Neurological; 4.3 Endocrine disorders; 4.4 Respiratory; 4.5 Cardiovascular; 4.6 Renal; 4.7 Gastrointestinal (GIT); 4.8 Immunological; 4.9 Burns; 4.10 Poisoning/overdose;
    Section 5 Psychological and ethical care; 5.1 Mental effects of critical care; 5.2 Palliative care in critical care; 5.3 Professional practice issues;
    Section 6 Pharmacology; 6.1 Medication management; 6.2 Pharmacokinetics and pharmacodynamics; 6.3 Classification of drugs used in critical care; 6.4 Drug calculations; 6.5 Nurse prescribing; Conclusion; References; Relevant websites; Further reading;
    Appendix 1 Units of measurement; Units (SI), the metric system and conversions; Measurements, equivalents and conversions (SI or metric and imperial);
    Appendix 2 Normal values; Blood (haematology); Blood-venous plasma (biochemistry); Cerebrospinal fluid; Urine; Faeces;
    Appendix 3 Drug measurement and calculations; Glossary; Index
    Digital Access ClinicalKey Nursing 2019
  • Digital
    Brian Dolan, Amy Overend ; foreword by Professor Jane Cummings.
    Summary: When you become a ward or unit manager, sister or charge nurse, your responsibilities change and you need a very different set of skills compared to your previous roles. You are now required to manage a team of staff with a set budget and are responsible for maintaining an environment in which people can work well. This book will help you to identify your responsibilities and best approaches as a manager to provide patients with a high standard of care through your staff; read through examples, suggestions and tips following a highly practical approach; manage your staff, time and budget; create a positive work environment.
    Digital Access ClinicalKey Nursing 2019
  • Digital
    Ann Richards, Sharon Edwards.
    Summary: Further to the success of the previous editions, A nurse's survival guide to the ward continues to be the indispensable guide to all the procedures and problems faced by nurses and healthcare professionals every day. Whether you are a clincal practicing student or a qualified nurse, this book is the perfect straightforward reference for every doubts you might have about emergency situations, as well as assessments, clinical procedures and much more. You will find in this updated edition: completely updated and revised content written by well-known authors with extensive experience in the field ; up-to-date legal issues, health and safety, professional practice issues and ethics in nursing ; expansions of areas such as oxygen administration, fluid and electrolyte balance and nutrition. -- Back cover.

    Contents:
    Your job and its organization
    Principles of adult nursing
    Identification of patient problems
    Fundamental procedures
    A systems approach
    Pharmacology.
    Digital Access ClinicalKey Nursing 2019
  • Digital
    edited by Connie M. Ulrich, Christine Grady.
    Summary: This book addresses the many ethical issues and extraordinary risks that nurses and others are facing during the COVID-19 pandemic, which creates physical, emotional, and economic burdens, affecting nurses' overall health and well-being. Nurses are essential front-line clinicians across all health care settings and in every nation. The COVID-19 pandemic caused by the novel SARs-CoV-2 virus has affected children, adults, and communities within and across all societies. Nurses, too, have contracted the virus and died from the disease. They have also seen their colleagues, family members, and friends hospitalized or in intensive care units struggling to survive. Nursing's professionalism and disciplinary resolve to care for patients and families amidst confusion, misinformation, and shifting guidelines has been called "heroic" by the public. How much risk should nurses be expected to accept during a pandemic? How do nurses help patients and families find comfort and dignity at the end-of-life? How do we help nurses who are suffering from moral distress and mental health concerns from what they have seen, been asked to do, or are unable to provide? And, how does society move forward from a pandemic that has challenged our basic ethical principles of justice and what is "fair, good and right" in caring for those who need care, including the most vulnerable and nurses themselves? This book addresses these and other ethical concerns that nurses are facing in their day-to-day clinical practice; experiences shared with patients, families, and colleagues. Although this book was written while the pandemic was still raging across the United States and globally, the events needed to be told as they were unfolding. This book helps us to learn from both the successes and failures that are affecting so many across the globe, including those on whom the public relies on to provide quality, compassionate, and expert care when they are sick: nurses. .

    Contents:
    Introduction
    Understanding Acceptable Risks in Healthcare [Occupational risks/limits/PPE/obligations]
    Finding Compassion: Helping Patients Die and Sometimes Alone
    Preparing to Make Difficult Choices: Triage Decision and Crisis Standards of Care
    The Emotional and Moral Remnants of COVID-19: Burnout, Moral Distress, and Mental Health Concerns
    Unintended Consequences: Lack of Essential and Nonessential Patient Care, Furloughs of HCP, and Institutional Financial Losses
    Lingering and Glaring Health Disparities amidst COVID-19
    School nurses/pediatric concerns. "School Health
    Chapter 9. Global Health Ethics: Nursing Voices from China and Brazil.-Moving Forward: What Have We Learned? Where do we go from here? [Conclusion] (Opportunities to move forward). .
    Digital Access Springer 2022
  • Digital
    Marianne Baernholdt, Diane K. Boyle, editors.
    Contents:
    PART I) INTRODUCTION 1) Overview of the QHOM
    PART II) CONTEXT 2) Healthcare Policy
    3) The Nurse Workforce
    PART III) SYSTEM 4) The Nurse Work Environment
    5) Workflow, Turbulence, and Cognitive Complexity
    6) Health Information Technology and Electronic Health Records
    PART IV) CLIENT 7) Health Literacy and the Social Determinants of Health
    8) Chronicity
    PART V) INTERVENTIONS 9) Nursing Care Processes/Interventions
    10) Interprofessional Practice and Education
    11) Care Coordination
    PART VI) OUTCOMES 12) Client and Family Outcomes: Experiences of Care
    13) Nurse Outcomes: Burnout, Engagement, and Job Satisfaction
    14) Organizational Outcomes: Financial and Quality Measures
    PART VII) CLOSING 15) The Way Forward.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Print
    Zabriskie, Louise; Eastman, Nicholson J.; McManus, Rachel Louise Metcalfe.
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Stored offsite. Please request print.
    W76 .Z12 1937
    1
  • Print
    Zabriskie, Louise; Eastman, Nicholson J.; McManus, Rachel Louise Metcalfe.
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Stored offsite. Please request print.
    W76 .Z12 1931
    1
  • Digital
    edited by Rebecca M. Patton, Margarete L. Zalon, Ruth Ludwick,.
    Contents:
    Marching to lead in policy / Rebecca M. Patton, Margarete L. Zalon, and Ruth Ludwick
    Advocating for nursing and for health / Karen Tomajan and Debbie Dawson Hatmaker
    Navigating the political system / Eileen M. Sullivan-Marx and Susan Apold
    Identifying a problem and analyzing a policy issue / Lisa Summers and Katherine Cardoni Brewer
    Harnessing Evidence in the policy process / Lori A. Loan and Patricia A. Patrician
    Setting the agenda / Linda K. Groah and Amy L. Hader
    Building capital: intellectual, social, political, and financial / Lauren Inouye and Colleen Leners
    Transforming policy with innovation / Tim Raderstorf, Taura L. Barr, Michael Ackerman, Amy Jauch, and Bernadette Mazurek Melnyk
    Implementing the plan / Marianne Baernholdt and Ashley Bryant Leak
    Influencing public opinion and health policy through media advocacy / Jessica Keim-Malpass and Kimberly D. Acquaviva
    Applying a nursing lens to shape policy / Greer Glazer and Angela Clark
    Evaluating policy: structures, processes, and outcomes / Sean P. Clarke and Paul Logan
    Eliminating health inequities through national and global policy / Shanita D. Williams and Janice M. Phillips
    Valuing global realities for health policy / Judith Shamian and Moriah Ellen
    Taking action, shaping the future / Rebecca M. Patton, Margarete L. Zalon, and Ruth Ludwick.
    Digital Access R2Library 2023
  • Digital
    [editors, Karen C. Comerford, Mary T. Durkin].
    Contents:
    General information: 1. Drug actions, interactions, and reactions
    2. Drug therapy across the lifespan
    3. Safe drug administration
    4. Selected therapeutic drug classifications
    Alphabetical listing of drugs by generic name
    New drugs
    Appendices: 1. Avoiding common drug errors: best practices and prevention
    2. Pregnancy risk categories: the FDA's final rule
    3. Controlled substance schedules
    4. Abbreviations to avoid (The Joint Commission)
    5. Pediatric drugs commonly involved in drug errors
    6. Elder care medication tips
    7. Prescription drug abuse: identifying and treating toxicity
    8. Understanding biosimilar drugs
    9. Nursing process: patient safety during drug therapy
    10. Serotonin syndrome: what you should know to protect your patients
    11. Tumor lysis syndrome: a life-threatening emergency
    12. Antidiarrheals: indications and dosages
    13. Antidotes: indications and dosages
    14. Selected biologicals and blood derivatives: indications and dosages
    15. Common combination drugs: indications and dosages
    16. Vaccines and toxoids: indications and dosages
    17. Vitamins and minerals: Indications and dosages
    18. Antacids: indications and dosages
    19. Laxatives: indications and dosages
    20. Additional OTC drugs: indications and dosages
    21. Selected ophthalmic drugs: indications and dosages
    22. Do not use: Dangerous abbreviations, symbols and dose designations (ISMP Canada)
    23. Decision tree: deciding about medication administration
    24. Canadian National Drug Schedules
    25. Safe disposal of unused drugs: what patients need to know
    26. Therapeutic drug monitoring guidelines
    27. Less commonly used drugs: indications and dosages
    28. Additional new drugs: indications and dosages.
    Digital Access Ovid 2020
  • Digital
    editors, Karen C. Comerford, Mary T. Durkin.
    Digital Access Ovid 2022
  • Digital
    Summary: Prevent medication errors and provide optimal patient care with the latest expert advice from the new edition of the best-selling nursing drug guide. "Nursing 2023 Drug Handbook" delivers evidence-based, nursing-focused drug monographs for nearly 3700 generic, brand-name, and combination drugs. With a tabbed, alphabetical organization and a "New Drugs" section, NDH2023 makes it easy to check drug facts on the spot. -- From product description.
    Digital Access Ovid 2023
  • Digital
    Pia Riis Olsen, Sam Smith, editors.
    Summary: This book describes and explains how caring for adolescents and young adults with cancer (AYA) has developed into what is now a recognized and distinct field of nursing practice. It captures current innovative nursing practices and interventions which have developed over the past 25 years across the globe and are supported by research and evidence achieved in many European and international oncology settings. By outlining and describing educational needs of the AYA cancer nursing profession, this book supports its education and professional development for the nursing profession and serves to develop and disseminate nurses' competencies worldwide. During the last decade, AYA have gained increased attention in healthcare. Today, it is recognized that AYA with cancer have distinct needs that are different to both children and older adults. Young people are in a unique developmental and transitional phase of their lives; thus, their treatment, perspectives and experiences have been addressed in research and the body of knowledge is growing accordingly. Some books are available that describe AYA cancer care, service delivery and aspects of age appropriate care but this volume will be the first to focus on how nurses contribute to AYA cancer care in practice. It will appeal to the AYA clinical nurses in cancer care, as well as to multidisciplinary healthcare professionals and healthcare professionals who support formal nursing education programmes, training and development in practice.
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Digital
    Souraya Sidani, Carrie Jo Braden.
    Summary: "Nurse-led intervention research is a core component of the global initiative to improve quality of care. Though research in this area has already contributed much to the advancement of patient care, future strides depend on the dissemination of practical, how-to instruction on this important area of research. Nursing and Health Interventions covers the conceptual, empirical, and practical knowledge required for engaging in intervention research. This revised edition provides step-by-step guidance on the complex process of intervention development and methods for developing, delivering, evaluating and implementing intervention, supported by a wealth of examples. The text describes each essential aspect of intervention research, from generating an intervention theory, to procedures for adopting evidence-based interventions in practice. This second edition provides up-to-date coverage of intervention research and its impact on improving standards of care. Throughout the text, readers are provided with the foundational knowledge required for generating evidence that informs treatment decisions in practice, and choosing the best approaches for designing, delivering, evaluating and implementing interventions. A valuable 'one-stop' resource for students, researchers, and health professionals alike"-- Provided by publisher.
    Digital Access Wiley 2021
  • Digital
    Julie Skinner.
    Summary: Explores what lies beneath nurses' sub-optimal self-care practices and offers simple and effective tools to heal the core woundings nurses often carry.

    Contents:
    Chapter 1. What would it be like if...?
    Chapter 2. Self-care at its heart
    Chapter 3. Bringing the heart into nursing
    Chapter 4. Values and sacred qualities
    Chapter 5. Loving the truth, not the mind
    Chapter 6. The freedom in accountability
    Chapter 7. Being without expectation in our practice
    Chapter 8. Limited-lens viewing
    Chapter 9. Embracing courage and endurance to overcome resistance
    Chapter 10. Transforming nursing practice.
  • Digital
    Chirine Mossadegh, Alain Combes, editors.
    Summary: This book explores the unique aspects involved in the management of ECMO patients such as physiopathology and indications, setting up the device, monitoring ECMO and the patient, troubleshooting, ethical aspects and rehabilitation. For the past eight years, management of acute heart failure and Acute Respiratory Distress Syndrome (ARDS) patients has been improved by the development of short-term assistance devices, with ECMO as a first line treatment. This highly informative book provides essential insights for ICU nurses at ECMO centers around the world, who face the substantial challenges involved in the management of ECMO patients. Above all, it meets their training needs with regard to bedside monitoring for these patients, which has become a major issue. The editors and most of the contributors serve at La Pitié-Salpétrière ICU, France, which, in terms of the number of admissions and major publications produced, is one of the world's leading authorities on ECMO.

    Contents:
    I. Medical Aspects
    ECMO definition and principles
    Indications and physiopathology
    II. Nursing care
    Preparing the patient and the ECMO device
    Monitoring the ECMO
    Monitoring the patient preventing complications and accidents
    Mobilizing the patient
    Transport under ECMO
    Weaning process
    How to manage incidents
    Psychological approach of the patient and its family
    Training of nurses: initial and continuous education.
    Digital Access Springer 2017
  • Digital
    edited by Mandy Brimble, Peter McNee.
    Summary: "Currently there are limited books available which analyse the context, theory and practice of nursing children and young people with long term conditions. This second edition provides a comprehensive and fully updated resource for nursing students and post-registration children's nurses on assessing health needs and delivering care and services holistically within and across a variety of care settings in order to meet the changing needs of children and young people with long term conditions and their families. Although each chapter can be read independently, the book is designed to provide a comprehensive insight into the changing healthcare needs of children and young people with long term conditions and the implications for delivering nursing care and services to children and young people of several age groups, cultural backgrounds, with differing conditions and in a variety of care settings. In each of the chapters, individualised case studies and reader activities are used to apply theoretical principles and current evidence to nursing practice. In addition, readers are able to gain a greater understanding of the clinical conditions featured in the case studies, both in relation to development issues and associated care needs"-- Provided by publisher.

    Contents:
    The definition and aetiology of chronic illness / Siân Bill and Dwynwen Barklam
    Context of care and service delivery / Peter McNee
    Impact upon the child and parents / Dawn Daniel and Mandy Brimble
    Impact on siblings / Amie Hodges, Daniel Kelly, and Julia Tod
    A holistic approach to meeting physical, social, and psychological needs / Amie Hodges and Julia Tod
    Empowering children, young people, and their families / Mandy Brimble
    Ethical issues / Peter McNee
    Continuing care needs / Melda Price and Sian Thomas
    Acute emergencies / Peter McNee, Martina Nathan, and Jane Davies
    Adolescence / Siân Bill and Taryn Eccleston
    Transitional care / Siân Bill and Amie Hodges.
    Digital Access Wiley 2020
  • Digital
    Cathy C. Cartwright, Donna C. Wallace, editors.
    Summary: This book offers a detailed reference for nurses, explaining pathophysiology, anatomy, radiodiagnostic testing and treatment options for each neurosurgical diagnosis. Includes case studies, impact on families, patient and family education, and practice pearls.

    Contents:
    Neurological assessment of the neonate, infant, child, and adolescent
    hydrocephalus
    craniosynostosis and plagiocephaly
    skull and scalp anomalies
    neural tube defects
    chiari malformation and syringomyelia
    tumors of the central nervous system
    traumatic brain injury
    pediatric athletic concussion
    abusive head trauma
    spine
    neurovascular disease
    surgical management of epilepsy
    surgical management of functional disorders
    infections of the central nervous system
    perioperative care
    transition from pediatric to adult care
    neuroimaging.
    Digital Access Springer 2017
  • Digital
    Lynda Juall Carpenito.
    Contents:
    The bifocal clinical practice model
    Documentation of nursing care
    11 steps to care planning
    The ill adult : issues and responses
    Response to the surgical experience
    Reducing moral distress in nurses.
    Digital Access Ovid 2014
  • Digital/Print
    Digital Access
    Provider
    Version
    ClinicalKey
    Print Access
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Stored offsite. Please request print.
    16
    Periodicals (Downstairs)
    144
  • Digital
    [edited by] Joanne P. Robinson, Carole Kenner, Jana L. Pressler.
    Summary: "This book is a primer and all-purpose guide for nurses who are either new to academic leadership or aspire to academic leadership roles. The intent of this book is to provide fundamental information in an engaging and conversational manner, with real life examples that help the reader to understand and embrace the multifaceted opportunities and challenges of "deaning" and "directing.""--Provided by publisher.

    Contents:
    Searching for a Dean/Director Position / Carole Kenner, Jana Pressler
    Stepping Into a Dean/Director Position / Carole Kenner, Jana Pressler
    Day-to-Day Deaning / Jana Pressler, Carole Kenner
    Deaning in a For-Profit Environment / F. Patrick Robinson, Adele Webb
    Interim Deaning / Marie O'Toole
    Stepping Up from Deaning/ Directing / Joanne Robinson
    Enrollment Management / Linda Scott, Julie Zerwic
    Student Success / Jana Pressler, Carole Kenner
    Recruitment and Retention of Qualified Faculty and Staff / Carole Kenner, Jana Pressler
    Academic Policies and Programs / Lynnette Leeseberg-Stamler
    Fundraising : Mission Critical / Joanne Robinson
    Internal and External Stakeholder Engagement / Eileen Sullivan-Marx & Heather Young
    Perspectives on Financial Management for Deans of Nursing Programs : Culture, Policy and Leadership / Gloria Donnelly
    Strategic Thinking, Planning and Doing / Karen J. Kelly Thomas
    Developing a Sustainable Nurse-Led Clinical Enterprise and Faculty Practice / Julie Novak
    Executive Leadership / Carole Kenner, Jana Pressler
    Challenges of Deaning and Directing in Nursing / Carole Kenner, Jana Pressler
    Finding the Joy and Satisfaction in Deaning and Directing / Theodora Sirota, Brenda Petersen
    Work-Life Integration and Self-Care Management / Janice Brewington.
    Digital Access R2Library 2020
  • Digital
    [edited by] Lynda Juall Carpenito, RN, MSN, CRNP, Family Nurse Practitioner, ChesPenn Health Services, Chester, Pennsylvania, Nursing Consultant, Mullica Hill, New Jersey.
    Summary: Reflecting the challenges of ongoing rapid change in the nursing profession, this volume offers definitive guidance on nursing diagnosis, its role in the nursing process and its application to clinical practice.
    Digital Access Ovid 2017
  • Digital
    Marilynn E. Doenges, Mary Frances Moorhouse, Alice C. Murr.
    Contents:
    The nursing process : the foundation of quality client care
    The language of nursing : NANDA, NIC, NOC, and other standardized nursing languages
    The assessment process : developing the client database
    Concept or mind mapping to create and document the plan of care
    Nursing diagnoses in alphabetical order
    Health conditions and client concerns with associated nursing diagnoses.
    Digital Access CINAHL 2019
  • Print
    American Nursing Informatics Association.
    Summary: Even when we are prepared, downtimes are disruptive, and if an organization is unprepared, they can be chaotic and unsafe. Nursing represents the largest group utilizing the electronic health record (EHR) to care for patients. This guide provides timely and important information, and tools to help organizations prepare for both planned and unplanned downtimes using the SAFER Guides as a model. Nursing is the focus, but the tools can be used as a starting point for other departments as well. Many tools can be used and modified as needed by organizations to meet their needs.
    Digital Access R2Library 2022
  • Digital
    Catrin Page.
    Summary: Are you a nurse dealing with drug administration? Do you prescribe drugs? Whether you are a newly qualified nurse or a student on placement, this book makes understanding drugs simple. Reduced to the essentials, clearly arranged with tables and schematics, each page concisely provides the required knowledge. Key Features: Pocket sized and portable - perfect for taking with you on placements, on to the ward, or in your bag for a quick refresher whilst at work Spiral bound for ease of use and clearly laid out tables Indications, contra-indications and side effects of the frequently used drugs within the UK Organised by body system, and then by symptom for easy navigation Pocket sized and portable - perfect for taking with you on placements, on to the ward, or in your bag for a quick refresher whilst at work Spiral bound for ease of use and clearly laid out tables Indications, contra-indications and side effects of the frequently used drugs within the UK Organised by body system, and then by symptom for easy navigation.

    Contents:
    Cardivascular system
    Blood/coagulation system
    Hormonal system
    Respiratory system
    Renal/urinary system
    Gastrointestinal system
    Immune system
    Central nervous system.
    Digital Access ClinicalKey Nursing 2020
  • Digital
    Janie B. Butts, Karen L. Rich.
    Summary: The fifth edition of Nursing Ethics: Across the Curriculum and Into Practice has been revised to reflect the most current issues in healthcare ethics including new cases, laws, and policies. The text continues to be divided into three sections: Foundational Theories, Concepts and Professional Issues; Moving Into Ethics Across the Lifespan; and Ethics Related to Special Issues focused on specific populations and nursing roles. The text includes legal features sections in most chapters, an expanded appendix of case studies with suggestions for discussion, and ethical reflections questions in each chapter. This new edition will also include an appendix focused on simulation suggestions, heavier coverage of ethics and terrorism, and stronger coverage of immigration and the importance of remaining unbiased a healthcare provider."--Provided by publisher.

    Contents:
    Introduction to ethics
    Introduction to bioethics and ethical decision making
    Ethics in professional nursing practice
    Reproductive issues and nursing ethics
    Infant and child nursing ethics
    Adolescent nursing ethics
    Adult health nursing ethics
    Ethics and the nursing care of elders
    Ethical issues in end-of-life nursing care
    Psychiatric/mental health nursing ethics
    Public health nursing ethics
    Ethics in organizations and leadership.
    Digital Access R2Library 2020
    Limited to 1 simultaneous user
  • Digital
    Helen Kohlen, Joan McCarthy, editors.
    Summary: The aim of this book is to show how feminist perspectives can extend and advance the field of nursing ethics. It engages in the broader nursing ethics project of critiquing existing ethical frameworks as well as constructing and developing alternative understandings, concepts, and methodologies. All of the contributors draw attention to the operations of power inherent in moral relationships at individual, institutional, cultural, and socio-political levels. The early essays chart the development of feminist perspectives in the field of nursing ethics from the late 19th century to the present day and consider the impact of gender roles and gendered understandings on the moral lives of nurses, patients and families. They also consider the transformative potential of feminist perspectives to widen the scope of nursing and midwifery practices to include the social, economic, cultural and political dimensions of moral decision-making in health care settings. The second half of the book draws on feminist insights to critically discuss the role of nurses and midwives in leadership, healthcare organisations, and research as well as the provision of particular forms of care e.g. care in the home and abortion care.

    Contents:
    Foreword
    Introduction
    I. Nursing Ethics and feminist theoretical challenges
    Chapter 1. The influence of the social location of nurses-as-women on the early development of nursing ethics
    Chapter 2. An evolution of feminist thought in nursing ethics
    Chapter 3. Piecing together a puzzle: Feminist materialist philosophy and nursing ethics
    Chapter 4. Bearing witness and testimony in nursing: An ethical-political practice
    Chapter 5. Intercultural perspectives
    Interlude: Joan Tronto on care ethics and nursing ethics: an interview
    II. Nursing ethics in organisation, clinical practice, and research through a feminist lens
    Chapter 6. Organisation ethics, relational leadership and nursing
    Chapter 7. Hospital Ethics Committees and the dismissal of nursing ethical concerns: A feminist perspective
    Chapter 8. Feminist reflections on home, digital health technologies and ethics
    Chapter 9. Conscience, conscientious objection and commitment: midwives, nurses and abortion care
    Chapter 10. Feminist ethics in nursing research.
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    Irene Comisso, Alberto Lucchini, Stefano Bambi, Gian Domenico Giusti, Matteo Manici.
    Summary: This book provides essential insights into how the approach to nursing care in ICU patients has markedly changed over recent years. It shows how the focus has progressively moved away from the technical approach that characterized early ICUs to a wider personalization of patient care that also highlights general problems such as basic hygiene and general comfort. It also demonstrates that, at the same time, the nurses' role has become more professionalized, with increasing competences in assessing and managing patients' problems and measuring related outcomes. It is structured in four units: Unit 1 presents the essential elements of accurate vital-function and basic-needs assessments for ICU patients, using both instrumental monitoring and specially validated assessment tools. Unit 2 addresses basic care in ICU patients, particularly hygiene and mobilization, reflecting recent developments in nursing that focus on the importance of these activities. Unit 3 highlights the main nursing outcomes in ICU patients, particularly focusing on risk prevention and complication management. Lastly, Unit 4 discusses advances in ICU nursing, from clinical, organizational and research perspectives.

    Contents:
    Part I: Assessment and Monitoring in ICU;
    Chapter 1: Monitoring Patients: What's New in Intensive Care Setting?; 1.1 Introduction; 1.2 Instrumental Monitoring; 1.3 Monitoring and Scales; 1.4 Bedside Monitoring: An Overview; 1.5 A New Monitoring Model; References;
    Chapter 2: Neurological, Pain, Sedation, and Delirium Assessment; 2.1 Introduction; 2.2 Neurological Assessment; 2.3 Pain Assessment; 2.4 Evaluation of Agitation and Sedation; 2.5 Delirium Assessment in ICU; 2.5.1 Risk Factors for the Development of ICU Delirium; 2.5.2 Detection
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Digital
    Ursula H. Hübner, Gabriela Mustata Wilson, Toria Shaw Morawski, Marion J. Ball, editors.
    Summary: This new edition of the classic textbook on health informatics provides readers in healthcare practice and educational settings with an unparalleled depth of information on using informatics methods and tools. However, this new text speaks to nurses and in a departure from earlier editions of this title to all health professionals in direct patient care, regardless of their specialty, extending its usefulness as a textbook. This includes physicians, therapists, pharmacists, dieticians and many others. In recognition of the evolving digital environments in all healthcare settings and of interprofessional teams, the book is designed for a wide spectrum of healthcare professions including quality officers, health information managers, administrators and executives, as well as health information technology professionals such as engineers and computer scientists in health care. The book is of special interest to those who bridge the technical and caring domain, particularly nurse and medical informaticians and other informaticians working in the health sciences. Nursing Informatics: An Interprofessional and Global Perspective contains real-life case studies and other didactic features to illustrate the theories and principles discussed, making it an ideal resource for use within health and nursing informatics curricula at both undergraduate and graduate level, as well as for workforce development. It honors the format established by the previous editions by including a content array and questions to guide the reader. Readers are invited to look out of the box through a dedicated global perspective covering health informatics applications in different regions, countries and continents. .

    Contents:
    Intro
    Foreword
    Foreword
    Foreword
    Preface: Transforming Healthcare Through Learning
    Organization of the Book
    References
    Acknowledgments
    Contents
    About the Authors
    Part I: Introduction
    1: Nursing Informatics Through the Lens of Interprofessional and Global Health Informatics
    Introduction
    Breadth of the Field
    Milestones of Informatics
    Reference of This Book to the Informatics Milestones
    Summary
    Conclusions and Outlook
    Appendix: Answers to Review Questions
    References
    2: Principles of Health Informatics
    Health Informatics What Is Health Informatics?
    Brief History of Health Informatics
    The Field of Informatics
    Data, Information, Knowledge, and Wisdom
    Informatics Drivers
    Theory of Informatics
    Health Information Systems
    The Concept of Information Systems
    Different Categories of Information Systems
    Health Information Exchange and Interoperability
    The Health Informatics Team
    Roles, Skills, and Responsibilities of Members of the Health Informatics Teams
    Emerging Trends in Health Information Technology
    Challenges Presented by Emerging Trends
    Case Study
    Summary Conclusions and Outlook
    Appendix: Answers to Review Questions
    Case Study: Electronic Medical Record Implementation at Liberty Health
    Workflow Requirements
    Patient Appointment Workflow
    Implementing an EMR Solution
    EMR Vendor Selection
    References
    Part II: The 360° Stakeholder Perspective
    3: The Patient's View: The Patients as "Editor-in-Chief" of Their Data
    Introduction
    The Role of the Patient
    Challenges Facing the Patient
    Solutions Health Informatics Presents
    Summary
    Conclusions and Outlook
    Appendix: Answers to Review Questions
    References 4: The Nurse's View: Stakeholders, Challenges, and Innovation During COVID-19 Pandemic
    Introduction
    Definition and Role of Nurses in Healthcare
    Traditional Perspective
    What Is the 360° Perspective?
    Challenges of All Professions in State-of-the-Art Care Delivery: COVID-19 Pandemic
    Health Informatics Priorities from the Perspective of Nurses: Traditional Stakeholders' Challenges and Need for Innovations
    Health Informatics Priorities in Collaboration with Other Professions: The New Stakeholders
    Summary
    Conclusions and Outlook
    Appendix: Answers to Review Questions
    Digital Access Springer 2022
  • Print
    American Nurses Association.
    Summary: "Nursing Informatics: Scope and Standards of Practice describes a competent level of nursing care at each level of nursing informatics practice and provides comprehensive overviews of the dynamic and complex practice of the nursing informatics specialty. Published by ANA, this book is informed by advances in health care and professional nursing practice. It contains national standards of practice and performance that define the who, what, where, when, why, and how of nursing informatics practice and is a vital reference for: - Quality improvement initiatives - Certification and credentialing - Position descriptions and performance appraisals - Classroom teaching and in-service education programs - Boards of nursing members' orientation programs and regulatory decision-making activities Nursing Informatics: Scope and Standards of Practice is intended to guide nurses, as well as administrators, legislators, regulators, legal counsel, and other interprofessional colleagues"-- Provided by publisher.

    Contents:
    Scope of nursing informatics practice
    Standards of nursing informatics practice
    Standards of professional performance for nursing informatics.
    Digital Access R2Library [2022]
  • Digital
    [edited by] Dee McGonigle, Kathleen Mastrian.
    Summary: "Nursing Informatics and the Foundation of Knowledge, Fifth Edition is a foundational text for teaching nursing students the core concepts of knowledge management while providing an understanding of the technology tools and applications where a certain level of proficiency is required. A practical guide for understanding how to leverage modern technology, the text teaches students how to acquire, process and disseminate knowledge. Grounded in the Foundation of Knowledge Model, the authors leverage this framework throughout as an organizational structure by which to teach and learn nursing informatics"--Publisher's description.

    Contents:
    1. Nursing science and concepts of knowledge
    2. Introduction to information, information science, and information systems
    3. Computer science and the foundation of knowledge model
    4. Introduction to cognitive science and cognitive informatics
    5. Ethical applications of informatics
    6. History and evolution of nursing informatics
    7. Nursing informatics as a specialty
    8. Legislative aspects of nursing informatics: HIPAA, HITECH, and beyond
    9. Systems development life cycle: nursing informatics and organizational decision-making
    10. Administrative information systems
    11. The human-technology interface
    12. Electronic security
    13. Achieving excellence by managing workflow and initiating quality projects
    14. The electronic health record and clinical informatics
    15. Informatics tools to promote patient safety, quality outcomes, and interdisciplinary collaboration
    16. Patient engagement and connected health
    17. Using informatics to promote community and population health
    18. Telenursing and remote access telehealth
    19. Nursing informatics and nursing education
    20. Simulation, game mechanics, virtual worlds, and the realities in nursing education
    21. Nursing research: data collection, processing, and analysis
    22. Data mining as a research tool
    23. Translational research: generating evidence for practice
    24. Bioinformatics, biomedical informatics, and computational biology
    25. The art of caring in technology-laden environments
    26. Our expanding realities.
    Digital Access R2Library 2021
    Limited to 1 simultaneous users
  • Digital
    [edited by] Susan McBride, Mari Tietze.
    Summary: "This third edition of the book comes out at unprecedented times for global health as the COVID-19 pandemic raged in the United States and around the world with implications for sectors spanning education, practice, and policy. Our focus as we updated chapters for this text was to emphasize the criticality of nursing leadership within interprofessional teams to use technology, data, and information to address the serious gaps that have been identified and exacerbated by the pandemic. The focus: Identify critical lessons and future opportunities for transforming nursing and healthcare. This text continues to represent a unique perspective tying in national goals to achieve safe, efficient quality of care through use of technology. It emphasizes the advanced practice registered nursing role and the importance of the nurses within interprofessional teams addressing patient safety and quality through methods to optimize health information technology. This book emphasizes methods that, when taken into account, will begin to address the challenges and burden of documentation resulting from usability issues with electronic health records (EHRs) and less-than-desirable adoption and implementation. Current evidence related to these challenges are explored throughout the book"-- Provided by publisher.

    Contents:
    Introduction to Health Information Technology in a Policy and Regulatory Environment / Susan McBride and Mari Tietze
    Advanced Practice Roles, High Performing Interprofessional Teams, and the IT-HI Model / Carol J. Bickford and Mari Tietze
    Scientific and Theoretical Foundations for Driving Improvement / Richard Booth, Susan McBride, and Mari Tietze
    National Healthcare Transformation and Information Technology / Liz Johnson, Susan McBride, and Mari Tietze
    Consumer Engagement/Activation Enhanced by Technology / Mari Tietze and Patricia Hinton Walker
    Computers in Healthcare / Susan McBride and Richard E. Gilder
    Electronic Health Records and Point-of-Care Technology / Mary Beth Mitchell and Susan McBride
    Systems Development Life Cycle and Project Management to Optimize Technology / Susan McBride, Susan K. Newbold and David Fulton
    Workflow Redesign in a Quality-Improvement Modality / Susan McBride and Steph Hoelscher
    Evaluation Methods and Strategies for Electronic Health Records / Susan McBride and Mari Tietze
    Electronic Health Records and Health Information Exchanges Providing Value and Results for Patients, Providers, and Healthcare Systems / Anne Kimbol, Susan McBride, and Hewner
    National Standards for Health Information Technology / Susan H. Fenton and Susan McBride
    Public Health Data to Support Healthy Communities in Health Assessment Planning / Sue Pickens, Susan McBride, Steve Miff and Mari Tietze
    Privacy and Security in a Ubiquitous Health Information Technology World / Susan McBride and Jonathan Ishee
    Personal Health Records and Patient Portals / Mari Tietze and Stephanie H. Hoelscher
    Telehealth and Mobile Health / Mari Tietze, Devin McElreath and Georgia A. Brown
    Strategic Thinking in Design and Deployment of Enterprise Data, Reporting, and Analytics / Susan McBride and Sally Barlow
    Data Management and Analytics : The Foundations for Improvement / Susan McBride, Mari Tietze and Sally Barlow
    Clinical Decision Support Systems / Joni S. Padden, Dwayne Hoelscher, Susan McBride, and Mari Tietze
    Health Information Technology and Implications for Patient Safety / Mari Tietze and Susan McBride
    Quality-Improvement Strategies and Essential Tools / Susan McBride and Mari Tietze
    National Prevention Strategy, Population Health, and Health Information Technology / Mari Tietze, Susan McBride and Andrea L. Lorden
    Electronic Clinical Quality Measures : Building an Infrastructure for Success / Michelle Dardis and Susan McBride
    Developing Competencies in Nursing for an Electronic Age of Healthcare / Laura Thomas, Susan McBride, Sharon Decker, Matthew Pierce, and Mari Tietze
    Genomics and Implications for Health Information Technology / Diane C. Seibert and Susan McBride
    Robotics, Artificial Intelligence (AI), Nanotechnology : New and Emerging Technologies with Implications for Nursing Practice / Mari Tietze and Susan McBride
    Advanced Analytics : New and Emerging Methods / Susan McBride, Annette Sobel, Richard Gilder, Wesley Rhodes and Victoria Uti
    Social Media : Ongoing Evolution in Healthcare Delivery / Ryan Chan, Mari Tietze, and Susan McBride
    Enhancing Cybersecurity in New and Emerging Health Informatics Environments / Susan McBride, Annette Sobel, and Wesley Rhodes
    Interprofessional Application of Health Information Technology in Education / Mari Tietze, Chris McClanahan, and David Gibbs.
    Digital Access R2Library 2023
  • Digital
    editors Howard K. Butcher, Joanne M. Dochterman, Gloria M. Bulechek, Cheryl M. Wagner.
    Summary: "Select nursing interventions with the book that standardizes nursing language! Nursing Interventions Classification (NIC), 7th Edition provides a research-based clinical tool to help you choose appropriate interventions. It standardizes and defines the knowledge base for nursing practice as it communicates the nature of nursing. More than 550 nursing interventions are described -- from general practice to all specialty areas. From an expert author team led by Howard Butcher, this book is an ideal tool for practicing nurses and nursing students, educators seeking to enhance nursing curricula, and nursing administrators seeking to improve patient care. It's the only comprehensive taxonomy of nursing-sensitive interventions available!"

    Contents:
    Pt. 1: An Overview of the Nursing Interventions Classification
    Pt. 2: Taxonomy of Nursing Interventions
    Pt. 3: The Classification
    Pt. 4: Core Interventions for Nursing Specialty Areas
    Pt. 5: Estimated Time and Education Level Necessary to Perform NIC Interventions
    Pt. 6: Appendixes.
    Digital Access ClinicalKey Nursing 2018
  • Digital
    Catherine J. Goodhue, Nancy Blake, editors.
    Summary: This textbook describes what nurses need to know about pediatric disaster nursing, including public policy, and addresses preparedness for all types of disasters (natural and man-made) and strategies for hospital, school and community preparedness. The book opens with a brief history of disaster nursing and explains the key differences between pediatric and adult disaster nursing. Recent years have been marked by numerous man-made and natural disasters, which have led nurses to seek new resources to be better prepared, in their role as nurses, for all types of disasters. Responding to this lack of resources, the book focuses on the unique needs of babies and children. It is the first and only textbook on pediatric disaster preparedness to include both the physical and psychological effects of disaster. Key aspects covered include: the psychosocial differences in and how to approach children; family reunification; medications, supplies and equipment; and decontamination. Given its breadth of coverage, the book is well suited as a textbook for nursing classes, while also offering a valuable resource for nurses working in the field.

    Contents:
    Intro
    Contents
    1: Introduction
    1.1 Introduction
    References
    2: History of Disaster Nursing
    2.1 Introduction
    2.2 Disaster Defined
    2.3 Nurses Responding to Disasters
    2.3.1 The Forerunner of Disaster Nursing
    2.3.2 Influenza Pandemic of 1918-1919
    2.3.3 Cocoanut Grove Fire
    2.3.4 Oklahoma City Bombing
    2.3.5 Hurricane Katrina
    2.3.6 9/11
    2.3.7 Boston Marathon Bombing
    2.4 The Role of Military Nurses
    2.5 Conclusion
    References
    3: National Disaster Planning and Policy
    3.1 Introduction
    3.2 Sources of Law 3.3 Federal Government Emergency Powers
    3.4 Local, State, and Tribal Government Emergency Powers
    3.5 Executive Branch Authority
    3.6 Conclusion
    References
    4: Incident Command System
    4.1 Introduction
    4.2 NIMS
    4.3 Incident Command System (ICS)
    4.3.1 ICS Structure and Elements
    4.3.2 ICS Functions
    4.3.3 Incident Commander (IC)
    4.3.4 Command Staff
    4.3.5 General Staff
    4.4 Conclusion
    Appendix
    Finance Administration Section Chief
    Logistics Section Chief
    Operations Section Chief
    Planning Section Chief
    References 5: Types of Disasters
    5.1 Unique Vulnerabilities of Children
    5.1.1 Anatomy and Physiology
    5.1.2 Behavior and Development
    5.1.3 Psychology and Mental Health
    5.2 Pediatric Disaster Planning
    5.3 General Resuscitation, Equipment, Supplies, and Medications
    5.4 Natural Disasters
    5.5 Man-Made Disasters
    5.5.1 Terrorism
    5.6 Chemical Agents
    5.6.1 Nerve Agents
    5.6.2 Novichok Series
    5.6.3 Blood Agents
    5.6.4 Blister Agents
    5.6.5 Lung-Damaging Agents
    5.7 Biological Agents
    5.7.1 Smallpox (Variola major)
    5.7.2 Anthrax (Bacillus anthracis) 5.7.3 Plague (Yersinia pestis)
    5.7.4 Viral Hemorrhagic Fevers
    5.7.5 Tularemia (Francisella tularensis)
    5.7.6 Botulinum Toxin (Clostridium botulinum)
    5.7.7 Ricin (from Ricinus communis)
    5.8 Radiological/Nuclear
    5.8.1 Principles of Ionizing radiation
    5.8.2 Biological and Clinical Effects
    5.8.3 Immediate Clinical Management
    5.8.4 Ongoing Clinical Management
    5.8.5 Treatment of Internal Contamination
    5.8.6 Treating Acute Radiation Syndrome
    5.8.7 Treatment of Local Skin Contamination
    5.8.8 Psychosocial Implications
    5.9 Explosives 5.9.1 Basics of Explosions
    5.9.2 Mechanisms of Injury
    5.9.3 Clinical Manifestations of Primary Blast Injuries
    5.9.4 Clinical Management of Blast Injuries
    5.9.5 Postresuscitation Management
    5.10 Active Shooter
    5.11 Conclusion
    References
    6: General Disaster Preparedness for Families
    6.1 Introduction
    6.2 Preparing for Disaster
    6.3 Make a Plan
    6.4 Make a Kit
    6.5 Education Specific to Children
    6.6 Conclusion
    References
    7: Physical Development and Disaster Preparedness in Children
    7.1 Family Theoretical Backgrounds
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    editor: Debra Holloway.
    Summary: This book covers all the gynecological areas where nurses undertake a key role in managing and leading the care of women. With the constant evolving role of nurses, many of them have been at the forefront of changing practice and breaking through boundaries in areas traditionally carried on by medics. This volume guides those nurses in enhancing their role and moving the practice forward. Paramount within this care is the desire to ensure that women are treated by the right person with the right skills and with dignity to manage intimate and personal issues that have a great effect on quality of life. This book offers best practice guidelines and references to underpin practice and practical tips and hints. It examines many aspects of women's health, from menstrual dysfunction and bleeding, specific adolescent issues, fertility and infertilty, to early pregnancy problems, management of pregnancy's termination, urogynecological issues, ambulatory and outpatient procedures and menopause. This volume provides readers with a guide to care for women from the nurse specialist expertise. Many different subspecialties exist in gynecology, and nurses have to take the lead in caring for women, especially for those looked after within the outpatient setting. In addition to the nursing management of these women, some nurses undertake procedures as hysteroscopy and move the care of these women from surgery to an ambulatory setting. This work is written by and dedicated to specialist and practitioners nurses.

    Contents:
    Chapter 1: The Role of the Specialist Nurse Within Gynecology
    Chapter 2: Menstrual and Hormonal Dysfunction
    Chapter 3: Colposcopy and Cervical Problems
    Chapter 4: Adolescent Gynecology
    Chapter 5: Pain and Endometriosis
    Chapter 6: Fertility
    Chapter 7: Complications in Early Pregnancy
    Chapter 8: Abortion
    Chapter 9: Effects of Cancer Treatments
    Chapter 10: Menopause
    Chapter 11: Urogynecology
    Chapter 12: Ambulatory and Outpatient Procedures
    Chapter 13: Nursing in Sexual Health and Contraception
    Chapter 14: Insurance, Autonomy, Training and Accountability.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    editors, Sue Moorhead, Elizabeth Swanson, Marion Johnson, Meridean, L. Maas.
    Summary: "Promoting safe and effective nursing care, Nursing Outcomes Classification (NOC), 6th Edition standardizes the terminology and criteria needed to measure and evaluate outcomes that result from nursing interventions. Over 540 research-based nursing outcome labels -- including50 that are NEW to this edition -- help to standardize expected patient outcomes. Specific indicators make it easier to evaluate and rate the patient in relation to outcome achievement. Written by an expert author team led by Sue Moorhead, this book is ideal for practicing nurses, students, educators, researchers, and administrators seeking to improve cost containment and patient outcomes."

    Contents:
    Part I: Overview and Use of Nursing Outcomes Classification (NOC) in Education, Practice and Research
    1. The Current Classification of Outcomes
    2. Using NOC
    Part II: NOC Taxonomy Overview of the NOC Taxonomy
    Part III: The Outcomes
    Part IV: NOC Linkages
    NOC Knowledge Outcomes Linked to Related Behavior Outcomes
    NOC and NIC Linkage to Clinical Conditions
    Part V: Core NOC Outcomes
    Core Outcomes for Nursing Specialties
    Part VI: Appendixes
    Appendix A: Outcomes: New, Revised and Retired Since the Fifth Edition
    Appendix B: Previous Editions and Translations Appendix
    C: Selected Terms and Definitions Appendix
    D: Outcomes by Scale Appendix
    E: Guidelines for Submission of a New or Revised Outcome
    Appendix F: NANDA-I Diagnoses Definitions.
    Digital Access ClinicalKey Nursing 2018
  • Digital
    Joan Such Lockhart.
    Contents:
    Gaining a perspective on healthcare trends influencing nursing professional development
    Understanding the specialty practice of nursing professional development
    Getting prepared for your role as a nursing professional development specialist and unit-based educator
    Orienting clinical nurses to the organization, assessing competence and promoting life-long learning
    Developing a unit-based clinical preceptorship program
    Helping clinical nurses develop their educator role through unit-based in-service education programs
    Getting involved in professional nursing organizations and the community
    Helping clinical nurses share their expertise by publishing
    Sharing your expertise through abstracts, oral presentations, and posters
    Recording your professional nursing achievements in a portfolio
    Preparing your resume or curriculum vita and cover letter
    Promoting nursing research and evidence-based practice in the clinical setting
    Meeting the learning needs and marketing the talents of clinical nurses through continuing nursing education programs
    Developing a career plan as a proactive approach for the future.
    Digital Access R2Library 2016
    Limited to 1 simultaneous user
  • Digital
    Geri LoBiondo-Wood, PhD, RN, FAAN, Professor and Coordinator, PhD in Nursing Program, University of Texas Health Science Center at Houston, School of Nursing, Houston, Texas, Judith Haber, PhD, APRN, BC, FAAN, the Ursula Springer Leadership Professor in Nursing, Associate Dean for Graduate Programs, New York University, College of Nursing, New York, New York.
    Summary: Now in full color, this easy-to-understand textbook offers a comprehensive introduction to nursing research concepts and methods. Evidence-based practice is emphasized throughout, with clear guidelines for evaluating research and applying scientific evidence to practice.

    Contents:
    I. Overview of research and evidence-based practice : Research vignette: Improving supportive care for cancer patients and their families / Ann M. Berger
    Integrating research, evidence-based practice, and quality improvement processes / Geri LoBiondo-Wood, Judith Haber
    Research questions, hypotheses, and clinical questions / Judith Haber
    Gathering and appraising the literature / Stephanie Fulton, Barbara Krainovich-Miller
    Theoretical frameworks for research / Melanie McEwen ; II. Processes and evidence related to qualitative research : Research vignette: Program of research on substance use disorders / Marianne T. Marcus
    Introduction to qualitative research / Mark Toles, Julie Barroso
    Qualitative approaches to research / Mark Toles, Julie Barroso
    Appraising qualitative research / Helen J. Streubert ; III. Processes and evidence related to quantitative research : Research vignette: From pressure ulcer prediction to preventive interventions / Nancy Bergstrom
    Introduction to quantitative research / Geri LoBiondo-Wood
    Experimental and quasi-experimental designs / Susan Sullivan-Bolyai, Carol Bova
    Nonexperimental designs / Geri LoBiondo-Wood, Judith Haber
    Systematic reviews and clinical practice guidelines / Geri LoBiondo-Wood
    Sampling / Judith Haber
    Legal and ethical issues / Judith Haber, Geri Lobiondo-Wood
    Data collection methods / Susan Sullivan-Bolyai, Carol Bova
    Reliability and validity / Geri LoBiondo-Wood, Judith Haber
    Data analysis: descriptive and inferential statistics / Susan Sullivan-Bolyai, Carol Bova
    Understanding research findings / Geri Lobiondo-Wood
    Appraising quantitative research / Nancy E. Kline ; IV. Application of research: evidence-based practice : Research vignette: Incorporating information and communication technology tools for HIV into practice / Ann Kurth
    Strategies and tools for developing an evidence-based practice / Carl A. Kirton
    Developing an evidence-based practice / Marita Titler
    Quality improvement / Maja Djukic, Mattia J. Gilmartin
    a Appendices : A randomized, clinical trial of education or motivational-interviewing-based coaching compared to usual care to improve cancer pain management
    The influence of maternal-fetal attachment and health practices on neonatal outcomes in low-income, urban women
    The experiences of nurse practitioners providing health care to the homeless
    Couple functioning and post-traumatic stress symptoms in US army couples: the role of resilience
    Follow-up for improving psychological well being for women after a miscarriage (review).
    Limited to 3 simultaneous users
  • Digital
    [edited by] Geri LoBiondo-Wood, Judith Haber.
    Summary: This easy-to-understand textbook offers a comprehensive introduction to nursing research concepts and methods. Evidence-based practice is emphasised throughout, with clear guidelines for evaluating research and applying scientific evidence to practice. Coverage includes qualitative and quantitative research, appraising and critiquing research, critical thinking, and clinical decision-making using research information.

    Contents:
    Integrating research, evidence-based practice, and quality improvement processes / Geri LoBiondo-Wood and Judith Haber
    Research questions, hypotheses, and clinical questions / Judith Haber
    Gathering and appraising the literature / Barbara Krainovich-Miller
    Theoretical frameworks for research / Melanie McEwen
    Introduction to qualitative research / Mark Toles and Julie Barroso
    Qualitative approaches to research / Mark Toles and Julie Barroso
    Appraising qualitative research / Dona Rinaldi Carpenter
    Introduction to quantitative research / Geri LoBiondo-Wood
    Experimental and quasi-experimental designs / Susan Sullivan-Bolyai and Carol Bova
    Nonexperimental designs / Geri LoBiondo-Wood and Judith Haber
    Systematic reviews and clinical practice guidelines / Geri LoBiondo-Wood
    Sampling / Judith Haber
    Legal and ethical issues / Judith Haber and Geri LoBiondo-Wood
    Data collection methods / Susan Sullivan-Bolyai and Carol Bova
    Reliability and validity / Geri LoBiondo-Wood and Judith Haber
    Data analysis : descriptive and inferential statistics / Susan Sullivan-Bolyai and Carol Bova
    Understanding research findings / Geri LoBiondo-Wood
    Appraising quantitative research / Deborah J. Jones
    Strategies and tools for developing an evidence-based practice / Carl A. Kirton
    Developing an evidence-based practice / Marita Titler
    Quality improvement / Maja Djukic and Mattia J. Gilmartin.
    Digital Access R2Library 2018
    Limited to 1 simultaneous user
  • Digital
    Janet Houser.
    Summary: "The Fifth edition is based on the idea that the ability to read, critique, and participate in nursing research is essential to create and use evidence for nursing practice. The book is aimed specifically at undergraduate nursing students, nurses returning to school, and practicing nurses that must apply evidence to practice at the bedside. All nurses need to be able to critically read research, determine how to use it in their practice, and participate in the research process in some way during their career. This text is intended to support all these efforts. A strength of this text is that it helps the reader gain a fundamental understanding of all types of research that may be used for evidence"-- Provided by publisher
    Digital Access R2Library 2021
    Limited to 1 simultaneous user
  • Digital
    Lisa Summers, Carol J. Bickford.
    Summary: Imagine having a reference resource that gives you all the things you need to know as a practicing registered nurse (RN) or an advanced practice registered nurse (APRN). Nursing's Leading Edges: Advancing the Profession through Specialization, Credentialing, and Certification will help you understand the definitions, standards, rules, and regulations involved with specialization, credentialing, and certification in the field of nursing. This book leverages American Nurses Association's long history of leading the profession in the areas of specialization and credentialing, as well as in the creation and ongoing implementation of the Consensus Model for APRN Regulation. Updating and building on ANA's Specialization and Credentialing in Nursing Revisited: Understanding the Issues, Advancing the Profession published in 2008-which presented a unity model for the specialization and credentialing of nurses, with a focus on APRNs-this new ANA publication will examine the constant changes in educational expectations and certification requirements. Nursing's Leading Edges: Advancing the Profession through Specialization, Credentialing, and Certification will guide you through the APRN Consensus Model and help you effectively implement it. The nation's 3.6 million RNs who work in every sector of our health care system have been called "the glue" that holds that system together for the patients who must navigate its services. Take this key and unlock the doors of the nursing profession today! -- Provided by publisher.

    Contents:
    1. An Overview of Nursing Practice in Today's World
    2. Specialization and Credentialing: Concepts and Definitions
    3. Specialization and Certification for RNs: Growth and Recognition
    4. APRN Specialization and Certification: The Consensus Model for APRN Regulation
    5. Specialization and Certification: Issues, Trends, Moving Forward.
    Digital Access Ovid 2017
  • Digital
    editor, Laurence Baldwin.
    Summary: This book focuses on those nursing skills that are truly valued and needed by children and young people with mental health problems. Whilst other books have chiefly focused on mental health conditions and treatments, this book moves away from this formulaic approach and considers what children and youth themselves need most from health professionals. It shows why nursing skills are among the most precious values for patients. This focus on therapeutic relationships, establishing trust-based forms of nursing, and empowering children and young people to develop into healthy and resilient young adults has largely been neglected, despite the feedback from those who urgently need help but often struggle to find it, or are wary of seeking help and reluctant to engage. This book focuses on the places where nurses encounter young people and seek to help them. It examines the role nurses play in specialist child and adolescent mental health settings (such as in-patient and community, as psychotherapists, and on self-harm teams) and where paediatrics nurses work with troubled young people (in emergency departments, paediatric wards and primary care). It also considers two specific areas, namely eating disorder services and consent-seeking, that could benefit from nursing skills that are currently undervalued, but are in fact invaluable. Its focus on those skills that nurses already have, but may not be consciously using, will make this book uniquely appealing to all nurses who work with children and young people with mental health problems, regardless of the setting, and an essential guide for students and experienced professionals alike.

    Contents:
    What nursing skills are we using with children and young people who experience mental health difficulties?
    What do children and young people want and need from nurses (and therapists)?
    Cognitive and emotional development of young people, and the development of resilience
    Nursing children and young people in specialist CAMHS in-patient settings
    Nursing in specialist community CAMHS settings
    School nursing and primary care
    the new frontline
    Paediatric wards and Children's Emergency Departments
    wrong place or right place for seeing distressed young people
    Helping children and young people with eating problems and disorders
    Nurse or psychotherapist: Using nursing skills in therapeutic relationships within psychotherapies?
    Self-harm teams and crisis teams in CAMHS, what nurses bring to the acute moments in young people's lives
    Helping young people understand issue of consent to treatment
    Summary.
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    [edited by] Marlaine C. Smith ; Diane L. Gullett, assistant editor.
    Digital Access R2Library 2020
    Limited to 1 simultaneous user
  • Digital
    editors, Christiani J. Henry, Theresa A. Nicklas, Sophie Nicklaus.
    Contents:
    Early development of taste and flavor preferences and consequences on eating behavior / Nicklaus, S.; Schwartz, C.; Monnery-Patris, S.; Issanchou, S.
    Early development of food preferences and healthy eating habits in infants and young children / Maier-Noth, A.
    Effect of parental feeding practices (i.e., responsive feeding) on children's eating behavior / Mallan, K.; Miller, N.
    Parental feeding practices and associations with children's food acceptance and picky eating / Fries, L.R.; Van der Horst, K.
    Summary on early eating behavior and taste development influence in children / Nicklaus, S.
    What children eat in developing countries: diet in the etiology of undernutrition? / Henry, C.J.
    Children's eating behaviors and energy intake : overlapping influences and opportunities for intervention / Orde, C.G.; Fogel, A.; McCrickerd, K.
    Fits and KNHS overview : methodological challenges in dietary intake data collection among infants, toddlers, and children in selected countries / Eldridge, A.L.
    Kids nutriion and health study in China / Wang, D.
    Feeding patterns of infants and toddlers: the Mexico case study / Villalpando-Carrión, S., Eldridge, A.L.
    The 2016 feeding infants and toddlers study FITS : dietary intakes and practices of children in the United States from birth to 48 months / Bailey, R.L.; Jun, S., Eldridge, A.L.
    Usual energy and nutrient intakes and food sources of Filipino children aged 6-12 years from the 2013 national nutrition survey / Angeles-Agdeppa, I., Dinney, L., Capanzana, M.V.
    Food and nutrition in Malaysian children / Karim, N.A., Abdul Razak, N.
    Summary on what children eat / Henry, C.J.
    Breakfast : shaping guidelines for food and nutrient patterns / Gibney, M.J.; Uzhova, I.
    The importance of dietary protein at breakfast in childhood / Karagounis, L.G.
    Breakfast consumption versus breakfast skipping : the effect on nutrient intake, weight, and cognition / O'Neil, C.E.; Nicklas, T.A.
    Breakfast, glycemic index, and cognitive function in school children: evidence, methods, and mechanisms / Sünram-Lea, S.I.
    Summary on importance of breakfast for children's health and development / Nicklas, T.A.
    Digital Access Karger 2019
  • Digital
    edited by Arrigo F.G. Cicero, Manfredi Rizzo.
    Summary: This book provides an evidence-based approach for the clinical use of nutraceuticals in the prevention and management of cardiovascular disease. It examines cardiovascular disease epidemiology, risk factors, and the role of dietary patterns. Clinical chapters discuss the use of nutraceuticals in the management of medical conditions such as dyslipidemia, hypertension, insulin resistance, and heart failure. Each chapter contains a short epidemiological background; a list of relevant active compounds and their efficacy, tolerability, and safety; and suggestions for prescribers. This book is a practical guide with the best clinical evidence supporting the use of nutraceuticals in cardiology. Nutraceuticals and Cardiovascular Disease: An Evidence-based Approach for Clinical Practice is an essential resource for physicians, residents, fellows, and medical students in cardiology, clinical nutrition, dietetics, and internal medicine.

    Contents:
    Chapter 1. Introduction to Cardiovascular Disease Epidemiology and Risk Factors
    Chapter 2. Definition of Nutraceuticals (Both Scientific and Legal)
    Chapter 3. Evidence-based Approach to Nutraceuticals in Cardiovascular Medicine
    Chapter 4. Dietary Patterns and Cardiovascular Disease Risk: From Epidemiology to Intervention
    Chapter 5. Single Dietary Components and Cardiovascular Disease Risk: From Epidemiology to Intervention
    Chapter 6. Nutraceuticals for Dyslipidemia Management
    Chapter 7. Nutraceuticals for Hypertension Management
    Chapter 8. Nutraceuticals for Management of Insulin Resistance
    Chapter 9. Nutraceuticals Supporting Body Weight Loss
    Chapter 10. Nutraceuticals for Non-alcoholic Fatty Liver Disease Management
    Chapter 11. Nutraceuticals for Homocysteine Reduction
    Chapter 12. Nutraceuticals Supporting Cognitive Function in Mild Cognitive Impairment
    Chapter 13. Nutraceuticals Supporting Heart Function in Heart Failure
    Chapter 14. Nutraceuticals with Potential Adverse Cardiovascular Events or Pharmacological Interaction with Cardiometabolic Drugs.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    Ramesh C. Gupta, Ajay Srivastava, Rajiv Lall, editors.
    Summary: This unique work compiles the latest knowledge around veterinary nutraceuticals, commonly referred to as dietary supplements, from ingredients to final products in a single source. More than sixty chapters organized in seven sections collate all related aspects of nutraceutical research in animal health and disease, among them many novel topics: common nutraceutical ingredients (Section-I), prebiotics, probiotics, synbiotics, enzymes and antibacterial alternatives (Section-II), applications of nutraceuticals in prevention and treatment of various diseases such as arthritis, periodontitis, diabetes, cognitive dysfunctions, mastitis, wounds, immune disorders, and cancer (Section-III), utilization of nutraceuticals in specific animal species (Section-IV), safety and toxicity evaluation of nutraceuticals and functional foods (Section-V), recent trends in nutraceutical research and product development (Section-VI), as well as regulatory aspects for nutraceuticals (Section-VII). The future of nutraceuticals and functional foods in veterinary medicine seems bright, as novel nutraceuticals will emerge and new uses of old agents will be discovered. International contributors to this book cover a variety of specialties in veterinary medicine, pharmacology, pharmacognosy, toxicology, chemistry, medicinal chemistry, biochemistry, physiology, nutrition, drug development, regulatory frameworks, and the nutraceutical industry. This is a highly informative and carefully presented book, providing scientific insight for academia, veterinarians, governmental and regulatory agencies with an interest in animal nutrition, complementary veterinary medicine, nutraceutical product development and research.

    Contents:
    PRELIMINARY -03-2018 Introduction Ramesh C. Gupta, Murray State University, Hopkinsville, KY, USA; and Ajay Srivastava and Rajiv Lall, Vets Plus Inc, Menomonie, WI, USAEmail: rgupta@murraystate.edu; drajay@vets-plus.com; lallr@vets-plus.com I. COMMON NUTRACEUTICALS
    1. Curcumin/TurmericNaresh Chand, National Institutes of Health, Bathesda, MD, USAEmail: nchand@mail.nih.govAndSally Frautschy, University of California Los Angeles, Los Angeles, CA, USAEmail: sfrautschy@mednet.ucla.edu
    2. FenugreekDinesh Kumar, W. Ramdas Singh, Anu Rahal, and Jitendra K. MalikIndian Veterinary Research Institute, Izatnagar, Bareilly, India Email: dineshks17@gmail.com
    3. AshwagandhaVijay K. Bharti, Jitendra K. Malik, and Ramesh C. Gupta Defense Institute of High Altitude Research (DIHAR), DRDO, Leh, IndiaEmail: vijaykbharti@rediffmail.com
    4. ShilajitShailesh K. Bhavsar*, Aswim M. Thaker, and Jitendra K. MalikAnand Agricultural University, Anand, IndiaEmail: skbhavsar@yahoo.com
    5. Seabuckthorne and ApricotVijay K. Bharti Defense Institute of High Altitude Research (DIHAR), DRDO, Leh, India Email: vijaykbharti@rediffmail.com
    6. GingerShyam S. Sharma and K. Srinivasan, Dept. Pharmacology and Toxicology, National Institute of Pharmaceutical Education and Research (NIPER), SAS Nagar, Mohali, IndiaEmail: sssharma@niper.ac.in
    7. Neem extractJitendra K. Malik, Former Joint Director (Research), and Head of the Division of Pharmacology and Toxicology, Indian Veterinary Research Institute, Bareilly, Dehradun, Uttarakhand, India Email: jkmalik48@gmail.com
    8. Omega fatty acidsSzabina A. Stice, Division of Biotechnology and GRAS Notice Review, FDA, College Park, MD, USAE-mail: szabina.stice@fda.hhs.gov
    9. L-Tryptophan and 5-HTPAjay Srivastava, Vets Plus Inc, Menomonie, WI, USAEmail: drajay@vets-plus.com
    10. BerberineRamesh C. Gupta, Murray State University, Hopkinsville, KY, USAEmail: rgupta@murraystate.edu
    11. Glucosinolates and organosulfur compoundsKaryn Bischoff, Cornell University, Ithaca, NY, USAEmail: klb72@cornell.edu
    12. Nutraceutical values of red mold rice for anti-diabetic and anticlastogenic propertiesJacob A.C. Sanchez, Pampanga State Agricultural University, Pampanga, PhilippinesEmail: jacobsanchezph1@gmail.edu
    13. Medium Chain TriglyceridesYet to be assigned Email:
    14. Colostrum and Immunoglobulins Dan Duberdieu, Vets Plus Inc, Menomonie, WI, USA Email: dand@vets-plus.com
    15. Herbal Marijuana/Cannabis sativaJoshua A. Hartsel, Delta-9 Technologies, LLC, Lake Forest, CA, USAEmail: jhartsel@gmail.edu
    16. Juniper Rajinder Raina, Pawan K. Verma, Jitendra K. Malik, and Ramesh C. Gupta Sher-e-Kashmir University of Agricultural Sciences and Technology of Jammu, Jammu, India Email: drrajinderraina@ymail.com
    17. Natural preservatives and food additivesAjay Srivastava and Tapan Gor, Vets Plus Inc, Menomonie, WI, USAEmail: drajay@vets-plus.com
    18. Antioxidants in animal health Yogendra K. Gupta, All India Institute of Medical sciences. New Delhi, IndiaEmail: ykgykg@gmail.com or ykg@hotmail.com
    19. Polyphenols and flavonoids Satish K. Garg, Soumen Choudhury and Amit Shukla U.P. Pandit Deen Dayal Upadhyaya Pashu Chikitsa Vigyan Vishwavidyalaya Evam Go-Anusandhan Sansthan (DUVASU), Mathura, India Email: profsatish@gmail.com II. PREBIOTICS, PROBIOTICS, SYNBIOTICS, AND ANTIMICROBIALS
    20. Prebiotics and probiotics in feed and animal health Arturo Anadon, Universidad Complutense de Madrid, Madrid, Spain Email: anadon@vet.ucm.es
    21. Synbiotics in animals health Jitendra K. Malik and Ramesh C. Gupta Former Joint Director (Research), and Head of the Division of Pharmacology and Toxicology, Indian Veterinary Research Institute, Bareilly, Dehradun, Uttarakhand, India Email: jkmalik48@gmail.com
    22. Enzymes in feed and animal health Arturo Anadon, Universidad Complutense de Madrid, Madrid, Spain Email: anadon@vet.ucm.es
    23. Optimization of mineral supplements for maximized animal productivityJeffery O. Hall, Utah State University, Logan, UT, USAEmail: jeffery.hall@usu.edu
    24. Nutraceuticals used as antibacterial alternatives in animal health Arturo Anadon, Universidad Complutense de Madrid, Madrid, Spain Email: anadon@vet.ucm.es
    25. Feed additives in animal healthPrafull Kumar and M.J. Saxena, Ayurvet, Ghaziabad, UP, IndiaEmail: pverma@ayurvet.com; mjsaxena@ayurvet.com III. NUTRACEUTICALS IN ORGAN/SYSTEM DISORDERS
    26. Nutraceuticals in arthritisRamesh C. Gupta, Murray State University, Hopkinsville, KY, USAE-mail: rgupta@murraystate.edu
    27. Nutraceuticals in oral health and periodontal diseases Yet to be assigned Email:
    28. Nutraceuticals in gastrointestinal conditionsJamil Talukder, Vets Plus Inc, Menomonie, WI, USAEmail: jamilt@vets-plus.com
    29. Nutraceuticals in hepatic and pancreatic diseasesSharon Gwaltney-Brant, University of Illinois, Urbana-Champaign, IL, USAEmail: sharon.brant@mchsi.com
    30. Nutraceuticals in genitourinary diseasesRobert W. Coppock, Toxicologist and Assoc Ltd, Vegreville, AB, Canada, USAEmail: r.coppock@toxicologist.ca
    31. Nutraceuticals in cardiovascular diseasesCsaba Zoltani, Emeritus US Army Research Lab, Aberdeen Proving Ground, MD, USAEmail: c.zoltani@gmail.com
    32. Nutraceuticals in respiratory diseasesAjay Srivastava, Vets Plus Inc, Menomonie, WI, USAEmail: drajay@vets-plus.com
    33. Nutraceuticals in reproductive disordersMoges Woldemeskel, College of Veterinary Medicine, University of Georgia, GA, USAEmail: mwoldem@uga.edu
    34. Nutraceuticals in dermatological disordersMoges Woldemeskel, College of Veterinary Medicine, University of Georgia, GA, USAEmail: mwoldem@uga.edu
    35. Nutraceuticals in mastitis Robert W. Coppock, Toxicologist and Assoc Ltd, Vegreville, AB, Canada, USA Email: r.coppock@toxicologist.ca
    36. Nutraceuticals in immune disordersMoges Woldemeskel, College of Veterinary Medicine, University of Georgia, GA, USAEmail: mwoldem@uga.edu
    37. Nutraceuticals for wound healingAjay Srivastava, Vets Plus Inc, Menomonie, WI, USAEmail: drajay@vets-plus.com
    38. Nutraceuticals for calming and stress Yet to be assigned Email:
    39. Nutraceuticals for cognitive dysfunctionRamesh C. Gupta, Murray State University, Hopkinsville, KY, USAEmail: rgupta@murraystate.edu
    40. Nutraceuticals for antiagingYet to be assigned Email:
    41. Nutraceuticals in cancer prevention and cure Subhash C. Gupta, Banaras Hindu University, Banaras, UP, IndiaEmail: subhashg167@gmail.com
    42. Nutraceuticals alone or in combination with chemotherapeutic agents for prevention and treatment of cancerM. Waheed Roomi, Dr Rath Research Institute, Santa Clara, CA, USAEmail: w.roomi@drrath.com
    43. Nutraceuticals in obesity and metabolic disordersRhian B. Cope, Health Product Regulation Group, Woden ACT, AustraliaEmail: rhian. Cope@health.gov.au
    44. Nutraceuticals for ticks, fleas and other ectoparasitesRamesh C. Gupta, Murray State University, Hopkinsville, KY, USAEmail: rgupta@murraystate.edu
    45. Nutraceuticals in hunting, sporting and performance enhancing activitiesYet to be assigned Email: IV. NUTRACEUTICALS IN SPECIFIC ANIMAL SPECIES
    46. Nutraceuticals in cattle health and diseasesAyhan Filazi and Begum Yurdakok Dikmen, Ankara University, Ankara, TurkeyEmail: afilazi@gmail.com
    47. Nutraceuticals in equine health and diseasesYet to be assigned Email:
    48. Nutraceuticals in camelids Tarun K. Gahlot, Bikaner Veterinary Science University, Bikaner, India Email: tkcamelvet@yahoo.com
    49. Nutraceuticals in poultry health and diseases Begum Yurdakok Dikmen and Ayhan Filazi, Ankara University, Ankara, TurkeyEmail: byurdakok@yahoo.com V. SAFETY AND TOXICITY EVALUATION OF FUNCTIONAL FOODS AND NUTRACEUTICALS
    50. Safety and toxicity evaluation of nutraceuticals in animal modelsNikolay Goncharov, Russian Academy of Sciences, Saint Petersburg, RussiaEmail: ngoncharov@gmail.com
    51. Safety and toxicity evaluation of nutraceuticals using alternative in vitro models Subhash C. Gupta, Banaras Hindu University, Banaras, UP, IndiaEmail: subhashg167@gmail.com
    52. Safety of pet food, functional food, and nutraceuticalsSandra James-Yi, Now Health Group, Inc., Bloomingdale, IL, USAEmail: Sandra.james-yi@nowfoods.com
    53. Hydrocolloids: safety and toxicity considerationsLarry J. Thompson, Nestle Purina PetCare, St. Louis, MO, USAEmail: larry.thompson@rdmo.nestle.com
    54. Biomarkers for selected foods and nutraceuticalsRamesh C. Gupta, Murray State University, Hopkinsville, KY, USAEmail: rgupta@murraystate.edu
    55. Toxic interaction of nutraceuticals with food and pharmaceuticals Ramesh C.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    Carsten Carlberg, Stine Marie Ulven, Ferdinand Molnár.
    Summary: The fascinating area of Nutrigenomics describes this daily communication between our diet and our genome. This book describes how nutrition shapes human evolution and demonstrates its consequences for our susceptibility to diseases, such as diabetes and atherosclerosis. Inappropriate diet can yield stress for our cells, tissues and organs and then it is often associated with low-grade chronic inflammation. Overnutrition paired with physical inactivity leads to overweight and obesity and results in increased burden for a body that originally was adapted for a life in the savannahs of East Africa. Therefore, this textbook does not discuss a theoretical topic in science, but it talks about real life and our life-long "chat" with diet. We are all food consumers, thus each of us is concerned by the topic of this book and should be aware of its mechanisms. -- Provided by publisher.

    Contents:
    Intro
    Preface
    Acknowledgments
    Contents
    Abbreviations
    Chapter 1: Nutrition and Common Diseases
    1.1 Evolution of Human Nutrition
    1.2 Principles of Metabolism
    1.3 Dietary Molecules
    1.4 Nutrition and Metabolic Diseases
    1.5 Nutrition and Cancer
    1.6 Impact of Physical Activity
    Additional Readings
    Chapter 2: Human Genomic Variation
    2.1 Migration and Evolutionary Challenges of Homo sapiens
    2.2 Diversity of Human Populations
    2.3 Genetic Variants of the Human Genome
    2.4 Haplotype Blocks and GWAS
    2.5 The 1000 Genomes Project
    Additional Readings Chapter 3: Sensing Nutrition
    3.1 Nutrient-Sensing Mechanisms
    3.2 Nuclear Receptors as Nutrient Sensors
    3.3 Functions and Actions of PPARs
    3.4 Integration of Lipid Metabolism by LXRs and FXR
    3.5 Coordination of the Immune Response by VDR
    3.6 Circadian Control of Metabolic Processes
    Additional Readings
    Chapter 4: Interference of the Human Genome with Nutrients
    4.1 Human Genetic Adaptions
    4.2 Genetic Adaption to Dietary Changes
    4.3 Regulatory SNPs and Quantitative Traits
    4.4 Definition of Nutrigenomics
    4.5 Personal Omics Profiles
    Additional Readings Chapter 5: Nutritional Epigenetics
    5.1 Epigenetic Mechanisms
    5.2 Intermediary Metabolism and Epigenetic Signaling
    5.3 Nutrition-Triggered Transgenerational Epigenetic Inheritance
    5.4 Population Epigenetics
    Additional Readings
    Chapter 6: Nutritional Signaling and Aging
    6.1 Aging and Conserved Nutrient-Sensing Pathways
    6.2 Neuroendocrine Regulation of Aging
    6.3 Principles of Insulin Signaling
    6.4 Central Role of FOXO Transcription Factors
    6.5 Calorie Restriction from Yeast to Mammals
    6.6 Cellular Energy Status Sensing by Sirtuins and AMPK
    Additional Readings Chapter 7: Chronic Inflammation and Metabolic Stress
    7.1 The Central Role of Monocytes and Macrophages
    7.2 Acute and Chronic Inflammation
    7.3 Reverse Cholesterol Transport and Inflammation
    7.4 Sensing Metabolic Stress via the ER
    Additional Readings
    Chapter 8: Obesity
    8.1 Definition of Obesity
    8.2 Adipogenesis
    8.3 Inflammation in Adipose Tissue
    8.4 Energy Homeostasis and Hormonal Regulation of Food Uptake
    8.5 Genetics of Obesity
    Additional Readings
    Chapter 9: Insulin Resistance and Diabetes
    9.1 Glucose Homeostasis
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    edited by Martin Kussmann, Patrick J. Stover.
    Summary: "This volume brings together leading experts in the areas of nutrition, nutrigenomics, metabolic programming, food-based bioactive dietary components and the gut microbiome, as well as those expert in the application of innovative tools and methods for statistical and biological network analysis, which are now at the forefront of nutritional and biomedical sciences. The articles provide a roadmap for the integration of normative science methods and approaches with more comprehensive systems biology-based investigations that deploy a multitude of omic platforms. This integration is essential to escape the bottleneck in knowledge generation by applying decades of knowledge of nutrients and their function to comprehensive omics and clinical data acquisition, processing, visualization, and interpretation. Achieving a systems-level understanding of nutrient function in health and disease will usher in an age of precision nutrition in support of maximizing human health and potential"-- Provided by publisher.

    Contents:
    Machine generated contents note: List of Contributors Preface
    SECTION I GENES, PROTEINS AND NUTRITION 1. Personalized Nutrition Lydia Afman 2. Genetic-Epigenetic Interactions Rima Rozen 3. Epigenetics and Metabolic Programming Keith Godfrey and Peter Gluckman
    SECTION II BIOACTIVES AND PHYTONUTRIENTS 4. Bioactive Interactions in Food and Natural Extracts Sofia Moço and Denis Barron 5. Bioflavonoids and Biomarkers of Metabolic Syndrome Mary Ann Lila and David H. Murdock 6. Dietary Antioxidants and Bioflavonoids in Atherogenesis and Angiogenesis Mohsen Meydani, Angelo Azzi and Taiki Miyazawa 7. Proteomic and Genomic Approaches to Identify Sensitive Resveratrol Targets Cesar Lopez-Camarillo 8. Genomic Effects of Food Bioactives in Neuroprotection Ashraf Virmani 9. Food-based RNAs and their Bioactivity Kendal Hirschi and Lisa Farmer
    SECTION III PREBIOTICS, PROBIOTICS, SYNBIOTICS AND THE GUT ECOSYSTEM 10. Gut Health and the Personal Microbiome Willem de Vos 11. Infant Nutrition and the Microbiome: Systems Biology Approaches to Host-Microbe Interactions Mei Wang and Sharon M. Donovan 12. Gut Microbe-Derived Bioactive Metabolites François-Pierre Martin
    SECTION IV NUTRIGENOMIC AND PROTEOMIC TECHNOLOGIES 13. Network Analysis in Systems Nutrition Corrado Priami and Marie-Pier Scott-Boyer 14. Gene Selection for Nutrigenomic Studies Damien Valour Index.
    Digital Access Wiley 2017
  • Digital
    editors, James D. Lewis, Frank M. Ruemmele, Gary D. Wu.
    Contents:
    A review of the epidemiology of inflammatory bowel disease with a focus on diet, infections, and antibiotic exposure / Lewis, J.D.
    Current issues in the design of clinical trials in IBD / Feagan, B.G.
    The intestinal microbiota in inflammatory bowel diseases / Sartor, R.B.
    Genetics and innate and adaptive immunity in IBD / Zanello, G.; Kevans, D.; Goethel, A.; Silverberg, M.; Tyler, A.; Croitoru, K.
    Interplay of nutrients and microbial metabolites in intestinal immune homeostasis : differential and common mechanisms of immune regulation in the small bowel and colon / Perrigoue, J.; Das, A.; Mora, J.R.
    Diet, the gut microbiome, and the metabolome in IBD / Wu, G.D.
    Antibiotics, probiotics, and prebiotics in IBD / Bernstein, C.N.
    Fecal microbiota transplantation : an interest in IBD / Kahn, S.A.; Goeppinger, S.R.; Rubin, D.T.
    Enteral nutrition as treatment option for Crohn's disease : in kids only / Ruemmele, F.M.; Pigneur, B.; Garnier-Lenglin, H.
    Effects of exclusive enteral nutrition on bone mass, linear growth, and body composition in children with Crohn's disease / Sylvester, F.A.
    Exclusive enteral nutrition : clues to the pathogenesis of Crohn's disease / Levine, A.
    Current state of the art of medical foods / Blum, S. ; Brito, F.
    IBD therapy : new targets and unmet needs / Colombel, J.-F.
    Digital Access Karger 2014
  • Digital
    Carolyn Newberry, Janese Laster, Octavia Pickett-Blakely, editors.
    Summary: This book serves as a definitive nutritional reference for medical practitioners who care for patients with digestive diseases. This first-of-its-kind title explores the critical link between nutrition and weight and digestive health and organizes the necessary information for easy use for clinicians across specialties. The book is divided into four sections; the first section outlines basic nutritional concepts that lay a foundation for future chapters. This includes discussion of the gastrointestinal tract's role in digestion and metabolism, an outline of dietary composition and associated deficiencies, and a review of nutritional assessment and general therapeutic principles. Next, the second section outlines dietary and nutritional implications of specific digestive diseases organized by affected gastrointestinal organs. Following this, the third section discusses appetite regulation, weight management, and obesity's association with gastrointestinal diseases. It also discusses the importance of comprehensive, multi-disciplinary obesity care including a review of dietary, pharmacological, endoscopic, and surgical options that promote weight loss. In concluding the book, the fourth section discusses foundational nutritional support concepts. Nutrition, Weight, and Digestive Health is an invaluable reference for medical practitioners seeking a title that explores important and revolutionary elements to the medical care of those with digestive diseases.

    Contents:
    Basic Nutrition Concepts
    Pathophysiology of the Digestive Tract
    Dietary Intake and Composition
    Nutritional Deficiencies
    Nutritional Assessment and Considerations
    General Therapeutic Principles
    Dietary Approaches to Gastrointestinal Diseases
    Foregut Disease
    Small Bowel and Colonic Disease
    Liver and Pancreaticobiliary Disease
    GI Malignancies
    Post-Surgical Management
    Food Allergies and Sensitivities
    Prebiotics, Probiotics, and Dietary Supplements
    Obesity and Weight Management
    Obesity Pathophysiology and Gastrointestinal Complications
    Obesity Related Gastrointestinal Disorders
    Obesity Evaluation and Management
    Nutritional Support
    Introduction to Nutritional Support
    Parenteral Nutrition
    Enteral Nutrition.
    Digital Access Springer 2022
  • Digital
    Michael F. Holick, Bess Dawson-Hughes, editors.
    Summary: This newly revised edition contains updated versions of many of the topics that were in the first edition and has been substantially expanded with an additional 5 chapters. Each chapter includes information from the most up-to-date research on how nutritional factors can affect bone health, written with an evidence-based focus and complete with comprehensive references for each subject. Nutrition and Bone Health, second edition covers all aspects of nutrition and the skeleton, from the history and fundamentals, to the effects of macronutrients, minerals, vitamins, and supplements, and even covers the effects of lifestyle, the different life stages, and nutrition-related disorders and secondary osteoporosis. Hot topics include the vitamin K story, nutraceuticals and new information about biomechanics of bone. New chapters include HIV & AIDs and the skeleton, celiac disease and bone health, and nutrition and bone health in space. Nutrition and Bone Health, second edition is a necessary resource for health care professionals, medical students, graduate students, dietitians, and nutritionists who are interested in how nutrition affects bone health during all stages of life.

    Contents:
    Part I. Basics of Nutrition and Bone Biology
    1. Bone Health From An Evolutionary Perspective: Development In Early Human Populations
    2. Gene-Diet Interactions On Bone
    3. Bone Physiology: Bone Cells, Modeling, and Remodeling
    4. Estrogens, Progestins, SERMs and Osteoporosis
    5. Bone Biomechanics and the Determinants of Skeletal Fragility
    6. Clinical and Research Applications of Bone Mineral Density Examinations
    7. Nutritional Epidemiology: Nutritional Assessment and Analysis
    8. Dietary Pattern Analysis in Nutritional Science Research: A Review of Current Evidence Relating Dietary Patterns to Indices of Bone Health and Fracture Risk
    9. Nutrition and Oral Bone Status
    10. Nutrition Counseling for Skeletal Health
    Part II. Nutrition and Bone: Effects of Life Stages and Race
    11. Nutrition in Pregnancy and Lactation
    12. Nutritional Requirements for Fetal and Neonatal Bone Health and Development
    13. Nutrition and Bone Health During Skeletal Modeling and Bone Consolidation of Childhood and Adolescence
    14. Calcium and Vitamin D for Bone Health in Adults
    15. Nutrition: to supplement or not to supplement the elderly
    16. Nutrition and Skeletal Health in Blacks
    17. Nutrition and Skeletal Health in Other Racial/Ethnic Groups
    Part III. Effects of Dietary Macronutrients
    18. Food Groups and Bone Health
    19. Vegetarianism and Bone Health in Women
    20. Protein intake and bone health
    21. Fat and Bone
    22. Acid-Base Balance and Bone Health
    Part IV. Minerals
    23. Quantitative Clinical Nutrition Approaches to the Study of Calcium and Bone Metabolism
    24. Sodium, Potassium, Phosphorus, and Magnesium
    25. Assessing Nutritional Requirements For Preterm Infants
    Part V. Fat-Soluble Vitamins/Micronutrients
    26. Vitamin A and Bone Health
    27. Vitamin D
    28. Vitamin D Utilization in Subhuman Primates
    29. Vitamin K?s role in age-related bone loss: a critical review
    Part VI. Lifestyle Effects/Supplements
    30. Smoking, Alcohol, and Bone Health
    31. Exercise and Bone Health
    32. Exercise, Nutrition and Bone Health
    33. Body Weight/Composition and Weight Change: Effects on Bone Health
    34. Nutraceuticals and Bone Health
    Part VII. Nutrition Related Disorders and Secondary Osteoporostis
    35. Eating Disorders and their Effects on Bone Health
    36. The Role of Nutrition for Bone Health in Cystic Fibrosis
    37. HIV/AIDS and Bone Health: The Role of Nutrition
    38. Celiac Disease and Bone Health
    39. Dietary Factors and Chronic Low Grade Systemic Inflammation in Relation to Bone Health
    40. Impact of Nutrition on Medications for Osteoporosis
    41. Nutrition and Bone Health in Space.
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Digital
    Rajkumar Rajendram, Victor R. Preedy, Vinood B. Patel, editors.
    Contents:
    Part I: Definitions, Characterization and Diagnosis
    Global Estimates of Hyperglycaemia in Pregnancy: Determinants and Trends
    Diagnosis of Gestational Diabetes
    Evaluation of Glycemic Control Indexes During Pregnancy: The Role of HbAlc, Glycated Albumin, and Fructosamine
    Mental Health and Diabetes During Pregnancy: Is is Chicken or Egg?
    Part II: The Type I Diabetic Mother
    Maternal Overweight and Obesity in Pregnancies Complicated by Type 1 Diabetes
    Glycemic Control and Insulin in Type 1 Diabetic Pregnancies
    Part III: Global Findings in Gestational Diabetes
    Maternal Diabetes in Pregnancy: Iran Perspectives
    25-Hydroxyvitamin D and its Impact on Pregnancy Outcomes and Gestational Diabetes in China
    Diagnosis of Gestational Diabetes Mellitus: Italian Perspectives on Risk Factor Based Screening
    Part IV: Genetic and Molecular Factors Associated with Maternal Gestational Diabetes
    Metabolic Fingerprints of Gestational Mellitus
    Genetic and Epidemiological Indications for Adiponectin Gene Dysregulation in Gestational Mellitus
    The Retinol Binding Protein-4 (RBP4) Gene and Gestational Diabetes
    Biomarkers of Metabolic and Cardiovascular Risk in Gestational Diabetes
    Fish Oil and Cardiac Akt/mTOR-mediated Insulin Resistance in Infants with Maternal Diabetes
    Part V: Pre-existing Conditions and Gestational Diabetes Risk
    Hypertensive Disorders of Pregnancy in Gestational Diabetes
    Links between Polycystic Ovary Syndrome and Gestational Diabetes
    Bariatric Surgery and its Impact on Gestational Diabetes
    Part VI: Dietary Interventions and Exercise
    Myo-inositol Supplementation in Gestational Diabetes
    Treatments with Low Glycaemic Index Diets in Gestational Diabetes
    Low-carbohydrate Diet for the Treatment of Gestational Diabetes Mellitus
    Using the Good Metabolome to Understand the Relationship between Maternal Diet and Gestational Diabetes
    Probiotics in the Prevention of Gestational Diabetes Mellitus
    The Role of Exercise in the Management of Gestational Diabetes Mellitus
    Part VII: Postpartum Effects of Gestational Diabetes
    Postpartum Glucose Intolerance in Gestational Diabetes
    Diet after Gestational Diabetes (GDM)
    Postpartum Oxidative Stress Markers in Woman with Previous Gestational Diabetes in Relation to Vascular Damage
    Neurodevelopmental Outcome in Offspring Born Following Gestational Diabetes
    Part VIII: Breast Feeding and Maternal Hyperglycemia
    Breastfeeding after Diabetes in Pregnancy: Thailand Perspectives
    Gestational Diabetes and Peptides in Breast Milk
    Dietary Advice and Glycemic Control in Woman with Type 1 Diabetes During Preconception Counselling, Pregnancy and Breastfeeding
    Part IX: Specific Dietary Components and Weight Gain
    Excessive Gestational Weight Gain and Pregnancy Outcomes in Gestational and Pre-gestational Diabetes
    Diet and Carbohydrate Food Knowledge in Gestational Diabetes: Challenges and Opportunities for Lifestyle Interventions
    Higher-complex Carbohydrate Diets in Gestational Diabetes
    Polyunsaturated Fatty Acids and Gestational Diabetes
    Folic Acid and Gestational Diabetes: Foundations for Further Studies
    Iron and Oxidative Stress in Gestational Diabetes
    Part X: Recommended Resources on Maternal Diabetes.
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Print
    Edward J. Calabreses.
    Contents:
    v. 1, The vitamins ;
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Stored offsite. Please request print.
    RA566 .C28
    1
  • Digital
    volume editors, Berthold Koletzko, Raanan Shamir, Dominique Turck, Moshe Phillip.
    Contents:
    Obesity, metabolic syndrome, and nutrition / Battelino, T., Shalitin, S.
    Neonatal and infant nutrition, breastfeeding / Turck, D., van Goudoever, J.B.
    Cognition / Hull, H.R., Carlson, S.E.
    Nutrition and growth in chronic diseases / Hartman, C., Altowati, M.A., Ahmed, S.F., Shamir, R.
    Malnutrition and catch-up growth during childhood and puberty / Baron, J., Jee, Y.H., Phillip, M., Bhutta, Z.
    Pregnancy : impact of maternal nutrition on intrauterine fetal growth / Yogev, Y., Hiersch, L.
    Digital Access Karger 2014
  • Digital
    editors: B. Koletzko, R. Shamir, D. Turck, M. Phillip.
    Contents:
    The physiology and mechanism of growth / Grimberg, A.; Hawkes, C. ; Phillip, M.
    Obesity, metabolic syndrome and nutrition / Shalitin, S. ; Moreno, L.A.
    Term and pretrem infants / Turck, D.; van Goudoever, J.B.
    Cognition / Agostoni, C.; Bettocchi, S.
    Nutrition and growth in chronic disease / Hartman, C.; Shamir, R.
    Early nutrition and its effect on grwoth, body composition and later obesity / Eriksen, K.G.; Lind, M.V.; Larnkjaer, A.; Mølgaard, C.; Michaelsen, K.F.
    Malnutrition and catch-up growth during childhood and puberty / Yackobovitch-Gavan, M.; Fisch Shvalb, N.; Bhutta, Z.A.
    Pregnancy : impact of maternal nutrition on intrauterine fetal growth / Hiersch, L.; Yogev, Y.
    Stunting in developing countries / Andrew, P.M.
    Digital Access Karger 2018
  • Digital
    editors, B. Koletzko, R. Shamir, D. Turck, M Phillip.
    Contents:
    The physiology and mechanism of growth / Ahmed, S.F., Phillip, M., Grimberg, A.
    Obesity, metabolic syndrome and nutrition / Shaltin, S., Battelino, T., Moreno, L.A.
    Term and preterm infants / van Goudoever, J.B., Turck, D.
    Cognition / Agostoni, C., Bettocchi, S.
    Nutrition and growth in chronic disease / Hartmann, C., Shamir, R.
    Early nutrition and its effects on growth, body composition and later obesity / Michaelsen, K.F., Larnkjaer, A., Larsson, M.W., Mølgaard, C.
    Malnutrition and catch-up growth during childhood and puberty / Bhutta, Z., Yackobovitch-Gavan, M.
    Pregnancy: impact of maternal nutrition on intrauterine fetal growth / Hiersch, L.; Yogey, Y.
    Digital Access Karger 2016
  • Digital
    volume editors Berthold Koletzko, Raanan Shamir, Dominique Turck, Moshe Phillip..
    Contents:
    The physiology and mechanism of growth / Grimber, A. ; Phillip, M. ; Wong, J. ; Ahmed, S.F.
    Obesity, metabolic syndrome, and nutrition / Shalitin, S. ; Battelino, T. ; Moreno, L.A.
    Term and preterm infants / Turck, D. ; van Goudoever, J.B.
    Cognition / Agostoni, C. ; Bettocchi, S.
    Nutrition and growth in chronic disease / Hartmann, C. ; Shamir R.
    Early nutrition and its effects on growth, body composition, and later obesity / Lind, M.V. ; Larnkjaer, A. ; Mølgaard, C. ; Michaelsen, K.F.
    Malnutrition and catch-up growth during childhood and puberty / Yackobovitch-Gavan, M. ; Butta, Z.A.
    Pregnancy : impact of maternal nutrition on intrauterine fetal growth / Hiersch, L. ; Yogev, Y.
    Stunting in developing countries / Prentice, A.M.
    Digital Access Karger 2017
  • Digital
    editors: Berthold Koletzko, Raanan Shamir, Dominique Turck, Moshe Phillip.
    Digital Access Karger 2019
  • Digital
    editors Dominique Turck, Raanan Shamir, Berthold Koletzko, Moshe Philip.
    Digital Access Karger 2020
  • Digital
    editors: Raanan Shamir, Berthold Koletzko, Dominique Turck, Moshe Phillip.
    Digital Access Karger 2021
  • Digital
    editors: Moshe Phillip, Dominique Turck, Raanan Shamir, Berthold Koletzko.
    Digital Access Karger 2022
  • Digital
    Saskia de Pee, Douglas Taren, Martin W. Bloem, editors.
    Digital Access Springer 2017
  • Digital
    Maryam Mahmoudi, Nima Rezaei, editors.
    Summary: This volume provides readers with a systematic assessment of current literature on the link between nutrition and immunity. Chapters cover immunonutrition topics such as child development, cancer, aging, allergic asthma, food intolerance, obesity, and chronic critical illness. It also presents a thorough review of microflora of the gut and the essential role it plays in regulating the balance between immune tolerance and inflammation. Written by experts in the field, Nutrition and Immunity helps readers to further understand the importance of healthy dietary patterns in relation to providing immunity against disorders and offering readily available immunonutritional programming in clinical care. It will be a valuable resource for dietitians, immunologists, endocrinologists and other healthcare professionals.

    Contents:
    Introduction
    Vitamin D and the Immune System
    Vitamin A and the Immune System
    Vitamin K and the Immune System
    Vitamin C and the Immune System
    Vitamin B12, Folic Acid, and the Immune System
    Zinc and the Immune System
    Selenium and the Immune System
    Selenium and Immunity
    Gut Microbiome and Immunity
    Maternal Nutrition, Child Development, and Immunity
    Nutrition, Immunity, and Cancer
    Nutrition and Cancer
    Aging, Immunity, and Neuroinflammation: The Modulatory Potential of Nutrition
    Vitamins and Allergic Asthma
    Nutrition, Immunity, and Food Intolerances
    Potency of T-Cell Epitope-Based Peptide Vaccines in Food Allergy Treatment
    Obesity and Immunity
    Nutrition, Immunity, and Neurological Diseases
    Nutrition for Chronic Critical Illness and Persistent Inflammatory, Immunosuppressed, Catabolic Syndrome
    Nutrition, Immunity, and Autoimmune Diseases
    Immunomodulatory Effects of Flavonoids: Possible Induction of TCD4+ Regulatory Cells through mTor Signaling Pathway Suppression
    Glucan and its Role in Immunonutrition
    Nutrigenomic Immunity
    Nutriepigenomic Immunity.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    Debbie L. Humphries, Marilyn E. Scott, Sten H. Vermund, editors.
    Contents:
    Part I: The Foundations of the Nutrition-Infection Nexus
    Pathways Linking Nutritional Status and Infectious Disease: A Conceptional Framework
    Core Principles of Nutrition
    Primer on Immune Response and Interface with Malnutrition
    Part II: Types of Infectious Diseases and Influences of Nutrition
    Bacterial Infections and Nutrition: A Primer
    Viral Infections and Nutrition: Influenza Virus as a Case Study
    Nutrition and Protozoan Pathogens of Humans: A Primer
    Human Helminth Infections: A Primer
    Part III: Nutrition Issues During Major Infections: Case Studies of Nutrition and Infectious Disease
    Nutrition and Diarrheal Disease and Enteric Pathogens
    Nutrition in HIV and Tuberculosis
    Nutrition and Arboviruses
    Nutritional Frameworks in Malaria
    Soil-Transmitted Helminths: Does Nutrition Make a Difference?
    Part IV: Integration of Cross-Cutting Issues in Nutrition/Infection Interactions
    Drug-Nutrition Interactions in Infectious Diseases
    Co-infection and Nutrition: Integrating Ecological and Epidemiological Perspectives
    Nutrition and Infections in the Context of Global Environmental Change
    Public Health and Clinical Implications of Nutrition/Infection Interactions.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    Gerry McKenna, editor.
    Summary: This book explores in depth the relationships between nutrition and oral health. Oral health is an integral part of general health across the life course, and this book examines nutritional and oral health considerations from childhood through to old age, with particular attention focused on the consequences of demographic changes. Current knowledge on the consequences of poor diet for the development and integrity of the oral cavity, tooth loss, and the progression of oral diseases is thoroughly reviewed. Likewise, the importance of maintenance of a disease-free and functional dentition for nutritional well-being at all stages of life is explained. Evidence regarding the impact of oral rehabilitation on nutritional status is evaluated, and strategies for changing dietary behaviour in order to promote oral health are described. Nutrition and Oral Health will be an ideal source of information for all who are seeking a clearly written update on the subject.

    Contents:
    Introduction to Nutrition and Oral Health
    Nutritional Considerations in Children
    Oral Health Considerations in Children Including Dental Caries
    Relationships Between Periodontal Disease and Nutrition
    Demographic Changes: The Ageing Population and Oral Health
    The Importance of Nutrition and Oral Health for Older Adults
    Relationships between Toothloss and Diet
    Impacts of Oral Rehabilitation on Nutritional Status
    Strategies for Changing Dietary Behaviour in Favour of Oral Health
    Conclusions.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    Riva Touger-Decker, Connie Mobley, Joel B. Epstein, editors.
    Summary: Nutrition and Oral Medicine, Second Edition addresses the complex, multifaceted relationships between nutrition and oral health, explores proposed relationships between oral, systemic and nutritional well-being and provides insights into interprofessional, comprehensive care for individuals. Chapters focus on diet, nutrition and oral health promotion and disease prevention across the lifespan, oral and dental diseases and disorders, oral manifestations of systemic diseases, and discussions of the synergy between oral tissues and nutrients. Cutting edge research issues regarding the relationship of individual antioxidants, trace elements, polyphenols and other nutrient substrates and oral health/disease, nutrigenomics, screening for nutrition and oral risk and other areas are covered in detail. Editors and authors include experts in nutrition and oral health from around the world. Nutrition and Oral Medicine, Second Edition is a invaluable resource for health professionals in the fields of nutrition and dentistry as well as other disciplines whose research, practice and education includes nutrition and oral medicine. It is an excellent resource for graduate level nutrition and dental students, dental and nutrition practitioners, educators and researchers as well as other health professionals.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    editors, Maureen M. Black, Helen K. Delichatsios, Mary T. Story.
    Summary: "This book explores nutrition education and how leverage it to drive healthy food choices for a better quality of life. Nutrition education may be defined as a combination of educational tactics accompanied by physical or environmental supports, whose purpose is to encourage the voluntary adoption of foods and other lifestyle behaviors that are beneficial for health"-- Provided by publisher.

    Contents:
    Nutrition Education : Application of Theory and Strategies during the First 1,000 Days for Healthy Growth / Dattilo, A.M.; Saavedra, J.M.
    Nutrition Education during the Preconception Period / Ramakrishnan, U.
    Prenatal Nutrition Education : Updates and Best Practices for Optimal Diet and Weight Gain During Pregnancy / Siega-Riz, A.M.; Constantoulakis, L.
    Reading Appetite Cues in Infancy : A Role for Nutrition Education / Hetherington, M.M.; McNally, J.
    Nurturing Care Framework and Implementation Science : Promoting Nutrition, Health and Development among Infants and Toddlers Globally / Black, M.M.
    Summary : Nutrition Education to Optimize Healthy Growth and Development for the First 1,000 Days / Black, M.M.
    Supporting Healthy Eating : Synergistic Effects of Nutrition Education Paired with Policy, Systems, and Environmental Changes / Story, M.T.; Welker, E.B.
    Multi-Level Opportunities to Improve Nutrition in Child Care Settings / Ward, D.S.; Vaughn, A.
    Food and Nutrition Education, Policy and Training in the UK / Ballam, R.
    Nutrition Policies Designed to Change the Food Environment to Improve Diet and Health of the Population / Crawford, P.B.
    Philippines Case Study : Government Policies on Nutrition Education / Capanzana, M.V.; Aguila, D.V.
    Summary : Nutrition Education in Child Care, Schools and Community Settings / Story, M.T.
    Counterbalancing the Uncertainties of Medical Nutrition Education with Effective Online Instruction / Kohlmeier, M.
    The NNEdPro Global Centre for Nutrition and Health : A Consolidated Review of Global Efforts Towards Medical and Healthcare-Related Nutrition Education / Ray, S.
    Update on Nutrition, Metabolism, and Lifestyle Curricula for Medical Education, Research, and Practice : USA / Lenders, C.; Twillman, G.
    Culinary Medicine Basics and Applications in Medical Education in the United States / Hauser, M.E.
    Integrating Nutrition Education into Clinical Practice / Delichatsios, H.K.; Pittas, A.G.
    Summary : Nutrition Education of Health Professionals / Delichatsios, H.K.
    Digital Access Karger 2020
  • Print
    Paul Insel, Faculty Advisor, Department of Psychiatry and Behavioral Sciences, Stanford University, Don Ross, California Institute of Human Nutrition, Kimberley McMahon, MDA,, RD, Lecturer, Deparment of Nutrition, College of Health Professions Rosalind Franklin University of Medicine and Science, Melissa Bernstein, PhD, RD, LD, FAND, DipACLM, Associate Professor and Chair, Department of Nutrition, College of Health Professions, Associate Professor, Chicago Medical School, Rosalind Franklin University of Medicine and Science.
    Summary: Perfect for the introductory, non-majors course, Nutrition Essentials: Practical Applications, equips students with the knowledge and know-how to navigate the wealth of health and nutritional information (an misinformation) available to them, and determine how to incorporate it into their everyday lives. Throughout the text, this acclaimed author team delivers current, science-based information in a format accessible to all students, while urging them to take responsibility for their nutrition, health, and overall well-being. With a wealth of teaching and learning tools incorporated throughout the text, Nutrition Essentials empowers readers to monitor, understand, and affect their own nutritional behaviors!-- Provided by publisher. "This book provides students with a comprehensive, current, and science-based introduction to nutrition concepts, guidelines, and functions. Its student-focused approach provides information about topics and issues that concern them -- a balanced diet, nutritional supplements, weight management, exercise, and much more. Throughout each chapter readers will engage with the latest dietary guidelines, scientific evidence, and national standards to help individuals follow a healthy dietary pattern at every life stage"-- Provided by publisher.

    Contents:
    Chapter 1 Food Choices: Nutrients and Nourishment
    Chapter 2 Nutrition Guidelines and Assessment
    Chapter 3 Carbohydrates
    Spotlight on Alcohol
    Chapter 4 Lipids
    Chapter 5 Proteins and Amino Acids
    Spotlight on Digestion and Absorption
    Chapter 6 Energy Balance and Weight Management
    Spotlight on Eating Disorders
    Chapter 7 Vitamins
    Spotlight on Dietary Supplements and Functional Foods
    Chapter 8 Water and Minerals
    Chapter 9 Life Cycle Nutrition
    Chapter 10 Diet and Health
    Chapter 11 Sports Nutrition: Eating for Peak Performance
    Chapter 12 Food Safety and Technology
    Spotlight on Hunger: The Faces of Global Malnutrition
    Appendix A Dietary Reference Intakes
    Digital Access R2Library 2022
  • Digital
    Susan G. Dudek.
    Contents:
    Nutrition in nursing
    Carbohydrates
    Protein
    Lipids
    Vitamins
    Water and minerals
    Energy balance
    Guidelines for healthy eating
    Consumer issues
    Cultural and religious influences on food and nutrition
    Healthy eating for healthy babies
    Nutrition for infants, children, and adolescents
    Nutrition for older adults
    Obesity and eating disorders
    Feeding patients : oral diets and enteral and parenteral nutrition
    Nutrition for patients with metabolic or respiratory stress
    Nutrition for patients with upper gastrointestinal disorders
    Nutrition for patients with disorders of the lower GI tract and accessory organs
    Nutrition for patients with diabetes mellitus
    Nutrition for patients with cardiovascular disorders
    Nutrition for patients with kidney disorders
    Nutrition for patients with cancer or HIV/AIDS.
    Digital Access Ovid 2014
  • Digital
    Susan G. Dudek, RD, CDN, BS, Nutrition Instructor, Dietetic Technology Program, Erie Community College, Williamsville, New York.
    Contents:
    Nutrition in health and health care
    Carbohydrates
    Protein
    Lipids
    Vitamins
    Water and minerals
    Energy balance
    Guidelines for healthy eating
    Consumer issues
    Cultural and religious influences on food and nutrition
    Healthy eating for healthy babies
    Nutrition for infants, children, and adolescents
    Nutrition for older adults
    Hospital nutrition : defining nutrition risk and feeding patients
    Nutrition for obesity and eating disorders
    Nutrition for patients with metabolic or respiratory stress
    Nutrition for patients with upper gastrointestinal disorders
    Nutrition for patients with disorders of the lower GI tract and accessory organs
    Nutrition for patients with diabetes mellitus
    Nutrition for patients with cardiovascular disorders
    Nutrition for patients with kidney disorders
    Nutrition for patients with cancer or HIV/AIDS.
    Digital Access Ovid 2018
  • Digital
    Susan G. Dudek, RD, CDN, BS, Former Nutrition Instructor, Dietetic Technology Program, Erie Community College, Williamsville, New York.
    Summary: "Nutrition Essentials for Nursing Practice, 9th Edition gives nursing students the understanding of nutrition theory and application to ensure effective client care across the life cycle and the health-illness continuum. Incorporating nutrition throughout the nursing care process, Susan Dudek's concise yet thorough text equips tomorrow's nurses with the latest evidence-based practices and recommendations to facilitate nutrition on the front lines of nursing practice, from assessment and nursing diagnoses to implementation and evaluation. The most up-to-date resource of its kind, this revised edition includes the Dietary Guidelines for Americans, 2020-2025 and makes need-to-know information more accessible than ever with a student-friendly format, improved organization, engaging case studies, and adaptable content optimized for use in standalone courses, online, or a fully integrated curriculum."-- Provided by publisher. "Like air and sleep, nutrition is a basic human need essential for survival. From curing hunger to reducing the risk of chronic disease, nutrition is ever changing in response to technological advances and cultural shifts. Because nutrition at its most basic level is food -- for the mind, body, and soul -- it is a complex blend of science and art. Although considered the realm of the dietitian, nutrition is a vital and integral component of nursing care across the life cycle and along the wellness-illness continuum. By virtue of their close contact with clients and families, nurses are often on the front line in facilitating nutrition. Nutrition is woven into all steps of the nursing care process, from assessment and nursing analysis to implementation and evaluation. This textbook seeks to give student nurses an essential nutrition foundation to better serve themselves and their clients"-- Preface.

    Contents:
    Unit 1: Nutrition Fundamentals
    Chapter 1 Nutrition in Health
    Chapter 2 Guidelines for Healthy Eating
    Chapter 3 Carbohydrates
    Chapter 4 Protein
    Chapter 5 Lipids
    Chapter 6 Vitamins
    Chapter 7 Water and Minerals
    Chapter 8 Energy Balance
    Unit 2: Nutrition in Health Promotion
    Chapter 9 Food and Supplement Labeling
    Chapter 10 Consumer Interests and Concerns
    Chapter 11 Cultural and Religious Influences on Food and Nutrition
    Chapter 12 Healthy Eating for Healthy Babies
    Chapter 13 Nutrition for Infants, Children, and Adolescents
    Chapter 14 Nutrition for Older Adults
    Unit 3: Nutrition in Clinical Practice
    Chapter 15 Hospital Nutrition: Defining Nutrition Risk and Feeding Clients
    Chapter 16 Enteral and parenteral nutrition
    Chapter 17 Nutrition for Obesity and Eating Disorders
    Chapter 18 Nutrition for Clients with Critical Illness
    Chapter 19 Nutrition for Clients with Upper Gastrointestinal Disorders
    Chapter 20 Nutrition for Clients with Disorders of the Lower GI Tract and Accessory Organs
    Chapter 21 Nutrition for Clients with Diabetes Mellitus
    Chapter 22 Nutrition for Clients with Cardiovascular Disorders
    Chapter 23 Nutrition for Clients with Kidney Disorders
    Chapter 24 Nutrition for Patients with Cancer or HIV/AIDS
    Appendix: Answers to Study Questions.
    Digital Access Ovid 2022
  • Digital
    edited by Felicity Savage King, Ann Burgess, Victoria J. Quinn, Akoto K. Osei.
    Digital Access Oxford 2015
  • Digital
    Ralph M. Trüeb.
    Summary: The quantity and quality of the hair are closely related to the nutritional state of an individual. And yet, there is hardly another field with so much prejudice, misconception, and debate as diet and health, let alone hair health. Pharmacy aisles and Internet drugstores are full of nutritional supplements promising full, thick, luscious hair for prices that range from suspiciously cheap to dishearteningly exorbitant. Since there lies an important commercial interest in the nutritional value of various nutritional supplements, a central question that arises is whether increasing the content of an already adequate diet with nutrients may further promote hair growth and quality. This book aims at distinguishing facts from fiction, and at providing a sound scientific basis for nutrition-based strategies for healthy hair, at the same time acknowledging the problems and limitations of our current understanding and practice.

    Contents:
    Preface
    1. Introduction
    2.Brief History of Human Nutrition
    2.1 Prehistory
    2.2 Antiquity
    2.3 From Galen to Lind
    2.4 From Lavoisier to the Modern Sciences
    2.5 From Hopkins to the Present
    3. Nutrition Basics
    3.1 The Food Pyramid
    3.2 World Nutrition Facts
    4. The Hair Cycle and its Relation to Nutrition
    5. Nutritional Disorders of the Hair and their Management
    5.1. Inborn Errors of Metabolism
    5.1.1 Copper
    5.1.2 Zinc
    5.1.3 Biotin
    5.1.4 Amino Acids
    5.2 Acquired Deficiency Disorders
    5.2.1 Protein-Calorie Malnutrition
    5.2.2 Biotin Deficiency
    5.2.3 Vitamin C Deficiency
    5.2.4 Vitamin B12 Deficiency
    5.2.4 Niacin Deficiency
    5.2.5 Deficiency of Essential Fatty Acids
    5.2.6 Iron Deficiency
    5.2.7 Zinc Deficiency
    5.2.8 Copper Deficiency
    5.2.9 Selenium Deficiency
    5.2.10 Vitamin D Deficiency
    5.3 Complex Nutritional Disorders
    5.3.1 Gluten Sensitivity
    5.3.2 Junk Food and Obesity
    5.3.3 Deficiencies from Bariatric Surgery
    5.3.4 Anorexia and Bulimia
    5.3.5 Deficiencies of Alcoholism
    5.3.6 Aging and Diet
    5.3.7 Controversies in the Oncologic Patient
    6. Value of Nutrition-Based Therapies for Hair Growth, Colour, and Quality
    6.1 Traditional
    6.2 Evidence-Based
    6.3 From Chinese Medicine and Ayurveda
    7. Safety and Efficacy of Nutrition-Based Interventions for Hair
    7.1 Bioavailability
    7.2. Circulation
    7.3 Clinical Efficacy
    7.4 Safety Issues
    7.4.1 Hypervitaminosis A
    7.4.2 Hyperselenosis
    7.4.3 Iron Overload
    7.4.4 Zinc
    7.4.5 Toxicities from Chinese Herbs for Hair Loss
    8. Concluding remarks.
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    volume editor, Dennis M. Bier ; co-editors, Jim Mann, David H. Alpers, H.H. Este Vorster, Michael J. Gibney.
    Digital Access Karger 2015
  • Digital
    Norman J. Temple, Ted Wilson, George A. Bray, editors.
    Summary: This is a desktop reference guide on nutrition and its clinical implications for health and disease through the lifecycle. Presented in a user-friendly style, it serves as a valuable resource of practical information for physicians in their daily practice.
    Digital Access Springer 2017
  • Digital
    Ted Wilson, Norman J. Temple, George A. Bray, editors.
    Summary: This fully updated and expanded third edition is a reference guide on nutrition and its clinical implications for health and disease through the life-cycle. The book endeavors to address the needs of those who would most benefit from up-to-date information on recent advances in the field of nutrition. Written by experts in the field, chapters cover a diverse range of nutritional areas that present a succinct overview of recent thinking and discoveries that have the greatest capacity to aid physicians and other healthcare professionals in improving the nutritional health of their clients. The text is divided into eight parts. Part one and two address the nutrient requirements and special nutrition-related issues for people across all stages of the lifespanfrom pregnancy and infancy through the adolescent years to the older adult years. Part three summarizes the role of nutrition in the prevention and management of chronic conditions frequently seen in clinical practice, including obesity, diabetes, bone disorders, coronary heart disease, hypertension, and cancer. Part four describes different dietary patterns (the Mediterranean diet, the DASH diet, the vegetarian diet, and the ketogenic diet). Part five describes nutrition challenges specific to surgery and several different acute diseases and disorders (gastrointestinal disorders, food allergy and intolerance, diseases of the liver and pancreas, kidney disease, eating disorders, bariatric surgery, sarcopenia, and drug interactions with food). Part six looks at different aspects of the diet (coffee, tea, dietary fat, dietary sugars, energy drinks, alcohol, dietary fiber, vitamins, minerals, and the gut microbiome). Part seven examines a range of factors that influence dietary health decisions (creating nutritional behavior change, methods for assessing nutritional status, Dietary Reference Intakes, an overview of the diet and food guides, food labels, and sources of nutrients). Finally, part eight looks at dietary supplements (including the problem of dishonest marketing) and false and misleading information in the area of nutrition. The growing nutritional impact of COVID-19 is discussed throughout the book where appropriate. Nutrition Guide for Physicians and Related Healthcare Professions Third Edition serves as a comprehensive guide that is organized by age/lifespan, nutrition therapy in relation to chronic disease and COVID, diet and its role in prevention, dietary requirements and recommendations, and influencing health decisions for the patient. It is a valuable resource of practical and easy-to-access information on nutrition for physicians, nurses, pharmacists, and others in their daily practice.

    Contents:
    Part I: Introduction
    Why Nutrition Matters in Clinical Practice
    Part II: Nutrition Consideration Across the Lifespan
    Pregnancy: Preparation for the Next Generation
    Infants: Transition from Breast to Bottle to Solids
    Young Children: Preparing for the Future
    Nutrition in Adolescence
    Nutritional Challenges of Girls and Woman
    Healthy Aging: Nutrition Concepts for Older Adults
    Dietary Considerations for Postmenopausal Women
    Dietary Influence on Cognitive Function in the Elderly
    Part III: Nutrition for the Prevention and Management of Chronic Diseases
    Inherited Metabolic Disorders and Nutritional Genomics: Choosing the Wrong Parents
    Obesity: Understanding and Achieving a Healthy Weight
    Nutrition Therapy for the Treatment of Type 1 Diabetes
    Nutrition Therapy for Prevention and Treatment of Type 2 Diabetes
    Osteoporosis and Bone Health: Sound Suggestions for Stronger Bones
    Coronary Heart Diseasee: Nutritional Interventions for Prevention and Therapy
    Dietary Influence on Blood Pressure
    Diet, Physical Activity, and Cancer Prevention
    Nutritional Prevention of Irritable Bowel and Gastrointestinal Disorders
    Part IV: Nutritional Requirements Following Surgery and Acute Disease
    Dietary Considerations During Chemotherapy
    Role or Nutrition in Understanding Common Gastrointestinal Disorders
    Food Allergy and Intolerance: Diagnosis and Nutritional Management
    Nutrition in Patients with Diseases of the Liver and Pancreas
    Medical Nutrition Therapy for Kidney-Related Disorders
    Eating Disorders: Disorders of Under and Over Nutrition
    Nutritional Considerations for the Treatment of Depression
    Nutritional Considerations Following Bariatric Surgery
    Nutrition for Sarcopenia Prevention
    Drug Interactions with Food and Beverages
    Part V: Food and Nutrient Health Effects
    Coffee Consumption and its Impact on Health
    Health Effects of Tea Consumption
    Dietary Fat: the Good, the Bad, and the Ugly
    Dietary Sugar Intake: Is There a Best Recommendation
    Dietary Recommendations for Juices and Soft Drinks
    Sports Beverages for Optimizing Physical Performance
    Energy Drinks and Human Healthy
    What is the Best for the Patient: Abstinence or Moderate Alcohol Consumption?
    Dietary Fiber: All Fibers are not Alike
    Vitamins: The Essentials
    Mineral Nutrients: From Macro to Ultra Trace
    Nutritional Influence on the Gut Microbiome
    Part IV: Influencing Dietary Health Decisions
    Guidelines for Nutrition Screening, Assessment, and Referrals in the Clinical Setting
    Nutritional Status: An Overview of Methods for Assessment
    Food Synergy, Nutritional Science to Food Guides
    Dietary Supplements: Navigating a Minefield
    A Plague of False and Misleading Information
    Dietary Reference Intakes: Cutting Through the Confusion
    Food Labels and Sources of Nutrients: Sorting the Wheat from the Chaff
    Part VII: Conclusions
    What Needs to Change for Nutritional Health to Improve?
    Appendix A: Aids to Calculations.
    Digital Access Springer 2022
  • Digital
    David L, Katz MD, Kofi D. Essel MD, Rachel S.C. Friedman MD, Shivam Joshi.
    Summary: "Introduction Carbohydrate represents the predominant form of all plant matter and is thus a principal dietary source of energy for humans in nearly every culture. Food plants are composed principally of sugars, starches - the carbohydrate energy reserve in plants, cellulose, and other components. Generally, between 40% and 70% of calories are derived from carbohydrate among human populations, with higher amounts prevailing in less developed countries. In contrast, Artic peoples derive most of their food from animals and eat little carbohydrate"-- Provided by publisher.

    Contents:
    Section I: Clinically relevant nutrient metabolism
    Clinically relevant carbohydrate metabolism
    Clinically relevant fat metabolism
    Clinically relevant protein metabolism
    Overview of clinically relevant micronutrient metabolism
    Section II: Nutritional management in clinical practice: diet, in sickness and in health
    Diet, weight regulation, and obesity
    Diet, diabetes mellitus, and insulin resistance
    Diet, atherosclerosis, and ischemic heart disease
    Diet and hypertension
    Diet and hemostasis
    Diet and cerebrovascular and peripheral vascular disease
    Diet and immunity
    Diet and cancer
    Diet and hematopoiesis: nutritional anemias
    Diet, bone metabolism, and osteoporosis
    Diet and respiratory disease
    Diet and kidney disease
    Diet and hepatobiliary disease
    Diet and common gastrointestinal disorders
    Diet, dyspepsia, and peptic ulcer disease
    Diet and rheumatologic disease
    Diet and neurologic disorders
    Diet and dermatoses
    Diet and wound healing
    Food allergy and intolerance
    Eating disorders
    Malnutrition an dcachexia
    Section III: Special topics in clinical nutrition
    Diet, pregnancy, and lactation
    Diet and the menstrual cycle
    Diet and early development: pediatric nutrition
    Diet and adolescence
    Diet and senescence
    Ergogenic effects of foods and nutrients: diet and athletic performance and sports nutrition
    Endocrine effects of diet: phytoestrogens
    Diet, sleep-wake cycles, and mood
    Diet and cognitive function
    Diet and vision
    Diet and dentition
    Hunger, appetite, taste, and satiety
    Health effects of chocolate
    Health effects of ethanol
    Health effects of coffee
    Macronutrient food substitutes
    Plant-based diets
    Section IV: Diet and health promotion: establishing the theme of prudent nutrition
    Culture, evolutionary biology, and the determinants of dietary preference
    Dietary recommendations for health promotion and disease prevention
    Section V: Principles of effective dietary counseling
    Models of behavior modification for diet and activity patterns and weight management
    Dietary counseling in clinical practice
    Section VI: Contemporary topics in nutrition
    The calorie
    The prenicious wag of dietary dogma
    Should obesity be considered a "disease"?
    Nutrition: what we know, and how we know it
    The planet is your patient
    Section VII: Appendices and resource materials
    Nutrition formulas of clinical interest
    Growth and body weight assessment tables
    Dietary intake assessment in the US population
    Dietary intake assessment instruments
    Nutrient/nutriceutical reference tables: intake range and dietary sources
    Resources for nutrient composition of foods
    Diet-drug interactions
    Nutrient remedies for common conditions: patient resources
    Print and web-based resource materials for professionals
    Print and web-based resource materials for patients
    Patient-specific meal planners.
    Digital Access Ovid 2022
  • Digital
    David L. Katz, MD, MPH, FACPM, FACP, Director, Prevention Research Center, Yale University School of Public Health, Griffin Hospital, Clinical Instructor in Medicine, Yale University School of Medicine, Director, Integrative Medicine Center, Griffin Hospital, President, American College of Lifestyle Medicine, Derby, Connecticut ; with Rachel S.C. Friedman, MD, MHS, Department of Family Medicine, The Permanente Medical Group, Santa Rosa, California, Assistant Clinical Professor, Department of Community and Family Medicine, University of California, San Francisco, California, and Sean C. Lucan, MD, MPH, MS, Department of Family and Social Medicine, Albert Einstein College of Medicine, Montefiore Medical Center, Bronx, New York .
    Contents:
    Sect. I: Clinically relevant nutrient metabolism
    Clinically relevant carbohydrate metabolism
    Clinically relevant fat metabolism
    Clinically relevant protein metabolism
    Overview of clinically relevant micronutrient metabolism
    Sect. II: Nutritional management in clinical practice: diet, in sickness and in health
    Diet, weight regulation, and obesity
    Diet, diabetes mellitus, and insulin resistance
    Diet, atherosclerosis, and ischemic heart disease
    Diet and hypertension
    Diet and hemostasis
    Diet and cerebrovascular and peripheral vascular disease
    Diet and immunity
    Diet and cancer
    Diet and hematopoiesis: nutritional anesmias
    Diet, bone metabolism, and osteoporosis
    Diet and respiratory disease
    Diet and renal disease
    Diet and hepatobiliary disease
    Diet and common gastrointestional disorders
    Diet, dyspepsia, and peptic ulcer disease
    Diet and rheumatologic disease
    Diet and neurologic disorders
    Diet and dermatoses
    Diet and wound healing
    Food allergy and intolerance
    Eating disorders
    Malnutrition and cachexia
    Sect. III: Speical topics in clinical nutrition
    Diet, pregnancy, and lactation
    Diet and the menstrual cycle
    Diet and early development: pediatric nutrition
    Diet and adolescence
    Diet and senescence
    Ergogenic effects of foods and nutrients: diet and athletic performance & sports nutrition
    Endocrine effects of diet: phytoestrogens
    Diet, sleep-wake cycles, and mood
    Diet and cognitive function
    Diet and vision
    Diet and dentition
    Hunger, appetite, taste, and satiety
    Health effects of chocolate
    Health effects of ethanol
    Health effects of coffee
    Macronutrient food substitutes
    Vegetarianism, veganism, and macrobiotic diets
    Sect. IV: Diet and health promotion: establishing the theme of prudent nutrition
    Culture, evolutionary biology, and the determinants of dietary preference
    Dietary recommendations for health promotion and disease prevention
    Sect. V: Principles of effective dietary counseling
    Models of behavior modification for diet and activity patterns and weight management
    Dietary counseling in clinical practice
    Sect. VI: Controversies in contemporary clinical nutrition
    The calorie
    The search for scapegoats and silver bullets
    Obesity as disease. 505 0 $a Sect. VII: Appendices and resource materials
    Appendix A: Nutrition formulas of clinical interest
    Appendix B: Growth and body weight assessment tables
    Appendix C: Dietary intake assessment in the US population
    Appendix D: Dietary intake assessment instruments
    Appendix E: Nutrient/nutriceutical reference tables: intake range and dietary sources
    Appendix F: Resources for nutrient composition of foods
    Appendix G: Diet-drug interactions
    Appendix H: Nutrient remedies for common conditions: patient resources
    Appendix I: Print and web-based resource materials for professionals
    Appendix J: Print and web-based resource materials for patients
    Appendix K: Patient-specific meal planners
    Appendix L: Patient-specific supplement guidelines.
    Digital Access Ovid 2015
  • Digital
    Elizabeth H. Yen, Amanda Radmer Leonard, editors.
    Summary: This comprehensive text fulfills an unmet need for practitioners who treat patients with cystic fibrosis (CF) by providing data-driven advice concerning the implementation of nutritional interventions to CF patients from infancy to adulthood. Nutritional therapies have been key early interventions, and remain central to the well-being and survival of patients with cystic fibrosis. The nature of the disease causes significant alterations in a patient's ability to process and assimilate nutrients and contribute to higher metabolic demands throughout a patient's life. This volume provides an introduction to cystic fibrosis and nutritional assessments and serves as an extensive guide to the nutritional monitoring and management of patients with cystic fibrosis, including special populations within cystic fibrosis that require additional considerations. Unique chapters in this volume include nutrition assessments for adult and obese CF patients and four chapters on specific common co-morbidities for cystic fibrosis patients: pancreatic insufficiency, liver disease, gastrointestinal complications, and cystic fibrosis related diabetes mellitus. Written by experts in the field, Nutrition in Cystic Fibrosis is designed as a resource for physicians, nurses, dietitians and other medical providers who deliver care for patients with cystic fibrosis.

    Contents:
    What is Cystic Fibrosis? The relationship between nutrition and outcomes in cystic fibrosis
    Macronutrient Requirements
    Dietary fat and fat metabolism in CF
    Vitamin D and Bone Health
    Vitamins and Minerals
    Nutrition in Infancy
    Nutritional Assessment
    Age 2-20 years
    Nutrition Assessment: Adults and Obesity
    Nutrition Intervention
    Pancreatic Insufficiency
    Nutrition and Cystic Fibrosis Related Liver Disease
    Gastrointestinal Complications of Cystic Fibrosis and their impact on Nutrition
    Nutritional Management of Cystic Fibrosis Related Diabetes Mellitus
    Nutrition Pre and Post Lung Transplant
    Pregnancy, Nutrition and Cystic Fibrosis
    Nutrition for Pancreatic Sufficient Individuals with Cystic Fibrosis
    Behavioral Interventions and Anticipatory Guidance
    Nutrition and Quality Improvement in Cystic Fibrosis.
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Digital
    Laura D. Byham-Gray, Jerrilynn D. Burrowes, and Glenn M. Chertow, editors.
    Summary: Nutrition in Kidney Disease, Second Edition addresses the relationships between nutrition and (1) normal kidney function and disease, (2) the progressiveness of chronic kidney disease (CKD) and strategies to prevent further compromise, and (3) the treatment and management of kidney failure especially during medical crises, such as acute kidney injury and its consequent nutritional therapies (e.g., enteral and parenteral nutrition). Demographic patterns, trends and outcomes in the current health care systems are explored in the United States and abroad. Disease prevention and management are presented over the entire lifespan, beginning with pregnancy, followed by infancy, childhood, adolescence, and adulthood, concluding with the elder years. Foundations for clinical practice are established by devoting a complete section towards conducting a comprehensive nutritional assessment, comprising of anthropometric, biochemical, clinical, physical parameters and psychosocial concerns unique to the kidney disease population. Nutritional therapy is also discussed across the spectrum of kidney disease, and pertinent aspects critical to successful management of disorders and conditions, such as bone disease, obesity, and nephrotic syndrome are explored. Nutrition in Kidney Disease, Second edition highlights cutting edge research in regards to exercise and functional outcomes, malnutrition and the inflammatory response, experimental therapies, and the use of complementary and alternative medicine, with a special emphasis on relevant preventative strategies.

    Contents:
    Foundations for clinical practice and overview
    Kidney function in health and disease
    Historical perspective of nutrition in kidney disease
    Changing demographics of chronic kidney disease in the US and worldwide
    Nutritional assessment in chronic kidney disease
    Chronic kidney disease during stages 1-4 in adults
    Prevention
    Hypertension
    Diabetes mellitus
    Dyslipidemias
    Treatment
    Nutrition and pharmacologic approaches
    Chronic kidney disease (stage 5) in adults
    Treatment
    Dialysis
    Transplantation
    Management
    Protein-energy malnutrition
    Nutrition support
    Anemia management
    Bone and mineral metabolism and disease
    Chronic diseases: diabetes, cardiovascular disease, and human immunodeficiency virus infection
    Nutrition in chronic disease in special needs populations
    Over the lifespan
    Pregnancy
    Infancy, childhood and adolescence
    Aging adult
    Management
    Acute renal failure
    Nephrotic syndrome
    Kidney stones
    Additional nutritional considerations in kidney disease
    Dietary supplements
    Issues affecting dietary adherence
    Outcomes research
    Suggested resources for the practitioner.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    Jerrilynn D. Burrowes, Csaba P. Kovesdy, Laura D. Byham-Gray, editors.
    Summary: This third edition of this text is organized into seven sections that address the educational needs of dietitians and other health care professionals around the world who seek current information about nutritional management of chronic kidney disease (CKD). Part I addresses the differences in the epidemiology of CKD and renal replacement therapy worldwide, such as environmental, ethnic, cultural, political and macroeconomic factors. Part II includes a thorough review of the components of the nutrition assessment, which includes information about psychosocial issues affecting nutritional status in kidney disease and drug-nutrient interactions, and parts III and IV review preventative strategies for common disorders associated with CKD such as hypertension, type 2 diabetes, obesity and cardiovascular disease, and current evidence-based treatment recommendations for the nutrition management of non-dialyzed, dialyzed and transplanted adults are addressed. Part V presents the nutritional concerns of CKD populations with special needs (i.e., pregnancy, infancy, childhood, adolescence and the elderly). The nutrition management of other disorders associated with kidney disease are covered in Part VI; these include protein-energy wasting and the inflammatory response, bone and mineral disorders, nephrotic syndrome, nephrolithiasis, and acute kidney injury. Lastly, Part VII is devoted to cutting-edge research on topics of concern in nutrition in kidney disease such as the gut microbiome including pre- and probiotics, appetite regulation, advanced glycation end products, physical activity and structured exercise, and dietary patterns including plant-based diets. When appropriate, the new clinical practice guidelines in nutrition for individuals with CKD are integrated into the chapters. The third edition of Nutrition in Kidney Disease will be a highly informative resource for nephrologists, nutrition scientists, nutritionists, and researchers and students whose research, pract ice, and education includes nutrition and kidney disease.

    Contents:
    Part I: Foundations for Clinical Practice and Overview
    Epidemiology and Changing Demographics of Chronic Kidney Disease in the United States and Abroad
    History of Dietary Protein Treatment for Non-dialyzed Chronic Kidney Disease Patients
    Kidney Function in Health and Disease
    Part II Components of the Nutrition Assessment
    Anthropometric Assessment in Kidney Disease
    Biochemical Nutritional Assessment in Chronic Kidney Disease
    Nutrition-focused Physical Examination and Assessment in Chronic Kidney Disease
    Dietary Assessment in Kidney Disease
    Psychosocial Issues Affecting Nutrtional Status in Kidney Disease
    Drug-Nutrient Interactions
    Part III: Preventative Strategies for Chronic Kidney Disease Among Adults
    Hypertension
    Diabetes Mellitus and Chronic Kidney Disease
    Implications and Management of Obesity in Kidney Disease
    Nutritional Management of Cardiovascular Disease
    Part IV: Chronic Kidney Disease in Adults Treated by Renal Replacement Therapies
    CKD Stages 1-5 (Non-dialysis)
    Maintenance Hemodialysis
    Peritonal Dialysis
    Nutrition Support in Hemodialysis and Peritoneal Dialysis
    Kidney Transplantation
    Part V: Nutrition in Chronic Kidney Disease Among Special Needs Populations
    Pregnancy
    Infancy, Childhood, and Adolescence
    The Aging Adult and Chronic Kidney Disease
    Part VI: Nutritional Management of Other Disorders that Impact Kidney Function
    Protein-Energy Wasting/Malnutrition and the Inflammatory Response
    Bone and Mineral Disorders
    Nephrotic Syndrome
    Nephrolithiasis
    Acute Kidney Injury
    Part VII: Additional Nutritional Considerations in Kidney Disease
    The Gut Microbiome
    Appetite Regulation
    Advanced Glycation End Products
    Physical Activity and Exercise in Chronic Kidney Disease
    Dietary Patterns
    Herbal and Other Natural Dietary Supplements
    Vitamin and Trace Element Needs in Chronic Kidney Disease
    Factors Affecting Dietary Adherence and Strategies for Improvi ng Adherence in Chronic Kidney Disease
    Effective Communication and Counseling Approaches
    Comparative Effectiveness Research and Renal Nutrition
    Suggested Resources for the Practitioner.
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    James M. Rippe, editor.
    Summary: This newest addition to the Nutrition and Health series focuses on nutrition's key role in lifestyle interventions to prevent and manage diseases. The book pays particular attention to nutritional considerations related to obesity, diabetes, and cardiovascular disease. Edited by cardiologist, Dr. James Rippe, a well-known expert in the nascent specialty of Lifestyle Medicine, Nutrition in Lifestyle Medicine will also focus on a variety of specialized areas such as nutrition for athletes and physically active individuals, hydration, and nutrition throughout the life cycle (spanning from children to individuals over the age of 60). In addition, chapters will be included on controversies in nutrition, such as health effects of added sugars and saturated fatty acids in the diet. Finally, specialized chapters will be included in such areas as nutrition for women, nutrition for men, nutrition for latinos, the use of supplements, communication about nutrition, public policy issues, and the interface between nutrition and physical activity. Lifestyle Medicine, supported by the American Journal of Lifestyle Medicine, Dr. Rippe's textbook Lifestyle Medicine (CRC Press, 2013) and American College of Lifestyle Medicine (ACLM), is a new national medicine specialty that stresses the use of lifestyle interventions in the treatment and management of disease. Its practitioners effectively manage medical treatments alongside the lifestyle interventions, for example lowering insulin treatment for patients with diabetes, reducing the dose of anti-hypertension medications for people with hypertension, and prescribing certain medical interventions that aid in smoking cessation.

    Contents:
    Part I. Nutrition in Lifestyle Medicine: General Considerations
    1. Nutrition in Lifestyle Medicine: Overview
    2. Nutrition 101: The Concept of Nutritional Status, Standards, and Guides for Nutrient Intakes, Eating Patterns and Nutrition
    3. Behavior Change and Nutrition
    4. Effective Strategies to Help Adults Manage How Much They Eat
    5. Critical Evaluation of Nutrition Research
    6. Nutritional Genomics: The Wave of the Future for Nutrition and Dietetics
    Part II. Nutrition in Prevention and Treatment of Metabolic Diseases
    7. The Role of Nutrition and Lifestyle in the Prevention and Treatment of Cardiovascular Disease
    8. Nutrition Therapy for the Prevention and Treatment of Prediabetes and Diabetes
    9. Nutrition in Weight Management and Obesity
    10. Nutrition in Oral Health
    Part III. Nutrition in Childhood
    11. Childhood Obesity
    12. Nutritional Interventions to Lower Cholesterol and Risk for Heart Disease in Children
    13. School Meals: Are they Nutritionally Sound?
    Part IV. Nutrition in Athletes and Physically Active Adults
    14. Nutritional Considerations for the Active Adolescent
    15. Effects of an Active Lifestyle on Water Balance
    Part V. Nutrition in Specialized Populations and Conditions
    16. Nutrition for a Health Pregnancy
    17. Promoting Nutrition in Men's Health
    18. Nutritional Considerations for Hispanics
    19. Optimal Nutrition for the Older Adults
    Part VI. Controversies in Nutrition and Lifestyle Medicine
    20. Added Sugars and Health: What do we Really Know?
    21. Saturated Fatty Acids: Friend or Foe?
    Part VII. Nutrition and Public Policy Issues
    22. Public Policy and Environmental Supports for Healthy Eating
    23. Food Safety.
    Digital Access Springer 2017
  • Digital
    Ethem Murat Arsava, editor.
    Summary: "In addition to providing basic knowledge on important nutritional concepts (body metabolism, assessment and diagnosis of malnutrition, epidemiology, enteral/parenteral nutrition), in this book detailed information is presented on nutritional support for various neurologic disorders handled in a variety of settings, including the neurointensive care unit. Much consideration is also given to the diagnosis and management of dysphagia. Finally, the newly developing concept of neuronutrition (or brain foods) he use of certain nutrients for treatment of neurologic disorders is discussed." -- Publisher.
    Digital Access Springer 2017
  • Digital
    Robert Dumont, Youngran Chung, editors.
    Summary: Nutrition in Pediatric Pulmonary Disease is a much needed resource for practitioners that provides a basic understanding of nutrition and nutritional supplements; their impact on physiologic function and how this can be applied for general health maintenance as well as a supplemental treatment for pulmonary diseases. This book provides information on (1) basics of nutrition, supplements and herbs and how they influence physiology (2) their application and potential use for various pulmonary diseases along with evidence regarding efficacy and safety. Also examined are (3) how diet, dietary supplements and herbs are integrated together for treatment and prevention of pulmonary disease. Finally (4) several health promoting diets and their potential benefits to patients with pulmonary diseases will be discussed. Nutrition in Pediatric Pulmonary Disease is an excellent new resource for practicing physicians who are interested in incorporating more nutritional approaches to treating their patients.

    Contents:
    Basic Pediatric Nutrition; Foundation of a Healthy Diet
    Diets
    Nutritional Supplements and Herbs
    Nutrition in Neonatal Pulmonary Disease
    Nutrition in Cystic Fibrosis
    Nutrition and Neuromuscular Disease
    Asthma and Nutrition
    Obesity, Sleep, and Pulmonary Disease in Children.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    Laurie E. Bernstein, Fran Rohr, Sandy van Calcar, editors.
    Summary: This text presents a compilation of topics that have been taught at Metabolic University (MU), an interactive, didactic educational program that has trained over 600 metabolic dietitians/nutritionists, physicians, nurses and genetic counselors. This book was created in 2014 for the metabolic community. The 1st edition contains only subject matter covered at Metabolic University; therefore, it is not a comprehensive treatise on Inherited Metabolic Disorders (IMD) but rather a text on the most frequently encountered challenges in IMD nutrition. Each chapter in the book highlights principles of nutrition management, how to initiate a diet, and biomarkers to monitor the diet. Recognizing that there are variations in practice, this book addresses that the key to management lies in the understanding how the inactivity of an enzyme in a metabolic pathway determines which components of the diet must be restricted and which must be supplemented as well as the monitoring of appropriate biomarkers to make diet adjustments and ensure the goals of therapy are met The 2nd edition is an updated and more extensive version covering the nutrition management of IMD, and covers a wide range of these disorders, including phenylketonuria and other aminoacidopathies, organic acidemias, urea cycle disorders, fatty acid oxidation disorders, galactosemia and glycogen storage diseases. Guidance is also provided on laboratory evaluations and biochemical testing and monitoring. Topics such as newborn screening for IMD, as well as nutrition management during pregnancy and transplantation, are also addressed. In addition, current medical management therapies is included.
    Digital Access Springer 2022
  • Digital
    David S. Seres, Charles W. Van Way, III, editors.
    Contents:
    1. An Introduction to Malnutrition in the Intensive Care Unit
    2. The Immunological Role of Nutrition in the Gut
    3. Assessment of the Patient
    4. Timing and Indications for Enteral Nutrition in the Critically Ill
    5. Access and Complications of Enteral Nutrition Support for Critically Ill Patients
    6. Timing and Indication for Parenteral Nutrition in the Critically Ill
    7. Access and Complications of Parenteral Nutrition
    8. Surgical Intensive Care Considerations
    9. Major Infections and Sepsis
    10. Organ Failure and Specialized Enteral Formulas
    11. Management of the Obese Patient
    12. Ethical Considerations in Nutrition Support in Critical Care
    13. Safe Practices for Enteral and Parenteral Nutrition
    14. The Economic Impact of Nutrition Support, and the Multidisciplinary Approach
    15. Microbiome in the Critically Ill
    16. Future Research
    Index.
    Digital Access Springer 2016
  • Digital
    Patrick Lowry, Kristina L. Penniston, editors.
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Digital
    Haewook Han, Walter P. Mutter, Samer Nasser, editors.
    Summary: This text comprehensively covers the nutritional and medical management and prevention of kidney stones. Sections address types of stones, nutritional risks, medical and pharmaceutical managements, prevention of recurrence, and special consideration of stone risks among specific diseases such as obesity with gastric bypass, chronic kidney disease, and gastric intestinal disorders. Diagnosis of kidney stones, urinalysis and biochemical indices, dietary assessment, and medical nutrition therapy for specific types of kidney stones are also included. In addition, case studies are provided in the appendix. Cutting edge research is also highlighted in regards to pharmaceutical treatments and epidemiological findings in nutrition and kidney stones. Nutrition in Medical Management of Kidney Stones will be a practical resource for health professionals in the fields of nutrition, nephrology, urology, and general medicine, as well as medical students, resident physicians, and allied health clinicians whose research, practice, and education includes nutrition and kidney stones.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    edited by Debasis Bagchi, Sreejayan Nair.
    Summary: Nutritional and Therapeutic Interventions for Diabetes and Metabolic Syndrome, Second Edition, provides an overview of the current diabetes epidemic, outlines the consequences of this crisis, and lays out strategies to forestall and prevent diabetes, obesity and other intricate issues of metabolic syndrome. Contributing experts provide up-to-date global approaches to the critical consequences of metabolic syndrome and make the book an important reference for those working with the treatment, evaluation or public health planning for the effects of metabolic syndrome and diabetes. Completely revised with 15 new chapters, the book includes coverage of the roles of gut microbiome in obesity and diabetes, macrovascular and microvascular complications, diabetes, metabolic syndrome and kidney disease, aspects of diabetic cardiomyopathy, diabetes, Alzheimer's and neurodegenerative diseases, roles of SGLT2 inhibitors in the treatment of type 2 diabetes, novel biomarkers in diabetes, roles of Trigonella foenum-graecumseed extract in type 2 diabetes, beneficial effects of chromium (III) and vanadium supplements in diabetes, prevention of type 1 diabetes, novel drugs in the therapeutic intervention of type 2 diabetes, eHealth and mobile apps for self-management, artificial pancreatic transplantation, non-invasive glucose monitoring, and the app for glucose regulation.
    Digital Access ScienceDirect 2018
  • Digital
    Crystal Karakochuk, Michael B. Zimmermann, Diego Moretti, Klaus Kraemer, editors.
    Summary: Understanding the causes of anemia is critical to inform appropriate strategies to prevent and treat anemia, particularly to reduce the risk of anemia and the burden of disease. The strength of this book lies in its cross-disciplinary nature. This publication summarizes the current state of evidence on the multifactorial causes of anemia, with a specific focus on nutritional anemia. The chapter authors are leading experts in nutrition and global health. The introductory chapters provide an overview of the global burden of anemia prevalence, the economic implications and functional consequences of anemia, and the significance of these factors to guide policy and programs. Subsequent chapters provide current evidence on iron and other micronutrient metabolism and homeostasis in regards to anemia, the multifactorial contributors to anemia (e.g. infection and genetics), and the interactions between nutrients that may contribute to anemia. The summarizing chapters detail program and policy approaches to treat, prevent and reduce anemia in the global context. Nutritional Anemia is a comprehensive resource for those involved in global health and nutrition policy, strategy, programming, or research, and serves as a guide for how government, NGO, and international agencies can effectively treat, prevent and reduce anemia globally.

    Contents:
    Worldwide Prevalence and Progress in Anemia Reduction
    The Economics of Addressing Nutritional Anemia
    Iron Biology: Metabolism and Homeostasis
    Laboratory Methods for Measurement of Anemia and Iron Status
    Interpretation of Biomarkers and Diagnosis of Nutritional Status
    Anemia and Iron Deficiency in Disease
    Nutritional Anemia in Special Population Groups (children, elderly, pregnancy/lactation, vegetarians)
    Sources of Iron Intake: Diet, Supplemental, Environmental
    Bioavailability: Inhibitors and Enhancers of Iron Absorption
    Food Fortification with Iron: Policy and Considerations
    Genetic Hemoglobinopathies and their Contribution to Anemia
    Role of B-vitamins in Nutritional Anemia
    Oxidative Stress and Vitamin E in Anemia
    Vitamin D and Hepcidin in Nutritional Anemia
    Infection and Inflammation in the Etiology and Assessment of Iron Deficiency of Anemia
    Iron Infection and the Immune System
    Anemia in Sever Undernutrition (malnutrition)
    Interactions between Iron and other Minerals in the Etiology of Anemia
    Iron and the Gut Microbiota
    An Overview of the Functional Significance of Iron Deficiency (Cognitive, Behavioral)
    Designing Effective Programs for Anemia Prevention, Treatment, and Reduction
    Market-based Approaches for Anemia Prevention, Treatment, and Reduction
    Safety of Interventions to Reduce Nutritional Anemia
    Novel Approaches to Iron Supplementation
    Food-based Approaches to Combating Iron Deficiency
    Conclusions and Research Agenda.
    Digital Access Springer 2022
  • Digital
    edited by Robert T. Means Jr.
    Summary: This major new comprehensive guide focuses on particular topics in the field of nutritional anemias, with in-depth coverage on each relevant nutrient whose deficiency can cause anemia, their metabolism, dietary requirements and related information. This book presents the unique hematological, and non-hematological, manifestations of each deficiency, the varied settings and causes of deficiency, interactions with other problems, diagnostic approaches and tools, synthesizing the perspectives of epidemiology, public health, and clinical hematology. Covering approaches to medical management in individuals, as well as in susceptible populations such as children, pregnant women and the elderly; and preventive strategies, such as supplementation and fortification, this exceptional text will appeal to a wide audience, from the clinician learning about the epidemiology and public health aspects of food fortification, to the public health practitioner who needs to understand clinical approaches to key nutritional anemia issues.

    Contents:
    General hematology of anemia / Robert Means
    Impact of anemia : overview / Robert Means
    Fortification of food : principles and practice / Richard Hurrell and Ines Egli
    Nutritional anemia and its non-nutritional influences in the developing world / Julia Shaw, Jennifer Gutierrez, and Jennifer Freidman
    Laboratory assessment of iron status / Carlo Brugnara
    Iron deficiency without anemia / Gordon McLaren and Barry Skikkne
    Treatment of iron deficiency in adults / Robert Means
    Dietary iron deficiency anemia in children / Clara Lo and Michael Jeng
    Physiology of copper balance and metabolism / Robert Means
    Clinical syndromes of copper deficiency / Darryl Williams
    Vitamin D / Ellen M. Smith and Vin Tangpricha
    Nutritional anemia during pregnancy / Robert Means
    Vegetarianism and other restricted diets / Asok C. Antony
    Nutritional syndromes with anemia : alcohol / Sylvia Bottomley
    Anemia following bariatric surgery / Benjamin Person and Raul Rosenthal.
    Digital Access Cambridge 2019
  • Digital
    volume editors, Berthold Koletzko, Brenda Poindexter, Ricardo Uauy.
    Contents:
    Historical perspective / R.C. Tsang
    Defining the nutritional needs of preterm infants / R. Uauy, B. Koletzko
    Nutrition, growth and clinical outcomes / R.A. Ehrenkranz
    Assessing the evidence from neonatal nutrition research / H. Szajewska, B. Koletzko, F.B. Mimouni, R. Uauy
    Amino acids and proteins / J.B. van Goudoever, H. Vlaardingerbroek, C.H. van den Akker, F. de Groof, S.R.D. van der Schoor
    Energy requirements, protein-energy metabolism and balance, and carbohydrates in preterm infants / W.W. Hay Jr., L.D. Brown, S.C. Denne
    Enteral and parenteral lipid requirements of preterm infants / A. Lapillonne
    Water, sodium, potassium and chloride / C. Fusch, F. Jochum
    Nutritional care of premature infants : microminerals / M. Domellöf
    Calcium, phosphorus, magnesium and vitamin d requirements of the preterm infant / F.B. Mimouni, D. Mandel, R. Lubetzky, T. Senterre
    Vitamins : conventional uses and new insights / A. Leaf, Z. Lansdowne
    The developing intestinal microbiome : probiotics and prebiotics / J. Neu
    Practice of parenteral nutrition in VLBW and ELBW infants / N.D. Embleton, K. Simmer
    Preterm nutrition and the brain / S.E. Ramel, M.K. Georgieff
    Practice of enteral nutrition in very low birth weight and extremely low birth weight infants / T. Senterre
    Human milk and human milk fortifiers / E.E. Ziegler
    Approaches to growth faltering / B. Poindexter
    Preterm nutrition and the lung / F. Moya
    Necrotizing enterocolitis / J. Neu
    Feeding the preterm infant after discharge / A. Lapillonne
    Meeting the challenge of providing neonatal nutritional care to very or extremely low birth weight infants in low-resource settings / T. Murguia-Peniche, G.F. Kirsten
    Recommended nutrient intake levels for stable, fully enterally fed very low birth weight infants / B. Koletzko, B. Poindexter, R. Uauy.
    Digital Access Karger 2014
  • Digital
    volume editors, Berthold Koletzko [and 5 others].
    Summary: "Improvements in perinatal and neonatal care have markedly increased the survival of pre-mature infants during the last two decades. Accordingly, medical care for preterm infants has shifted from a focus on survival to quality of outcome, with considerable evidence showing the nutritional care for preterm infants related to long-term health and quality of life. This book presents guidance for the practical application of nutritional care for these infants, based on a critical evaluation of current clinical and scientific evidence, with a goal of facilitating the daily practice of clinicians and helping to raise the standards of nutritional care for preterm infants around the world"-- Provided by publisher.
    Digital Access Karger 2021
  • Digital
    Connie M. Weaver, Robin M. Daly, Heike A. Bischoff-Ferrari, editors.
    Digital Access Springer 2016
  • Digital
    Mostafa I. Waly, editor.
    Contents:
    Intro
    Preface
    Contents
    Contributors
    About the Editor
    Chapter 1: Signaling Pathways of Hyperhomocystenemia and Oxidative Stress
    1 Introduction
    2 Cofactors for Re-Methylation and Trans-Sulfuration Pathways
    2.1 Folate
    2.2 Vitamin B12
    2.3 Vitamin B6
    3 Hyperhomocysteinemia and Oxidative Stress
    4 Conclusion
    References
    Chapter 2: Hyperhomocysteinemia and Cancer: The Role of Natural Products and Nutritional Interventions
    1 Introduction
    2 Biosynthesis of Homocysteine
    3 Metabolism of Homocysteine
    3.1 Remethylation
    3.2 Transsulfuration 4 Hyperhomocysteinemia Induction
    4.1 Genetic Enzymatic Defects
    4.2 Absence/Inadequate Amounts of Certain Cofactors
    4.3 Excessive Methionine Consumption
    5 Diseases Associated with Hyperhomocysteinemia
    5.1 Chronic Renal Failure
    5.2 Hypothyroidism
    5.3 Anemia
    5.4 Malignant Tumors
    5.5 Medications
    6 Hyperhomocysteinemia and Cancer
    7 Hyperhomocysteinemia Management Using Natural Products and Diet
    8 Conclusion
    References
    Chapter 3: Anti-inflammatory Role of Anthocyanins in the Prevention of Hyperhomocysteinemia-Mediated Cardiometabolic Diseases
    1 Introduction 2 Inflammation
    3 Inflammation and Hyperhomocysteinemia
    4 Cardiometabolic Diseases and Plant Polyphenols
    5 Homocysteine and Anthocyanins
    6 Anthocyanins: The Treasure of Health
    6.1 Chemical Structure and Chemistry of Anthocyanins
    6.2 Anthocyanin and Inflammation
    7 Conclusion
    References
    Chapter 4: Metabolic Role of Hyperhomocysteinemia in the Etiology of Chronic Diseases
    1 Introduction
    2 Homocysteine Metabolism
    3 Hyperhomocysteinemia and Neurological Disorders
    3.1 Stroke
    3.2 Mild Cognitive Impairment (MCI), and Dementia
    3.3 Parkinson's Disease (PD) 3.4 Epilepsy
    4 Hyperhomocysteinemia and Cardiovascular Diseases
    5 Hyperhomocysteinemia and Cancer
    6 Conclusion
    References
    Chapter 5: B-Vitamins Attenuates Preliminary Steps of Hyperhomocysteinemia and Colorectal Cancer
    1 Introduction
    2 Dietary and Non-dietary Risk Factors for Colorectal Cancer
    3 B-Vitamins, Glutathione and Colorectal Cancer
    4 Hyperhomocysteinemia and Colorectal Cancer
    5 Conclusion
    References
    Chapter 6: Hyperhomocysteinemia, B-Vitamins, and Coronary Artery Disease Risk
    1 Introduction 2 Sulfur Metabolism and Pathogenesis of Coronary Artery Disease
    3 Hyperhomocysteinemia and Coronary Artery Disease
    4 B-Vitamins Therapy and CAD
    5 Conclusion
    References
    Chapter 7: Potential Role of Hyperhomocysteinemia in Prediabetes Etiology and Pathology
    1 Introduction
    2 B-vitamins, Oxidative Stress and Prediabetes Risk
    3 Hyperhomocysteinemia and the Pathogenesis of Prediabetes and Type 2 Diabetes
    4 Current Research
    5 Conclusion
    References
    Chapter 8: Genetic Risk Factors in the Development of Hyperhomocysteinemia
    1 Introduction 2 Dietary Factors Contributed to Hyperhomocysteinemia.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    edited by Bryan Waldridge.
    Contents:
    Miniature horse and ponies / DG Pugh, Nicole Passler, and Sara Ziska
    Draft horses, mules, and donkeys / DG Pugh, Sara Ziska, and Nicole Passler
    Gastrointestinal system / Amelia Munsterman
    Muscular system / Stephanie J. Valberg
    Endocrine system / Iveta Becvarova
    Respiratory system / Bryan M. Waldridge
    Neurologic system / Peter Huntington
    Mycotoxins / Ramesh C. Gupta
    Poisonous plants / Anthony P. Knight.
    Digital Access Wiley 2017
  • Digital
    Ashwin N. Ananthakrishnan, editor.
    Summary: This book is a state-of-the art review for clinicians and dieticians with an interest in nutrition and inflammatory bowel diseases (Crohn's disease, ulcerative colitis). The volume covers new data about dietary risk factors for Crohn's disease and ulcerative colitis, examines the association between diet and microbiome, describes the various diets in the management of these diseases, and discusses macro- and micronutrient deficiency that occurs in such patients. The book also examines the management of patients on total parenteral nutrition, and management of the short gut syndrome with TPN and novel pharmacologic therapies. Written by experts in their fields, Nutritional Management of Inflammatory Bowel Diseases: A Comprehensive Guide is a valuable and uniquely specialized resource for gastroenterologists, nutritionists, primary care physicians, and other health care providers and researchers dealing with the management of these complex illnesses. .

    Contents:
    Diet and Microbiome in Inflammatory Bowel Diseases
    Dietary Risk Factors for the Onset and Relapse of Inflammatory Bowel Disease
    Vitamin D and Inflammatory Bowel Diseases
    Diagnosis and Management of Iron Deficiency in Inflammatory Bowel Disease
    Other Micronutrient Deficiencies in Inflammatory Bowel Disease: From A to Zinc
    Enteral Nutrition in the Treatment of Inflammatory Bowel Disease
    Elimination Diets for Inflammatory Bowel Disease
    Prebiotics and Probiotics in Inflammatory Bowel Disease
    Total Parenteral Nutrition and Inflammatory Bowel Disease: Indications, Long term Outcomes and Complications
    Short Bowel Syndrome: Physiologic Considerations and Nutritional Management
    Short Bowel Syndrome: Pharmacotherapy
    Small Bowel Transplantation. .
    Digital Access Springer 2016
  • Digital
    edited by Ronald Ross Watson, Sherma Zibadi.
    Contents:
    Overview of pain in livestock / G.S. Sengar, R. Deb, S. Chakraborty, K. Mondal, B. Venkatasan, U. Singh
    Nutritional modulators in chemotherapy-induced neuropathic pain / T. Alexa-Stratulat, Luca M. Bădescu, C.-R. Bohotin, I.D. Alexa
    Migraine / N.N. Bray, H. Katz
    Myelinodegeneration and its influence on pain / J. Chen, S.-M. Guan
    Getting to the root of chronic inflammation / P. Inserra, A. Brooks
    Illgeal adulterations of (traditional) herbal medicines and dietary supplements for the treatment of pain / E. Deconinck
    Diabetic neuropathy modulation by zinc and/or polyphenal administration / L. Bădescu, M. Ciocoiu, C. Bădescu, M. Bădescu
    Natural remedies for treatment of cancer pain / M.S. Garud, M.J. Oza, A.B. Gaikwad, Y.A. Kulkarni
    Capiscum / Y.A. Kulkarni, S.V. Suryavanshi, S.T. Auti, A.B. Gaikwad
    Honey-a natural remedy for pain relief / N.M. Lazim, A. Baharudin
    Probiotics and synbiotics for management of infantile colic / H. Ahanchian, A. Javid
    The interrelationship of obesity, pain, and diet/nutrition / H.M. Rodgers
    Effects of obesity on function and quality of life in chronic pain / L.I. Arranz
    Postoprative analgesia in morbid obesity / M.M. Aman, A. Mahmoud, A.C. Sinha
    Vitamin D deficiency in joint pain / B. Antony, C. Ding
    Nutritional modulators of pain in the aging population / J. Smithson, K.A. Kellick, K. Mergenhagen
    Trace elements alleviate pain in mice and humans / B.I. Tamba, T. Alexa-Stratulat
    Vitamin B₁₂ for relieving in aphthous ulcers / H.-L. Liu
    Vitamin A, Osteoarthritis, and joint pain / M.K. Shea, S.L. Booth
    Conservative and postoperative coanalgesic therapy for upper limb tendinopathy using dietary supplements / Giovanni Merolla, S. Cerciello
    Folic acid in pain / N. Sharma, A.B. Gaikwad, Y.A. Kulkarni
    Analgesic and neuroprotective effects of B vitamins / X.-J. Song
    Pain relief in chronic pancreatitis - role of nutritional antioxidants / P. Bhardwaj, R.K. Yadav, P.K. Barg
    Vitamin D and disc herniation associated pain / M. Sedighi
    Review of fortified foods and natural medicinal products in companion animals afflicted by naturally occuring osteoarthritis / M. Moreau, E. Troncy.
    Digital Access ScienceDirect 2017
  • Digital
    Pawan Kumar Jaiwal, Anil K. Chhillar, Darshna Chaudhary, Ranjana Jaiwal, editors.
    Summary: This book presents a detailed overview and critical evaluation of recent advances and remaining challenges in improving nutritional quality and/or avoiding the accumulation of undesirable substances in plants using a variety of strategies based on modern biological tools and techniques. Each review chapter provides an authoritative and insightful account of the various aspects of nutritional enhancement of plants. In the course of the last two decades, several food crops rich in macro- and micronutrients have been developed to improve health and protect a large section of the populace in developing countries from chronic diseases. Providing extensive information on these developments, this book offers a valuable resource for all researchers, students and industrialists working in agriculture, the plant sciences, agronomy, horticulture, biotechnology, food and nutrition, and the soil and environmental sciences.

    Contents:
    Biofortification of staple cereals with amino acid, lysin
    Biofortification of cereals with iron and zinc
    Calcium biofortification in food crops
    Iodine biofortification of crops
    Iodine biofortification of crops
    Pro-vitamin A crops
    Folate: biosynthesis, functions and biofortification in crop plant
    The role of thiamin in plants and current perspectives in its improvement in crop plants
    Vitamins B6, B12, C and E rich crops
    Strategies that influence the production of secondary metabolites in plants
    Phytate free food-grains
    Development of aflatoxin free crops
    Reducing acrylamide forming potential of crop plants
    Brassica crops with low glucosinolates and rich in anticancer compounds
    Biofortification of cassava
    Biofortification of millets
    Biofortification of maize
    Common Bean biofortification
    Engineering potato for nutritional enhancement
    All roads leading to iron fortification.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    Mike Greenwood, Matthew B. Cooke, Tim Ziegenfuss, Douglas S. Kalman, Jose Antonio, editors.
    Contents:
    Part I. The Industrial Nature Of The Supplement Game
    1. Effect of Government Regulation on the Evolution of Sports Nutrition
    2. The Psychology Of Supplementation In Sport and Exercise: Motivational Antecedents and Behavioral Outcomes
    Part II. Nutritional Basics First
    3. The Role of Nutritional Supplements Complementing Nutrient Dense Diets: General Versus Sport/Exercise Specific Dietary Guidelines Related To Energy Expenditure
    4. Macronutrient Intake for Physical Activity
    5. Essential and Nonessential Micronutrients and Sport
    6. Fluid Balance and Hydration for Human Performance
    Part III. Specialized Nutritional Strategies & Supplements
    7. Building Muscle Mass: Physiology, Nutrition and Supplementation
    8. Weight Loss Nutritional Supplements
    9. Effective Nutritional Supplement Combinations
    10. Nutritional Supplements For Strength and Power Athletes
    11. Nutritional Supplements For Endurance Athletes
    12. Nutritional Supplements To Enhance Recovery
    13. Nutritional Timing
    14. Carbohydrate Utilization and Disposal in Strength/ Power Training & Sports: Examining the Under examined
    15. Exercise For The Athlete With Diabetes
    Part IV. Present And Future Directions Of Nutritional Supplements
    16. Beyond The Obvious: Future Innovations In Sports Nutrition.
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Digital
    Donato Francesco Altomare, Maria Teresa Rotelli, editors.
    Summary: This volume provides readers with the necessary information to select the most appropriate nutritional support following gastrointestinal tract surgery. Most patients are worried about resuming oral intake, particularly when the surgery has altered the GI tract normal physiology removing organs (e.g. total colectomy) or part of them, or modifying the natural sequence of the different GI tract parts (e.g. after esophagectomy or pancreatectomy). Patients may also worry about the possible complications of an inappropriate alimentation. As a matter of fact, several metabolic processes can be modified by GI tract surgery (e.g. major liver resection or pancreatectomy), thus making the nutritional support essential: and the same support is fundamental in bariatric surgery, nowadays widely used for super-obese patients. There is therefore a need for a nutritional guide in surgery and in troubleshooting postoperative cases where nutrition is a major issue This book offers nutritionists insights into the possible alterations of GI tract physiology occurring after surgery, and will be a valuable resource for surgeons, gastroenterologists, coloproctologists, nutritionists and clinical specialist nurses, seeking guidance on postoperative nutrition.

    Contents:
    1 Regulation of food intake after surgery and the gut brain axis
    2 Nutritional support after surgery of the esophagous
    3 Nutritional support after surgery of the stomach
    4 Nutritional support after cholecystectomy
    5 Nutritional support after surgery of the pancreas
    6 Nutritional support after surgery of the small bowel
    7 Nutritional support in patients with intestinal stomas
    8 Nutritional support after surgery of the liver
    9 Nutritional support after bariatric surgery
    10 Nutritional support after surgery of the colon
    11 Nutritional support after surgery for proctologic diseases.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
all 911 "N" titles

Lane Library Bookmarklet

Lane Library Bookmarklet

To install, drag this button to your browser bookmarks or tools bar.

What is it?

Lane Library Bookmarklet

Bookmark on Other Websites

Bookmark on Lane

  • To Install, Right Click this Button.
  • Select "Add to Favorites" (click “Continue” if you see a security alert)
  • From the "Create in" menu, select “Favorites Bar” (IE8, IE9) to install
  • Once installed it will look like this
  • Click "Bookmark on Lane" to bookmark any webpage
  • Your saved bookmark will appear on this page
To Install, Right Click this Button.

What is it?

Beyond Stanford

Derived from Current Medical Diagnosis & Treatment, AccessMedicine's Quick Medical Diagnosis & Treatment provides topic reviews with key diagnostic and treatment features for more than 500 diseases.

A repository of medical knowledge from internal medicine, cardiology, genetics, pharmacy, diagnosis and management, basic sciences, patient care, and more.

Continuously expanding, all databases in the repository contain the latest editions of selected medical titles.

MicroMedex: Premier pharmaceutical information source containing multiple databases and drug reference tools. Of particular value is DRUGDEX Evaluations, one of the most comprehensive drug sources available. DynaMed is a clinical information resource used to answer questions quickly at the point-of-care. Easy-to-interpret Levels of Evidence help clinicians rapidly determine the quality of the available evidence.

Biomedical and pharmacological abstracting and indexing database of published literature, by Elsevier. Embase® contains over 32 million records from over 8,500 currently published journals (1947-present) and is noteworthy for its extensive coverage of the international pharmaceutical and alternative/complementary medicine literature.

Scopus is the largest abstract and citation database of peer-reviewed literature: scientific journals, books and conference proceedings. A drug information resource containing: American Hospital Formulary System (AHFS), drug formulary for Lucile Packard Children's Hospital (LPCH) and Stanford Hospital & Clinics (SHC), Lexi-Drugs (adverse reactions, dosage and administration, mechanism of action, storage, use, and administration information), Lexi-Calc, Lexi-ID, Lexi-I.V. Compatibility (King Guide), Lexi-Interact, and Lexi-PALS. Cumulative Index to Nursing and Allied Health Literature (CINAHL) contains coverage of nursing and allied health literature. A knowledge database that provides access to topic reviews based on over 6000 clinically relevant articles. The evidence-based content, updated regularly, provides the latest practice guidelines in 59 medical specialties. Provides critical assessments of systematic reviews compiled from a variety of medical journals. Selects from the biomedical literature original studies and systematic reviews that are immediately clinically relevant and then summarizes these articles in an enhanced abstract with expert commentary.

Multidisciplinary coverage of over 10,000 high-impact journals in the sciences, social sciences, and arts and humanities, as well as international proceedings coverage for over 120,000 conferences.

Includes cited reference searching, citation maps, and an analyze tool.

Features systematic reviews that summarize the effects of interventions and makes a determination whether the intervention is efficacious or not.

Cochrane reviews are created through a strict process of compiling and analyzing data from multiple randomized control trials to ensure comprehensiveness and reliability.

Provides systematic coverage of the psychological literature from the 1800s to the present through articles, book chapters and dissertations. PIER (Physicians' Information and Education Resource) is a Web-based decision-support tool designed for rapid point-of-care delivery of up-to-date, evidence-based guidance for primary care physicians. Cochrane Central Register of Controlled Trials (CENTRAL) provides access to 300,000 controlled trials that have been identified the Cochrane Collaboration. Provides drug information targeted for patients. A continually updating drug monograph. ECRI Guidelines Trust: A comprehensive database of evidence-based clinical practice guidelines and related documents. MedlinePlus: A repository of health information from the National Library of Medicine. Links are from trusted sites. No advertising, no endorsement of commercial companies or products LPCH CareNotes via MicroMedex: Patient education handouts customized by LPCH clinical staff Micromedex Lab Advisor: Evidence based laboratory test information Provides patient handouts from the American Academy of Family Physician.

Largest, broadest eBook package; covers all sciences, as well as technology (including software), medicine, and humanities.

In addition to covering Wiley and Springer, MyiLibrary is also the only provider for Oxford and Cambridge University Press titles. No seat restrictions.

A collection of biomedical books that can be searched directly by concept, and linked to terms in PubMed abstracts.

A web-based, decision support system for infectious diseases, epidemiology, microbiology and antimicrobial chemotherapy. The database, updated weekly, currently includes 337 diseases, 224 countries, 1,147 microbial taxa and 306 antibacterial (-fungal, -parasitic, -viral) agents and vaccines.

Over 10,000 notes outline the status of specific infections within each country.

Large number of high quality software and database programming titles from O'Reilly. Other software titles are also available from Sams and Prentice Hall. Limited to 7 concurrent users. Includes peer-reviewed life science and biomedical research protocols compiled from Methods in Molecular Biology, Methods in Molecular Medicine, Methods in Biotechnology, Methods in Pharmacology and Toxicology, Neuromethods, the Biomethods Handbook, the Proteomics Handbook, and Springer Laboratory Manuals. Contains full text access to selected biomedical and nursing books.

Provides online, full-text access to Springer's journal titles as well as journals from other publishers.

Subjects include: life sciences, chemical sciences, environmental sciences, geosciences, computer science, mathematics, medicine, physics and astronomy, engineering and economics. Also includes eBooks.

Collection of over 8 thousand fulltext titles in engineering, math, and basic and applied biomedical research. Coverage is from 1967 to the present. A library of ebooks on a wide array of topics, digitized and made available online in conjunction with the original publishers.